WO2022148463A1 - Led lamp and misuse warning module - Google Patents

Led lamp and misuse warning module Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022148463A1
WO2022148463A1 PCT/CN2022/071054 CN2022071054W WO2022148463A1 WO 2022148463 A1 WO2022148463 A1 WO 2022148463A1 CN 2022071054 W CN2022071054 W CN 2022071054W WO 2022148463 A1 WO2022148463 A1 WO 2022148463A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
circuit
power supply
signal
led
module
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/071054
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
陈俊仁
熊爱明
周林
游海波
Original Assignee
嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 filed Critical 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司
Publication of WO2022148463A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022148463A1/en
Priority to US18/219,737 priority Critical patent/US20240093841A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21—LIGHTING
    • F21K—NON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21K9/00—Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
    • F21K9/20—Light sources comprising attachment means
    • F21K9/27—Retrofit light sources for lighting devices with two fittings for each light source, e.g. for substitution of fluorescent tubes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01R—MEASURING ELECTRIC VARIABLES; MEASURING MAGNETIC VARIABLES
    • G01R31/00—Arrangements for testing electric properties; Arrangements for locating electric faults; Arrangements for electrical testing characterised by what is being tested not provided for elsewhere
    • G01R31/44—Testing lamps
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01R—MEASURING ELECTRIC VARIABLES; MEASURING MAGNETIC VARIABLES
    • G01R31/00—Arrangements for testing electric properties; Arrangements for locating electric faults; Arrangements for electrical testing characterised by what is being tested not provided for elsewhere
    • G01R31/50—Testing of electric apparatus, lines, cables or components for short-circuits, continuity, leakage current or incorrect line connections
    • G01R31/52—Testing for short-circuits, leakage current or ground faults

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of LED lighting, in particular to an LED lamp and a misuse warning module.
  • LED lamps Because of its high efficiency and environmental protection, LED lamps have gradually replaced fluorescent lamps as the fourth generation of lighting products.
  • the LED straight tube light can be a T5 or T8 type lamp.
  • T5 or T8 type lamp There are potential safety hazards during installation and construction. There is a risk of electric shock if a person touches the pins on the other end.
  • installation and detection devices are generally installed on the lamp tubes.
  • the mechanical installation detection device is provided with a mechanical device on the lamp holder. Only after the lamp tube is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the pins are connected to the power to prevent electric shock during the installation process; the electronic installation detection device is installed on the lamp tube.
  • the power supply circuit is turned on for a very short moment, during the detection and conduction period, it is judged whether the lamp is installed correctly according to the current or voltage in the circuit. Open the power supply circuit to ensure human safety.
  • this type of electronic installation detection device is powered by an emergency ballast, because the emergency ballast provides a DC power supply signal, at this time, even if the installer touches the lamp pin, there is no risk of electric shock; Furthermore, the DC power supply signal may cause the installation detection module to fail to detect normally, and the LED light to fail to light normally.
  • the LED straight tube lamp can be, for example, a T5 or T8 type lamp.
  • installation and detection devices are generally installed on the lamp tubes.
  • the mechanical installation detection device is provided with a mechanical device on the lamp holder. Only after the lamp tube is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the pins are connected to the power to prevent electric shock during the installation process; the electronic installation detection device is installed on the lamp tube.
  • the power supply circuit is turned on for a very short moment, during the detection and conduction period, it is judged whether the lamp is installed correctly according to the current or voltage in the circuit. Open the power supply circuit to ensure human safety.
  • an LED lamp using a commercial power signal When an LED lamp using a commercial power signal is connected to an incompatible external power signal, such as a power signal provided by an electronic ballast or an inductive ballast, it may fail to work normally or even burn out. Generally, the specific wiring method will be clearly informed to the user in the installation manual of the luminaire, but it is still unavoidable that the user may misuse it.
  • the electronic installation detection device When the line impedance of the power supply loop is large, the electronic installation detection device will misjudge the line impedance of the power supply loop as the human body being connected to the power supply loop. In this case, the LED light cannot be lit normally.
  • the driving power used in traditional lamps is divided into inductive ballasts or electronic ballasts.
  • the LED lamps may not be able to light up or may occur. Burn down or even fire accident.
  • the present application provides a misuse warning module, which is characterized by comprising a detection circuit electrically connected to a power supply loop of an LED lamp for detecting the type of external power signal and the current level of the power supply loop to generate a detection signal; and
  • the prompting circuit is used to receive the detection signal and issue a prompt when the LED lamp is installed abnormally.
  • the detection circuit includes a first detection circuit, which is electrically connected to a power supply circuit of the LED lamp for detecting the current level of the power supply circuit, and outputs the first detection circuit when the current is greater than a set threshold. a detection signal, and outputting a second detection signal when the current is less than or equal to a set threshold.
  • the detection circuit further includes a second detection circuit electrically connected to the input end of the external power source for outputting a third detection signal when the external power signal is a DC signal.
  • the detection circuit further includes a third detection circuit, which is electrically connected to the input end of the external power source and used to output a fourth detection signal when the external power signal is provided by the electronic ballast, wherein the The third detection circuit determines whether the external power signal is provided by the electronic ballast by detecting at least one of the frequency, phase and amplitude of the external power signal.
  • the first detection circuit includes a detection pulse generation module for generating a pulse signal; a switch circuit coupled to the power supply circuit for turning on or off according to the pulse signal; and A detection and determination circuit is used to detect the current level of the power supply circuit when the switch circuit is turned on, when the current is greater than a set threshold, output the first detection signal and output the first detection signal when the current is less than or equal to the set threshold the second detection signal.
  • the switch circuit is configured to be turned on according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal.
  • the prompt circuit is used to instruct the switch circuit to be intermittently turned on according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal, so as to make the LED light flash.
  • the switch circuit is configured to be disconnected according to the second detection circuit and/or the fourth detection signal
  • the prompt circuit is configured to be disconnected according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal Issue a prompt
  • the prompt circuit includes at least one of the following: a buzzer and a prompt light, and the buzzer or the prompt light is used to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal.
  • the misuse warning module further includes a current limiting circuit, which is connected in series with the power supply loop to turn on the power supply loop according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal, and The power supply circuit is intermittently turned on according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal to make the LED lights flash.
  • the misuse warning module further includes a current limiting circuit, which is connected in series with the power supply loop to turn on the power supply loop according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal, and The power supply circuit is disconnected according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal, and the prompt circuit is configured to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal.
  • the prompt circuit includes at least one of the following: a buzzer and a prompt light, and the buzzer or the prompt light is used to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal.
  • the present application provides an LED lamp, which is characterized in that it includes at least two pins, a first pin and a second pin, for receiving an external driving signal; a power module is electrically connected to the first pin and the second pin.
  • the second pin is used to convert the power of the external driving signal to generate a driving signal; the LED module is used to receive the driving signal and light up;
  • a detection module is installed to detect the current in the power supply loop , and determine whether to limit the current of the power supply loop according to the current level of the power supply loop; and an impedance adjustment module, electrically connected to the first pin and the second pin, for adjusting the impedance of the power supply loop , so as to affect the judgment of the installation detection module, wherein when a first resistor is connected in series in the power supply loop, the installation detection module limits the current of the power supply loop, and the LED lights cannot be normally lit; when at least two or more When several of the LED lights are connected in parallel, the installation detection module does not limit the current of the power supply circuit, and
  • the resistance value of the first resistor is 100-500 ohms.
  • the impedance adjustment module includes a first capacitor, a first pin of the first capacitor is electrically connected to the first pin, and a second pin thereof is electrically connected to the first pin Two pins.
  • the capacitance of the first capacitor is 30-50nF.
  • the capacitance of the first capacitor is 47nF.
  • the installation detection module includes: a detection pulse generation module for generating a pulse signal; a switch circuit coupled to the power supply circuit for turning on or off according to the pulse signal; and A detection and determination circuit is used to detect the current level of the power supply circuit when the switch circuit is turned on, and when the current is greater than a set threshold, a first detection signal is output, wherein the switch circuit conducts a signal according to the first detection signal Pass.
  • 1A is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp of the first embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
  • 1B is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
  • 1C is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp of the third embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
  • FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp and a printed circuit board of a power module according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 5A to 5C are partial schematic diagrams of a welding process of a lamp board and a power source according to an embodiment of the present application
  • 5D is a partial schematic diagram of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5E is a plan cross-sectional view of the connection between the lamp board of the LED straight tube lamp and the circuit board of the power module according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 5F is a schematic partial structure diagram of a light source pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5G is a schematic partial structure diagram of a power pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6A is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of a lamp board and a power module of an LED straight tube lamp according to the first embodiment of the present application;
  • 6B is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of a lamp board and a power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an inner wire of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 8C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 8E is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 9A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 9B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 9C is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • 10A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 10B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 10C is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 10D is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10E is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 10F is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 10G is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 10H is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 10I is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 11A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 11C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 11D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 11E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 11F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12A is a schematic block diagram of a filter circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 12C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filtering unit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filtering unit according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 12H is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filter unit and a negative pressure elimination unit according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 13B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 13C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 13D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 13E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 14A is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 14B is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 14C is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 14D is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 15A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 15B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 15C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 15D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 15E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 15F is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 15G is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 15H is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 16A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 16C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 16D is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 16F is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power supply module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 16H is a schematic circuit block diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • 16I is a schematic configuration diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 16J is a schematic configuration diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 16K is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16L is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 16M is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 16N is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • auxiliary power supply module 160 is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to a second embodiment of the present application.
  • 16P is a signal timing diagram when the auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application is in a normal state
  • 16Q is a signal timing diagram when the auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application is in an abnormal state
  • 17A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 17F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the impedance adjustment module according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 17G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the impedance adjustment module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 19A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 19B to 19F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 19H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 19I is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 20A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 20B to 20E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 21A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • 21B to 21E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 22A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 22B to 22F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 22B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal processing unit in which a detection module is installed according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
  • 22C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal generating unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 22D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal acquisition unit installed with a detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
  • 22E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch unit in which a detection module is installed according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
  • 22F is a schematic circuit block diagram of an internal power supply detection unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 23A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 23B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 23C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 23D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 23E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module with a stroboscopic suppression function according to the first embodiment of the present application;
  • 24A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 24B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 24C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 25A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 25B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 25C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 25D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • 26A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to an eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 26B is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 28A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 28B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 29 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application.
  • 30A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 30B to FIG. 30D and FIG. 30G are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 30E is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 30F is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 30H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the twelfth embodiment of the present application.
  • 30I is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the power supply module with constant current driving, electric shock detection and dimming functions according to the first embodiment of the present application;
  • 31A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the twelfth embodiment of the present application.
  • 31B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 32A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 32B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a control circuit of an installation detection module according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 33A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 33B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 33C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 34A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 34B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit with the electric shock detection function according to the first embodiment of the present application;
  • 35A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 35B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 35C is a schematic circuit block diagram of an integrated controller according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 35D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 36 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 37A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 37B and 37C are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 37B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application;
  • 37C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection path circuit for installing a detection module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 38 is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 39A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the bias circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 39B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the bias circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 40 is a schematic circuit block diagram of a detection pulse generation module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 41A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection pulse generation module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 41B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection pulse generation module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the ballast detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 43A is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 43B is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 43C is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 43D is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 43E-FIG. 43G are schematic waveform diagrams of path detection signals according to some embodiments of the present application.
  • 44 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 45A to 45G are schematic diagrams of signal timings of power modules according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • 45H-45K are schematic diagrams of bus signal waveforms of different embodiments of the present application.
  • 46A is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 46B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the misuse warning module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 46C is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse warning module according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • 46D is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse detection circuit according to an embodiment of the application.
  • 46E is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse detection circuit according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • 46F is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power module according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • 46G is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a misuse detection circuit according to an embodiment of the application
  • 47A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 47B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a prompting circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 48A is a flow chart of the steps of the electric shock detection method according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 48B is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 48C is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 48D is a flow chart of the steps of the control method of the misuse warning module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 48E is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 48F is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module of the fourth embodiment of the application.
  • 48G is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 49A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • 49B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • 49C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 50A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 50B is a schematic circuit block diagram of a configuration mode of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 50C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 50D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 50E is a schematic circuit block diagram of a configuration mode of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 51 is a schematic block diagram of the surge protection circuit of the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 53A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • 53B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • 53C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • 53D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • 53E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • 53F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • 53G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • 53H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • 53I is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED lamp lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 55A is a schematic block diagram of the circuit of the LED lamp lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 55B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • 55C is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED lamp lighting system according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED lamp 200 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 57A is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of the LED lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 57B is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of the LED lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the present application proposes a new LED straight tube lamp to solve the problems mentioned in the background art and the above problems.
  • specific embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the following description of each embodiment of the present application is only for illustration and example, and does not represent all embodiments of the present application or limit the present application to a specific embodiment.
  • the same component numbers may be used to represent the same, corresponding or similar components, and are not limited to represent the same components.
  • each embodiment is described below by way of a plurality of embodiments. It does not mean, however, that each embodiment can only be implemented in isolation.
  • Those skilled in the art can design together feasible implementation examples according to requirements, or bring and replace replaceable components/modules in different embodiments according to design requirements.
  • the embodiments taught in this case are not limited to the aspects described in the following embodiments, but also include, where feasible, the belt exchange and arrangement among the various embodiments/components/modules, which will be described here first. .
  • FIG. 1A is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the first embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube.
  • the LED straight tube light includes a light panel 2 and a power source 5 , wherein the power source 5 can be a modular type, that is, the power source 5 can be an integrated power module.
  • the power source 5 can be an integrated single unit (for example, all the components of the power source 5 are arranged in a body) and arranged in a lamp cap at one end of the lamp tube.
  • the power supply 5 may be two separate components (eg, the components of the power supply 5 are divided into two parts) and provided in the two lamp caps, respectively.
  • the power supply 5 is shown as an example integrated into a module (hereinafter referred to as the power supply module 5, also referred to as a power supply device), and the power supply module 5 is arranged parallel to the axial direction of the lamp tube at cyd in the lamp head.
  • the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube refers to the direction in which the axis line of the lamp tube points, which is perpendicular to the end wall of the lamp cap.
  • the axial direction cyd of the power module 5 being parallel to the lamp tube means that the circuit board of the power module configured with the electronic components is parallel to the axial direction cyd, that is, the normal of the circuit board is perpendicular to the axial direction cyd.
  • the power module 5 can be set to the position where the axial cyd passes, the upper side or the lower side of the axial cyd (relative to the drawings), which is not limited in the present application.
  • FIG. 1B is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube.
  • the power module 5 is disposed in the lamp cap perpendicular to the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube, that is, parallel to the end wall of the lamp cap.
  • the drawings show that the electronic components on the power module 5 are arranged on the side facing the inside of the lamp tube, the present application is not limited to this.
  • the electronic components may also be disposed on the side close to the end wall of the lamp cap. Under this configuration, since the lamp cap can be provided with an opening, the heat dissipation effect of the electronic components can be improved.
  • the power module 5 can be further split into a configuration of multiple circuit boards, as shown in FIG. 1C , wherein FIG. 1C is a A plane cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the third embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube.
  • FIG. 1C is a A plane cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the third embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube.
  • the power supply 5 is composed of two power supply modules 5a and 5b. 5a and 5b are facing the end wall of the lamp cap and arranged in sequence along the axial direction cyd.
  • the power modules 5a and 5b respectively have independent circuit boards, and corresponding electronic components are arranged on the circuit boards, wherein the two circuit boards can be connected together through various electrical connection means, so that the overall power circuit
  • the topology is similar to the previous Figure 1A or Figure 1B embodiment.
  • the accommodating space in the lamp head can be used more effectively, so that the circuit layout space of the power modules 5 a and 5 b is larger.
  • electronic components such as capacitors and inductors
  • the circuit boards of the power modules 5a and 5b can adopt an octagonal structure to maximize the layout area.
  • the separated power modules 5a and 5b can be connected by male plugs and female plugs, or connected by wire bonding, and the outer layer of the wire can be wrapped with an insulating sleeve as a Electrical insulation protection.
  • the power modules 5a and 5b can also be directly connected together by means of rivets, solder paste bonding, welding or wire binding.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the flexible circuit board used as the light board 2 includes a circuit layer 2a with a conductive effect.
  • the LED light source 202 is arranged on the circuit layer 2a and is electrically connected to the power supply through the circuit layer 2a.
  • the circuit layer having a conductive effect may also be referred to as a conductive layer.
  • the flexible circuit board may further include a dielectric layer 2b, which is stacked with the circuit layer 2a. The area of the dielectric layer 2b and the circuit layer 2a is equal to or slightly smaller than that of the dielectric layer.
  • the circuit layer 2a is used for disposing the LED light source 202 on the surface opposite to the dielectric layer 2b.
  • the circuit layer 2a is electrically connected to a power source 5 (refer to FIG. 1 ) for allowing a DC current to pass therethrough.
  • the dielectric layer 2b is adhered to the inner peripheral surface of the lamp tube 1 through the adhesive sheet 4 on the surface opposite to the circuit layer 2a.
  • the circuit layer 2a may be a metal layer, or a power supply layer with wires (eg, copper wires).
  • the outer surfaces of the circuit layer 2a and the dielectric layer 2b may each be covered with a circuit protection layer, and the circuit protection layer may be an ink material with functions of solder resist and reflection enhancement.
  • the flexible circuit board can be a one-layer structure, that is, it is composed of only one layer of circuit layer 2a, and then the surface of the circuit layer 2a is covered with a circuit protection layer of the above-mentioned ink material, and the protection layer can be provided with openings , so that the light source can be electrically connected to the circuit layer.
  • Either a one-layer circuit layer 2a structure or a two-layer structure (a layer of circuit layer 2a and a layer of dielectric layer 2b) can be matched with a circuit protection layer.
  • the circuit protection layer can also be provided on one surface of the flexible circuit board, for example, the circuit protection layer is only provided on the side with the LED light source 202 .
  • the flexible circuit flexible board is a one-layer circuit layer structure 2a or a two-layer structure (a layer of circuit layer 2a and a layer of dielectric layer 2b), which is significantly higher than the general three-layer flexible substrate (two-layer circuit layer).
  • a dielectric layer is sandwiched between layers) is more flexible and bendable, so it can be matched with lamps 1 with special shapes (for example, non-straight lamps), and the flexible circuit soft board can be closely attached on the tube wall of lamp 1.
  • the flexible circuit board it is a better configuration for the flexible circuit board to be close to the tube wall, and the fewer layers of the flexible circuit board, the better the heat dissipation effect, and the lower the material cost, the more environmentally friendly, and the flexibility There is also a chance to improve the effect.
  • the flexible circuit board of the present application is not limited to a one-layer or two-layer circuit board.
  • the flexible circuit board includes a multilayer circuit layer 2a and a multilayer dielectric layer 2b.
  • the layer 2b and the circuit layer 2a are alternately stacked in sequence and are arranged on the side of the circuit layer 2a opposite to the LED light source 202.
  • the LED light source 202 is arranged on the uppermost layer of the multilayer circuit layer 2a, passing through the uppermost layer of the circuit layer 2a.
  • the layer is in electrical communication with the power source.
  • the axial projection length of the flexible circuit board as the light board 2 is greater than the length of the light tube.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the flexible circuit board serving as the light board 2 includes a first circuit layer 2a, a dielectric layer 2b and a second circuit layer 2c in sequence from top to bottom.
  • the thickness is greater than the thickness of the first circuit layer 2a
  • the axial projection length of the lamp board 2 is greater than the length of the lamp tube 1, and the first circuit
  • the layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c are electrically connected through two through holes 203 and 204, respectively, but the through holes 203 and 204 are not connected to each other to avoid short circuit.
  • the thickness of the second circuit layer 2c is relatively large, the effect of supporting the first circuit layer 2a and the dielectric layer 2b can be achieved. Offset or deformation to improve manufacturing yield.
  • the first circuit layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c are electrically connected, so that the circuit layout on the first circuit layer 2a can be extended to the second circuit layer 2c, so that the circuit layout on the lamp board 2 is more diverse.
  • the original circuit layout and wiring are changed from single layer to double layer.
  • the single layer area of the circuit layer on the light board 2 that is, the size in the width direction, can be further reduced, allowing the number of light boards to be solidified in batches. Can increase and improve productivity.
  • first circuit layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c which are provided with the LED light source 202 on the lamp board 2 and protrude from the end region of the lamp tube 1, can also be directly used to realize the circuit layout of the power module, so that the The power module is directly configured on the flexible circuit board.
  • connection method between the lamp board 2 and the power source 5 is preferably selected as welding.
  • FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp and a printed circuit board of a power module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific method can be to leave the output end of the power supply 5 to the power supply pad a, and leave tin on the power supply pad a, so that the thickness of the tin on the pad is increased, which is convenient for welding.
  • the light source pad b is also left on the end of the lamp board 2 , and the power pad a of the output end of the power source 5 and the light source pad b of the lamp board 2 are welded together.
  • the plane where the pads are located is defined as the front side, and the connection between the lamp board 2 and the power supply 5 is the most stable with the pads on the front of the two, but the welding indenter is typically pressed on the back of the lamp board 2 during welding.
  • the lamp board 2 is used to heat the solder, which is more prone to reliability problems. If in some embodiments, a hole is opened in the middle of the light source pad b on the front of the lamp board 2, and then the front side is superimposed on the power pad a on the front of the power source 5 for welding, the welding indenter can be directly connected to the solder. Heating and melting is relatively easy to achieve in practice.
  • the free portion 21 has the above-mentioned light source pad b, one end of which is welded with the power source 5 , the other end of which is integrally extended and connected to the fixed portion 22 , and the part between the two ends of the free portion 21 is not connected to the inner circumference of the lamp tube 1 .
  • Surface fit that is, the middle section of the free portion 21 is in a suspended state.
  • the welded end of the free portion 21 and the power source 5 will drive the free portion 21 to shrink toward the inside of the lamp tube 1 . It is worth noting that when the flexible circuit board as the light board 2 has a structure of two-layer circuit layers 2a and 2c sandwiching a dielectric layer 2b as shown in FIG.
  • the aforementioned light board 2 is not provided with the LED light source 202
  • the end area protruding from the lamp tube 1 can be used as the free portion 21, and the free portion 21 can realize the connection of the two-layer circuit layer and the circuit layout of the power module.
  • the pin design of the LED straight tube lamp it may be a structure of single pins at both ends (two pins in total) or double pins at both ends (four pins in total). Therefore, in the case of feeding power from both ends of the LED straight tube lamp, at least one pin at each end of the LED can be used to receive the external driving signal.
  • the wires arranged between each pin of the double ends are typically called live wires (generally marked as "L") and neutral/neutral wires (generally marked as "N”), and can be used for signal input and transmission .
  • FIGS. 5A to 5C are partial schematic diagrams of the welding process of the lamp board and the power source according to an embodiment of the present application, which illustrate the connection structure and connection between the lamp board 2 and the power circuit board 420 of the power source 5 Way.
  • the lamp board 2 has the same structure as the aforementioned FIG. 4 , the free part is the part at the opposite ends of the lamp board 2 used to connect the power circuit board 420 , and the fixed part is that the lamp board 2 is attached to the lamp tube part of the inner surface.
  • the light board 2 is a flexible circuit board, and the light board 2 includes a laminated circuit layer 200a and a circuit protection layer 200c.
  • the side of the circuit layer 200a away from the circuit protection layer 200c is defined as the first side 2001, and the side of the circuit protection layer 200c away from the circuit layer 200a is defined as the second side 2002, that is, the first side 2001 and the second side 2002 are Opposite sides of the light panel 2.
  • a plurality of LED light sources 202 are disposed on the first surface 2001 and are electrically connected to the circuits of the circuit layer 200a.
  • the circuit protection layer 200c is a polyimide layer (Polyimide, PI), which is not easy to conduct heat, but has the effect of protecting the circuit.
  • the first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 has a pad b on which the solder g is placed, and the welding end of the lamp board 2 has a gap f.
  • the power supply circuit board 420 includes a power supply circuit layer 420a, and the power supply circuit board 420 defines a first surface 421 and a second surface 422 opposite to each other, and the second surface 422 is located on the side of the power supply circuit board 420 with the power supply circuit layer 420a.
  • Pads a corresponding to each other are respectively formed on the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 of the power circuit board 420 , and solder g may be formed on the pads a.
  • the lamp board 2 is placed under the power circuit board 420 (refer to the direction of FIG. 5A ), that is, the first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 is connected to the The second side 422 of the power circuit board 420 .
  • the circuit protection layer 200C of the lamp board 2 is first placed on the support table 42 (the second surface 2002 of the lamp board 2 is in contact with each other). Support table 42), let the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420 and the pad b of the first side 2001 of the lamp board 2 directly and fully contact, and then press the soldering indenter 41 on the lamp board 2 and the power circuit Welding of plate 420.
  • the heat of the soldering indenter 41 will be directly transmitted to the soldering pad b of the first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 through the pad a of the first side 421 of the power circuit board 420, and the heat of the soldering indenter 41 will not be affected by
  • the influence of the circuit protection layer 200c with relatively poor thermal conductivity further improves the efficiency and stability of soldering where the pads a and b of the lamp board 2 and the power circuit board 420 meet.
  • the pad b of the first side 2001 of the lamp board 2 is in contact with the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420, and the pad a of the first side 521 of the power circuit board 520 is in contact with the welding pressure
  • the head 41 is connected.
  • the power circuit board 420 and the lamp board 2 are completely welded together by solder g, and between the virtual lines M and N in FIG.
  • 5C is the main part of the power circuit board 420 , the lamp board 2 and the solder g
  • the connection parts from top to bottom, are the pad a of the first side 421 of the power circuit board 420, the power circuit layer 420a, the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420, and the circuit layer of the lamp board 2 200a, the circuit protection layer 200c of the lamp board 2.
  • the combined structure of the power circuit board 420 and the lamp board 2 formed in this order is more stable and firm.
  • another layer of circuit protection layer may be further provided on the first surface 2001 of the circuit layer 200a, that is, the circuit layer 200a will be sandwiched between the two layers of circuit protection layers, so that the circuit layer
  • the first surface 2001 of the 200a can also be protected by a circuit protection layer, and only part of the circuit layer 200a (the part with the pad b) is exposed for connecting with the pad a of the power circuit board 420 .
  • a part of the bottom of the LED light source 202 contacts the circuit protection layer on the first surface 2001 of the circuit layer 200a, and the other part contacts the circuit layer 200a.
  • FIG. 5D is a partial schematic view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application, which illustrates a structure of an insulating sheet with hollow holes k disposed in the free part of the lamp board. Most of them are used for occasions where there are more than two pads on the lamp board 2 .
  • the width of the insulating sheet 210 is approximately the same as the width of the lamp board 2; the length of the insulating sheet 210 is 1 to 50 times the length of the pad, preferably, the length of the edge sheet is 10 times the length of the pad; the insulating sheet 210
  • the thickness of the insulating sheet 210 is 0.5 times to 5 times the thickness of the lamp board 2.
  • the thickness of the insulating sheet 210 is the same as the thickness of the lamp board 2;
  • the area of the pad preferably, the area of the hollow is between 101% and 200% of the area of the pad).
  • the insulating sheet 210 has a generally elongated or elliptical shape as a whole.
  • Such a design has the following advantages; 1. During soldering, the molten solder paste is surrounded so that it does not spread around, reducing the risk of soldering on the pads and short-circuiting between the pads; 2. The lamp board 2 is in contact with the power supply. The ink in the soldering area of the circuit board may be damaged, and the wires covered under it may be exposed.
  • An insulating sheet 210 is added in this area to reduce the risk of short circuit and improve the reliability of soldering; 3;
  • Lamp board 2 is equipped with L or N line, the straight tube lamp using this solution has strong electricity flowing through the lamp board 2 when it is energized (through the layout N line), in some cases, the voltage of the strong electricity in the welding area between the lamp board 2 and the short circuit board exceeds 300V high voltage At this time, the ink covering the surface of the lamp board 2 will be broken down by high voltage, which will cause the conductive layer under the ink to be short-circuited with the short circuit board of the power supply. In this case, by adding an insulating member (insulating sheet 210 ) in this area, the risk of short circuit is reduced, and the reliability of the straight tube lamp is improved.
  • FIG. 5E is a plan cross-sectional view of the connection between the light board of the LED straight tube lamp and the circuit board of the power module according to an embodiment of the present application, which shows A schematic diagram of the pad b41 partially offset from the pad b11.
  • the free part of the lamp board 2 is provided with three pads b10, b11, b12 (the pads are arranged in two rows in the y direction, b10 is a row, b11 and b12 are a row).
  • the circuit board (not shown) is configured with corresponding 3 pads; when soldering, the pads of the lamp board 2 and the circuit board pads of the power supply may be offset along the y direction, at this time, the matching connection pads b11 or b12
  • the configuration is offset on the corresponding pads (also called pads) of the short circuit board of the power supply.
  • the offset portion of the pad b41 (also referred to as the pad b41 ) is pressed between the pads b11 and b12 .
  • this area is configured with a conductive layer that flows through strong electricity, the ink coated on it, in some cases, the ink is broken down by high voltage, causing the conductive layer to be short-circuited with the pads of the short circuit board of the power supply.
  • the pad b10 on the light board 2 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire
  • the pad b11 corresponds to the first drive output end
  • b12 corresponds to the second drive output end.
  • the pad b10 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire
  • the pad b11 corresponds to the second driving output terminal
  • the pad b12 corresponds to the first driving output terminal.
  • the pad b10 corresponds to the first driving output terminal
  • the pad b11 corresponds to the second driving output terminal
  • b12 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire.
  • the pad b10 corresponds to the first driving output terminal
  • the pad b12 corresponds to the second driving output terminal
  • b11 corresponds to the live wire or the neutral wire.
  • FIG. 5F is a partial structural schematic diagram of the light source pads of the LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application, wherein FIG. 5F shows the configuration of the end pads of the lamp board 2 .
  • the pads b1 and b2 on the lamp board 2 are suitable for welding with the power pads of the power circuit board.
  • the pad configuration in this embodiment is applicable to a double-ended single-pin power feeding method, that is, the pads on the same side will receive external driving signals of the same polarity.
  • the pads b1 and b2 of this embodiment are connected together through an S-type fuse FS, wherein the fuse FS can be formed of, for example, a thin wire, and its impedance is quite low, so it can be regarded as the pad b1 and the b2 are shorted together.
  • the pads b1 and b2 will receive external driving signals of the same polarity.
  • the thicknesses of the traces of the pads b1 and b2 and the pad body are at least 0.4 mm, and the actual thickness can be based on the understanding of those skilled in the art. Any thickness of 0.4mm.
  • the thickness of the traces of the pads b1 and b2 and the thickness of the pad body is at least 0.4mm, when the lamp board 2 is connected to the power circuit board through the pad b1 and b2 and placed in the lamp tube , even if the copper foils at the pads b1 and b2 are broken, the extra copper foils around them can connect the light board 2 with the circuit of the power circuit board, so that the light tube can work normally.
  • FIG. 5G is a schematic partial structure diagram of a power pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the power supply circuit board may have, for example, three pads a1 , a2 and a3 , and the power supply circuit board may be, for example, a printed circuit board, but the present application is not limited thereto.
  • Each of the pads a1, a2 and a3 is provided with a plurality of through holes hp.
  • a welding substance such as solder
  • the pads a1, a2 and a3 on the power supply circuit board (hereinafter referred to as the power supply pads) It is electrically connected to the pads (eg b1, b2, hereinafter referred to as light source pads) on the light board 2, wherein the light board 2 can be, for example, a flexible circuit board.
  • the adhesive force between the power pads a1 , a2 and a3 and the light source pads is further enhanced.
  • the setting of the perforated hp can also improve the heat dissipation area, so that the thermal characteristics of the lamp tube can be improved.
  • the number of the through holes hp can be selected to be 7 or 9 according to the sizes of the pads a1 , a2 and a3 .
  • the arrangement of perforations hp may be such that 6 perforations hp are arranged on a circle, and the remaining one is arranged on the center of the circle. If a configuration of 9 perforated hp is chosen to be implemented, the perforated hp can be configured in a 3x3 array arrangement. The above configuration selection can preferably increase the contact area and improve the heat dissipation effect.
  • FIGS. 6A and 6B are three-dimensional schematic diagrams of a lamp board and a power module of an LED straight tube lamp according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • the lamp board 2 and the power source 5 fixed by welding can be replaced by a circuit board assembly 25 on which the power source module 5 is mounted.
  • the circuit board assembly 25 has a long circuit board 251 and a short circuit board 253 .
  • the long circuit board 251 and the short circuit board 253 are adhered to each other and fixed by bonding.
  • the short circuit board 253 is located near the periphery of the long circuit board 251 .
  • the short circuit board 253 has the power supply module 25, which constitutes a power supply as a whole.
  • the material of the short circuit board 253 is longer than that of the circuit board 251 , so as to support the power module 5 .
  • the long circuit board 251 may be the above-mentioned flexible circuit board or flexible substrate as the light board 2 , and has the circuit layer 2a shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the electrical connection method of the circuit layer 2a of the light board 2 and the power supply module 5 may have different electrical connection methods according to the actual usage.
  • the power module 5 and the circuit layer 2 a on the long circuit board 251 to be electrically connected to the power module 5 are both located on the same side of the short circuit board 253 , and the power module 5 is directly electrically connected to the long circuit board 251 .
  • FIG. 6A the power module 5 and the circuit layer 2 a on the long circuit board 251 to be electrically connected to the power module 5 are both located on the same side of the short circuit board 253 , and the power module 5 is directly electrically connected to the long circuit board 251 .
  • the circuit layers 2 a on the power module 5 and the long circuit board 251 to be electrically connected to the power module 5 are located on both sides of the short circuit board 253 respectively, and the power module 5 penetrates through the short circuit board 253 and the lamp.
  • the circuit layer 2a of the board 2 is electrically connected.
  • the electronic components of the power module 5 on the left short circuit board 253 may be referred to as the power module 5a, and the electronic components of the power module 5 on the right short circuit board 253 may be referred to as the power module 5b.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an inner wire of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube lamp of the present disclosure may include a lamp tube, a lamp holder (not shown in FIG. 7 ), a lamp board 2 (or a long circuit board 251 ), a short circuit board 253 , and an inductor Lgnd . Both ends of the lamp tube have at least one pin for receiving external driving signals.
  • the pin design of the LED straight tube lamp it can be a structure of single pins at both ends (two pins in total) or double pins at both ends (four pins in total).
  • At least one pin at each end of the LED can be used to receive the external driving signal.
  • the wires arranged between each pin of the double ends are typically called live wires (generally marked as "L”) and neutral/neutral wires (generally marked as "N”), and can be used for signal input and transmission .
  • the lamp caps are disposed at both ends of the lamp tube, and the short circuit boards 253 (at least part of the electronic components) on the left and right sides of the lamp tube as shown in FIG. 7 may be respectively in the lamp caps at the two ends.
  • the light board 2 is disposed in the light tube, and includes an LED module, and the LED module includes an LED unit 632 .
  • the power modules 5a and 5b are respectively electrically connected to the light board 2 through the corresponding short circuit boards 253, and the electrical connection (for example, through the pads) may include a signal terminal (L) connecting both ends of the light board 2.
  • the corresponding pins are respectively used to connect the positive and negative poles of the LED unit 632 through the driving output terminals 531 and 532, and to connect the reference ground of the lamp board 2 through the ground terminal, and the reference ground will be connected to the ground terminal GND through the ground terminal, Therefore, the level of the reference ground can be defined as the ground level.
  • the inductor Lgnd is connected in series between the fourth terminals of the short circuit board 253 at both ends of the lamp tube.
  • the inductor Lgnd may include, for example, a choke inductor or Dual-Inline-Package inductor).
  • part of the power circuit may be set in the lamp holders at both ends.
  • the extended signal wire LL and the ground wire GL need to be arranged along the light board 2 .
  • the signal wire LL is usually very close to the positive wire on the lamp board 2, so parasitic capacitance may be generated between the two.
  • the high frequency interference passing through the positive wire will be reflected on the signal wire LL through the parasitic capacitance, thereby producing a detectable electromagnetic interference (EMI) effect.
  • EMI electromagnetic interference
  • the high impedance characteristic of the inductance Lgnd at high frequencies can be used to block the signal loop of high frequency interference, thereby eliminating the positive pole High-frequency interference on the wire, thereby avoiding the EMI effect of parasitic capacitance reflected on the signal wire LL.
  • the function of the inductor Lgnd is to eliminate or reduce the EMI effect caused by the positive wire LL or be affected by EMI, thus improving the power signal transmission in the lamp tube (including the signal wire LL, the positive wire, and the negative wire) and The quality of LED straight tube lights.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the AC power source 508 (or the external power grid 508 ) is used to provide the AC power signal.
  • the AC power source 508 may be commercial power with a voltage range of 100-277V and a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 500 receives the AC power signal provided by the AC power source 508 as an external driving signal, and is driven to emit light.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 500 is a driving structure of a single-ended power supply, and the lamp cap at the same end of the lamp tube has a first pin 501 and a second pin 502 for receiving an external driving signal.
  • the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 in this embodiment are used for receiving external driving signals; in other words, when the LED straight tube light is installed on the lamp socket, the power module (not shown) in the LED straight tube light 500
  • the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are coupled (ie, electrically connected, or directly or indirectly connected) to the AC power source 508 to receive the AC power signal.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 500 of the present application can also be applied to the circuit structure of double-ended single-pin and the circuit structure of double-ended double-pin.
  • the circuit structure of the double-ended single-pin is shown in FIG. 8B , which is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 of the present embodiment are respectively placed on the opposite double-ended lamp caps of the lamp tube of the LED straight tube lamp 500 to receive external driving signals from both ends of the lamp tube.
  • the rest of the circuit connections and functions are the same as the circuit shown in Figure 8A.
  • FIGS. 8C to 8E are schematic circuit diagrams of the LED straight tube lamp lighting systems according to the third to fifth embodiments of the present application.
  • the present embodiment further includes a third pin 503 and a fourth pin 504.
  • One end of the lamp holder has a first pin 501 and a third pin 503
  • the other end of the lamp holder has a second pin 502 and a fourth pin 504 .
  • the first pin 501 , the second pin 502 , the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 can be used to receive external driving signals to drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED straight tube lamp 500 to emit light.
  • the power supply of the lamp can be realized by adjusting the configuration of the power module.
  • the power-in mode of double-ended single-pin that is, the external driving signals of different polarities are respectively given to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends, or it can be regarded as the live wire and the neutral wire of the AC power supply 508 are respectively coupled connected to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends
  • the power-in mode of double-ended single-pin that is, the external driving signals of different polarities are respectively given to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends, or it can be regarded as the live wire and the neutral wire of the AC power supply 508 are respectively coupled connected to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends
  • each of the two-end lamp caps may have one pin that is free/floating, such as the third pin 503 and the first pin in FIG. 8D .
  • the four pins 504 can be in an empty/floating state, so that the lamp can receive an external driving signal through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502, so that the power module inside the lamp can perform subsequent rectification and filtering operations .
  • the pins of the double-ended lamp cap can be short-circuited together by circuits outside the lamp tube or inside the lamp tube, for example, the first pin 501 and the third pin on the same side lamp cap.
  • the pins 503 are shorted together, and the second pin 502 and the fourth pin 504 on the same side of the lamp head are shorted together, so that the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 can also be used to receive positive or negative polarity
  • the second pin 502 and the fourth pin 504 are used to receive external driving signals of opposite polarities, so that the power module inside the lamp tube can perform subsequent rectification and filtering operations.
  • FIG. 9A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of the LED lamp in this embodiment is coupled to the LED module 50 and includes a rectifier circuit 510 (may be referred to as a first rectifier circuit 510 ), a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 .
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is coupled to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 to receive an external driving signal, rectify the external driving signal, and then output the rectified signal from the first rectification output terminal 511 and the second rectification output terminal 512 .
  • the external driving signal here can be the AC power signal provided by the AC power source 508 in FIGS.
  • the filter circuit 520 is coupled to the rectifier circuit 510 to filter the rectified signal; that is, the filter circuit 520 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the second rectifier output end 512 to receive the rectified signal, and to rectify the rectified signal.
  • the signal is filtered, and then the filtered signal is output from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 .
  • the driving circuit 530 is coupled to the filtering circuit 520 and the LED module 50 to receive the filtered signal and generate a driving signal to drive the LED module 50 at the back end to emit light.
  • the filtered signal is converted into a driving signal and output through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532; that is, the driving circuit 530 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to receive the filtered signal. , and then drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED module 50 to emit light.
  • the LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to receive driving signals to emit light.
  • the current of the LED module 50 is stable at a predetermined current value.
  • FIGS. 10A to 10I For the specific configuration of the LED module 50, reference may be made to the subsequent descriptions of FIGS. 10A to 10I .
  • FIG. 9B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of the LED lamp in this embodiment is coupled to the LED module 50 and includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and a rectifier circuit 540 (may be referred to as a second rectifier circuit 540), which can be applied to FIG. 8C
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is coupled to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 for receiving and rectifying the external driving signal transmitted by the first pin 501 and the second pin 502; the second rectifier circuit 540 is coupled to the third pin
  • the pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 are used for receiving and rectifying the external driving signal transmitted by the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 .
  • the power supply module 5 of the LED lamp may include the first rectification circuit 510 and the second rectification circuit 540 to jointly output the rectified signal at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 .
  • the filter circuit 520 is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to receive the rectified signal, filter the rectified signal, and then output the filtered signal from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522.
  • the driving circuit 530 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to receive the filtered signal, and then drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED module 50 to emit light.
  • FIG. 9C is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module of the LED lamp mainly includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 , which can also be applied to the single-ended power supply architecture of FIG. 8A or 8C or the double-ended power supply architecture of FIGS. 8B , 8D or 8E.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 may have three input terminals to be respectively coupled to the first pin 501 , the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 , and can be used for each pin
  • the signals received by 501 to 503 are rectified, wherein the fourth pin 504 can be floated or short-circuited with the third pin 503, so the configuration of the second rectifier circuit 540 can be omitted in this embodiment.
  • the operation of the rest of the circuits is substantially the same as that of FIG. 9B , so the detailed description is not repeated here.
  • the number of the first rectifier output end 511 , the second rectifier output end 512 , the first filter output end 521 , and the second filter output end 522 are all two.
  • the requirements for signal transmission among the circuits of the rectifier circuit 510 , the filter circuit 520 , the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 increase or decrease, that is, there may be one or more coupling terminals among the circuits.
  • the power module of the LED straight tube lamp shown in FIG. 9A to FIG. 9C and the following embodiments of the power module of the LED straight tube lamp are applicable to the LED straight tube lamp shown in FIG. 8A to FIG. 8E .
  • the light-emitting circuit structure that the legs are used to transmit power such as: bulb lamps, PAL lamps, intubation energy-saving lamps (PLS lamps, PLD lamps, PLT lamps, PLL lamps, etc.) .
  • Embodiments for Bulb Lamps This embodiment can be used together with the structural implementations of CN105465630A or CN105465663.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 500 of the present application When the LED straight tube lamp 500 of the present application is applied to a power-on structure with at least one pin at both ends, it can be retrofitted and then installed in a lamp drive circuit or a ballast 505 (such as an electronic ballast or an inductive ballast).
  • a ballast 505 such as an electronic ballast or an inductive ballast.
  • the lamp holder is suitable for bypassing the ballast 505 and being powered by an AC power source 508 (eg, commercial power).
  • FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the positive terminal of the LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531
  • the negative terminal is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the LED module 50 includes at least one LED unit 632 . When there are two or more LED units 632, they are connected in parallel with each other.
  • the positive terminal of each LED unit is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED module 50 to be coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 ; the negative terminal of each LED unit is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED module 50 to be coupled to the second driving output terminal 532.
  • the LED unit 632 includes at least one LED component 631 , ie, the LED light source 202 in the aforementioned embodiments.
  • the LED components 631 are connected in series in a series, the positive terminal of the first LED component 631 is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED unit 632 to which it belongs, and the negative terminal of the first LED component 631 is coupled to the next (the second LED component 631).
  • the positive terminal of the last LED component 631 is coupled to the negative terminal of the previous LED component 631 , and the negative terminal of the last LED component 631 is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED unit 632 to which it belongs.
  • the current detection signal marked as S531 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , which can be used for detecting and controlling the LED module 50 .
  • FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the positive terminal of the LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531
  • the negative terminal is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the LED module 50 of this embodiment includes at least two LED units 732 , and the positive terminal of each LED unit 732 is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED module 50 , and the negative terminal is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED module 50 .
  • the LED unit 732 includes at least two LED components 731.
  • the LED components 731 in the corresponding LED unit 732 are connected as described in FIG. 10A.
  • the negative pole of the LED component 731 is coupled to the positive pole of the next LED component 731, and the first The positive electrode of one LED component 731 is coupled to the positive electrode of the associated LED unit 732 , and the negative electrode of the last LED component 731 is coupled to the negative electrode of the associated LED unit 732 . Furthermore, the LED units 732 in this embodiment are also connected to each other. The positive electrodes of the n-th LED components 731 of each LED unit 732 are connected to each other, and the negative electrodes are also connected to each other. Therefore, the connection between the LED components of the LED module 50 of this embodiment is a mesh connection.
  • the current detection signal S531 of the present embodiment can also represent the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , and is used for detecting and controlling the LED module 50 .
  • the number of the LED components 731 included in the LED unit 732 is preferably 15-25, more preferably 18-22.
  • FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the connection relationship of the LED assembly 831 in this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10B , and three LED units are used as an example for description here.
  • the positive lead 834 and the negative lead 835 receive driving signals to provide power to each LED element 831 .
  • the positive lead 834 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 of the aforementioned filter circuit 520
  • the negative lead 835 is coupled to the aforementioned filter circuit 520 A second filtered output 522 to receive the filtered signal.
  • the nth of each LED unit is divided into the same LED group 832 in the figure.
  • the positive lead 834 is connected to the first LED assembly 831 in the leftmost three LED units, that is, the (left) positive poles of the three LED assemblies in the leftmost LED group 832 as shown in the figure, and the negative lead 835 is connected to the three LEDs.
  • the last LED assembly 831 in each LED unit ie the (right) negative pole of the three LED assemblies in the rightmost LED group 832 as shown in the figure.
  • the negative pole of the first LED component 831 of each LED unit, the positive pole of the last LED component 831 , and the positive poles and negative poles of other LED components 831 are connected through connecting wires 839 .
  • the anodes of the three LED assemblies 831 of the leftmost LED group 832 are connected to each other through the anode wire 834 , and the anodes thereof are connected to each other through the leftmost connecting wire 839 .
  • the positive poles of the three LED components 831 of the second left LED group 832 are connected to each other through the leftmost connecting wire 839 , and the negative poles thereof are connected to each other through the second left connecting wire 839 .
  • the width 836 of the connecting wire 839 connected to the positive electrode of the LED assembly 831 is smaller than the width 837 of the negative electrode connecting portion of the LED assembly 831 .
  • the area of the negative electrode connection portion is made larger than the area of the positive electrode connection portion.
  • the width 837 is smaller than the width 838 of the portion of the connecting wire 839 that is simultaneously connected to the positive electrode of one of the two LED components 831 and the negative electrode of the other, so that the area of the portion connected to the positive electrode and the negative electrode at the same time is larger than that of the portion connected to only the negative electrode. area and the area of the positive connection part. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
  • the positive lead 834 may further include a positive lead 834a
  • the negative lead 835 may further include a negative lead 835a, so that both ends of the LED module have positive and negative connection points.
  • Such a wiring structure enables other circuits of the power module of the LED lamp, such as the filter circuit 520, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540, to be coupled to the LED module through the positive and negative connection points at either or both ends. , to increase the flexibility of the configuration arrangement of the actual circuit.
  • FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the connection relationship of the LED components 931 in this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10A , and the description is given by taking three LED units and each LED unit including 7 LED components as an example.
  • the positive lead 934 and the negative lead 935 receive driving signals to provide power to each LED element 931 .
  • the positive lead 934 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 of the filter circuit 520
  • the negative lead 935 is coupled to the filter circuit 520 A second filtered output 522 to receive the filtered signal.
  • the seven LED components in each LED unit are divided into the same LED group 932 .
  • Anode lead 934 connects the (left) anode of the first (leftmost) LED assembly 931 in each LED group 932.
  • Negative lead 935 connects the (right) negative of the last (rightmost) LED assembly 931 in each LED group 932.
  • the negative pole of the left LED component 931 adjacent to the two LED components 931 is connected to the positive pole of the right LED component 931 through the connecting wire 939 .
  • the LED components of the LED group 932 are connected in series to form a string.
  • the connecting wire 939 is used to connect the negative electrode of one of the two adjacent LED components 931 and the positive electrode of the other.
  • the negative lead 935 is used to connect the negative pole of the last (rightmost) LED assembly 931 of each LED group.
  • the anode lead 934 is used to connect the anode of the first (leftmost) LED assembly 931 of each LED group. Therefore, the width and the heat dissipation area of the LED components are in descending order according to the above order. That is to say, the width 938 of the connecting wire 939 is the largest, the width 937 of the negative wire 935 connecting the negative electrode of the LED component 931 is next, and the width 936 of the positive wire 934 connecting the positive electrode of the LED component 931 is the smallest. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
  • the positive lead 934 may further include a positive lead 934a
  • the negative lead 935 may further include a negative lead 935a, so that both ends of the LED module have positive and negative connection points.
  • Such a wiring structure enables other circuits of the power module of the LED lamp, such as the filter circuit 520, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540, to be coupled to the LED module through the positive and negative connection points at either or both ends. , to increase the flexibility of the configuration arrangement of the actual circuit.
  • the traces shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D can be implemented with a flexible circuit board.
  • the flexible circuit board has a single-layer circuit layer, and the positive lead 834, the positive lead 834a, the negative lead 835, the negative lead 835a and the connection lead 839 in FIG. 10C are formed by etching, and the positive lead in FIG. 10D is formed 934 , the positive lead 934a, the negative lead 935, the negative lead 935a, and the connecting lead 939.
  • FIG. 10E is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the connection relationship of the LED assembly 1031 of this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the configuration of the positive electrode lead and the negative electrode lead (not shown) and the connection relationship with other circuits in this embodiment are substantially the same as those shown in FIG. 10C , and the difference between the two is that the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the arrangement of the LED components 831 (that is, the positive electrodes and negative electrodes of each LED component 831 are arranged along the extending direction of the wires) is changed to the vertical arrangement of the LED components 1031 (that is, the connection direction of the positive electrodes and the negative electrodes of the LED components 1031 and the wires are arranged in the vertical direction).
  • the extending direction is vertical), and the arrangement of the connecting wires 1039 is adjusted correspondingly based on the arrangement direction of the LED components 1031 .
  • the connecting wire 1039_2 includes a first long side portion with a narrow width 1037 , a second long side portion with a wider width 1038 , and a turning portion connecting the two long side portions.
  • the connecting wire 1039_2 can be set in a right-angled z-shape, that is, the connection between each long side portion and the turning portion is at a right angle.
  • the first long side portion of the connecting wire 1039_2 is correspondingly arranged with the second long side portion of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_3; similarly, the second long side portion of the connecting wire 1039_2 is corresponding to the first long side portion of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_1 The corresponding configuration of the edge.
  • the connecting wires 1039 are arranged in the extending direction of the extended sides, and the first long side of each connecting wire 1039 is arranged corresponding to the second long side of the adjacent connecting wire 1039;
  • the second long sides of the connecting wires 1039 are arranged correspondingly with the first long sides of the adjacent connecting wires 1039 , so that the connecting wires 1039 as a whole are configured to have a uniform width.
  • the relative configuration of the LED components 1031 and the connecting wires 1039 is also described with the connecting wires 1039_2.
  • the anodes of some LED components 1031 (for example, the four LED components 1031 on the right side) are connected to the connecting wires.
  • the first long side of 1039_2 is connected to each other through the first long side; and the negative electrode of this part of the LED components 1031 is connected to the second long side of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_3 and is connected to each other through the second long side. connected to each other.
  • the positive poles of another part of the LED components 1031 are connected to the first long side of the connecting wire 1039_1, and the negative poles are connected to the second long side of the connecting wire 1039_2.
  • the positive electrodes of the four LED components 1031 on the left are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_1, and the negative electrodes thereof are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_2.
  • the positive electrodes of the four LED components 831 on the right are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_2, and the negative electrodes thereof are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_3.
  • the four LED components 1031 on the left can be simulated as the first LED components of the four LED units in the LED module
  • the four LED components 1031 on the right can simulate the LED as the second LED component of the four LED units in the LED module, and so on to form a mesh connection as shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the LED components 1031 are changed to a vertical configuration in this embodiment, which can increase the gap between the LED components 1031 and widen the wiring of the connecting wires, thereby avoiding the need for light
  • the width 1037 of the first long side portion of the positive electrode connection portion smaller than the width 1038 of the second long side portion of the negative electrode connection portion, the area of the LED element 1031 at the negative electrode connection portion can be made larger than that of the positive electrode connection portion. part of the area. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
  • FIG. 10F is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 10E , and the difference between the two is only that the connecting wires 1139 of this embodiment are implemented by non-right-angle Z-shaped wires.
  • the turning portion forms an oblique wiring, so that the connection between each long side portion of the connecting wire 1139 and the turning portion is a non-right angle.
  • the way of arranging the connecting wires obliquely in this embodiment can Avoid problems such as displacement and offset of LED components due to uneven pads during LED component placement.
  • the connecting wire 1139 of this embodiment can also be configured such that the width 1137 of the long side of the connecting portion of the positive electrode is smaller than the width 1138 of the long side of the connecting portion with the negative electrode, thereby achieving the effect of improving heat dissipation.
  • the vertical wiring (as shown in Figures 10C to 10E) will produce regular white oil depressions at the turns of the wires, so that the connecting wires are The tin on the LED component pads is relatively in a raised position. Since the surface where the tin is applied is not a flat surface, when the LED components are mounted, the uneven surface may prevent the LED components from being attached to the predetermined position. Therefore, in this embodiment, by adjusting the vertical wiring to the oblique wiring configuration, the copper foil strength of the entire wiring can be made uniform, and no protrusion or unevenness occurs in a specific position, thereby making the LED components 1131 can be attached to the wire more easily, improving the reliability of the lamp assembly. In addition, since each LED unit in this embodiment only travels the diagonal substrate once on the lamp board, the strength of the whole lamp board can be greatly improved, thereby preventing the lamp board from bending and shortening the length of the lamp board.
  • copper foil can also be covered around the pads of the LED components 1131 to offset the offset of the LED components 1131 during mounting and avoid short circuits caused by solder balls.
  • FIG. 10G is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 10C , and the difference between the two is mainly that the wiring at the corresponding position between the connecting wire 1239 and the connecting wire 1239 in this embodiment (not at the pad of the LED component 1231 ) is changed to be inclined. Traces.
  • the strength of the copper foil of the whole wiring can be made uniform, and there will be no protrusion or unevenness in a specific position, so that the LED components 1131 It can be attached to the wire more easily, which improves the reliability of the lamp assembly.
  • the color temperature point CTP can also be uniformly set between the LED components 1231 , as shown in FIG. 10H , which is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application .
  • FIG. 10H is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application .
  • the color temperature point CTP at the corresponding position on each wire 1234 and 1239 can be on the same line. In this way, when tinning, the entire LED module can be covered with only a few tapes (as shown in the figure, if each wire is set with 3 color temperature points, only 3 tapes are needed) to cover all the LED modules. Color temperature point to improve the smoothness of the assembly process and save assembly time.
  • FIG. 10I is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the wiring of the LED module shown in FIG. 10C is changed from a single-layer circuit layer to a double-layer circuit layer, mainly by changing the positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a to the second circuit layer. described as follows.
  • the flexible circuit board has double-layer circuit layers, including a first circuit layer 2a, a dielectric layer 2b and a second circuit layer 2c.
  • the first wiring layer 2a and the second wiring layer 2c are electrically isolated by a dielectric layer 2b.
  • a positive wire 834, a negative wire 835 and a connecting wire 839 in FIG. 10I are formed on the first circuit layer 2a of the flexible circuit board by etching, so as to electrically connect the plurality of LED components 831, for example, electrically connect the plurality of LED components 831.
  • the LED components are formed into a mesh-connected LED group 832, and the positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a of the second circuit layer 2c are etched to electrically connect (the filter output end of) the filter circuit.
  • the positive lead 834 and the negative lead 835 of the first circuit layer 2a of the flexible circuit board have layer connection points 834b and 835b.
  • the positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a of the second wiring layer 2c have layer connection points 834c and 835c.
  • the layer connection points 834b and 835b are located opposite to the layer connection points 834c and 835c for electrically connecting the positive electrode lead 834 and the positive electrode lead 834a, and the negative electrode lead 835 and the negative electrode lead 835a.
  • connection points 834c and 835c of the exposed layer at the positions of the layer connection points 834b and 835b of the first layer of the circuit layer with the lower current borrowing layer, and then solder them with solder to make the positive electrode lead 834 and the positive electrode lead.
  • 834a, and the negative lead 835 and the negative lead 835a are electrically connected to each other.
  • the positive lead 934a and the negative lead 935a can also be changed to the second wiring layer to form a wiring structure of double wiring layers.
  • the thickness of the second conductive layer of the flexible circuit board with double-layer conductive layers or circuit layers is preferably thicker than that of the first conductive layer, so as to reduce the thickness of the positive electrode lead and the negative electrode lead. Line loss (voltage drop) on .
  • the flexible circuit board with double-layer conductive layer can reduce the size of the flexible circuit board because the positive lead and negative lead at both ends are moved to the second layer. width.
  • narrower substrates have more discharges than wider substrates, thus improving the production efficiency of LED modules.
  • the flexible circuit board with the double-layer conductive layer is relatively easy to maintain the shape, so as to increase the reliability of production, for example, the accuracy of the welding position during the welding of LED components.
  • the present application also provides an LED straight tube lamp, at least part of the electronic components of the power module of the LED straight tube lamp are arranged on the lamp board: that is, using PEC (Printed Electronic Circuits, PEC: Printed Electronic Circuits) , the technology prints or embeds at least some of the electronic components on the light board.
  • PEC Printed Electronic Circuits
  • PEC Printed Electronic Circuits
  • all the electronic components of the power module are arranged on the light board.
  • the production process is as follows: substrate preparation (flexible printed circuit board preparation) ⁇ printing metal nano-ink ⁇ printing passive components/active devices (power modules) ⁇ drying / sintering ⁇ printing interlayer connection bumps ⁇ Spraying insulating ink ⁇ spraying metal nano ink ⁇ spraying passive components and active devices (and so on to form the included multi-layer board) ⁇ spraying surface welding pad ⁇ spraying solder resist to weld LED components.
  • the power modules are arranged at both ends of the light board, so as to minimize the influence of the heat generated by its operation on the LED components. In this embodiment, the overall reliability of the power module is improved due to the reduction of welding.
  • the electronic components of the power module can also be arranged on the lamp board by means of embedding. That is, the electronic components are embedded in the flexible lamp board in an embedded manner.
  • it can be realized by methods such as resistive/capacitive copper clad laminates (CCL) or inks related to screen printing; or by using inkjet printing technology to realize the method of embedding passive components, that is, using inkjet printers.
  • CCL resistive/capacitive copper clad laminates
  • inks related to screen printing or by using inkjet printing technology to realize the method of embedding passive components, that is, using inkjet printers.
  • the electronic components embedded in the light panel include resistors, capacitors and inductors; in other embodiments, active components are also suitable.
  • the power supply module is reasonably arranged to optimize the design of the lamp head (due to the partial use of embedded resistors and capacitors, this embodiment saves valuable printed circuit board surface space, reduces the size of the printed circuit board and reduces its Weight and thickness.
  • the reliability of the power module is also improved by eliminating the solder joints of these resistors and capacitors (the solder joints are the most prone to failure on the printed circuit board).
  • the wires on the printed circuit board will be shortened. length and allow for a more compact device layout, thus improving electrical performance).
  • the method of embedded capacitance is usually used, using a concept called distributed capacitance or planar capacitance.
  • a very thin insulating layer is pressed on top of the copper layer. Usually in the form of power plane / ground plane pair. The very thin insulating layer keeps the distance between the power plane and the ground plane very small.
  • Such capacitance can also be achieved with conventional metallized holes. Basically, this method creates a large parallel plate capacitor on the board.
  • Some high-capacitance products some are distributed capacitive type, others are discrete embedded. Higher capacitance is achieved by filling the insulating layer with barium titanate, a material with a high dielectric constant.
  • resistor adhesives It is a resin doped with conductive carbon or graphite as a filler, screen-printed to the desired location, then processed and laminated into the interior of the circuit board. Resistors are connected to other electronic components on the circuit board by metallized holes or microvias.
  • Another method is the Ohmega-Ply method: it is a bimetallic layer structure - the copper layer and a thin nickel alloy layer make up the resistor elements, which form a layered resistor relative to the bottom layer.
  • Various nickel resistors with copper terminals are then formed by etching the copper and nickel alloy layers. These resistors are laminated into the inner layers of the circuit board.
  • the wires are directly printed on the inner wall of the glass tube (arranged in a line shape), and the LED components are directly attached to the inner wall, so as to be electrically connected to each other through the wires.
  • the chip form of the LED component is directly attached to the wire of the inner wall (connecting points are set at both ends of the wire, and the LED component is connected to the power module through the connection point), and after the attachment, drop phosphor powder on the chip.
  • the LED straight tube light can produce white light when it works, and it can also be light of other colors).
  • the luminous efficiency of the LED assembly of the present application is 80lm/W or more, preferably 120lm/W or more, and more preferably 160lm/W or more.
  • the LED component can be a monochromatic LED chip whose light is mixed into white light by phosphor powder, and the main wavelengths of its spectrum are 430-460nm and 550-560nm, or 430-460nm, 540-560nm and 620-640nm.
  • connection mode of the LED module 50 in the embodiment of FIG. 10A to FIG. 10I is not limited to the implementation of the straight tube lamp, but can be applied to various types of LED lamps powered by AC power (ie, no Ballast LED lamps), such as LED bulbs, LED filament lamps or integrated LED lamps, the application is not limited to this.
  • the electronic components of the power module may be provided on the lamp board or on a circuit board within the lamp head.
  • some of the capacitors in the embodiment adopt chip capacitors (eg ceramic chip capacitors), which are arranged on the lamp board or the circuit board in the lamp holder.
  • the chip capacitors set in this way will emit obvious noise due to the piezoelectric effect during use, which affects the comfort of customers.
  • a suitable hole or slot can be drilled directly under the chip capacitor, which can change the composition of the chip capacitor and the circuit board carrying the chip capacitor under the piezoelectric effect Vibration system so as to significantly reduce the noise emitted.
  • the edge or perimeter of this hole or slot can be approximately circular, oval or rectangular in shape, for example, and is located in the conductive layer in the lamp board or in the circuit board in the lamp cap, below the chip capacitor.
  • FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the rectifier circuit 610 is a bridge rectifier circuit, including a first rectifier diode 611 , a second rectifier diode 612 , a third rectifier diode 613 and a fourth rectifier diode 614 for full-wave rectification of the received signal.
  • the anode of the first rectifier diode 611 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512
  • the cathode is coupled to the second pin 502 .
  • the anode of the second rectifier diode 612 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the first pin 501 .
  • the anode of the third rectifier diode 613 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the anode of the rectifier diode 614 is coupled to the first pin 501 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the operation of the rectifier circuit 610 is described as follows.
  • the AC signal is in the positive half-wave, the AC signal flows through the first pin 501, the rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512, the first rectifier diode 611 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence.
  • the second pin 502 flows out afterward.
  • the AC signal When the AC signal is in the negative half-wave, the AC signal flows through the second pin 502, the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier diode in sequence 612 and pin 501 flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal of the rectification circuit 610 is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 . According to the above operation description, the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit 610 is a full-wave rectified signal.
  • the operation of the rectifier circuit 610 is described as follows.
  • the DC signal passes through the first pin 501 , the rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence. flows in, and flows out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 611 and the second pin 502 in sequence.
  • the AC signal passes through the second pin 502, the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal in sequence 511 flows in, and flows out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the second rectifier diode 612 and the first pin 501 in sequence.
  • the positive pole of the rectified signal of the rectifier circuit 610 is located at the first rectification output terminal 511
  • the negative pole is located at the second rectified output terminal 512 .
  • the rectifying circuit 610 in this embodiment can correctly output the rectified signal regardless of whether the received signal is an AC signal or a DC signal.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the rectifier circuit 710 includes a first rectifier diode 711 and a second rectifier diode 712 for half-wave rectification of the received signal.
  • the anode of the first rectifier diode 711 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the anode of the second rectifier diode 712 is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 , and the cathode is coupled to the first pin 501 .
  • the second rectified output terminal 512 may be omitted or grounded according to practical applications.
  • the signal level of the AC signal input at the first pin 501 is higher than the signal level input at the second pin 502 .
  • both the first rectifier diode 711 and the second rectifier diode 712 are in a reverse-biased off state, and the rectifier circuit 710 stops outputting the rectified signal.
  • the signal level of the AC signal input at the first pin 501 is lower than the signal level input at the second pin 502 .
  • the first rectifier diode 711 and the second rectifier diode 712 are both in the forward-biased conduction state, and the AC signal flows in through the first rectifier diode 711 and the first rectifier output terminal 511, and is transmitted by the second rectifier output terminal 512 or the first rectifier output terminal 511. Another circuit or ground of the LED light flows out.
  • the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit 710 is a half-wave rectified signal.
  • circuit 540 when the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 of the rectifier circuit shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B are changed to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504, they can be used as the second rectifier shown in FIG. 9B .
  • circuit 540 More specifically, in an exemplary embodiment, when the full-wave/full-bridge rectifier circuit 610 shown in FIG. 11A is applied to the double-terminal input lamp of FIG. 9B , the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540 The configuration can be shown in Figure 11C.
  • FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the structure of the rectifier circuit 840 is the same as that of the rectifier circuit 810, and both are bridge rectifier circuits.
  • the rectifier circuit 810 includes the first to fourth rectifier diodes 611-614, the configurations of which are as described in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 11A .
  • the rectifier circuit 840 includes a fifth rectifier diode 641 , a sixth rectifier diode 642 , a seventh rectifier diode 643 and an eighth rectifier diode 644 for full-wave rectification of the received signal.
  • the anode of the fifth rectifier diode 641 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the fourth pin 504 .
  • the anode of the sixth rectifier diode 642 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the third pin 503 .
  • the anode of the seventh rectifier diode 643 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the anode of the rectifier diode 614 is coupled to the third pin 503 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the rectifier circuits 840 and 810 have corresponding configurations, and the only difference between the two is that the input end of the rectifier circuit 810 (here can be compared to the first rectifier circuit 510 in FIG. 9B ) is coupled to the first pin 501 With the second pin 502 , the input end of the rectifier circuit 840 (here can be compared to the second rectifier circuit 540 in FIG. 9B ) is coupled to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 .
  • the present embodiment adopts the structure of two full-wave rectifier circuits to realize the circuit structure of double terminals and double pins.
  • the rectifier circuit of the embodiment of FIG. 10C although it is implemented in the configuration of double-ended double-pin, in addition to the power supply mode of double-ended double-pin feeding, whether it is single-ended feeding or
  • the power supply mode of the double-ended single-pin can be used to supply power to the LED straight tube lamp through the circuit structure of this embodiment.
  • the specific operation instructions are as follows:
  • the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , or applied to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 .
  • the rectifier circuit 810 will perform full-wave rectification on the external driving signal according to the operation method described in the embodiment of FIG. 9A, while the rectifier circuit 840 will not operate.
  • the rectifier circuit 840 will perform full-wave rectification on the external drive signal according to the operation method described in the embodiment of FIG. 9A, and the rectifier circuit 810 will not work.
  • the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the fourth pin 504 , or applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 .
  • the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the fourth pin 504 and the external driving signal is an AC signal
  • the AC signal passes through the first pin 501 and the fourth pin in sequence.
  • the rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 flow in and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the fifth rectifier diode 641 and the fourth pin 504 in sequence.
  • the AC signal flows through the fourth pin 504 , the seventh rectifier diode 643 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence.
  • the diode 612 and the first pin 501 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the anode of the rectified signal is located at the first rectified output end 511 , and the negative electrode is located at the second rectified output end 512 .
  • the second rectifier diode 612 and the fourth rectifier diode 614 in the rectifier circuit 810 cooperate with the fifth rectifier diode 641 and the seventh rectifier diode 643 in the rectifier circuit 840 to perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectifier The rear signal is a full-wave rectified signal.
  • the external driving signal is applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal
  • the AC signal passes through the third pin in sequence.
  • the eighth rectifier diode 644 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 then flow in, and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 611 and the second pin 502 in sequence.
  • the AC signal flows through the second pin 502 , the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then passes through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the sixth rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence.
  • the diode 642 and the third pin 503 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 .
  • the first rectifier diode 611 and the third rectifier diode 613 in the rectifier circuit 810 cooperate with the sixth rectifier diode 642 and the eighth rectifier diode 644 in the rectifier circuit 840 to perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectifier The rear signal is a full-wave rectified signal.
  • the individual operations of the rectifier circuits 810 and 840 can be referred to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 11A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the rectified signals generated by the rectification circuits 810 and 840 are superimposed on the first rectified output terminal 511 and the second rectified output terminal 512 and then output to the back-end circuit.
  • the configuration of the rectifier circuit 510 may be as shown in FIG. 11D .
  • FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the rectifier circuit 910 includes first to fourth rectifier diodes 911-914, the configurations of which are as described in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 11A.
  • the rectifier circuit 910 further includes a fifth rectifier diode 915 and a sixth rectifier diode 916 .
  • the anode of the fifth rectifier diode 915 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512
  • the cathode is coupled to the third pin 503 .
  • the anode of the sixth rectifier diode 916 is coupled to the third pin 503 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the fourth pin 504 is in a floating state here.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 of this embodiment can be regarded as a rectifier circuit having three groups of bridge arm units, and each group of bridge arm units can provide an input signal receiving end.
  • the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 form the first bridge arm unit, which correspondingly receives the signal on the second pin 502;
  • the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 form the second bridge arm
  • the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 form a third bridge arm unit corresponding to receive the signal on the third pin 503 .
  • full-wave rectification can be performed.
  • the power supply modes of single-ended power feeding, double-ended single-pin power feeding, and double-ended double-pin power feeding are also compatible.
  • the specific operation instructions are as follows:
  • the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502.
  • the operations of the first to fourth rectifier diodes 911-914 are as described in the embodiment of FIG. 11A.
  • the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 do not operate.
  • the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 , or applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 .
  • the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal
  • the AC signal passes through the first pin 501 and the fourth pin in sequence.
  • the rectifier diode 914 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 flow in and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the third pin 503 in sequence.
  • the AC signal flows through the third pin 503 , the sixth rectifier diode 916 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence.
  • the diode 912 and the first pin 501 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 .
  • the second rectifier diode 912 , the fourth rectifier diode 914 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 in the rectifier circuit 910 perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectified signal is full-wave rectified signal.
  • the external driving signal is applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal
  • the AC signal passes through the third pin in sequence. 503 , the sixth rectifier diode 916 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 then flow in, and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 911 and the second pin 502 in sequence.
  • the AC signal is in the negative half-wave period, the AC signal flows through the second pin 502 , the third rectifier diode 913 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then passes through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the fifth rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence.
  • the diode 915 and the third pin 503 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 .
  • the first rectifier diode 911 , the third rectifier diode 913 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 in the rectifier circuit 910 perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectified signal is full-wave rectified signal.
  • the operations of the first to fourth rectifier diodes 911 - 914 can be referred to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 11A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the signal polarity of the third pin 503 is the same as that of the first pin 501
  • the operation of the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 is similar to that of the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 (ie, first bridge arm unit).
  • the operation of the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 is similar to that of the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 ( That is, the second bridge arm unit).
  • FIG. 11E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11E is substantially the same as FIG. 11D , the difference between the two is that the input end of the first rectifier circuit 910 in FIG. 11E is further coupled to the terminal conversion circuit 941 .
  • the endpoint conversion circuit 941 of this embodiment includes fuses 947 and 948 .
  • One end of the fuse 947 is coupled to the first pin 501 , and the other end is coupled to the common node of the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 (ie, the input end of the first bridge arm unit).
  • One end of the fuse 948 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the other end is coupled to the common node of the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 (ie, the input end of the second bridge arm unit). Therefore, when the current flowing through any one of the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 is higher than the rated current of the fuses 947 and 948, the fuses 947 and 948 will be blown and open accordingly, thereby achieving the overcurrent protection. Function.
  • the rectifier circuit of this embodiment can continue to be based on the dual It continues to operate in the power supply mode of a single pin.
  • FIG. 11F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11F is substantially the same as FIG. 11D , the difference between the two is that the two pins 503 and 504 in FIG. 11F are connected together by thin wires 917 .
  • the rectifier circuit of this embodiment is all the same. Works normally.
  • the thin wire 917 of this embodiment can be reliably blown. Therefore, when the lamp tube is inserted into the correct lamp socket, the The straight tube lamp of this rectification circuit can still maintain normal rectification work.
  • the rectifier circuits of the embodiments of FIGS. 11C to 11F can be compatible with the scenarios of single-ended power feeding, double-ended single-pin power feeding, and double-ended double-pin power feeding, thereby improving the compatibility of the application environment of the overall LED straight tube lamp. sex.
  • the circuit configuration inside the lamp tube in the embodiment of FIGS. 11D to 11F only needs to set three pads to connect to the corresponding lamp head pins. Enhancement has a significant contribution.
  • FIG. 12A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the filter circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the drawing of the first rectifier circuit 510 is only used to represent the connection relationship, and the filter circuit 520 does not include the first rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the filter circuit 520 includes a filter unit 523, which is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to receive the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit, and to filter out the ripple in the rectified signal to output the filtered signal. . Therefore, the waveform of the filtered signal is smoother than that of the rectified signal.
  • the filter circuit 520 may further include a filter unit 524, which is coupled between the rectifier circuit and the corresponding pins, for example, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the first pin 501, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second pin 502, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the first pin 501, The two rectifier circuits 540 and the third pin 503 and the second rectifier circuit 540 and the fourth pin 504 are used to filter specific frequencies to filter out specific frequencies of the external driving signal.
  • the filter unit 524 is coupled between the first pin 501 and the first rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the filter circuit 520 may further include a filter unit 525, which is coupled between one of the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 and one of the diodes of the first rectifier circuit 510 or between the third pin 503 and the fourth connection.
  • a filter unit 525 is coupled between one of the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 and one of the diodes of the first rectifier circuit 510 or between the third pin 503 and the fourth connection.
  • One of the pins 504 and one of the diodes of the second rectifier circuit 540 are used for reducing or filtering electromagnetic interference (EMI).
  • the filter unit 525 is coupled between the first pin 501 and a diode (not shown) of one of the first rectifier circuits 510 .
  • the filter circuit 520 may further include a negative pressure elimination unit 526 .
  • the negative pressure eliminating unit 526 is coupled to the filtering unit 523, and is used for eliminating the negative pressure that may be generated when the filtering unit 523 resonates, so as to avoid damage to the chip or the controller in the driving circuit of the subsequent stage.
  • the filtering unit 523 itself is usually a circuit formed by a combination of resistance, capacitance or inductance, wherein due to the characteristics of capacitance and inductance, the filtering unit 523 exhibits a purely resistance property (ie, the resonance point) at a specific frequency. .
  • the signal received by the filtering unit 523 will be amplified and output, so the phenomenon of signal oscillation may be observed at the output end of the filtering unit 523 .
  • the oscillation amplitude is so large that the trough level is lower than the ground level, a negative pressure will be generated on the filter output terminals 521 and 522, and the negative pressure will be applied to the circuit of the subsequent stage and cause the risk of damage to the subsequent stage circuit.
  • the negative pressure eliminating unit 528 can conduct an energy release circuit when the negative pressure is generated, so that the reverse current caused by the negative pressure can be released through the energy release circuit and returned to the bus, thereby preventing the reverse current from flowing into the subsequent circuit.
  • filtering units 524 and 525 and the negative pressure removing unit 526 may be added or omitted according to actual application conditions, they are represented by dotted lines in the figure.
  • FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the filter unit 623 includes a capacitor 625 .
  • One end of the capacitor 625 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the first filter output end 521 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 , so that the first rectifier output end 511 and the second filter output end 522 are connected to each other.
  • the rectified signal output by the rectified output 512 is subjected to low-pass filtering to filter out high frequency components in the rectified signal to form a filtered signal, which is then output from the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 .
  • FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the filter unit 723 is a ⁇ -type filter circuit, and includes a capacitor 725 , an inductor 726 and a capacitor 727 .
  • One end of the capacitor 725 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and is coupled to the first filter output end 521 through the inductor 726 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 .
  • the inductor 726 is coupled between the first rectifying output terminal 511 and the first filtering output terminal 521 .
  • One end of the capacitor 727 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the first filter output end 521 through the inductor 726 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 .
  • the filter unit 723 has more inductors 726 and capacitors 727 than the filter unit 623 shown in FIG. 12B . Also, like the capacitor 725, the inductor 726 and the capacitor 727 have low-pass filtering functions. Therefore, compared with the filtering unit 623 shown in FIG. 12B , the filtering unit 723 of this embodiment has better high-frequency filtering capability, and the waveform of the output filtered signal is smoother.
  • the filtering unit 723 may further include an inductor 728 , wherein the inductor 728 is connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 .
  • the inductance values of the inductors 726 and 728 in the above embodiment are preferably selected from the range of 10nH-10mH.
  • the capacitances of the capacitors 625, 725 and 727 are preferably selected from the range of 100pF-1uF.
  • FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12C , the difference is that the filter unit 823 of this embodiment further includes a voltage control element BDs1 in addition to the inductor 826 and the capacitors 825 and 827 .
  • the voltage control element BDs1 is connected in parallel with the inductor 826, and is turned on or off in response to the voltage difference across the inductor 826, wherein the voltage control element BDs1 only has a voltage difference between the two ends of the inductor greater than a set value (this value is based on the voltage control element BDs1). determined by the component parameters) is turned on.
  • the voltage control component BDs1 can be instantly turned on in response to the instantaneous overvoltage to absorb the sudden increase to avoid the damage of the post-stage circuit caused by the surge current.
  • the voltage control device BDs1 is shown as a bidirectional trigger diode (or a discharge tube) as an example, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • the filtering unit 823 may also add an inductor (eg, the inductor 728 in FIG. 12C ) connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 .
  • the filter unit 823 may further include a voltage control element (not shown) arranged in parallel with the newly added inductor, so as to prevent the subsequent circuit from being damaged due to surge current.
  • the connection relationship between the added inductor and the voltage control component may refer to the connection relationship between the inductor 826 and the voltage control component BDs1.
  • FIG. 12E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12D , the difference is that the filter unit 923 of this embodiment further includes a blocking element Ds1 in addition to the inductor 926 , capacitors 925 and 927 , and the voltage control element BDs1 .
  • the blocking component Ds1 and the voltage control component BDs1 are connected in series to limit the voltage control component BDs1, so that the voltage control component BDs1 can only be turned on in a specific state. Specifically, in the configuration where only the voltage control component BDs1 is provided (as shown in FIG.
  • the voltage of the first end (ie, the end connected to the first rectifier output end 511 ) of the inductor 826 is greater than that of the second end ( That is, the voltage at the end connected to the first filter output end 521 exceeds the set value (hereinafter referred to as the first state), or the voltage at the second end of the inductor 826 is greater than the voltage at the first end and exceeds the set value (hereinafter referred to as the first state) two states), will make the voltage control component BDs1 enter the conducting state.
  • the voltage control component BDs1 and the blocking component Ds1 are provided at the same time (as shown in FIG.
  • the current limiting component Ds1 when the first state occurs, the current limiting component Ds1 will be in a disconnected state, so that the voltage control component BDs1 and the current limiting component Ds1 The connected end is in a floating state (or regarded as being electrically separated from the second end of the inductor 926 ), so the voltage control component BDs1 cannot be turned on in response to the occurrence of the first state; when the second state occurs, the current limiting component Ds1 will be in a conducting state, so that the end connected to the voltage control component BDs1 and the current limiting component Ds1 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926, so that the voltage control component BDs1 is turned on in response to the occurrence of the second state, To discharge/dissipate surge energy.
  • the current limiting component Ds1 may be implemented using a diode (described below as a diode Ds1 ).
  • the anode of the diode Ds1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926, and the cathode of the diode Ds1 is electrically connected to the voltage control device BDs1.
  • the diode Ds1 when the first state occurs, the diode Ds1 is in a reverse bias state, so the diode Ds1 is kept off to make one end of the voltage control device BDs1 float; when the second state occurs, the diode Ds1 is in a reverse bias state. In a forward bias state, the diode Ds1 is turned on so that one end of the voltage control device BDs1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926 .
  • the filtering unit 923 may also add an inductor (eg, the inductor 728 in FIG. 12C ) connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 .
  • the filter unit 823 may further include a voltage control element (not shown) and a current limiting element (not shown) arranged in parallel with the newly added inductor, so as to prevent the subsequent circuit from being damaged due to surge current.
  • the connection relationship between the added inductor, the voltage control component, and the current limiting component may refer to the connection relationship among the inductor 926 , the voltage control component BDs1 , and the current limiting component Ds1 .
  • FIG. 12F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the filter unit 624 includes an inductor 626 .
  • the first end of the inductor 626 is coupled to the first pin 501
  • the second end of the inductor 626 is coupled to the first rectification input end of the rectifier circuit 610 , so as to perform low-pass filtering on the signal input from the first pin 501 to The high frequency components in the power signal are filtered out and then supplied to the rectifier circuit 610 .
  • FIG. 12G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12F , the difference is that the filter unit 724 of this embodiment further includes a voltage control element BDs2 and a blocking element Ds2 in addition to the inductor 626 .
  • the voltage control component BDs2 and the blocking component Ds2 are connected in series.
  • the first end of the voltage control element BDs2 is electrically connected to the first end of the inductor 626
  • the second end of the voltage control element BDs2 is electrically connected to the second end of the choke element Ds2
  • the first end of the choke element Ds2 is electrically connected The second end of the inductor 626 .
  • the current limiting component Ds2 when the first state occurs, the current limiting component Ds2 will be in a disconnected state, so that the end connected to the voltage control component BDs2 and the current limiting component Ds2 is in a floating state (or regarded as the first connection with the inductor 626 ).
  • the two terminals are electrically separated), so the voltage control component BDs2 cannot be turned on in response to the occurrence of the first state; when the second state occurs, the current limiting component Ds2 will be in a conducting state, so that the voltage control component BDs2 and the current limiting component One end connected to Ds2 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 626 , so that the voltage control element BDs2 is turned on in response to the occurrence of the second state, so as to discharge/dissipate the surge energy.
  • FIG. 12H is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filter unit and a negative pressure elimination unit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the negative pressure elimination unit may be implemented by the diode 728, but the present application is not limited to this.
  • the filter unit 723 does not resonate, the first filter output terminal 521 will have a high level relative to the second filter output terminal 522, so the diode 728 will be turned off and no current will flow.
  • the filter unit 723 When the filter unit 723 resonates and generates a negative voltage, the second filter output terminal 522 will have a high level relative to the first filter output terminal 521, and at this time, the diode 728 will be forward biased and turned on, so that the reverse current is channeled back to the first filter output 521 .
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic block diagram of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 530 includes a controller 533 and a conversion circuit 534, and performs power conversion in a current source mode to drive the LED module to emit light.
  • the conversion circuit 534 includes a switch circuit (also referred to as a power switch) 535 and a tank circuit 536 .
  • the conversion circuit 534 is coupled to the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522, receives the filtered signal, and converts it into a driving signal according to the control of the controller 533, and the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 output to drive the LED module.
  • the driving signal output by the conversion circuit 534 is a stable current, so that the LED module emits light stably.
  • FIGS. 14A to 14D are schematic diagrams of signal waveforms of driving circuits according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • FIGS. 14A and 14B illustrate the signal waveforms and control scenarios of the driving circuit 530 operating in a continuous conduction mode (CCM)
  • FIGS. 14C and 14D illustrate the driving circuit 530 operating in discontinuous conduction.
  • Signal waveform and control situation of Discontinuous-Conduction Mode (DCM) In the signal waveform diagram, the horizontal axis t represents time, and the vertical axis represents the voltage or current value (depending on the signal type).
  • the controller 533 of this embodiment adjusts the duty cycle (Duty Cycle) of the output lighting control signal Slc according to the received current detection signal Sdet, so that the switch circuit 535 is turned on or turned on in response to the lighting control signal Slc deadline.
  • the energy storage circuit 536 is repeatedly charged/discharged according to the on/off state of the switch circuit 535, so that the driving current ILED received by the LED module 50 can be stably maintained at a preset current value Ipred.
  • the lighting control signal Slc will have a fixed signal period Tlc and signal amplitude, and the length of the pulse enable period (such as Ton1, Ton2, Ton3, or pulse width) in each signal period Tlc will be adjusted according to the control requirements .
  • the duty ratio of the lighting control signal Slc is the ratio of the pulse enable period to the signal period Tlc. For example, if the pulse enable period Ton1 is 40% of the signal period Tlc, it means that the duty ratio of the lighting control signal in the first signal period Tlc is 0.4.
  • the current detection signal Sdet may be, for example, a signal representing the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , or a signal representing the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch circuit 535 , which is not limited in the present application.
  • FIG. 14A shows the change of the signal waveform of the driving circuit 530 under a plurality of signal periods Tlc when the driving current ILED is less than the predetermined current value Ipred.
  • the switch circuit 535 is turned on during the pulse enable period Ton1 in response to the high-voltage lighting control signal Slc.
  • the conversion circuit 534 not only generates the driving current ILED according to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and provides the driving current ILED to the LED module 50 , but also provides the LED module 50 with the driving current ILED through the conductive switch circuit 535 .
  • the tank circuit 536 is charged so that the current IL flowing through the tank circuit 536 gradually increases.
  • the energy storage circuit 536 stores energy in response to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522.
  • the switch circuit 535 is turned off in response to the low voltage level of the lighting control signal Slc.
  • the input power on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 will not be supplied to the LED module 50 , but will be discharged by the energy storage circuit 536 to generate the driving current ILED for supplying
  • the tank circuit 536 will gradually reduce the current IL due to the release of electrical energy. Therefore, even when the lighting control signal Slc is at a low voltage level (ie, a disabled period), the driving circuit 530 will continue to supply power to the LED module 50 based on the energy release of the energy storage circuit 536 . In other words, regardless of whether the switch circuit 535 is turned on or not, the driving circuit 530 will continue to provide a stable driving current ILED to the LED module 50, and the driving current ILED is about I1 in the first signal period Tlc.
  • the controller 533 determines that the current value I1 of the driving current ILED is smaller than the preset current value Ipred according to the current detection signal Sdet, so when the second signal period Tlc is entered, the control signal Slc will be turned on.
  • the pulse enabling period is adjusted to Ton2, wherein the pulse enabling period Ton2 is the pulse enabling period Ton1 plus the unit period Tu1.
  • the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the previous signal period Tlc.
  • the main difference between the two is that since the pulse enable period Ton2 is longer than the pulse enable period Ton1, the energy storage circuit 536 has a longer charging time and a relatively short discharging time, so that the driving circuit 530 is in the second phase.
  • the average value of the driving current ILED provided in each signal period Tlc increases to a current value I2 that is closer to the preset current value Ipred.
  • the controller 533 will further adjust the pulse enable period of the lighting control signal Slc to Ton3, wherein the pulse enable period Ton3 is the pulse enable period Ton2 plus the unit period Tu1, which is equal to the pulse enable period Ton1 plus the period Tu2 (equivalent to two unit periods Tu1).
  • the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the first two signal periods Tlc. Since the pulse enable period Ton3 is further extended, the current value of the driving current ILED increases to I3 and substantially reaches the preset current value Ipred. Thereafter, since the current value I3 of the driving current ILED has reached the predetermined current value Ipred, the controller 533 maintains the same duty cycle, so that the driving current ILED can be continuously maintained at the predetermined current value Ipred.
  • FIG. 14B shows the signal waveform changes of the driving circuit 530 under a plurality of signal periods Tlc when the driving current ILED is greater than the predetermined current value Ipred.
  • the switch circuit 535 is turned on during the pulse enable period Ton1 in response to the high-voltage lighting control signal Slc.
  • the conversion circuit 534 not only generates the driving current ILED according to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and provides the driving current ILED to the LED module 50 , but also provides the LED module 50 with the driving current ILED through the conductive switch circuit 535 .
  • the tank circuit 536 is charged so that the current IL flowing through the tank circuit 536 gradually increases.
  • the energy storage circuit 536 stores energy in response to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522.
  • the switch circuit 535 is turned off in response to the low voltage level of the lighting control signal Slc.
  • the input power on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 will not be supplied to the LED module 50, but will be discharged by the energy storage circuit 536 to generate the driving current ILED.
  • the tank circuit 536 will gradually reduce the current IL due to the release of electrical energy. Therefore, even when the lighting control signal Slc is at a low voltage level (ie, a disabled period), the driving circuit 530 will continue to supply power to the LED module 50 based on the energy release of the energy storage circuit 536 .
  • the driving circuit 530 will continue to provide a stable driving current ILED to the LED module 50, and the driving current ILED has a current value of about I4 in the first signal period Tlc.
  • the controller 533 determines that the current value I4 of the driving current ILED is greater than the preset current value Ipred according to the current detection signal Sdet, so when the second signal period Tlc is entered, the control signal Slc will be turned on.
  • the pulse enable period is adjusted to Ton2, wherein the pulse enable period Ton2 is the pulse enable period Ton1 minus the unit period Tu1.
  • the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the previous signal period Tlc.
  • the main difference between the two is that since the pulse enable period Ton2 is shorter than the pulse enable period Ton1, the energy storage circuit 536 has a shorter charging time and a relatively longer discharging time, so that the driving circuit 530 is in the second phase.
  • the average value of the driving current ILED provided in each signal period Tlc is reduced to a current value I5 that is closer to the preset current value Ipred.
  • the controller 533 will further adjust the pulse enable period of the lighting control signal Slc to Ton3, wherein the pulse enable period Ton3 is the pulse enable period Ton2 minus the unit period Tu1, which is equal to the pulse enable period Ton1 minus the period Tu2 (equivalent to two unit periods Tu1).
  • the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the first two signal periods Tlc. Since the pulse enable period Ton3 is further shortened, the current value of the driving current ILED is reduced to I6 and substantially reaches the preset current value Ipred. Thereafter, since the current value I6 of the driving current ILED has reached the predetermined current value Ipred, the controller 533 maintains the same duty cycle, so that the driving current ILED can be continuously maintained at the predetermined current value Ipred.
  • the driving circuit 530 will stepwise adjust the pulse width of the lighting control signal Slc, so that the driving current ILED is gradually adjusted to approach the predetermined current when the driving current ILED is lower than or higher than the predetermined current value Ipred. value Ipred, and then realize constant current output.
  • the driving circuit 530 is operated in the continuous conduction mode as an example, that is, the tank circuit 536 will not discharge until the current IL is zero during the off period of the switch circuit 535 .
  • the driving circuit 530 operating in the continuous conduction mode, the power supplied to the LED module 50 can be more stable and less likely to generate ripples.
  • FIG. 13A and FIG. 14C Please refer to FIG. 13A and FIG. 14C first, wherein the signal waveform and the operation of the driving circuit 530 in FIG. 14C are substantially the same as those in FIG. 14A .
  • the main difference between FIG. 14C and FIG. 14A is that the driving circuit 530 of this embodiment operates in the discontinuous conduction mode, so the tank circuit 536 will discharge until the current IL is equal to zero during the pulse disable period of the lighting control signal Slc. And the charging is performed again at the beginning of the next signal period Tlc.
  • FIG. 14A For other operation descriptions, reference can be made to the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 14A , which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 13A and FIG. 14D wherein the signal waveform and the operation of the driving circuit 530 in FIG. 14D are substantially the same as those in FIG. 14B.
  • the main difference between FIG. 14D and FIG. 14B is that the driving circuit 530 of this embodiment operates in the discontinuous conduction mode, so the tank circuit 536 will discharge until the current IL is equal to zero during the pulse disable period of the lighting control signal Slc, And the charging is performed again at the beginning of the next signal period Tlc.
  • Other operation descriptions can be referred to the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 14B , which will not be repeated here.
  • the driving circuit 530 By supplying power to the LED module 50 by the driving circuit 530 operating in the discontinuous conduction mode, the power loss of the driving circuit 530 can be reduced, and thus the conversion efficiency can be higher.
  • the driving circuit 530 uses a single-stage DC-DC conversion circuit as an example, the present application is not limited to this.
  • the driving circuit 530 can also be a two-stage driving circuit composed of an active power factor correction circuit and a DC-DC conversion circuit.
  • any power conversion circuit structure that can be used for driving an LED light source can be applied here.
  • the above-mentioned operation description about power conversion is not limited to being applied to driving LED straight tube lamps with AC input, but can be applied to various types of LED lamps powered by AC power (ie, ballastless LED lamps), such as In LED bulbs, LED filament lamps or integrated LED lamps, the present application is not limited to this.
  • FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 630 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 633 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 636 , a freewheeling diode 634 , a capacitor 637 and a switch 635 .
  • the driving circuit 630 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
  • the switch 635 is a MOSFET and has a control terminal, a first terminal and a second terminal.
  • the first end of the switch 635 is coupled to the anode of the freewheeling diode 634, the second end is coupled to the second filter output end 522, and the control end is coupled to the controller 633 to receive the control of the controller 633 so that the first end and the second end are connected to each other. between on or off.
  • the first drive output end 531 is coupled to the first filter output end 521
  • the second drive output end 532 is coupled to one end of the inductor 636
  • the other end of the inductor 636 is coupled to the first end of the switch 635 .
  • the capacitor 637 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stabilize the voltage difference between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the negative terminal of the freewheeling diode 634 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 .
  • the controller 633 determines the on and off time of the switch 635 according to the current detection signal S535 or/and S531, that is, controls the duty cycle (Duty Cycle) of the switch 635 to adjust the magnitude of the driving signal.
  • the current detection signal S535 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 635 .
  • the current detection signal S531 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 . According to either of the current detection signals S531 and S535 , the controller 633 can obtain information on the magnitude of the power converted by the conversion circuit.
  • the switch 635 When the switch 635 is turned on, the current of the filtered signal flows in from the first filter output terminal 521, passes through the capacitor 637 and the first drive output terminal 531 to the LED module, the inductor 636, and the switch 635, and then passes through the second filter output terminal. 522 outflow. At this time, the capacitor 637 and the inductor 636 store energy. When the switch 635 is turned off, the inductor 636 and the capacitor 637 release the stored energy, and the current freewheels to the first driving output end 531 through the freewheeling diode 634 so that the LED module continues to emit light. It is worth noting that the capacitor 637 is not an essential component and can be omitted, so it is represented by a dotted line in the figure. In some application environments, the effect of stabilizing the LED module current can be achieved by the inductance that resists the change of the current, and the capacitor 637 can be omitted.
  • the driving circuit 630 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness.
  • the inductance 636 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 635 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module keeps emitting light continuously, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value.
  • the switch 635 When the switch 635 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
  • FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 730 is a boost DC to DC conversion circuit, including a controller 733 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 736 , a freewheeling diode 734 , a capacitor 737 and a switch 735 .
  • the driving circuit 730 converts the filtered signals received by the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 into driving signals to drive the LEDs coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 module.
  • One end of the inductor 736 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 , and the other end is coupled to the anode of the filter diode 734 and the first end of the switch 735 .
  • the second terminal of the switch 735 is coupled to the second filtering output terminal 522 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the cathode of the freewheeling diode 734 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 .
  • the capacitor 737 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the controller 733 is coupled to the control terminal of the switch 735, and controls the switch 735 to be turned on and off according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535.
  • the switch 735 When the switch 735 is turned on, the current flows in from the first filter output terminal 521 , flows through the inductor 736 , and then flows out from the second filter output terminal 522 after the switch 735 .
  • the current flowing through the inductor 736 increases with time, and the inductor 736 is in an energy storage state.
  • the capacitor 737 is in a state of releasing energy, so as to continuously drive the LED module to emit light.
  • the inductor 736 When the switch 735 is turned off, the inductor 736 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 736 decreases with time. The current of the inductor 736 freewheels to the capacitor 737 and the LED module through the freewheeling diode 734 . At this time, the capacitor 737 is in an energy storage state.
  • the capacitor 737 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line.
  • the capacitor 737 is omitted, when the switch 735 is turned on, the current of the inductor 736 does not flow through the LED module and the LED module does not emit light; when the switch 735 is turned off, the current of the inductor 736 flows through the LED module through the freewheeling diode 734 and Make the LED module glow.
  • a detection resistor (not shown) is disposed between the switch 735 and the second filter output terminal 522 .
  • the switch 735 When the switch 735 is turned on, the current flowing through the detection resistor will cause a voltage difference between the two ends of the detection resistor, so the voltage on the detection resistor can be used as the current detection signal S535 to be sent back to the controller 733 for control.
  • a large current may be more than 10A
  • a large current may be more than 10A
  • the driving circuit 730 may further include a clamping component, which may be connected to the detection resistor, for when the current flowing through the detection resistor or the voltage difference between the two ends of the current detection resistor exceeds a predetermined value, The loop of the sense resistor is clamped to limit the current flowing through the sense resistor.
  • the clamping element may be, for example, a plurality of diodes, and the plurality of diodes are connected in series to form a diode string, and the diode string and the detection resistor are connected in parallel with each other.
  • the diode string connected in parallel with the sense resistor is rapidly turned on, so that both ends of the sense resistor can be limited to a specific level. For example, if the diode string consists of 5 diodes, since the turn-on voltage of a single diode is about 0.7V, the diode string can clamp the voltage across the detection resistor to about 3.5V.
  • the driving circuit 730 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness.
  • the inductance 736 acting as an energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 735 is turned off, on the one hand, the LED module continues to emit light, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value, and when the switch 735 is switched off, the stored energy is released.
  • the switch 735 When the switch 735 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
  • FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 830 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 833 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 836 , a freewheeling diode 834 , a capacitor 837 and a switch 835 .
  • the driving circuit 830 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
  • the first end of the switch 835 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 , the second end is coupled to the cathode of the freewheeling diode 834 , and the control end is coupled to the controller 833 to receive the lighting control signal of the controller 833 to make the first end The state between the second terminal and the second terminal is on or off.
  • the anode of the freewheeling diode 834 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 .
  • One end of the inductor 836 is coupled to the second end of the switch 835 , and the other end is coupled to the first driving output end 531 .
  • the second driving output terminal 532 is coupled to the anode of the freewheeling diode 834 .
  • the capacitor 837 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stabilize the voltage between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the controller 833 controls the switching on and off of the switch 835 according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535.
  • the switch 835 When the switch 835 is turned on, the current flows from the first filter output terminal 521 , passes through the switch 835 , the inductor 836 , passes through the capacitor 837 , the first drive output terminal 531 , the LED module and the second drive output terminal 532 , and then flows through the second filter output terminal 532 .
  • the filtered output 522 flows out.
  • the current flowing through the inductor 836 and the voltage of the capacitor 837 increase with time, and the inductor 836 and the capacitor 837 are in an energy storage state.
  • the inductor 836 When the switch 835 is turned off, the inductor 836 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 836 decreases with time. At this time, the current of the inductor 836 returns to the inductor 836 through the first driving output terminal 531 , the LED module, the second driving output terminal 532 , and the freewheeling diode 834 to form a freewheeling current.
  • the capacitor 837 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line in the figure.
  • the current of the inductor 836 can flow through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to drive the LED module to continuously emit light.
  • the driving circuit 830 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness.
  • the inductance 836 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 835 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module can keep emitting light continuously, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value.
  • the switch 835 When the switch 835 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby avoiding intermittent light emission of the LED module, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
  • FIG. 13E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the driving circuit 930 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 933 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 936 , a freewheeling diode 934 , a capacitor 937 and a switch 935 .
  • the driving circuit 930 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
  • the inductor 936 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second driving output end 532 , and the other end is coupled to the first end of the switch 935 .
  • the second terminal of the switch 935 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 , and the control terminal of the switch 935 is coupled to the controller 933 to be turned on or off according to the lighting control signal of the controller 933 .
  • the anode of the freewheeling diode 934 is coupled to the connection point between the inductor 936 and the switch 935 , and the cathode is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the capacitor 937 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stably drive the LED module coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the controller 933 controls the on and off of the switch 935 according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535.
  • the switch 935 When the switch 935 is turned on, the current flows in from the first filter output terminal 521 , flows through the inductor 936 , and then flows out from the second filter output terminal 522 after the switch 935 .
  • the current flowing through the inductor 936 increases with time, and the inductor 936 is in a state of energy storage; the voltage of the capacitor 937 decreases with time, and the capacitor 937 is in a state of energy release, so as to keep the LED module emitting light.
  • the inductor 936 When the switch 935 is turned off, the inductor 936 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 936 decreases with time. At this time, the current of the inductor 936 returns to the inductor 936 through the freewheeling diode 934 , the first driving output terminal 531 , the LED module and the second driving output terminal 532 to form a freewheeling current. At this time, the capacitor 937 is in an energy storage state, and the voltage of the capacitor 937 increases with time.
  • the capacitor 937 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line in the figure.
  • the switch 935 When the capacitor 937 is omitted and the switch 935 is turned on, the current of the inductor 936 does not flow through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 so that the LED module does not emit light.
  • the switch 935 When the switch 935 is turned off, the current of the inductor 936 flows through the LED module through the freewheeling diode 934 to make the LED module emit light.
  • the driving circuit 930 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness.
  • the inductance 936 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 935 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module continues to emit light, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value.
  • the switch 935 When the switch 935 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
  • the short circuit board 253 is divided into a first short circuit board and a second short circuit board connected to both ends of the long circuit board 251, and the electronic components in the power module are respectively arranged on the short circuit boards 253 on the first short circuit board and the second short circuit board.
  • the length dimensions of the first short circuit board and the second short circuit board may be approximately the same, or may not be consistent.
  • the length dimension of the first short circuit board (the right circuit board of the short circuit board 253 in FIG. 6A and the left circuit board of the short circuit board 253 in FIG. 6B ) is 30% of the length dimension of the second short circuit board- 80%. More preferably, the length dimension of the first short circuit board is 1/3-2/3 of the length dimension of the second short circuit board.
  • the length dimension of the first short circuit board is approximately half the size of the second short circuit board.
  • the size of the second short circuit board is between 15mm and 65mm (depending on the application).
  • the first short circuit board is arranged in the lamp cap at one end of the LED straight tube lamp, and the second short circuit board is arranged in the lamp cap at the opposite end of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the capacitors of the driving circuit may be formed by two or more capacitors connected in parallel in practice. At least part or all of the capacitance of the driving circuit in the power module is arranged on the first short circuit board of the short circuit board 253 . That is, the rectifier circuit, the filter circuit, the inductance of the drive circuit, the controller, the switch, the diode, etc. are all arranged on the second short circuit board of the short circuit board 253 . Inductors, controllers, switches, etc.
  • capacitors are components with high temperature in electronic components, and some or all capacitors are arranged on different circuit boards, so that capacitors (especially electrolytic capacitors) can avoid the impact of high temperature components on capacitors. It affects the life of the capacitor and improves the reliability of the capacitor. Further, the EMI problem can also be solved because the capacitor is separated from the rectifier circuit and the filter circuit in space.
  • the components with higher temperature in the driving circuit are arranged on one side of the lamp tube (which can be referred to as the first side of the lamp tube), and the other components are arranged on the other side of the lamp tube (which can be referred to as the lamp tube). the second side of the tube).
  • the lamps are connected to the lamp sockets in a staggered arrangement, that is, the first side of any one of the lamps is adjacent to the second side of other adjacent lamps.
  • Such a configuration can make the components with higher temperature evenly arranged in the lighting system, thereby preventing the heat from concentrating on a specific position in the lighting and affecting the overall luminous efficacy of the LED.
  • FIG. 15A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 , and an overvoltage protection circuit 550 is further added.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 550 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 to detect the filtered signal, and clamp the level of the filtered signal when the level of the filtered signal is higher than the set overvoltage value.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 550 can protect the components of the LED module 50 from being damaged by the overvoltage.
  • FIG. 15B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power supply module 5 of this embodiment is substantially the same as the power supply module 5 of FIG. 15A , and the difference between the two is mainly that the overvoltage protection circuit 550 of this embodiment is disposed between the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 , that is, the overvoltage protection circuit
  • the circuit 550 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to detect the driving signal and clamp the level of the driving signal when the level of the driving signal is higher than the set overvoltage value. Therefore, the overvoltage protection circuit 550 can protect the components of the LED module 50 from being damaged by the overvoltage.
  • FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an overvoltage protection circuit according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 650 includes a Zener diode 652, such as a Zener Diode, coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 (as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 15A ), or coupled to the first driver The output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 (as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 15B ).
  • a Zener diode 652 such as a Zener Diode
  • the voltage difference between the Zener diode 652 at the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 reaches the breakdown voltage, it is turned on, so that the voltage difference is clamped at the breakdown voltage.
  • the breakdown voltage is preferably in the range of 40-100V, more preferably in the range of 55-75V.
  • FIG. 15D is a schematic block diagram of an overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 750 includes a voltage sampling circuit 751 and an enabling circuit 752, wherein the voltage sampling circuit 751 is coupled to the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 to receive the filtered signal, the enabling circuit 752 is coupled to the output terminal of the voltage sampling circuit 751, and The output terminal of the enabling circuit 752 is coupled to the controller 533 of the driving circuit.
  • the voltage sampling circuit 751 samples the filtered signal, and generates a voltage detection signal to the enable circuit 752 accordingly, so that the enable circuit 752 determines whether to enable the overvoltage protection in response to the voltage detection signal, and correspondingly controls the controller 533 of the driving circuit working status.
  • the enabling circuit 752 when the LED straight tube lamp receives an external driving signal with an excessively high voltage, the enabling circuit 752 will enable/enable the overvoltage protection in response to the voltage sampling signal, so that the controller 533 reduces or disables the output current, thereby preventing the LED straight tube lamp from being damaged due to receiving unexpected high voltage.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 750 can enable the overvoltage protection to reduce the output current/power of the drive circuit, or stop the drive circuit from outputting the drive current, when the peak value or effective value of the external driving voltage is higher than a certain threshold.
  • the overvoltage protection circuit further includes a delay circuit 753 , the delay circuit 753 is coupled to the voltage sampling circuit 751 and the enabling circuit 752 to affect the voltage provided by the voltage sampling circuit 751 to the enabling circuit 752 detection signal, so as to prevent the enabling circuit 752 from malfunctioning in response to the voltage detection signal due to the start-up high voltage when the lamp is energized under certain application scenarios, wherein the delay circuit 753 affects the voltage detection signal.
  • the rising rate of the voltage detection signal or the suppression of the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal so that the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal does not immediately cause the enable circuit 752 to enable/enable the overvoltage protection.
  • the LED straight tube lamp when used with an instant start ballast, the LED straight tube lamp will receive an instantaneous high voltage when powered on, and this high voltage may cause malfunction of the enabling circuit 752 .
  • the starting high voltage of the instant-start ballast will be suppressed by the delay circuit 753 and not directly reflected on the voltage detection signal, thereby preventing the enabling circuit 752 from malfunctioning.
  • the delay circuit 753 delays the voltage detection circuit output by the voltage sampling circuit 751 , and transmits the delayed voltage detection signal to the enabling circuit 752 .
  • FIGS. 15E to 15H Various circuit architecture embodiments of the overvoltage protection circuit 750 are described below with reference to FIGS. 15E to 15H .
  • the overvoltage protection circuit 850 of this embodiment includes a voltage sampling circuit 851 , an enabling circuit 852 and a delay circuit 853 .
  • the voltage sampling circuit 851 includes resistors Rg1, Rg2 and Rg3 and a Zener diode ZDg1, wherein the resistors Rg1 and Rg2 form a voltage divider circuit, the first end of the resistor Rg1 is coupled to the first filter output end 521, and the first end of the resistor Rg2 is coupled to The second terminal of the resistor Rg1, and the second terminal of the resistor Rg2 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 (in some embodiments, the second filter output terminal 522 and the ground terminal GND are equal-level terminals); the Zener diode ZDg1 The cathode is coupled to the second terminal of the resistor Rg1 and the first terminal of the resistor Rg1 (ie, the voltage dividing point of the voltage divider circuit), and the anode of the Zener di
  • the filtered signal between the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 acts on the enabling circuit through the voltage division of the resistors Rg1 and Rg2 and the voltage regulation of the Zener diode ZDg1 and the resistor Rg3 852 input.
  • the voltage signal on the first end of the resistor Rg3 is the voltage detection signal generated by the voltage sampling circuit 851.
  • the enable circuit 852 includes a transistor Mg1 having a first terminal, a second terminal and a control terminal.
  • the control terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the first terminal of the resistor Rg3 and the anode of the Zener diode ZDg1 to receive the voltage detection signal; at least one of the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the controller 533 of the driving circuit.
  • the enabling circuit 852 further includes a resistor Rg4, wherein the resistor Rg4 can be connected in series between the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533, or between the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533 in series between the device 533.
  • resistor Rg4 is connected in series between the first end of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533 , but the present disclosure is not limited to this.
  • the specific connection configuration example between the enabling circuit 852 and the controller 533 may refer to the following embodiments in FIGS. 15F to 15H .
  • the delay circuit 853 includes capacitors Cg1 and Cg2.
  • the first end of the capacitor Cg1 is coupled to the second end of the resistor Rg1, the first end of the resistor Rg2 and the cathode of the Zener diode ZDg1, and the second end of the capacitor Cg1 is coupled to the second end of the resistor Rg1.
  • the filter output terminal 522 ; the first terminal of the capacitor Cg2 is coupled to the first terminal of the resistor Rg3 and the anode of the Zener diode ZDg1 , and the second terminal of the capacitor Cg2 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 .
  • the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal is suppressed by the capacitors Cg1 and Cg2.
  • FIGS. 15F to 15H are partial circuit architecture diagrams illustrating various embodiments of different circuit connections between the enabling circuit 852 and the controller 533 .
  • the controller 533 has, for example, a power supply pin P_VCC, a driving pin P_G, a compensation pin P_COMP, and a current sampling pin P_CS, wherein the controller 533 receives a driving voltage at the power supply pin P_VCC that meets the startup requirements VCC (for example, 5V) is activated, and the output current of the driving circuit is controlled by the signal of the driving pin P_G.
  • VCC startup requirements
  • the controller 533 also adjusts the pulse width of the output lighting control signal according to the level on the current sampling pin P_CS (representing the magnitude of the driving current) and the level on the compensation pin P_COMP (representing the magnitude of the input voltage).
  • the output current/output power of the circuit can be roughly maintained at a certain value.
  • the pin that enables the controller 533 to start or stop working in response to the level on it is the power supply pin P_VCC (or the first pin). pin); the pin that can make the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 decrease as the voltage on it decreases (at least in a certain voltage range with this relationship) is the compensation pin P_COMP (or can be referred to as the second pin); and the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 can be reduced as the voltage on it decreases (at least in a certain voltage interval with this relationship)
  • the pin is the current sampling pin P_CS (or can be referred to as the third pin).
  • the driving pin P_G may be a pin that is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor/power switch 535 and provides a lighting control signal (this type is taken as an example in the drawings, but not only In other embodiments, the transistor/power switch 535 will be integrated with the controller 533, and the drive pin P_G of the controller may correspond to the transistor/power switch 535 integrated inside the controller.
  • the drain, the above types of drive pins can be collectively referred to as the fourth pin.
  • the drive pin P_G of the controller 533 is configured to be coupled to the gate of the transistor 535 as an example, and the first end of the transistor 535 is coupled to the conversion circuit, and the second end of the transistor 535 is passed through The sampling resistor Rcs is coupled to the ground terminal GND.
  • the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit is coupled to the power supply pin P_VCC of the controller 533 , and the second terminal of the transistor Mg2 is coupled to the ground terminal GND.
  • the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal
  • the transistor Mg1 is turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage of the power supply pin P_VCC is pulled down from the driving voltage VCC to the ground level/low level, Then, the controller 533 is stopped.
  • the transistor Mg1 is turned off in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage on the power supply pin P_VCC is maintained at the driving voltage VCC, and the controller 533 It may be activated based on the driving voltage VCC and output a lighting control signal to the switch circuit 535 .
  • the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit is coupled to the compensation pin P_COMP of the controller 533 through the resistor Rg4 , and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the ground terminal GND.
  • the transistor Mg1 When the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 will be turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the compensation pin P_COMP is pulled down to a specific level (depending on the setting of the resistance value of the resistor Rg4) ) or ground level/low level (in the absence of the resistor Rg4), so that the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 decreases with the voltage drop on the compensation pin P_COMP, so that the output Current/output power reduction.
  • the transistor Mg1 will be turned off in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage on the compensation pin P_COMP is not affected by the enable circuit, at this time the controller The 533 modulates the duty cycle of the lighting control signal according to a predetermined control mechanism.
  • the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit receives the driving voltage VCC through the resistor Rg4, and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the current sampling pin P_CS of the controller 533 and simultaneously is coupled to the first end of the sampling resistor Rcs.
  • the transistor Mg1 When the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 will be turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the divided voltage of the driving voltage VCC will be superimposed on the current sampling pin P_CS, so that the current sampling leads
  • the voltage on the pin P_CS is raised to a specific level (depending on the resistance value setting of the resistor Rg4 and the resistor Rcs), so that the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 follows the current sampling pin P_CS. The voltage rises and falls, so that the output current/output power is reduced.
  • the controller The 533 modulates the duty cycle of the lighting control signal according to a predetermined control mechanism.
  • FIG. 16A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power supply module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a driving circuit 530 , and an auxiliary power supply module 560 is added, wherein the power supply module 5 may also include LEDs Parts of module 50.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 is coupled between the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 detects the filtered signals on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 , and determines whether to provide auxiliary power to the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 according to the detection results.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 provides auxiliary power so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light.
  • the auxiliary voltage is determined according to the auxiliary power supply voltage provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 .
  • FIG. 16B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an auxiliary power supply module 560 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 detects the driving signals of the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 , and determines whether to provide auxiliary power to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 according to the detection results.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 560 provides auxiliary power, so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light.
  • the LED module 50 may only receive the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 as the working power supply, and the external driving signal is used for charging the auxiliary power supply module 560 . Because this embodiment only uses the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 to light the LED module 50, that is, whether the external driving signal is provided by the commercial power or provided by the ballast, the auxiliary power supply module is firstly supplied to the auxiliary power supply module. The energy storage unit of 560 is charged, and then the back end is powered by the energy storage unit. Thereby, the LED straight tube lamp applying the power module architecture of this embodiment can be compatible with the external driving signal provided by the commercial power.
  • auxiliary power supply module 560 is connected to the output end of the filter circuit 520 (the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 ) or the output end of the drive circuit 530 (the first drive output end between the terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532), so in an exemplary embodiment, its circuit can be placed in the lamp tube (for example, adjacent to the LED module 50), so as to avoid the power supply caused by the long trace. transmission loss.
  • the circuit of the auxiliary power supply module 560 can also be placed in the lamp head, so that the heat energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 560 during charging and discharging is less likely to affect the operation and luminous efficacy of the LED module.
  • FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 660 in this embodiment can be applied to the configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 560 described above.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 660 includes an energy storage unit 663 and a voltage detection circuit 664 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 660 has an auxiliary power supply positive terminal 661 and an auxiliary power supply negative terminal 662 to be respectively coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522, or respectively coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532.
  • the voltage detection circuit 664 detects the level of the signals on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply to determine whether to discharge the power of the energy storage unit 663 through the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply.
  • the energy storage unit 663 is a battery or a super capacitor.
  • the voltage detection circuit 664 uses the signals on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply to store energy when the level of the signal on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply is higher than the voltage of the energy storage unit 663 .
  • Unit 663 is charged.
  • the energy storage unit 663 discharges externally through the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 .
  • the voltage detection circuit 664 includes a diode 665 , a bipolar junction transistor 666 and a resistor 667 .
  • the anode of the diode 665 is coupled to the anode of the energy storage unit 663, and the cathode is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply.
  • the negative terminal of the energy storage unit 663 is coupled to the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply.
  • the collector of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply, and the emitter is coupled to the positive terminal of the energy storage unit 663 .
  • One end of the resistor 667 is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply, and the other end is coupled to the base of the bipolar junction transistor 666 .
  • the resistor 667 turns on the bipolar junction transistor 666 when the collector of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is higher than the emitter by a turn-on voltage.
  • the filtered signal will charge the energy storage unit 663 through the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and the conductive bipolar junction transistor 666, or the driving signal will be charged through the
  • the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 and the turned-on bipolar junction transistor 666 charge the energy storage unit 663 until the collector-shooting difference of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is equal to or less than the conduction. until the voltage is turned on.
  • the energy storage unit 663 provides power to the LED module 50 through the diode 665 to maintain light emission.
  • the highest voltage stored by the energy storage unit 663 during charging will be at least lower than the voltage applied to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply by a turn-on voltage of the bipolar junction transistor 666 .
  • the voltage output by the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply is lower than the voltage of the energy storage unit 663 by a threshold voltage of the diode 665 . Therefore, when the auxiliary power module starts to supply power, the supplied voltage will be low (approximately equal to the sum of the threshold voltage of the diode 665 and the turn-on voltage of the bipolar junction transistor 666).
  • the auxiliary power supply module when the auxiliary power supply module supplies power, the lowering of the voltage will significantly reduce the brightness of the LED module 50 . In this way, when the auxiliary power supply module is applied to the emergency lighting system or the always-on lighting system, the user can know that the main lighting power supply, such as the mains, is abnormal, and can take necessary preventive measures.
  • the configuration of the embodiment of FIGS. 16A to 16C can be applied to a multi-lamp lamp structure.
  • one of the four LED straight tube lamps may include an auxiliary power supply module.
  • the LED straight tube light containing the auxiliary power supply module will continue to be lit, while other LED straight tube lights will be turned off.
  • the LED straight tube lamp provided with the auxiliary power supply module can be arranged in the middle position of the lamp.
  • a plurality of the four LED straight tube lamps may include auxiliary power supply modules.
  • the LED straight tube lamps including the auxiliary power supply module can all be lit by the auxiliary power at the same time. In this way, even in an emergency situation, the whole lamp can still provide a certain brightness.
  • the two LED straight tube lamps can be arranged in a staggered arrangement with the LED straight tube lamps without the auxiliary power supply module.
  • a plurality of the four LED straight tube lamps may include auxiliary power supply modules.
  • some of the LED straight tube lamps will be lit by the auxiliary power first, and after a period of time (for example, yes), the other part of the LED straight tube lamps will be lit by the auxiliary power.
  • the present embodiment can extend the lighting time of the LED straight tube lamp in an emergency state by coordinating with other lamps to provide the auxiliary power sequence.
  • the auxiliary power supply modules in different lamps can be set to start up time, or the auxiliary power can be communicated by setting a controller in each lamp.
  • the operation state between the power supply modules is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 16D is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power supply module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an auxiliary power supply module 760 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 of this embodiment is connected between the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 to receive an external driving signal and perform charging and discharging based on the external driving signal Actions.
  • the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 760 may be similar to an Off-line UPS.
  • the external power grid/external drive signal will directly supply power to the rectifier circuit 510 and charge the auxiliary power supply module 760 at the same time; once the power supply quality of the mains power supply is unstable or power outage, the auxiliary power supply module 760 will cut off the external power grid and the rectifier circuit 510 and the auxiliary power supply module 760 supplies power to the rectifier circuit 510 until the power supply of the grid returns to normal.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 of this embodiment may operate in a redundant manner, for example, and will only intervene in power supply when the power grid is powered off.
  • the power supplied by the auxiliary power supply module 760 may be alternating current or direct current.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 includes, for example, an energy storage unit and a voltage detection circuit.
  • the voltage detection circuit detects an external driving signal and determines whether to enable the energy storage unit to provide auxiliary power to the input end of the rectifier circuit 510 according to the detection result. .
  • the energy storage unit of the auxiliary power supply module 760 provides auxiliary power, so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light based on the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary energy storage unit.
  • the energy storage unit for providing auxiliary power may be implemented by using energy storage components such as batteries or super capacitors, but the present application is not limited thereto.
  • FIG. 16E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 includes, for example, a charging unit 761 and an auxiliary power supply unit 762 .
  • the output of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 is connected to the power supply circuit between the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the system further includes a switch unit 763, which is respectively connected to the external power grid 508, the output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 and the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510, wherein the switch unit 763 selectively turns on the external power grid according to the power supply status of the external power grid 508.
  • the loop between 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 or the loop between the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the power supplied by the external power grid 508 will be provided to the input terminal of the rectification circuit 510 through the switch unit 763 as the external driving signal Sed.
  • the charging unit 761 will charge the auxiliary power supply unit 762 based on the power supplied by the external power grid 508, and the auxiliary power supply unit 762 will not discharge the back end rectifier circuit 510 in response to the external driving signal Sed normally transmitted on the power supply circuit.
  • the auxiliary power supply unit 762 starts to discharge through the switch unit 763 to provide auxiliary power as the external drive signal Sed to the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • FIG. 16F is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an auxiliary power supply module 860.
  • the input terminals Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860 in this embodiment receive external driving signals, and perform charging and discharging actions based on the external driving signals, and then the generated auxiliary power is
  • the output terminals Po1 and Po2 are provided to the rectifier circuit 510 at the back end.
  • the first pin (eg 501 ) and the second pin (eg 502 ) of the LED straight tube lamp can be the input terminals Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860 or the output terminal Po1 with Po2. If the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are the input ends Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860, it means that the auxiliary power supply module 860 is arranged inside the LED straight tube lamp; if the first pin 501 and the second pin are 502 is the output terminals Po1 and Po2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860, which means that the auxiliary power supply module 860 is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp. Subsequent embodiments will further describe the specific structural configuration of the auxiliary power supply module.
  • the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 860 is similar to an On-line UPS, and the external power grid/external drive signal will not directly supply power to the rectifier circuit 510, but will pass through the auxiliary power supply module 860. Power on.
  • the external power grid and the LED straight tube light are isolated from each other, and the auxiliary power supply module 860 is involved in the whole process of starting/using the LED straight tube light, thereby enabling the power supply provided to the rectifier circuit 510 Not affected by the instability of external grid power supply.
  • FIG. 16G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application, which illustrates an example configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 860 in an online operation.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 860 includes a charging unit 861 and an auxiliary power supply unit 862 .
  • the input terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the external power grid 508
  • the output terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the first input terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 .
  • the second input of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 is connected to the external grid 508 and its output is connected to the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the auxiliary power supply unit 862 performs power conversion based on the power provided by the external power grid 508, and generates an external drive signal Sed to the rectifier circuit 510 at the back end accordingly; during this period, the charging The unit 861 simultaneously charges the energy storage unit in the auxiliary power supply unit 862 .
  • the auxiliary power supply unit 862 performs power conversion based on the power provided by its own energy storage unit, and generates an external drive signal Sed to the back end rectifier circuit 510 accordingly.
  • the power conversion action described herein may be one of circuit operations such as rectification, filtering, boosting, and bucking, or a reasonable combination thereof, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 860 is similar to the Line-Interactive UPS, and its basic operation is similar to the offline UPS, but the difference lies in the line-interactive operation.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 860 monitors the power supply of the external power grid at any time, and has a boost and voltage reduction compensation circuit to correct the power supply in real time when the external power grid is unsatisfactory, thereby reducing the frequency of switching to use the battery for power supply.
  • FIG. 16H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the third embodiment of the present application, which illustrates an example configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 860 for online interactive operation.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 860 includes, for example, a charging unit 861 , an auxiliary power supply unit 862 and a switch unit 863 .
  • the input terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the external power grid 508, and the output terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the input terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862.
  • the switch unit 863 is respectively connected to the external power grid 508 , the output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510 , wherein the switch unit 863 selectively conducts the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 according to the power supply state of the external power grid 508 The loop between them, or the loop between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the switch unit 863 will turn on the loop between the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510, and disconnect the loop between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510, so that the external power grid 508 The supplied power is provided to the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510 through the switch unit 863 as the external drive signal Sed.
  • the charging unit 861 charges the auxiliary power supply unit 862 based on the power supplied by the external power grid 508 .
  • the switch unit 863 When the power supply of the external power grid 508 is abnormal or powered off, the switch unit 863 will switch to conduct the circuit between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510, so that the auxiliary power supply unit 862 starts to discharge to provide auxiliary power as the external drive signal Sed to the Rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 may be alternating current or direct current.
  • the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 includes, for example, an energy storage unit and a DC-AC converter; when the supplied power is DC power, the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 includes, for example, a The energy storage unit and the direct current to direct current converter (DC-DC converter), or only the energy storage unit, is not limited in this application.
  • the energy storage unit may be, for example, a battery module in which several energy storage batteries are combined.
  • the DC-to-DC converter may be, for example, a boost, buck, or buck-boost DC-to-DC converter circuit.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 further includes a voltage detection circuit (not shown).
  • the voltage detection circuit can be used to detect the working state of the external power grid 508, and send a signal according to the detection result to control the switch unit 763/863 or the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862, so as to determine that the LED straight tube lamp works in the normal lighting mode (that is, through the external Grid 508 power supply) or emergency mode (ie, power supply through auxiliary power supply modules 760/860).
  • the switch units 763/863 can be implemented by using a three-terminal switch or a complementary switching two switches.
  • the two switches can be connected in series to the power supply loop of the external power grid 508 and the power supply loop of the auxiliary power supply modules 760/860 respectively; and the control method is that when one of the switches is turned on, The other switch is turned off.
  • the switch unit 763/863 may be implemented by a relay.
  • the relay is similar to the selection switch of 2 modes. If it works in the general lighting mode (that is, the mains is used as the external driving signal), after the power is turned on, the relay is energized and closed. At this time, the power module of the LED straight tube lamp is not connected to the auxiliary power supply module. 760/860 is electrically connected; if the mains is abnormal, the electromagnetic suction of the relay disappears and returns to the original position. At this time, the power module of the LED straight tube lamp is electrically connected to the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 through the relay, so that the auxiliary power supply module Work.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 does not work, and the mains power supply provides power; and the mains power supplies the battery module in the auxiliary power supply module to charge.
  • the battery module boosts the voltage of the battery module to the voltage required when the LED module 50 operates through a boost-type DC-DC conversion circuit, and the LED module 50 emits light.
  • the voltage after boosting is 4-10 times the voltage of the battery module before boosting (preferably 4-6 times); the voltage required for the LED module 50 to work is between 40-80V (preferably between 55-75V) , 60V is selected in this case).
  • a single cylindrical battery is selected; the battery is packaged with a metal shell, which can reduce the risk of electrolyte leakage in the battery.
  • the battery adopts a modular design, and two battery cells are connected in series and then packaged to form a battery module, wherein a plurality of the battery modules can be electrically connected in sequence (can be connected in series or in parallel). And set in the lamp, which is convenient for its maintenance in the later stage; if some battery modules are damaged, the damaged battery modules can be replaced in time without replacing all the battery modules.
  • the battery module can be arranged in a cylindrical shape, the inner diameter of which is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the battery cells, so that the battery cells are placed in the battery module in sequence, and positive and negative terminals are formed at both ends of the battery module.
  • the voltage of a plurality of battery modules connected in series is lower than 36V.
  • the battery module can be set in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the width of the rectangular parallelepiped is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the battery, so that the battery is firmly clamped in the battery module, the module is provided with a snap-type pluggable structure, or Other structures that can be easily plugged and assembled.
  • the charging unit 761/861 can be, for example, a BMS module (battery management system) that manages battery modules, mainly to intelligently manage and maintain each battery module, prevent overcharging and overdischarging of the battery, and prolong the Battery life, monitor battery status.
  • BMS module battery management system
  • the BMS module is preset with an external interface, and the information of the battery in the battery module is read by connecting to the interface during regular detection. If it is detected that the battery module is abnormal, replace the corresponding battery module.
  • the number of batteries in the battery module can be multiple, such as 3, 4, 30, etc.
  • the batteries in the battery module can be sampled in series connection, or mixed in series and parallel connection, depending on the application. If the lithium battery is used, the voltage of a single lithium battery is about 3.7V, and the number of batteries can be appropriately reduced to make the voltage of the battery system lower than 36V.
  • the relay in this embodiment is an electromagnetic relay, which is mainly composed of an iron core, a coil, an armature, a contact reed, and the like. Its working principle: as long as a certain voltage is applied to both ends of the coil, a certain current will flow in the coil, thereby generating an electromagnetic effect, and the armature will overcome the pulling force of the return spring and attract to the iron core under the action of electromagnetic attraction. Thereby, the movable contact of the armature is driven to engage with the static contact (normally open contact). When the coil is powered off, the electromagnetic suction also disappears, and the armature will return to the original position under the reaction force of the spring, so that the moving contact and the original static contact (normally closed contact) are attracted.
  • the brightness of the LED module illuminated by the external driving signal is different from the brightness illuminated by the auxiliary power.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 of this embodiment can provide auxiliary power with different power from the external driving signal to the LED module when the external driving signal is abnormal, so that the LED module has different brightness and can be used as an external power supply. Indication of whether the drive signal is normally supplied.
  • the LED module when the LED module is lit according to an external driving signal, its brightness can be, for example, 1600-2000 lumens; when the LED module is lit according to the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 , its brightness can be, for example, 200-250 lumens.
  • the output power of the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 can be, for example, 1 watt to 5 watts, but this application does not This is the limit.
  • the electric capacity of the energy storage components in the auxiliary power supply modules 760/860 can be, for example, 1.5 watt hours to more than 7.5 watt hours, so that the LED modules can be continuously lit for more than 90 minutes at a brightness of 200-250 lumens based on the auxiliary power. , but this application is also not limited to this.
  • FIG. 16I is a schematic configuration diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 (for the sake of brevity, only 760 is indicated in the drawing, and the auxiliary power supply module 760 is also described below) can be configured in the lamp tube 1 as in the previous embodiment. Besides, it can also be arranged in the base 3 . Under this configuration, the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be connected to the corresponding first pin 501 and the second pin 502 from the lamp head 3 , so as to receive the external driving signal provided to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 in this embodiment is disposed in the lamp caps 3 on both sides of the lamp tube 1 , it will be farther away from the LEDs in the lamp tube 1 .
  • the module is far away, so that the heat energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 760 during charging and discharging is less likely to affect the operation and luminous efficacy of the LED module.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the power supply module of the LED straight tube lamp can be arranged in the same side lamp holder, or respectively placed in the two side lamp holders. Wherein, if the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the power supply module are placed in different lamp heads, the overall circuit layout can have more space.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 can also be disposed in the lamp socket corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp, as shown in FIG. 16J , which is the configuration of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application Schematic.
  • the lamp socket 1_LH includes a base 101_LH and a connection socket 102_LH, wherein the base 101_LH is equipped with a power circuit and is suitable for locking/fitting to a fixed object such as a wall or a ceiling.
  • the connection socket 102_LH has slots corresponding to the pins (eg, the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 ) on the LED straight tube lamp, wherein the slots are electrically connected to the corresponding power lines.
  • the connection socket 102_LH may be integrally formed with the base 101_LH, or may be detachably mounted on the base 101_LH, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 is disposed in the connection socket 102_LH, and is connected to a power line to receive an external driving signal. Taking the configuration of the left lamp head 3 as an example, when the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are inserted into the slot of the left connecting socket 102_LH, the auxiliary power supply module 760 will be electrically connected to the first pin through the slot. 501 and the second pin 502, thereby realizing the connection configuration as shown in FIG. 16D.
  • connection socket 102_LH can be designed to be detachable
  • the connection socket 102_LH and the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be integrated It is a modular configuration so that when the auxiliary power supply module 760 fails or expires, a new auxiliary power supply module 760 can be replaced by replacing the modular connection socket 102_LH to continue its use without replacing the entire LED Straight tube light.
  • the configuration of this embodiment not only has the advantage of reducing the influence of the thermal energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 760 on the LED module, but also makes the replacement of the auxiliary power supply module 760 easier through the modular design, without the need for The entire LED straight tube lamp needs to be replaced due to a problem with the auxiliary power supply module 760, so as to improve the durability of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 may also be disposed in the base 101_LH of the lamp socket 1_LH, or disposed outside the lamp socket 1_LH, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be divided into two configuration modes: (1) integrated inside the LED straight tube light, and (2) independent of the outside of the LED straight tube light.
  • the power supply of the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the external power grid can be supplied to the LED straight tube light through different pins. Or give it to the LED straight tube light by sharing at least one pin.
  • the power signal from the external power grid will not be directly supplied to the pins of the LED straight tube light, but will be supplied to the auxiliary power supply module 760 first, and then The auxiliary power supply module 760 sends a signal to the power module inside the LED straight tube light through the pins of the LED straight tube light.
  • the auxiliary power supply module (referred to as the independent auxiliary power supply module) that is independent from the outside of the LED straight tube light and the overall configuration of the LED straight tube light.
  • FIG. 16K is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube light lighting system includes the LED straight tube light 600 and an auxiliary power supply module 960 .
  • the LED straight tube lamp 600 of this embodiment includes rectifier circuits 510 and 540 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an LED module (not shown).
  • the rectifier circuits 510 and 540 may be the full-wave rectifier circuit 610 shown in FIG. 11A or the half-wave rectifier circuit 710 shown in FIG. 11B , wherein the two input ends of the rectifier circuit 510 are respectively connected to the first pin 501 and the first pin 501 and the first pin 501 .
  • the LED straight tube lamp 600 is configured with double-ended power supply as an example, the external power grid 508 is connected to the pins 501 and 503 on the lamp caps on both sides of the LED straight tube lamp 600, and the auxiliary power supply module 960 is Connect to the pins 502 and 504 on the lamp caps on both sides of the LED straight tube lamp 600 . That is, the external power grid 508 and the auxiliary power supply module 960 supply power to the LED straight tube lamp 600 through different pins.
  • this embodiment is shown as an example of the configuration of double-ended power feeding, the present application is not limited to this.
  • the external power grid 508 can also supply power through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 on the same side of the lamp holder (ie, the configuration of single-ended power feeding).
  • the auxiliary power supply module 960 can supply power through the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 on the other side of the lamp holder.
  • the unused pins (such as 502 and 504) of the LED straight tube lamp 600 can be used as receivers. The interface of the auxiliary power supply, and then realize the integration of the emergency lighting function in the LED straight tube light 600 .
  • FIG. 16L is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube light lighting system includes the LED straight tube light 700 and the auxiliary power supply module 1060 .
  • the LED straight tube lamp 700 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 and an LED module (not shown).
  • the rectifier circuit 510 can be, for example, a rectifier circuit 910 with three bridge arms as shown in one of FIGS. 11D to 11F , wherein the rectifier circuit 510 has three input signal receiving terminals P1 , P2 and P3 .
  • the input signal receiving end P1 is connected to the first pin 501
  • the input signal receiving end P2 is connected to the second pin 502, and is suitable for connecting the auxiliary power supply module 1060 through the second pin 502
  • the input signal receiving end P3 is suitable for passing through
  • the third pin 503 is connected to the auxiliary power supply module 1060 .
  • the LED straight tube lamp 700 is also configured with double-ended power supply as an example.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 1060 of this embodiment not only connects to the second pin 502 but also shares the third pin 503 with the external power grid 508 .
  • the power provided by the external power grid 508 is supplied to the signal receiving terminals P1 and P3 of the rectifier circuit 510 through the first pin 501 and the third pin 503, and the power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 is provided by the first pin 501 and the third pin 503.
  • the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 are supplied to the signal receiving ends P2 and P3 of the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the auxiliary power supply module 1060 is connected to the external power grid 508 .
  • Neutral (N) is shared, while live is separate.
  • the signal receiving end P3 is the shared end of the external power grid 508 and the auxiliary power supply module 1060 .
  • the rectifier circuit 510 can perform full-wave rectification through the bridge arms corresponding to the signal receiving terminals P1 and P3, so as to supply power to the LED module.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 can receive the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 through the signal receiving terminals P2 and P3, so as to supply power to the LED module.
  • the diode unidirectional conduction characteristic of the rectifier circuit 510 isolates the external drive signal from the input of the auxiliary power supply, so that the two will not affect each other, and can also achieve the effect of providing auxiliary power when the external power grid 508 is abnormal.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 can be implemented with a fast recovery diode, so as to respond to the high frequency characteristics of the output current of the emergency power supply.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 700 since this embodiment receives the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 by sharing the third pin 503, the LED straight tube lamp 700 also has an unused fourth pin ( (not shown) can be used as a signal input interface for other control functions.
  • the other control functions may be, for example, a dimming function, a communication function, a sensing function, etc., and the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the following is an example in which the LED straight tube lamp 700 further integrates the dimming control function for illustration.
  • FIG. 16M is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the eighth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 800 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an LED module 50 .
  • the configuration of the LED straight tube light lighting system of this embodiment is substantially the same as that of the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 16L , the difference between the two is that the LED straight tube light lighting system of this embodiment further includes a fourth pin 504 coupled to the LED straight tube light 800 .
  • the dimming control circuit 570 can be, for example, a circuit module composed of a variable impedance component and a signal conversion circuit. The user can adjust the impedance of the variable impedance component to make the dimming control circuit 570 generate a corresponding level. After the dimming signal is converted into a signal type conforming to the format of the driving circuit 530 by the signal conversion circuit, the dimming signal is transmitted to the driving circuit 530, so that the driving circuit 530 can adjust the output to the LED based on the dimming signal. The size of the drive current of the module 50 .
  • the brightness of the LED module 50 if it is to be adjusted, it can be realized by adjusting the frequency or reference level of the driving signal; if the color temperature of the LED module 50 is to be adjusted, the brightness of the red LED unit in the LED module 50 can be adjusted. , but this application is not limited to this.
  • auxiliary power supply modules 960 and 1060 can also refer to the configurations of FIGS. 16I and 16J, and the same beneficial effects can be obtained.
  • the configurations of the embodiments of FIGS. 16D to 16M can also be applied to provide emergency auxiliary power under the structure of multiple lamps in parallel.
  • the corresponding pins of the LED straight tube lamps are connected in parallel with each other, so as to receive the same external driving signal.
  • the first pins 501 of each LED straight tube light are connected in parallel with each other, and the second pins of each LED straight tube light are connected in parallel with each other, and so on.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 can be equivalently connected to the pin of each parallel LED straight tube lamp.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 can provide auxiliary power to light up all the parallel LED lights when the external power supply is abnormal (ie, the external driving signal cannot be supplied normally).
  • the LED straight tube light is used as emergency lighting.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be designed as an energy storage unit with a capacity of 1.5Wh to 7.5Wh and an output power of 1W to 5W .
  • the whole lamp can have a brightness of at least 200-250 lumens, and can be continuously lit for 90 minutes.
  • an auxiliary power supply module may be provided in one of the lamps of the lamp, or in multiple lamps of the lamp.
  • An auxiliary power supply module is provided, wherein the configuration of the lamp tube considering the light uniformity is also applicable to this embodiment.
  • the main difference between this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiments in FIGS. 16A to 16C applied to a multi-lamp lamp structure is that even if only a single lamp is provided with an auxiliary power supply module in this embodiment, it can still supply other lamps through the auxiliary power supply module. Tube power supply.
  • the auxiliary power supply modules 560 , 660 , 760 , 960 , and 1060 of FIGS. 16D to 16M can further determine whether to provide auxiliary power for the LED straight tube light according to the one-light signal.
  • the lighting signal may be an indication signal reflecting the switching state of the light switch. For example, the level of the lighting signal will be adjusted to a first level (eg, a high logic level) or a second level (eg, a low logic level) different from the first level according to the switching of the light switch level).
  • a first level eg, a high logic level
  • a second level eg, a low logic level
  • the indicator switch when the lighting signal is at the first level, the indicator switch is switched to the ON position; when the lighting signal is at the second level, the indicator switch is switched to the OFF position.
  • the generation of the lighting signal can be realized by a circuit for detecting the switching state of the light switch.
  • the auxiliary power supply modules 560 , 660 , 760 , 860 , 960 , 1060 may further include a lighting judging circuit, which is used for receiving the lighting signal, and according to the level of the lighting signal and the detection of the voltage detection circuit The result is to decide whether to make the energy storage unit supply power to the back end.
  • the detection result based on the level of the lighting signal and the voltage detection circuit may have the following three states: (1) the lighting signal is at the first level and the external drive signal is normally provided; (2) the lighting signal is at the first level and (3) the lighting signal is at the second level and the supply of the external drive signal is stopped.
  • state (1) is when the user turns on the light switch and the external power supply is normal
  • state (2) is when the user turns on the light switch but the external power supply is abnormal
  • state (3) is when the user turns off the light switch so that the external power supply is turned off. stop offering.
  • both the state (1) and the state (3) are normal states, that is, the external power supply is normally provided when the user turns on the light and the external power supply is stopped when the user turns off the light. Therefore, in states (1) and (3), the auxiliary power supply module does not provide auxiliary power to the rear end. More specifically, the lighting judgment circuit will prevent the energy storage unit from supplying power to the back end according to the judgment results of the state (1) and the state (3).
  • the external drive signal is directly input to the rectifier circuit 510, and the external drive signal charges the energy storage unit; in state (3), the external drive signal stops providing, so the energy storage unit is not charged.
  • state (2) it means that the external power supply does not normally supply power to the LED straight tube light when the user turns on the light, so at this time, the lighting judgment circuit will make the energy storage unit supply power to the back end according to the judgment result of state (2).
  • the LED module 50 is made to emit light based on the auxiliary power provided by the energy storage unit.
  • the LED module 50 can have three different brightness changes.
  • the first segment is when the external power supply is normally powered, and the LED module 50 has the first brightness (eg, 1600-2200 lumens)
  • the second segment is when the external power supply is not normally powered and the auxiliary power is used instead, the LED module 50 has the second brightness ( For example, 200-250 lumens)
  • the third stage is that the user turns off the power by himself, so that the external power is not provided to the LED straight tube light, at this time, the LED module 50 has the third brightness (the LED module is not lit).
  • the lighting judgment circuit can be, for example, a switch circuit (not shown) connected in series between the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 .
  • the control terminal receives the lighting signal.
  • the switch circuit will be turned on in response to the lighting signal, and then when the external driving signal is normally supplied, the auxiliary power supply positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power supply negative terminal 662 are connected to the energy storage unit.
  • the energy storage unit 663 can provide auxiliary power to the rear LED module 50 via the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 for use (state 2).
  • the switch circuit will be turned off in response to the lighting signal. At this time, even if the external driving signal stops being supplied or the AC level is insufficient, the energy storage unit 663 will not affect the rear end. Provide auxiliary power.
  • the circuit of the auxiliary power supply unit (such as 762 and 862) is designed to be open-loop control, that is, the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply unit has no feedback signal. If the load is open, it will cause the auxiliary power supply module. The output voltage keeps rising and burns out.
  • the present disclosure proposes a plurality of circuit embodiments of auxiliary power supply modules with open-circuit protection, as shown in FIG. 16N and FIG. 16O .
  • FIG. 16N is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 1160 includes a charging unit 1161 and an auxiliary power supply unit 1162 , wherein the auxiliary power supply unit 1162 includes an energy storage unit 1163 for supplying a voltage Vcc, a transformer, a sampling module 1164 and a chip control module 1165 .
  • the transformer includes a primary winding component L1 and a secondary winding component L2.
  • the sampling module 1164 includes a winding L3, and the winding L3 and the secondary winding assembly L2 are wound on the secondary side; the voltage of the secondary winding assembly L2 is sampled through the winding L3, and if the sampled voltage exceeds the set threshold, it is fed back to the chip control module , the switching frequency of the switch M1 electrically connected to the primary winding assembly L1 is adjusted by the chip control module. Then, the output voltage of the secondary side is controlled, so as to achieve the purpose of open circuit protection.
  • the transformer has a primary side unit and a secondary side unit, and the primary side unit includes an energy storage unit 1163 , a primary winding component L1 and a switch M1 .
  • the positive pole of the energy storage unit 1163 is electrically connected to the same-named terminal (ie, the dot terminal) of the primary winding assembly L1, and the negative pole of the energy storage unit 1163 is electrically connected to the ground terminal.
  • the opposite end of the primary winding element L1 is electrically connected to the drain of the switch M1 (take MOS as an example).
  • the gate of the switch M1 is electrically connected to the chip control module 1165 , and the source of the switch M1 is connected to the ground terminal.
  • the secondary side unit includes a secondary winding component L2, a diode D1 and a capacitor C1.
  • the opposite end of the secondary winding component L2 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D1, and the identical end of the secondary winding component L2 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C1.
  • the cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1.
  • Both ends of the capacitor C1 constitute auxiliary power output terminals V1 and V2 (equivalent to both ends of the auxiliary power supply module 960 in FIG. 16K or both ends of the auxiliary power supply module 1060 in FIGS. 16L and 16M).
  • the sampling module 1164 includes a third winding element L3, a diode D2, a capacitor C2 and a resistor R1.
  • the opposite end of the third winding element L3 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D2, and the identical end of the third winding element L3 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2 and the resistor R1.
  • the cathode of the diode D2 is electrically connected to the other end (ie, the A end) of the capacitor C2 and the resistor R1.
  • the capacitor C2 and the resistor R1 are electrically connected to the chip control module 1165 through the A terminal.
  • the chip control module 1165 includes a chip 1166, a diode D3, capacitors C3-C5 and resistors R2-R4.
  • the ground terminal (GT) of the chip 1166 is grounded; the output terminal (OUT) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the gate of the switch M1; the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to one end (B terminal) of the resistor R2, and the chip 1166
  • the discharge terminal (DIS) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor R2; the reset terminal (RST) and the control constant voltage terminal (CV) terminal of the chip 1166 are respectively electrically connected to the capacitors C3 and C4 and then grounded; the discharge terminal (DIS) of the chip 1166 ) is electrically connected to the capacitor C5 through the resistor R2 and then grounded.
  • the power supply terminal (VC terminal) of the chip 1166 receives the voltage Vcc and is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R3; the other end of the resistor R3 is electrically connected to the B terminal.
  • the anode of the diode D3 is electrically connected to the A terminal
  • the cathode of the diode D3 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R4
  • the other end of the resistor R4 is electrically connected to the B terminal.
  • the output voltage between the output terminals V1 and V2 of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is relatively low, usually lower than a certain value (such as lower than 100V, In this implementation, the voltage between V1 and V2 is 60V-80V).
  • the sampling-to-ground voltage of point A in the sampling module 1164 is low, and a small current (negligible) flows through the resistor R4.
  • the voltage between the nodes V1 and V2 of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is relatively high (for example, more than 300V), and the sampling voltage of the point A in the sampling module 1164 is high, and a relatively high voltage flows through the resistor R4. Due to the large current flowing, the discharge time of the capacitor C5 becomes longer, but the charging time of the capacitor C5 does not change; it is equivalent to adjusting the duty cycle of the switch; thus prolonging the cut-off time of the switch M1. For the output side of the transformer, the output energy becomes smaller and the output voltage no longer rises, thus achieving the purpose of open-circuit protection.
  • the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the resistor R2 branch and then electrically connected to the discharge terminal DIS terminal.
  • the DIS terminal is triggered. If the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is working in a normal state (that is, the output voltage does not exceed the set threshold), the voltage of the A terminal can be less than 1/3Vcc; if the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is abnormal, the voltage of the A point can reach or even exceed 1/2Vcc .
  • the output terminal OUT of the chip 1166 When the discharge terminal DIS of the chip 1166 is triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is in the discharge stage), the output terminal OUT of the chip will output a low-level signal, and when the discharge terminal DIS of the chip 1166 is not triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is in the discharge stage) In the charging stage), the output terminal OUT of the chip 1166 will output a high level. In this way, the chip 1166 can control the on/off of the switch M1 through the high/low level of the signal output by the output terminal OUT.
  • FIG. 16Q is a timing diagram of the discharge terminal DIS in the chip 1166 charging and discharging and the output terminal when the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in an abnormal state. It can be seen from the timing sequence that no matter whether the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in a normal state, the time required to charge the capacitor C5 is the same; when it is in an abnormal state, since there is current flowing into the discharge terminal DIS through the B terminal, this is equivalent to prolonging the discharge time of the capacitor C5 , so that the output energy becomes smaller, and the output voltage is no longer increased, so as to achieve the purpose of open circuit protection.
  • the chip control module 1166 can select a chip with a time adjustment function (eg, a 555 timing chip); and then controls the cut-off time of the switch M1.
  • a time adjustment function eg, a 555 timing chip
  • the above scheme only needs simple resistors and capacitors to realize the delay effect. No complicated control algorithms are required.
  • the voltage range of the voltage Vcc in the above scheme is between 4.5V-16V.
  • the open circuit voltage of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is limited to be below a certain value (eg, below 300V, the specific value can be determined by selecting appropriate parameters).
  • FIG. 16O is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the auxiliary power supply module 1260 includes a charging unit 1261 and an auxiliary power supply unit 1262, wherein the auxiliary power supply unit 1262 includes an energy storage unit 1263 that provides a voltage Vcc, a transformer, a sampling module 1264, and a chip control module 1265.
  • the sampling module 1264 in this embodiment is implemented by using an optocoupler sensor.
  • the transformer includes a primary winding component L1 and a secondary winding component L2.
  • the configuration of the primary winding assembly L1 and the switch M1 is the same as that of the previous embodiment.
  • the same-named end of the secondary winding element L2 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D1, and the different-named end of the secondary winding element L2 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C1.
  • the cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1.
  • the two ends of the capacitor C1 are the auxiliary power output terminals V1 and V2.
  • the sampling module 1264 includes an optocoupler PD, the anode side of the photodiode in the optocoupler PD is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode D1 and one end of the capacitor C1, the cathode side of the photodiode is electrically connected to one side of the resistor R4, and the resistor R4
  • the other side of the clamp is electrically connected to one end of the clamping component Rcv, and the other end of the clamping component Rcv is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1.
  • the collector and the emitter of the triode in the optocoupler PD are electrically connected to both ends of the resistor R3, respectively.
  • the chip control module 1265 includes a chip 1266, capacitors C3-C5, and resistors R2 and R3.
  • the power supply terminal (VC terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to the voltage Vcc and the collector of the triode in the optocoupler PD; the discharge terminal (DIS terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the other end of the resistor R2 is electrically connected Connect the emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD;
  • the sampling terminal (THRS terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to the emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD and is electrically grounded through the capacitor C5;
  • the ground terminal (GT terminal) of the chip 1266 ) is electrically grounded;
  • the reset terminal (RST) of the chip 1266 is electrically grounded through the capacitor C3; the constant voltage terminal (CV terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically grounded through the capacitor C4; the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected
  • the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply output terminals (V1, V2) is lower than the clamping voltage of the clamping voltage component Rcv, and the current I1 flowing through the resistor R4 is very small and can be ignored. ;
  • the current I2 flowing through the collector and emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD is very small.
  • the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply output terminals (V1, V2) rises, and when the threshold value of the clamping component Rcv is exceeded, the clamping component Rcv is turned on, so that the current I1 flowing through the current limiting resistor R4 increases, making the optocoupler
  • the PD diode emits light, and the current I2 flowing through the collector and emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD increases proportionally.
  • the current I2 compensates the discharge current of the capacitor C5 through the resistor R2, so that the discharge time of the capacitor C5 is prolonged, so that the corresponding The turn-off time of the switch is lengthened (that is, the duty cycle of the switch is reduced), the output energy is reduced, the output energy of the secondary side is correspondingly reduced, and the output voltage is no longer increased, thereby realizing open-circuit protection.
  • the clamping voltage component Rcv is a varistor, a TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor diode, also known as a transient suppression diode), and a Zener diode.
  • the triggering threshold of the clamping voltage component Rcv is 100V-400V, preferably 150V-350V. In this embodiment, 300V is selected.
  • the resistor R4 is mainly used for its current limiting function, and its resistance value is 20K ohm-1M ohm, preferably 20K ohm-500KM ohm, and 50K ohm in this embodiment.
  • resistance R3 is mainly its current limiting effect, and its resistance value selects 1K ohm-100K ohm, preferably 5K ohm-50KM ohm, and in the present embodiment, selects 6K ohm.
  • the capacitance value of the capacitor C5 is 1nF-1000nF, preferably 1nF-100nF, and 2.2nF in this embodiment.
  • the capacitance value of the capacitor C4 is 1nF-1pF, preferably 5nF-50nF, and 10nF in this embodiment.
  • the capacitance value of the capacitor C1 is 1uF-100uF, preferably 1uF-10uF, and 4.7uF in this embodiment.
  • the energy storage unit 1263 included in the auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 may be a battery or a super capacitor.
  • the DC power supply of the auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 can be managed by a BMS (battery management system), and it can be charged in the general lighting mode. Or simply omit the BMS and charge the DC power supply in normal lighting mode. By selecting appropriate component parameters, charging is performed with a small current (current not exceeding 300mA).
  • auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 of the embodiment of FIG. 16N or 16O its circuit topology is simple, and no dedicated integrated chip is required. Open circuit protection is achieved with fewer components. Improve the reliability of the ballast. In addition, the emergency ballast of this scheme has an output isolation type circuit topology. Reduce the hidden danger of leakage current.
  • the principle of the solutions shown in Figure 16N and Figure 16O is that the detection module is used to sample the voltage (current) information of the output terminal. If the detected information exceeds the set threshold, the discharge time of the discharge terminal of the control chip is extended to prolong the The turn-off time of the switch is used to adjust the duty cycle of the switch (for the control chip, the working voltage of the discharge terminal (DIS) and/or the sampling terminal (THRS) is between 1/3Vcc-2/3Vcc, and the working capacitor C5 For the output side of the transformer, the output energy becomes smaller and the output voltage does not increase, thus achieving the purpose of open circuit protection.
  • FIG. 16P and FIG. 16Q are timing diagrams of triggering of the output terminal OUT and the discharge terminal DIS when the output terminal OUT of the chip initially outputs a high level.
  • 16P is a signal timing diagram of the auxiliary power supply module of an embodiment of the present application when it is in a normal state
  • FIG. 16Q is a signal timing diagram of the auxiliary power supply module of an embodiment of the present application when it is in an abnormal state (eg, open load).
  • the output terminal OUT of the chip 1266 initially outputs a high level. At this time, the discharge terminal DIS is not triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is charged); when the discharge terminal DIS is triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is discharged), the output terminal OUT starts to output a low level. .
  • the chip 1266 controls the on/off of the switch M1 through the signal of the output terminal OUT.
  • a surge protection circuit is further provided on the power supply circuit where the power supply device and the load circuit are located.
  • the surge protection circuit performs surge protection processing on the surge signal superimposed on the external drive signal by filtering out high-frequency signals, discharging excess energy, or temporarily storing excess energy and releasing it slowly.
  • the following takes the circuit structure of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system as an example to illustrate an example circuit structure in which the surge protection circuit is included.
  • FIG. 49A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the ninth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED lighting system of this embodiment includes an LED straight tube lamp 1700 and a surge protection circuit 520'.
  • the LED straight tube light 1700 is, for example, the LED straight tube light 500, 600, 700 or 800 described in the previous embodiments, and the LED straight tube light 1700 includes a power module 5 and an LED module 50, wherein the power module 5 can be, for example, using
  • the circuit structure of the power module corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp 500, 600, 700 or 800 can also be omitted.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' of this embodiment is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp 1700, on the power supply line of the power input source, for example, in the lamp socket, and the surge protection circuit 520' is used to receive external driving signals.
  • the external driving signal may be the AC power signal provided by the external power grid 508 in FIG. 8A to FIG. 8E , the electric signal provided by the ballast, or even the DC signal.
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ reduces the influence of the surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700 .
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is not limited to the application in the LED straight tube lamp lighting system shown in FIG. 49A . In other embodiments, the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is coupled to the rear stage.
  • the LED straight tube light 1700 can also be replaced with other load circuits, and other load circuits can also be electronic devices that use external drive signals to work, such as televisions, smart terminals, electric toys and other electrical devices.
  • the configuration structure and working principle of the surge protection circuit will also be described by taking the LED straight tube lamp as an example, which should not be construed as a limitation on the application of the surge protection circuit.
  • FIG. 49B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment mainly discloses the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the LED lighting system.
  • the input end of the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is coupled to the power of the power input source
  • the input terminal A1 and the output terminal are used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input terminal A1 for processing the external driving signal output by the power input terminal A1.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 1700 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the surge protection circuit 520' and the power input terminal A2, respectively.
  • the surge is generally a sudden voltage signal.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' detects the surge signal and turns on the surge discharge circuit to discharge the surge energy. , reduce the impact of surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700.
  • the power input terminals A1 and A2 can be the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N) of the commercial power, respectively; when the power input source is a ballast, the power input terminals A1 and A2 can be the two output ends of the ballast, and the power input ends A1 and A2 mentioned later are all understood in this way, and will not be repeated here.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' is connected in series with the power supply circuit. When a surge passes through the surge protection circuit 520', a potential difference will be formed on both sides of the surge protection circuit 520'. This potential The difference causes the surge protection circuit 520' to activate the surge protection function.
  • the connection method of the surge protection circuit 520' is not limited thereto.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' is connected in parallel with the power supply circuit, that is, the input end of the surge protection circuit 520' is electrically connected to the power The input terminal A1 and the output terminal are electrically connected to the power input terminal A2. The surge will form a sudden potential difference between the power input terminals A1 and A2.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' causes the surge protection circuit 520' to conduct the energy discharge circuit to Discharge surge energy and reduce the impact of surge on subsequent circuits.
  • the power supply circuit in the foregoing embodiments refers to the path through which the power input source transmits current to the load (eg, the LED module 50 ).
  • the path for transmitting current between the two and the path for transmitting current from the power supply module 5 in the LED straight tube lamp to the LED module 50 is also understood as the power supply circuit mentioned later, and will not be repeated.
  • FIG. 49C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment mainly discloses the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the LED lighting system.
  • the surge protection circuit includes a first surge protection circuit 520a ′ and a second surge protection circuit 520a ′. Two surge protection circuits 520b'.
  • the input end of the first surge protection circuit 520a' is coupled to the power input end A1, the output end is used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input end A1, and the second surge protection circuit 520b'
  • the input end is coupled to the power output end A2, and the output end is used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input end A2.
  • the external driving signals output by the power input terminals A1 and A2 are processed by the surge protection circuit to reduce the influence of the surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700 .
  • the above examples can be easily matched with a power supply module that has not yet integrated a surge protection circuit.
  • the surge protection circuit By externally connecting the surge protection circuit between the power supply module and the power input source, for example, it is set in the lamp holder of the LED straight tube lamp to effectively Improve the surge protection function of the load circuit.
  • the surge protection circuit can also be used as a part of the power module to realize the surge protection function. The following takes the power modules shown in FIGS. The configuration method is explained.
  • FIG. 50A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube light 1800 directly receives an external driving signal provided by a power input source, and the external driving signal is supplied to the corresponding pins of the LED straight tube light 1800 through the power input terminals A1 and A2.
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is disposed in the LED straight tube lamp 1800 as a part of the power module 5 of the LED straight tube lamp 1800 .
  • the power supply module of the LED straight tube light 500, 600, 700, 800, or 1700 in the example has a surge protection circuit 520' added.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' absorbs the surge therein so as to reduce the influence on the subsequent circuit.
  • the power supply module 5 can not only adopt the circuit structure of the power supply module corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp 500, 600, 700 or 800, but also can be omitted.
  • the following embodiments are mainly to illustrate the location of the surge protection circuit 520', not for the power module 5 Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E , dashed lines are used to indicate circuit units or components that may also appear in the power supply module 5 .
  • FIG. 50B is a circuit block diagram illustrating the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module 5 includes a surge protection circuit 520 ′ in addition to the rectification circuit 510 .
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is connected in series to the power supply line connected to the first rectification output end 511 of the rectification circuit 510 to receive the rectified signal.
  • the surge protection circuit 520' performs surge protection processing on the surge signal to reduce the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit.
  • FIG. 50C is a circuit block diagram illustrating the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit includes a first surge protection circuit 520a' and a second surge protection circuit 520b'.
  • the first surge protection circuit 520 a ′ is connected in series to the first rectifier output end 511 of the rectifier circuit 510
  • the second surge protection circuit 522 ′ is connected in series to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 . That is, the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 are simultaneously connected with a surge protection circuit.
  • the surge protection circuit will process it to reduce the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit.
  • FIG. 50D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is connected in series between the first pin 501 and the rectifier circuit 510 to receive an external driving signal, and the rectifier circuit 510 The first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 are connected to the subsequent circuit.
  • the external driving signal is output to the surge protection circuit 520 ′ through the power input terminal A1 through the first pin 501 .
  • the surge protection circuit 520' can absorb the surge energy in the signal and output it to the rectifier circuit 510 for subsequent processing, thereby reducing the impact of the surge on the The effect of LED straight tube lights.
  • FIG. 50E is a circuit block diagram illustrating a configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the first surge protection circuit 520a' is connected in series between the first pin 501 and the rectifier circuit 510
  • the second surge protection circuit 520b' is connected in series
  • the rectifier circuit is connected to its subsequent circuit via the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 . That is, the surge protection circuit simultaneously receives the external driving signal input through the power input terminal A1 and the power input terminal A2.
  • the first surge protection circuit 520a' Process it to reduce the impact of surge on the subsequent circuit; when there is a surge in the external driving signal input through the power input terminal A2, the second surge protection circuit 520b' processes it to reduce the surge Impact on the post-stage circuit.
  • the first and second surge protection circuits (520a', 520b') output the processed external driving signals to the rectifier circuit 510 for subsequent processing, thereby reducing the impact of surges on the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the power supply module 5 shown in FIGS. 50B to 50E above are only examples of how the surge protection circuit is configured in the power supply module.
  • the power supply module 5 shown in FIGS. 50B to 50E can directly supply power to the load output, or the power supply
  • the module 5 also includes other circuits to achieve stable power supply to the load.
  • the first rectifier output end 512 or the output end of the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is connected to other power supply modules 5 .
  • the circuit is connected to provide stable power supply to subsequent LED modules. Examples of other circuits include filter circuits as described in FIG. 12B , FIG. 12C , or FIG. 12H , and drive circuits as described in FIGS.
  • the surge protection circuit can also be coupled to the back end of the filter circuit, or the surge protection circuit and the filter circuit are integrated as an integral unit to make the circuit structure simpler and more compact .
  • the filter circuit and the drive circuit in the power module can also be replaced with the circuits/components required for the power supply of other loads, and the load LED module is Replace with other loads. Taking a fluorescent lamp as the load as an example, the load LED module 50 in FIGS. 50B to 50E is replaced with a fluorescent lamp module and connected to the power module 5 .
  • FIG. 51 is a schematic block diagram of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit 620 ′ has an input end 623 ′ and an output end 624 ′.
  • the surge protection circuit 620 ′ includes Inductive circuit 621' and energy discharge circuit 622'.
  • the inductive circuit 621 ′ is coupled in the power supply loop through the input end 623 ′ and the output end 624 ′ of the surge protection circuit 620 ′ (as shown in FIG. 49A to FIG. 49C or FIG. 50A to FIG. 50E ). It is used to receive and temporarily store the surge energy in the power supply circuit.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' is connected to the input terminal 623' and the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit 620' in parallel with the inductive circuit 621', for discharging the surge energy in the power supply circuit In order to avoid the impact of surge energy on the subsequent circuit.
  • the surge energy will enter the power supply loop along with the external drive signal, and the inductive circuit 621' receives and stores the surge energy to form a potential difference (or This potential difference will make the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ conduct to form an energy discharge path, so that the surge energy can reduce the current/voltage impact of the surge signal on the subsequent circuit through the energy discharge path.
  • the conduction of the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ to form an energy discharge path means that the line where the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is located discharges the energy carried by the surge signal.
  • turning off the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ without forming an energy discharge path means that the circuit where the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is located prevents the current from passing due to an open circuit or a high impedance state.
  • the use of the inductive circuit 621 ′ has the inductive characteristic of suppressing current changes, and the temporary storage refers to the process that the inductive circuit 621 ′ performs an excitation operation to store energy during the period when the surge energy flows, and when the surge signal leaves the inductive This portion of the stored energy is released during demagnetization of circuit 621'.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' provides a release path for the surge energy, so that the surge energy is absorbed, so as to avoid being output to the subsequent circuit.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is connected in parallel with the inductive circuit 621 ′.
  • the inductive circuit 621 ′ stores the energy at the input end of the surge protection circuit 620 ′.
  • a forward potential difference is created between 623' and output 624', and a reverse potential difference is created between input 623' and output 624' of surge protection circuit 620' during the discharge of energy from inductive circuit 621'.
  • both the energy discharge circuit 622' can be turned on under the action of the forward potential difference and the reverse potential difference, then in the forward potential difference stage, the energy discharge circuit 622' can discharge For part of the surge energy, in the reverse potential difference stage, the energy discharge circuit will further discharge the part of the surge energy temporarily stored by the inductive circuit 621'. If the energy discharge circuit 622' is turned on under the action of the reverse potential difference, the energy discharge circuit 622' discharges all the surge energy temporarily stored in the inductive circuit 621' to avoid The effect of surge energy on subsequent circuits.
  • FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram of the potential difference of the inductive circuit in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Vab represents the potential difference between the input terminal 623' and the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit.
  • the first stage ST1 also called the forward potential difference stage
  • the surge energy flows from the input terminal 623' of the surge protection circuit 621' into the inductive circuit 621', and the potential of the input terminal 623' is instantly pulled
  • the potential of the input terminal 623' is higher than the potential of the output terminal 624'.
  • the potential difference formed between the two ends of the inductive circuit 621' is called the forward potential difference.
  • the second stage ST1 also called the reverse potential difference stage
  • the surge energy leaves through the inductive circuit 621 ′, so that the potential of the output terminal 624 ′ is higher than the potential of the input terminal 623 ′.
  • the inductive circuit 621 The potential difference formed at both ends is called the reverse potential difference. That is to say, the energy discharge circuit 622' in FIG. 51 may be configured to be turned on in the first stage ST1 or the second stage ST2 to form an energy discharge path to discharge the surge energy.
  • the energy discharge circuit 112 When the potential difference between the two ends of the energy discharge circuit 622' is greater than the set voltage threshold, the energy discharge circuit 112 is converted from a high resistance state to a low resistance state, and the energy discharge circuit is turned on to discharge the surge energy, thereby reducing the surge energy.
  • the set voltage threshold can be determined by circuit/element characteristic parameters of the energy discharge circuit itself.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance that suppresses current variation.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes, for example, a differential mode inductor.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component (not shown) that is turned on or off in response to a potential difference across the surge protection circuit.
  • the voltage control component DBs1 has the characteristic of being turned on when the voltage difference between the two ends of the surge protection circuit reaches a voltage threshold, and turned off when the voltage threshold is not reached, examples of which include discharge tubes, An electronic component having the above characteristics exemplified by any one of a varistor, a transient suppression diode (TVS), etc., or a control circuit structure exemplified by a circuit structure such as a comparator and a switch.
  • the power supply signal output by the power module contains higher energy
  • the surge protection circuit further includes a current limiting component (not shown), which is connected in series with the voltage control assembly for controlling the transmission direction of the surge energy.
  • the current limiting component is used to limit the energy discharge circuit 622' to be turned on during the forward potential difference (or reverse potential difference), and turned off during the reverse potential difference (or forward potential difference). Examples of the current limiting components include diodes.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a varistor and a diode (neither shown) connected in series, wherein the anode of the diode is connected to the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit 620', and the cathode is connected to the varistor, and so on The situation where the line where the energy discharge circuit 622' is located is turned on during the reverse potential difference is formed.
  • the surge protection circuit Due to the characteristic of the inductive circuit 621 ′ that suppresses current variation, the surge protection circuit also has a filtering function.
  • the surge protection circuit in this application is further integrated with a filter circuit; or, according to the signal stability requirements of the output power supply signal of the circuit structure where the power module is located, the surge protection circuit can also be Set up separately from the filter circuit.
  • a filter circuit for removing the ripple signal is arranged on the LED module side.
  • the circuit structure and working principle of the surge protection circuit will be described by taking as an example that the filter circuit is not provided outside the surge protection circuit in the power module.
  • the external drive signal enters the rectifier circuit 510 through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502, and the rectifier circuit 510 rectifies the external drive signal to output a rectified signal. If the external driving signal does not contain surge energy, the rectified signal is directly filtered by some circuit units or some circuit components in the surge protection circuit, and then output to the rear-stage driving circuit 530, where the filtered signal is filtered by the driving circuit 530. The signal is converted into a driving signal to drive the LED module 50 to work normally.
  • the rectified signal also contains surge energy, which is output to the surge protection circuit. After the surge protection circuit absorbs and discharges the surge energy, it is output to the drive circuit. 530 , the filtered signal is converted into a driving signal by the driving circuit 530 to drive the LED module 50 to work normally.
  • other circuit components can also be added to the power modules shown in FIGS. 53A to 53I as required, such as the filter shown in FIGS. 12B , 12C, and 12F to 12H. circuit, or share some components with the filter circuits shown in 12B, 12C, 12F to 12H.
  • the driving circuits in 53A to 53I can also be replaced with the circuits/components required for the power supply of other loads, or omitted, or in the previous stage of the driving circuit. Or add other circuit components suitable for the load in the latter stage.
  • FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit 620 ′ is configured to include an inductive circuit 621 ′ and an energy discharge circuit 622 ′.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1.
  • the first end of the inductor L1 is connected to the first rectification output end 511 of the rectifier circuit 510 , and the second end is connected to the driving circuit 530 .
  • the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are respectively used for correspondingly coupled to the power input terminals A1 and A2 so that the rectifier circuit 510 can obtain an external driving signal.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component DBs1, and the voltage control component DBs1 is connected in parallel to the a terminal and the b terminal of the inductive circuit 621', for turning on or off in response to the voltage difference between the two ends of the inductance L1, specifically, When the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1 is greater than the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622', it is turned on.
  • the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622' can be regarded as the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1 (this The threshold voltage is determined by the component parameters of the voltage control component BD1), and it is turned on, thereby forming an energy discharge path.
  • the voltage control component DBs1 as the discharge tube as an example, when the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1 is greater than the threshold voltage of the discharge tube (for example, a discharge tube with a threshold voltage between 50V and 200V can be selected), the discharge tube is turned on, and the surge occurs. It can be discharged through the discharge tube, thereby reducing the impact of surge on the subsequent circuit.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration, and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged.
  • the surge protection circuit 620' is connected to the first pin 501 in series without affecting the surge. Circuit characteristics of the guard circuit 620'.
  • FIG. 53B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the surge protection circuit 620 ′ is configured to include an inductive circuit 621 ′ and an energy discharge circuit 622 ′.
  • the energy discharge circuit in this embodiment further includes a current limiting component D1, and the blocking component D1 and the voltage control component DBS1 are connected in series to control the surge energy when discharging. current direction, so that the voltage control component DBS1 can only be turned on in a specific state.
  • the voltage of the first end of the inductor L1 (that is, the end connected to the first rectifier output end 511 ) is greater than that of the second end (that is, the first end 511 ).
  • the voltage at one end connected to the driving circuit 530) exceeds the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBS1 (ie, the forward potential difference), or the voltage at the second end of the inductor L1 is greater than the voltage at the first end and exceeds the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBS1 (that is, the reverse potential difference), the voltage control component DBS1 will enter the conducting state.
  • the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622' is the voltage control component DBS1 and the sum of the threshold voltage of the blocking component D1
  • the current limiting component D1 will be in a conducting state, so that one end connected to the voltage control component DBS1 and the current limiting component D1 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1, Then, the voltage control component DBS1 is turned on in response to the reverse potential difference, forming an energy discharge path to discharge/consume the surge energy.
  • the current limiting component D1 may be implemented using a diode (described below as diode D1 ).
  • the anode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1 , and the cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the voltage control element DBS1 .
  • the diode D1 when the potential difference is the forward potential difference, the diode D1 is in a reverse bias state (reverse bias), so the diode D1 will remain off to make one end of the voltage control component DBS1 float; when the potential difference is the reverse potential difference When , the diode D1 can be in a forward bias state, so the diode D1 is turned on so that one end of the voltage control element DBS1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1 .
  • reverse bias reverse bias
  • the cathode of the diode D1 can also be electrically connected to the first end of the inductor L1, and the anode of the diode D1 can be electrically connected to the voltage control component DBS1, which does not change its working principle.
  • the advantage of adding a current-limiting component to the energy discharge circuit above is that no matter how the surge protection circuit handles the surge in the forward potential difference stage ST1, it can also effectively deal with the surge through the reverse potential difference stage ST2. deal with. For example, the surge that is not effectively eliminated in the forward potential difference stage ST1 is absorbed in the reverse potential difference stage ST2, so that the reliability of the surge protection circuit can be effectively improved. For example, there is a continuous surge in the circuit. If the energy discharge circuit is configured to conduct the energy discharge circuit in the forward potential difference stage ST1, the subsequent surge can also be conducted to the subsequent stage through the energy discharge circuit. level affects. By adding a current limiting component, the reverse potential difference formed by the continuous surge on the inductor L1 can be turned on to form an energy discharge path, and the surge energy can be discharged through the energy discharge path, thereby improving the reliability of the surge protection circuit. .
  • FIG. 53C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53A .
  • the circuit is configured at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 of the rectification circuit 510 at the same time.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1a and an inductance L1b.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes voltage control components DBs1a and DBs1b.
  • the first end of the inductor L1a is coupled to the first rectification output end 511 , the second end is coupled to the driving circuit 530 , the first end of the inductor L1b is coupled to the second rectified output end 512 , and the second end is coupled to the driving circuit 530 .
  • the voltage control component DBs1a is connected in parallel with the inductor L1a, and the voltage control component DBs1b is connected in parallel with the inductor L1b.
  • the voltage control component DBs1a When the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1a is greater than the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1a, the voltage control component DBs1a is turned on. When the potential difference between the two ends of L1b is greater than the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1b, the voltage control component DBs1b is turned on, and the surge can be discharged through the voltage control component DBs1a and the voltage control component DBs1b, thereby reducing the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit. influences.
  • the inductor L1a and the inductor L1b can be differential mode inductors, and the voltage control components DBs1a and DBs1b can be implemented by any one of a discharge tube, a varistor, or a transient suppression diode (TVS), respectively.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged, for example, the surge protection circuit 620' is connected in series on the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge protection circuit 620'.
  • FIG. 53D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53B . The difference is that in this embodiment, the surge protection The circuit is configured at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 of the rectification circuit 510 at the same time.
  • the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1a and an inductance L1b.
  • the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component DBs1a, a voltage control component DBs1b, a current limiting component D1a, and a current limiting component D1b.
  • the first end of the inductor L1a is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511, the second end is coupled to the drive circuit 530, the first end of the inductor L1b is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512, and the second end is coupled to the drive circuit 530.
  • the voltage control component DBs1a and the current limiting component D1a are connected in series with the two ends of the inductor L1a in parallel, and the voltage control component DBs1b and the current limiting component D1b are connected in series with the two ends of the inductor L1b in parallel.
  • the working principle of the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is the same as that of 53B, but the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is respectively disposed at the first rectifier output end 511 and the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the surge protection circuit can respond to it and absorb the surge energy, thereby improving the reliability of the surge protection circuit.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged, for example, the surge protection circuit 620' is connected in series on the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge protection circuit 620'.
  • FIG. 53E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application. It further includes a filter circuit 723'. Wherein, since the inductive circuit in the surge protection circuit also has the function of filtering in the power supply circuit, in some embodiments, in order to simplify the circuit structure, the filtering circuit 723 ′ is the inductive circuit.
  • FIG. 53F is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a surge protection circuit according to a sixth embodiment of the present application. It is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53A , except that the surge protection circuit 720 ′ in this embodiment includes The inductive circuit 721 ′ and the energy discharge circuit 722 ′ further include a filter circuit 723 ′. The structures and connection methods of the inductive circuit 721 ′ and the energy discharge circuit 722 ′ are the same as those in FIG. 53A , and are not repeated here.
  • the filter circuit 723' includes a capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2, one end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the inductive circuit 721', the other end is electrically connected to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510, and one end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected. It is electrically connected to the other end of the inductive circuit 721 ′, and the other end is electrically connected to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 .
  • the inductance L1 in the inductive circuit 721 ′ also has a filtering function in the power supply loop
  • the inductance L1 can also be assigned to the filtering circuit 723 ′, which is the same as the filter circuit 723 ′.
  • the capacitor C1 and the capacitor C2 together form a ⁇ -type filter circuit to filter the received signal.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration, and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 720' can be interchanged without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge circuit.
  • the surge protection circuit 720' is coupled to The first pin 501 and the second pin 502 .
  • FIG. 53G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the current limiting component D1 is further included.
  • the working mode of the surge protection circuit is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53B , only the filtering function is added on the basis thereof, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 53H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the eighth embodiment of the present application, which is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53C, except that the surge protection circuit 720' in this embodiment is It includes an inductive circuit 721', an energy discharge circuit 722', and a filter circuit 723'.
  • the structures and connection methods of the inductive circuit 721' and the energy discharge circuit 722' are the same as those in FIG. 53C, and will not be repeated here.
  • the filter circuit 723' includes a capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2.
  • One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the inductor L1a, the other end is electrically connected to one end of the inductor L1b, and one end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the other end of the inductor L1a. , and the other end is electrically connected to the other end of the inductor L1b.
  • the inductance L1a and the inductance L1b in the inductive circuit 721' also have filtering functions in the power supply loop
  • the inductance L1a and the inductance L1b can also be classified as the The filter circuit 723', together with the capacitor C1 and the capacitor C2, constitutes a filter circuit to filter the received signal.
  • the operation mode of the surge protection circuit is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53C , and only the filtering function is added on the basis thereof, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 53I is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a surge protection circuit according to a ninth embodiment of the present application. Similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53H, the difference is that in this embodiment, the energy discharge circuit 722' further includes a current limiting component D1a and a current limiting component D1b.
  • the current limiting component D1a is connected in series with the voltage control component DBs1a and connected in parallel to both ends of the inductor L1a
  • the current limiting component D1b is connected in series with the voltage control component DBs1b and connected in parallel with both ends of the inductor L1b.
  • the working manner of the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is similar to that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53G , and details are not repeated here.
  • the power module 5 of the LED straight tube lamp 900 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit (eg 510 ), filter circuit (such as 520), and drive circuit (such as 530), an electric shock detection module 2000 is added, wherein the electric shock detection module 2000 includes a detection control circuit 2100 (or a detection controller) and a current limiting circuit 2200.
  • a rectifier circuit eg 510
  • filter circuit such as 520
  • drive circuit such as 530
  • an electric shock detection module 2000 is added, wherein the electric shock detection module 2000 includes a detection control circuit 2100 (or a detection controller) and a current limiting circuit 2200.
  • the power module 5 in this embodiment may include a rectifier circuit (eg, 510) in addition to the detection module 2000. ), a surge protection circuit (eg, 620 ′), and a driving circuit (eg, 530 ).
  • a rectifier circuit eg, 510
  • a surge protection circuit eg, 620 ′
  • a driving circuit eg, 530
  • other circuit units or parts included in the power module 5 are not limited.
  • the detection control circuit 2100 is a circuit configuration for performing the installation state detection/impedance detection of the LED straight tube lamp 900, so as to generate a corresponding control signal according to the detection result, wherein the detection result will indicate the LED straight tube light. Whether the lamp 900 is properly installed on the lamp socket, or it can be said to indicate whether there is abnormal external impedance access (eg, human body impedance).
  • abnormal external impedance access eg, human body impedance
  • the current limiting circuit 2200 is used to determine whether to limit the current to flow on the LED straight tube light 900 in response to the detection result indicated by the control signal, wherein the current limiting circuit 2200 receives an indication that the LED straight tube light 900 is correctly installed/no
  • the current limiting circuit 2200 enables the power supply module 5 to supply power to the LED module 50 normally (that is, the current of the power supply circuit that controls the LED straight tube lamp 900 flows normally), and the current limiting circuit 2200
  • the current limiting circuit 2200 When receiving a control signal indicating that the LED straight tube light 900 is improperly installed/connected with an abnormal external impedance, the current limiting circuit 2200 will limit the current limit of the LED straight tube light to less than an electric shock safety value, such as an electric shock safety value. It is 5MIU (rms) or 7.07MIU (peak).
  • the power loop refers to the path through which the power module 5 transmits current to the LED module 50 .
  • the installation state detection/impedance detection is, for example, the circuit operation in which the detection control circuit 2100 obtains the installation state information/equivalent impedance information of the LED straight tube lamp 900 by detecting the electrical characteristics (such as voltage, current) of the LED straight tube lamp 900 .
  • the detection control circuit 2100 may also perform electrical characteristic detection by controlling the current continuity of the power loop or establishing an additional detection path, thereby avoiding the risk of electric shock during detection. Specific circuit embodiments of the detection control circuit for electrical characteristic detection will be described below with reference to Figures 18 to 45F.
  • FIG. 17B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 of this embodiment is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp 1000 and located on the power supply path of the external power grid 508 , for example, in the lamp socket.
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 will be connected in series to the power circuit of the LED straight tube light 1000 through the corresponding pins, so that the electric shock detection module 2000 can use The installation detection/impedance detection method described in the above embodiment of FIG.
  • the configuration of the electric shock detection module 2000 is the same as that in the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 17A , and details are not repeated here.
  • the architecture of the embodiments of Figures 17A and 17B can be integrated.
  • a plurality of electric shock detection modules 2000 may be installed in the LED straight tube light lighting system, wherein at least one electric shock detection module 2000 is disposed inside the LED straight tube light, and at least another installation detection module is disposed in the LED straight tube light Externally (for example, in the lamp socket), the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is electrically connected through the pins on the lamp head, so that the effect of electric shock protection can be further improved.
  • FIG. 17C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 1600 of the present embodiment is, for example, an external power supply type (Type-C) LED straight tube lamp, and the power supply module 5 is disposed in the LED straight tube.
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 is arranged inside the LED straight tube lamp 1600 and includes a detection control circuit 2100 and a current limiting circuit 2200 .
  • the current limiting circuit 2200 may be disposed on the power supply path and controlled by the detection control circuit 2100.
  • the specific operation mechanism of the electric shock detection module 2000 can be referred to as described in other corresponding embodiments, which will not be repeated here. Repeat. It is worth mentioning that, in the application of this embodiment, due to the function of the electric shock detection module 2000 , even if the external power module 5 is implemented with a non-isolated power conversion circuit, there is no risk of electric shock. Compared with the external power supply with the traditional LED straight tube lamp, the design options of the external power supply can be more diversified because it is no longer limited to the isolated power conversion circuit for matching design.
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 described herein is a circuit configuration applied in a power supply module of an LED straight tube lamp, which can be implemented by discrete circuits or integrated circuits, and the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • the name of the electric shock detection module 2000 is only to recognize its main function, but not to limit its scope.
  • any circuit configuration that can perform the circuit operations claimed in the present disclosure, or has the configuration and connection relationship of electronic components claimed in the present disclosure belongs to the scope claimed by the electric shock detection module 2000 of the present disclosure .
  • the electric shock detection module 2000 can also be named as a detection circuit, an installation detection module/circuit, an electric shock prevention module/circuit, an electric shock prevention detection module/circuit, an impedance detection module/circuit, or a direct expression It is a circuit configuration, and the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • FIGS. 17A and 17B the connection relationship between the LED straight tube lamp 900/1000 and the external power grid 508 is only schematically depicted, and it is not limited that the external driving signal is input to the LED straight tube lamp 900/1000 from a single end. 1000, together with the first description.
  • FIG. 17D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application.
  • the circuit configuration in this embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 17A , and the difference is that the LED straight tube lamp 900 in this embodiment further includes an impedance adjustment module 9100 .
  • the installation detection module 2000 will determine that the LED tube is installed abnormally, and the current limiting circuit 2200 will limit the current limit of the LED straight tube lamp to less than the electric shock safety value.
  • the electric shock safety value is, for example, 5MIU (effective value) or 7.07MIU (peak value), and the lamp cannot be lit normally.
  • the impedance adjustment module 9100 is electrically connected to the input end of the power supply module 5 and the power supply input end of the external power grid 508 to change the impedance characteristic of the power supply loop so that the LED straight tube lamp can still be lit normally when the line impedance Rh is large.
  • the impedance of the impedance adjustment module 9100 is set to be higher than the critical protection point.
  • the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp tube is abnormally installed and the lamp tube cannot be lit normally.
  • the power supply circuit is a circuit through which the external power grid 508 supplies power to the LED straight tube lamp 900 .
  • the two LED straight tube lamps are connected to the external power grid 508 in parallel, and the resistance Rh is the line impedance.
  • the impedance adjustment module 9100 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-1 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N
  • the impedance adjustment module 9100 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-2 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N.
  • the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp is installed normally , the LED straight tube light 900-1 lights up normally; similarly, the LED light 900-2 lights up normally.
  • the impedance adjustment module included in the LED straight tube lamp is also connected in parallel to the power supply circuit. After the influence of the impedance adjustment module, the installation detection module determines that the LED lamp is normal. installed without being affected by the line impedance Rh.
  • the installation detection module 2000 in the LED straight tube light 900-1 determines the impedance in the line, so that the LED light 900-1 is normally lit without being affected by the line impedance Rh.
  • the impedance of the impedance adjustment modules 9100 in the two LED straight tube lamps in parallel is less than the critical value Protection point, the LED straight tube light is normally lit.
  • the critically lit lamps can be set to n, that is, when the lamps connected to the power supply circuit are less than n, the impedance of the n LED straight tube lamps after the impedance adjustment modules 9100 are connected in parallel is greater than the critical protection point, The LED straight tube lamp cannot be lit normally; when the lamps connected to the power supply circuit are greater than or equal to n, the impedance of the impedance adjustment modules 9100 in n LED straight tube lamps connected in parallel is less than the critical protection point, and the LED straight tube lamp can be lit normally. Bright.
  • the impedance adjustment module 9100 includes a capacitor C9.
  • the capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N, that is, one pin of the capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminal L, and the other pin of the capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminal N.
  • Rh is the line impedance, and Rh is greater than the set threshold. This set threshold is the critical value for the installation detection module to determine whether the lamp is installed normally. When the impedance of the power supply circuit is greater than the set threshold, the installation detection module determines that the lamp is installed abnormally. When the resistance of the power supply circuit is less than the set threshold, the installation The detection module determines that the lamp is installed normally, and the LED straight lamp is normally lit.
  • the installation detection module 2000 determines whether there is an abnormal impedance access circuit/whether the lamp is installed normally by detecting the electrical signal in the circuit. In the electric shock detection stage, the capacitor C9 is discharged to the subsequent circuit, and the detection current in the power supply circuit detected by the installation detection module 2000 is larger than that of the circuit without the capacitor C9, but the electric shock detection current is still less than the set safety threshold. The module determines that the lamp is installed abnormally and the lamp cannot be lit normally.
  • the power supply input terminal is connected to capacitors C9 and C10 at the same time.
  • the specifications of capacitor C9 and capacitor C10 are set to be the same, and capacitor C9 After being connected in parallel with C10, it can be equivalent to C11, and the equivalent capacitor C11 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N.
  • the external drive signal After the system is powered on, the external drive signal first charges the equivalent capacitor C11, and the equivalent capacitor C11 discharges to the lamp at the same time. Since the capacitance value of the equivalent capacitor C11 is twice that of the capacitor C9, the installation detection module 2000 detects the electric shock during the electric shock detection stage.
  • the detection current in the incoming power supply circuit is larger than that when only one lamp is connected to the circuit. At this time, the electric shock detection current is greater than the set safety threshold.
  • the installation detection module determines that the lamp is installed normally, and the LED straight lamp 900-1 can be installed. Normally lit, the same LED straight tube light 900-2 can also be lit normally.
  • the capacitances incorporated into the power supply input terminals L and N will increase with the increase of the lamps. Increase, the capacitance value of its equivalent capacitance will also increase.
  • the number of lamps incorporated into the power supply loop is n (n ⁇ 2)
  • the capacitance value of the equivalent capacitor is nC9.
  • the impedance adjustment module shields" the installation detection module. It can be understood that the impedance adjustment module detects by changing the installation.
  • the installation detection current of the stage enables the installation detection module to judge that the lamp is normally installed and light the lamp normally.
  • n>2 the equivalent capacitance value nC9 connected to the power supply loop is greater than the critical capacitance value, and the impedance adjustment module "shields" the installation of the detection module to make the lamp light normally.
  • the capacitance value of the capacitor C9 in the impedance adjustment module can be changed to change the number of lamps that are critically lit. For example, it can be set that when the number of lamps connected to the power supply circuit is greater than or equal to 3, the LED lamps are normally lit, and the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp is normally installed and the LED straight lamp is normally lit. At this time, even if only one lamp is connected to the LED lighting system, it can still be lit normally.
  • the impedance adjustment module is installed in the LED straight tube lamp, it does not affect the safety performance of the lamp tube, that is, there is no risk of electric shock when the installer performs online installation.
  • FIG. 17G the LED straight tube lamps 900-1 and 900-2 have been connected to the power supply circuit and are normally lit.
  • the installer accidentally touches the mounting pins of the light tube, and the human body is connected to the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube light 900-3.
  • the external drive signal first passes through the line impedance Rh and The human body impedance Rm charges the capacitor in the impedance adjustment module, and the installation detection module 2000 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-3 performs electric shock detection. Since the capacitance value of the capacitor C12 is lower than the critical capacitance value, the power supply circuit detected by the installation detection module The detection current is less than the set safety threshold, the installation detection module determines that the LED straight tube light 900-3 is installed abnormally, the LED straight tube light 900-3 cannot be lit normally, and the current flowing through the human body is less than the critical safety current (5MIU), There is no risk of electric shock for installation and inspection personnel.
  • 5MIU critical safety current
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power supply module according to a tenth embodiment of the present application.
  • the LED straight tube light 1100 directly receives, for example, an external driving signal provided by the external power grid 508 , wherein the external driving signal is supplied to the LED straight tube light 1100 through the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N). on both ends of the pins 501 and 502.
  • the LED straight tube lamp 1100 may further include pins 503 and 504 .
  • the electric shock detection module 3000 is disposed in the lamp tube and includes a detection control circuit 3100 and a current limiting circuit 3200.
  • the electric shock detection module 3000 can also be referred to as an installation detection module 3000 (the installation detection module is described below for 3000).
  • the current limiting circuit 3200 is coupled to the rectifier circuit 510 via the first installation detection terminal TE1 , and is coupled to the filter circuit 520 via the second installation detection terminal TE2 , that is, connected in series to the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 .
  • the detection control circuit 3100 will detect the signal flowing through the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 in the detection mode (ie, the signal flowing through the power circuit), and determine whether to disable the external driving signal (ie, the signal flowing through the power circuit) according to the detection result. , the signal provided by the external power grid 508 ) flows through the LED straight tube light 1100 .
  • the detection control circuit 3100 When the LED straight tube lamp 1100 has not been properly installed in the lamp socket, the detection control circuit 3100 will detect a small current signal and determine that the signal flows through an excessively high impedance. At this time, the current limiting circuit 3200 will connect the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the The current path between the second mounting detection terminals TE2 is cut off to stop the operation of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 (ie, the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not lit).
  • the detection control circuit 3100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket, and the current limiting circuit 3200 will maintain the conduction between the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 operates normally (That is, the LED straight tube lamp 1100 can be normally lit).
  • the installation detection module 3000 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 Correctly installed on the lamp socket to make the current limiting circuit 3200 conduct, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 operates in a conducting state;
  • the installation detection module 3000 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not correctly installed on the lamp socket, so that the current limiting circuit 3200 is turned off, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 enters a non-stop state.
  • the ON state or the RMS current on the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is limited to less than 5mA (5MIU based on the verification standard).
  • the installation detection module 3000 determines whether it is turned on or off based on the detected impedance, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is operated to be turned on or into a non-conduction/limited current state. In this way, the user can avoid the problem of electric shock due to mistakenly touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 when the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not properly installed on the lamp socket.
  • the installation detection module 3000 can determine whether the user touches the lamp by detecting the voltage/current change on the power circuit. , the above-mentioned anti-electric shock function can be realized. In other words, in the embodiment of the present application, the installation detection module 3000 can determine whether the lamp is installed correctly and whether the user touches the lamp by mistake by detecting electrical signals (including voltage or current) the conductive part. Furthermore, compared with the general LED power module, in some embodiments, the power module equipped with the installation detection module 3000 itself has the effect of preventing electric shock, so it is not necessary to design the rectifier circuit as in the general power circuit design.
  • the input terminal of 510 (ie, between the live wire and the neutral wire) is provided with a safety capacitor (ie, the X capacitor).
  • a safety capacitor ie, the X capacitor.
  • the equivalent capacitance value between the input terminals of the rectifier circuit 510 may be, for example, less than 47nF.
  • the power loop refers to the current path in the LED straight tube lamp 1100 , that is, from the pin receiving the first polarity/phase power (eg L line), through the power line and circuit components to the LED module , and then go through the LED module to the path formed by the pin that receives the second polarity/phase power supply (eg, N line).
  • the power circuit is formed between the pins 501 and 502 on the lamp caps on opposite sides of the lamp tube, not between the two pins 501 and 503 of the lamp cap on the same side ( or between 502 and 504).
  • the arrangement of the current limiting circuit 3200 between the rectifier circuit 510 and the filter circuit 520 is only an example of the present application.
  • the current limiting circuit 3200 only needs to be set at a position where the power loop can be controlled to be turned on and off to achieve the effect of preventing electric shock by installing the detection module 3000 .
  • the current limiting circuit 3200 may be disposed between the filter circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530, or between the driving circuit 530 and the LED module (50), but the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the electric shock detection method includes: turning the detection path on for a period of time and then turning it off (step S101 ); sampling the electrical signal on the detection path (Ste S102); determine whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics (step S103); when step S103 is determined to be yes, control the current limiting circuit 3200 to operate in the first configuration (step S104); and when step S103 determines If not, control the current limiting circuit 3200 to operate in the second configuration (step S105), and then return to step S101.
  • the detection path may be a power supply loop or an independent current path connected to the output side of the rectifier circuit 510 , and the specific configuration can refer to the description of the embodiments in FIGS. 19A to 26B below.
  • the setting of the period length, interval, and trigger time of the detection control circuit 3100 conducting the detection path can also refer to the description of the following embodiments.
  • conducting the detection path for a period of time may be implemented by a pulsed switch control means.
  • the sampled electrical signal may be a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, or a phase signal, or a signal that can represent the impedance change of the detection path.
  • the action of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the predetermined signal characteristic may be, for example, comparing the relative relationship between the sampled electrical signal and a predetermined signal.
  • the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics, which may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed/connected with no abnormal impedance, and the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal does not conform to the preset signal characteristics. It is assumed that the signal characteristics may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed/connected with abnormal impedance.
  • the first configuration and the second configuration are two different circuit configurations, and may depend on the configuration position and type of the current limiting circuit 3200 .
  • the first configuration may be a conduction configuration (no current limiting group). state)
  • the second configuration may be a cut-off configuration (current limiting configuration).
  • FIG. 19A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000a includes a detection pulse generation module 3110, a detection result latch circuit 3120, a detection determination circuit 3130, and a current limiting circuit 3200a.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 , the detection result latch circuit 3120 and the detection determination circuit 3130 constitute the detection control circuit 3100 .
  • the detection and determination circuit 3130 (via the switch coupling terminal 3201 and the current limiting circuit 3200a) is coupled to the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 to detect the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 between the signals.
  • the detection determination circuit 3130 is also coupled to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the detection result terminal 3131 , so as to transmit the detection result signal to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the detection result terminal 3131 .
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 is coupled to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the pulse signal output terminal 3111 , and generates a pulse signal to notify the detection result latch circuit 3120 of the timing of latching the detection result.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result according to the detection result signal (or the detection result signal and the pulse signal), and is coupled to the current limiting circuit 3200a through the detection result latch terminal 3121 to transmit or reflect the detection result to the current limiting circuit 3200a .
  • the current limiting circuit 3200a determines to turn on or off the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2 according to the detection result.
  • the current limiting circuit 3200a may also be a switch circuit 3200a (the switch circuit 3200a is described below).
  • the installation detection module 3000a further includes a ballast detection module 3150 .
  • the ballast detection module 3150 is used to determine whether the external driving signal is an AC signal provided by the ballast, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 can adjust the control method of the switch circuit 3200a according to the determination result, so as to ensure the performance of the ballast.
  • the LED straight tube lamp will emit a prompt (such as flashing) to remind the user of misuse, so as to avoid the AC signal output by the ballast from damaging the ballast Bypass type LED straight tube light.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 may also be referred to as a misuse warning module.
  • the above description is that the ballast detection module 3150 is used to detect whether the signal of the power circuit is the characteristic signal of the ballast, and outputs the first detection signal when it is detected that the signal of the power circuit is the characteristic signal of the ballast .
  • the ballast characteristic signal is used to describe the high frequency, high voltage and other characteristics of the AC signal output by the ballast (especially the electronic ballast).
  • the source of the external drive signal can be identified by detecting the electrical signal characteristics such as the frequency, amplitude or phase of the bus voltage.
  • the characteristic signal of the ballast represents the high frequency value (or interval) of the AC signal output by the ballast by the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal.
  • the characteristic signal of the ballast represents the valley phase of the AC signal output by the ballast by the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 detects at least one of the frequency, phase, and amplitude of the signal in the power circuit through its terminal to determine whether the signal is a ballast characteristic signal.
  • the first detection signal (or referred to as the first indication signal) is used to indicate that the external driving signal is provided by the ballast.
  • the terminal of the ballast detection module 3150 is connected to the output or input of the rectifier circuit in the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the path 3151, wherein the ballast detection module 315 detects the bus voltage in the power module, and according to the detected signal characteristics of the bus voltage To judge whether the external driving signal currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is the AC signal output by the ballast or the AC signal directly provided by the power grid
  • the ballast detection module 3150 may sample the signal on the rectified output 511/512 and determine the frequency of the sampled signal (ie, the frequency of the bus voltage).
  • the frequency of the signal detected by the ballast detection module 3150 is greater than a set value, it means that the currently input external driving signal is a high-frequency AC signal, that is, the external driving signal may be provided by the ballast, so
  • the ballast detection module 3150 sends a first indication signal (indicating that the external driving signal is provided by the ballast) to the detection result latch circuit 3120, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switching state of the switch circuit 3200a according to the first indication signal , to affect the current continuity on the power loop.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 when the frequency of the signal detected by the ballast detection module 3150 is less than or equal to the set value, it means that the currently input external driving signal is a low-frequency AC signal, that is, the external driving signal may be an AC signal. provided by the power grid, so the ballast detection module 3150 will send a second indication signal (indicating that the external drive signal is provided by the AC power grid) to the detection result latch circuit 3120, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit according to the second indication signal
  • the 3200a is maintained in an on state, so that the driving signal can be stably supplied to the rear LED modules, so that the LED modules can have consistent/uniform luminous brightness.
  • the above installation detection device further includes an installation prompt module.
  • the ballast detection module 3150 is electrically connected to an installation prompt module (not shown in the figure), and the installation prompt module is used to issue a misuse prompt of the LED straight tube lamp according to the first detection signal.
  • the installation prompt module adjusts the current continuity change on the power circuit according to the first detection signal, so that the rear LED module will A specific light pattern (light pattern) is generated in response to the continuous change of the current on the power circuit, which may prompt the user that there may be a wrong installation at present.
  • the continuous change of the current on the power loop is to adjust the intermittent-on-off change of the current in the power loop, so that the LED module at the back end will generate a specific light pattern of on-off.
  • the continuous change of the current on the power loop is to adjust the strong-to-weak change of the current in the power loop, so that the LED module at the back end can generate a specific light-dark light pattern.
  • the installation prompting module is also electrically connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130, and is used for controlling the disconnection of the power circuit according to the prompting logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal.
  • the installation prompting module includes: a control circuit and the switch circuit 3200a in the example shown in FIG. 19A , the control circuit is connected with the detection pulse generation module 3110 , the detection determination circuit 3130 , and the ballast detection module 3150 and the switch circuit 3200a are electrically connected to control the switch circuit 3200a to be turned off when it is determined according to the pulse signal and the detection result signal that the LED straight tube lamp is not correctly installed in the lamp socket; or When the first detection signal is received, the switch circuit 3200a is controlled to be turned on or off to affect the current continuity on the power loop, so that the LED module at the rear end generates the above-mentioned specific lighting pattern.
  • control circuit in the installation prompting module is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 for receiving the periodic control signal generated by the detection result latch circuit 3120 based on the first indication signal,
  • the control circuit periodically controls the switching circuit 3200a to be turned on and off, so that the specific lighting pattern generated by the LED module is, for example, flickering at a constant frequency or an indefinite frequency.
  • the control circuit and the detection result latch circuit 3120 include shared circuit structures, such as logic circuits and the like.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 can periodically turn on and turn off the switch circuit 3200a when receiving the first indication signal, so that the magnitude of the driving current is affected by the switching of the switch circuit 3200a, thereby making the LED module The brightness of the light changes accordingly, forming a flickering light pattern.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 includes a circuit configuration shared with the control circuit.
  • the installation detection module 3000a further includes a prompt circuit 3160 .
  • the installation prompting module includes: prompting circuit 3160 .
  • the prompting circuit 3160 is controlled by the detection result latching circuit 3120 to issue misuse warnings such as sound and light when the LED straight tube lamp is misused, so as to remind the user of wrong installation. More specifically, the prompt circuit 3160 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the path 3161 to receive the signal sent by the detection result latch circuit 3120 . When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the first indication signal, the detection result latch circuit 3160 sends a signal to enable the prompt circuit 3160, so that the prompt circuit 3160 issues a misuse warning.
  • the prompt circuit 3160 can be implemented with a buzzer, so that when the LED straight tube lamp is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket with a ballast, a buzzer sound is emitted to remind the user that the current misuse occurs situation. But it is not limited to this.
  • the prompt circuit 684 may further include a prompt light, so as to emit different colors or colors when the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket with the ballast. Different intensities of light to remind users of the current installation status.
  • the prompt circuit 684 may include a buzzer and a prompt light at the same time, so that when the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed in a lamp socket with a ballast, the buzzer sound and prompt light can be used at the same time. Lights alert the user to a current misuse situation.
  • control switch circuit 3200a is turned off to maintain the power circuit in a cut-off state, so as to avoid the possible danger caused by the user not removing the LED straight tube light immediately.
  • the installation prompting module is also electrically connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130 for controlling the power circuit to be disconnected according to the prompting logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal;
  • the first detection signal sends out a misuse prompt of the LED straight tube lamp; or the power loop is controlled to be disconnected according to the prompt logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal, and the LED is sent out according to the first detection signal at the same time. Misuse tips for straight tube lamps.
  • the installation prompting module performs leakage detection and prompting, and ballast misuse detection and prompting according to a preset time sequence, and gives corresponding prompts according to the detection situation.
  • the timing sequence can be used to represent the timing sequence of leakage detection and ballast misuse detection, or the timing sequence of leakage current prompt and ballast misuse prompt.
  • the installation prompting module indicates leakage and misuse of the ballast through the configured switch circuit and control circuit, and the installation detection device performs the leakage detection and prompting and the misuse of the ballast in sequence.
  • the control circuit in the installation prompting module controls the switch circuit to perform the corresponding prompting operation according to the sequence of the received test result signal and the first test signal.
  • the installation prompting module indicates misuse of the ballast through the configured prompting circuit, and indicates leakage through the switch circuit and the control circuit, respectively, then the installation detection device can be arranged in sequence or at the same time. Perform leakage detection and prompting and ballast misuse detection and prompting. Correspondingly, the installation prompting module will give corresponding prompts in sequence or at the same time.
  • the multiplexing circuit structure may be omitted, shared, or based on timing.
  • the installation detection device includes an independent circuit structure for leakage detection and prompting functions, and an independent circuit structure for ballast detection and prompting functions.
  • the above-mentioned installation detection device can be omitted in which both the temporary storage of the detection result signal and the first detection can be omitted.
  • the installation detection module 3000a further includes an emergency control module 3140 .
  • the emergency control module 3140 is used to determine whether the external drive signal is a DC signal provided by the auxiliary power supply module, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 can adjust the control mode of the switch circuit 3200a according to the determination result, so as to directly control the LED.
  • the malfunction of the installation detection module due to the input of the auxiliary power supply can be avoided. The parts of this embodiment that are the same as those of the previous embodiment will not be repeated here.
  • the emergency control module 3140 is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the path 3141, wherein the emergency control module 3140 detects the bus voltage in the power module, and determines whether the external driving signal currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is is a DC signal. If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the external driving signal is a DC signal, the emergency control module 3140 will output the first state signal indicating the emergency state to the detection result latch circuit 3120; otherwise, if the emergency control module 3140 determines that the external driving signal is a non-DC signal signal, the emergency control module 3140 will output a second state signal indicating the non-emergency state to the detection result latch circuit 3120 .
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the first state signal, no matter what the outputs of the detection pulse generation module 3110 and the detection determination circuit 3130 are, the detection result latch circuit 3120 will keep the current limiting circuit 3200a in a conducting state ( This state can be considered emergency mode).
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the second state signal, the detection result latch circuit 3120 operates according to the original mechanism, ie, controls the current limiting circuit 3200a to be turned on or off based on the pulse signal and the detection result signal.
  • the bus voltage described herein may be the input voltage/signal before the bridge (ie, the external driving signal) or the rectified voltage/signal after the bridge, which is not limited in the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 48B is attached below to further illustrate the specific working mechanism of the installation detection module with the emergency control module 3140 .
  • FIG. 48B is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 19A and FIG. 48B at the same time, when the power module of the LED straight tube light receives the external driving signal, the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the bus voltage (step S201 ), and determine whether the bus voltage is continuously high during the first period at the first level (step S202 ), wherein the first period may be, for example, 75ms, and the first level may be any level between 100V-140V, such as 110V or 120V. In other words, in an embodiment of step S202, the emergency control module 3140 determines whether the bus voltage is continuously higher than 110V or 120V for more than 75ms.
  • step S202 If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S202, it means that the currently received external driving signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and makes the detection result latch circuit 3120 control the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S203), wherein the first configuration may be, for example, a conduction configuration. On the contrary, if the emergency control module 3140 determines NO in step S202, it means that the currently received external driving signal is an AC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 determines the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp by outputting a pulse signal to the switch circuit 3200a. For the specific operation of the installation detection module 3000a in the detection mode, reference may be made to the description of the relevant embodiments.
  • the emergency control module 3140 in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 3200a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 further determines whether the bus voltage rises above the second level (step S204). If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the bus voltage does not rise to a level greater than the second level, it means that it is still in the emergency mode, so the switch circuit 3200a will continue to maintain the first configuration. If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the bus voltage rises from the first level to greater than the second level, it means that the external drive signal currently received by the power module has been switched from a DC signal to an AC signal, that is, the external power grid has resumed power supply. The emergency control module 3140 will cause the installation detection module 3000a to enter the detection mode.
  • the second level may be any level greater than the first level but less than 277V, for example, when the first level is 110V, the second level is 120V.
  • the emergency control module 3140 determines whether the bus voltage has a rising edge greater than 120V, and when the determination is yes, it enters the detection mode.
  • a detection device is installed to obtain the signal of the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp, and the LED is emitted when it is detected that the signal is the characteristic signal of the ballast. Indicates the misuse of the straight tube light, and/or disconnects the power circuit when human contact with the signal is detected.
  • the installation detection device can be used for ballast detection or leakage detection alone, or can be used for both ballast detection and leakage detection.
  • the installation detection device is used to perform both ballast detection and leakage detection.
  • the circuit structure and detection method of the ballast detection are as described in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the circuit structure and detection of the leakage detection are as follows: The method is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and any leakage detection method capable of detecting whether the signal is in contact with a human body (ie, whether there is leakage) falls within the scope of this application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 , the detection determination circuit 3130 , the detection result latch circuit 3120 and the switch circuit 3200 a in the installation detection module 3000 a can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 19B to 19E respectively (but not only limited to this), wherein FIG. 19B to FIG. 19E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
  • FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 includes capacitors C11 (or the first capacitor), C12 (or the second capacitor) and C13 (or the third capacitor), resistors R11 (or the first resistor), R12 (or the third capacitor) Two resistors) and R13 (or third resistor), buffer (buffer) BF1 (or first buffer) and BF2 (or second buffer), inverter INV, diode D11 (or called first buffer) is the first diode) and the OR gate (OR gate) OG1 (or the first OR gate).
  • the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11 are connected in series between a driving voltage (for example, called, and often set as a high level) and a reference potential (here, the ground potential is used as an example), which The connection point is coupled to the input end of the buffer BF1.
  • the resistor R12 is coupled to a driving voltage (which may be referred to as VCC) and the input terminal of the inverter INV.
  • the resistor R13 is coupled between the input end of the buffer BF2 and a reference potential (here, the ground potential is used as an example).
  • the positive terminal of the diode is grounded, and the negative terminal is also coupled to the input terminal of the buffer BF2.
  • One end of the capacitor C12 and one end of the capacitor C13 are commonly coupled to the output end of the buffer BF1, the other end of the capacitor C12 is connected to the input end of the inverter INV, and the other end of the capacitor C13 is coupled to the input end of the buffer BF2.
  • the output terminal of the inverter INV and the output terminal of the buffer BF2 are coupled to the input terminal of the OR gate OG1.
  • FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the input end of the buffer BF1 is coupled to the connection point between the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11, so it outputs a high level signal at the beginning, and when the level of the connection point between the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11 drops to the low logic judgment level, it turns into low level signal. That is, the buffer BF1 generates an input pulse signal, and then keeps the low level (stops outputting the input pulse signal).
  • the pulse width of the input pulse signal is equal to a (initially set) time period, and the time period is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C11 and the resistance of the resistor R11.
  • the connection end of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 is also at a high level.
  • one end of the resistor R13 is grounded, and one end of the capacitor C13 receives the pulse signal of the buffer BF1. Therefore, the connection terminal of the capacitor C13 and the resistor R13 is at a high level at the beginning, and then gradually drops to zero with time (at the same time, the capacitor stores a voltage equal to or close to the driving voltage VCC).
  • the inverter INV outputs a low-level signal
  • the buffer BF2 outputs a high-level signal
  • the OR gate OG1 outputs a high-level signal (the first pulse signal DP1 ) at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 .
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result for the first time according to the detection result signal and the pulse signal.
  • the buffer BF2 turns to output a low level signal, so that the OR gate OG1 outputs a low level signal at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 (stop outputting the first pulse signal DP1).
  • the pulse width of the pulse signal output by the OR gate OG1 is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C13 and the resistance of the resistor R13.
  • the buffer BF2 still keeps outputting the low-level signal.
  • the level of one end of the capacitor C12 is instantly reduced to zero by the driving voltage VCC, so that the connection terminal of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 is at a low level .
  • the output signal of the inverter INV changes to a high level, so that the OR gate outputs a high level (the second pulse signal DP2).
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result for the second time according to the detection result signal and the pulse signal.
  • the resistor R12 charges the capacitor C12, so that the level of the connection terminal between the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 gradually increases with time to be equal to the driving voltage VCC.
  • the inverter INV When the level of the connection terminal of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 rises to the high logic level, the inverter INV outputs the low level again, and the OR gate OG1 stops outputting the second pulse signal DP2.
  • the pulse width of the second pulse signal is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C12 and the resistance of the resistor R12.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates two high-level pulse signals in the detection mode - the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2, which are output from the pulse signal output terminal 3111, and the first pulse signal and the second pulse signal DP2.
  • the set time interval TIV is mainly determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C11 and the resistance of the resistor R11. resistance value to decide.
  • the adjustment of the set time interval TIV may be implemented by setting the frequency/period or other adjustable parameters of the digital circuit.
  • FIG. 19C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3130 includes a comparator CP11 (or a first comparator) and a resistor R14 (or a fourth resistor).
  • the inverting terminal of the comparator CP11 receives the reference level signal Vref, and the non-inverting terminal is grounded through the resistor R14 and coupled to the switch coupling terminal 3201 at the same time.
  • FIG. 19C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3130 includes a comparator CP11 (or a first comparator) and a resistor R14 (or a fourth resistor).
  • the inverting terminal of the comparator CP11 receives the reference level signal Vref, and the non-inverting terminal is grounded through the resistor R14 and coupled to the switch coupling terminal 3
  • the signal flowing into the current limiting circuit 3200 a from the first installation detection terminal TE1 will be output through the switch coupling terminal 3201 and flow through the resistor R14 .
  • the comparator CP11 When the current flowing through the resistor R14 is too large (that is, higher than or equal to the installation setting current, for example, the current value is 2A) and the level on the resistor R14 is higher than the level of the reference level signal Vref (corresponding to The two lamp caps are correctly inserted into the lamp socket), the comparator CP11 generates a high-level detection result signal and outputs it from the detection result terminal 3131 .
  • the comparator CP11 when the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the comparator CP11 will output a high-level detection result signal Sdr at the detection result terminal 3131 .
  • the comparator CP11 When the current flowing through the resistor R14 is insufficient to make the level on the resistor R14 higher than the level of the reference level signal Vref (which may correspond to only one of the lamp caps being correctly inserted into the lamp socket), the comparator CP11 generates a low level The bit detection result signal Sdr is output from the detection result terminal 3131 .
  • the comparator CP11 will output a low-level detection result at the detection result terminal 3131 Signal Sdr.
  • FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection result latch circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 includes a D Flip-flop DFF (or a first D-type flip-flop), a resistor R15 (or a fifth resistor) and an OR gate OG2 (or a second OR gate) ).
  • the clock input terminal (CLK) of the D-type flip-flop DFF is coupled to the detection result terminal 3131, and the input terminal D is coupled to the driving voltage VCC.
  • the detection result terminal 3131 outputs a low-level detection result signal Sdr
  • the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a low-level signal at the output terminal Q; when the detection result terminal 3131 outputs a high-level detection result signal, the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a high-level detection result signal.
  • the DFF outputs a high-level signal at the output terminal Q.
  • the resistor R15 is coupled between the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF and a reference potential (eg, ground potential).
  • a reference potential eg, ground potential.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 Since the detection pulse generation module 3110 only outputs the first pulse signal DP1 or the second pulse signal DP2 in the detection mode DTM, the dominant OR gate OG2 outputs a high-level detection result latch signal, and the rest of the time (including the work after the detection mode DTM) Mode DRM) is dominated by D-type flip-flop DFF.
  • the detection result latch signal is high level or low level. Therefore, when the high-level detection result signal Sdr does not appear at the detection result terminal 3131, the D-type flip-flop DFF maintains a low-level signal at the output terminal Q, so that the detection result latch terminal 3121 also maintains a low level in the working mode DRM The level detection result latch signal.
  • the detection result latch terminal 3121 also maintains a high-level detection result latch signal when it enters the working mode DRM.
  • FIG. 19E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the switch circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the switch circuit 3200a may include a transistor, such as a bipolar junction transistor M11 (or a first transistor) as a power transistor. Power transistors can handle high currents and powers and are especially used in switching circuits.
  • the collector of the bipolar junction transistor M11 is coupled to the first mounting detection terminal TE1 , the base is coupled to the detection result latch terminal 3121 , and the emitter switch is coupled to the terminal 3201 .
  • the bipolar junction transistor M11 When the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates the first pulse signal DP1 or the second pulse signal DP2, the bipolar junction transistor M11 will be turned on for a short period of time, so that the detection determination circuit 3130 performs detection to determine the detection result latch signal is high level bit or low level.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 When the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a high-level detection result latch signal at the detection result latch terminal 3121, it indicates that the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket, so the dual junction transistor M11 will conduct Therefore, conduction between the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 is made (ie, the power circuit is turned on).
  • the driving circuit (not shown) in the power module is activated and starts to operate based on the voltage on the power circuit, and then generates the lighting control signal Slc to switch the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current can be generated And light up the LED module.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a low-level detection result latch signal at the detection result latch terminal 3121, the bipolar junction transistor M11 will be turned off, causing the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting terminal TE1 to be turned off. The detection terminal TE2 is cut off.
  • the driving circuit in the power module will not be activated, so the lighting control signal Slc will not be generated.
  • FIG. 19F is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit according to another embodiment.
  • the transistors in the switch circuit 3200 a of the present embodiment are shown as a metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor (MOSFET) M12 as an example, and the switch circuit 3200 a further includes a pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 .
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 is electrically connected to the control terminal of the transistor M12 and the detection result latch terminal 3121 of the detection result latch circuit 3120, and is used to assist the control terminal of the transistor M12 in the detection mode.
  • the signal S M12 on the signal S M12 is reset, so that the falling edge of the signal S M12 matches the signal of the detection result latch terminal 3121 in the detection mode (corresponding to the pulse signal on the pulse signal output terminal 3111 ).
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 can increase the discharge rate of the signal S M12 in the detection stage, so that the signal S M12 can be pulled down to the low level faster when the pulse signal returns to the low level, thereby reducing the pulse signal and control phase difference between the signals, and avoid malfunction of the transistor M12.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a pulse signal through the detection result latch terminal 3121 to control the transistor M12 to be intermittently turned on periodically.
  • the signal S M12 will also be a pulse signal, and will be the same as the detection result latch on the terminal 3121.
  • the signals are synchronized (ie, the rising and falling edges of the signal occur at approximately the same time).
  • the charging and discharging speed of the signal S M12 will be greatly affected by the circuit design and the selection of circuit parameters of the transistor M12 .
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 of this embodiment is enabled when the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a low level signal and the signal S M12 remains at a high level, thereby conducting an additional discharge path to speed up the discharge speed. This further solves the above-mentioned problem of signal asynchrony.
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 can be implemented by using the circuit structure shown in FIG. 19F , wherein the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 includes, for example, a transistor M13 (shown as a PNP transistor as an example, but not in this way). limited), and resistors R16 and R17.
  • the control terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the detection result latch terminal 3121 via the resistor R16
  • the first terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the control terminal of the transistor M12
  • the second terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the ground terminal GND via the resistor R17.
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 may further include a diode D12 and resistors R18 and R19.
  • the anode of the diode D12 is electrically connected to the detection result latch terminal 3121 .
  • One end of the resistor R18 is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode D12, and the other end of the resistor R18 is electrically connected to the control end of the transistor M12 and the first end of the transistor M13.
  • the resistor R19 is electrically connected between the control terminal of the transistor M12 and the ground terminal GND.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3120 When the LED straight tube lamp works in the working mode, the detection result latch circuit 3120 will output a high level signal through the detection result latch terminal 3121, so that the signal S M12 on the control terminal of the transistor M12 is also at a high level, and then The transistor M12 is turned on. At this time, the transistor M13 in the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 will remain in an off state in response to the high level signal of the detection result latch terminal 3121 , so the level of the signal S M12 will not be affected by the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 . influences.
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 in this state can be regarded as being in a disabled state.
  • the transistor M13 When the LED straight tube lamp works in the detection mode, if the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 is roughly synchronized with the signal SM12/there is no phase difference, no matter it is during the high level or the low level of the signal SM12, the transistor M13 The first terminal of M13 and the control terminal are always in a reverse bias state, so that the transistor M13 is kept off.
  • the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 and the signal S M12 are not synchronized/there is a phase difference, especially when the phase of the signal SM12 lags behind the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121, the signal S M12 is at a high level at this time and The signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 is at a low level, so that the first terminal and the control terminal of the transistor M13 are in a forward bias state.
  • the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 in this state can be regarded as being in an enabled state.
  • the transistor M13 is turned on, and the signal S M12 can be discharged through the discharge path from the transistor M13 and the resistor R17 to the ground terminal GND, so that the falling speed of the signal S M12 from high level to low level is further increased.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 since the external driving signal Sed is an AC signal, in order to avoid the detection error caused by the level of the external driving signal being just near the zero point when the detection determination circuit 3130 detects. Therefore, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 so that the detection determination circuit 3130 detects twice, so as to avoid the problem that the level of the external driving signal is just near the zero point during single detection.
  • the generation time difference of the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 is not an integer multiple of half of the period T of the external driving signal Sed, that is, not an integer corresponding to the 180-degree phase difference of the external driving signal Sed. multiple. In this way, when one of the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 is generated, if the external driving signal Sed is unfortunately near the zero point, it can be avoided that the external driving signal Sed is also near the zero point when the other is generated.
  • the generation time difference between the first pulse signal and the second pulse signal that is, the set time interval TIV can be expressed by the formula as follows:
  • TIV (X+Y)(T/2);
  • T is the period of the external drive signal
  • X is an integer greater than or equal to zero, 0 ⁇ Y ⁇ 1.
  • the preferred range of Y is between 0.05-0.95, more preferably between 0.15-0.85.
  • the structure of generating two pulse signals for installation detection is only an example of the implementation of the detection pulse generation module.
  • the detection pulse generation module may be configured to generate one or more than two pulse signals for installation detection, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the circuit logic judgment error of the installation detection module will start to rise.
  • the generation of the first pulse signal DP1 can be set to be generated when the driving voltage VCC reaches or is higher than a predetermined level, so that the detection and determination circuit 3130 can only perform the detection and determination circuit 3130 after the driving voltage VCC reaches a sufficient level, so as to avoid the problem of insufficient level.
  • the circuit logic judgment of the installation detection module is wrong.
  • the detection and determination circuit when one end of the LED straight tube lamp is inserted into the lamp socket and the other end of the lamp is floating or in electrical contact with the human body, the detection and determination circuit outputs a low-level detection result signal Sdr due to the large impedance.
  • the detection result latch circuit latches the low-level detection result signal Sdr into a low-level detection result latch signal according to the pulse signals DP1/DP2 of the detection pulse generating module, and also maintains the detection result in the working mode DRM. In this way, the switch circuit can be kept off to avoid continuous energization. In this way, the possibility of electric shock to the human body can also be avoided, so that the requirements of safety regulations can be met.
  • the detection and determination circuit When the lamp caps at both ends of the LED straight tube lamp are correctly inserted into the lamp socket (time point td), the detection and determination circuit outputs a high-level detection result signal Sdr because the impedance of the LED straight tube lamp itself is small.
  • the detection result latch circuit latches the high-level detection result signal Sdr into a high-level detection result latch signal according to the pulse signals DP1/DP2 of the detection pulse generating module, and also maintains the detection result in the working mode DRM. In this way, the switch circuit can be kept on and continuously energized, so that the LED straight tube lamp operates normally in the working mode DRM.
  • the input of the detection and determination circuit is low.
  • the detection result signal Sdr of the level is sent to the detection result latch circuit, and then the detection pulse generating module outputs a low level signal to the detection result latch circuit, so that the detection result latch circuit outputs a low level
  • a detection result of the level latches the signal to turn off the switch circuit, wherein the turn-off of the switch circuit cuts off the connection between the first installation detection terminal and the second installation detection terminal, that is, the LED straight tube lamp into a non-conducting state.
  • the detection and determination circuit inputs the detection result signal of a high level to the detection result latch circuit , making the detection result latch circuit output a high-level detection result latch signal to turn on the switch circuit, wherein the conduction of the switch circuit enables the first installation detection terminal and the second installation detection terminal Conduction between the terminals means that the LED straight tube lamp operates in a conducting state.
  • the installation detection module will first perform pulse generation action to detect the installation status of the LED straight tube light, and after confirming that the LED straight tube light has been installed correctly, the power circuit will be turned on to give enough driving current to light the LED module. Therefore, At least until the first pulse is generated, the LED straight tube lamp will not be lit (ie, the power loop will not be turned on, or the current on the power loop will be limited to less than 5mA/MIU).
  • the time required for the first pulse to be generated after the LED straight tube light is installed and powered on is approximately greater than or equal to 100 milliseconds (ms). In other words, the LED straight tube lamp of this embodiment will not be lit for at least 100ms after being installed and powered on.
  • the installation detection module will continue to send out pulses to detect the installation state before the LED straight tube light is correctly installed, if the LED straight tube light is not lit after a pulse is generated (that is, it is not If it is determined to be installed correctly), the LED straight tube light will be lit at least after the aforementioned set time interval TIV (that is, after the next pulse is generated).
  • the LED straight tube lamp of the present embodiment is not lit 100ms after installation and electrification, it will not be lit during the period of 100ms+TIV.
  • the "LED straight tube light is powered on” mentioned here means that an external power supply (such as commercial power) is applied to the straight tube light, and the power loop of the LED straight tube light is electrically connected to the ground level ( ground level), which in turn creates a voltage difference across the power loop.
  • the energization of the correct installation of the LED straight tube light means that the external power supply is applied to the LED straight tube light, and the LED straight tube light is electrically connected to the ground level through the grounding circuit of the lamp; and the LED straight tube light is incorrect.
  • Installation means that the external power is applied to the LED straight tube light, but the LED straight tube light is not only electrically connected to the ground level through the grounding line of the lamp, but is connected to the ground level through the human body or other impedance objects. That is, in the incorrect installation state, there will be unexpected impedance objects in series on the current path.
  • the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 generated by the detection pulse generation module is between 1us and 1ms, and its function is only when the LED straight tube lamp is energized.
  • This pulse signal is used to make the switch circuit conduct for a short time. .
  • a pulse current can be generated, which flows through the detection and judgment circuit for detection and judgment.
  • the long-term conduction is not caused by the short-time pulse, and there is no danger of electric shock.
  • the detection result latch circuit also maintains the detection result in the operating mode DRM, and no longer changes the previously latched detection result due to the change of the circuit state, thereby avoiding the problem caused by the change of the detection result.
  • the installation detection module (ie the switch circuit, the detection pulse generation module, the detection result latch circuit and the detection determination circuit) can be integrated into the chip, which can be embedded in the circuit, which can save the circuit cost and volume of the installation detection module.
  • the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 10us and 1ms; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 15us and 30us in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 200us and 400us; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be 20us, 35us or within plus or minus 15% of 45us; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be within plus or minus 15% of 300us.
  • the pulse/pulse signal refers to a severe voltage or current signal change that occurs briefly in the continuous signal time process, that is, the signal suddenly changes in a short period of time, and then quickly returns to its original state. initial value. Therefore, the pulse signal may be a voltage or current signal that changes from a low level to a high level for a period of time and then returns to a low level, or a voltage or current signal that changes from a high level to a low level.
  • the application is not limited to this.
  • the period corresponding to the "short-term signal change" mentioned herein refers to a period that is not enough to change the operating state of the overall LED straight tube light and does not cause electric shock hazards to the human body.
  • the turn-on period of the switch circuits 3200/3200a will be short enough so that the LED modules will not be lit, and the effective current in the power loop will not be turned on. will be greater than the current limit setting value (5MIU).
  • the "severe signal change" as used herein means that the signal change is sufficient to cause the electronic component receiving the pulse signal to change its operating state in response to the pulse signal.
  • the switch circuits 3200/3200a receive the pulse signals DP1/DP2
  • the current limiting circuits 3200/3200a will be turned on or off in response to the level switching of the pulse signals DP1/DP2.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 is described by generating two pulse signals DP1 and DP2 as an example, the detection pulse generation module 3110 of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be a circuit for generating a single pulse or a circuit for generating multiple pulses independently.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates a single pulse
  • a simple circuit configuration of an RC circuit and an active component/active component can be used to realize a single pulse output.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110a may only include a capacitor C11, a resistor R11 and a buffer BF1. Under this configuration, the detection pulse generating module 3110a only generates a single pulse signal DP1.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110a may further include a reset circuit (not shown), and the reset circuit may generate the first pulse signal and/or the second pulse signal Afterwards, the working state of the circuit is reset, so that the detection pulse generating module 3110a can generate the first pulse signal and/or the second pulse signal again after a period of time. That is, through the function of the reset circuit, the detection pulse generating module 3110a can generate a plurality of pulse signals according to a fixed or random set time interval TIV.
  • the generating a plurality of pulse signals according to a fixed set time interval TIV may also be, for example, generating a pulse signal at a fixed interval of 20 milliseconds to 2 seconds (ie, 20ms ⁇ TIV ⁇ 2s).
  • the setting The time interval TIV may be between 500ms and 2s; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be within plus or minus 15% of 75ms; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be 45ms Within plus or minus 15% of ; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be within plus or minus 15% of 30 ms.
  • the generation of the plurality of pulse signals according to the random set time interval TIV may be, for example, that the set time interval TIV between each adjacent pulse signal is selected from a random set value in the interval of 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds. .
  • the timing and frequency at which the detection pulse generating module 3110 sends out a pulse signal for installation detection can be set accordingly considering the influence of the detection current on the human body in the detection mode.
  • the harm of the current size and the duration to the human body is roughly negatively correlated, that is, on the premise that the passing current does not endanger the safety of the human body, the greater the passing current, the shorter the duration of the power-on; on the contrary, if the passing current is small, Then it can be powered on for a long time without causing harm to human body.
  • whether the human body is actually subject to electric shock depends on the amount of current (or electric power) applied to the human body per unit time, rather than the amount of current flowing through the human body.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 can be configured to only send a pulse signal within a certain time interval for installation detection, and stop sending the pulse signal after the time interval exceeds the time interval to avoid the detection current causing human harm.
  • FIG. 45D is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the first embodiment of the present application, wherein the horizontal axis of the graph is time (marked as t), and the vertical axis is the current value (marked as I).
  • the detection pulse module 3110 will send out a pulse signal within the detection time interval (the pulse width and the set time interval of the pulse signal can refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path/power circuit is turned on.
  • the detection current Iin (which can be obtained by measuring the input current of the power module) will generate a corresponding current pulse Idp in response to the timing of the pulse of the pulse signal, wherein the detection and determination circuit 3130 is By detecting the current value of these current pulses Idp, it can be judged whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 stops sending pulse signals, so that the detection path/power circuit is cut off. From a larger time dimension, the detection pulse generation module 3110 will generate a pulse group DPg within the detection time interval Tw, and determine whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed in the lamp socket through the detection of the pulse group DPg superior.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 only sends a pulse signal within the detection time interval Tw, wherein the detection time interval Tw can be set to be between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds inclusive. Any numerical point with two decimal places, such as 0.51, 0.52, 0.53, ..., 0.6, 0.61, 0.62, ... 1.97, 1.98, 1.99, 2, but the present application is not limited to this. It is worth mentioning that, by properly selecting the detection time interval Tw, the detection action of the entire pulse group DPg will not generate electric power enough to harm the human body, thereby achieving the effect of preventing electric shock.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 can be implemented by using a pulse generating circuit (as shown in FIGS. 19B and 20B ) and a timing circuit (not shown), and the timing circuit can output the output after counting a certain period of time. Signals the pulse generation circuit to stop generating pulses.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 can be implemented by using a pulse generating circuit (as shown in FIGS.
  • the signal shielding circuit can be implemented with a simple circuit (eg, an RC circuit) without changing the design of the original pulse generating circuit.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be configured to send the next pulse signal every time a pulse signal is sent out at least a set time interval greater than or equal to a certain safety value, so as to avoid the detection current from causing human harm.
  • FIG. 45E is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 will send a pulse signal at a set time interval TIV greater than a certain safety value (for example, 1 second) (for the pulse width setting of the pulse signal, please refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path / The power circuit is turned on.
  • the detection current Iin (which can be obtained by measuring the input current of the power module) will generate a corresponding current pulse Idp in response to the timing of the pulse of the pulse signal, wherein the detection and determination circuit 3130 is By detecting the current value of these current pulses Idp, it can be judged whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be configured to send out a pulse group at a set time interval that is greater than or equal to a specific safety value for installation detection, so as to prevent the detection current from causing human harm.
  • FIG. 45F is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 will first send out a plurality of pulse signals in the first detection time interval Tw (the pulse width and the set time interval of the pulse signals can refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path/power circuit is turned on.
  • the detection current Iin will generate a plurality of corresponding current pulses Idp in response to the pulse generation point of the pulse signal, and the current pulses Idp in the first detection time interval Tw constitute the first pulse group DPg1.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3110 will suspend the output of the pulse signal for a set time interval TIVs (for example, greater than or equal to 1 second), and will not issue a pulse again after entering the next detection time interval Tw Signal. Similar to the operation in the first detection time interval Tw, the detection current Iin in the second detection time interval Tw and the third detection time interval Tw will constitute the second pulse group DPg2 and the third pulse group DPg3, respectively.
  • the circuit 3130 determines whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket by detecting the current values of the pulse groups DPg1 , DPg2 and DPg3 .
  • the magnitude of the current of the current pulse Idp is related to the impedance on the detection path/power loop. Therefore, when designing the detection pulse generating module 3110, the format of the output pulse signal can be correspondingly designed according to the selection and setting of the detection path/power circuit.
  • FIG. 19G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the first embodiment of the application.
  • the emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to detect the voltage signal HV1 of the rectifier output terminal.
  • the voltage signal HV1 can be used to determine the external current received by the LED straight tube lamp. Whether the drive signal is a DC signal.
  • the anode of the diode D51 is electrically connected to the first rectifier output terminal 511, and the cathode thereof is electrically connected to the input terminal of the filter circuit (ie, the connection terminal of the capacitor 725 and the inductor 726).
  • the emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through a path 3141 .
  • the addition of the diode D51 can limit the current direction on the main power circuit, so that the voltage signal HV1 detected by the emergency control module 3140 is a rectified signal, and is not affected by the capacitance in the filter circuit.
  • the diode D51 can also be omitted.
  • the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal
  • the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
  • FIG. 19H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment described in FIG. 19G , but the difference is that the emergency control module 3140 detects the voltage signal before the rectifier circuit 510 . By detecting the voltage signal HV2 , it can also be determined that the LED straight tube lamp is currently receiving Whether the received external drive signal is a DC signal.
  • the anode of the diode D91 is electrically connected to the first pin 501
  • the anode of the diode D92 is electrically connected to the second pin 502
  • the cathode of the diode D91 and the cathode of the diode D92 are electrically connected to the emergency control module 3140 .
  • the emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the second rectification output terminal 512 , and is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the passage 3141 .
  • the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal
  • the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
  • FIG. 19I is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • This embodiment is similar to the embodiment described in FIG. 19H , and the difference is that in this embodiment, the emergency control circuit 3140 only detects the voltage signal before the rectifier bridge 510 through the diode D92 .
  • the anode of the diode D92 is electrically connected to the second pin 502 , and the cathode thereof is electrically connected to the emergency control module 3140 .
  • the emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the second rectification output terminal 512 , and is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the passage 3141 .
  • the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal
  • the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
  • FIG. 45H is a schematic diagram of the signal waveform of the voltage signal HV1
  • FIG. 45I is a schematic waveform diagram of the voltage signal HV2
  • FIG. 45J is a schematic waveform diagram of the voltage signal HV2
  • Fig. 45K is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the voltage signal HV1 or HV2.
  • FIG. 48F is a flowchart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the obtained voltage signal HV1 (step S501), and determine whether the voltage signal HV1 crosses zero within a certain period of time (step S502). If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S502, it means that the currently received external drive signal is an AC signal, and the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode; if the emergency detection module 3140 determines no in step S502, It means that the received external drive signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S503), in which all The first configuration can be, for example, a turn-on configuration.
  • the emergency control module 3140 in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 320a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 will further detect the voltage signal HV1 to determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has zero-crossing. When the signal HV1 crosses zero (step S504), it is determined that the external drive signal is switched from a DC signal to an AC signal. At this time, the emergency control module 3140 will make the installation detection module 3000a enter the detection mode; when it is determined that the voltage signal HV1 has no zero-crossing, the switch Circuit 3200a continues to remain in the first configuration.
  • step S504 may be omitted, and the detection of the emergency control module is only performed when the LED lamp is powered on.
  • FIG. 19H and FIG. 19I can also use the method of detecting the zero-crossing signal to determine whether the external driving signal is a DC signal, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 48G is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the obtained voltage signal HV1 (step S601), and determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal within a certain period of time (step S602). If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S602, it means that the currently received external drive signal is an AC signal, and the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode; if the emergency detection module 3140 determines no in step S502, It means that the received external drive signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S603), wherein the The first configuration may be, for example, a conductive configuration.
  • the emergency control module 3140 in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 320a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 will further detect the voltage signal HV1 to determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal, When it is detected that the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal (step S604), it is determined that the external driving signal is switched from a DC signal to an AC signal, and the emergency control module 3140 will make the installation detection module 3000a enter the detection mode at this time; When the voltage signal HV1 has no rising edge/falling edge signal, the switch circuit 3200a continues to maintain the first configuration.
  • step S604 may be omitted, and the detection of the emergency control module is only performed when the LED lamp is powered on.
  • FIG. 19H and FIG. 19I can also use the method of over-detecting the rising edge/falling edge of the voltage signal to determine whether the external driving signal is a DC signal, which will not be repeated here.
  • the emergency detection module makes the installation detection module work in different states by detecting whether the external driving signal is a DC signal.
  • the DC signal is a driving signal obtained after the battery is boosted, and one of the output ends of the driving signal contacts the human body, and there is no risk of electric shock.
  • the voltage of such a DC signal is generally lower than that of the commercial power supply. If the installation detection function is used, the installation detection module may misjudge, and the LED straight tube lamp cannot be lit normally. Therefore, when the external driving signal is AC AC, the installation detection module works normally and performs installation detection; when the external driving signal is a DC signal, the installation detection module 3000a skips the detection stage and directly makes the switch circuit 3200a in an on state.
  • FIG. 20A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000b includes a detection pulse generation module 3210, a detection result latch circuit 3220, a detection determination circuit 3230, and a switch circuit 3200b.
  • the following description is combined with the signal timing shown in FIG. 45B , wherein FIG. 45B is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3210 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3220 for generating the control signal Sc including at least one pulse signal DP.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 is electrically connected to the switch circuit 3200b for receiving and outputting the control signal Sc output by the detection pulse generating module 3210 .
  • the switch circuit 3200b is respectively electrically connected to one end of the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp and the detection and determination circuit 3230 for receiving the control signal Sc output by the detection result latch circuit 3220 and conducts during the pulse signal DP, so that the LED straight tube lamp is turned on during the period of the pulse signal DP.
  • the power circuit is turned on.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 is electrically connected to the switch circuit 3200b, the other end of the LED straight tube lamp power circuit, and the detection result latch circuit 3220, respectively, for detecting the sampling signal on the power circuit when the switch circuit 3200b and the LED power circuit are turned on Ssp is used to judge the installation status of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder.
  • the power circuit of this embodiment is used as a detection path for installing the detection module (the above-mentioned embodiment in FIG. 19A also has a similar configuration).
  • the detection determination circuit 3230 further transmits the detection result to the detection result latch circuit 3220 for further control; in addition, the detection pulse generation module 3210 is further electrically connected to the output of the detection result latch circuit 3220 to control the output of the cut-off pulse signal DP. time.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3210 is further electrically connected to the output of the detection result latch circuit 3220 to control the output of the cut-off pulse signal DP. time.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3210 generates a control signal Sc via the detection result latch circuit 3220, so that the switch circuit 3200b operates in an on state during the pulse.
  • the power loop of the LED straight tube light between the installation detection ends TE1 and TE2 will also be turned on at the same time.
  • the detection determination circuit 3230 detects a sampling signal on the power supply circuit, and informs the detection result latch circuit 3220 of a time point to latch the detection signal based on the detected signal.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 may be, for example, a circuit for controlling the output level of the latch circuit, wherein the output level of the latch circuit corresponds to the on/off state of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 stores the detection result according to the sampling signal Ssp (or the sampling signal Ssp and the pulse signal DP), and transmits or provides the detection result to the switch circuit 3200b. After receiving the detection result transmitted by the detection result latch circuit 3220, the switch circuit 3200b controls the conduction state between the mounting detection terminals TE1 and TE2 according to the detection result.
  • the installation detection module 3000b further includes an emergency control module 3240 .
  • the configuration and operation of the emergency control module 3240 are similar to those of the emergency control module 3140 in the foregoing embodiment, so reference can be made to the above description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3210 , the detection determination circuit 3230 , the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the switch circuit 3200b in the installation detection module 3000b can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 20B to 20E respectively (but not limited to 20B to 20E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
  • FIG. 20B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to a second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection pulse generation module 3210 includes: a resistor R21 (sixth resistor), one end of which is connected to a driving voltage; a capacitor C21 (fourth capacitor), one end of which is connected to the other end of the resistor R21, and the other end of the capacitor C21 is grounded;
  • the special trigger STRG has an input end and an output end, the input end is connected to the connection end of the resistor R21 and the capacitor C21, the output end is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3220; a resistor R22 (the seventh resistor), one end is connected to the resistor The connection terminal of R21 and the capacitor C21; a transistor M21 (the second transistor), which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal, the collector terminal is connected to the other end of the resistor R22, and the emitter terminal is grounded; and
  • the detection pulse generating module 3210 further includes a Zener diode ZD1 with an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C21 to ground, and the cathode terminal is connected to one terminal of the capacitor C21 and the resistor R21.
  • the circuits of the detection pulse generation module in this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 19B are only examples. In fact, the specific operation of the detection pulse generation circuit is performed based on the functional modules configured in the embodiment in FIG. 40 . This part will be shown in FIG. 40 . The examples are described in further detail.
  • FIG. 20C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 includes: a resistor R24 (the ninth resistor), one end of which is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor M22, and the other end of the resistor R24 is connected to the other end of the LED power loop (for example: the second installation detection terminal TE2); a diode D21 (second diode), with an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to one end of the resistor R24; a comparator CP21 (second comparator), with a first input terminal, a second input terminal and An output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to a setting signal (for example: the reference voltage Vref, in this embodiment is 1.3V, but not limited to this), the second input terminal is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode D21, and the comparator The output terminal of CP
  • the diode D21, the comparator CP22, the resistor R25, the resistor R26 and the capacitor C22 can be omitted.
  • the second input end of the comparator CP21 is directly connected to one end of the resistor R24.
  • the resistor R24 may be two resistors connected in parallel, and the equivalent resistance value thereof includes 0.1 ohm-5 ohm.
  • FIG. 20D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection result latch circuit of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 includes: a D-type flip-flop DFF (second D-type flip-flop), which has a data input end, a frequency input end and an output end, the data input end is connected to the driving voltage, the frequency input end The terminal is connected to the detection and determination circuit 3230; and an OR gate OG (third OR gate) has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to the output of the Schmitt trigger STRG terminal, the second input terminal is connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the other terminal of the resistor R23 and the switch circuit 3200b.
  • DFF second D-type flip-flop
  • FIG. 20E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit for installing a detection module according to a second embodiment of the present application.
  • the switch circuit 3200b includes: a transistor M22 (third transistor), which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal, the base terminal is connected to the output terminal of the OR gate OG, and the collector terminal is connected to one end of the LED power circuit (for example: The first installation detection terminal TE1), the emitter terminal is connected to the detection and determination circuit 3230.
  • the transistor M22 can also be replaced with equivalent components of other electronic switches, such as MOSFETs.
  • the above-mentioned part of the circuit of the installation detection module can be integrated into an integrated circuit, thereby saving the circuit cost and volume of the installation detection module.
  • the Schmitt trigger STRG of the detection pulse generation module 3210, the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the two comparators CP21 and CP22 of the detection determination circuit 3230 are integrated into an integrated circuit, but the present application is not limited thereto.
  • this application utilizes the principle that the capacitor voltage will not undergo sudden change; the capacitor in the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp has zero voltage at both ends and the transient response is in a short-circuit state before the power supply circuit is turned on; and when When the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response current limiting resistance of the power circuit is small and the response peak current is large. When the power circuit is not correctly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response of the power circuit is The principle of large current limiting resistance and small response peak current is implemented, and the leakage current of the LED straight tube lamp is less than 5MIU.
  • Rfuse is the resistance value of the fuse of the LED straight tube lamp (10 ohms), and 500 ohms is the resistance value of the transient response to simulate the conductive characteristics of the human body; and in the numerator part, take the voltage root mean square The maximum voltage value (305*1.414) of 90V ⁇ 305V and the minimum voltage difference of 50V. It can be known from the above examples that if both ends of the LED straight tube lamp are correctly installed in the lamp holder, the minimum transient current during normal operation is 5A; but when one end of the LED straight tube lamp is installed in the lamp holder, the When the other end of the lamp head contacts the human body, its maximum transient current is only 845mA.
  • the present application utilizes the current that can flow through the capacitor in the LED power supply loop (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response to detect the installation status of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder, that is, to detect whether the LED straight tube lamp is It is correctly installed in the lamp socket, and when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket, a protection mechanism is provided to avoid the problem of electric shock caused by the user accidentally touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube light.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments are only used to illustrate the present application rather than to limit the implementation of the present application.
  • the output of the detection pulse generation module 3210 rises from a first low-level voltage to A first high level voltage is output to the detection result latch circuit 3220 through a path 3211 .
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 After receiving the first high-level voltage, the detection result latch circuit 3220 simultaneously outputs a second high-level voltage to the switch circuit 3200b and the detection pulse generating module 3210 through a path 3221 .
  • the switch circuit 3200b After the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage, the switch circuit 3200b is turned on so that a power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200b, the path 3201, the detection and determination circuit 3230 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is turned on; at the same time, the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high-level voltage returned by the detection result latch circuit 3220 for a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse width ), its output drops from the first high-level voltage back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage, the first high-level voltage and the second low-level voltage form a the first pulse signal DP1).
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 detects a first sampling signal SP1 (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on.
  • a first sampling signal SP1 eg, a voltage signal
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third high-level voltage (the third high-level voltage) through a path 3231 A high level signal) is sent to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third high-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second high-level voltage (second high-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage and then The power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is maintained to be turned on, during which the detection pulse generating module 3210 no longer generates pulse output.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 When the first sampling signal SP1 is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above-mentioned application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp has not been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third low-level voltage (No. A low level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third low-level voltage and outputs and maintains the second low-level voltage (second low-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second low-level voltage and maintains Turn off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open. In this case, the problem of electric shock due to accidental contact of the conductive part of the LED straight tube light by the user when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket can be avoided.
  • the output of the detection pulse generation module 3210 rises from the first low-level voltage to the first high-level voltage again, and is output through the path 3211 to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 After receiving the first high-level voltage, the detection result latch circuit 3220 simultaneously outputs a second high-level voltage to the switch circuit 3200b and the detection pulse generating module 3210 through the path 3221 .
  • the switch circuit 3200b After the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage, the switch circuit 3200b is turned on again so that the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200b, the path 3201, the detection and determination circuit 3230 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is also turned on again; at the same time, the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high-level voltage returned by the detection result latch circuit 3220 for a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse width), the output drops from the first high-level voltage back to a first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage for the third time, the first high-level voltage for the second time, and the first low-level voltage for the fourth time The low level voltage constitutes a second pulse signal DP2).
  • the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high-level voltage returned by the detection result latch circuit 3220 for a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse width), the output drops from the
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 When the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on again, the detection and determination circuit 3230 also detects a second sampling signal SP2 (eg, a voltage signal) on the circuit again.
  • a second sampling signal SP2 eg, a voltage signal
  • Vref a reference voltage
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third high-level voltage (the first high level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third high-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second high-level voltage (second high-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage and then The power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is maintained to be turned on, during which the detection pulse generating module 3210 no longer generates pulse wave output.
  • the detection and determination circuit 3230 When the second sampling signal SP2 is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above-mentioned application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is not properly installed in the lamp socket, so the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third low-level voltage (the first low level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220.
  • the detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third low-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second low-level voltage (second low-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second low-level voltage and then Keep it off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open.
  • the switch is switched during this period
  • the circuit 3200b will be maintained in the off state, and the driving circuit (not shown) will not be activated.
  • the switch circuit 3200b will be latched by the detection result
  • the high-level voltage output by the circuit 3220 is maintained in a conducting state to keep the power loop conducting.
  • the driving circuit in the power module will be activated and start to operate based on the voltage on the power loop, and then generate the lighting control signal Slc to switch the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current can be generated to light the LED module .
  • a driving voltage charges the capacitor C21 through the resistor R21, and when the voltage of the capacitor C21 rises enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger During STRG, the Schmitt trigger STRG changes from an initial first low-level voltage to a first high-level voltage and outputs to an input terminal of the OR gate OG. After the OR gate OG receives the first high level voltage output from the Schmitt trigger STRG, the OR gate OG outputs a second high level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22 and the resistor R23.
  • the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M22 are conducted, thereby making the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp (including at least the first installation detection terminal).
  • TE1 transistor M22, resistor R24 and the second installation detection terminal TE2
  • the set of transistor M21 is The terminal and the emitter terminal are connected to the ground, so that the voltage of the capacitor C21 is discharged to the ground through the resistor R22.
  • the output of the Schmitt trigger STRG starts from the first high level.
  • the voltage drops back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage of the first time, the first high-level voltage of the second time, and the first low-level voltage of the second time constitute a first pulse signal).
  • the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on, the current flowing through the capacitor in the LED power circuit (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response flows through the transistor M22 and the resistor R24, and forms on the resistor R24.
  • a voltage signal the voltage signal is compared with a reference voltage (1.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to) through the comparator CP21, when the voltage signal is greater than and/or equal to the reference voltage, the comparator CP21 outputs A third high-level voltage is applied to the frequency input terminal CLK of the D-type flip-flop DFF.
  • a reference voltage 1.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to
  • the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a high-level voltage
  • the voltage is applied to the other input terminal of the OR gate OG, so that the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22, thereby keeping the transistor M22 and the power loop of the LED straight tube light on. Since the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage, the transistor M21 also remains on and grounded, so that the voltage of the capacitor C21 cannot rise enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger STRG.
  • the comparator CP21 When the voltage signal on the resistor R24 is less than the reference voltage, the comparator CP21 outputs a third low-level voltage to the frequency input terminal CLK of the D-type flip-flop DFF, and since the initial output value of the D-type flip-flop DFF is zero, Therefore, the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a low level voltage to the other input terminal of the OR gate OG, and the Schmitt trigger STRG connected to one end of the OR gate OG also restores to output the first low level voltage Therefore, the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second low-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22, so that the transistor M22 is kept off and the power circuit of the LED straight tube light is kept open. However, since the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second low level voltage, the transistor M21 is also kept in the off state, and the capacitor C21 is charged through the resistor R21 to repeat the next (pulse) detection after the driving voltage.
  • the pulse period is determined by the resistance value of the resistor R21 and the capacitance value of the capacitor C21.
  • the set time interval (TIV) of the pulse signal is 3ms-500ms, and further, the pulse signal The time interval is 20ms-50ms; in some embodiments, the set time interval (TIV) of the pulse signal is 500ms-2000ms.
  • the pulse width is determined by the resistance value of the resistor R22 and the capacitance value of the capacitor C21. In some embodiments, the width of the pulse signal includes 1us-100us, and further, the width of the pulse signal includes 10us-20us.
  • Zener diode ZD1 provides protection function, but it can be omitted; resistor R24 can be two resistors in parallel based on power factor considerations, and its equivalent resistance value includes 0.1 ohm-5 ohm; resistors R25 and R26 provide voltage divider to ensure the input voltage Higher than the reference voltage of the comparator CP22 (0.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to this); the capacitor C22 provides voltage stabilization and filtering functions; the diode D21 ensures the unidirectionality of signal transmission.
  • the installation detection module disclosed in the present application can be applied to other LED lighting equipment with dual-terminal power supply, such as: LED lamps with a dual-terminal power supply structure, and those including direct use of mains power or use of town power
  • the signal output by the current transformer is used as an LED lamp of an external driving voltage, etc., and the application does not limit the application scope of the installation detection module.
  • FIG. 21A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000c may include a pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 , an integrated control module 3320 , a switch circuit 3200b and a detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 .
  • the overall operation of the installation detection module of this embodiment is similar to that of the installation detection module of the second preferred embodiment, so reference may be made to the signal timing shown in FIG. 45B .
  • the integrated control module 3320 at least includes two input terminals IN1, IN2 and three pins such as an output terminal OT.
  • the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 is electrically connected to the input terminal IN1 and the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 for assisting the integrated control module 3320 to generate a control signal.
  • the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 is electrically connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 and the switch circuit 3200c, and can be used to return the sampling signal associated with the power circuit to the integrated control module when the switch circuit 3200c is connected to the LED power circuit
  • the input terminal IN2 of the 3320 enables the integrated control module 3320 to determine the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder based on the sampling signal.
  • the switch circuit 3200c is electrically connected to one end of the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330, respectively, for receiving the control signal output by the integrated control module 3320, and during the enabling period (ie, the pulse period) of the control signal Conduction, so that the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on.
  • the integrated control module 3320 can temporarily turn on the switch circuit 3200c by outputting a control signal with at least one pulse from the output terminal OT in a detection mode according to the signal received on the input terminal IN1.
  • the integrated control module 3320 can detect whether the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket according to the signal on the input terminal IN2 and latch the detection result as a switch whether to turn on after the detection mode ends.
  • the basis of the circuit 3200c ie, to determine whether to supply power to the LED module normally). The detailed circuit structure and the overall circuit operation of the third preferred embodiment will be described below.
  • the integrated control module 3320, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330, and the switch circuit 3200c in the installation detection module 3000c can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 21B to 21E respectively (but not limited to) 21B to 21E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
  • FIG. 21B is a schematic block diagram of an internal circuit of an integrated control module for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the integrated control module 3320 includes a pulse generating unit 3322 , a detection result latching unit 3323 and a detection unit 3324 .
  • the pulse generating unit 3322 receives the signal provided by the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 from the input terminal IN1, and generates at least one pulse signal accordingly, and the generated pulse signal is provided to the detection result latch unit 3323.
  • the pulse generating unit 3322 can be implemented by, for example, a Schmitt trigger (not shown, please refer to the Schmitt trigger STRG in FIG.
  • the pulse generating unit 3322 of the present application is not limited to be implemented by using the circuit structure of the Schmitt trigger. Any analog/digital circuit structure that can realize the function of generating at least one pulse signal can be applied here.
  • the detection result latch unit 3323 is coupled to the pulse generation unit 3322 and the detection unit 3324 .
  • the detection result latch unit 3323 provides the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation unit 3322 as a control signal to the output terminal OT.
  • the detection result latching unit 3323 will also latch the detection result signal provided by the detection unit 3324, and provide it to the output terminal OT after the detection mode, so as to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp is installed correctly or not.
  • the switch circuit 3200c is turned on.
  • the detection result latch unit 3323 may be implemented by, for example, a circuit structure of a D-type flip-flop with an OR gate (not shown, refer to the D-type flip-flop DFF and OR gate OG in FIG. 20D ).
  • the D-type flip-flop has a data input end, a frequency input end and an output end.
  • the data input terminal is connected to the driving voltage VCC, and the frequency input terminal is connected to the detection unit 3324 .
  • the OR gate has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to the pulse generating unit 3322, the second input terminal is connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop, and the output terminal of the OR gate Connect the output terminal OT.
  • the detection result latching unit 3323 of the present application is not limited to be implemented by using a circuit structure of a D-type flip-flop and an OR gate. Any analog/digital circuit architecture that can realize the function of latching and outputting a control signal to control the switching of the switch circuit 3200c can be applied here.
  • the detection unit 3324 is coupled to the detection result latch unit 3323 .
  • the detection unit 3324 will receive the signal provided by the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 lock from the input terminal IN2, and accordingly generate a detection result signal indicating whether the LED straight tube light is correctly installed, and the generated detection result signal will be provided to the detection result lock.
  • the detection unit 3324 may be implemented by, for example, a comparator (not shown, please refer to the comparator CP21 in FIG. 20C ).
  • the comparator has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to a setting signal, the second input terminal is connected to the input terminal IN2, and the output terminal of the comparator CP21 is connected to the detection terminal Result latch unit 3323.
  • the detection unit 3324 of the present application is not limited to be implemented using the circuit structure of the comparator. Any analog/digital circuit structure that can realize whether the LED straight tube light is installed correctly according to the signal on the input terminal IN2 can be applied here.
  • FIG. 21C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a pulse generation auxiliary circuit for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 includes resistors R31 , R32 and R33 , a capacitor C31 and a transistor M31 .
  • One end of the resistor R31 is connected to a driving voltage (eg VCC).
  • One end of the capacitor C31 is connected to the other end of the resistor R31, and the other end of the capacitor C31 is grounded.
  • One end of the resistor R32 is connected to the connecting end of the resistor R31 and the capacitor C31.
  • the transistor M31 has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal.
  • the collector terminal is connected to the other terminal of the resistor R32, and the emitter terminal is grounded.
  • One end of the resistor R33 is connected to the base end of the transistor M31 , and the other end of the resistor R33 is connected to the output end OT of the integrated control module 3310 and the control end of the switch circuit 3200c via the path 3311 .
  • the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 further includes a Zener diode ZD1, which has an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C31 and grounded, and the cathode terminal is connected to one terminal of the capacitor 3323 and the resistor R31.
  • FIG. 21D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination auxiliary circuit of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 includes resistors R34, R35 and R36, a capacitor C32 and a diode D31.
  • One end of the resistor R34 is connected to one end of the switch circuit 3200c, and the other end of the resistor R34 is connected to the other end of the LED power loop (eg, the second installation detection terminal TE2).
  • One end of the resistor R35 is connected to the driving voltage (eg VCC).
  • resistor R36 One end of the resistor R36 is connected to the other end of the resistor R35, and is connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3331, and the other end of the resistor R36 is grounded.
  • Capacitor C32 is connected in parallel with resistor R36.
  • the diode D31 has an anode end and a cathode end, the anode end is connected to one end of the resistor R34, and the cathode end is connected to the connection end of the resistors R35 and R36.
  • the above-mentioned resistor R35 , resistor R36 , capacitor C32 and diode D31 may be omitted.
  • the resistor R34 When the diode D31 is omitted, one end of the resistor R34 is directly connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3331 .
  • the resistor R34 may be two resistors connected in parallel, and the equivalent resistance value thereof includes 0.1 ohm to 5 ohm.
  • FIG. 21E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application.
  • the switch circuit 3200c includes the transistor M32, which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal.
  • the base terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3321, the collector terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to one end of the LED power supply loop (for example: the first installation detection terminal TE1), and the emitter terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to the detection determination Auxiliary circuit 3330.
  • the transistor M32 can also be replaced with equivalent components of other electronic switches, such as MOSFETs.
  • the installation detection principle used by the installation detection module of this embodiment is the same as that of the second preferred embodiment, which is based on the principle that the capacitor voltage will not change abruptly.
  • the LED straight tube lamp power circuit Before the power loop is turned on, the voltage at both ends of the capacitor is zero and the transient response is in a short-circuit state; and when the power loop is correctly installed in the lamp socket of the LED straight tube lamp, its transient response current limiting resistance is small and The response peak current is large. When the power supply circuit is not properly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response current limiting resistance is large and the response peak current is small. The current is less than 5MIU.
  • the driving voltage VCC will be provided to the module/circuit in the installation detection module 3000c under the condition that one end of the LED straight tube lamp is powered.
  • the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 performs a charging operation in response to the driving voltage VCC. After a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse period), the output voltage (herein referred to as the first output voltage) rises from a first low-level voltage to exceed a forward threshold voltage (the voltage value can be defined according to circuit design) ), and output to the input terminal IN1 of the integrated control module 3320 via a path 3311 .
  • the integrated control module 3320 After receiving the first output voltage from the input terminal IN1, the integrated control module 3320 outputs an enabled control signal (eg, a high-level voltage) to the switch circuit 3200c and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 through a path 3321 .
  • the switch circuit 3200c After the switch circuit 3200c receives the enable control signal, the switch circuit 3200c is turned on so that a power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200c, the path 3201, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is turned on; and at the same time, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 will turn on the discharge path in response to the enabled control signal to perform the discharge action, and receive the feedback returned by the integrated control module 3320.
  • an enabled control signal eg, a high-level voltage
  • the switch circuit 3200c After the switch circuit 3200c receives the enable control signal, the switch circuit 3200c is turned on so that a power circuit
  • the first output voltage gradually drops back to the first low-level voltage from a voltage level exceeding the forward threshold voltage.
  • the integrated control module 3320 will pull down the enabled control signal to the disable level in response to the first output voltage bit (ie, output a disabled control signal, wherein the disabled control signal is, for example, a low-level voltage), so that the control signal has a signal waveform in the form of a pulse (ie, by the first low-level voltage in the control signal)
  • the bit voltage, the high-level voltage and the second low-level voltage constitute a first pulse signal).
  • the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 detects a first sampling signal (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on, and provides the first sampling signal to the integrated control module through the input terminal IN2 3320.
  • a first sampling signal eg, a voltage signal
  • the integrated control module 3320 determines that the first sampling signal is greater than or equal to a setting signal (eg, a reference voltage), according to the application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control
  • the module 3320 outputs and maintains the enabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the enabled control signal and maintains conduction to keep the power loop of the LED straight tube light on, during which the integrated control module 3320 is no longer Generate pulse output.
  • the integrated control circuit 3320 determines that the first sampling signal is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp has not been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control circuit will output and maintain The disabled control signal is sent to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the disabled control signal and keeps it off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open.
  • the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 Since the discharge path of the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 is cut off, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 performs the charging operation again. Therefore, when the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp is kept open for a period of time (ie, the pulse cycle time), the first output voltage of the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 rises again from the first low-level voltage to exceed the forward threshold voltage, and It is output to the input terminal IN1 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3311 . After receiving the first output voltage from the input terminal IN1, the integrated control module 3320 will pull up the control signal from the disable level to the enable level again (ie, output the enabled control signal), and turn the enabled control signal Provided to the switch circuit 3200c and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310.
  • the switch circuit 3200c After the switch circuit 3200c receives the enable control signal, the switch circuit 3200c is turned on so that the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200c, the path 3201, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 and the The two installation detection terminals TE2) are also turned on again.
  • the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 will turn on the discharge path again in response to the enabled control signal and perform the discharge operation, and after receiving the enabled control signal returned by the integrated control module 3320 for a period of time ( This period of time determines the pulse width), and the first output voltage gradually drops back to the first low-level voltage again from a voltage level exceeding the forward threshold voltage.
  • the integrated control module 3320 when the first output voltage drops below the reverse threshold voltage, the integrated control module 3320 will pull down the enabled control signal to the disabled level in response to the first output voltage, so that the control signal has a signal in the form of a pulse waveform (ie, a second pulse signal is formed by the third low level voltage, the second high level voltage and the fourth low level voltage in the control signal).
  • the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 also detects a second sampling signal (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on again, and provides the second sampling signal to the input terminal IN2 through the input terminal IN2.
  • a second sampling signal eg, a voltage signal
  • the second sampling signal is greater than and/or equal to the setting signal (for example: a reference voltage)
  • the setting signal for example: a reference voltage
  • the integrated control module 3320 determines that the second sampling signal is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is not properly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control circuit will output and maintain the disabled
  • the control signal is sent to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the disabled control signal and keeps it off to keep the power loop of the LED straight tube light open. In this case, the problem of electric shock due to accidental contact of the conductive part of the LED straight tube light by the user when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket can be avoided.
  • the detection result latching unit 3323 After the detection result latching unit 3323 receives the first high-level voltage output from the pulse generating unit 3322, the detection result latching unit 3323 outputs a second high-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M32 through the output terminal OT and Resistor R33.
  • the base terminal of the transistor M32 receives the second high-level voltage output from the detection result latch unit 3323, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M32 are turned on, thereby making the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp (including at least the first The mounting detection terminal TE1, the transistor M32, the resistor R34 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2) are connected.
  • the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M31 are connected to ground, so that the voltage of the capacitor C31 is discharged to the ground through the resistor R32 , when the voltage of the capacitor C31 is not enough to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322, the output of the pulse generating unit 3322 drops from the first high-level voltage back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage of the first time, the first low-level voltage of the first The high-level voltage and the second first low-level voltage constitute a first pulse signal).
  • the current flowing through the capacitor in the LED power circuit (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response flows through the transistor M32 and the resistor R34, and forms on the resistor R34.
  • a voltage signal is provided to the input terminal IN2 so that the detection unit 3324 can compare the voltage signal with a reference voltage.
  • the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, the detection unit 3324 outputs a third high-level voltage to the detection result latch unit 3323 .
  • the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is lower than the reference voltage, the detection unit 3324 outputs a third low-level voltage to the detection result latch unit 3323 .
  • the detection result latching unit 3323 latches the third high-level voltage/third low-level voltage provided by the detection unit 3324, and then performs an OR logic operation on the latched signal and the signal provided by the pulse generating unit 3322 , and the output control signal is determined to be the second high-level voltage or the second low-level voltage according to the result of the OR logic operation.
  • the detection result latch unit 3323 latches the third high-level voltage output by the detection unit 3324, so as to maintain the output of the second voltage.
  • the high-level voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor M32, so that the transistor M32 and the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp are kept on. Since the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage, the transistor M31 is also kept on and grounded, so that the voltage of the capacitor C31 cannot rise enough to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322 .
  • the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is less than the reference voltage
  • the detection unit 3324 and the pulse generation unit 3322 both provide low-level voltages. Therefore, after the OR logic operation, the detection result latch unit 3323 will output and The second low level voltage is maintained to the base terminal of the transistor M32, so that the transistor M32 is kept off and the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is kept open.
  • the control signal on the output terminal OT is maintained at the second low-level voltage at this time, the transistor M31 is also maintained in the off state, and the capacitor C31 is charged through the resistor R31 after the driving voltage VCC to repeat the next time ( pulse) detection.
  • the detection mode described in this embodiment can be defined as the driving voltage VCC has been supplied to the installation detection module 3000c, but the detection unit 3324 has not yet determined that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage. period.
  • the detection mode since the control signal output by the detection result latch unit 3323 will repeatedly turn on and off the transistor M31, the discharge path is periodically turned on and off.
  • the capacitor C31 is periodically charged and discharged in response to the on/off of the transistor M31. Therefore, the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs a control signal with a periodic pulse waveform in the detection mode.
  • the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, or the driving voltage VCC is stopped, the detection mode can be regarded as ending (it has been determined that the installation is correct, or the LED tube has been removed). At this time, the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs a control signal maintained at the second high-level voltage or the second low-level voltage.
  • the integrated control module 3320 of this embodiment may be formed by integrating some circuit components of the detection pulse generation module 3210 , the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the detection determination circuit 3230 , instead of The integrated circuit components constitute the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 in this embodiment, respectively.
  • the function/circuit structure of the pulse generation unit 3322 in the integrated control module 3320 and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 can be equivalent to the detection pulse generation module 3210 of the second preferred embodiment, and the detection result latching unit in the integrated control module 3320
  • the function/circuit structure of 3323 can be equivalent to the detection result latching module 3220 of the second preferred embodiment, and the function/circuit structure of the detection unit 3324 in the integrated control module 3320 and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 can be equivalent to the detection and determination circuit 3230.
  • FIG. 22A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module of this embodiment may be, for example, a three-terminal switch device 3000d including a power terminal VP1, a first switch terminal SP1 and a second switch terminal SP2.
  • the power terminal VP1 of the three-terminal switching device 3000d is suitable for receiving the driving voltage VCC
  • the first switching terminal SP1 is suitable for connecting one of the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 (shown as The first installation detection terminal TE1 is connected, but not limited to this)
  • the second switch terminal SP2 is suitable for connecting the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2. Two install the detection terminal TE2, but not limited to this).
  • the three-terminal switching device 3000d includes a signal processing unit 3420, a signal generating unit 3410, a signal collecting unit 3430, and a switching unit 3200d.
  • the three-terminal switching device 3000d may further include an internal power detection unit 3440 .
  • the signal processing unit 3420 can output a control signal with a pulse waveform in the detection mode according to the signals provided by the signal generation unit 3410 and the signal acquisition unit 3430, and output a control signal maintained at a high voltage level or a low voltage level after the detection mode.
  • the control signal is used to control the conduction state of the switch unit 3200d, so as to determine whether to turn on the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • the signal generating unit 3410 can generate a pulse signal to the signal processing unit 3420 when receiving the driving voltage VCC.
  • the pulse signal generated by the signal generating unit 3410 may be generated according to a reference signal received from the outside, or independently generated by itself, which is not limited in this application.
  • the "external” mentioned here is relative to the signal generating unit 3410, that is, as long as the reference signal is not generated by the signal generating unit 3410, whether it is generated by other circuits in the three-terminal switching device 3000d, or generated by the three-terminal switching device 3000d.
  • the reference signals generated by the external circuit of the end switch device 3000d belong to the reference signals received from the outside as described herein.
  • the signal acquisition unit 3430 can be used to sample the electrical signal on the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp, and detect the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp according to the sampled signal, and then transmit the detection result signal indicating the detection result to the signal processing unit 3420 to be processed.
  • the three-terminal switching device 3000d can be implemented by an integrated circuit, that is, the three-terminal switching device can be a three-terminal switching control chip, which can be applied to any type of double-terminal feeding. In the LED straight tube lamp, it can provide the function of preventing electric shock.
  • the three-terminal switch device 3000d is not limited to include only three pins/connecting terminals, but three of the plurality of pins are configured in the above-mentioned manner, all of which belong to this embodiment. scope to be protected.
  • the signal processing unit 3420 , the signal generation unit 3410 , the signal acquisition unit 3430 , the switch unit 3200d and the internal power detection unit 3440 can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 22B to 22F respectively (but not limited thereto) 22B to 22F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
  • FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal processing unit in which a detection module is installed according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the signal processing unit 3420 includes a driver DRV, an OR gate OG, and a D-type flip-flop DFF.
  • the driver DRV has an input terminal and an output terminal, and the output terminal of the driver DRV is used to connect the switch unit 3200d via the path 3421, so as to provide a control signal to the switch unit 3200d.
  • the OR gate OG has a first input terminal, a second input terminal, and an output terminal.
  • the first input terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the signal generating unit 3410 via the path 3411, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is coupled to the input terminal of the driver DRV.
  • the D-type flip-flop DFF has a data input terminal (D), a frequency input terminal (CK) and an output terminal (Q).
  • the data input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF receives the driving voltage VCC, the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF is connected to the signal acquisition unit 3430 through the path 3431, and the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop is coupled to the second input of the OR gate OG end.
  • FIG. 22C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal generating unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the signal generating unit 3410 includes resistors R41 and R42, a capacitor C41, a switch M41 and a comparator CP41.
  • One end of the resistor R41 receives the driving voltage VCC, and the resistor R41 , the resistor R42 and the capacitor C41 are connected in series between the driving voltage VCC and the ground terminal.
  • the switch M41 is connected in parallel with the capacitor C41.
  • the comparator CP41 has a first input terminal, a second input terminal, and an output terminal.
  • the first input terminal of the comparator CP41 is coupled to the connection terminals of the resistors R41 and R42, the second input terminal of the comparator CP41 receives a reference voltage Vref1, and the output terminal of the comparator CP41 is coupled to the control terminal of the switch M41.
  • FIG. 22D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal acquisition unit installed with a detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the signal acquisition unit 3430 includes an OR gate OG and comparators CP42 and CP43.
  • the OR gate OG has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the signal processing unit 3420 via a path 3431 .
  • the first input terminal of the comparator CP42 is connected to one end of the switch unit 3200d (ie, on the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp) via the path 2962, and the second input terminal of the comparator CP42 receives a first reference voltage (eg 1.25V, But not limited thereto), and the output terminal of the comparator CP42 is coupled to the first input terminal of the OR gate OG.
  • the first input terminal of the comparator CP43 receives a second reference voltage (such as 0.15V, but not limited thereto), the second input terminal of the comparator CP43 is coupled to the first input terminal of the comparator CP42, and the The output terminal is coupled to the second input terminal of the OR gate OG.
  • FIG. 22E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch unit installed with a detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the switch unit 3200d includes a transistor M42 having a gate terminal, a drain terminal and a source terminal.
  • the gate terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the signal processing unit 3420 via the path 3421
  • the drain terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the first switching terminal SP1 via the path 3201
  • the source terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the second switching terminal SP2 and the comparator via the path 3202.
  • the first input of CP42 and the second input of comparator CP43 is connected to the second switching terminal SP2 and the comparator via the path 3202.
  • FIG. 22F is a schematic circuit block diagram of the internal power detection unit of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application.
  • the internal power detection unit 3440 includes a clamping circuit 3442, a reference voltage generating circuit 3443, a voltage adjusting circuit 3444, and a Schmitt trigger STRG.
  • the clamping circuit 3442 and the voltage adjusting circuit 3444 are respectively coupled to the power terminal VP1 to receive the driving voltage VCC, so as to perform voltage clamping and voltage adjustment on the driving voltage VCC, respectively.
  • the reference voltage generating circuit 3443 is coupled to the voltage adjusting circuit for generating a reference voltage for the voltage adjusting circuit 3444 .
  • the Schmitt trigger STRG has an input terminal and an output terminal.
  • the input terminal is coupled to the clamping circuit 3442 and the voltage adjustment circuit 3444, and the output terminal outputs the driving voltage to indicate whether the driving voltage VCC is normally supplied.
  • a power confirmation signal if the driving voltage VCC is in a normal supply state, the Schmitt trigger STRG will output an enabled (eg high level) power supply confirmation signal, so that the driving voltage VCC is supplied to the components/components in the three-terminal switching device 3000d. circuit. On the contrary, if the driving voltage VCC is in an abnormal state, the Schmitt trigger STRG will output a disabled (eg, low level) power confirmation signal, so as to prevent the components/circuits in the three-terminal switching device 3000d from working abnormally damaged under the driving voltage VCC.
  • the driving voltage VCC when the LED straight tube lamp is replaced in the lamp socket, the driving voltage VCC will be provided to the three-terminal switching device 3000d through the power terminal VP1. At this time, the driving voltage VCC will charge the capacitor C41 through the resistors R41 and R42. When the capacitor voltage rises to exceed the reference voltage Vref1, the comparator CP41 switches to output a high-level voltage to the first input terminal of the OR gate OG and the control terminal of the switch M41. The switch M41 is turned on in response to the high-level voltage, so that the capacitor C41 starts to discharge to the ground. Through this charging and discharging process, the comparator CP41 outputs an output signal in the form of a pulse.
  • the OR gate OG will output a corresponding high-level voltage to turn on the transistor M42, so that the current flows on the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp.
  • a voltage signal corresponding to the magnitude of the current is established on the path 3202 .
  • the comparator CP42 samples the voltage signal and compares it with a first reference voltage (eg, 1.25V).
  • the comparator CP42 When the sampled voltage signal is greater than the first reference voltage (eg, 1.25V), the comparator CP42 will output a high-level voltage.
  • the OR gate OG will generate another high-level voltage to the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF in response to the high-level voltage output by the comparator CP42.
  • the D-type flip-flop DFF maintains the output high level voltage based on the output of the OR gate OG.
  • the driver DRV generates an enable control signal to turn on the transistor M42 in response to the high level voltage on the input terminal.
  • the transistor M42 can be remain on.
  • the comparator CP42 When the sampled voltage signal is less than the first reference voltage (eg 1.25V), the comparator CP42 will output a low level voltage.
  • the OR gate OG will generate another low-level voltage to the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF in response to the low-level voltage output by the comparator CP42.
  • the D-type flip-flop DFF maintains the output low level voltage based on the output of the OR gate OG.
  • the output of the comparator CP41 is pulled down to a low level voltage (ie, when the pulse period ends), since the two input terminals of the OR gate OG are both maintained at The low-level voltage causes the output terminal to also output a low-level voltage, so the driver DRV will generate a disable control signal in response to the received low-level voltage to turn off the transistor M42, so that the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned off. .
  • the operation of the signal processing unit 3420 of this embodiment is similar to the detection result latch circuit 3220 of the second preferred embodiment, and the operation of the signal generating unit 3410 is similar to the detection pulse of the second preferred embodiment.
  • the operation of the generation module 3210, the signal acquisition unit 3430 is similar to the detection and determination circuit 3230 of the second preferred embodiment, and the operation of the switch unit 3200d is similar to the operation of the switch circuit 3200b of the second preferred embodiment.
  • FIG. 23A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000e includes a detection pulse generation module 3510, a control circuit 3520, a detection determination circuit 3530, a switch circuit 3200e, and a detection path circuit 3560.
  • the detection determination circuit 3530 is coupled to the detection path circuit 3560 via the path 3561 to detect the signal on the detection path circuit 3560 .
  • the detection and determination circuit 3530 is also coupled to the control circuit 3520 via the path 3531 to transmit the detection result signal to the control circuit 3520 via the path 3531 .
  • the detection pulse generating module 3510 is coupled to the detection path circuit 3560 through the path 3511, and generates a pulse signal to notify the detection path circuit 3560 of the timing point of turning on the detection path or performing the detection operation.
  • the control circuit 3520 latches the detection result according to the detection result signal, and is coupled to the switch circuit 3200e via the path 3521 to transmit or reflect the detection result to the switch circuit 3200e.
  • the switch circuit 3200e determines to turn on or off the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2 according to the detection result.
  • the detection path circuit 3560 is coupled to the power loop of the power module via the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2.
  • the configuration of the detection pulse generation module 3510 may refer to the detection pulse generation module 3110 of FIG. 19B or the detection pulse generation module 3210 of FIG. 20B .
  • the path 3511 in this embodiment can be compared to the pulse signal output terminal 3111 , that is, the OR gate OG1 can be connected to the detection pulse through the path 3511 Path circuit 3560.
  • the detection pulse generating module 3510 is also connected to the output end of the control circuit 3520 through the path 3521, so the path 3521 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3321.
  • the control circuit 3520 can be implemented by using a control chip or any circuit with signal operation processing capability.
  • the control circuit 3520 determines that the user has not touched the lamp according to the detection result signal, the control circuit 3520 controls the switching state of the switch circuit 3200e, so that the external power can be normally supplied to the rear when the lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket. end of the LED module. At this time, the control circuit 3520 turns off the detection path.
  • the control circuit 3520 determines that the user touches the lamp according to the detection result signal, the control circuit 3520 maintains the switch circuit 3200e in an off state because the user may be at risk of electric shock.
  • the configuration of the detection determination circuit 3530 may refer to the detection determination circuit 3130 of FIG. 19C or the detection determination circuit 3230 of FIG. 20C .
  • the resistor R14 can be omitted.
  • the path 3561 in this embodiment can be compared to the switch coupling terminal 3201 , that is, the positive input terminal of the comparator CP11 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 .
  • the path 3531 in this embodiment can be compared to the detection result terminal 3131 , that is, the output terminal of the comparator CP11 is connected to the control circuit 3520 . Referring to FIG.
  • the resistor R24 can be omitted.
  • the path 3561 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3201 , that is, the anode of the diode D21 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 .
  • the path 3531 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3331 , that is, the outputs of the comparators CP21 and CP22 are connected to the control circuit 3520 .
  • the configuration of the switch circuit 3200e may refer to the switch circuit 3200a of FIG. 19E , the switch circuit 3200a of FIG. 19F , or the switch circuit 3200b of FIG. 20E . Since the structures of the two switch circuits are similar, the switch circuit 3200a in FIG. 19E is used as a representative for illustration. Referring to FIG. 19E, when the structure of the switch circuit 3200a is used as the switch circuit 3200e, the path 3521 of this embodiment can be compared to the path detection result latch terminal 3121, and the switch coupling terminal 3201 is not connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130, Instead, it is directly connected to the second installation detection terminal TE2.
  • FIGS. 23B , 23C and 23D are schematic diagrams of circuit structures of the detection path circuit according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection path circuit 3560a includes a transistor M51 and resistors R51 and R52.
  • the transistor M51 has a base, a collector and an emitter, and the emitter is connected to the detection pulse generating module 3510 via the path 3511 .
  • the first end of the resistor R52 is connected to the emitter of the transistor M51, and the second end of the resistor R52 is connected to the ground terminal GND as the second detection connection terminal DE2, that is, the resistor R52 is connected in series between the emitter of the transistor M51 and the ground terminal GND.
  • the first terminal of the resistor R51 is connected to the first installation detection terminal 2521 as the first detection connection terminal DE1, and the first installation detection terminal TE1 is connected to the second rectifier output terminal 512 as an example, that is, the resistance
  • the R51 is connected in series between the collector of the transistor M51 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
  • the detection path of this embodiment is equivalent to the configuration between the rectification output terminal and the ground terminal GND.
  • the transistor M51 when the transistor M51 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3510 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period.
  • a detection path from the first installation detection terminal TE1 to the ground terminal GND via the resistor R51, the transistor M51 and the resistor R52
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the voltage division of the resistors R51 and R52.
  • the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalently connected in series between the second detection connection terminal DE2 and the ground terminal GND, that is, in series with the resistors R51 and R52.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the resistors R51 and R52 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistors R51 and R52 with appropriate resistance values, the voltage signal on the node X can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit 3530 can be based on the voltage on the node X.
  • the signal generates a corresponding detection result signal.
  • the transistor M51 when the control circuit 3520 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the transistor M51 will remain in the off state, so that the power module can operate normally. Operates to power the LED module.
  • FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application.
  • the detection path circuit 3560b of this embodiment includes a transistor M52 and resistors R53 and R54, and its configuration and operation are substantially the same as the detection path circuit 3560a of the previous embodiment.
  • the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3560b of this embodiment is arranged in the first Between a rectifier output terminal 511 and a second rectifier output terminal 512 .
  • the first terminal of the resistor R53 (the first detection connection terminal DE1 ) is connected to the first rectification output terminal 511
  • the second terminal of the resistor R54 (the second detection connection terminal DE2 ) is connected to the second rectified output terminal 512.
  • the transistor M52 when the transistor M52 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3510 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period.
  • a detection path from the first rectifier output terminal 511 to the second rectifier output terminal 512 via the resistor R53 , the transistor M52 and the resistor R54 ) will respond to the turned-on transistor M52 It is then turned on, and a voltage signal is established on node X of the detection path.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the voltage division of the resistors R53 and R54.
  • the second detection connection terminal DE2 and the ground terminal GND are electrically connected. flat.
  • the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalent to being connected in series between the second terminal/second detection connection terminal DE2 of the resistor R54 and the ground terminal GND, that is, in series with the resistors R53 and R54.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the resistors R51 and R52 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistors R51 and R52 with appropriate resistance values, the voltage signal on the node X can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit can be based on the voltage signal on the node X. A corresponding detection result signal is generated.
  • the transistor M52 when the control circuit 3520 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the transistor M52 will remain in the off state, so that the power module can operate normally. Operates to power the LED module.
  • FIG. 23D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application.
  • the configuration and operation of the detection path circuit 3560c of this embodiment are substantially the same as those of the previous embodiments, the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3560c of this embodiment further includes a current limiting component D51 disposed on the power loop.
  • the current limiting component D51 is an example of a diode (hereinafter referred to as diode D51 ) disposed at the first rectifier output end 511 and the input end of the filter circuit 520 (ie, the connection end of the capacitor 725 and the inductor 726 ).
  • the circuit 520 is shown as an example of a ⁇ -type filter circuit, but the present application is not limited to this.
  • the addition of the diode D51 can limit the direction of the current on the main power circuit, so as to prevent the charged capacitor 725 from discharging the detection path in reverse when the transistor M51 is turned on, thereby affecting the accuracy of the anti-electric shock detection.
  • the configuration of the diode D51 is only an example of a current limiting component, and in other applications, as long as the electronic components that can be arranged on the power circuit and play a role in limiting the current direction can be implemented here , this application is not limited to this.
  • the detection path of this embodiment is additionally established instead of using the power loop as the detection path (ie, the power loop and the detection path do not overlap at least in part). Since the electronic components on the additionally established detection path are less than those on the power circuit, the voltage signal on the additionally established detection path can more accurately reflect the user's touch state.
  • circuits/modules described in this embodiment may also be partially or fully integrated into a chip configuration, as shown in the foregoing FIGS.
  • the installation detection module 3000e can further provide the function of stroboscopic suppression when the LED straight tube lamp is normally lit. Under this structure, as shown in FIG. 23A , the installation detection module 3000e may further include a ripple detection circuit 3580 .
  • the switch circuit 3200e is configured to be connected in series with the LED module (for example, one of the installation detection terminals TE1/TE2 is electrically connected to the cathode of the LED module, and the other is electrically connected to the ground terminal). .
  • the circuit operations of the detection pulse generation module 3510, the control circuit 3520, the detection determination circuit 3530, the detection path circuit 3560 and the switch circuit 3200e in the detection mode are the same as those described above, and control The circuit 3520 does not change its operating state/signal output state in response to the signal output by the ripple detection circuit 3580 in the detection mode.
  • the ripple detection circuit 3580 When the LED straight tube lamp enters the working mode, the ripple detection circuit 3580 will detect the voltage on the installation detection terminal TE2 and generate a corresponding signal and transmit it to the control circuit 3520 .
  • the control circuit 3520 will instead control the switch circuit 3200e to operate in the linear region according to the signal received from the ripple detection circuit 3580, so that the equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e between the two installation detection terminals TE1 and TE2 increases with the ripple.
  • the magnitude of the voltage detected by the detection circuit 3580 changes, so as to achieve the effect of maintaining stable brightness and suppressing flicker.
  • FIG. 23E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module with stroboscopic suppression function according to the first embodiment of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 23E , where the detection module is installed here, only the modules/circuits related to the stroboscopic suppression function are shown for illustration, and the specific module configuration can refer to the above-mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 23A-23D .
  • the switch circuit 3200e includes a transistor M53, wherein the transistor M53 may be, for example, an N-type MOSFET, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • the first terminal (eg, the drain) of the transistor M53 is coupled to the cathode of the LED module 50, and the second terminal (eg, the source) of the transistor M53 is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 via the resistor R55.
  • the transistor M53 is connected in series between the cathode of the LED module 50 and the ground terminal.
  • the ripple detection circuit 3580 detects the voltage on the second end of the transistor M53, and generates a corresponding ripple detection signal to transmit to the control circuit 3520. At this time, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal so that the equivalent impedance change of the switch circuit 3200e is positively correlated with the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 .
  • the control circuit 3520 when the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 is larger, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal to make the switch circuit 3200e have a higher equivalent impedance; on the contrary, when the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 is higher When the voltage is smaller, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal so that the switch circuit 3200e has a lower equivalent impedance. Therefore, the ripple current originally generated by the voltage fluctuation can be regarded as absorbed by the equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200e, so that the current passing through the LED module 50 can be substantially maintained within a relatively stable range, thereby realizing the frequency Flash suppression effect.
  • the control circuit 3520 outputs a signal in the working mode so that the switch circuit 3200e can stably operate in the saturation region, that is, in the working mode
  • the equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e does not change substantially due to the change of the drain-source voltage (ignoring the effect of channel length modulation).
  • the control circuit 3520 controls the switch circuit 3200e to operate in the linear region instead of in the saturation region in the working mode, so that the equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e varies with The detected voltage change reduces the stroboscopic phenomenon.
  • FIG. 24A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module 3000f includes a detection pulse generation module 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f , and a detection path circuit 3660 .
  • the connection relationship between the detection pulse generating module 3610, the control circuit 3620, the detection determination circuit 3630 and the switch circuit 3200f is the same as that in the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 23A, and they are connected to each other through the corresponding paths 3611, 3621, 3631, and 3661. Repeat again. In this embodiment, the main difference from the previous embodiment of FIG.
  • the 23A lies in the configuration and operation of the detection path circuit 3660 .
  • the first detection connection terminal DE1 of the detection path circuit 3660 in this embodiment is coupled to the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520
  • the second detection connection terminal DE2 is coupled to the second rectification output terminal 512 .
  • the detection path circuit 3660 is connected between the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 and the second rectification output terminal 512 of the rectifier circuit 510, that is, the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 is connected to the filter circuit 520 via the detection path circuit 3660.
  • the second rectification output terminal 512 is connected between the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 and the second rectification output terminal 512 of the rectifier circuit 510, that is, the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 is connected to the filter circuit 520 via the detection path circuit 3660.
  • the second rectification output terminal 512 is connected between the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 and the second rectification output terminal 512 of the
  • FIG. 24B and FIG. 24C are schematic diagrams of circuit structures of the installation detection module according to different embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application.
  • the filter circuit 520 is a ⁇ -type filter structure including capacitors 725, 727 and an inductor 726 as an example (this application is not limited to this), that is, the inductor 726 is connected in series with the first rectifier output end 511 and the first rectifier output end 511 and the first Between a filter output end 521 , the first ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are connected to the two ends of the inductor 726 correspondingly, and the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are connected together, wherein the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are low power flat end.
  • the installation detection module includes a detection pulse generation module 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f and a detection path circuit 3660 .
  • the detection path circuit 3660 includes a transistor M61 and a resistor R61. The gate of the transistor M61 is coupled to the detection pulse generating module 3610 , the source is coupled to the first end of the resistor R61 , and the drain is coupled to the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 . The second end of the resistor R61 is connected to the second rectification output end 512 and the first installation detection end TE1 as the second detection connection end 3292 .
  • the detection and determination circuit 3630 is coupled to the first end of the resistor R61 to detect the magnitude of the current flowing through the detection loop.
  • the detection loop can be equivalently composed of capacitors 725 and 727 , an inductor 726 , a transistor M61 and a resistor R61 .
  • the transistor M61 when the transistor M61 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3610 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period.
  • the current path from the first rectifier output terminal 511 to the second rectifier output terminal 512 via the detection path will be turned on in response to the turned-on transistor M61, and the resistance A voltage signal is established on the first terminal of R61.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the equivalent impedance of the filter circuit 520 and the voltage division of the resistor R61.
  • the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalent to being connected in series between the second detection connection terminal and the ground terminal.
  • the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the equivalent impedance of the filter circuit 520 , the resistance R61 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistor R61 with a suitable resistance value, the voltage signal on the first end of the resistor R61 can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit 3630 can be based on the resistance of the resistor R61.
  • the voltage signal on the first terminal generates a corresponding detection result signal, and the control circuit 3620 can control the conduction state of the switch circuit 3200f according to the detection result signal.
  • the transistor M61 will not be turned on for a short time in the detection mode, and when the control circuit 3620 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the switch circuit 3200f will be switched to the on state, so that the power module can operate normally. operation to power the LED module.
  • FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application.
  • the installation detection module of this embodiment includes a detection pulse generation circuit 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f and a detection path circuit 3660 .
  • the configuration and operation of the installed detection module of this embodiment are substantially the same as those of the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 24B , the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3660 of this embodiment is disposed between the second end of the capacitor 725 and the second rectifier output end 512 while the second end of the capacitor 727 is directly connected to the second installation detection end TE2 / the second filter output end 522 .
  • the current size of the current flowing through the detection path circuit 3660 is much smaller than that flowing through the detection path circuit 3560, so
  • the transistor M61/3395 in the detection path circuit 3660 can be implemented with smaller size components, which can effectively reduce the cost; in addition, the resistor R61 can be designed as a relatively small resistor, when the human body resistance is equivalently connected to the lamp, the detection path The change of the equivalent impedance on the sensor will be more obvious, which will make the detection result less susceptible to the influence of the parameter offset of other components.
  • the signal transmission design of the control circuit 3620 and the detection and determination circuit 3630 can more easily meet the signal format requirements of the driving controller, thereby reducing the difficulty of integrating the design of the installation detection module and the driving circuit. (This part will be further described in the subsequent embodiments).
  • FIG. 25A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an installation detection module 3000g.
  • the installation detection module 3000g includes a detection controller 3100g, a switch circuit 3200g and a bias circuit 3300g, wherein the detection controller 3100g includes a control module 3710, a start-up circuit 3770 and a detection period determination circuit 3780.
  • the configurations and operations of the rectifying circuit 510 , the filtering circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530 can be referred to the descriptions of the related embodiments, which are not repeated here.
  • the switch circuit 3200g is serially connected to the power supply circuit/power supply circuit of the power supply module (the figure shows the connection between the rectifier circuit 510 and the filter circuit 520 as an example), and is controlled by the control module 3710. switch on state.
  • the control module 3710 sends a control signal in the detection mode to briefly turn on the switch circuit 3200g, so as to detect whether there is an additional impedance connected to the power module during the period when the switch circuit 3200g is turned on (ie, the period when the power supply loop/power loop is turned on).
  • the control module 3710 can temporarily turn on the switch circuit 3200g by sending a control signal in the form of a pulse.
  • the specific design of the duration of the short turn-on period can be adjusted according to the impedance of the set detection path.
  • the control module 3710 and the switch circuit 3200g and related control actions reference may be made to other embodiments related to the installation detection module.
  • the bias circuit 3300 is connected to the power loop to generate the driving voltage VCC based on the rectified signal (ie, the bus voltage).
  • the driving voltage VCC is provided to the control module 3710 to enable the control module 3710 to start and operate in response to the driving voltage.
  • the start-up circuit 3770 is connected to the control module 3710 and is used for determining whether to affect the working state of the control module 3710 according to the output signal of the detection period determination circuit 3780 . For example, when the detection period determination circuit 3780 outputs an enable signal, the startup circuit 3770 controls the control module 3710 to stop working in response to the enable signal; when the detection period determination circuit 3780 outputs a disable signal, the startup circuit 3780 In response to the disable signal, the control module 3710 is controlled to maintain a normal working state (ie, the working state of the control module 3710 is not affected).
  • the start-up circuit 3780 can control the control module 3710 to stop working by bypassing the driving voltage VCC or providing a low-level start signal to the enable pin of the control module 3710, which is not limited in this application. .
  • the detection period determination circuit 3780 is used for sampling the electrical signal on the detection path/power loop, thereby counting the working time of the control module 3710, and outputting a signal indicating the counting result to the start-up circuit 3770, so that the start-up circuit 3770 decides based on the signal indicating the counting result The working state of the control module 3710.
  • the control module 3710 When the rectifier circuit 510 receives external power through the pins 501 and 502, the bias circuit 3300g generates the driving voltage VCC according to the rectified bus voltage.
  • the control module 3710 is activated in response to the driving voltage VCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, the control module 3710 periodically sends a control signal with a pulse waveform to the switch circuit 3200g, so that the switch circuit 3200g is periodically turned on for a short time and then turned off.
  • the current waveform on the power loop will be similar to the current waveform in the detection time interval Tw in FIG. 45D (ie, a plurality of current pulses Idp with intervals).
  • the detection period determination circuit 3780 starts to count the working time of the control module 3710 in the detection mode when receiving the bus voltage on the power circuit, and outputs a signal indicating the counting result to the start circuit 3770 .
  • the startup circuit 3770 will not affect the working state of the control module 3710 .
  • the control module 3710 will decide to maintain the detection mode or enter the working mode according to its own detection result. If the control module 3710 determines to enter the working mode, the control module 3710 controls the switch circuit 3200g to maintain the on state, and shields the influence of other signals on its working state. In other words, in the working mode, no matter what kind of signal the startup circuit 3770 outputs, it will not affect the working state of the control module 3710 .
  • the start-up circuit 3770 will control the control module 3710 to stop working in response to the output of the detection period determination circuit 3780 .
  • the control module 3710 no longer issues pulses and maintains the switch circuit 3200g in an off state until the control module 3710 is reset.
  • the set duration is the detection time interval Tw.
  • the installation detection module 3000g can achieve the current waveform shown in Figure 45D to Figure 45F by setting the pulse interval and reset period of the control signal, thereby ensuring that the electric power in the detection mode is still within a reasonable safety range, Avoid detection of current to cause human harm.
  • the start-up circuit 3770 and the detection period decision circuit 3780 can be regarded as a delay control circuit as a whole.
  • a specific path is turned on to control the target circuit (eg, the control module 3710 ).
  • the delay control circuit can realize circuit actions such as delayed turn-on of the power supply loop or delayed turn-off of the installed detection module in the LED straight tube lamp.
  • FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application.
  • the power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an installation detection module 3000h.
  • the installation detection module 3000h includes a detection controller 3100h, a switch circuit 3200h and a bias circuit 3300h, wherein the detection controller 3100h includes a control module 3810, a start-up circuit 3870 and a detection period determination circuit 3880.
  • the configuration and operation of the rectifier circuit 510, the filter circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530 can refer to the description of the relevant embodiments; in addition, the configuration and operation of the control module 3810 and the switch circuit 3200h can refer to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 25A, which is not repeated here. Repeat.
  • the bias circuit 3300h includes a resistor R71, a capacitor C71 and a Zener diode ZD1.
  • the first end of the resistor R71 is connected to the rectified output (ie, connected to the bus).
  • the capacitor C71 and the Zener diode ZD1 are connected in parallel with each other, and the first terminal is connected to the second terminal of the resistor R71 in common.
  • the power input terminal of the control module 3810 is connected to the common node of the resistor R71, the capacitor C71 and the Zener diode ZD1 (ie, the bias node of the bias circuit 3300h) to receive the driving voltage VCC on the common node.
  • the start-up circuit 3870 includes a Zener diode ZD2, a transistor M71 and a capacitor C72.
  • the anode of the Zener diode ZD2 is connected to the control terminal of the transistor M71.
  • the first terminal of the transistor M71 is connected to the control module 3810, and the second terminal of the transistor M71 is connected to the ground terminal GND.
  • the capacitor C72 is connected between the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor M71.
  • the detection period determination circuit 3880 includes a resistor R72, a diode D71 and a capacitor C73.
  • the first end of the resistor R72 is connected to the bias node of the bias circuit 3300, and the second end of the resistor R72 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode ZD2.
  • the anode of diode D71 is connected to the second terminal of resistor R72, and the cathode of diode D71 is connected to the first terminal of resistor R72.
  • the first terminal of the capacitor C73 is connected to the second terminal of the resistor R72 and the anode of the diode D71, and the second terminal of the capacitor C73 is connected to the ground terminal GND.
  • the rectifier circuit 510 receives external power through the pins 501 and 502, the rectified bus voltage will charge the capacitor C71, thereby establishing the driving voltage VCC on the bias node.
  • the control module 3810 is activated in response to the driving voltage VCCVCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, from the first signal cycle, the control module 3810 sends a control signal with a pulse waveform to the switch circuit 3200h, so that the switch circuit 3200h turns on briefly and then turns off.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)

Abstract

A misuse warning module (580, 680), comprising a detection circuit (583, 683) and a prompt circuit (584, 684). The detection circuit (583, 683) is electrically connected to a power supply loop, and is used for detecting the type of an external power signal and the current level in the loop and outputting a detection signal; and the prompt circuit (584, 684) is used for issuing a misuse prompt according to the detection signal to warn a user that an LED lamp accesses an inapplicable external power supply.

Description

一种LED灯及误用警示模块An LED light and a misuse warning module
本申请涉及LED照明的技术领域，具体涉及一种LED灯及误用警示模块。The present application relates to the technical field of LED lighting, in particular to an LED lamp and a misuse warning module.
背景技术Background technique
LED灯因其高效，环保的特点逐渐取代荧光灯成为第四代照明产品。Because of its high efficiency and environmental protection, LED lamps have gradually replaced fluorescent lamps as the fourth generation of lighting products.
LED直管灯中有一类产品是直接使用市电作为其供电信号，LED直管灯可例如是T5或者T8型灯管在安装施工时存在安全隐患，若一端接脚已经接入市电，施工人员接触到另一端的接脚时存在触电风险。There is a type of LED straight tube light that directly uses the mains as its power supply signal. For example, the LED straight tube light can be a T5 or T8 type lamp. There are potential safety hazards during installation and construction. There is a risk of electric shock if a person touches the pins on the other end.
为了保证施工人员的安全，一般的在灯管上设置安装检测装置，这种安装检测装置一般有两种，机械式和电子式。机械式的安装检测装置在灯头上设置有机械装置，只有灯管正确装入灯座后才使接脚接入电力，以防止安装过程中出现触电；电子式的安装检测装置，在灯管上电时，使供电回路导通极短的瞬间，在检测导通期间，根据电路中的电流或电压情况来判断灯管是否正确安装，当检测到有人体接入供电回路时，安装检测装置断开供电回路，以保证人体安全。In order to ensure the safety of construction workers, installation and detection devices are generally installed on the lamp tubes. There are generally two types of installation and detection devices, mechanical and electronic. The mechanical installation detection device is provided with a mechanical device on the lamp holder. Only after the lamp tube is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the pins are connected to the power to prevent electric shock during the installation process; the electronic installation detection device is installed on the lamp tube. When the power supply circuit is turned on for a very short moment, during the detection and conduction period, it is judged whether the lamp is installed correctly according to the current or voltage in the circuit. Open the power supply circuit to ensure human safety.
此类具有电子式的安装检测装置在使用应急镇流器供电时，因应急镇流器提供的是直流供电信号，此时，即使安装人员触碰到灯管引脚也不会存在触电风险；再者，此直流供电信号可能导致安装检测模块无法正常检测，LED灯无法正常点亮。When this type of electronic installation detection device is powered by an emergency ballast, because the emergency ballast provides a DC power supply signal, at this time, even if the installer touches the lamp pin, there is no risk of electric shock; Furthermore, the DC power supply signal may cause the installation detection module to fail to detect normally, and the LED light to fail to light normally.
LED直管灯可例如是T5或者T8型灯管在安装施工时存在安全隐患，若一端接脚已经接入市电，施工人员接触到另一端的接脚时存在触电风险。The LED straight tube lamp can be, for example, a T5 or T8 type lamp. There are potential safety hazards during installation and construction. If one end of the pin is connected to the mains, there is a risk of electric shock when the construction personnel touch the other end of the pin.
为了保证施工人员的安全，一般的在灯管上设置安装检测装置，这种安装检测装置一般有两种，机械式和电子式。机械式的安装检测装置在灯头上设置有机械装置，只有灯管正确装入灯座后才使接脚接入电力，以防止安装过程中出现触电；电子式的安装检测装置，在灯管上电时，使供电回路导通极短的瞬间，在检测导通期间，根据电路中的电流或电压情况来判断灯管是否正确安装，当检测到有人体接入供电回路时，安装检测装置断开供电回路，以保证人体安全。In order to ensure the safety of construction workers, installation and detection devices are generally installed on the lamp tubes. There are generally two types of installation and detection devices, mechanical and electronic. The mechanical installation detection device is provided with a mechanical device on the lamp holder. Only after the lamp tube is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the pins are connected to the power to prevent electric shock during the installation process; the electronic installation detection device is installed on the lamp tube. When the power supply circuit is turned on for a very short moment, during the detection and conduction period, it is judged whether the lamp is installed correctly according to the current or voltage in the circuit. Open the power supply circuit to ensure human safety.
当使用市电信号的LED灯接入不兼容的外部电力信号，可例如是电子镇流器或电感镇流器提供的电力信号时，有可能会无法正常工作甚至烧毁。一般的会在灯具的安装手册上明确告知用户具体的接线方式，但是仍然无法避免用户误用的情况存在。When an LED lamp using a commercial power signal is connected to an incompatible external power signal, such as a power signal provided by an electronic ballast or an inductive ballast, it may fail to work normally or even burn out. Generally, the specific wiring method will be clearly informed to the user in the installation manual of the luminaire, but it is still unavoidable that the user may misuse it.
当供电回路的线路阻抗较大时，电子式的安装检测装置会将供电回路的线路阻抗误判为人体接入供电回路，这种情况下，LED灯无法正常点亮。When the line impedance of the power supply loop is large, the electronic installation detection device will misjudge the line impedance of the power supply loop as the human body being connected to the power supply loop. In this case, the LED light cannot be lit normally.
传统的灯具使用的驱动电源分为电感镇流器或电子镇流器，新型的LED灯在对传统灯具 进行替换时，原有的镇流器若没有拆除，可能会无法点亮LED灯或者发生烧毁甚至着火事故。The driving power used in traditional lamps is divided into inductive ballasts or electronic ballasts. When replacing traditional lamps with new LED lamps, if the original ballasts are not removed, the LED lamps may not be able to light up or may occur. Burn down or even fire accident.
实用新型内容Utility model content
在此摘要描述关于「本申请」的许多实施例。然而所述词汇「本申请」仅仅用来描述在此说明书中揭露的某些实施例(不管是否已在权利要求项中)，而不是所有可能的实施例的完整描述。以下被描述为「本申请」的各个特征或方面的某些实施例可以不同方式合并以形成一LED直管灯或其中一部分。Numerous embodiments with respect to the "application" are described in this abstract. However, the term "application" is only used to describe certain embodiments disclosed in this specification (whether in the claims or not), rather than a complete description of all possible embodiments. Certain embodiments of the various features or aspects described below as "the present application" may be combined in various ways to form an LED straight tube lamp or a portion thereof.
本申请提出一种误用警示模块，其特征在于，包含检测电路，电性连接至LED灯的供电回路，用以检测外部电力信号的类型和所述供电回路的电流水平以生成检测信号；以及提示电路，用以接收所述检测信号，在LED灯非正常安装时发出提示。The present application provides a misuse warning module, which is characterized by comprising a detection circuit electrically connected to a power supply loop of an LED lamp for detecting the type of external power signal and the current level of the power supply loop to generate a detection signal; and The prompting circuit is used to receive the detection signal and issue a prompt when the LED lamp is installed abnormally.
本申请一实施例中，所述检测电路包含第一检测电路，电性连接至LED灯的供电回路，用以检测所述供电回路的电流水平，在所述电流大于设定阈值时输出第一检测信号，以及在所述电流小于等于设定阈值时输出第二检测信号。In an embodiment of the present application, the detection circuit includes a first detection circuit, which is electrically connected to a power supply circuit of the LED lamp for detecting the current level of the power supply circuit, and outputs the first detection circuit when the current is greater than a set threshold. a detection signal, and outputting a second detection signal when the current is less than or equal to a set threshold.
本申请一实施例中，所述检测电路更包含第二检测电路，电性连接至外部电源的输入端，用以在外部电力信号为直流信号时输出第三检测信号。In an embodiment of the present application, the detection circuit further includes a second detection circuit electrically connected to the input end of the external power source for outputting a third detection signal when the external power signal is a DC signal.
本申请一实施例中，所述检测电路更包含第三检测电路，电性连接至外部电源的输入端，用以在外部电力信号由电子镇流器提供时输出第四检测信号，其中所述第三检测电路通过检测外部电力信号的频率、相位、以及幅值中的至少一种判断外部电力信号是否由电子镇流器提供。In an embodiment of the present application, the detection circuit further includes a third detection circuit, which is electrically connected to the input end of the external power source and used to output a fourth detection signal when the external power signal is provided by the electronic ballast, wherein the The third detection circuit determines whether the external power signal is provided by the electronic ballast by detecting at least one of the frequency, phase and amplitude of the external power signal.
本申请一实施例中，所述第一检测电路包含检测脉冲发生模块，用以生成一脉冲信号；开关电路，耦接于所述供电回路，用以根据所述脉冲信号导通或截止；以及检测判定电路，用以检测所述开关电路导通时供电回路的电流水平，当所述电流大于设定阈值时，输出所述第一检测信号以及在所述电流小于等于设定阈值时输出所述第二检测信号。In an embodiment of the present application, the first detection circuit includes a detection pulse generation module for generating a pulse signal; a switch circuit coupled to the power supply circuit for turning on or off according to the pulse signal; and A detection and determination circuit is used to detect the current level of the power supply circuit when the switch circuit is turned on, when the current is greater than a set threshold, output the first detection signal and output the first detection signal when the current is less than or equal to the set threshold the second detection signal.
本申请一实施例中，所述开关电路用以根据所述第一检测信号和/或第三检测信号导通。In an embodiment of the present application, the switch circuit is configured to be turned on according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal.
本申请一实施例中，所述提示电路用以根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号指示所述开关电路间歇导通，以令LED灯闪烁。In an embodiment of the present application, the prompt circuit is used to instruct the switch circuit to be intermittently turned on according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal, so as to make the LED light flash.
本申请一实施例中，所述开关电路用以根据所述第二检测电路和/或第四检测信号断开，所述提示电路用以根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号发出提示。In an embodiment of the present application, the switch circuit is configured to be disconnected according to the second detection circuit and/or the fourth detection signal, and the prompt circuit is configured to be disconnected according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal Issue a prompt.
本申请一实施例中，所述提示电路包含以下至少一种：蜂鸣器，提示灯，所述蜂鸣器或提示灯用以根据所述第二检测信号发出提示。In an embodiment of the present application, the prompt circuit includes at least one of the following: a buzzer and a prompt light, and the buzzer or the prompt light is used to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal.
本申请一实施例中，所述误用警示模块更包含限流电路，串联于所述供电回路，用以根 据所述第一检测信号和/或第三检测信号导通所述供电回路，以及根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号间歇导通所述供电回路以令LED灯闪烁。In an embodiment of the present application, the misuse warning module further includes a current limiting circuit, which is connected in series with the power supply loop to turn on the power supply loop according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal, and The power supply circuit is intermittently turned on according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal to make the LED lights flash.
本申请一实施例中，所述误用警示模块更包含限流电路，串联于所述供电回路，用以根据所述第一检测信号和/或第三检测信号导通所述供电回路，以及根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号断开所述供电回路，所述提示电路用以根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号发出提示。In an embodiment of the present application, the misuse warning module further includes a current limiting circuit, which is connected in series with the power supply loop to turn on the power supply loop according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal, and The power supply circuit is disconnected according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal, and the prompt circuit is configured to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal.
本申请一实施例中，所述提示电路包含以下至少一种：蜂鸣器，提示灯，所述蜂鸣器或提示灯用以根据所述第二检测信号发出提示。In an embodiment of the present application, the prompt circuit includes at least one of the following: a buzzer and a prompt light, and the buzzer or the prompt light is used to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal.
本申请提出一种LED灯，其特征在于，包含至少两个接脚，第一接脚和第二接脚，用以接收外部驱动信号；电源模块，电性连接至所述第一接脚和所述第二接脚，用以对所述外部驱动信号进行电源转换，以生成驱动信号；LED模块，用以接收所述驱动信号而点亮；安装检测模块，用以检测供电回路中的电流，并根据所述供电回路的电流水平决定是否限制所述供电回路的电流；以及阻抗调整模块，电性连接至所述第一接脚和所述第二接脚，用以调节供电回路的阻抗，以影响所述安装检测模块的判断，其中，当在供电回路中串联第一电阻时，所述安装检测模块限制供电回路的电流，所述LED灯无法正常点亮；当至少两个或多个所述LED灯并联时，所述安装检测模块不限制供电回路的电流，多个所述LED灯正常点亮。其中，所述供电回路为外部电力信号向LED灯供电的路径，所述第一电阻与所述多个灯管分别串联。The present application provides an LED lamp, which is characterized in that it includes at least two pins, a first pin and a second pin, for receiving an external driving signal; a power module is electrically connected to the first pin and the second pin. The second pin is used to convert the power of the external driving signal to generate a driving signal; the LED module is used to receive the driving signal and light up; a detection module is installed to detect the current in the power supply loop , and determine whether to limit the current of the power supply loop according to the current level of the power supply loop; and an impedance adjustment module, electrically connected to the first pin and the second pin, for adjusting the impedance of the power supply loop , so as to affect the judgment of the installation detection module, wherein when a first resistor is connected in series in the power supply loop, the installation detection module limits the current of the power supply loop, and the LED lights cannot be normally lit; when at least two or more When several of the LED lights are connected in parallel, the installation detection module does not limit the current of the power supply circuit, and a plurality of the LED lights are normally lit. Wherein, the power supply loop is a path through which an external power signal supplies power to the LED lamp, and the first resistor is connected in series with the plurality of lamp tubes, respectively.
本申请一实施例中，所述第一电阻的阻值为100-500欧姆。In an embodiment of the present application, the resistance value of the first resistor is 100-500 ohms.
本申请一实施例中，所述阻抗调整模块包含第一电容，所述第一电容的第一引脚电性连接至所述第一接脚，其第二引脚电性连接至所述第二接脚。In an embodiment of the present application, the impedance adjustment module includes a first capacitor, a first pin of the first capacitor is electrically connected to the first pin, and a second pin thereof is electrically connected to the first pin Two pins.
本申请一实施例中，所述第一电容的容值为30-50nF。In an embodiment of the present application, the capacitance of the first capacitor is 30-50nF.
本申请一实施例中，所述第一电容的容值为47nF。In an embodiment of the present application, the capacitance of the first capacitor is 47nF.
本申请一实施例中，所述安装检测模块包含：检测脉冲发生模块，用以生成一脉冲信号；开关电路，耦接于所述供电回路，用以根据所述脉冲信号导通或截止；以及检测判定电路，用以检测所述开关电路导通时供电回路的电流水平，当所述电流大于设定阈值时，输出第一检测信号，其中，所述开关电路根据所述第一检测信号导通。In an embodiment of the present application, the installation detection module includes: a detection pulse generation module for generating a pulse signal; a switch circuit coupled to the power supply circuit for turning on or off according to the pulse signal; and A detection and determination circuit is used to detect the current level of the power supply circuit when the switch circuit is turned on, and when the current is greater than a set threshold, a first detection signal is output, wherein the switch circuit conducts a signal according to the first detection signal Pass.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1A是本申请第一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板与电源模块在灯管内部的平面剖视图；1A is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp of the first embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
图1B是本申请第二实施例的LED直管灯的灯板与电源模块在灯管内部的平面剖视图；1B is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
图1C是本申请第三实施例的LED直管灯的灯板与电源模块在灯管内部的平面剖视图；1C is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp of the third embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube;
图2是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板的平面剖视图；2 is a plan cross-sectional view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板的立体图；3 is a perspective view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板和电源模块的印刷电路板的立体图；4 is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp and a printed circuit board of a power module according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5A至图5C是本申请一实施例的灯板与电源的焊接过程的局部示意图；5A to 5C are partial schematic diagrams of a welding process of a lamp board and a power source according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5D是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板的局部示意图；5D is a partial schematic diagram of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5E是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板和电源模块的电路板连接的平面剖视图；5E is a plan cross-sectional view of the connection between the lamp board of the LED straight tube lamp and the circuit board of the power module according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5F是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的光源焊盘的局部结构示意图；5F is a schematic partial structure diagram of a light source pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5G是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的电源焊盘的局部结构示意图；5G is a schematic partial structure diagram of a power pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6A是本申请第一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板和电源模块的立体结构示意图；6A is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of a lamp board and a power module of an LED straight tube lamp according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图6B是本申请第二实施例的LED直管灯的灯板和电源模块的立体结构示意图；6B is a schematic three-dimensional structural diagram of a lamp board and a power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的内部导线示意图；FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an inner wire of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8A是本申请第一实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；8A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图8B是本申请第二实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；FIG. 8B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图8C是本申请第三实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；8C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图8D是本申请第四实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；FIG. 8D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图8E是本申请第五实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；8E is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a fifth embodiment of the present application;
图9A是本申请第一实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；9A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图9B是本申请第二实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；9B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图9C是本申请第三实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；9C is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a third embodiment of the present application;
图10A是本申请第一实施例的LED模块的电路架构示意图；10A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图10B是本申请第二实施例的LED模块的电路架构示意图；10B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图10C是本申请第一实施例的LED模块的走线示意图；10C is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图10D是本申请第二实施例的LED模块的走线示意图；10D is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图10E是本申请第三实施例的LED模块的走线示意图；FIG. 10E is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图10F是本申请第四实施例的LED模块的走线示意图；10F is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图10G是本申请第五实施例的LED模块的走线示意图；10G is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application;
图10H是本申请第六实施例的LED模块的走线示意图；10H is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application;
图10I是本申请第七实施例的LED模块的走线示意图；10I is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application;
图11A是本申请第一实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图；11A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图11B是本申请第二实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图；FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图11C是本申请第三实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图；11C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图11D是本申请第四实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图；11D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图11E是本申请第五实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图；11E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application;
图11F是本申请第六实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图；11F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application;
图12A是本申请第一实施例的滤波电路的电路方块示意图；FIG. 12A is a schematic block diagram of a filter circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图12B是本申请第一实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图；12B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图12C是本申请第二实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图；12C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filtering unit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图12D是本申请第三实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图；FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图12E是本申请第三实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图；12E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filtering unit according to a third embodiment of the present application;
图12F是本申请第三实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图；FIG. 12F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图12G是本申请第三实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图；FIG. 12G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图12H是本申请一实施例的滤波单元及负压消除单元的电路架构示意图；12H is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filter unit and a negative pressure elimination unit according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13A是本申请第一实施例的驱动电路的电路方块示意图；13A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图13B是本申请第一实施例的驱动电路的电路架构示意图；13B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图13C是本申请第二实施例的驱动电路的电路架构示意图；13C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图13D是本申请第三实施例的驱动电路的电路架构示意图；13D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图13E是本申请第四实施例的驱动电路的电路架构示意图；13E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图14A是本申请第一实施例的驱动电路的信号波形示意图；14A is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图14B是本申请第二实施例的驱动电路的信号波形示意图；14B is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图14C是本申请第三实施例的驱动电路的信号波形示意图；14C is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图14D是本申请第四实施例的驱动电路的信号波形示意图；14D is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图15A是本申请第四实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；15A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application;
图15B是本申请第五实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；15B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application;
图15C是本申请第一实施例的过压保护电路的电路架构示意图；15C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图15D是本申请第二实施例的过压保护电路的电路方块示意图；15D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图15E是本申请第二实施例的过压保护电路的电路架构示意图；15E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图15F是本申请第二实施例的过压保护电路的局部电路架构示意图；15F is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图15G是本申请第二实施例的过压保护电路的局部电路架构示意图；15G is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图15H是本申请第二实施例的过压保护电路的局部电路架构示意图；15H is a schematic diagram of a partial circuit structure of the overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图16A是本申请第六实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；16A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application;
图16B是本申请第七实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；16B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application;
图16C是本申请一实施例的辅助供电模块的电路架构示意图；16C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application;
图16D是本申请第八实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；16D is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application;
图16E是本申请第一实施例的辅助供电模块的电路方块示意图；16E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图16F是本申请第九实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；16F is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power supply module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application;
图16G是本申请第二实施例的辅助供电模块的电路方块示意图；16G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图16H是本申请第三实施例的辅助供电模块的电路方块示意图；16H is a schematic circuit block diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to a third embodiment of the present application;
图16I是本申请第一实施例的辅助供电模块的配置示意图；16I is a schematic configuration diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图16J是本申请第二实施例的辅助供电模块的配置示意图；16J is a schematic configuration diagram of an auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图16K是本申请第六实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；16K is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixth embodiment of the present application;
图16L是本申请第七实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；16L is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the seventh embodiment of the present application;
图16M是本申请第八实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；16M is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the eighth embodiment of the present application;
图16N是本申请第一实施例的辅助供电模块的电路架构示意图；16N is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图16O是本申请第二实施例的辅助供电模块的电路架构示意图；160 is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to a second embodiment of the present application;
图16P是本申请一实施例的辅助供电模块处于正常状态时的信号时序图；16P is a signal timing diagram when the auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application is in a normal state;
图16Q是本申请一实施例的辅助供电模块处于异常状态时的信号时序图；16Q is a signal timing diagram when the auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application is in an abnormal state;
图17A是本申请第十二实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；17A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application;
图17B是本申请第十三实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；17B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application;
图17C是本申请第十四实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；17C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application;
图17D为本申请第十五实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；17D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application;
图17E为本申请第十六实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；17E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present application;
图17F为本发明第一实施例的阻抗调整模块的电路结构示意图；17F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the impedance adjustment module according to the first embodiment of the present invention;
图17G为本申请第二实施例的阻抗调整模块的电路结构示意图；17G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the impedance adjustment module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图18是本申请第十实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；18 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a tenth embodiment of the present application;
图19A是本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；19A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图19B至图19F是本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；19B to 19F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图19G是本申请第一实施例的应急控制模块在电路中的电路方块示意图；FIG. 19G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图19H是本申请第二实施例的应急控制模块在电路中的电路方块示意图；19H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图19I是本申请第三实施例的应急控制模块在电路中的电路方块示意图；19I is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图20A是本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；20A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图20B至图20E是本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；20B to 20E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图21A是本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；21A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application;
图21B至图21E是本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；21B to 21E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图22A是本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；22A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application;
图22B至图22F是本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；22B to 22F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图22B是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的信号处理单元的电路架构示意图；22B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal processing unit in which a detection module is installed according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图22C是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的信号产生单元的电路架构示意图；22C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal generating unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application;
图22D是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的信号采集单元的电路架构示意图；22D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal acquisition unit installed with a detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图22E是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的开关单元的电路架构示意图；22E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch unit in which a detection module is installed according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图22F是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的内部电源检测单元的电路方块示意图；22F is a schematic circuit block diagram of an internal power supply detection unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application;
图23A是本申请第五实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；23A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application;
图23B是本申请第一实施例的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图；23B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图23C是本申请第二实施例的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图；23C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图23D是本申请第三实施例的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图；23D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图23E是本申请第一实施例的具有频闪抑制功能的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；23E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module with a stroboscopic suppression function according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图24A是本申请第六实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；24A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application;
图24B是本申请第五实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；24B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application;
图24C是本申请第六实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；24C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application;
图25A是本申请第七实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；25A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application;
图25B是本申请第七实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；25B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application;
图25C是本申请第八实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；25C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application;
图25D是本申请第九实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；25D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application;
图26A是本申请第八实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；26A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to an eighth embodiment of the present application;
图26B是本申请第九实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；26B is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application;
图27是本申请第十一实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；27 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application;
图28A是本申请第十实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；28A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the tenth embodiment of the present application;
图28B是本申请第十实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；28B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the tenth embodiment of the present application;
图29是本申请第十二实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；29 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application;
图30A是本申请第十一实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；30A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an installation detection module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application;
图30B至图30D及图30G是本申请第十一实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；30B to FIG. 30D and FIG. 30G are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application;
图30E是本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的信号波形示意图；30E is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图30F是本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；30F is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图30H是本申请第十二实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；30H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the twelfth embodiment of the present application;
图30I是本申请第一实施例的具有恒流驱动、触电检测以及调光功能的电源模块的电路 架构示意图；30I is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the power supply module with constant current driving, electric shock detection and dimming functions according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图31A是本申请第十二实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；31A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the twelfth embodiment of the present application;
图31B是根据本申请一实施例的偏压调整电路的电路架构示意图；31B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application;
图32A是本申请第十三实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；32A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application;
图32B是根据本申请第十三实施例的安装检测模块的控制电路的电路架构示意图；32B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a control circuit of an installation detection module according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present application;
图33A是本申请第十四实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；33A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application;
图33B是根据本申请一实施例的偏压调整电路的电路架构示意图；33B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application;
图33C是根据本申请一实施例的偏压调整电路的电路架构示意图；33C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application;
图34A是本申请第十五实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；34A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application;
图34B是本申请第一实施例的具有触电检测功能的驱动电路的电路架构示意图；34B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit with the electric shock detection function according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图35A是本申请第十六实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；35A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present application;
图35B是本申请第二实施例的具有触电检测功能的驱动电路的电路架构示意图；35B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图35C是本申请一实施例的集成控制器的电路方块示意图；35C is a schematic circuit block diagram of an integrated controller according to an embodiment of the present application;
图35D是本申请第三实施例的具有触电检测功能的驱动电路的电路架构示意图；35D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图36是本申请第十三实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；36 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application;
图37A是本申请第十七实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；37A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present application;
图37B和图37C是本申请第十三实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图；37B and 37C are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application;
图37B是根据本申请第十五实施例的安装检测模块的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图；37B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application;
图37C是根据本申请第十五实施例的安装检测模块的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图；37C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection path circuit for installing a detection module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application;
图38是本申请第十八实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图；38 is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present application;
图39A是本申请第一实施例的偏压电路的电路架构示意图；39A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the bias circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图39B是本申请第二实施例的偏压电路的电路架构示意图；39B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the bias circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图40是本申请一实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的电路方块示意图；40 is a schematic circuit block diagram of a detection pulse generation module according to an embodiment of the present application;
图41A是本申请第一实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图；41A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection pulse generation module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图41B是本申请第二实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图；41B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection pulse generation module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图42是本申请第一实施例的镇流检测模块的电路架构示意图；42 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the ballast detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图43A是本申请第一实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的信号时序示意图；43A is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图43B是本申请第二实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的信号时序示意图；43B is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图43C是本申请第三实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的信号时序示意图；43C is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图43D是本申请第四实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的信号时序示意图；43D is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图43E-图43G是本申请一些实施例的路径检测信号的波形示意图；43E-FIG. 43G are schematic waveform diagrams of path detection signals according to some embodiments of the present application;
图44是本申请第十四实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；44 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present application;
图45A至图45G是本申请不同实施例的电源模块的信号时序示意图；45A to 45G are schematic diagrams of signal timings of power modules according to different embodiments of the present application;
图45H-45K是本申请不同实施例的母线信号波形示意图；45H-45K are schematic diagrams of bus signal waveforms of different embodiments of the present application;
图46A是本申请第十五实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；46A is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application;
图46B是本申请第一实施例的误用警示模块的电路方块示意图；46B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the misuse warning module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图46C是本申请又一实施例的误用警示模块的电路方块示意图；46C is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse warning module according to another embodiment of the present application;
图46D是申请一实施例的误用检测电路的电路方块示意图；46D is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse detection circuit according to an embodiment of the application;
图46E是本申请又一实施例的误用检测电路的电路方块示意图；46E is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse detection circuit according to another embodiment of the present application;
图46F是本申请又一实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；46F is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power module according to another embodiment of the present application;
图46G是申请一实施例的误用检测电路的电路架构示意图46G is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a misuse detection circuit according to an embodiment of the application
图47A是本申请第十五实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图；47A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application;
图47B是本申请一实施例的提示电路的电路架构示意图；47B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a prompting circuit according to an embodiment of the present application;
图48A是本申请第一实施例的触电检测方法的步骤流程图；48A is a flow chart of the steps of the electric shock detection method according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图48B是本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图；48B is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图48C是本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图；48C is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图48D是本申请第一实施例的误用警示模块的控制方法的步骤流程图；48D is a flow chart of the steps of the control method of the misuse warning module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图48E是本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图；FIG. 48E is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图48F是申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图；48F is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module of the fourth embodiment of the application;
图48G是本申请第五实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图；48G is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application;
图49A是本申请第九实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；49A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a ninth embodiment of the present application;
图49B是本申请第十实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；49B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the tenth embodiment of the present application;
图49C是本申请第十一实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；49C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application;
图50A是本申请第一实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图；FIG. 50A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图50B是本申请第二实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图；50B is a schematic circuit block diagram of a configuration mode of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图50C是本申请第三实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图；FIG. 50C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图50D是本申请第四实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图；FIG. 50D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图50E是本申请第五实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图；50E is a schematic circuit block diagram of a configuration mode of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application;
图51是本申请第一实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路方块示意图；51 is a schematic block diagram of the surge protection circuit of the first embodiment of the present application;
图52是本申请第一实施例中的电感性电路的电位差示意图；52 is a schematic diagram of the potential difference of the inductive circuit in the first embodiment of the present application;
图53A是本申请第一实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application;
图53B是本申请第二实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application;
图53C是本申请第三实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application;
图53D是本申请第四实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application;
图53E是本申请第五实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application;
图53F是本申请第六实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application;
图53G是本申请第七实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the seventh embodiment of the present application;
图53H是本申请第八实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the eighth embodiment of the present application;
图53I是本申请第九实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图；53I is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the ninth embodiment of the present application;
图54为本发明第一实施例的LED灯照明系统的电路结构示意图；54 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED lamp lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention;
图55A为本发明第一实施例的LED灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；55A is a schematic block diagram of the circuit of the LED lamp lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention;
图55B为本发明第二实施例的LED灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；55B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present invention;
图55C为本发明第三实施例的LED灯照明系统的电路方块示意图；55C is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of an LED lamp lighting system according to a third embodiment of the present invention;
图56为本发明第一实施例的LED灯200的电路结构示意图；FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED lamp 200 according to the first embodiment of the present invention;
图57A为本发明第一实施例的LED灯照明系统的动作流程示意图；以及FIG. 57A is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of the LED lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention; and
图57B为本发明第二实施例的LED灯照明系统的动作流程示意图。FIG. 57B is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of the LED lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请提出了一种新的LED直管灯，以解决背景技术中提到的问题以及上述问题。为使本申请的上述目的、特征和优点能够更为明显易懂，下面结合附图对本申请的具体实施例做详细的说明。下列本申请各实施例的叙述仅是为了说明而为例示,并不表示为本申请的全部实施例或将本申请限制于特定实施例。另外，相同的组件编号可用以代表相同、相应或近似的组件，并非仅限定于代表相同的组件。The present application proposes a new LED straight tube lamp to solve the problems mentioned in the background art and the above problems. In order to make the above objects, features and advantages of the present application more obvious and easy to understand, specific embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The following description of each embodiment of the present application is only for illustration and example, and does not represent all embodiments of the present application or limit the present application to a specific embodiment. In addition, the same component numbers may be used to represent the same, corresponding or similar components, and are not limited to represent the same components.
另外需先说明的是，本文为了明确说明本揭露的各个发明特点而以多个实施例的方式分就各实施例说明如下。但并非是指各个实施例仅能单独实施。熟习本领域的技术人员可依据需求自行将可行的实施范例搭配在一起设计，或是将不同实施例中可带换的组件/模块依设计需求自行带换。换言之，本案所教示的实施方式不仅限于下列实施例所述的态样，更包含有在可行的情况下，各个实施例/组件/模块之间的带换与排列组合，于此合先叙明。In addition, it should be noted that, in order to clearly illustrate the features of the various inventions of the present disclosure, each embodiment is described below by way of a plurality of embodiments. It does not mean, however, that each embodiment can only be implemented in isolation. Those skilled in the art can design together feasible implementation examples according to requirements, or bring and replace replaceable components/modules in different embodiments according to design requirements. In other words, the embodiments taught in this case are not limited to the aspects described in the following embodiments, but also include, where feasible, the belt exchange and arrangement among the various embodiments/components/modules, which will be described here first. .
申请人虽已于先前的案件，例如:CN105465640U中，提出了利用可挠性电路板来达成降低漏电事故的改善方式，部分实施例可与本申请案利用电路方式相结合将有更显着的效果。Although the applicant has proposed in previous cases, such as CN105465640U, the use of flexible circuit boards to achieve an improved method of reducing leakage accidents, some embodiments can be combined with the circuit method of the present application, which will have more significant effects. Effect.
请参照图1A，图1A是本申请第一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板与电源模块在灯管内部的平面剖视图。LED直管灯包括灯板2以及电源5，其中电源5可为模块化型态，也就是说电源5可为整合于一体的电源模块。电源5可以是一体整合的单一单元(例如，电源5的所有组件皆设于一个本体内)且设置于灯管一端的一个灯头内。或者，电源5可以是两个分离的部件(例如，电源5的组件被区分为两个部分)且分别设置于两个灯头中。Please refer to FIG. 1A . FIG. 1A is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the first embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube. The LED straight tube light includes a light panel 2 and a power source 5 , wherein the power source 5 can be a modular type, that is, the power source 5 can be an integrated power module. The power source 5 can be an integrated single unit (for example, all the components of the power source 5 are arranged in a body) and arranged in a lamp cap at one end of the lamp tube. Alternatively, the power supply 5 may be two separate components (eg, the components of the power supply 5 are divided into two parts) and provided in the two lamp caps, respectively.
在本实施例中，电源5是绘示为整合成一个模块为例(底下称电源模块5，也可称为电源装置)，并且所述电源模块5是平行于灯管的轴向cyd配置在灯头之中。更具体的说，所述灯管的轴向cyd是指灯管的轴心线所指向的方向，其会与灯头的端壁垂直。电源模块5平行于灯管的轴向cyd系指配置有电子组件的电源模块电路板与轴向cyd平行，亦即电路板的法线正交于轴向cyd。其中，电源模块5在不同的实施例中可被设置轴向cyd通过的位置、轴向cyd上侧或下侧(相对于图式而言)，本申请不以此为限。In this embodiment, the power supply 5 is shown as an example integrated into a module (hereinafter referred to as the power supply module 5, also referred to as a power supply device), and the power supply module 5 is arranged parallel to the axial direction of the lamp tube at cyd in the lamp head. More specifically, the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube refers to the direction in which the axis line of the lamp tube points, which is perpendicular to the end wall of the lamp cap. The axial direction cyd of the power module 5 being parallel to the lamp tube means that the circuit board of the power module configured with the electronic components is parallel to the axial direction cyd, that is, the normal of the circuit board is perpendicular to the axial direction cyd. Wherein, in different embodiments, the power module 5 can be set to the position where the axial cyd passes, the upper side or the lower side of the axial cyd (relative to the drawings), which is not limited in the present application.
请参照图1B，图1B是本申请第二实施例的LED直管灯的灯板与电源模块在灯管内部的平面剖视图。本实施例与前述图1A实施例的主要差异在于电源模块5是垂直于灯管的轴向cyd配置在灯头中，亦即会与灯头的端壁平行。在本实施例中，虽然图式是绘示电源模块5上的电子组件是配置在朝向灯管内部的一侧，但本申请不仅限于此。在另一范例实施例中，电子组件也可以配置在靠近灯头端壁的一侧。在此配置底下，由于灯头上可设置有开口，因 此可以提高电子组件的散热效果。Please refer to FIG. 1B . FIG. 1B is a plan cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the second embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube. The main difference between this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 1A is that the power module 5 is disposed in the lamp cap perpendicular to the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube, that is, parallel to the end wall of the lamp cap. In this embodiment, although the drawings show that the electronic components on the power module 5 are arranged on the side facing the inside of the lamp tube, the present application is not limited to this. In another exemplary embodiment, the electronic components may also be disposed on the side close to the end wall of the lamp cap. Under this configuration, since the lamp cap can be provided with an opening, the heat dissipation effect of the electronic components can be improved.
除此之外，由于垂直配置电源模块5可以使得灯头内的可用容置空间增加，因此电源模块5可以进一步地分拆成多个电路板的配置，如图1C所示，其中，图1C是本申请第三实施例的LED直管灯的灯板与电源模块在灯管内部的平面剖视图。本实施例与前述图1B实施例的主要差异在于电源5是以两个电源模块5a与5b所构成，所述两电源模块5a与5b皆是垂直于轴向cyd配置在灯头中，并且电源模块5a与5b是朝向灯头端壁并沿轴向cyd依序排列。更具体的说，电源模块5a与5b分别具有独立的电路板，并且电路板上各自配置对应的电子组件，其中两电路板可透过各种电性连接手段连接在一起，使得整体的电源电路拓扑类似于前述的图1A或图1B实施例。藉由图1C的配置，灯头内的容置空间可以更有效的被利用，使得电源模块5a与5b的电路布局空间更大。在一范例实施例中，可能产生较多热能的电子组件(如电容、电感)可以被选择布设在靠近灯头端壁一侧的电源模块5b上，进而透过灯头上的开口增加电子组件的散热效果。另一方面，为了可使电源模块5a与5b垂直设置在圆柱状的灯头内，电源模块5a与5b的电路板可以采用八角形的结构，以最大化可布局面积。In addition, since the vertical configuration of the power module 5 can increase the available accommodating space in the lamp head, the power module 5 can be further split into a configuration of multiple circuit boards, as shown in FIG. 1C , wherein FIG. 1C is a A plane cross-sectional view of the lamp board and the power module of the LED straight tube lamp according to the third embodiment of the present application inside the lamp tube. The main difference between this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 1B is that the power supply 5 is composed of two power supply modules 5a and 5b. 5a and 5b are facing the end wall of the lamp cap and arranged in sequence along the axial direction cyd. More specifically, the power modules 5a and 5b respectively have independent circuit boards, and corresponding electronic components are arranged on the circuit boards, wherein the two circuit boards can be connected together through various electrical connection means, so that the overall power circuit The topology is similar to the previous Figure 1A or Figure 1B embodiment. With the configuration of FIG. 1C , the accommodating space in the lamp head can be used more effectively, so that the circuit layout space of the power modules 5 a and 5 b is larger. In an exemplary embodiment, electronic components (such as capacitors and inductors) that may generate more heat can be selected to be arranged on the power module 5b on the side close to the end wall of the lamp head, thereby increasing the heat dissipation of the electronic components through the opening on the lamp head. Effect. On the other hand, in order to allow the power modules 5a and 5b to be vertically arranged in the cylindrical lamp holder, the circuit boards of the power modules 5a and 5b can adopt an octagonal structure to maximize the layout area.
就电源模块5a与5b之间的连接方式而言，分开的电源模块5a与5b之间可以透过公插与母插连接，或者通过导线打线连接，导线的外层可以包裹绝缘套管作为电性绝缘保护。此外，电源模块5a与5b之间亦可通过铆钉钉接、锡膏黏接、焊接或是以导线捆绑的方式来直接连接在一起。As far as the connection mode between the power modules 5a and 5b is concerned, the separated power modules 5a and 5b can be connected by male plugs and female plugs, or connected by wire bonding, and the outer layer of the wire can be wrapped with an insulating sleeve as a Electrical insulation protection. In addition, the power modules 5a and 5b can also be directly connected together by means of rivets, solder paste bonding, welding or wire binding.
请参照图2，图2是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板的平面剖视图。作为灯板2的可挠式电路软板包括一层具有导电效果的线路层2a，LED光源202设于线路层2a上，通过线路层2a与电源电气连通。在此说明书中具导电效果的所述线路层又可称为导电层。参照图2，本实施例中，可挠式电路软板还可以包括一层介电层2b，与线路层2a迭置，介电层2b与线路层2a的面积相等或者略小于介电层，线路层2a在与介电层2b相背的表面用于设置LED光源202。线路层2a电性连接至电源5(请参见图1)用以让直流电流通过。介电层2b在与线路层2a相背的表面则通过粘接剂片4粘接于灯管1的内周面上。其中，线路层2a可以是金属层，或者布有导线(例如铜线)的电源层。Please refer to FIG. 2 , which is a plan cross-sectional view of a lamp panel of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application. The flexible circuit board used as the light board 2 includes a circuit layer 2a with a conductive effect. The LED light source 202 is arranged on the circuit layer 2a and is electrically connected to the power supply through the circuit layer 2a. In this specification, the circuit layer having a conductive effect may also be referred to as a conductive layer. Referring to FIG. 2 , in this embodiment, the flexible circuit board may further include a dielectric layer 2b, which is stacked with the circuit layer 2a. The area of the dielectric layer 2b and the circuit layer 2a is equal to or slightly smaller than that of the dielectric layer. The circuit layer 2a is used for disposing the LED light source 202 on the surface opposite to the dielectric layer 2b. The circuit layer 2a is electrically connected to a power source 5 (refer to FIG. 1 ) for allowing a DC current to pass therethrough. The dielectric layer 2b is adhered to the inner peripheral surface of the lamp tube 1 through the adhesive sheet 4 on the surface opposite to the circuit layer 2a. Wherein, the circuit layer 2a may be a metal layer, or a power supply layer with wires (eg, copper wires).
在其他实施例中，线路层2a和介电层2b的外表面可以各包覆一电路保护层，所述电路保护层可以是一种油墨材料，具有阻焊和增加反射的功能。或者，可挠式电路软板可以是一层结构，即只由一层线路层2a组成，然后在线路层2a的表面包覆一层上述油墨材料的电路保护层，保护层上可设有开口，使得光源能够与线路层电性连接。不论是一层线路层2a结构或二层结构(一层线路层2a和一层介电层2b)都可以搭配电路保护层。电路保护层也可以在可挠式电路软板的一侧表面设置，例如仅在具有LED光源202之一侧设置电路保护层。需要注意的是，可挠式电路软板为一层线路层结构2a或为二层结构(一层线路层2a和一层介电层2b)，明显比一般的三层柔性基板(二层线路层中夹一层介电层)更具可挠性与易弯曲性， 因此，可与具有特殊造型的灯管1搭配(例如:非直管灯)，而将可挠式电路软板紧贴于灯管1管壁上。此外，可挠式电路软板紧贴于灯管管壁为较佳的配置，且可挠式电路软板的层数越少，则散热效果越好，并且材料成本越低，更环保，柔韧效果也有机会提升。In other embodiments, the outer surfaces of the circuit layer 2a and the dielectric layer 2b may each be covered with a circuit protection layer, and the circuit protection layer may be an ink material with functions of solder resist and reflection enhancement. Alternatively, the flexible circuit board can be a one-layer structure, that is, it is composed of only one layer of circuit layer 2a, and then the surface of the circuit layer 2a is covered with a circuit protection layer of the above-mentioned ink material, and the protection layer can be provided with openings , so that the light source can be electrically connected to the circuit layer. Either a one-layer circuit layer 2a structure or a two-layer structure (a layer of circuit layer 2a and a layer of dielectric layer 2b) can be matched with a circuit protection layer. The circuit protection layer can also be provided on one surface of the flexible circuit board, for example, the circuit protection layer is only provided on the side with the LED light source 202 . It should be noted that the flexible circuit flexible board is a one-layer circuit layer structure 2a or a two-layer structure (a layer of circuit layer 2a and a layer of dielectric layer 2b), which is significantly higher than the general three-layer flexible substrate (two-layer circuit layer). A dielectric layer is sandwiched between layers) is more flexible and bendable, so it can be matched with lamps 1 with special shapes (for example, non-straight lamps), and the flexible circuit soft board can be closely attached on the tube wall of lamp 1. In addition, it is a better configuration for the flexible circuit board to be close to the tube wall, and the fewer layers of the flexible circuit board, the better the heat dissipation effect, and the lower the material cost, the more environmentally friendly, and the flexibility There is also a chance to improve the effect.
当然，本申请的可挠式电路软板并不仅限于一层或二层电路板，在其他实施例中，可挠式电路软板包括多层线路层2a与多层介电层2b，介电层2b与线路层2a会依序交错迭置且设于线路层2a与LED光源202相背的一侧，LED光源202设于多层线路层2a的最上一层，通过线路层2a的最上一层与电源电气连通。在其他实施例中，作为灯板2的可挠式电路软板的轴向投影长度大于灯管的长度。Of course, the flexible circuit board of the present application is not limited to a one-layer or two-layer circuit board. In other embodiments, the flexible circuit board includes a multilayer circuit layer 2a and a multilayer dielectric layer 2b. The layer 2b and the circuit layer 2a are alternately stacked in sequence and are arranged on the side of the circuit layer 2a opposite to the LED light source 202. The LED light source 202 is arranged on the uppermost layer of the multilayer circuit layer 2a, passing through the uppermost layer of the circuit layer 2a. The layer is in electrical communication with the power source. In other embodiments, the axial projection length of the flexible circuit board as the light board 2 is greater than the length of the light tube.
请参见图3，图3是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板的立体图。在一实施例中，作为灯板2的可挠式电路软板由上而下依序包括一第一线路层2a，一介电层2b及一第二线路层2c，第二线路层2c的厚度大于第一线路层2a的厚度，灯板2的轴向投影长度大于灯管1的长度，其中在灯板2未设有LED光源202且突出于灯管1的末端区域上，第一线路层2a及第二线路层2c分别透过二个贯穿孔203及204电气连通，但贯穿孔203及204彼此不连通以避免短路。Please refer to FIG. 3 , which is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application. In one embodiment, the flexible circuit board serving as the light board 2 includes a first circuit layer 2a, a dielectric layer 2b and a second circuit layer 2c in sequence from top to bottom. The thickness is greater than the thickness of the first circuit layer 2a, the axial projection length of the lamp board 2 is greater than the length of the lamp tube 1, and the first circuit The layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c are electrically connected through two through holes 203 and 204, respectively, but the through holes 203 and 204 are not connected to each other to avoid short circuit.
藉此方式，由于第二线路层2c厚度较大，可起到支撑第一线路层2a及介电层2b的效果，同时让灯板2贴附于灯管1的内管壁上时不易产生偏移或变形，以提升制造良率。此外，第一线路层2a及第二线路层2c电气相连通，使得第一线路层2a上的电路布局可以延伸至第二线路层2c，让灯板2上的电路布局更为多元。再者，原本的电路布局走线从单层变成双层，灯板2上的线路层单层面积，亦即宽度方向上的尺寸，可以进一步减缩,让批次进行固晶的灯板数量可以增加,提升生产率。In this way, since the thickness of the second circuit layer 2c is relatively large, the effect of supporting the first circuit layer 2a and the dielectric layer 2b can be achieved. Offset or deformation to improve manufacturing yield. In addition, the first circuit layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c are electrically connected, so that the circuit layout on the first circuit layer 2a can be extended to the second circuit layer 2c, so that the circuit layout on the lamp board 2 is more diverse. Furthermore, the original circuit layout and wiring are changed from single layer to double layer. The single layer area of the circuit layer on the light board 2, that is, the size in the width direction, can be further reduced, allowing the number of light boards to be solidified in batches. Can increase and improve productivity.
进一步地，灯板2上设有LED光源202且突出于灯管1的末端区域上的第一线路层2a及第二线路层2c，亦可直接被利用来实现电源模块的电路布局，而让电源模块直接配置在可挠式电路软板上得以实现。Further, the first circuit layer 2a and the second circuit layer 2c, which are provided with the LED light source 202 on the lamp board 2 and protrude from the end region of the lamp tube 1, can also be directly used to realize the circuit layout of the power module, so that the The power module is directly configured on the flexible circuit board.
如果灯板2沿灯管1轴向的两端不固定在灯管1的内周面上，如果采用导线连接，在后续搬动过程中，由于两端自由，在后续的搬动过程中容易发生晃动，因而有可能使得导线发生断裂。因此灯板2与电源5的连接方式优先选择为焊接。If the two ends of the lamp board 2 along the axial direction of the lamp tube 1 are not fixed on the inner peripheral surface of the lamp tube 1, if a wire is used for connection, in the subsequent moving process, since the two ends are free, it is easy to move in the subsequent moving process. Shaking occurs, which may cause the wire to break. Therefore, the connection method between the lamp board 2 and the power source 5 is preferably selected as welding.
图4是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板和电源模块的印刷电路板的立体图。如图4所示,具体作法可以是将电源5的输出端留出电源焊盘a，并在电源焊盘a上留锡、以使得焊盘上的锡的厚度增加，方便焊接，相应的，在灯板2的端部上也留出光源焊盘b，并将电源5输出端的电源焊盘a与灯板2的光源焊盘b焊接在一起。将焊盘所在的平面定义为正面，则灯板2与电源5的连接方式以两者正面的焊盘对接最为稳固，但是在焊接时焊接压头典型而言压在灯板2的背面，隔着灯板2来对焊锡加热，比较容易出现可靠度的问题。如果在某些 实施例中，将灯板2正面的光源焊盘b中间开出孔洞，再将其正面朝上叠加在电源5正面的电源焊盘a上来焊接，则焊接压头可以直接对焊锡加热熔解，对实务操作上较为容易实现。4 is a perspective view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp and a printed circuit board of a power module according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 4, the specific method can be to leave the output end of the power supply 5 to the power supply pad a, and leave tin on the power supply pad a, so that the thickness of the tin on the pad is increased, which is convenient for welding. Correspondingly, The light source pad b is also left on the end of the lamp board 2 , and the power pad a of the output end of the power source 5 and the light source pad b of the lamp board 2 are welded together. The plane where the pads are located is defined as the front side, and the connection between the lamp board 2 and the power supply 5 is the most stable with the pads on the front of the two, but the welding indenter is typically pressed on the back of the lamp board 2 during welding. The lamp board 2 is used to heat the solder, which is more prone to reliability problems. If in some embodiments, a hole is opened in the middle of the light source pad b on the front of the lamp board 2, and then the front side is superimposed on the power pad a on the front of the power source 5 for welding, the welding indenter can be directly connected to the solder. Heating and melting is relatively easy to achieve in practice.
如图4所示，上述实施例中，作为灯板2的可挠式电路软板大部分固定在灯管1的内周面上，只有在两端是不固定在灯管1(请参见图3)的内周面上，不固定在灯管1内周面上的灯板2形成一自由部21(请参见图1A-1C及3),而灯板2固定在灯管1的内周面上的部分形成一固定部22。自由部21具有上述的光源焊盘b，其一端与电源5焊接在一起，其另一端一体的延伸连接至固定部22，并且自由部21两端之间的部分不与灯管1的内周面贴合(即，自由部21的中段呈悬空的状态)。在装配时，自由部21和电源5焊接的一端会带动自由部21向灯管1内部收缩。值得注意的是，当作为灯板2的可挠式电路软板如图3所示具有二层线路层2a及2c夹一介电层2b的结构时，前述灯板2未设有LED光源202且突出于灯管1的末端区域可作为自由部21，而让自由部21实现二层线路层的连通及电源模块的电路布局。As shown in FIG. 4 , in the above embodiment, most of the flexible circuit boards used as the light board 2 are fixed on the inner peripheral surface of the light tube 1, and only the two ends are not fixed on the light tube 1 (see FIG. 4). 3) On the inner peripheral surface, the lamp board 2 that is not fixed on the inner peripheral surface of the lamp tube 1 forms a free portion 21 (see FIGS. 1A-1C and 3), while the lamp board 2 is fixed on the inner circumference of the lamp tube 1. The portion on the surface forms a fixing portion 22 . The free portion 21 has the above-mentioned light source pad b, one end of which is welded with the power source 5 , the other end of which is integrally extended and connected to the fixed portion 22 , and the part between the two ends of the free portion 21 is not connected to the inner circumference of the lamp tube 1 . Surface fit (that is, the middle section of the free portion 21 is in a suspended state). During assembly, the welded end of the free portion 21 and the power source 5 will drive the free portion 21 to shrink toward the inside of the lamp tube 1 . It is worth noting that when the flexible circuit board as the light board 2 has a structure of two-layer circuit layers 2a and 2c sandwiching a dielectric layer 2b as shown in FIG. 3 , the aforementioned light board 2 is not provided with the LED light source 202 And the end area protruding from the lamp tube 1 can be used as the free portion 21, and the free portion 21 can realize the connection of the two-layer circuit layer and the circuit layout of the power module.
此外，在LED直管灯的接脚设计中，可以是双端各单接脚(共两个接脚)、也可以是双端各双接脚(共四个接脚)的架构。所以在从LED直管灯的双端进电的情形中，可以使用双端各至少一接脚来接收外部驱动信号。此双端各一接脚之间设置的导线典型地被称为火线(一般标示为“L”)和零线/中性线(一般标示为“N”)，且可用于信号的输入及传送。In addition, in the pin design of the LED straight tube lamp, it may be a structure of single pins at both ends (two pins in total) or double pins at both ends (four pins in total). Therefore, in the case of feeding power from both ends of the LED straight tube lamp, at least one pin at each end of the LED can be used to receive the external driving signal. The wires arranged between each pin of the double ends are typically called live wires (generally marked as "L") and neutral/neutral wires (generally marked as "N"), and can be used for signal input and transmission .
请参照图5A至图5C，图5A至图5C是本申请一实施例的灯板与电源的焊接过程的局部示意图，其绘示灯板2与电源5的电源电路板420之间连接结构与连接方式。在本实施例中，灯板2与前述图4具有相同的结构，自由部为灯板2的相对两端的用来连接电源电路板420的部份，固定部为灯板2贴附于灯管内周面的部分。灯板2为可挠性电路板，且灯板2包括层叠的电路层200a与电路保护层200c。其中，电路层200a远离电路保护层200c的一面定义为第一面2001，电路保护层200c远离电路层200a的一面定义为第二面2002，也就是说，第一面2001与第二面2002为灯板2上相对的两面。多个LED光源202设于第一面2001上且电性连接电路层200a的电路。电路保护层200c为聚酰亚胺层(Polyimide，PI)，其不易导热，但具有保护电路的效果。灯板2的第一面2001具有焊盘b，焊盘b上用于放置焊锡g，且灯板2的焊接端具有缺口f。电源电路板420包括电源电路层420a，且电源电路板420定义有相对的第一面421与第二面422，第二面422位于电源电路板420具有电源电路层420a的一侧。在电源电路板420的第一面421与第二面422分别形成有彼此对应的焊盘a，焊盘a上可形成有焊锡g。作为进一步的焊接稳定优化以及自动化加工方面优化，本实施例将灯板2放置于电源电路板420的下方(参照图5A的方向)，也就是说，灯板2的第一面2001会连接至电源电路板420的第二面422。Please refer to FIGS. 5A to 5C . FIGS. 5A to 5C are partial schematic diagrams of the welding process of the lamp board and the power source according to an embodiment of the present application, which illustrate the connection structure and connection between the lamp board 2 and the power circuit board 420 of the power source 5 Way. In this embodiment, the lamp board 2 has the same structure as the aforementioned FIG. 4 , the free part is the part at the opposite ends of the lamp board 2 used to connect the power circuit board 420 , and the fixed part is that the lamp board 2 is attached to the lamp tube part of the inner surface. The light board 2 is a flexible circuit board, and the light board 2 includes a laminated circuit layer 200a and a circuit protection layer 200c. The side of the circuit layer 200a away from the circuit protection layer 200c is defined as the first side 2001, and the side of the circuit protection layer 200c away from the circuit layer 200a is defined as the second side 2002, that is, the first side 2001 and the second side 2002 are Opposite sides of the light panel 2. A plurality of LED light sources 202 are disposed on the first surface 2001 and are electrically connected to the circuits of the circuit layer 200a. The circuit protection layer 200c is a polyimide layer (Polyimide, PI), which is not easy to conduct heat, but has the effect of protecting the circuit. The first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 has a pad b on which the solder g is placed, and the welding end of the lamp board 2 has a gap f. The power supply circuit board 420 includes a power supply circuit layer 420a, and the power supply circuit board 420 defines a first surface 421 and a second surface 422 opposite to each other, and the second surface 422 is located on the side of the power supply circuit board 420 with the power supply circuit layer 420a. Pads a corresponding to each other are respectively formed on the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 of the power circuit board 420 , and solder g may be formed on the pads a. As a further optimization of welding stability and automated processing, in this embodiment, the lamp board 2 is placed under the power circuit board 420 (refer to the direction of FIG. 5A ), that is, the first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 is connected to the The second side 422 of the power circuit board 420 .
如图5B与图5C所示，在进行灯板2与电源电路板420的焊接时，先将灯板2的电路保护层200C的放置于支撑台42上(灯板2的第二面2002接触支撑台42)，让电源电路板420的第二面422的焊盘a与灯板2的第一面2001的焊盘b直接充分接触，再以焊接压头41压 于灯板2与电源电路板420的焊接处。此时，焊接压头41的热量会通过电源电路板420的第一面421的焊盘a直接传到灯板2的第一面2001的焊盘b，而且焊接压头41的热量不会被导热性相对较差的电路保护层200c影响，进一步提高了灯板2与电源电路板420的焊盘a与焊盘b相接处在焊接时的效率与稳定性。同时，灯板2的第一面2001的焊盘b与电源电路板420的第二面422的焊盘a是相接触焊接，电源电路板520的第一面521的焊盘a则与焊接压头41相连接。如图5C所示，电源电路板420和灯板2通过焊锡g而被完全焊接为一体，在图5C中的虚拟线M和N之间为电源电路板420、灯板2与焊锡g的主要连接部份，从上至下顺序依次为电源电路板420的第一面421的焊盘a、电源电路层420a、电源电路板420的第二面422的焊盘a、灯板2的电路层200a、灯板2的电路保护层200c。依此顺序形成的电源电路板420和灯板2结合结构，更稳定牢固。As shown in FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C , when welding the lamp board 2 and the power supply circuit board 420 , the circuit protection layer 200C of the lamp board 2 is first placed on the support table 42 (the second surface 2002 of the lamp board 2 is in contact with each other). Support table 42), let the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420 and the pad b of the first side 2001 of the lamp board 2 directly and fully contact, and then press the soldering indenter 41 on the lamp board 2 and the power circuit Welding of plate 420. At this time, the heat of the soldering indenter 41 will be directly transmitted to the soldering pad b of the first surface 2001 of the lamp board 2 through the pad a of the first side 421 of the power circuit board 420, and the heat of the soldering indenter 41 will not be affected by The influence of the circuit protection layer 200c with relatively poor thermal conductivity further improves the efficiency and stability of soldering where the pads a and b of the lamp board 2 and the power circuit board 420 meet. At the same time, the pad b of the first side 2001 of the lamp board 2 is in contact with the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420, and the pad a of the first side 521 of the power circuit board 520 is in contact with the welding pressure The head 41 is connected. As shown in FIG. 5C , the power circuit board 420 and the lamp board 2 are completely welded together by solder g, and between the virtual lines M and N in FIG. 5C is the main part of the power circuit board 420 , the lamp board 2 and the solder g The connection parts, from top to bottom, are the pad a of the first side 421 of the power circuit board 420, the power circuit layer 420a, the pad a of the second side 422 of the power circuit board 420, and the circuit layer of the lamp board 2 200a, the circuit protection layer 200c of the lamp board 2. The combined structure of the power circuit board 420 and the lamp board 2 formed in this order is more stable and firm.
在不同实施例中，电路层200a的第一面2001上还可再设有另一层电路保护层(PI层)，也就是电路层200a会夹于两层电路保护层之间，使得电路层200a的第一面2001也可被电路保护层保护，而仅露出部分电路层200a(设有焊盘b的部份)用来与电源电路板420的焊盘a相接。此时，LED光源202的底部一部分会接触电路层200a的第一面2001上的电路保护层，且另一部分则会接触电路层200a。In different embodiments, another layer of circuit protection layer (PI layer) may be further provided on the first surface 2001 of the circuit layer 200a, that is, the circuit layer 200a will be sandwiched between the two layers of circuit protection layers, so that the circuit layer The first surface 2001 of the 200a can also be protected by a circuit protection layer, and only part of the circuit layer 200a (the part with the pad b) is exposed for connecting with the pad a of the power circuit board 420 . At this time, a part of the bottom of the LED light source 202 contacts the circuit protection layer on the first surface 2001 of the circuit layer 200a, and the other part contacts the circuit layer 200a.
除此之外，采用图5A至图5C的设计方案，电源电路板420的焊盘a上的圆孔h在放置焊锡后，在自动化焊接程序中，当焊接压头41自动向下压到电源电路板420时，焊锡会因为此压力而被推进圆孔h内，很好的满足了自动化加工需要。In addition, using the design solutions of FIGS. 5A to 5C , after placing solder on the circular hole h on the pad a of the power supply circuit board 420 , in the automatic welding process, when the welding indenter 41 is automatically pressed down to the power supply When the circuit board 420 is installed, the solder will be pushed into the circular hole h due to this pressure, which satisfies the needs of automated processing well.
请参见图5D，图5D是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的灯板的局部示意图，其绘示灯板的自由部配置有镂空孔k的绝缘片的结构。大多用于灯板2上具有2个以上的焊盘场合。该绝缘片210的宽度与灯板2的宽度大致相同；绝缘片210的长度为焊盘长度的1倍-50倍，较佳的，缘片的长度为焊盘长度的10倍；绝缘片210的厚度为灯板2厚度的0.5倍～5倍，较佳的，绝缘片210的厚度为灯板2厚度相同；绝缘片210的镂空形状与焊盘的形状大致相同，镂空的面积稍大于焊盘的面积(较佳的，镂空的面积介于焊盘的面积的101％～200％)。绝缘片210整体大致呈长条状或椭圆状。这样的设计具有如下的好处；①、在焊接时，围住熔融的锡膏，使其不向四周扩散，降低在焊盘焊接，焊盘间短路的风险；②、灯板2在与电源的电路板焊接区域的油墨可能被损坏，其下覆盖的导线存在裸露的风险，在该区域增配置绝缘片210来降低短路的风险，提高焊接的信赖性；③；灯板2上配置有L或N线，采用该方案的直管灯在通电时灯板2上流经有强电(经过布局N线)，在某些场合，灯板2与短电路板焊接区域强电的电压超过300V的高压，这时覆盖在灯板2表面的油墨会被高压击穿，这样导致油墨下的导电层与电源的短电路板短路。这时通过在该区域增配置绝缘部件(绝缘片210)来降低短路的风险，提高直管灯的信赖性。Please refer to FIG. 5D . FIG. 5D is a partial schematic view of a lamp board of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application, which illustrates a structure of an insulating sheet with hollow holes k disposed in the free part of the lamp board. Most of them are used for occasions where there are more than two pads on the lamp board 2 . The width of the insulating sheet 210 is approximately the same as the width of the lamp board 2; the length of the insulating sheet 210 is 1 to 50 times the length of the pad, preferably, the length of the edge sheet is 10 times the length of the pad; the insulating sheet 210 The thickness of the insulating sheet 210 is 0.5 times to 5 times the thickness of the lamp board 2. Preferably, the thickness of the insulating sheet 210 is the same as the thickness of the lamp board 2; The area of the pad (preferably, the area of the hollow is between 101% and 200% of the area of the pad). The insulating sheet 210 has a generally elongated or elliptical shape as a whole. Such a design has the following advantages; 1. During soldering, the molten solder paste is surrounded so that it does not spread around, reducing the risk of soldering on the pads and short-circuiting between the pads; 2. The lamp board 2 is in contact with the power supply. The ink in the soldering area of the circuit board may be damaged, and the wires covered under it may be exposed. An insulating sheet 210 is added in this area to reduce the risk of short circuit and improve the reliability of soldering; ③; Lamp board 2 is equipped with L or N line, the straight tube lamp using this solution has strong electricity flowing through the lamp board 2 when it is energized (through the layout N line), in some cases, the voltage of the strong electricity in the welding area between the lamp board 2 and the short circuit board exceeds 300V high voltage At this time, the ink covering the surface of the lamp board 2 will be broken down by high voltage, which will cause the conductive layer under the ink to be short-circuited with the short circuit board of the power supply. In this case, by adding an insulating member (insulating sheet 210 ) in this area, the risk of short circuit is reduced, and the reliability of the straight tube lamp is improved.
接下来结合图5D及5E来描述灯板2与电源5的电路板连接，图5E是本申请一实施例的 LED直管灯的灯板和电源模块的电路板连接的平面剖视图，其绘示焊垫b41部分偏移出焊盘b11的示意图。如图5E所示，灯板2的自由部配置有3个焊盘b10、b11、b12(该焊盘在y方向呈2排配置，b10一排、b11与b12一排)，相应的在电源(图未示)的电路板配置对应的3个焊盘；焊接时，灯板2的焊盘与电源的电路板焊盘，可能沿y方向的偏移，这时匹配连接焊盘b11或b12的配置在电源的短电路板的对应焊盘(也称焊垫)发生偏移。焊盘b41(也称焊垫b41)的偏出的部分压在焊盘b11、b12间。Next, the connection between the light board 2 and the circuit board of the power supply 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5D and 5E. FIG. 5E is a plan cross-sectional view of the connection between the light board of the LED straight tube lamp and the circuit board of the power module according to an embodiment of the present application, which shows A schematic diagram of the pad b41 partially offset from the pad b11. As shown in Fig. 5E, the free part of the lamp board 2 is provided with three pads b10, b11, b12 (the pads are arranged in two rows in the y direction, b10 is a row, b11 and b12 are a row). The circuit board (not shown) is configured with corresponding 3 pads; when soldering, the pads of the lamp board 2 and the circuit board pads of the power supply may be offset along the y direction, at this time, the matching connection pads b11 or b12 The configuration is offset on the corresponding pads (also called pads) of the short circuit board of the power supply. The offset portion of the pad b41 (also referred to as the pad b41 ) is pressed between the pads b11 and b12 .
因该区域配置有流经强电的导电层，其涂布的油墨，在某些情况下，该油墨被高压击穿，导致该导电层与电源的短电路板的焊盘短接。Because this area is configured with a conductive layer that flows through strong electricity, the ink coated on it, in some cases, the ink is broken down by high voltage, causing the conductive layer to be short-circuited with the pads of the short circuit board of the power supply.
在一些实施例中，灯板2上的焊盘b10电性连接火线或中性线、焊盘b11对应第一驱动输出端、b12对应第二驱动输出端。在某些实施例中，焊盘b10电性连接火线或中性线、焊盘b11对应第二驱动输出端、b12对应第一驱动输出端。在一些实施例中，焊盘b10对应第一驱动输出端、焊盘b11对应第二驱动输出端、b12电性连接火线或中性线。在一些实施例中，焊盘b10对应第一驱动输出端、焊盘b12对应第二驱动输出端、b11对应火线或中性线。In some embodiments, the pad b10 on the light board 2 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire, the pad b11 corresponds to the first drive output end, and b12 corresponds to the second drive output end. In some embodiments, the pad b10 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire, the pad b11 corresponds to the second driving output terminal, and the pad b12 corresponds to the first driving output terminal. In some embodiments, the pad b10 corresponds to the first driving output terminal, the pad b11 corresponds to the second driving output terminal, and b12 is electrically connected to the live wire or the neutral wire. In some embodiments, the pad b10 corresponds to the first driving output terminal, the pad b12 corresponds to the second driving output terminal, and b11 corresponds to the live wire or the neutral wire.
请参见图5F，图5F是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的光源焊盘的局部结构示意图，其中，图5F是绘示灯板2端部焊盘的配置。在本实施例中，灯板2上的焊盘b1与b2适于与电源电路板的电源焊盘焊接在一起。其中，本实施例的焊盘配置可适用于双端单接脚的进电方式，亦即同一侧的焊盘会接收相同极性的外部驱动信号。Please refer to FIG. 5F . FIG. 5F is a partial structural schematic diagram of the light source pads of the LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application, wherein FIG. 5F shows the configuration of the end pads of the lamp board 2 . In this embodiment, the pads b1 and b2 on the lamp board 2 are suitable for welding with the power pads of the power circuit board. The pad configuration in this embodiment is applicable to a double-ended single-pin power feeding method, that is, the pads on the same side will receive external driving signals of the same polarity.
具体来说，本实施例的焊盘b1与b2会透过S型的保险丝FS连接在一起，其中保险丝FS可例如是以细导线来构成，其阻抗相当低，因此可以视为焊盘b1与b2短路在一起。在正确的应用情境下，焊盘b1与b2会对应接收相同极性的外部驱动信号。而通过所述配置，即使焊盘b1与b2错接到相反极性的外部驱动信号，保险丝FS也会反应于通过的大电流而熔断，从而避免灯管损毁。此外，在保险丝FS熔断后，会形成焊盘b2空接并且焊盘b1仍连接至灯板2的配置，因此灯板2仍能透过焊盘b1接收外部驱动信号而继续使用。Specifically, the pads b1 and b2 of this embodiment are connected together through an S-type fuse FS, wherein the fuse FS can be formed of, for example, a thin wire, and its impedance is quite low, so it can be regarded as the pad b1 and the b2 are shorted together. In the correct application situation, the pads b1 and b2 will receive external driving signals of the same polarity. With the above configuration, even if the pads b1 and b2 are wrongly connected to external driving signals of opposite polarities, the fuse FS will be blown in response to the large current passing through, thereby preventing the lamp from being damaged. In addition, after the fuse FS is blown, a configuration in which the pad b2 is left open and the pad b1 is still connected to the lamp board 2 is formed, so the lamp board 2 can still receive external driving signals through the pad b1 and continue to use.
另一方面，在一范例实施例中，焊盘b1与b2的走线与焊盘本体的厚度至少达到0.4mm，实际厚度可依据本领域技术人员的了解，在可实施的情形下选用厚度大于0.4mm的任一厚度。经验证后，在焊盘b1与b2的走线与焊盘本体的厚度至少达到0.4mm的配置底下，当灯板2透过焊盘b1与b2和电源电路板对接并置入灯管中时，即使焊盘b1与b2处的铜箔折断，其周边多附加上的铜箔也可以将灯板2与电源电路板的电路连接起来，使得灯管可正常工作。On the other hand, in an exemplary embodiment, the thicknesses of the traces of the pads b1 and b2 and the pad body are at least 0.4 mm, and the actual thickness can be based on the understanding of those skilled in the art. Any thickness of 0.4mm. After verification, under the configuration where the thickness of the traces of the pads b1 and b2 and the thickness of the pad body is at least 0.4mm, when the lamp board 2 is connected to the power circuit board through the pad b1 and b2 and placed in the lamp tube , even if the copper foils at the pads b1 and b2 are broken, the extra copper foils around them can connect the light board 2 with the circuit of the power circuit board, so that the light tube can work normally.
请参见图5G，图5G是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的电源焊盘的局部结构示意图。在本实施例中，电源电路板上可具有例如为3个焊盘a1、a2及a3的配置，并且所述电源电路板可例如为印刷电路板，但本申请不以此为限。每一焊盘a1、a2及a3上设置有复数个穿孔hp。在电源电路板与灯板2焊接过程中，焊接物质(如焊锡)会填满所述穿孔hp至少其中之 一，使得电源电路板上的焊盘a1、a2及a3(底下称电源焊盘)与灯板2上的焊盘(如b1、b2，底下称光源焊盘)相互电性连接，其中所述灯板2可例如为可挠式电路软板。Please refer to FIG. 5G. FIG. 5G is a schematic partial structure diagram of a power pad of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the power supply circuit board may have, for example, three pads a1 , a2 and a3 , and the power supply circuit board may be, for example, a printed circuit board, but the present application is not limited thereto. Each of the pads a1, a2 and a3 is provided with a plurality of through holes hp. During the welding process of the power supply circuit board and the lamp board 2, a welding substance (such as solder) will fill at least one of the through holes hp, so that the pads a1, a2 and a3 on the power supply circuit board (hereinafter referred to as the power supply pads) It is electrically connected to the pads (eg b1, b2, hereinafter referred to as light source pads) on the light board 2, wherein the light board 2 can be, for example, a flexible circuit board.
由于穿孔hp使得焊锡与电源焊盘a1、a2及a3之间的接触面积增加，因此电源焊盘a1、a2及a3与光源焊盘之间的黏贴力进一步增强。除此之外，穿孔hp的设置还可以提高散热面积，使得灯管的热特性可以被提升。在本实施例中，穿孔hp的个数可以根据焊盘a1、a2及a3的尺寸而选择为7个或9个。若选择以7个穿孔hp的配置来实施，穿孔hp的排列可以是其中6个穿孔hp排列在一圆周上，剩下一个则配置在圆心上。若选择以9个穿孔hp的配置来实施，所述穿孔hp可以采3x3的数组排列配置。上述配置选择可以较佳地增加接触面积并且提高散热效果。Since the contact area between the solder and the power pads a1 , a2 and a3 is increased due to the through holes hp, the adhesive force between the power pads a1 , a2 and a3 and the light source pads is further enhanced. In addition, the setting of the perforated hp can also improve the heat dissipation area, so that the thermal characteristics of the lamp tube can be improved. In this embodiment, the number of the through holes hp can be selected to be 7 or 9 according to the sizes of the pads a1 , a2 and a3 . If it is selected to be implemented in a configuration of 7 perforations hp, the arrangement of perforations hp may be such that 6 perforations hp are arranged on a circle, and the remaining one is arranged on the center of the circle. If a configuration of 9 perforated hp is chosen to be implemented, the perforated hp can be configured in a 3x3 array arrangement. The above configuration selection can preferably increase the contact area and improve the heat dissipation effect.
请参照图6A和图6B，图6A和图6B是本申请不同实施例的LED直管灯的灯板和电源模块的立体结构示意图。在其它的实施方式中，上述透过焊接方式固定的灯板2和电源5可以用搭载有电源模块5的电路板组合件25取代。电路板组合件25具有一长电路板251和一短电路板253，长电路板251和短电路板253彼此贴合透过黏接方式固定，短电路板253位于长电路板251周缘附近。短电路板253上具有电源模块25，整体构成电源。短电路板253材质较长电路板251硬，以达到支撑电源模块5的作用。Please refer to FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B . FIGS. 6A and 6B are three-dimensional schematic diagrams of a lamp board and a power module of an LED straight tube lamp according to different embodiments of the present application. In other embodiments, the lamp board 2 and the power source 5 fixed by welding can be replaced by a circuit board assembly 25 on which the power source module 5 is mounted. The circuit board assembly 25 has a long circuit board 251 and a short circuit board 253 . The long circuit board 251 and the short circuit board 253 are adhered to each other and fixed by bonding. The short circuit board 253 is located near the periphery of the long circuit board 251 . The short circuit board 253 has the power supply module 25, which constitutes a power supply as a whole. The material of the short circuit board 253 is longer than that of the circuit board 251 , so as to support the power module 5 .
长电路板251可以为上述作为灯板2的可挠式电路软板或柔性基板，且具有图2所示的线路层2a。灯板2的线路层2a和电源模块5电连接的方式可依实际使用情况有不同的电连接方式。如图6A所示，电源模块5和长电路板251上将与电源模块5电性连接的线路层2a皆位于短电路板253的同一侧,电源模块5直接与长电路板251电气连接。如图6B所示，电源模块5和长电路板251上将与电源模块5电性连接的线路层2a系分别位于短电路板253的两侧，电源模块5穿透过短电路板253和灯板2的线路层2a电气连接。其中，电源模块5位于左侧短电路板253上的电子组件可以称为电源模块5a，并且电源模块5位于右侧短电路板253上的电子组件可以称为电源模块5b。The long circuit board 251 may be the above-mentioned flexible circuit board or flexible substrate as the light board 2 , and has the circuit layer 2a shown in FIG. 2 . The electrical connection method of the circuit layer 2a of the light board 2 and the power supply module 5 may have different electrical connection methods according to the actual usage. As shown in FIG. 6A , the power module 5 and the circuit layer 2 a on the long circuit board 251 to be electrically connected to the power module 5 are both located on the same side of the short circuit board 253 , and the power module 5 is directly electrically connected to the long circuit board 251 . As shown in FIG. 6B , the circuit layers 2 a on the power module 5 and the long circuit board 251 to be electrically connected to the power module 5 are located on both sides of the short circuit board 253 respectively, and the power module 5 penetrates through the short circuit board 253 and the lamp. The circuit layer 2a of the board 2 is electrically connected. The electronic components of the power module 5 on the left short circuit board 253 may be referred to as the power module 5a, and the electronic components of the power module 5 on the right short circuit board 253 may be referred to as the power module 5b.
图7是本申请一实施例的LED直管灯的内部导线示意图。请参见图7，本揭露的LED直管灯在实施例中可包括灯管、灯头(未显示于图7)、灯板2(或称长电路板251)、短电路板253、以及电感Lgnd。所述灯管两端各有至少一接脚，用于接收外部驱动信号。在LED直管灯的接脚设计中，可以是双端各单接脚(共两个接脚)、也可以是双端各双接脚(共四个接脚)的架构。所以在从LED直管灯的双端进电的情形中，可以使用双端各至少一接脚来接收外部驱动信号。此双端各一接脚之间设置的导线典型地被称为火线(一般标示为“L”)和零线/中性线(一般标示为“N”)，且可用于信号的输入及传送。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an inner wire of an LED straight tube lamp according to an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 7 , in an embodiment, the LED straight tube lamp of the present disclosure may include a lamp tube, a lamp holder (not shown in FIG. 7 ), a lamp board 2 (or a long circuit board 251 ), a short circuit board 253 , and an inductor Lgnd . Both ends of the lamp tube have at least one pin for receiving external driving signals. In the pin design of the LED straight tube lamp, it can be a structure of single pins at both ends (two pins in total) or double pins at both ends (four pins in total). Therefore, in the case of feeding power from both ends of the LED straight tube lamp, at least one pin at each end of the LED can be used to receive the external driving signal. The wires arranged between each pin of the double ends are typically called live wires (generally marked as "L") and neutral/neutral wires (generally marked as "N"), and can be used for signal input and transmission .
所述灯头设置在所述灯管两端，且如图7所示在灯管左侧及右侧的所述短电路板253(的至少部分电子组件)可分别在所述两端的灯头内。所述灯板2设置在所述灯管内，并且包含 LED模块，而所述LED模块包含LED单元632。电源模块5a和5b分别通过对应的所述短电路板253与所述灯板2电连接，此电连接(例如透过焊盘)可包含通过信号端子(L)连接所述灯板2两端的对应接脚通过驱动输出端531和532分别用于连接所述LED单元632的正负极，以及通过接地端子连接灯板2的参考地,所述参考地会通过接地端子连接至接地端GND，因此所述参考地的电平可被定义为大地电平。而所述电感Lgnd是串接在所述灯管两端的短电路板253的所述第四端点之间.在实施例中，电感Lgnd可包含例如工字电感(choke inductor or Dual-Inline-Package inductor)。The lamp caps are disposed at both ends of the lamp tube, and the short circuit boards 253 (at least part of the electronic components) on the left and right sides of the lamp tube as shown in FIG. 7 may be respectively in the lamp caps at the two ends. The light board 2 is disposed in the light tube, and includes an LED module, and the LED module includes an LED unit 632 . The power modules 5a and 5b are respectively electrically connected to the light board 2 through the corresponding short circuit boards 253, and the electrical connection (for example, through the pads) may include a signal terminal (L) connecting both ends of the light board 2. The corresponding pins are respectively used to connect the positive and negative poles of the LED unit 632 through the driving output terminals 531 and 532, and to connect the reference ground of the lamp board 2 through the ground terminal, and the reference ground will be connected to the ground terminal GND through the ground terminal, Therefore, the level of the reference ground can be defined as the ground level. The inductor Lgnd is connected in series between the fourth terminals of the short circuit board 253 at both ends of the lamp tube. In an embodiment, the inductor Lgnd may include, for example, a choke inductor or Dual-Inline-Package inductor).
更具体的说，因为在双端进电的直管灯设计中，特别是长尺寸(如八尺)的直管灯，可能在两端灯头内各设置部分电源电路(电源模块a和b),所以会需要沿着灯板2设置延伸的信号导线LL和接地导线GL。所述信号导线LL通常会与灯板2上的正极导线很接近,故两者间可能会产生寄生电容。经过正极导线的高频干扰会透过所述寄生电容而反映到信号导线LL上，进而产生可被检测到的电磁干扰(EMI)效应。More specifically, because in the design of double-ended straight tube lamps, especially long-sized (such as eight-foot) straight tube lamps, part of the power circuit (power modules a and b) may be set in the lamp holders at both ends. , so the extended signal wire LL and the ground wire GL need to be arranged along the light board 2 . The signal wire LL is usually very close to the positive wire on the lamp board 2, so parasitic capacitance may be generated between the two. The high frequency interference passing through the positive wire will be reflected on the signal wire LL through the parasitic capacitance, thereby producing a detectable electromagnetic interference (EMI) effect.
因此，在本实施例中，透过在所述接地导线GL上串接电感Lgnd的配置，可以利用电感Lgnd在高频时具有高阻抗的特性来阻断高频干扰的信号回路，进而消除正极导线上的高频干扰，从而避免寄生电容反映到信号导线LL上的EMI效应。换言之，电感Lgnd的功能是消除或减少所述正极导线LL所引起的EMI效应或受到EMI的影响，故提升了灯管中电源信号传输(包含经过信号导线LL、正极导线、以及负极导线)以及LED直管灯的质量。Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting the inductance Lgnd to the ground wire GL in series, the high impedance characteristic of the inductance Lgnd at high frequencies can be used to block the signal loop of high frequency interference, thereby eliminating the positive pole High-frequency interference on the wire, thereby avoiding the EMI effect of parasitic capacitance reflected on the signal wire LL. In other words, the function of the inductor Lgnd is to eliminate or reduce the EMI effect caused by the positive wire LL or be affected by EMI, thus improving the power signal transmission in the lamp tube (including the signal wire LL, the positive wire, and the negative wire) and The quality of LED straight tube lights.
请参见图8A，图8A是本申请第一实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。交流电源508(或称外部电网508)是用以提供交流电源信号。交流电源508可以为市电，电压范围100-277V，频率为50或60Hz。LED直管灯500接收交流电源508提供的交流电源信号作为外部驱动信号，而被驱动发光。在本实施例中，LED直管灯500为单端电源的驱动架构，灯管的同一端灯头具有第一接脚501、第二接脚502，用以接收外部驱动信号。本实施例的第一接脚501、第二接脚502用于接收外部驱动信号；换言之，在LED直管灯安装至灯座上时，LED直管灯500内的电源模块(未绘示)会通过所述第一接脚501和第二接脚502耦接(即，电连接、或直接或间接连接)至交流电源508以接收交流电源信号。Please refer to FIG. 8A . FIG. 8A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present application. The AC power source 508 (or the external power grid 508 ) is used to provide the AC power signal. The AC power source 508 may be commercial power with a voltage range of 100-277V and a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. The LED straight tube lamp 500 receives the AC power signal provided by the AC power source 508 as an external driving signal, and is driven to emit light. In this embodiment, the LED straight tube lamp 500 is a driving structure of a single-ended power supply, and the lamp cap at the same end of the lamp tube has a first pin 501 and a second pin 502 for receiving an external driving signal. The first pin 501 and the second pin 502 in this embodiment are used for receiving external driving signals; in other words, when the LED straight tube light is installed on the lamp socket, the power module (not shown) in the LED straight tube light 500 The first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are coupled (ie, electrically connected, or directly or indirectly connected) to the AC power source 508 to receive the AC power signal.
除了上述的单端电源的应用外，本申请的LED直管灯500也可以应用至双端单接脚的电路结构以及双端双接脚的电路结构。其中，双端单接脚的电路结构请参见图8B，图8B是本申请第二实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。相较于图8A所示，本实施例的第一接脚501、第二接脚502分别置于LED直管灯500的灯管相对的双端灯头以从灯管两端接收外部驱动信号形成双端进电的配置，其余的电路连接及功能则与图8A所示电路相同。In addition to the application of the above single-ended power supply, the LED straight tube lamp 500 of the present application can also be applied to the circuit structure of double-ended single-pin and the circuit structure of double-ended double-pin. The circuit structure of the double-ended single-pin is shown in FIG. 8B , which is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present application. Compared with that shown in FIG. 8A , the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 of the present embodiment are respectively placed on the opposite double-ended lamp caps of the lamp tube of the LED straight tube lamp 500 to receive external driving signals from both ends of the lamp tube. In the configuration of double-ended feeding, the rest of the circuit connections and functions are the same as the circuit shown in Figure 8A.
双端双接脚的电路结构请参见图8C至图8E，图8C至图8E是本申请第三至第五实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。相较于图8A与8B所示，本实施例更包括第三接 脚503与第四接脚504。灯管的一端灯头具有第一接脚501、第三接脚503，另一端灯头具有第二接脚502、第四接脚504。第一接脚501、第二接脚502、第三接脚503及第四接脚504可用于接收外部驱动信号，以驱动LED直管灯500内的LED组件(未绘出)发光。Please refer to FIGS. 8C to 8E for the circuit structure of the double-ended double-pin. FIGS. 8C to 8E are schematic circuit diagrams of the LED straight tube lamp lighting systems according to the third to fifth embodiments of the present application. 8A and 8B, the present embodiment further includes a third pin 503 and a fourth pin 504. One end of the lamp holder has a first pin 501 and a third pin 503 , and the other end of the lamp holder has a second pin 502 and a fourth pin 504 . The first pin 501 , the second pin 502 , the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 can be used to receive external driving signals to drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED straight tube lamp 500 to emit light.
在双端双接脚的电路结构下，无论是单端的进电方式(如图8C)、双端单接脚的进电方式(如图8D)或是双端双接脚的进电方式(如图8E)，都可以透过调整电源模块的配置来实现灯管的供电。其中，在双端单接脚的进电方式下(即，将不同极性的外部驱动信号分别给到两端灯头接脚上，或可视为将交流电源508的火线和中性线分别耦接至两端灯头接脚上)，于一范例实施例中，如图8D所示，双端灯头可以分别有一个接脚为空接/浮接，例如图8D的第三接脚503与第四接脚504可为空接/浮接的状态，使灯管透过第一接脚501与第二接脚502接收外部驱动信号，藉以令灯管内部的电源模块进行后续的整流与滤波动作。于另一范例实施例中，如图8E所示，双端灯头的接脚可以分别通过灯管外部或灯管内部的线路短路在一起，例如第一接脚501与同一侧灯头上的第三接脚503短路在一起，并且第二接脚502与同一侧灯头上的第四接脚504短路在一起，如此便可同样利用第一接脚501与第三接脚503来接收正极性或负极性的外部驱动信号，并且利用第二接脚502与第四接脚504接收相反极性的外部驱动信号，藉以令灯管内部的电源模块进行后续的整流与滤波动作。Under the circuit structure of double-ended double-pin, whether it is the single-ended power feeding method (as shown in Figure 8C), the double-ended single-pin power feeding method (as shown in Figure 8D), or the double-ended double-pin power feeding method ( As shown in Figure 8E), the power supply of the lamp can be realized by adjusting the configuration of the power module. Among them, in the power-in mode of double-ended single-pin (that is, the external driving signals of different polarities are respectively given to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends, or it can be regarded as the live wire and the neutral wire of the AC power supply 508 are respectively coupled connected to the pins of the lamp caps at both ends), in an exemplary embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8D , each of the two-end lamp caps may have one pin that is free/floating, such as the third pin 503 and the first pin in FIG. 8D . The four pins 504 can be in an empty/floating state, so that the lamp can receive an external driving signal through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502, so that the power module inside the lamp can perform subsequent rectification and filtering operations . In another exemplary embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8E , the pins of the double-ended lamp cap can be short-circuited together by circuits outside the lamp tube or inside the lamp tube, for example, the first pin 501 and the third pin on the same side lamp cap. The pins 503 are shorted together, and the second pin 502 and the fourth pin 504 on the same side of the lamp head are shorted together, so that the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 can also be used to receive positive or negative polarity The second pin 502 and the fourth pin 504 are used to receive external driving signals of opposite polarities, so that the power module inside the lamp tube can perform subsequent rectification and filtering operations.
接着，请参见图9A，图9A是本申请第一实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的LED灯的电源模块5与LED模块50耦接，并包含整流电路510(可称为第一整流电路510)、滤波电路520以及驱动电路530。整流电路510耦接第一接脚501和第二接脚502，以接收外部驱动信号，并对外部驱动信号进行整流，然后由第一整流输出端511、第二整流输出端512输出整流后信号。在此的外部驱动信号可以是图8A至图8E中由交流电源508所提供的交流电源信号，甚至也可以为直流信号而不影响LED灯的操作。滤波电路520与所述整流电路510耦接，用以对整流后信号进行滤波；即滤波电路520耦接第一整流输出端511、第二整流输出端512以接收整流后信号，并对整流后信号进行滤波，然后由第一滤波输出端521、第二滤波输出端522输出滤波后信号。驱动电路530与滤波电路520和LED模块50耦接，以接收滤波后信号并产生驱动信号以驱动后端的LED模块50发光，其中驱动电路530可例如为直流对直流转换电路，用以将接收到的滤波后信号转换为驱动信号，并通过第一驱动输出端531和第二驱动输出端532输出；即驱动电路530耦接第一滤波输出端521、第二滤波输出端522以接收滤波后信号，然后驱动LED模块50内的LED组件(未绘出)发光。此部分请详见之后实施例的说明。LED模块50耦接第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532，以接收驱动信号而发光，较佳为LED模块50的电流稳定于一设定电流值。LED模块50的具体配置可参见后续图10A至图10I的说明。Next, please refer to FIG. 9A , FIG. 9A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The power module 5 of the LED lamp in this embodiment is coupled to the LED module 50 and includes a rectifier circuit 510 (may be referred to as a first rectifier circuit 510 ), a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 . The rectifier circuit 510 is coupled to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 to receive an external driving signal, rectify the external driving signal, and then output the rectified signal from the first rectification output terminal 511 and the second rectification output terminal 512 . The external driving signal here can be the AC power signal provided by the AC power source 508 in FIGS. 8A to 8E , or even a DC signal without affecting the operation of the LED lamp. The filter circuit 520 is coupled to the rectifier circuit 510 to filter the rectified signal; that is, the filter circuit 520 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the second rectifier output end 512 to receive the rectified signal, and to rectify the rectified signal. The signal is filtered, and then the filtered signal is output from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 . The driving circuit 530 is coupled to the filtering circuit 520 and the LED module 50 to receive the filtered signal and generate a driving signal to drive the LED module 50 at the back end to emit light. The filtered signal is converted into a driving signal and output through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532; that is, the driving circuit 530 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to receive the filtered signal. , and then drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED module 50 to emit light. Please refer to the description of the following embodiments for details in this part. The LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to receive driving signals to emit light. Preferably, the current of the LED module 50 is stable at a predetermined current value. For the specific configuration of the LED module 50, reference may be made to the subsequent descriptions of FIGS. 10A to 10I .
请参见图9B，图9B是本申请第二实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的LED灯的电源模块5与LED模块50耦接，并包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530以 及整流电路540(可称为第二整流电路540)，可以应用至图8C的单端电源架构或图8D与8E的双端电源架构。整流电路510耦接第一接脚501、第二接脚502，用以接收并整流第一接脚501、第二接脚502所传递的外部驱动信号；第二整流电路540耦接第三接脚503、第四接脚504，用以接收并整流第三接脚503、第四接脚504所传递的外部驱动信号。也就是说，LED灯的电源模块5可以包含第一整流电路510及第二整流电路540共同于第一整流输出端511、第二整流输出端512输出整流后信号。滤波电路520耦接第一整流输出端511、第二整流输出端512以接收整流后信号，并对整流后信号进行滤波，然后由第一滤波输出端521、第二滤波输出端522输出滤波后信号。驱动电路530耦接第一滤波输出端521、第二滤波输出端522以接收滤波后信号，然后驱动LED模块50内的LED组件(未绘出)发光。Please refer to FIG. 9B . FIG. 9B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The power module 5 of the LED lamp in this embodiment is coupled to the LED module 50 and includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and a rectifier circuit 540 (may be referred to as a second rectifier circuit 540), which can be applied to FIG. 8C The single-ended power supply architecture or the double-ended power supply architecture of Figures 8D and 8E. The rectifier circuit 510 is coupled to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 for receiving and rectifying the external driving signal transmitted by the first pin 501 and the second pin 502; the second rectifier circuit 540 is coupled to the third pin The pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 are used for receiving and rectifying the external driving signal transmitted by the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 . That is to say, the power supply module 5 of the LED lamp may include the first rectification circuit 510 and the second rectification circuit 540 to jointly output the rectified signal at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 . The filter circuit 520 is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to receive the rectified signal, filter the rectified signal, and then output the filtered signal from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522. Signal. The driving circuit 530 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to receive the filtered signal, and then drive the LED components (not shown) in the LED module 50 to emit light.
请参见图9C，图9C是本申请第三实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。LED灯的电源模块主要包含整流电路510、滤波电路520以及驱动电路530，其同样可以应用至图8A或8C的单端电源架构或图8B、8D或8E的双端电源架构。本实施例与前述图9B实施例的差异在于整流电路510可以具有三个输入端以分别耦接第一接脚501、第二接脚502及第三接脚503，并且可针对从各接脚501～503接到的信号进行整流，其中第四接脚504可为浮接或与第三接脚503短路，因此本实施例可以省略第二整流电路540的配置。其余电路运作与图9B大致相同，故于此不重复赘述。Please refer to FIG. 9C , which is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a third embodiment of the present application. The power module of the LED lamp mainly includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 , which can also be applied to the single-ended power supply architecture of FIG. 8A or 8C or the double-ended power supply architecture of FIGS. 8B , 8D or 8E. The difference between this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 9B is that the rectifier circuit 510 may have three input terminals to be respectively coupled to the first pin 501 , the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 , and can be used for each pin The signals received by 501 to 503 are rectified, wherein the fourth pin 504 can be floated or short-circuited with the third pin 503, so the configuration of the second rectifier circuit 540 can be omitted in this embodiment. The operation of the rest of the circuits is substantially the same as that of FIG. 9B , so the detailed description is not repeated here.
值得注意的是，在本实施例中，第一整流输出端511、第二整流输出端512及第一滤波输出端521、第二滤波输出端522的数量均为二，而实际应用时则根据整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530以及LED模块50各电路间信号传递的需求增加或减少，即各电路间耦接端点可以为一个或以上。It is worth noting that, in this embodiment, the number of the first rectifier output end 511 , the second rectifier output end 512 , the first filter output end 521 , and the second filter output end 522 are all two. The requirements for signal transmission among the circuits of the rectifier circuit 510 , the filter circuit 520 , the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 increase or decrease, that is, there may be one or more coupling terminals among the circuits.
图9A至图9C所示的LED直管灯的电源模块以及以下LED直管灯的电源模块的各实施例，除适用于图8A至图8E所示的LED直管灯外，对于包含两接脚用以传递电力的发光电路架构，例如：球泡灯、PAL灯、插管节能灯(PLS灯、PLD灯、PLT灯、PLL灯等)等各种不同的照明灯的灯座规格均适用。针对球泡灯的实施方式本实施例可与CN105465630A或CN105465663结构上的实现方式一起搭配使用。The power module of the LED straight tube lamp shown in FIG. 9A to FIG. 9C and the following embodiments of the power module of the LED straight tube lamp are applicable to the LED straight tube lamp shown in FIG. 8A to FIG. 8E . The light-emitting circuit structure that the legs are used to transmit power, such as: bulb lamps, PAL lamps, intubation energy-saving lamps (PLS lamps, PLD lamps, PLT lamps, PLL lamps, etc.) . Embodiments for Bulb Lamps This embodiment can be used together with the structural implementations of CN105465630A or CN105465663.
当本申请的LED直管灯500应用至双端至少单接脚的通电结构,可进行改装然后安装于包含灯管驱动电路或镇流器505(例如电子镇流器或电感镇流器)的灯座,且适用于旁通镇流器505而改由交流电源508(例如市电)来供电。When the LED straight tube lamp 500 of the present application is applied to a power-on structure with at least one pin at both ends, it can be retrofitted and then installed in a lamp drive circuit or a ballast 505 (such as an electronic ballast or an inductive ballast). The lamp holder is suitable for bypassing the ballast 505 and being powered by an AC power source 508 (eg, commercial power).
请参见图10A，图10A是本申请第一实施例的LED模块的电路架构示意图。LED模块50的正端耦接第一驱动输出端531，负端耦接第二驱动输出端532。LED模块50包含至少一个LED单元632。LED单元632为两个以上时彼此并联。每一个LED单元的正端耦接LED模块50的正端，以耦接第一驱动输出端531；每一个LED单元的负端耦接LED模块50的负端，以耦 接第二驱动输出端532。LED单元632包含至少一个LED组件631，即前述实施例中的LED光源202。当LED组件631为复数时，LED组件631串联成一串，第一个LED组件631的正端耦接所属LED单元632的正端，第一个LED组件631的负端耦接下一个(第二个)LED组件631。而最后一个LED组件631的正端耦接前一个LED组件631的负端，最后一个LED组件631的负端耦接所属LED单元632的负端。在本实施例中，标注为S531的电流检测信号代表LED模块50的流经电流大小，其可作为检测、控制LED模块50之用。Please refer to FIG. 10A . FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The positive terminal of the LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 , and the negative terminal is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 . The LED module 50 includes at least one LED unit 632 . When there are two or more LED units 632, they are connected in parallel with each other. The positive terminal of each LED unit is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED module 50 to be coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 ; the negative terminal of each LED unit is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED module 50 to be coupled to the second driving output terminal 532. The LED unit 632 includes at least one LED component 631 , ie, the LED light source 202 in the aforementioned embodiments. When the number of LED components 631 is plural, the LED components 631 are connected in series in a series, the positive terminal of the first LED component 631 is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED unit 632 to which it belongs, and the negative terminal of the first LED component 631 is coupled to the next (the second LED component 631). A) LED components 631. The positive terminal of the last LED component 631 is coupled to the negative terminal of the previous LED component 631 , and the negative terminal of the last LED component 631 is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED unit 632 to which it belongs. In this embodiment, the current detection signal marked as S531 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , which can be used for detecting and controlling the LED module 50 .
请参见图10B，图10B是本申请第二实施例的LED模块的电路架构示意图。LED模块50的正端耦接第一驱动输出端531，负端耦接第二驱动输出端532。本实施例的LED模块50包含至少二个LED单元732，而且每一个LED单元732的正端耦接LED模块50的正端，以及负端耦接LED模块50的负端。LED单元732包含至少二个LED组件731，在所属的LED单元732内的LED组件731的连接方式如同图10A所描述般，LED组件731的负极与下一个LED组件731的正极耦接，而第一个LED组件731的正极耦接所属LED单元732的正极，以及最后一个LED组件731的负极耦接所属LED单元732的负极。再者，本实施例中的LED单元732之间也彼此连接。每一个LED单元732的第n个LED组件731的正极彼此连接，负极也彼此连接。因此，本实施例的LED模块50的LED组件间的连接为网状连接。本实施例的电流检测信号S531同样地可代表LED模块50的流经电流大小，以作为检测、控制LED模块50之用。另外，实际应用上，LED单元732所包含的LED组件731的数量较佳为15-25个，更佳为18-22个。Please refer to FIG. 10B . FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The positive terminal of the LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 , and the negative terminal is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 . The LED module 50 of this embodiment includes at least two LED units 732 , and the positive terminal of each LED unit 732 is coupled to the positive terminal of the LED module 50 , and the negative terminal is coupled to the negative terminal of the LED module 50 . The LED unit 732 includes at least two LED components 731. The LED components 731 in the corresponding LED unit 732 are connected as described in FIG. 10A. The negative pole of the LED component 731 is coupled to the positive pole of the next LED component 731, and the first The positive electrode of one LED component 731 is coupled to the positive electrode of the associated LED unit 732 , and the negative electrode of the last LED component 731 is coupled to the negative electrode of the associated LED unit 732 . Furthermore, the LED units 732 in this embodiment are also connected to each other. The positive electrodes of the n-th LED components 731 of each LED unit 732 are connected to each other, and the negative electrodes are also connected to each other. Therefore, the connection between the LED components of the LED module 50 of this embodiment is a mesh connection. The current detection signal S531 of the present embodiment can also represent the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , and is used for detecting and controlling the LED module 50 . In addition, in practical applications, the number of the LED components 731 included in the LED unit 732 is preferably 15-25, more preferably 18-22.
请参见图10C，图10C是本申请第一实施例的LED模块的走线示意图。本实施例的LED组件831的连接关系同图10B所示，在此以三个LED单元为例进行说明。正极导线834与负极导线835接收驱动信号，以提供电力至各LED组件831，举例来说：正极导线834耦接前述滤波电路520的第一滤波输出端521，负极导线835耦接前述滤波电路520的第二滤波输出端522，以接收滤波后信号。为方便说明，图中将每一个LED单元中的第n个划分成同一LED组832。Please refer to FIG. 10C . FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The connection relationship of the LED assembly 831 in this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10B , and three LED units are used as an example for description here. The positive lead 834 and the negative lead 835 receive driving signals to provide power to each LED element 831 . For example, the positive lead 834 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 of the aforementioned filter circuit 520 , and the negative lead 835 is coupled to the aforementioned filter circuit 520 A second filtered output 522 to receive the filtered signal. For the convenience of description, the nth of each LED unit is divided into the same LED group 832 in the figure.
正极导线834连接最左侧三个LED单元中的第一个LED组件831，即如图所示最左侧LED组832中的三个LED组件的(左侧)正极，而负极导线835连接三个LED单元中的最后一个LED组件831，即如图所示最右侧LED组832中的三个LED组件的(右侧)负极。每一个LED单元的第一个LED组件831的负极，最后一个LED组件831的正极以及其他LED组件831的正极及负极则透过连接导线839连接。The positive lead 834 is connected to the first LED assembly 831 in the leftmost three LED units, that is, the (left) positive poles of the three LED assemblies in the leftmost LED group 832 as shown in the figure, and the negative lead 835 is connected to the three LEDs. The last LED assembly 831 in each LED unit, ie the (right) negative pole of the three LED assemblies in the rightmost LED group 832 as shown in the figure. The negative pole of the first LED component 831 of each LED unit, the positive pole of the last LED component 831 , and the positive poles and negative poles of other LED components 831 are connected through connecting wires 839 .
换句话说，最左侧LED组832的三个LED组件831的正极透过正极导线834彼此连接，其负极透过最左侧连接导线839彼此连接。左二LED组832的三个LED组件831的正极透过最左侧连接导线839彼此连接，其负极透过左二的连接导线839彼此连接。由于最左侧LED组832的三个LED组件831的负极及左二LED组832的三个LED组件831的正极均透过最左 侧连接导线839彼此连接，故每一个LED单元的第一个LED组件的负极与第二个LED组件的正极彼此连接。依此类推从而形成如图10B所示的网状连接。In other words, the anodes of the three LED assemblies 831 of the leftmost LED group 832 are connected to each other through the anode wire 834 , and the anodes thereof are connected to each other through the leftmost connecting wire 839 . The positive poles of the three LED components 831 of the second left LED group 832 are connected to each other through the leftmost connecting wire 839 , and the negative poles thereof are connected to each other through the second left connecting wire 839 . Since the negative poles of the three LED components 831 of the leftmost LED group 832 and the positive poles of the three LED components 831 of the second left LED group 832 are connected to each other through the leftmost connecting wire 839, the first LED of each LED unit The negative pole of the LED component and the positive pole of the second LED component are connected to each other. And so on to form a mesh connection as shown in FIG. 10B .
值得注意的是，连接导线839中与LED组件831的正极连接部分的宽度836小于与LED组件831的负极连接部分的宽度837。使负极连接部分的面积大于正极连接部分的面积。另外，宽度837小于连接导线839中同时连接邻近两个LED组件831中其中之一的正极及另一的负极的部分的宽度838，使同时与正极与负极部分的面积大于仅与负极连接部分的面积及正极连接部分的面积。因此，这样的走线架构有助于LED组件的散热。It is worth noting that the width 836 of the connecting wire 839 connected to the positive electrode of the LED assembly 831 is smaller than the width 837 of the negative electrode connecting portion of the LED assembly 831 . The area of the negative electrode connection portion is made larger than the area of the positive electrode connection portion. In addition, the width 837 is smaller than the width 838 of the portion of the connecting wire 839 that is simultaneously connected to the positive electrode of one of the two LED components 831 and the negative electrode of the other, so that the area of the portion connected to the positive electrode and the negative electrode at the same time is larger than that of the portion connected to only the negative electrode. area and the area of the positive connection part. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
另外，正极导线834还可包含有正极引线834a，负极导线835还可包含有负极引线835a，使LED模块的两端均具有正极及负极连接点。这样的走线架构可使LED灯的电源模块的其他电路，例如：滤波电路520、第一整流电路510及第二整流电路540由任一端或同时两端的正极及负极连接点耦接到LED模块，增加实际电路的配置安排的弹性。In addition, the positive lead 834 may further include a positive lead 834a, and the negative lead 835 may further include a negative lead 835a, so that both ends of the LED module have positive and negative connection points. Such a wiring structure enables other circuits of the power module of the LED lamp, such as the filter circuit 520, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540, to be coupled to the LED module through the positive and negative connection points at either or both ends. , to increase the flexibility of the configuration arrangement of the actual circuit.
请参见图10D，图10D是本申请第二实施例的LED模块的走线示意图。本实施例的LED组件931的连接关系同图10A所示，在此以三个LED单元且每个LED单元包含7个LED组件为例进行说明。正极导线934与负极导线935接收驱动信号，以提供电力至各LED组件931，举例来说：正极导线934耦接前述滤波电路520的第一滤波输出端521，负极导线935耦接前述滤波电路520的第二滤波输出端522，以接收滤波后信号。为方便说明，图中将每一个LED单元中七个LED组件划分成同一LED组932。Please refer to FIG. 10D . FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The connection relationship of the LED components 931 in this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10A , and the description is given by taking three LED units and each LED unit including 7 LED components as an example. The positive lead 934 and the negative lead 935 receive driving signals to provide power to each LED element 931 . For example, the positive lead 934 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 of the filter circuit 520 , and the negative lead 935 is coupled to the filter circuit 520 A second filtered output 522 to receive the filtered signal. For the convenience of description, in the figure, the seven LED components in each LED unit are divided into the same LED group 932 .
正极导线934连接每一LED组932中第一个(最左侧)LED组件931的(左侧)正极。负极导线935连接每一LED组932中最后一个(最右侧)LED组件931的(右侧)负极。在每一LED组932中，邻近两个LED组件931中左方的LED组件931的负极透过连接导线939连接右方LED组件931的正极。藉此，LED组932的LED组件串联成一串。 Anode lead 934 connects the (left) anode of the first (leftmost) LED assembly 931 in each LED group 932. Negative lead 935 connects the (right) negative of the last (rightmost) LED assembly 931 in each LED group 932. In each LED group 932 , the negative pole of the left LED component 931 adjacent to the two LED components 931 is connected to the positive pole of the right LED component 931 through the connecting wire 939 . Thereby, the LED components of the LED group 932 are connected in series to form a string.
值得注意的是，连接导线939用以连接相邻两个LED组件931的其中之一的负极及另一的正极。负极导线935用以连接各LED组的最后一个(最右侧)的LED组件931的负极。正极导线934用以连接各LED组的第一个(最左侧)的LED组件931的正极。因此，其宽度及供LED组件的散热面积依上述顺序由大至小。也就是说，连接导线939的宽度938最大，负极导线935连接LED组件931负极的宽度937次之，而正极导线934连接LED组件931正极的宽度936最小。因此，这样的走线架构有助于LED组件的散热。It is worth noting that the connecting wire 939 is used to connect the negative electrode of one of the two adjacent LED components 931 and the positive electrode of the other. The negative lead 935 is used to connect the negative pole of the last (rightmost) LED assembly 931 of each LED group. The anode lead 934 is used to connect the anode of the first (leftmost) LED assembly 931 of each LED group. Therefore, the width and the heat dissipation area of the LED components are in descending order according to the above order. That is to say, the width 938 of the connecting wire 939 is the largest, the width 937 of the negative wire 935 connecting the negative electrode of the LED component 931 is next, and the width 936 of the positive wire 934 connecting the positive electrode of the LED component 931 is the smallest. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
另外，正极导线934还可包含有正极引线934a，负极导线935还可包含有负极引线935a，使LED模块的两端均具有正极及负极连接点。这样的走线架构可使LED灯的电源模块的其他电路，例如：滤波电路520、第一整流电路510及第二整流电路540由任一端或同时两端的正极及负极连接点耦接到LED模块，增加实际电路的配置安排的弹性。In addition, the positive lead 934 may further include a positive lead 934a, and the negative lead 935 may further include a negative lead 935a, so that both ends of the LED module have positive and negative connection points. Such a wiring structure enables other circuits of the power module of the LED lamp, such as the filter circuit 520, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540, to be coupled to the LED module through the positive and negative connection points at either or both ends. , to increase the flexibility of the configuration arrangement of the actual circuit.
再者，图10C及10D中所示的走线可以可挠式电路板来实现。举例来说，可挠式电路板 具有单层线路层，以蚀刻方式形成图10C中的正极导线834、正极引线834a、负极导线835、负极引线835a及连接导线839，以及图10D中的正极导线934、正极引线934a、负极导线935、负极引线935a及连接导线939。Furthermore, the traces shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D can be implemented with a flexible circuit board. For example, the flexible circuit board has a single-layer circuit layer, and the positive lead 834, the positive lead 834a, the negative lead 835, the negative lead 835a and the connection lead 839 in FIG. 10C are formed by etching, and the positive lead in FIG. 10D is formed 934 , the positive lead 934a, the negative lead 935, the negative lead 935a, and the connecting lead 939.
请参见图10E，图10E是本申请第三实施例的LED模块的走线示意图。本实施例的LED组件1031的连接关系同图10B所示。其中，本实施例有关于正极导线与负极导线(未绘示)的配置及与其他电路的连接关系与前述图10C大致相同，两者间的差异在于本实施例将图10C所示的以横向配置LED组件831(即，各LED组件831是将其正极与负极沿着导线延伸方向排列配置)改为以纵向配置LED组件1031(即，各LED组件1031的正极与负极的连线方向与导线延伸方向垂直)，并且基于LED组件1031的配置方向而对应调整连接导线1039的配置。Please refer to FIG. 10E. FIG. 10E is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the third embodiment of the present application. The connection relationship of the LED assembly 1031 of this embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 10B . The configuration of the positive electrode lead and the negative electrode lead (not shown) and the connection relationship with other circuits in this embodiment are substantially the same as those shown in FIG. 10C , and the difference between the two is that the embodiment shown in FIG. The arrangement of the LED components 831 (that is, the positive electrodes and negative electrodes of each LED component 831 are arranged along the extending direction of the wires) is changed to the vertical arrangement of the LED components 1031 (that is, the connection direction of the positive electrodes and the negative electrodes of the LED components 1031 and the wires are arranged in the vertical direction). The extending direction is vertical), and the arrangement of the connecting wires 1039 is adjusted correspondingly based on the arrangement direction of the LED components 1031 .
更具体的说，以连接导线1039_2为例说明，连接导线1039_2包括宽度1037较窄的第一长边部、宽度1038较宽的第二长边部以及连接两长边部的转折部。连接导线1039_2可以设置为直角z型的形状，亦即每一长边部与转折部的连接处均呈直角。其中，连接导线1039_2的第一长边部会与相邻的连接导线1039_3的第二长边部对应配置；类似地，连接导线1039_2的第二长边部会与相邻的连接导线1039_1的第一长边部对应配置。由上述配置可知，连接导线1039会延长边部的延伸方向排列，并且每一连接导线1039的第一长边部会与相邻的连接导线1039的第二长边部对应配置；类似地，每一连接导线1039的第二长边部会与相邻的连接导线1039的第一长边部对应配置，进而使得各连接导线1039整体形成具有一致宽度的配置。其他连接导线1039的配置可参照上述连接导线1039_2的说明。More specifically, taking the connecting wire 1039_2 as an example, the connecting wire 1039_2 includes a first long side portion with a narrow width 1037 , a second long side portion with a wider width 1038 , and a turning portion connecting the two long side portions. The connecting wire 1039_2 can be set in a right-angled z-shape, that is, the connection between each long side portion and the turning portion is at a right angle. Wherein, the first long side portion of the connecting wire 1039_2 is correspondingly arranged with the second long side portion of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_3; similarly, the second long side portion of the connecting wire 1039_2 is corresponding to the first long side portion of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_1 The corresponding configuration of the edge. It can be seen from the above configuration that the connecting wires 1039 are arranged in the extending direction of the extended sides, and the first long side of each connecting wire 1039 is arranged corresponding to the second long side of the adjacent connecting wire 1039; The second long sides of the connecting wires 1039 are arranged correspondingly with the first long sides of the adjacent connecting wires 1039 , so that the connecting wires 1039 as a whole are configured to have a uniform width. For the configuration of other connecting wires 1039, reference may be made to the description of the connecting wires 1039_2 above.
就LED组件1031与连接导线1039的相对配置而言，同样以连接导线1039_2来说明，在本实施例中，部分的LED组件1031(例如右侧四个LED组件1031)的正极是连接至连接导线1039_2的第一长边部，并且通过第一长边部彼此相互连接；而此部分LED组件1031的负极则是连接至相邻连接导线1039_3的第二长边部，并且通过第二长边部彼此互相连接。另一方面，另一部分的LED组件1031(例如左侧四个LED组件1031)的正极是连接至连接导线1039_1的第一长边部，并且负极是连接至连接导线1039_2的第二长边部。The relative configuration of the LED components 1031 and the connecting wires 1039 is also described with the connecting wires 1039_2. In this embodiment, the anodes of some LED components 1031 (for example, the four LED components 1031 on the right side) are connected to the connecting wires. The first long side of 1039_2 is connected to each other through the first long side; and the negative electrode of this part of the LED components 1031 is connected to the second long side of the adjacent connecting wire 1039_3 and is connected to each other through the second long side. connected to each other. On the other hand, the positive poles of another part of the LED components 1031 (eg, the four LED components 1031 on the left) are connected to the first long side of the connecting wire 1039_1, and the negative poles are connected to the second long side of the connecting wire 1039_2.
换句话说，左侧四个LED组件1031的正极透过连接导线1039_1彼此连接，其负极透过连接导线1039_2彼此连接。右侧四个LED组件831的正极透过连接导线1039_2彼此连接，其负极透过连接导线1039_3彼此连接。由于左侧四个LED组件1031的负极透过连接导线1039_2与右侧四个LED组件1031的正极连接，左侧四个LED组件1031可模拟为LED模块其中四个LED单元的第一个LED组件，并且右侧四个LED组件1031可模拟LED为LED模块其中四个LED单元的第二个LED组件，依此类推从而形成如图10B所示的网状连接。In other words, the positive electrodes of the four LED components 1031 on the left are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_1, and the negative electrodes thereof are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_2. The positive electrodes of the four LED components 831 on the right are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_2, and the negative electrodes thereof are connected to each other through the connecting wire 1039_3. Since the negative poles of the four LED components 1031 on the left are connected to the positive poles of the four LED components 1031 on the right through the connecting wires 1039_2, the four LED components 1031 on the left can be simulated as the first LED components of the four LED units in the LED module , and the four LED components 1031 on the right can simulate the LED as the second LED component of the four LED units in the LED module, and so on to form a mesh connection as shown in FIG. 10B .
值得注意的是，相较于图10C来看，本实施例将LED组件1031改为纵向配置，其可增加LED组件1031之间的间隙，并且使得连接导线的走线扩宽，进而避免在灯管整修时线路容易 被刺破的风险，并且可同时避免LED组件1031颗数较多而需紧密排列时，灯珠间铜箔覆盖面积不足而使锡珠造成短路的问题。It is worth noting that, compared to FIG. 10C , the LED components 1031 are changed to a vertical configuration in this embodiment, which can increase the gap between the LED components 1031 and widen the wiring of the connecting wires, thereby avoiding the need for light The risk of the circuit being easily punctured when the tube is refurbished, and at the same time, it can avoid the problem of short circuit caused by the tin bead caused by insufficient copper foil covering area between the lamp beads when the number of LED components 1031 is large and needs to be closely arranged.
另一方面，透过使正极连接部分的第一长边部的宽度1037小于与负极连接部分的第二长边部的宽度1038的配置，可以令LED组件1031于负极连接部分的面积大于正极连接部分的面积。因此，这样的走线架构有助于LED组件的散热。On the other hand, by making the width 1037 of the first long side portion of the positive electrode connection portion smaller than the width 1038 of the second long side portion of the negative electrode connection portion, the area of the LED element 1031 at the negative electrode connection portion can be made larger than that of the positive electrode connection portion. part of the area. Therefore, such a trace structure helps to dissipate heat from the LED components.
请参见图10F，图10F是本申请第四实施例的LED模块的走线示意图。本实施例与前述图10E实施例大致相同，两者差异仅在于本实施例的连接导线1139是以非直角的Z型走线来实施。换言之，在本实施例中，转折部形成斜向走线，使得连接导线1139的每一长边部与转折部的连接处为非直角。在本实施例的配置底下，除了纵向配置LED组件1131可实现增加LED组件1031之间的间隙，并且使得连接导线的走线扩宽的效果之外，本实施例斜向配置连接导线的方式可以避免LED组件贴装时由于焊盘不平导致LED组件移位、偏移等问题。类似地，本实施例的连接导线1139同样可以配置为使正极连接部分的长边部宽度1137小于与负极连接部分的长边部宽度1138，进而同样实现增进散热特性的效果。Please refer to FIG. 10F . FIG. 10F is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is substantially the same as the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 10E , and the difference between the two is only that the connecting wires 1139 of this embodiment are implemented by non-right-angle Z-shaped wires. In other words, in this embodiment, the turning portion forms an oblique wiring, so that the connection between each long side portion of the connecting wire 1139 and the turning portion is a non-right angle. Under the configuration of this embodiment, in addition to the effect of increasing the gap between the LED assemblies 1031 by arranging the LED components 1131 vertically and widening the traces of the connecting wires, the way of arranging the connecting wires obliquely in this embodiment can Avoid problems such as displacement and offset of LED components due to uneven pads during LED component placement. Similarly, the connecting wire 1139 of this embodiment can also be configured such that the width 1137 of the long side of the connecting portion of the positive electrode is smaller than the width 1138 of the long side of the connecting portion with the negative electrode, thereby achieving the effect of improving heat dissipation.
具体而言，在使用可挠性电路板做为灯板的应用下，垂直走线(如图10C至10E的配置)会在导线转折处产生规律性的白油凹陷区，使得连接导线上之LED组件焊盘上锡处相对处于凸起位置。由于上锡处并非平坦表面，故在LED组件贴装时可能会因为表面不平整而使LED组件无法贴附至预定的位置上。因此，本实施例透过将垂直走线调整为斜向走线的配置，可以令走线整体的铜箔强度均匀，而不会在特定位置出现凸起或不平坦的情形，进而令LED组件1131可以更容易贴附在导线上，提高灯管配装时的可靠度。除此之外，由于本实施例中每一个LED单元在灯板上只会走一次斜线基板，因此可以使得整体灯板的强度大幅提高，从而防止灯板弯曲，也可缩短灯板长度。Specifically, in the application of using a flexible circuit board as a light board, the vertical wiring (as shown in Figures 10C to 10E) will produce regular white oil depressions at the turns of the wires, so that the connecting wires are The tin on the LED component pads is relatively in a raised position. Since the surface where the tin is applied is not a flat surface, when the LED components are mounted, the uneven surface may prevent the LED components from being attached to the predetermined position. Therefore, in this embodiment, by adjusting the vertical wiring to the oblique wiring configuration, the copper foil strength of the entire wiring can be made uniform, and no protrusion or unevenness occurs in a specific position, thereby making the LED components 1131 can be attached to the wire more easily, improving the reliability of the lamp assembly. In addition, since each LED unit in this embodiment only travels the diagonal substrate once on the lamp board, the strength of the whole lamp board can be greatly improved, thereby preventing the lamp board from bending and shortening the length of the lamp board.
另外，在一范例实施例中，还可以透过在LED组件1131的焊盘周边覆盖铜箔，藉以抵消LED组件1131贴装时的偏移量，避免产生锡珠造成短路的情形。In addition, in an exemplary embodiment, copper foil can also be covered around the pads of the LED components 1131 to offset the offset of the LED components 1131 during mounting and avoid short circuits caused by solder balls.
请参见图10G，图10G是本申请第五实施例的LED模块的走线示意图。本实施例与图10C大致相同，两者间的差异之处主要在于本实施例的连接导线1239与连接导线1239之间的对应处(非LED组件1231之焊盘处)走线改为斜向走线。其中，实施例透过将垂直走线调整为斜向走线的配置，可以令走在线整体的铜箔强度均匀，而不会在特定位置出现凸起或不平坦的情形，进而令LED组件1131可以更容易贴附在导线上，提高灯管配装时的可靠度。Please refer to FIG. 10G . FIG. 10G is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 10C , and the difference between the two is mainly that the wiring at the corresponding position between the connecting wire 1239 and the connecting wire 1239 in this embodiment (not at the pad of the LED component 1231 ) is changed to be inclined. Traces. Among them, in the embodiment, by adjusting the vertical wiring to the configuration of the oblique wiring, the strength of the copper foil of the whole wiring can be made uniform, and there will be no protrusion or unevenness in a specific position, so that the LED components 1131 It can be attached to the wire more easily, which improves the reliability of the lamp assembly.
除此之外，在本实施例的配置下，还可统一将色温点CTP设置在LED组件1231之间，如图10H所示，图10H是本申请第六实施例的LED模块的走线示意图。透过统一将色温点CTP设置在LED组件的配置，使得在导线1234和1239拼接构成LED模块之后，各导线1234和1239上对应位置的色温点CTP可以在同一条在线。如此一来，在上锡时，整个LED模块可以 仅用数条胶带(如图所示，若每条导线设置3个色温点，则仅需3条胶带)即可遮挡住LED模块上的所有色温点，藉以提高装配流程的顺畅度，并且节省装配时间。In addition, under the configuration of this embodiment, the color temperature point CTP can also be uniformly set between the LED components 1231 , as shown in FIG. 10H , which is a schematic diagram of the wiring of the LED module according to the sixth embodiment of the present application . By uniformly setting the color temperature point CTP in the configuration of the LED assembly, after the wires 1234 and 1239 are spliced to form the LED module, the color temperature point CTP at the corresponding position on each wire 1234 and 1239 can be on the same line. In this way, when tinning, the entire LED module can be covered with only a few tapes (as shown in the figure, if each wire is set with 3 color temperature points, only 3 tapes are needed) to cover all the LED modules. Color temperature point to improve the smoothness of the assembly process and save assembly time.
请参见图10I，图10I是本申请第七实施例的LED模块的走线示意图。本实施例系将图10C的LED模块的走线由单层线路层改为双层线路层，主要是将正极引线834a及负极引线835a改至第二层线路层。说明如下。Please refer to FIG. 10I. FIG. 10I is a schematic diagram of wiring of the LED module according to the seventh embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the wiring of the LED module shown in FIG. 10C is changed from a single-layer circuit layer to a double-layer circuit layer, mainly by changing the positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a to the second circuit layer. described as follows.
请同时参见图3，可挠式电路板具有双层线路层，包括一第一线路层2a，介电层2b及第二线路层2c。第一线路层2a及第二线路层2c间以介电层2b进行电性隔离。可挠式电路板的第一线路层2a以蚀刻方式形成图10I中的正极导线834、负极导线835及连接导线839，以电连接所述多个LED组件831，例如：电连接所述多个LED组件成网状连接的LED组832，第二线路层2c以蚀刻方式正极引线834a、负极引线835a，以电连接所述滤波电路(的滤波输出端)。而且在可挠式电路板的第一线路层2a的正极导线834、负极导线835具有层连接点834b及835b。第二线路层2c的正极引线834a、负极引线835a具有层连接点834c及835c。层连接点834b及835b与层连接点834c及835c位置相对，用以电性连接正极导线834及正极引线834a，以及负极导线835及负极引线835a。较佳的做法系将第一层线路层的层连接点834b及835b的位置同下方个藉电层形成开口至裸露出层连接点834c及835c，然后用焊锡焊接，使正极导线834及正极引线834a，以及负极导线835及负极引线835a彼此电性连接。Please also refer to FIG. 3 , the flexible circuit board has double-layer circuit layers, including a first circuit layer 2a, a dielectric layer 2b and a second circuit layer 2c. The first wiring layer 2a and the second wiring layer 2c are electrically isolated by a dielectric layer 2b. A positive wire 834, a negative wire 835 and a connecting wire 839 in FIG. 10I are formed on the first circuit layer 2a of the flexible circuit board by etching, so as to electrically connect the plurality of LED components 831, for example, electrically connect the plurality of LED components 831. The LED components are formed into a mesh-connected LED group 832, and the positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a of the second circuit layer 2c are etched to electrically connect (the filter output end of) the filter circuit. In addition, the positive lead 834 and the negative lead 835 of the first circuit layer 2a of the flexible circuit board have layer connection points 834b and 835b. The positive lead 834a and the negative lead 835a of the second wiring layer 2c have layer connection points 834c and 835c. The layer connection points 834b and 835b are located opposite to the layer connection points 834c and 835c for electrically connecting the positive electrode lead 834 and the positive electrode lead 834a, and the negative electrode lead 835 and the negative electrode lead 835a. A better practice is to form an opening to the connection points 834c and 835c of the exposed layer at the positions of the layer connection points 834b and 835b of the first layer of the circuit layer with the lower current borrowing layer, and then solder them with solder to make the positive electrode lead 834 and the positive electrode lead. 834a, and the negative lead 835 and the negative lead 835a are electrically connected to each other.
同样地，图10D所示的LED模块的走线也可以将正极引线934a及负极引线935a改至第二层线路层，而形成双层线路层的走线结构。Similarly, for the wiring of the LED module shown in FIG. 10D , the positive lead 934a and the negative lead 935a can also be changed to the second wiring layer to form a wiring structure of double wiring layers.
值得注意的是，具有双层导电层或线路层的可挠式电路板的第二导电层的厚度较佳为相较于第一导电层的厚度厚，藉此可以降低在正极引线及负极引线上的线损(压降)。再者，具有双层导电层的可挠式电路板相较于单层导电层的可挠式电路板，由于将两端的正极引线、负极引线移至第二层，可以缩小可挠式电路板的宽度。在相同的治具上，较窄的基板的排放数量多于较宽的基板，因此可以提高LED模块的生产效率。而且具有双层导电层的可挠式电路板相对上也较容易维持形状，以增加生产的可靠性，例如：LED组件的焊接时焊接位置的准确性。It is worth noting that the thickness of the second conductive layer of the flexible circuit board with double-layer conductive layers or circuit layers is preferably thicker than that of the first conductive layer, so as to reduce the thickness of the positive electrode lead and the negative electrode lead. Line loss (voltage drop) on . Furthermore, compared with the flexible circuit board with a single-layer conductive layer, the flexible circuit board with double-layer conductive layer can reduce the size of the flexible circuit board because the positive lead and negative lead at both ends are moved to the second layer. width. On the same jig, narrower substrates have more discharges than wider substrates, thus improving the production efficiency of LED modules. Moreover, the flexible circuit board with the double-layer conductive layer is relatively easy to maintain the shape, so as to increase the reliability of production, for example, the accuracy of the welding position during the welding of LED components.
作为上述方案的变形，本申请还提供一种LED直管灯，该LED直管灯的电源模块的至少部分电子组件设置在灯板上：即利用PEC(印刷电子电路，PEC：Printed Electronic Circuits)，技术将至少部分电子组件印刷或嵌入在灯板上。As a modification of the above solution, the present application also provides an LED straight tube lamp, at least part of the electronic components of the power module of the LED straight tube lamp are arranged on the lamp board: that is, using PEC (Printed Electronic Circuits, PEC: Printed Electronic Circuits) , the technology prints or embeds at least some of the electronic components on the light board.
本申请的一个实施例中，将电源模块的电子组件全部设置在灯板上。其制作过程如下：基板准备(可挠性印刷电路板准备)→喷印金属纳米油墨→喷印无源组件/有源器件(电源模块)→烘干/烧结→喷印层间连接凸块→喷涂绝缘油墨→喷印金属纳米油墨→喷印无源组件及有源器件(依次类推形成所包含的多层板)→喷涂表面焊接盘→喷涂阻焊剂焊接LED组件。In an embodiment of the present application, all the electronic components of the power module are arranged on the light board. The production process is as follows: substrate preparation (flexible printed circuit board preparation) → printing metal nano-ink → printing passive components/active devices (power modules) → drying / sintering → printing interlayer connection bumps → Spraying insulating ink → spraying metal nano ink → spraying passive components and active devices (and so on to form the included multi-layer board) → spraying surface welding pad → spraying solder resist to weld LED components.
上述的本实施例中，若将电源模块的电子组件全部设置在灯板上时，只需在灯板的两端通过焊接导线连接LED直管灯的接脚，实现接脚与灯板的电气连接。这样就不用再为电源模块设置基板，进而可进一步的优化灯头的设计。较佳的，电源模块设置在灯板的两端，这样尽量减少其工作产生的热对LED组件的影响。本实施例因减少焊接，提高电源模块的整体信赖性。In the above-mentioned embodiment, if all the electronic components of the power module are arranged on the lamp board, it is only necessary to connect the pins of the LED straight tube lamp by welding wires at both ends of the lamp board, so as to realize the electrical connection between the pins and the lamp board. connect. In this way, it is no longer necessary to provide a base plate for the power module, thereby further optimizing the design of the lamp head. Preferably, the power modules are arranged at both ends of the light board, so as to minimize the influence of the heat generated by its operation on the LED components. In this embodiment, the overall reliability of the power module is improved due to the reduction of welding.
若将部分电子组件印刷在灯板上(如电阻，电容)时，而将大的器件如：电感，电解电容等电子组件设置在灯头内。灯板的制作过程同上。这样通过将部分电子组件，设置在灯板上，合理的布局电源模块，来优化灯头的设计。If some electronic components (such as resistors and capacitors) are printed on the lamp board, large components such as inductors, electrolytic capacitors and other electronic components are arranged in the lamp head. The production process of the light board is the same as above. In this way, the design of the lamp head is optimized by arranging some electronic components on the lamp board and rationally arranging the power module.
作为上述的方案变形，也可通过嵌入的方式来实现将电源模块的电子组件设置在灯板上。即：以嵌入的方式在可挠性灯板上嵌入电子组件。较佳的，可采用含电阻型/电容型的覆铜箔板(CCL)或丝网印刷相关的油墨等方法实现；或采用喷墨打印技术实现嵌入无源组件的方法，即以喷墨打印机直接把作为无源组件的导电油墨及相关功能油墨喷印到灯板内设定的位置上。然后，经过UV光处理或烘干/烧结处理，形成埋嵌无源组件的灯板。嵌入在灯板上电子组件包括电阻、电容和电感；在其它的实施例中，有源组件也适用。通过这样的设计来合理的布局电源模块进而达到优化灯头的设计(由于部分采用嵌入式电阻和电容，本实施例节约了宝贵的印刷电路板表面空间，缩小了印刷电路板的尺寸并减少了其重量和厚度。同时由于消除了这些电阻和电容的焊接点(焊接点是印刷电路板上最容易引入故障的部分)，电源模块的可靠性也得到了提高。同时将减短印刷电路板上导线的长度并且允许更紧凑的器件布局，因而提高电气性能)。As a modification of the above solution, the electronic components of the power module can also be arranged on the lamp board by means of embedding. That is, the electronic components are embedded in the flexible lamp board in an embedded manner. Preferably, it can be realized by methods such as resistive/capacitive copper clad laminates (CCL) or inks related to screen printing; or by using inkjet printing technology to realize the method of embedding passive components, that is, using inkjet printers. Directly print the conductive ink and related functional ink as passive components to the set position in the lamp board. Then, through UV light treatment or drying/sintering treatment, a lamp panel with embedded passive components is formed. The electronic components embedded in the light panel include resistors, capacitors and inductors; in other embodiments, active components are also suitable. Through such a design, the power supply module is reasonably arranged to optimize the design of the lamp head (due to the partial use of embedded resistors and capacitors, this embodiment saves valuable printed circuit board surface space, reduces the size of the printed circuit board and reduces its Weight and thickness. At the same time, the reliability of the power module is also improved by eliminating the solder joints of these resistors and capacitors (the solder joints are the most prone to failure on the printed circuit board). At the same time, the wires on the printed circuit board will be shortened. length and allow for a more compact device layout, thus improving electrical performance).
以下说明嵌入式电容、电阻的制造方法。The method of manufacturing the embedded capacitor and the resistor will be described below.
通常使用嵌入式电容的方法，采用一种叫做分布式电容或平面电容的概念。在铜层的基础上压上非常薄的绝缘层。一般以电源层/地层的形式成对出现。非常薄的绝缘层使电源层与地层之间的距离非常小。这样的电容量也可以通过传统的金属化孔实现。基本上来说，这样的方法在电路板上建立了一个大的平行的板极电容。The method of embedded capacitance is usually used, using a concept called distributed capacitance or planar capacitance. A very thin insulating layer is pressed on top of the copper layer. Usually in the form of power plane / ground plane pair. The very thin insulating layer keeps the distance between the power plane and the ground plane very small. Such capacitance can also be achieved with conventional metallized holes. Basically, this method creates a large parallel plate capacitor on the board.
一些高电容量的产品，有些是分布式电容型的，另外一些是分立嵌入式的。通过在绝缘层中填充钛酸钡(一种具有高介电常数的材料)来获得更高的电容量。Some high-capacitance products, some are distributed capacitive type, others are discrete embedded. Higher capacitance is achieved by filling the insulating layer with barium titanate, a material with a high dielectric constant.
通常制造嵌入式电阻的方法是使用电阻粘剂。它是掺杂有传导性碳或石墨的树脂，以此为填充剂，丝网印刷至指定处，然后经过处理后层压入电路板内部。电阻由金属化孔或微过孔连接至电路板上的其他电子组件。另一种方法为Ohmega-Ply法：它是双金属层结构——铜层与一个薄的镍合金层构成了电阻器元素，它们形成层状的相对于底层的电阻器。然后通过对铜层和镍合金层的蚀刻，形成具有铜端子的各种镍电阻。这些电阻器被层压至电路板的内层中。The usual way to make embedded resistors is to use resistor adhesives. It is a resin doped with conductive carbon or graphite as a filler, screen-printed to the desired location, then processed and laminated into the interior of the circuit board. Resistors are connected to other electronic components on the circuit board by metallized holes or microvias. Another method is the Ohmega-Ply method: it is a bimetallic layer structure - the copper layer and a thin nickel alloy layer make up the resistor elements, which form a layered resistor relative to the bottom layer. Various nickel resistors with copper terminals are then formed by etching the copper and nickel alloy layers. These resistors are laminated into the inner layers of the circuit board.
在本申请的一个实施例中，将导线直接印刷在玻璃管的内壁(设置成线状)，LED组件直接贴该内壁，以经过这些导线彼此电性连接。较佳的，采用LED组件的芯片形式直接贴在该内壁的导线上(在导线的两端设置连接点，通过连接点LED组件与电源模块连接)，贴附后，在该芯片上点滴荧光粉(使LED直管灯工作时产生白光，也可是其它颜色的光)。In an embodiment of the present application, the wires are directly printed on the inner wall of the glass tube (arranged in a line shape), and the LED components are directly attached to the inner wall, so as to be electrically connected to each other through the wires. Preferably, the chip form of the LED component is directly attached to the wire of the inner wall (connecting points are set at both ends of the wire, and the LED component is connected to the power module through the connection point), and after the attachment, drop phosphor powder on the chip. (The LED straight tube light can produce white light when it works, and it can also be light of other colors).
本申请的LED组件的发光效率为80lm/W以上，较佳为120lm/W以上，更佳为160lm/W以上。LED组件可以是单色LED芯片的光经荧光粉而混成白色光，其光谱的主要波长为430-460nm以及550-560nm，或者430-460nm、540-560nm以及620-640nm。The luminous efficiency of the LED assembly of the present application is 80lm/W or more, preferably 120lm/W or more, and more preferably 160lm/W or more. The LED component can be a monochromatic LED chip whose light is mixed into white light by phosphor powder, and the main wavelengths of its spectrum are 430-460nm and 550-560nm, or 430-460nm, 540-560nm and 620-640nm.
附带一提的是，所述图10A至图10I的实施例的LED模块50的连接方式不仅限于直管灯的实施态样，其可适用于各类型的AC电源供电的LED灯具(即，无镇流器LED灯具)中，例如LED灯泡、LED灯丝灯或一体化LED灯具中，本申请不以此为限。Incidentally, the connection mode of the LED module 50 in the embodiment of FIG. 10A to FIG. 10I is not limited to the implementation of the straight tube lamp, but can be applied to various types of LED lamps powered by AC power (ie, no Ballast LED lamps), such as LED bulbs, LED filament lamps or integrated LED lamps, the application is not limited to this.
另外，如上所述，电源模块的电子组件可设置在灯板上或灯头内的电路板上。为了增加电源模块的优点，其中某些电容在实施例中会采用贴片电容(例如陶瓷贴片电容)，其被设置在灯板上或灯头内的电路板上。但是这样设置的贴片电容在使用中由于压电效应会发出明显的噪声，影响客户使用时的舒适性。为了解决这个问题，在本揭露的LED直管灯中，可通过在贴片电容正下方钻合适的孔或槽，这能够改变贴片电容与承载贴片电容的电路板在压电效应下构成的振动系统以至于明显降低所发出的噪音。此孔或槽的边缘或周缘的形状可以近于例如圆形，椭圆形或矩形，且位于灯板中的导电层或灯头内的电路板中，且在贴片电容的下方。In addition, as mentioned above, the electronic components of the power module may be provided on the lamp board or on a circuit board within the lamp head. In order to increase the advantages of the power supply module, some of the capacitors in the embodiment adopt chip capacitors (eg ceramic chip capacitors), which are arranged on the lamp board or the circuit board in the lamp holder. However, the chip capacitors set in this way will emit obvious noise due to the piezoelectric effect during use, which affects the comfort of customers. In order to solve this problem, in the LED straight tube lamp of the present disclosure, a suitable hole or slot can be drilled directly under the chip capacitor, which can change the composition of the chip capacitor and the circuit board carrying the chip capacitor under the piezoelectric effect Vibration system so as to significantly reduce the noise emitted. The edge or perimeter of this hole or slot can be approximately circular, oval or rectangular in shape, for example, and is located in the conductive layer in the lamp board or in the circuit board in the lamp cap, below the chip capacitor.
请参见图11A，图11A是本申请第一实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图。整流电路610为桥式整流电路，包含第一整流二极管611、第二整流二极管612、第三整流二极管613及第四整流二极管614，用以对所接收的信号进行全波整流。第一整流二极管611的阳极耦接第二整流输出端512，阴极耦接第二接脚502。第二整流二极管612的阳极耦接第二整流输出端512，阴极耦接第一接脚501。第三整流二极管613的阳极耦接第二接脚502，阴极耦接第一整流输出端511。整流二极管614的阳极耦接第一接脚501，阴极耦接第一整流输出端511。Please refer to FIG. 11A . FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application. The rectifier circuit 610 is a bridge rectifier circuit, including a first rectifier diode 611 , a second rectifier diode 612 , a third rectifier diode 613 and a fourth rectifier diode 614 for full-wave rectification of the received signal. The anode of the first rectifier diode 611 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the second pin 502 . The anode of the second rectifier diode 612 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the first pin 501 . The anode of the third rectifier diode 613 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 . The anode of the rectifier diode 614 is coupled to the first pin 501 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
当第一接脚501、第二接脚502接收的信号为交流信号时，整流电路610的操作描述如下。当交流信号处于正半波时，交流信号依序经第一接脚501、整流二极管614和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第一整流二极管611和第二接脚502后流出。当交流信号处于负半波时，交流信号依序经第二接脚502、第三整流二极管613和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第二整流二极管612和接脚501后流出。因此，不论交流信号处于正半波或负半波，整流电路610的整流后信号的正极均位于第一整流输出端511，负极均位于第二整流输出端512。依据上述操作说明，整流电路610输出的整流后信号为全波整流信号。When the signals received by the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are AC signals, the operation of the rectifier circuit 610 is described as follows. When the AC signal is in the positive half-wave, the AC signal flows through the first pin 501, the rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512, the first rectifier diode 611 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence. The second pin 502 flows out afterward. When the AC signal is in the negative half-wave, the AC signal flows through the second pin 502, the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier diode in sequence 612 and pin 501 flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal of the rectification circuit 610 is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 . According to the above operation description, the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit 610 is a full-wave rectified signal.
当第一接脚501、第二接脚502耦接直流电源而接收直流信号时，整流电路610的操作描述如下。当第一接脚501耦接直流电源的正端而第二接脚502耦接直流电源的负端时，直流信号依序经第一接脚501、整流二极管614和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第一整流二极管611和第二接脚502后流出。当第一接脚501耦接直流电源的负端而第二接脚502耦接直流电源的正端时，交流信号依序经第二接脚502、第三整流二极管613和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第二整流二极管612和第一接脚501后流出。同样地，不论直流信号如何透过第一接脚501、第二接脚502输入，整流电路610的整流后信号的正极均位于第一整流输出端511，负极均位于第二整流输出端512。When the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are coupled to a DC power source to receive a DC signal, the operation of the rectifier circuit 610 is described as follows. When the first pin 501 is coupled to the positive terminal of the DC power supply and the second pin 502 is coupled to the negative terminal of the DC power supply, the DC signal passes through the first pin 501 , the rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence. flows in, and flows out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 611 and the second pin 502 in sequence. When the first pin 501 is coupled to the negative end of the DC power supply and the second pin 502 is coupled to the positive end of the DC power supply, the AC signal passes through the second pin 502, the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal in sequence 511 flows in, and flows out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the second rectifier diode 612 and the first pin 501 in sequence. Likewise, no matter how the DC signal is input through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , the positive pole of the rectified signal of the rectifier circuit 610 is located at the first rectification output terminal 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output terminal 512 .
因此，在本实施例的整流电路610不论所接收的信号为交流信号或直流信号，均可正确输出整流后信号。Therefore, the rectifying circuit 610 in this embodiment can correctly output the rectified signal regardless of whether the received signal is an AC signal or a DC signal.
请参见图11B，图11B是本申请第二实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图。整流电路710包含第一整流二极管711及第二整流二极管712，用以对所接收的信号进行半波整流。第一整流二极管711的阳极耦接第二接脚502，阴极耦接第一整流输出端511。第二整流二极管712的阳极耦接第一整流输出端511，阴极耦接第一接脚501。第二整流输出端512视实际应用而可以省略或者接地。Please refer to FIG. 11B . FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. The rectifier circuit 710 includes a first rectifier diode 711 and a second rectifier diode 712 for half-wave rectification of the received signal. The anode of the first rectifier diode 711 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 . The anode of the second rectifier diode 712 is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 , and the cathode is coupled to the first pin 501 . The second rectified output terminal 512 may be omitted or grounded according to practical applications.
接着说明整流电路710的操作如下。Next, the operation of the rectifier circuit 710 will be described as follows.
当交流信号处于正半波时，交流信号在第一接脚501输入的信号电平高于在第二接脚502输入的信号电平。此时，第一整流二极管711及第二整流二极管712均处于逆偏的截止状态，整流电路710停止输出整流后信号。当交流信号处于负半波时，交流信号在第一接脚501输入的信号电平低于在第二接脚502输入的信号电平。此时，第一整流二极管711及第二整流二极管712均处于顺偏的导通状态，交流信号经由第一整流二极管711、第一整流输出端511而流入，并由第二整流输出端512或LED灯的另一电路或接地端流出。依据上述操作说明，整流电路710输出的整流后信号为半波整流信号。When the AC signal is in the positive half-wave, the signal level of the AC signal input at the first pin 501 is higher than the signal level input at the second pin 502 . At this time, both the first rectifier diode 711 and the second rectifier diode 712 are in a reverse-biased off state, and the rectifier circuit 710 stops outputting the rectified signal. When the AC signal is in the negative half-wave, the signal level of the AC signal input at the first pin 501 is lower than the signal level input at the second pin 502 . At this time, the first rectifier diode 711 and the second rectifier diode 712 are both in the forward-biased conduction state, and the AC signal flows in through the first rectifier diode 711 and the first rectifier output terminal 511, and is transmitted by the second rectifier output terminal 512 or the first rectifier output terminal 511. Another circuit or ground of the LED light flows out. According to the above operation description, the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit 710 is a half-wave rectified signal.
其中，图11A与图11B所示的整流电路的第一接脚501及第二接脚502变更为第三接脚503及第四接脚504时，即可作为图9B所示的第二整流电路540。更具体的说，在一范例实施例中，将图11A所示的全波/全桥整流电路610应用在图9B的双端输入的灯管时，第一整流电路510与第二整流电路540的配置可如图11C所示。Wherein, when the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 of the rectifier circuit shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B are changed to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504, they can be used as the second rectifier shown in FIG. 9B . circuit 540. More specifically, in an exemplary embodiment, when the full-wave/full-bridge rectifier circuit 610 shown in FIG. 11A is applied to the double-terminal input lamp of FIG. 9B , the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second rectifier circuit 540 The configuration can be shown in Figure 11C.
请参见图11C，图11C是本申请第三实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图。整流电路840的架构与整流电路810的架构相同，皆为桥式整流电路。整流电路810包括第一至第四整流二极管611-614，其配置如前述图11A实施例所述。整流电路840包含第五整流二极管641、第六整流二极管642、第七整流二极管643及第八整流二极管644，用以对所接收的信号进行 全波整流。第五整流二极管641的阳极耦接第二整流输出端512，阴极耦接第四接脚504。第六整流二极管642的阳极耦接第二整流输出端512，阴极耦接第三接脚503。第七整流二极管643的阳极耦接第二接脚502，阴极耦接第一整流输出端511。整流二极管614的阳极耦接第三接脚503，阴极耦接第一整流输出端511。Please refer to FIG. 11C . FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application. The structure of the rectifier circuit 840 is the same as that of the rectifier circuit 810, and both are bridge rectifier circuits. The rectifier circuit 810 includes the first to fourth rectifier diodes 611-614, the configurations of which are as described in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 11A . The rectifier circuit 840 includes a fifth rectifier diode 641 , a sixth rectifier diode 642 , a seventh rectifier diode 643 and an eighth rectifier diode 644 for full-wave rectification of the received signal. The anode of the fifth rectifier diode 641 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the fourth pin 504 . The anode of the sixth rectifier diode 642 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the third pin 503 . The anode of the seventh rectifier diode 643 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 . The anode of the rectifier diode 614 is coupled to the third pin 503 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 .
在本实施例中，整流电路840与810是对应的配置，两者差异仅在于整流电路810(在此可比对为图9B的第一整流电路510)的输入端是耦接第一接脚501与第二接脚502，而整流电路840(在此可比对为图9B的第二整流电路540)的输入端是耦接第三接脚503与第四接脚504。换言之，本实施例是采用两个全波整流电路的架构来实现双端双接脚的电路结构。In this embodiment, the rectifier circuits 840 and 810 have corresponding configurations, and the only difference between the two is that the input end of the rectifier circuit 810 (here can be compared to the first rectifier circuit 510 in FIG. 9B ) is coupled to the first pin 501 With the second pin 502 , the input end of the rectifier circuit 840 (here can be compared to the second rectifier circuit 540 in FIG. 9B ) is coupled to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 . In other words, the present embodiment adopts the structure of two full-wave rectifier circuits to realize the circuit structure of double terminals and double pins.
更进一步的说，在图10C实施例的整流电路中，虽然是以双端双接脚的配置来实现，但除了双端双接脚进电的供电方式外，无论是单端进电或是双端单接脚的进电方式都可以透过本实施例的电路结构来对LED直管灯进行供电。具体运作说明如下：Furthermore, in the rectifier circuit of the embodiment of FIG. 10C , although it is implemented in the configuration of double-ended double-pin, in addition to the power supply mode of double-ended double-pin feeding, whether it is single-ended feeding or The power supply mode of the double-ended single-pin can be used to supply power to the LED straight tube lamp through the circuit structure of this embodiment. The specific operation instructions are as follows:
在单端进电的情况下，外部驱动信号可施加于第一接脚501与第二接脚502上，或是施加于第三接脚503与第四接脚504上。在外部驱动信号施加于第一接脚501与第二接脚502上时，整流电路810会依据图9A实施例所述的运作方式对外部驱动信号进行全波整流，而整流电路840则不会运作。相反地，在外部驱动信号施加于第三接脚503与第四接脚504上时，整流电路840会依据图9A实施例所述的运作方式对外部驱动信号进行全波整流，而整流电路810则不会运作。In the case of single-ended power feeding, the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , or applied to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 . When the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502, the rectifier circuit 810 will perform full-wave rectification on the external driving signal according to the operation method described in the embodiment of FIG. 9A, while the rectifier circuit 840 will not operate. On the contrary, when the external drive signal is applied to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504, the rectifier circuit 840 will perform full-wave rectification on the external drive signal according to the operation method described in the embodiment of FIG. 9A, and the rectifier circuit 810 will not work.
在双端单接脚进电的情况下，外部驱动信号可施加于第一接脚501与第四接脚504，或是施加于第二接脚502与第三接脚503。在外部驱动信号施加于第一接脚501与第四接脚504，且外部驱动信号为交流信号时，在交流信号处于正半波的期间，交流信号依序经第一接脚501、第四整流二极管614和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第五整流二极管641和第四接脚504后流出。在交流信号处于负半波的期间，交流信号依序经第四接脚504、第七整流二极管643和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第二整流二极管612和第一接脚501后流出。因此，不论交流信号处于正半波或负半波，整流后信号的阳极均位于第一整流输出端511，负极均位于第二整流输出端512。依据上述操作说明，整流电路810中的第二整流二极管612与第四整流二极管614搭配整流电路840中的第五整流二极管641与第七整流二极管643对交流信号进行全波整流，并且输出的整流后信号为全波整流信号。In the case of double-ended single-pin power supply, the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the fourth pin 504 , or applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 . When the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the fourth pin 504 and the external driving signal is an AC signal, during the period of the positive half-wave of the AC signal, the AC signal passes through the first pin 501 and the fourth pin in sequence. The rectifier diode 614 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 flow in and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the fifth rectifier diode 641 and the fourth pin 504 in sequence. During the period when the AC signal is in the negative half-wave, the AC signal flows through the fourth pin 504 , the seventh rectifier diode 643 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence. The diode 612 and the first pin 501 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the anode of the rectified signal is located at the first rectified output end 511 , and the negative electrode is located at the second rectified output end 512 . According to the above operation description, the second rectifier diode 612 and the fourth rectifier diode 614 in the rectifier circuit 810 cooperate with the fifth rectifier diode 641 and the seventh rectifier diode 643 in the rectifier circuit 840 to perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectifier The rear signal is a full-wave rectified signal.
另一方面，在外部驱动信号施加于第二接脚502与第三接脚503，且外部驱动信号为交流信号时，在交流信号处于正半波的期间，交流信号依序经第三接脚503、第八整流二极管644和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第一整流二极管611和第二接脚502后流出。在交流信号处于负半波的期间，交流信号依序经第二接脚502、第三整 流二极管613和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第六整流二极管642和第三接脚503后流出。因此，不论交流信号处于正半波或负半波，整流后信号的正极均位于第一整流输出端511，负极均位于第二整流输出端512。依据上述操作说明，整流电路810中的第一整流二极管611与第三整流二极管613搭配整流电路840中的第六整流二极管642与第八整流二极管644对交流信号进行全波整流，并且输出的整流后信号为全波整流信号。On the other hand, when the external driving signal is applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal, during the period of the positive half-wave of the AC signal, the AC signal passes through the third pin in sequence. 503 , the eighth rectifier diode 644 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 then flow in, and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 611 and the second pin 502 in sequence. During the period when the AC signal is in the negative half-wave, the AC signal flows through the second pin 502 , the third rectifier diode 613 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then passes through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the sixth rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence. The diode 642 and the third pin 503 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 . According to the above operation description, the first rectifier diode 611 and the third rectifier diode 613 in the rectifier circuit 810 cooperate with the sixth rectifier diode 642 and the eighth rectifier diode 644 in the rectifier circuit 840 to perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectifier The rear signal is a full-wave rectified signal.
在双端双接脚进电的情况下，整流电路810与840个别的运作可参照上述图11A实施例的说明，于此不再赘述。其中，整流电路810与840所产生的整流后信号会在第一整流输出端511与第二整流输出端512叠加后输出给后端的电路。In the case of two-terminal two-pin power supply, the individual operations of the rectifier circuits 810 and 840 can be referred to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 11A , which will not be repeated here. The rectified signals generated by the rectification circuits 810 and 840 are superimposed on the first rectified output terminal 511 and the second rectified output terminal 512 and then output to the back-end circuit.
在一范例实施例中，整流电路510的配置可如图11D所示。请参见图11D，图11D是本申请第四实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图。整流电路910包括第一至第四整流二极管911-914，其配置如前述图11A实施例所述。在本实施例中，整流电路910更包括第五整流二极管915及第六整流二极管916。第五整流二极管915的阳极耦接第二整流输出端512，阴极耦接第三接脚503。第六整流二极管916的阳极耦接第三接脚503，阴极耦接第一整流输出端511。第四接脚504于此为浮接状态。In an exemplary embodiment, the configuration of the rectifier circuit 510 may be as shown in FIG. 11D . Please refer to FIG. 11D . FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. The rectifier circuit 910 includes first to fourth rectifier diodes 911-914, the configurations of which are as described in the foregoing embodiment of FIG. 11A. In this embodiment, the rectifier circuit 910 further includes a fifth rectifier diode 915 and a sixth rectifier diode 916 . The anode of the fifth rectifier diode 915 is coupled to the second rectifier output terminal 512 , and the cathode is coupled to the third pin 503 . The anode of the sixth rectifier diode 916 is coupled to the third pin 503 , and the cathode is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 . The fourth pin 504 is in a floating state here.
更具体的说，本实施例的整流电路510可视为有三组桥臂(bridge arm)单元的整流电路，每组桥臂单元可提供一个输入信号接收端。举例来说，第一整流二极管911与第三整流二极管913组成第一桥臂单元，其对应接收第二接脚502上的信号；第二整流二极管912与第四整流二极管914组成第二桥臂单元，其对应接收第一接脚501上的信号；以及第五整流二极管915与第六整流二极管916组成第三桥臂单元，其对应接收第三接脚503上的信号。其中，三组桥臂单元只要其中两个接收到极性相反的交流信号就可以进行全波整流。基此，在图11D实施例的整流电路的配置下，同样可兼容单端进电、双端单接脚进电以及双端双接脚进电的供电方式。具体运作说明如下：More specifically, the rectifier circuit 510 of this embodiment can be regarded as a rectifier circuit having three groups of bridge arm units, and each group of bridge arm units can provide an input signal receiving end. For example, the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 form the first bridge arm unit, which correspondingly receives the signal on the second pin 502; the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 form the second bridge arm The fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 form a third bridge arm unit corresponding to receive the signal on the third pin 503 . Among them, as long as two of the three groups of bridge arm units receive AC signals with opposite polarities, full-wave rectification can be performed. Based on this, under the configuration of the rectifier circuit in the embodiment of FIG. 11D , the power supply modes of single-ended power feeding, double-ended single-pin power feeding, and double-ended double-pin power feeding are also compatible. The specific operation instructions are as follows:
在单端进电的情况下，外部驱动信号施加于第一接脚501与第二接脚502上，此时第一至第四整流二极管911-914的运作如前述图11A实施例所述，而第五整流二极管915与第六整流二极管916不运作。In the case of single-ended power feeding, the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502. At this time, the operations of the first to fourth rectifier diodes 911-914 are as described in the embodiment of FIG. 11A. The fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 do not operate.
在双端单接脚进电的情况下，外部驱动信号可施加于第一接脚501与第三接脚503，或是施加于第二接脚502与第三接脚503。在外部驱动信号施加于第一接脚501与第三接脚503，且外部驱动信号为交流信号时，在交流信号处于正半波的期间，交流信号依序经第一接脚501、第四整流二极管914和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第五整流二极管915和第三接脚503后流出。在交流信号处于负半波的期间，交流信号依序经第三接脚503、第六整流二极管916和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、 第二整流二极管912和第一接脚501后流出。因此，不论交流信号处于正半波或负半波，整流后信号的正极均位于第一整流输出端511，负极均位于第二整流输出端512。依据上述操作说明，整流电路910中的第二整流二极管912、第四整流二极管914、第五整流二极管915与第六整流二极管916对交流信号进行全波整流，并且输出的整流后信号为全波整流信号。In the case of double-ended single-pin power supply, the external driving signal can be applied to the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 , or applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 . When the external driving signal is applied to the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal, during the period of the positive half-wave of the AC signal, the AC signal passes through the first pin 501 and the fourth pin in sequence. The rectifier diode 914 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 flow in and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the third pin 503 in sequence. During the period when the AC signal is in the negative half-wave, the AC signal flows through the third pin 503 , the sixth rectifier diode 916 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then flows through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence. The diode 912 and the first pin 501 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 . According to the above operation description, the second rectifier diode 912 , the fourth rectifier diode 914 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 in the rectifier circuit 910 perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectified signal is full-wave rectified signal.
另一方面，在外部驱动信号施加于第二接脚502与第三接脚503，且外部驱动信号为交流信号时，在交流信号处于正半波的期间，交流信号依序经第三接脚503、第六整流二极管916和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第一整流二极管911和第二接脚502后流出。在交流信号处于负半波的期间，交流信号依序经第二接脚502、第三整流二极管913和第一整流输出端511后流入，并依序经第二整流输出端512、第五整流二极管915和第三接脚503后流出。因此，不论交流信号处于正半波或负半波，整流后信号的正极均位于第一整流输出端511，负极均位于第二整流输出端512。依据上述操作说明，整流电路910中的第一整流二极管911、第三整流二极管913、第五整流二极管915及第六整流二极管916对交流信号进行全波整流，并且输出的整流后信号为全波整流信号。On the other hand, when the external driving signal is applied to the second pin 502 and the third pin 503 and the external driving signal is an AC signal, during the period of the positive half-wave of the AC signal, the AC signal passes through the third pin in sequence. 503 , the sixth rectifier diode 916 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 then flow in, and then flow out through the second rectifier output terminal 512 , the first rectifier diode 911 and the second pin 502 in sequence. When the AC signal is in the negative half-wave period, the AC signal flows through the second pin 502 , the third rectifier diode 913 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 in sequence, and then passes through the second rectifier output terminal 512 and the fifth rectifier output terminal 512 in sequence. The diode 915 and the third pin 503 then flow out. Therefore, regardless of whether the AC signal is in the positive half-wave or the negative half-wave, the positive pole of the rectified signal is located at the first rectification output end 511 , and the negative pole is located at the second rectified output end 512 . According to the above operation description, the first rectifier diode 911 , the third rectifier diode 913 , the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 in the rectifier circuit 910 perform full-wave rectification on the AC signal, and the output rectified signal is full-wave rectified signal.
在双端双接脚进电的情况下，第一至第四整流二极管911～914的运作可参照上述图11A实施例的说明，于此不再赘述。此外，若第三接脚503的信号极性与第一接脚501相同，则第五整流二极管915与第六整流二极管916的运作类似于第二整流二极管912与第四整流二极管914(即，第一桥臂单元)。另一方面，若第三接脚503的信号极性与第二接脚502相同，则第五整流二极管915与第六整流二极管916的运作类似于第一整流二极管911与第三整流二极管913(即，第二桥臂单元)。In the case of two-terminal two-pin power supply, the operations of the first to fourth rectifier diodes 911 - 914 can be referred to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 11A , which will not be repeated here. In addition, if the signal polarity of the third pin 503 is the same as that of the first pin 501, the operation of the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 is similar to that of the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 (ie, first bridge arm unit). On the other hand, if the signal polarity of the third pin 503 is the same as that of the second pin 502, the operation of the fifth rectifier diode 915 and the sixth rectifier diode 916 is similar to that of the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 ( That is, the second bridge arm unit).
请参见图11E，图11E是本申请第五实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图。图11E与图11D大致相同，两者差异在于图11E的第一整流电路910的输入端更耦接端点转换电路941。其中，本实施例的端点转换电路941包括保险丝947与948。保险丝947一端耦接第一接脚501，另一端耦接至第二整流二极管912与第四整流二极管914的共节点(即，第一桥臂单元的输入端)。保险丝948一端耦接第二接脚502，另一端耦接至第一整流二极管911与第三整流二极管913的共节点(即，第二桥臂单元的输入端)。藉此，当第一接脚501及第二接脚502任一流经的电流高于保险丝947及948的额定电流时，保险丝947及948就会对应地熔断而开路，藉此达到过流保护的功能。除此之外，在保险丝947及948仅有其中之一熔断的情况下(例如过流情形仅发生短暂时间即消除)，本实施例的整流电路还可在过流情形消除后，继续基于双端单接脚的供电模式而持续运作。Please refer to FIG. 11E . FIG. 11E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application. FIG. 11E is substantially the same as FIG. 11D , the difference between the two is that the input end of the first rectifier circuit 910 in FIG. 11E is further coupled to the terminal conversion circuit 941 . The endpoint conversion circuit 941 of this embodiment includes fuses 947 and 948 . One end of the fuse 947 is coupled to the first pin 501 , and the other end is coupled to the common node of the second rectifier diode 912 and the fourth rectifier diode 914 (ie, the input end of the first bridge arm unit). One end of the fuse 948 is coupled to the second pin 502 , and the other end is coupled to the common node of the first rectifier diode 911 and the third rectifier diode 913 (ie, the input end of the second bridge arm unit). Therefore, when the current flowing through any one of the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 is higher than the rated current of the fuses 947 and 948, the fuses 947 and 948 will be blown and open accordingly, thereby achieving the overcurrent protection. Function. In addition, in the case where only one of the fuses 947 and 948 is blown (for example, the overcurrent condition is eliminated after only a short time), the rectifier circuit of this embodiment can continue to be based on the dual It continues to operate in the power supply mode of a single pin.
请参见图11F，图11F是本申请第六实施例的整流电路的电路架构示意图。图11F与图11D大致相同，两者差异在于图11F的两个接脚503与504通过细导线917连接在一起。相较于前述图11D或11E实施例而言，当采用双端单接脚进电时，不论外部驱动信号是施加在第三接脚503或第四接脚504，本实施例的整流电路皆可正常运作。此外，当第三接脚503 与第四接脚504错误接入单端进电的灯座时，本实施例的细导线917可以可靠地熔断，因此在灯管插回正确灯座时，应用此整流电路的直管灯仍能维持正常的整流工作。Please refer to FIG. 11F . FIG. 11F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the rectifier circuit according to the sixth embodiment of the present application. FIG. 11F is substantially the same as FIG. 11D , the difference between the two is that the two pins 503 and 504 in FIG. 11F are connected together by thin wires 917 . Compared with the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 11D or 11E, when the double-ended single-pin is used for power supply, no matter whether the external driving signal is applied to the third pin 503 or the fourth pin 504, the rectifier circuit of this embodiment is all the same. Works normally. In addition, when the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 are mistakenly connected to the lamp socket with single-ended power supply, the thin wire 917 of this embodiment can be reliably blown. Therefore, when the lamp tube is inserted into the correct lamp socket, the The straight tube lamp of this rectification circuit can still maintain normal rectification work.
由上述可知，图11C至图11F实施例的整流电路可以兼容单端进电、双端单接脚进电以及双端双接脚进电的情境，进而提高整体LED直管灯的应用环境兼容性。除此之外，考虑到实际电路布局情形来看，图11D至11F的实施例在灯管内部的电路配置仅需设置三个焊盘来连接至对应的灯头接脚，对于整体制程良率的提升有显着的贡献。It can be seen from the above that the rectifier circuits of the embodiments of FIGS. 11C to 11F can be compatible with the scenarios of single-ended power feeding, double-ended single-pin power feeding, and double-ended double-pin power feeding, thereby improving the compatibility of the application environment of the overall LED straight tube lamp. sex. In addition, considering the actual circuit layout, the circuit configuration inside the lamp tube in the embodiment of FIGS. 11D to 11F only needs to set three pads to connect to the corresponding lamp head pins. Enhancement has a significant contribution.
请参见图12A，图12A是本申请第一实施例的滤波电路的电路方块示意图。图中绘出第一整流电路510仅用以表示连接关系，并非滤波电路520包含第一整流电路510。滤波电路520包含滤波单元523，耦接第一整流输出端511及第二整流输出端512，以接收整流电路所输出的整流后信号，并滤除整流后信号中的纹波后输出滤波后信号。因此，滤波后信号的波形较整流后信号的波形更平滑。滤波电路520也可更包含滤波单元524，耦接于整流电路及对应接脚之间，例如：第一整流电路510与第一接脚501、第一整流电路510与第二接脚502、第二整流电路540与第三接脚503及第二整流电路540与第四接脚504，用以对特定频率进行滤波，以滤除外部驱动信号的特定频率。在本实施例，滤波单元524耦接于第一接脚501与第一整流电路510之间。滤波电路520也可更包含滤波单元525，耦接于第一接脚501与第二接脚502其中之一与第一整流电路510其中之一的二极管之间或第三接脚503与第四接脚504其中之一与第二整流电路540其中之一的二极管，用以降低或滤除电磁干扰(EMI)。在本实施例，滤波单元525耦接于第一接脚501与第一整流电路510其中之一的二极管(未绘出)之间。Please refer to FIG. 12A . FIG. 12A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the filter circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application. The drawing of the first rectifier circuit 510 is only used to represent the connection relationship, and the filter circuit 520 does not include the first rectifier circuit 510 . The filter circuit 520 includes a filter unit 523, which is coupled to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to receive the rectified signal output by the rectification circuit, and to filter out the ripple in the rectified signal to output the filtered signal. . Therefore, the waveform of the filtered signal is smoother than that of the rectified signal. The filter circuit 520 may further include a filter unit 524, which is coupled between the rectifier circuit and the corresponding pins, for example, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the first pin 501, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the second pin 502, the first rectifier circuit 510 and the first pin 501, The two rectifier circuits 540 and the third pin 503 and the second rectifier circuit 540 and the fourth pin 504 are used to filter specific frequencies to filter out specific frequencies of the external driving signal. In this embodiment, the filter unit 524 is coupled between the first pin 501 and the first rectifier circuit 510 . The filter circuit 520 may further include a filter unit 525, which is coupled between one of the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 and one of the diodes of the first rectifier circuit 510 or between the third pin 503 and the fourth connection. One of the pins 504 and one of the diodes of the second rectifier circuit 540 are used for reducing or filtering electromagnetic interference (EMI). In this embodiment, the filter unit 525 is coupled between the first pin 501 and a diode (not shown) of one of the first rectifier circuits 510 .
在一些实施例中，滤波电路520可更包括负压消除单元526。负压消除单元526耦接滤波单元523，其用以消除滤波单元523发生谐振时所可能产生的负压，进而避免后级的驱动电路中的芯片或控制器损毁。具体而言，滤波单元523本身通常是利用电阻、电容或电感的组合所形成的电路，其中由于电容和电感的特性会使滤波单元523在特定频率下，呈现纯电阻性质(即，谐振点)。在谐振点下滤波单元523接收的信号会被放大后输出，因此会在滤波单元523的输出端观察到信号振荡的现象。当振荡幅度过大以致于波谷电平低于接地电平时，滤波输出端521和522上会产生负压，此负压会被施加到后级的电路中，并且造成后级电路损毁的风险。负压消除单元528可在所述负压产生时导通一释能回路，藉以令负压所造成的逆向电流可通过释能回路释放并回到母线上，进而避免逆向电流流入后级电路。In some embodiments, the filter circuit 520 may further include a negative pressure elimination unit 526 . The negative pressure eliminating unit 526 is coupled to the filtering unit 523, and is used for eliminating the negative pressure that may be generated when the filtering unit 523 resonates, so as to avoid damage to the chip or the controller in the driving circuit of the subsequent stage. Specifically, the filtering unit 523 itself is usually a circuit formed by a combination of resistance, capacitance or inductance, wherein due to the characteristics of capacitance and inductance, the filtering unit 523 exhibits a purely resistance property (ie, the resonance point) at a specific frequency. . At the resonance point, the signal received by the filtering unit 523 will be amplified and output, so the phenomenon of signal oscillation may be observed at the output end of the filtering unit 523 . When the oscillation amplitude is so large that the trough level is lower than the ground level, a negative pressure will be generated on the filter output terminals 521 and 522, and the negative pressure will be applied to the circuit of the subsequent stage and cause the risk of damage to the subsequent stage circuit. The negative pressure eliminating unit 528 can conduct an energy release circuit when the negative pressure is generated, so that the reverse current caused by the negative pressure can be released through the energy release circuit and returned to the bus, thereby preventing the reverse current from flowing into the subsequent circuit.
由于滤波单元524和525以及负压消除单元526可视实际应用情况增加或省略，故图中以虚线表示之。Since the filtering units 524 and 525 and the negative pressure removing unit 526 may be added or omitted according to actual application conditions, they are represented by dotted lines in the figure.
请参见图12B，图12B是本申请第一实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图。滤波单元623包含一电容625。电容625的一端耦接第一整流输出端511及第一滤波输出端521，另一端耦 接第二整流输出端512及第二滤波输出端522，以对由第一整流输出端511及第二整流输出512输出的整流后信号进行低通滤波，以滤除整流后信号中的高频成分而形成滤波后信号，然后由第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522输出。Please refer to FIG. 12B . FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the first embodiment of the present application. The filter unit 623 includes a capacitor 625 . One end of the capacitor 625 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the first filter output end 521 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 , so that the first rectifier output end 511 and the second filter output end 522 are connected to each other. The rectified signal output by the rectified output 512 is subjected to low-pass filtering to filter out high frequency components in the rectified signal to form a filtered signal, which is then output from the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 .
请参见图12C，图12C是本申请第二实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图。滤波单元723为π型滤波电路，包含电容725、电感726以及电容727。电容725的一端耦接第一整流输出端511并同时经过电感726耦接第一滤波输出端521，另一端耦接第二整流输出端512及第二滤波输出端522。电感726耦接于第一整流输出端511及第一滤波输出端521之间。电容727的一端经过电感726耦接第一整流输出端511并同时耦接第一滤波输出端521，另一端耦接第二整流输出端512及第二滤波输出端522。Please refer to FIG. 12C. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the second embodiment of the present application. The filter unit 723 is a π-type filter circuit, and includes a capacitor 725 , an inductor 726 and a capacitor 727 . One end of the capacitor 725 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and is coupled to the first filter output end 521 through the inductor 726 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 . The inductor 726 is coupled between the first rectifying output terminal 511 and the first filtering output terminal 521 . One end of the capacitor 727 is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511 and the first filter output end 521 through the inductor 726 , and the other end is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512 and the second filter output end 522 .
等效上来看，滤波单元723较图12B所示的滤波单元623多了电感726及电容727。而且电感726与电容727也同电容725般，具有低通滤波作用。故，本实施例的滤波单元723相较于图12B所示的滤波单元623，具有更佳的高频滤除能力，所输出的滤波后信号的波形更为平滑。在一些实施例中，滤波单元723可更包括电感728，其中电感728串接在第二整流输出端512和第二滤波输出端522之间。上述实施例中的电感726和728的感值较佳为选自10nH-10mH的范围。电容625、725、727的容值较佳为选自100pF-1uF的范围。Equivalently, the filter unit 723 has more inductors 726 and capacitors 727 than the filter unit 623 shown in FIG. 12B . Also, like the capacitor 725, the inductor 726 and the capacitor 727 have low-pass filtering functions. Therefore, compared with the filtering unit 623 shown in FIG. 12B , the filtering unit 723 of this embodiment has better high-frequency filtering capability, and the waveform of the output filtered signal is smoother. In some embodiments, the filtering unit 723 may further include an inductor 728 , wherein the inductor 728 is connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 . The inductance values of the inductors 726 and 728 in the above embodiment are preferably selected from the range of 10nH-10mH. The capacitances of the capacitors 625, 725 and 727 are preferably selected from the range of 100pF-1uF.
请参见图12D，图12D是本申请第三实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图。本实施例与图12C大致相同，其差异在于本实施例的滤波单元823除了电感826及电容825和827之外，更包括压控组件BDs1。压控组件BDs1与电感826并联，并且响应于电感826两端的电压差而导通或截止，其中压控组件BDs1仅会在电感两端的电压差大于一设定值(此值根据压控组件BDs1的组件参数决定)时导通。通过所述压控组件BDs1的设置，当电源模块受到浪涌影响而在电感826两端激发出瞬间的电压变化时，压控组件BDs1可以即时响应瞬间过电压而即时导通以吸收此突然增加的电能，进而避免浪涌电流造成后级电路的损毁。在图12D中，压控组件BDs1是绘示为双向触发二极管为例(或称放电管)为例，但本揭露不以此为限。Please refer to FIG. 12D. FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12C , the difference is that the filter unit 823 of this embodiment further includes a voltage control element BDs1 in addition to the inductor 826 and the capacitors 825 and 827 . The voltage control element BDs1 is connected in parallel with the inductor 826, and is turned on or off in response to the voltage difference across the inductor 826, wherein the voltage control element BDs1 only has a voltage difference between the two ends of the inductor greater than a set value (this value is based on the voltage control element BDs1). determined by the component parameters) is turned on. Through the setting of the voltage control component BDs1, when the power module is affected by a surge and an instantaneous voltage change is excited at both ends of the inductor 826, the voltage control component BDs1 can be instantly turned on in response to the instantaneous overvoltage to absorb the sudden increase to avoid the damage of the post-stage circuit caused by the surge current. In FIG. 12D , the voltage control device BDs1 is shown as a bidirectional trigger diode (or a discharge tube) as an example, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
在一些实施例中，滤波单元823也可增设串接在第二整流输出端512和第二滤波输出端522之间的电感(如图12C的电感728)。在此配置底下，滤波单元823还可包括有与新增的电感并联配置的压控组件(未绘示)，藉以避免浪涌电流造成后级电路损毁。其中，增设的电感和压控组件之间的连接关系可参考电感826和压控组件BDs1之间的连接关系。In some embodiments, the filtering unit 823 may also add an inductor (eg, the inductor 728 in FIG. 12C ) connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 . Under this configuration, the filter unit 823 may further include a voltage control element (not shown) arranged in parallel with the newly added inductor, so as to prevent the subsequent circuit from being damaged due to surge current. The connection relationship between the added inductor and the voltage control component may refer to the connection relationship between the inductor 826 and the voltage control component BDs1.
请参见图12E，图12E是本申请第三实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图。本实施例与图12D大致相同，其差异在于本实施例的滤波单元923除了电感926、电容925和927及压控组件BDs1之外，更包括阻流组件Ds1。阻流组件Ds1和压控组件BDs1串联，用以限制压控组件BDs1，以使压控组件BDs1仅能在特定状态下导通。具体而言，在仅设置有压控组件BDs1的配置下(如图12D)，不论是电感826的第一端(即，与第一整流输出端511相连的一 端)的电压大于第二端(即，与第一滤波输出端521相连的一端)的电压超过设定值(底下称第一状态)，或是电感826的第二端的电压大于第一端的电压超过设定值(底下称第二状态)，都会使压控组件BDs1进入导通状态。在同时设置有压控组件BDs1和阻流组件Ds1的配置下(如图12E)，当第一状态发生时，限流组件Ds1会处于断开的状态，使得压控组件BDs1和限流组件Ds1相连的一端处于浮接状态(或视为与电感926的第二端电性分离)，因此压控组件BDs1无法响应第一状态的发生而导通；当第二状态发生时，限流组件Ds1会处于导通的状态，使得压控组件BDs1和限流组件Ds1相连的一端等效为与电感926的第二端电性连接，进而令压控组件BDs1响应第二状态的发生而导通，以泄放/消耗浪涌能量。Please refer to FIG. 12E. FIG. 12E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12D , the difference is that the filter unit 923 of this embodiment further includes a blocking element Ds1 in addition to the inductor 926 , capacitors 925 and 927 , and the voltage control element BDs1 . The blocking component Ds1 and the voltage control component BDs1 are connected in series to limit the voltage control component BDs1, so that the voltage control component BDs1 can only be turned on in a specific state. Specifically, in the configuration where only the voltage control component BDs1 is provided (as shown in FIG. 12D ), the voltage of the first end (ie, the end connected to the first rectifier output end 511 ) of the inductor 826 is greater than that of the second end ( That is, the voltage at the end connected to the first filter output end 521 exceeds the set value (hereinafter referred to as the first state), or the voltage at the second end of the inductor 826 is greater than the voltage at the first end and exceeds the set value (hereinafter referred to as the first state) two states), will make the voltage control component BDs1 enter the conducting state. In the configuration where the voltage control component BDs1 and the blocking component Ds1 are provided at the same time (as shown in FIG. 12E ), when the first state occurs, the current limiting component Ds1 will be in a disconnected state, so that the voltage control component BDs1 and the current limiting component Ds1 The connected end is in a floating state (or regarded as being electrically separated from the second end of the inductor 926 ), so the voltage control component BDs1 cannot be turned on in response to the occurrence of the first state; when the second state occurs, the current limiting component Ds1 will be in a conducting state, so that the end connected to the voltage control component BDs1 and the current limiting component Ds1 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926, so that the voltage control component BDs1 is turned on in response to the occurrence of the second state, To discharge/dissipate surge energy.
在一些实施例中，限流组件Ds1可以使用二极管来实施(以下以二极管Ds1来描述)。二极管Ds1的阳极电性连接电感926的第二端，并且二极管Ds1的阴极电性连接压控组件BDs1。在此配置底下，当第一状态发生时，二极管Ds1处于逆偏状态(reverse bias)，因此二极管Ds1会维持截止以令压控组件BDs1的一端浮接；当第二状态发生时，二极管Ds1处于顺偏状态(forward bias)，因此二极管Ds1会导通以令压控组件BDs1的一端电性连接至电感926的第二端。In some embodiments, the current limiting component Ds1 may be implemented using a diode (described below as a diode Ds1 ). The anode of the diode Ds1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926, and the cathode of the diode Ds1 is electrically connected to the voltage control device BDs1. Under this configuration, when the first state occurs, the diode Ds1 is in a reverse bias state, so the diode Ds1 is kept off to make one end of the voltage control device BDs1 float; when the second state occurs, the diode Ds1 is in a reverse bias state. In a forward bias state, the diode Ds1 is turned on so that one end of the voltage control device BDs1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 926 .
在一些实施例中，滤波单元923也可增设串接在第二整流输出端512和第二滤波输出端522之间的电感(如图12C的电感728)。在此配置底下，滤波单元823还可包括有与新增的电感并联配置的压控组件(未绘示)和限流组件(未绘示)，藉以避免浪涌电流造成后级电路损毁。其中，增设的电感、压控组件以及限流组件之间的连接关系可参考电感926、压控组件BDs1以及限流组件Ds1之间的连接关系。In some embodiments, the filtering unit 923 may also add an inductor (eg, the inductor 728 in FIG. 12C ) connected in series between the second rectifying output terminal 512 and the second filtering output terminal 522 . Under this configuration, the filter unit 823 may further include a voltage control element (not shown) and a current limiting element (not shown) arranged in parallel with the newly added inductor, so as to prevent the subsequent circuit from being damaged due to surge current. The connection relationship between the added inductor, the voltage control component, and the current limiting component may refer to the connection relationship among the inductor 926 , the voltage control component BDs1 , and the current limiting component Ds1 .
请参见图12F，图12F是本申请第三实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图。滤波单元624包含一电感626。电感626的第一端耦接第一接脚501，并且电感626的第二端耦接整流电路610的第一整流输入端，以对由第一接脚501输入的信号进行低通滤波，以滤除电源信号中的高频成分再提供给整流电路610。Please refer to FIG. 12F. FIG. 12F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application. The filter unit 624 includes an inductor 626 . The first end of the inductor 626 is coupled to the first pin 501 , and the second end of the inductor 626 is coupled to the first rectification input end of the rectifier circuit 610 , so as to perform low-pass filtering on the signal input from the first pin 501 to The high frequency components in the power signal are filtered out and then supplied to the rectifier circuit 610 .
请参见图12G，图12G是本申请第三实施例的滤波单元的电路架构示意图。本实施例与图12F大致相同，其差异在于本实施例的滤波单元724除了电感626之外，更包括压控组件BDs2和阻流组件Ds2。压控组件BDs2和阻流组件Ds2串联。压控组件BDs2的第一端电性连接电感626的第一端，压控组件BDs2的第二端电性连接阻流组件Ds2的第二端，并且阻流组件Ds2的第一端电性连接电感626的第二端。在本实施例中，当第一状态发生时，限流组件Ds2会处于断开的状态，使得压控组件BDs2和限流组件Ds2相连的一端处于浮接状态(或视为与电感626的第二端电性分离)，因此压控组件BDs2无法响应第一状态的发生而导通；当第二状态发生时，限流组件Ds2会处于导通的状态，使得压控组件BDs2和限流组件Ds2相连的一端等效为与电感626的第二端电性连接，进而令压控组件BDs2响应第二状态的发生而导通，以泄放/消耗浪涌能量。Please refer to FIG. 12G. FIG. 12G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the filtering unit according to the third embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is substantially the same as FIG. 12F , the difference is that the filter unit 724 of this embodiment further includes a voltage control element BDs2 and a blocking element Ds2 in addition to the inductor 626 . The voltage control component BDs2 and the blocking component Ds2 are connected in series. The first end of the voltage control element BDs2 is electrically connected to the first end of the inductor 626 , the second end of the voltage control element BDs2 is electrically connected to the second end of the choke element Ds2 , and the first end of the choke element Ds2 is electrically connected The second end of the inductor 626 . In this embodiment, when the first state occurs, the current limiting component Ds2 will be in a disconnected state, so that the end connected to the voltage control component BDs2 and the current limiting component Ds2 is in a floating state (or regarded as the first connection with the inductor 626 ). The two terminals are electrically separated), so the voltage control component BDs2 cannot be turned on in response to the occurrence of the first state; when the second state occurs, the current limiting component Ds2 will be in a conducting state, so that the voltage control component BDs2 and the current limiting component One end connected to Ds2 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor 626 , so that the voltage control element BDs2 is turned on in response to the occurrence of the second state, so as to discharge/dissipate the surge energy.
请参见图12H，图12H是本申请一实施例的滤波单元及负压消除单元的电路架构示意图。在本实施例中，所述负压消除单元可以通过二极管728来实现，但本申请不仅限于此。在滤波单元723未发生谐振的情形下，第一滤波输出端521会相对第二滤波输出端522具有高电平，因此二极管728会被截止而不会有电流流通。在滤波单元723发生谐振并产生负压的情形下，第二滤波输出端522会相对第一滤波输出端521具有高电平，此时二极管728会受到顺向偏压而导通，使得逆向电流会被疏导回第一滤波输出端521。Please refer to FIG. 12H . FIG. 12H is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a filter unit and a negative pressure elimination unit according to an embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the negative pressure elimination unit may be implemented by the diode 728, but the present application is not limited to this. When the filter unit 723 does not resonate, the first filter output terminal 521 will have a high level relative to the second filter output terminal 522, so the diode 728 will be turned off and no current will flow. When the filter unit 723 resonates and generates a negative voltage, the second filter output terminal 522 will have a high level relative to the first filter output terminal 521, and at this time, the diode 728 will be forward biased and turned on, so that the reverse current is channeled back to the first filter output 521 .
请参见图13A，图13A是本申请第一实施例的驱动电路的电路方块示意图。驱动电路530包含控制器533及转换电路534，以电流源的模式进行电力转换，以驱动LED模块发光。转换电路534包含开关电路(也可称为功率开关)535以及储能电路536。转换电路534耦接第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522，接收滤波后信号，并根据控制器533的控制，转换成驱动信号而由第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532输出，以驱动LED模块。在控制器533的控制下，转换电路534所输出的驱动信号为稳定电流，而使LED模块稳定发光。Please refer to FIG. 13A . FIG. 13A is a schematic block diagram of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application. The driving circuit 530 includes a controller 533 and a conversion circuit 534, and performs power conversion in a current source mode to drive the LED module to emit light. The conversion circuit 534 includes a switch circuit (also referred to as a power switch) 535 and a tank circuit 536 . The conversion circuit 534 is coupled to the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522, receives the filtered signal, and converts it into a driving signal according to the control of the controller 533, and the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 output to drive the LED module. Under the control of the controller 533, the driving signal output by the conversion circuit 534 is a stable current, so that the LED module emits light stably.
底下搭配图14A至图14D的信号波形来进一步说明驱动电路530的运作。其中，图14A至图14D是本申请不同实施例的驱动电路的信号波形示意图。图14A与图14B是绘示驱动电路530操作在连续导通模式(Continuous-Conduction Mode，CCM)的信号波形与控制情境，并且图14C与图14D是绘示驱动电路530操作在不连续导通模式(Discontinuous-Conduction Mode，DCM)的信号波形与控制情境。在信号波形图中，横轴的t代表时间，纵轴则是代表电压或电流值(视信号类型而定)。The operation of the driving circuit 530 is further described below with reference to the signal waveforms of FIGS. 14A to 14D . 14A to 14D are schematic diagrams of signal waveforms of driving circuits according to different embodiments of the present application. FIGS. 14A and 14B illustrate the signal waveforms and control scenarios of the driving circuit 530 operating in a continuous conduction mode (CCM), and FIGS. 14C and 14D illustrate the driving circuit 530 operating in discontinuous conduction. Signal waveform and control situation of Discontinuous-Conduction Mode (DCM). In the signal waveform diagram, the horizontal axis t represents time, and the vertical axis represents the voltage or current value (depending on the signal type).
本实施例的控制器533会根据接收到的电流检测信号Sdet来调整所输出的点亮控制信号Slc的占空比(Duty Cycle)，使得开关电路535反应于点亮控制信号Slc而导通或截止。储能电路536会根据开关电路535导通/截止的状态而反复充/放能，进而令LED模块50接收到的驱动电流ILED可以被稳定地维持在一预设电流值Ipred上。点亮控制信号Slc会具有固定的信号周期Tlc与信号振幅，而每个信号周期Tlc内的脉冲使能期间(如Ton1、Ton2、Ton3，或称脉冲宽度)的长度则会根据控制需求而调整。其中，点亮控制信号Slc的占空比即是脉冲使能期间与信号周期Tlc的比例。举例来说，若脉冲使能期间Ton1为信号周期Tlc的40％，即表示点亮控制信号在第一个信号周期Tlc下的占空比为0.4。The controller 533 of this embodiment adjusts the duty cycle (Duty Cycle) of the output lighting control signal Slc according to the received current detection signal Sdet, so that the switch circuit 535 is turned on or turned on in response to the lighting control signal Slc deadline. The energy storage circuit 536 is repeatedly charged/discharged according to the on/off state of the switch circuit 535, so that the driving current ILED received by the LED module 50 can be stably maintained at a preset current value Ipred. The lighting control signal Slc will have a fixed signal period Tlc and signal amplitude, and the length of the pulse enable period (such as Ton1, Ton2, Ton3, or pulse width) in each signal period Tlc will be adjusted according to the control requirements . The duty ratio of the lighting control signal Slc is the ratio of the pulse enable period to the signal period Tlc. For example, if the pulse enable period Ton1 is 40% of the signal period Tlc, it means that the duty ratio of the lighting control signal in the first signal period Tlc is 0.4.
此外，所述电流检测信号Sdet可例如是代表流经LED模块50的电流大小的信号，或是代表流经开关电路535的电流大小的信号，本申请不以此为限。In addition, the current detection signal Sdet may be, for example, a signal representing the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , or a signal representing the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch circuit 535 , which is not limited in the present application.
请先同时参照图13A与图14A，图14A绘示在驱动电流ILED小于预设电流值Ipred的情况下，驱动电路530在多个信号周期Tlc下的信号波形变化。具体而言，在第一个信号周期Tlc中，开关电路535会反应于高电压准位的点亮控制信号Slc而在脉冲使能期间Ton1内导通。此时，转换电路534除了会根据从第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522接收到的 输入电源产生驱动电流ILED提供给LED模块50之外，还会经由导通的开关电路535对储能电路536充电，使得流经储能电路536的电流IL逐渐上升。换言之，在脉冲使能期间Ton1内，储能电路536会反应于从第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522接收到的输入电源而储能。Please refer to FIG. 13A and FIG. 14A at the same time. FIG. 14A shows the change of the signal waveform of the driving circuit 530 under a plurality of signal periods Tlc when the driving current ILED is less than the predetermined current value Ipred. Specifically, in the first signal period Tlc, the switch circuit 535 is turned on during the pulse enable period Ton1 in response to the high-voltage lighting control signal Slc. At this time, the conversion circuit 534 not only generates the driving current ILED according to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and provides the driving current ILED to the LED module 50 , but also provides the LED module 50 with the driving current ILED through the conductive switch circuit 535 . The tank circuit 536 is charged so that the current IL flowing through the tank circuit 536 gradually increases. In other words, during the pulse enable period Ton1, the energy storage circuit 536 stores energy in response to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522.
接着，在脉冲使能期间Ton1结束后，开关电路535会反应于低电压准位的点亮控制信号Slc截止。在开关电路535截止的期间内，第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522上的输入电源不会被提供至LED模块50，而是由储能电路536进行放电以产生驱动电流ILED提供给LED模块50，其中储能电路536会因为释放电能而使电流IL逐渐降低。因此，即使当点亮控制信号Slc位于低电压准位(即，禁能期间)时，驱动电路530还是会基于储能电路536的释能而持续供电给LED模块50。换言之，无论开关电路535导通与否，驱动电路530都会持续地提供稳定的驱动电流ILED给LED模块50，并且所述驱动电流ILED在第一个信号周期Tlc内电流值的约为I1。Next, after the pulse enable period Ton1 ends, the switch circuit 535 is turned off in response to the low voltage level of the lighting control signal Slc. During the period when the switch circuit 535 is turned off, the input power on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 will not be supplied to the LED module 50 , but will be discharged by the energy storage circuit 536 to generate the driving current ILED for supplying For the LED module 50, the tank circuit 536 will gradually reduce the current IL due to the release of electrical energy. Therefore, even when the lighting control signal Slc is at a low voltage level (ie, a disabled period), the driving circuit 530 will continue to supply power to the LED module 50 based on the energy release of the energy storage circuit 536 . In other words, regardless of whether the switch circuit 535 is turned on or not, the driving circuit 530 will continue to provide a stable driving current ILED to the LED module 50, and the driving current ILED is about I1 in the first signal period Tlc.
在第一个信号周期Tlc内，控制器533会根据电流检测信号Sdet判定驱动电流ILED的电流值I1小于预设电流值Ipred，因此在进入第二个信号周期Tlc时将点亮控制信号Slc的脉冲使能期间调整为Ton2，其中脉冲使能期间Ton2为脉冲使能期间Ton1加上单位期间Tu1。In the first signal period Tlc, the controller 533 determines that the current value I1 of the driving current ILED is smaller than the preset current value Ipred according to the current detection signal Sdet, so when the second signal period Tlc is entered, the control signal Slc will be turned on. The pulse enabling period is adjusted to Ton2, wherein the pulse enabling period Ton2 is the pulse enabling period Ton1 plus the unit period Tu1.
在第二个信号周期Tlc内，开关电路535与储能电路536的运作与前一信号周期Tlc类似。两者间的主要差异在于，由于脉冲使能期间Ton2较脉冲使能期间Ton1长，所以储能电路536会有更长的充电时间，并且放电时间亦相对较短，使得驱动电路530在第二个信号周期Tlc内所提供的驱动电流ILED的平均值会提高至更接近预设电流值Ipred的电流值I2。In the second signal period Tlc, the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the previous signal period Tlc. The main difference between the two is that since the pulse enable period Ton2 is longer than the pulse enable period Ton1, the energy storage circuit 536 has a longer charging time and a relatively short discharging time, so that the driving circuit 530 is in the second phase. The average value of the driving current ILED provided in each signal period Tlc increases to a current value I2 that is closer to the preset current value Ipred.
类似地，由于此时驱动电流ILED的电流值I2仍小于预设电流值Ipred，因此在第三个信号周期Tlc内，控制器533会进一步的将点亮控制信号Slc的脉冲使能期间调整为Ton3，其中脉冲使能期间Ton3为脉冲使能期间Ton2加上单位期间Tu1，等于脉冲使能期间Ton1加上期间Tu2(相当于两个单位期间Tu1)。在第三个信号周期Tlc内，开关电路535与储能电路536的运作与前两信号周期Tlc类似。由于脉冲使能期间Ton3更进一步延长，因此使得驱动电流ILED的电流值上升至I3，并且大致上达到预设电流值Ipred。其后，由于驱动电流ILED的电流值I3已达到预设电流值Ipred，因此控制器533会维持相同的占空比，使得驱动电流ILED可被持续维持在预设电流值Ipred。Similarly, since the current value I2 of the driving current ILED is still smaller than the preset current value Ipred at this time, in the third signal period Tlc, the controller 533 will further adjust the pulse enable period of the lighting control signal Slc to Ton3, wherein the pulse enable period Ton3 is the pulse enable period Ton2 plus the unit period Tu1, which is equal to the pulse enable period Ton1 plus the period Tu2 (equivalent to two unit periods Tu1). In the third signal period Tlc, the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the first two signal periods Tlc. Since the pulse enable period Ton3 is further extended, the current value of the driving current ILED increases to I3 and substantially reaches the preset current value Ipred. Thereafter, since the current value I3 of the driving current ILED has reached the predetermined current value Ipred, the controller 533 maintains the same duty cycle, so that the driving current ILED can be continuously maintained at the predetermined current value Ipred.
请再同时参照图13A与图14B，图14B绘示在驱动电流ILED大于预设电流值Ipred的情况下，驱动电路530在多个信号周期Tlc下的信号波形变化。具体而言，在第一个信号周期Tlc中，开关电路535会反应于高电压准位的点亮控制信号Slc而在脉冲使能期间Ton1内导通。此时，转换电路534除了会根据从第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522接收到的输入电源产生驱动电流ILED提供给LED模块50之外，还会经由导通的开关电路535对储能 电路536充电，使得流经储能电路536的电流IL逐渐上升。换言之，在脉冲使能期间Ton1内，储能电路536会反应于从第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522接收到的输入电源而储能。Please refer to FIG. 13A and FIG. 14B at the same time. FIG. 14B shows the signal waveform changes of the driving circuit 530 under a plurality of signal periods Tlc when the driving current ILED is greater than the predetermined current value Ipred. Specifically, in the first signal period Tlc, the switch circuit 535 is turned on during the pulse enable period Ton1 in response to the high-voltage lighting control signal Slc. At this time, the conversion circuit 534 not only generates the driving current ILED according to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and provides the driving current ILED to the LED module 50 , but also provides the LED module 50 with the driving current ILED through the conductive switch circuit 535 . The tank circuit 536 is charged so that the current IL flowing through the tank circuit 536 gradually increases. In other words, during the pulse enable period Ton1, the energy storage circuit 536 stores energy in response to the input power received from the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522.
接着，在脉冲使能期间Ton1结束后，开关电路535会反应于低电压准位的点亮控制信号Slc截止。在开关电路535截止的期间内，第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522上的输入电源不会被提供至LED模块50，而是由储能电路536进行放电以产生驱动电流ILED提供给LED模块50，其中储能电路536会因为释放电能而使电流IL逐渐降低。因此，即使当点亮控制信号Slc位于低电压准位(即，禁能期间)时，驱动电路530还是会基于储能电路536的释能而持续供电给LED模块50。换言之，无论开关电路535导通与否，驱动电路530都会持续地提供稳定的驱动电流ILED给LED模块50，并且所述驱动电流ILED在第一个信号周期Tlc内电流值的约为I4。Next, after the pulse enable period Ton1 ends, the switch circuit 535 is turned off in response to the low voltage level of the lighting control signal Slc. During the period when the switch circuit 535 is off, the input power on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 will not be supplied to the LED module 50, but will be discharged by the energy storage circuit 536 to generate the driving current ILED. For the LED module 50, the tank circuit 536 will gradually reduce the current IL due to the release of electrical energy. Therefore, even when the lighting control signal Slc is at a low voltage level (ie, a disabled period), the driving circuit 530 will continue to supply power to the LED module 50 based on the energy release of the energy storage circuit 536 . In other words, regardless of whether the switch circuit 535 is turned on or not, the driving circuit 530 will continue to provide a stable driving current ILED to the LED module 50, and the driving current ILED has a current value of about I4 in the first signal period Tlc.
在第一个信号周期Tlc内，控制器533会根据电流检测信号Sdet判定驱动电流ILED的电流值I4大于预设电流值Ipred，因此在进入第二个信号周期Tlc时将点亮控制信号Slc的脉冲使能期间调整为Ton2，其中脉冲使能期间Ton2为脉冲使能期间Ton1减去单位期间Tu1。In the first signal period Tlc, the controller 533 determines that the current value I4 of the driving current ILED is greater than the preset current value Ipred according to the current detection signal Sdet, so when the second signal period Tlc is entered, the control signal Slc will be turned on. The pulse enable period is adjusted to Ton2, wherein the pulse enable period Ton2 is the pulse enable period Ton1 minus the unit period Tu1.
在第二个信号周期Tlc内，开关电路535与储能电路536的运作与前一信号周期Tlc类似。两者间的主要差异在于，由于脉冲使能期间Ton2较脉冲使能期间Ton1短，所以储能电路536会有较短的充电时间，并且放电时间亦相对较长，使得驱动电路530在第二个信号周期Tlc内所提供的驱动电流ILED的平均值会降低至更接近预设电流值Ipred的电流值I5。In the second signal period Tlc, the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the previous signal period Tlc. The main difference between the two is that since the pulse enable period Ton2 is shorter than the pulse enable period Ton1, the energy storage circuit 536 has a shorter charging time and a relatively longer discharging time, so that the driving circuit 530 is in the second phase. The average value of the driving current ILED provided in each signal period Tlc is reduced to a current value I5 that is closer to the preset current value Ipred.
类似地，由于此时驱动电流ILED的电流值I5仍大于预设电流值Ipred，因此在第三个信号周期Tlc内，控制器533会进一步的将点亮控制信号Slc的脉冲使能期间调整为Ton3，其中脉冲使能期间Ton3为脉冲使能期间Ton2减去单位期间Tu1，等于脉冲使能期间Ton1减去期间Tu2(相当于两个单位期间Tu1)。在第三个信号周期Tlc内，开关电路535与储能电路536的运作与前两信号周期Tlc类似。由于脉冲使能期间Ton3更进一步缩短，因此使得驱动电流ILED的电流值降至I6，并且大致上达到预设电流值Ipred。其后，由于驱动电流ILED的电流值I6已达到预设电流值Ipred，因此控制器533会维持相同的占空比，使得驱动电流ILED可被持续维持在预设电流值Ipred。Similarly, since the current value I5 of the driving current ILED is still greater than the preset current value Ipred, in the third signal period Tlc, the controller 533 will further adjust the pulse enable period of the lighting control signal Slc to Ton3, wherein the pulse enable period Ton3 is the pulse enable period Ton2 minus the unit period Tu1, which is equal to the pulse enable period Ton1 minus the period Tu2 (equivalent to two unit periods Tu1). In the third signal period Tlc, the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the tank circuit 536 is similar to that of the first two signal periods Tlc. Since the pulse enable period Ton3 is further shortened, the current value of the driving current ILED is reduced to I6 and substantially reaches the preset current value Ipred. Thereafter, since the current value I6 of the driving current ILED has reached the predetermined current value Ipred, the controller 533 maintains the same duty cycle, so that the driving current ILED can be continuously maintained at the predetermined current value Ipred.
由上述可知，驱动电路530会步阶式的调整点亮控制信号Slc的脉冲宽度，以使驱动电流ILED在低于或高于预设电流值Ipred时被逐步地调整至趋近于预设电流值Ipred，进而实现定电流输出。As can be seen from the above, the driving circuit 530 will stepwise adjust the pulse width of the lighting control signal Slc, so that the driving current ILED is gradually adjusted to approach the predetermined current when the driving current ILED is lower than or higher than the predetermined current value Ipred. value Ipred, and then realize constant current output.
此外，在本实施例中，驱动电路530是以操作在连续导通模式为例，亦即储能电路536在开关电路535截止期间内不会放电至电流IL为零。藉由操作在连续导通模式的驱动电路530为LED模块50供电，可以使提供给LED模块50的电源较为稳定，不易产生涟波。In addition, in this embodiment, the driving circuit 530 is operated in the continuous conduction mode as an example, that is, the tank circuit 536 will not discharge until the current IL is zero during the off period of the switch circuit 535 . By supplying power to the LED module 50 by the driving circuit 530 operating in the continuous conduction mode, the power supplied to the LED module 50 can be more stable and less likely to generate ripples.
接下来说明驱动电路530操作在不连续导通模式下的控制情境。请先参见图13A与图14C，其中，图14C的信号波形与驱动电路530运作大致上与图14A相同。图14C与图14A的主要差异在于本实施例的驱动电路530因操作在不连续导通模式下，因此储能电路536会在点亮控制信号Slc的脉冲禁能期间内放电至电流IL等于零，并且再于下个信号周期Tlc的开始再重新进行充电。除此之外的运作叙述皆可参照上述图14A实施例，于此不再赘述。Next, the control situation of the driving circuit 530 operating in the discontinuous conduction mode is described. Please refer to FIG. 13A and FIG. 14C first, wherein the signal waveform and the operation of the driving circuit 530 in FIG. 14C are substantially the same as those in FIG. 14A . The main difference between FIG. 14C and FIG. 14A is that the driving circuit 530 of this embodiment operates in the discontinuous conduction mode, so the tank circuit 536 will discharge until the current IL is equal to zero during the pulse disable period of the lighting control signal Slc. And the charging is performed again at the beginning of the next signal period Tlc. For other operation descriptions, reference can be made to the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 14A , which will not be repeated here.
请接着参照图13A与图14D，其中，图14D的信号波形与驱动电路530运作大致上与图14B相同。图14D与图14B的主要差异在于本实施例的驱动电路530因操作在不连续导通模式下，因此储能电路536会在点亮控制信号Slc的脉冲禁能期间内放电至电流IL等于零，并且再于下个信号周期Tlc的开始再重新进行充电。除此之外的运作叙述皆可参照上述图14B实施例，于此不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 13A and FIG. 14D, wherein the signal waveform and the operation of the driving circuit 530 in FIG. 14D are substantially the same as those in FIG. 14B. The main difference between FIG. 14D and FIG. 14B is that the driving circuit 530 of this embodiment operates in the discontinuous conduction mode, so the tank circuit 536 will discharge until the current IL is equal to zero during the pulse disable period of the lighting control signal Slc, And the charging is performed again at the beginning of the next signal period Tlc. Other operation descriptions can be referred to the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 14B , which will not be repeated here.
藉由操作在不连续导通模式的驱动电路530为LED模块50供电，可以使驱动电路530的电源损耗较低，从而具有较高的转换效率。By supplying power to the LED module 50 by the driving circuit 530 operating in the discontinuous conduction mode, the power loss of the driving circuit 530 can be reduced, and thus the conversion efficiency can be higher.
附带一提，所述驱动电路530虽然以单级式直流转直流转换电路作为范例，但本申请不以此为限。举例来说，所述驱动电路530亦可为由主动式功率因数校正电路搭配直流转直流转换电路所组成的双级式驱动电路。换言之，任何可以用于LED光源驱动的电源转换电路架构皆可应用于此。Incidentally, although the driving circuit 530 uses a single-stage DC-DC conversion circuit as an example, the present application is not limited to this. For example, the driving circuit 530 can also be a two-stage driving circuit composed of an active power factor correction circuit and a DC-DC conversion circuit. In other words, any power conversion circuit structure that can be used for driving an LED light source can be applied here.
此外，上述有关于电源转换的运作说明不仅限于应用在驱动交流输入的LED直管灯中，其可适用于各类型的AC电源供电的LED灯具(即，无镇流器LED灯具)中，例如LED灯泡、LED灯丝灯或一体化LED灯具中，本申请不以此为限。In addition, the above-mentioned operation description about power conversion is not limited to being applied to driving LED straight tube lamps with AC input, but can be applied to various types of LED lamps powered by AC power (ie, ballastless LED lamps), such as In LED bulbs, LED filament lamps or integrated LED lamps, the present application is not limited to this.
请参见图13B，图13B是本申请第一实施例的驱动电路的电路架构示意图。在本实施例，驱动电路630为降压直流转直流转换电路，包含控制器633及转换电路，而转换电路包含电感636、续流二极管634、电容637以及切换开关635。驱动电路630耦接第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522，以将接收的滤波后信号转换成驱动信号，以驱动耦接在第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间的LED模块。Please refer to FIG. 13B . FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the driving circuit 630 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 633 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 636 , a freewheeling diode 634 , a capacitor 637 and a switch 635 . The driving circuit 630 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
在本实施例中，切换开关635为金氧半场效晶体管，具有控制端、第一端及第二端。切换开关635的第一端耦接续流二极管634的阳极，第二端耦接第二滤波输出端522，控制端耦接控制器633以接受控制器633的控制使第一端及第二端之间为导通或截止。第一驱动输出端531耦接第一滤波输出端521，第二驱动输出端532耦接电感636的一端，而电感636的另一端耦接切换开关635的第一端。电容637的耦接于第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间，以稳定第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间的电压差。续流二极管634的负端耦接第一驱动输出端531。In this embodiment, the switch 635 is a MOSFET and has a control terminal, a first terminal and a second terminal. The first end of the switch 635 is coupled to the anode of the freewheeling diode 634, the second end is coupled to the second filter output end 522, and the control end is coupled to the controller 633 to receive the control of the controller 633 so that the first end and the second end are connected to each other. between on or off. The first drive output end 531 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 , the second drive output end 532 is coupled to one end of the inductor 636 , and the other end of the inductor 636 is coupled to the first end of the switch 635 . The capacitor 637 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stabilize the voltage difference between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 . The negative terminal of the freewheeling diode 634 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 .
接下来说明驱动电路630的运作。Next, the operation of the driving circuit 630 will be described.
控制器633根据电流检测信号S535或/及S531决定切换开关635的导通及截止时间，也就是控制切换开关635的占空比(Duty Cycle)来调节驱动信号的大小。电流检测信号S535系代表流经切换开关635的电流大小。电流检测信号S531系代表流经耦接于第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间的LED模块的电流大小。根据电流检测信号S531及S535的任一，控制器633可以得到转换电路所转换的电力大小的信息。当切换开关635导通时，滤波后信号的电流由第一滤波输出端521流入，并经过电容637及第一驱动输出端531到LED模块、电感636、切换开关635后由第二滤波输出端522流出。此时，电容637及电感636进行储能。当切换开关635截止时，电感636及电容637释放所储存的能量，电流经续流二极管634续流到第一驱动输出端531使LED模块仍持续发光。值得注意的是，电容637非必要组件而可以省略，故在图中以虚线表示。在一些应用环境，可以藉由电感会阻抗电流的改变的特性来达到稳定LED模块电流的效果而省略电容637。The controller 633 determines the on and off time of the switch 635 according to the current detection signal S535 or/and S531, that is, controls the duty cycle (Duty Cycle) of the switch 635 to adjust the magnitude of the driving signal. The current detection signal S535 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 635 . The current detection signal S531 represents the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 . According to either of the current detection signals S531 and S535 , the controller 633 can obtain information on the magnitude of the power converted by the conversion circuit. When the switch 635 is turned on, the current of the filtered signal flows in from the first filter output terminal 521, passes through the capacitor 637 and the first drive output terminal 531 to the LED module, the inductor 636, and the switch 635, and then passes through the second filter output terminal. 522 outflow. At this time, the capacitor 637 and the inductor 636 store energy. When the switch 635 is turned off, the inductor 636 and the capacitor 637 release the stored energy, and the current freewheels to the first driving output end 531 through the freewheeling diode 634 so that the LED module continues to emit light. It is worth noting that the capacitor 637 is not an essential component and can be omitted, so it is represented by a dotted line in the figure. In some application environments, the effect of stabilizing the LED module current can be achieved by the inductance that resists the change of the current, and the capacitor 637 can be omitted.
再从另一角度来看,驱动电路630使得流经LED模块电流维持不变,因此对于部分LED模块而言(例如:白色、红色、蓝色、绿色等LED模块),色温随着电流大小而改变的情形即可改善,亦即,LED模块能在不同的亮度下维持色温不变。而扮演储能电路的电感636在切换开关635截止时释放所储存的能量,一方面使得LED模块保持持续发光,另一方面也使得LED模块上的电流电压不会骤降至最低值,而当切换开关635再次导通时,电流电压就不需从最低值往返到最大值,藉此,避免LED模块断续发光而提高LED模块的整体亮度并降低最低导通周期以及提高驱动频率。From another point of view, the driving circuit 630 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness. The inductance 636 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 635 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module keeps emitting light continuously, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value. When the switch 635 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
请参见图13C，图13C是本申请第二实施例的驱动电路的电路架构示意图。在本实施例，驱动电路730为升压直流转直流转换电路，包含控制器733及转换电路，而转换电路包含电感736、续流二极管734、电容737以及切换开关735。驱动电路730将由第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522所接收的滤波后信号转换成驱动信号，以驱动耦接在第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间的LED模块。Please refer to FIG. 13C . FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the driving circuit 730 is a boost DC to DC conversion circuit, including a controller 733 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 736 , a freewheeling diode 734 , a capacitor 737 and a switch 735 . The driving circuit 730 converts the filtered signals received by the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 into driving signals to drive the LEDs coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 module.
电感736的一端耦接第一滤波输出端521，另一端耦接滤流二极管734的阳极及切换开关735的第一端。切换开关735的第二端耦接第二滤波输出端522及第二驱动输出端532。续流二极管734的阴极耦接第一驱动输出端531。电容737耦接于第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间。One end of the inductor 736 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 , and the other end is coupled to the anode of the filter diode 734 and the first end of the switch 735 . The second terminal of the switch 735 is coupled to the second filtering output terminal 522 and the second driving output terminal 532 . The cathode of the freewheeling diode 734 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 . The capacitor 737 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
控制器733耦接切换开关735的控制端，根据电流检测信号S531或/及电流检测信号S535来控制切换开关735的导通与截止。当切换开关735导通时，电流由第一滤波输出端521流入，并流经电感736、切换开关735后由第二滤波输出端522流出。此时，流经电感736的电流随时间增加，电感736处于储能状态。同时，电容737处于释能状态，以持续驱动LED模块发光。当切换开关735截止时，电感736处于释能状态，电感736的电流随时间减少。电感736的电流经续流二极管734续流流向电容737以及LED模块。此时，电容737处于储 能状态。The controller 733 is coupled to the control terminal of the switch 735, and controls the switch 735 to be turned on and off according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535. When the switch 735 is turned on, the current flows in from the first filter output terminal 521 , flows through the inductor 736 , and then flows out from the second filter output terminal 522 after the switch 735 . At this time, the current flowing through the inductor 736 increases with time, and the inductor 736 is in an energy storage state. At the same time, the capacitor 737 is in a state of releasing energy, so as to continuously drive the LED module to emit light. When the switch 735 is turned off, the inductor 736 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 736 decreases with time. The current of the inductor 736 freewheels to the capacitor 737 and the LED module through the freewheeling diode 734 . At this time, the capacitor 737 is in an energy storage state.
值得注意的是，电容737为可省略的组件，以虚线表示。在电容737省略的情况，切换开关735导通时，电感736的电流不流经LED模块而使LED模块不发光；切换开关735截止时，电感736的电流经续流二极管734流经LED模块而使LED模块发光。藉由控制LED模块的发光时间及流经的电流大小，可以达到LED模块的平均亮度稳定于设定值上，而达到相同的稳定发光的作用。It is worth noting that the capacitor 737 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line. When the capacitor 737 is omitted, when the switch 735 is turned on, the current of the inductor 736 does not flow through the LED module and the LED module does not emit light; when the switch 735 is turned off, the current of the inductor 736 flows through the LED module through the freewheeling diode 734 and Make the LED module glow. By controlling the lighting time of the LED module and the amount of current flowing through it, the average brightness of the LED module can be stabilized at the set value, and the same stable lighting effect can be achieved.
为了要检测流经切换开关735的电流大小，切换开关735与第二滤波输出端522之间会配置有一检测电阻(未绘示)。当切换开关735导通时，流过检测电阻的电流会在检测电阻两端造成电压差，因此检测电阻上的电压即可作为电流检测信号S535被回传给控制器733作为控制的依据。然而，在LED直管灯通电瞬间或遭受到雷击时，切换开关735的回路上容易产生大电流(可能达到10A以上)而使检测电阻与控制器733损毁。因此，在一些实施例中，驱动电路730可更包含一钳位组件，其可与检测电阻连接，用以在流经检测电阻的电流或电流检测电阻两端的电压差超过一预设值时，对检测电阻的回路进行钳位操作，藉以限制流经检测电阻的电流。在一些实施例中，所述钳位组件可例如是多个二极管，所述多个二极管相互串联，以形成一二极管串，所述二极管串与检测电阻相互并联。在此配置底下，当切换开关735的回路上产生大电流时，并联于检测电阻的二极管串会快速导通，使得检测电阻的两端可被限制在特定电平上。举例来说，若二极管串是由5个二极管所组成，由于单一二极管的导通电压约为0.7V，因此二极管串可将检测电阻的跨压钳位在3.5V左右。In order to detect the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 735 , a detection resistor (not shown) is disposed between the switch 735 and the second filter output terminal 522 . When the switch 735 is turned on, the current flowing through the detection resistor will cause a voltage difference between the two ends of the detection resistor, so the voltage on the detection resistor can be used as the current detection signal S535 to be sent back to the controller 733 for control. However, when the LED straight tube lamp is energized or is struck by lightning, a large current (may be more than 10A) is likely to be generated in the loop of the switch 735 , which damages the detection resistor and the controller 733 . Therefore, in some embodiments, the driving circuit 730 may further include a clamping component, which may be connected to the detection resistor, for when the current flowing through the detection resistor or the voltage difference between the two ends of the current detection resistor exceeds a predetermined value, The loop of the sense resistor is clamped to limit the current flowing through the sense resistor. In some embodiments, the clamping element may be, for example, a plurality of diodes, and the plurality of diodes are connected in series to form a diode string, and the diode string and the detection resistor are connected in parallel with each other. Under this configuration, when a large current is generated in the loop of the switch 735, the diode string connected in parallel with the sense resistor is rapidly turned on, so that both ends of the sense resistor can be limited to a specific level. For example, if the diode string consists of 5 diodes, since the turn-on voltage of a single diode is about 0.7V, the diode string can clamp the voltage across the detection resistor to about 3.5V.
再从另一角度来看,驱动电路730使得流经LED模块电流维持不变,因此对于部分LED模块而言(例如:白色、红色、蓝色、绿色等LED模块),色温随着电流大小而改变的情形即可改善,亦即,LED模块能在不同的亮度下维持色温不变。而扮演储能电路的电感736在切换开关735截止时释放所储存的能量,一方面使得LED模块持续发光,另一方面也使得LED模块上的电流电压不会骤降至最低值,而当切换开关735再次导通时,电流电压就不需从最低值往返到最大值,藉此,避免LED模块断续发光而提高LED模块的整体亮度并降低最低导通周期以及提高驱动频率。From another point of view, the driving circuit 730 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness. The inductance 736 acting as an energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 735 is turned off, on the one hand, the LED module continues to emit light, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value, and when the switch 735 is switched off, the stored energy is released. When the switch 735 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
请参见图13D，图13D是本申请第三实施例的驱动电路的电路架构示意图。在本实施例，驱动电路830为降压直流转直流转换电路，包含控制器833及转换电路，而转换电路包含电感836、续流二极管834、电容837以及切换开关835。驱动电路830耦接第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522，以将接收的滤波后信号转换成驱动信号，以驱动耦接在第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间的LED模块。Please refer to FIG. 13D . FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the driving circuit 830 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 833 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 836 , a freewheeling diode 834 , a capacitor 837 and a switch 835 . The driving circuit 830 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
切换开关835的第一端耦接第一滤波输出端521，第二端耦接续流二极管834的阴极，而控制端耦接控制器833以接收控制器833的点亮控制信号而使第一端与第二端之间的状态 为导通或截止。续流二极管834的阳极耦接第二滤波输出端522。电感836的一端与切换开关835的第二端耦接，另一端耦接第一驱动输出端531。第二驱动输出端532耦接续流二极管834的阳极。电容837耦接于第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间，以稳定第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间的电压。The first end of the switch 835 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 , the second end is coupled to the cathode of the freewheeling diode 834 , and the control end is coupled to the controller 833 to receive the lighting control signal of the controller 833 to make the first end The state between the second terminal and the second terminal is on or off. The anode of the freewheeling diode 834 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 . One end of the inductor 836 is coupled to the second end of the switch 835 , and the other end is coupled to the first driving output end 531 . The second driving output terminal 532 is coupled to the anode of the freewheeling diode 834 . The capacitor 837 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stabilize the voltage between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
控制器833根据电流检测信号S531或/及电流检测信号S535来控制切换开关835的导通与截止。当切换开关835导通时，电流由第一滤波输出端521流入，经切换开关835、电感836并经过电容837及第一驱动输出端531、LED模块及第二驱动输出端532后由第二滤波输出端522流出。此时，流经电感836的电流以及电容837的电压随时间增加，电感836及电容837处于储能状态。当切换开关835截止时，电感836处于释能状态，电感836的电流随时间减少。此时，电感836的电流经第一驱动输出端531、LED模块及第二驱动输出端532、续流二极管834再回到电感836而形成续流。The controller 833 controls the switching on and off of the switch 835 according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535. When the switch 835 is turned on, the current flows from the first filter output terminal 521 , passes through the switch 835 , the inductor 836 , passes through the capacitor 837 , the first drive output terminal 531 , the LED module and the second drive output terminal 532 , and then flows through the second filter output terminal 532 . The filtered output 522 flows out. At this time, the current flowing through the inductor 836 and the voltage of the capacitor 837 increase with time, and the inductor 836 and the capacitor 837 are in an energy storage state. When the switch 835 is turned off, the inductor 836 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 836 decreases with time. At this time, the current of the inductor 836 returns to the inductor 836 through the first driving output terminal 531 , the LED module, the second driving output terminal 532 , and the freewheeling diode 834 to form a freewheeling current.
值得注意的是，电容837为可省略组件，图式中以虚线表示。当电容837省略时，不论切换开关835为导通或截止，电感836的电流均可以流过第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532以驱动LED模块持续发光。It is worth noting that the capacitor 837 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line in the figure. When the capacitor 837 is omitted, regardless of whether the switch 835 is on or off, the current of the inductor 836 can flow through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to drive the LED module to continuously emit light.
再从另一角度来看,驱动电路830使得流经LED模块电流维持不变,因此对于部分LED模块而言(例如:白色、红色、蓝色、绿色等LED模块),色温随着电流大小而改变的情形即可改善,亦即,LED模块能在不同的亮度下维持色温不变。而扮演储能电路的电感836在切换开关835截止时释放所储存的能量,一方面使得LED模块保持持续发光,另一方面也使得LED模块上的电流电压不会骤降至最低值,而当切换开关835再次导通时,电流电压就不需从最低值往返到最大值,藉此,避免LED模块断续发光而提高LED模块的整体亮度并降低最低导通周期以及提高驱动频率。From another point of view, the driving circuit 830 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness. The inductance 836 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 835 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module can keep emitting light continuously, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value. When the switch 835 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby avoiding intermittent light emission of the LED module, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
请参见图13E，图13E是本申请第四实施例的驱动电路的电路架构示意图。在本实施例，驱动电路930为降压直流转直流转换电路，包含控制器933及转换电路，而转换电路包含电感936、续流二极管934、电容937以及切换开关935。驱动电路930耦接第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522，以将接收的滤波后信号转换成驱动信号，以驱动耦接在第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间的LED模块。Please refer to FIG. 13E. FIG. 13E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the driving circuit 930 is a step-down DC-DC conversion circuit, including a controller 933 and a conversion circuit, and the conversion circuit includes an inductor 936 , a freewheeling diode 934 , a capacitor 937 and a switch 935 . The driving circuit 930 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522 to convert the received filtered signal into a driving signal, which is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 for driving. between the LED modules.
电感936的一端耦接第一滤波输出端521及第二驱动输出端532，另一端耦接切换开关935的第一端。切换开关935的第二端耦接第二滤波输出端522，而切换开关935的控制端耦接控制器933以根据控制器933的点亮控制信号而为导通或截止。续流二极管934的阳极耦接电感936与切换开关935的连接点，阴极耦接第二驱动输出端532。电容937耦接第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532，以稳定耦接于第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间的LED模块的驱动。One end of the inductor 936 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second driving output end 532 , and the other end is coupled to the first end of the switch 935 . The second terminal of the switch 935 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 , and the control terminal of the switch 935 is coupled to the controller 933 to be turned on or off according to the lighting control signal of the controller 933 . The anode of the freewheeling diode 934 is coupled to the connection point between the inductor 936 and the switch 935 , and the cathode is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 . The capacitor 937 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to stably drive the LED module coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 .
控制器933根据电流检测信号S531或/及电流检测信号S535来控制切换开关935的导通与截止。当切换开关935导通时，电流由第一滤波输出端521流入，并流经电感936、切换开关935后由第二滤波输出端522流出。此时，流经电感936的电流随时间增加，电感936处于储能状态；电容937的电压随时间减少，电容937处于释能状态，以维持LED模块发光。当切换开关935截止时，电感936处于释能状态，电感936的电流随时间减少。此时，电感936的电流经续流二极管934、第一驱动输出端531、LED模块及第二驱动输出端532再回到电感936而形成续流。此时，电容937处于储能状态，电容937的电压随时间增加。The controller 933 controls the on and off of the switch 935 according to the current detection signal S531 or/and the current detection signal S535. When the switch 935 is turned on, the current flows in from the first filter output terminal 521 , flows through the inductor 936 , and then flows out from the second filter output terminal 522 after the switch 935 . At this time, the current flowing through the inductor 936 increases with time, and the inductor 936 is in a state of energy storage; the voltage of the capacitor 937 decreases with time, and the capacitor 937 is in a state of energy release, so as to keep the LED module emitting light. When the switch 935 is turned off, the inductor 936 is in an energy release state, and the current of the inductor 936 decreases with time. At this time, the current of the inductor 936 returns to the inductor 936 through the freewheeling diode 934 , the first driving output terminal 531 , the LED module and the second driving output terminal 532 to form a freewheeling current. At this time, the capacitor 937 is in an energy storage state, and the voltage of the capacitor 937 increases with time.
值得注意的是，电容937为可省略组件，图式中以虚线表示。当电容937省略时，切换开关935导通时，电感936的电流并未流经第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532而使LED模块不发光。切换开关935截止时，电感936的电流经续流二极管934而流经LED模块而使LED模块发光。藉由控制LED模块的发光时间及流经的电流大小，可以达到LED模块的平均亮度稳定于设定值上，而达到相同的稳定发光的作用。It is worth noting that the capacitor 937 is an optional component, which is represented by a dotted line in the figure. When the capacitor 937 is omitted and the switch 935 is turned on, the current of the inductor 936 does not flow through the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 so that the LED module does not emit light. When the switch 935 is turned off, the current of the inductor 936 flows through the LED module through the freewheeling diode 934 to make the LED module emit light. By controlling the lighting time of the LED module and the amount of current flowing through it, the average brightness of the LED module can be stabilized at the set value, and the same stable lighting effect can be achieved.
再从另一角度来看,驱动电路930使得流经LED模块电流维持不变,因此对于部分LED模块而言(例如:白色、红色、蓝色、绿色等LED模块),色温随着电流大小而改变的情形即可改善,亦即,LED模块能在不同的亮度下维持色温不变。而扮演储能电路的电感936在切换开关935截止时释放所储存的能量,一方面使得LED模块持续发光,另一方面也使得LED模块上的电流电压不会骤降至最低值,而当切换开关935再次导通时,电流电压就不需从最低值往返到最大值,藉此,避免LED模块断续发光而提高LED模块的整体亮度并降低最低导通周期以及提高驱动频率。From another point of view, the driving circuit 930 keeps the current flowing through the LED module unchanged. Therefore, for some LED modules (eg, white, red, blue, green, etc. LED modules), the color temperature varies with the current. The changed situation can be improved, that is, the LED module can maintain the same color temperature under different brightness. The inductance 936 acting as the energy storage circuit releases the stored energy when the switch 935 is turned off. On the one hand, the LED module continues to emit light, and on the other hand, the current and voltage on the LED module will not drop to the lowest value. When the switch 935 is turned on again, the current and voltage do not need to go back and forth from the minimum value to the maximum value, thereby preventing the LED module from emitting light intermittently, improving the overall brightness of the LED module, reducing the minimum conduction period and increasing the driving frequency.
配合图6A及图6B，短电路板253被区分成与长电路板251两端连接的第一短电路板及第二短电路板，而且电源模块中的电子组件被分别设置于的短电路板253的第一短电路板及第二短电路板上。第一短电路板及第二短电路板的长度尺寸可以约略一致，也可以不一致。一般，第一短电路板(图6A的短电路板253的右侧电路板及图6B的短电路板253的左侧电路板)的长度尺寸为第二短电路板的长度尺寸的30％-80％。更佳的第一短电路板的长度尺寸为第二短电路板的长度尺寸的1/3-2/3。在本实施中，第一短电路板的长度尺寸大致为第二短电路板的尺寸的一半。第二短电路板的尺寸介于15mm～65mm(具体视应用场合而定)。第一短电路板设置于LED直管灯的一端的灯头中，以及所述第二短电路板设置于LED直管灯的相对的另一端的灯头中。6A and 6B, the short circuit board 253 is divided into a first short circuit board and a second short circuit board connected to both ends of the long circuit board 251, and the electronic components in the power module are respectively arranged on the short circuit boards 253 on the first short circuit board and the second short circuit board. The length dimensions of the first short circuit board and the second short circuit board may be approximately the same, or may not be consistent. Generally, the length dimension of the first short circuit board (the right circuit board of the short circuit board 253 in FIG. 6A and the left circuit board of the short circuit board 253 in FIG. 6B ) is 30% of the length dimension of the second short circuit board- 80%. More preferably, the length dimension of the first short circuit board is 1/3-2/3 of the length dimension of the second short circuit board. In this embodiment, the length dimension of the first short circuit board is approximately half the size of the second short circuit board. The size of the second short circuit board is between 15mm and 65mm (depending on the application). The first short circuit board is arranged in the lamp cap at one end of the LED straight tube lamp, and the second short circuit board is arranged in the lamp cap at the opposite end of the LED straight tube lamp.
举例来说，驱动电路的电容(例如：图13B至图13E中的电容637、737、837、937)实际应用上可以是两个或以上的电容并联而成。电源模块中驱动电路的电容至少部分或全部设置于短电路板253的第一短电路板上。即，整流电路、滤波电路、驱动电路的电感、控制器、切换开关、二极管等均设置于短电路板253的第二短电路板上。而电感、控制器、切换开关等为电子组件中温度较高的组件，与部分或全部电容设置于不同的电路板上，可使电容(尤其 是电解电容)避免因温度较高的组件对电容的寿命造成影响，提高电容信赖性。进一步，还可因电容与整流电路及滤波电路在空间上分离，解决EMI问题。For example, the capacitors of the driving circuit (eg, the capacitors 637, 737, 837, and 937 in FIG. 13B to FIG. 13E ) may be formed by two or more capacitors connected in parallel in practice. At least part or all of the capacitance of the driving circuit in the power module is arranged on the first short circuit board of the short circuit board 253 . That is, the rectifier circuit, the filter circuit, the inductance of the drive circuit, the controller, the switch, the diode, etc. are all arranged on the second short circuit board of the short circuit board 253 . Inductors, controllers, switches, etc. are components with high temperature in electronic components, and some or all capacitors are arranged on different circuit boards, so that capacitors (especially electrolytic capacitors) can avoid the impact of high temperature components on capacitors. It affects the life of the capacitor and improves the reliability of the capacitor. Further, the EMI problem can also be solved because the capacitor is separated from the rectifier circuit and the filter circuit in space.
在一实施例中，驱动电路中温度较高的组件设置在灯管的一侧(可称为灯管的第一侧)，并且其馀组件设置在灯管的另一侧(可称为灯管的第二侧)。在多灯管的灯具系统中，所述灯管是以交错式的排列方式与灯座连接，亦即其中任一灯管的第一侧会与其他相邻灯管的第二侧邻接。如此配置方式可以使得温度较高的组件平均的配置在灯具系统中，进而避免热量集中在灯具中的特定位置，使LED整体的发光效能受到影响。In one embodiment, the components with higher temperature in the driving circuit are arranged on one side of the lamp tube (which can be referred to as the first side of the lamp tube), and the other components are arranged on the other side of the lamp tube (which can be referred to as the lamp tube). the second side of the tube). In a lighting system with multiple lamps, the lamps are connected to the lamp sockets in a staggered arrangement, that is, the first side of any one of the lamps is adjacent to the second side of other adjacent lamps. Such a configuration can make the components with higher temperature evenly arranged in the lighting system, thereby preventing the heat from concentrating on a specific position in the lighting and affecting the overall luminous efficacy of the LED.
本申请的驱动电路的转换效率为80％以上，较佳为90％以上，更佳为92％以上。因此，在未包含驱动电路时，本申请的LED灯的发光效率较佳为120lm/W以上，更佳为160lm/W以上；而在包含驱动电路与LED组件结合后的发光效率较佳为120lm/W*90％＝108lm/W以上，更佳为160lm/W*92％＝147.2lm/W以上。The conversion efficiency of the driving circuit of the present application is 80% or more, preferably 90% or more, and more preferably 92% or more. Therefore, when the driving circuit is not included, the luminous efficiency of the LED lamp of the present application is preferably more than 120lm/W, more preferably more than 160lm/W; and the luminous efficiency after the combination of the driving circuit and the LED component is preferably 120lm/W /W*90%=108lm/W or more, more preferably 160lm/W*92%=147.2lm/W or more.
另外，考虑LED直管灯的扩散层的透光率为85％以上，因此，本申请的LED直管灯的发光效率较佳为108lm/W*85％＝91.8lm/W以上，更佳为147.2lm/W*85％＝125.12lm/W。In addition, considering that the light transmittance of the diffusion layer of the LED straight tube lamp is 85% or more, the luminous efficiency of the LED straight tube lamp of the present application is preferably 108lm/W*85%=91.8lm/W or more, more preferably 147.2lm/W*85%=125.12lm/W.
请参见图15A，图15A是本申请第四实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。相较于图9A所示实施例，本实施例的电源模块5包含第一整流电路510、滤波电路520及驱动电路530，且更增加过压保护电路550。过压保护电路550耦接第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522，以检测滤波后信号，并于滤波后信号的准位高于设定过压值时，箝制滤波后信号的准位，或者控制后级的驱动电路530以降低驱动电流(ILED)大小或使驱动电路530停止输出驱动电流。因此，过压保护电路550可以保护LED模块50的组件不因过高压而毁损。Please refer to FIG. 15A . FIG. 15A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application. Compared with the embodiment shown in FIG. 9A , the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a drive circuit 530 , and an overvoltage protection circuit 550 is further added. The overvoltage protection circuit 550 is coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 to detect the filtered signal, and clamp the level of the filtered signal when the level of the filtered signal is higher than the set overvoltage value. bit, or control the driving circuit 530 of the subsequent stage to reduce the size of the driving current (ILED) or make the driving circuit 530 stop outputting the driving current. Therefore, the overvoltage protection circuit 550 can protect the components of the LED module 50 from being damaged by the overvoltage.
请参见图15B，图15B是本申请第五实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的电源模块5和图15A的电源模块5大致相同，两者间的差异主要在于本实施例的过压保护电路550是设置在驱动电路530和LED模块50之间，即过压保护电路550耦接第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532，以检测驱动信号，并于驱动信号的准位高于设定过压值时，箝制驱动信号的电平。因此，过压保护电路550可以保护LED模块50的组件不因过高压而毁损。Please refer to FIG. 15B . FIG. 15B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application. The power supply module 5 of this embodiment is substantially the same as the power supply module 5 of FIG. 15A , and the difference between the two is mainly that the overvoltage protection circuit 550 of this embodiment is disposed between the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 , that is, the overvoltage protection circuit The circuit 550 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 to detect the driving signal and clamp the level of the driving signal when the level of the driving signal is higher than the set overvoltage value. Therefore, the overvoltage protection circuit 550 can protect the components of the LED module 50 from being damaged by the overvoltage.
请参见图15C，图15C是本申请一实施例的过压保护电路的电路架构示意图。过压保护电路650包含稳压二极管652，例如：齐纳二极管(Zener Diode)，耦接第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522(如图15A实施例)，或耦接第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532(如图15B实施例)。以稳压二极管652设置于第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522之间为例，稳压二极管652于第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522的电压差(即，滤波后信号的电平)达到崩溃电压时导通，使电压差箝制在崩溃电压上。崩溃电压较佳为在40-100V的范围内，更佳为55-75V的范围。Please refer to FIG. 15C . FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an overvoltage protection circuit according to an embodiment of the present application. The overvoltage protection circuit 650 includes a Zener diode 652, such as a Zener Diode, coupled to the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 (as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 15A ), or coupled to the first driver The output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 (as shown in the embodiment of FIG. 15B ). Taking the Zener diode 652 disposed between the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 as an example, the voltage difference between the Zener diode 652 at the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 (ie, the filter After the signal level) reaches the breakdown voltage, it is turned on, so that the voltage difference is clamped at the breakdown voltage. The breakdown voltage is preferably in the range of 40-100V, more preferably in the range of 55-75V.
请参见图15D，图15D是本申请第二实施例的过压保护电路的电路方块示意图。过压保 护电路750包含电压取样电路751和使能电路752，其中电压取样电路751耦接滤波输出端521和522以接收滤波后信号，使能电路752耦接电压取样电路751的输出端，并且使能电路752的输出端耦接驱动电路的控制器533。电压取样电路751会取样滤波后信号，并据以产生电压检测信号给使能电路752，令使能电路752响应于电压检测信号决定是否启用过压保护，并且相应的控制驱动电路的控制器533的工作状态。Please refer to FIG. 15D. FIG. 15D is a schematic block diagram of an overvoltage protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. The overvoltage protection circuit 750 includes a voltage sampling circuit 751 and an enabling circuit 752, wherein the voltage sampling circuit 751 is coupled to the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 to receive the filtered signal, the enabling circuit 752 is coupled to the output terminal of the voltage sampling circuit 751, and The output terminal of the enabling circuit 752 is coupled to the controller 533 of the driving circuit. The voltage sampling circuit 751 samples the filtered signal, and generates a voltage detection signal to the enable circuit 752 accordingly, so that the enable circuit 752 determines whether to enable the overvoltage protection in response to the voltage detection signal, and correspondingly controls the controller 533 of the driving circuit working status.
在本实施例中，当LED直管灯接收到电压过高的外部驱动信号时，使能电路752会响应于电压取样信号而启用/使能过压保护，以使控制器533降低或截止输出电流，进而避免LED直管灯因接收到非预期的高压而损毁。举例来说，当LED直管灯连接至一些不符合规范或输出电压过高的电子镇流器时，即可能使LED直管灯暴露在高压工作的风险中；而若LED直管灯设置有过压保护电路750，即可在外部驱动电压的峰值或有效值高于特定阈值时，启用过压保护以使驱动电路降低输出电流/输出功率，或使驱动电路停止输出驱动电流。In this embodiment, when the LED straight tube lamp receives an external driving signal with an excessively high voltage, the enabling circuit 752 will enable/enable the overvoltage protection in response to the voltage sampling signal, so that the controller 533 reduces or disables the output current, thereby preventing the LED straight tube lamp from being damaged due to receiving unexpected high voltage. For example, when the LED straight tube lamp is connected to some electronic ballasts that do not meet the specifications or the output voltage is too high, the LED straight tube lamp may be exposed to the risk of high voltage operation; and if the LED straight tube lamp is provided with a The overvoltage protection circuit 750 can enable the overvoltage protection to reduce the output current/power of the drive circuit, or stop the drive circuit from outputting the drive current, when the peak value or effective value of the external driving voltage is higher than a certain threshold.
在一些实施例中，过压保护电路还包含延时电路753，所述延时电路753耦接电压取样电路751和使能电路752，用以影响电压取样电路751提供给使能电路752的电压检测信号，进而避免在特定应用情境下，灯管通电时的启动高压造成使能电路752响应于电压检测信号而发生误动作，其中所述延时电路753影响电压检测信号的方式可例如为降低电压检测信号的上升速率或是抑制电压检测信号的瞬时变化，使得电压检测信号的瞬时变化不会立即造成使能电路752启用/使能过压保护。In some embodiments, the overvoltage protection circuit further includes a delay circuit 753 , the delay circuit 753 is coupled to the voltage sampling circuit 751 and the enabling circuit 752 to affect the voltage provided by the voltage sampling circuit 751 to the enabling circuit 752 detection signal, so as to prevent the enabling circuit 752 from malfunctioning in response to the voltage detection signal due to the start-up high voltage when the lamp is energized under certain application scenarios, wherein the delay circuit 753 affects the voltage detection signal. The rising rate of the voltage detection signal or the suppression of the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal, so that the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal does not immediately cause the enable circuit 752 to enable/enable the overvoltage protection.
举例来说，在LED直管灯搭配瞬时启动(Instant Start)镇流器使用的情境下，LED直管灯会在通电时接收到一个瞬时的高压，此高压可能会造成使能电路752的误动作。在设有延时电路753的配置下，瞬时启动镇流器的启动高压会被延时电路753抑制，而不会直接反映在电压检测信号上，进而避免使能电路752误动作。从另一个角度看，延时电路753是对电压取样电路751输出的电压检测电路进行延时，并且将延时后的电压检测信号再传输给使能电路752。以下以图15E至图15H说明过压保护电路750的多个电路架构实施例。For example, when the LED straight tube lamp is used with an instant start ballast, the LED straight tube lamp will receive an instantaneous high voltage when powered on, and this high voltage may cause malfunction of the enabling circuit 752 . In the configuration with the delay circuit 753 , the starting high voltage of the instant-start ballast will be suppressed by the delay circuit 753 and not directly reflected on the voltage detection signal, thereby preventing the enabling circuit 752 from malfunctioning. From another perspective, the delay circuit 753 delays the voltage detection circuit output by the voltage sampling circuit 751 , and transmits the delayed voltage detection signal to the enabling circuit 752 . Various circuit architecture embodiments of the overvoltage protection circuit 750 are described below with reference to FIGS. 15E to 15H .
请参见图15E，本实施例的过压保护电路850包含电压取样电路851、使能电路852及延时电路853。电压取样电路851包含电阻Rg1、Rg2和Rg3以及齐纳二极管ZDg1，其中电阻Rg1和Rg2形成分压电路，电阻Rg1的第一端耦接第一滤波输出端521，电阻Rg2的第一端耦接电阻Rg1的第二端，并且电阻Rg2的第二端耦接第二滤波输出端522(在一些实施例中，第二滤波输出端522和接地端GND为等电平端)；齐纳二极管ZDg1的阴极耦接电阻Rg1的第二端和电阻Rg1的第一端(即，分压电路的分压点)，并且齐纳二极管ZDg1的阳极耦接使能电路852的输入端；电阻Rg3的第一端耦接齐纳二极管ZDg1的阳极，并且电阻Rg3的第二端耦接第二滤波输出端522。在本实施例中，第一滤波输出端521和第二滤波输出端522间的滤波后信号经过电阻Rg1和Rg2的分压，以及齐纳二极管ZDg1和电阻Rg3的稳压而作用在使能电路852的输入端上。换言之，电阻Rg3的第一端上的电压信号即为电压取样电路851所 产生的电压检测信号。Referring to FIG. 15E , the overvoltage protection circuit 850 of this embodiment includes a voltage sampling circuit 851 , an enabling circuit 852 and a delay circuit 853 . The voltage sampling circuit 851 includes resistors Rg1, Rg2 and Rg3 and a Zener diode ZDg1, wherein the resistors Rg1 and Rg2 form a voltage divider circuit, the first end of the resistor Rg1 is coupled to the first filter output end 521, and the first end of the resistor Rg2 is coupled to The second terminal of the resistor Rg1, and the second terminal of the resistor Rg2 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 (in some embodiments, the second filter output terminal 522 and the ground terminal GND are equal-level terminals); the Zener diode ZDg1 The cathode is coupled to the second terminal of the resistor Rg1 and the first terminal of the resistor Rg1 (ie, the voltage dividing point of the voltage divider circuit), and the anode of the Zener diode ZDg1 is coupled to the input terminal of the enable circuit 852; the first terminal of the resistor Rg3 The terminal is coupled to the anode of the Zener diode ZDg1 , and the second terminal of the resistor Rg3 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 . In this embodiment, the filtered signal between the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 acts on the enabling circuit through the voltage division of the resistors Rg1 and Rg2 and the voltage regulation of the Zener diode ZDg1 and the resistor Rg3 852 input. In other words, the voltage signal on the first end of the resistor Rg3 is the voltage detection signal generated by the voltage sampling circuit 851.
使能电路852包含晶体管Mg1，所述晶体管Mg1具有第一端、第二端和控制端。晶体管Mg1的控制端耦接电阻Rg3的第一端和齐纳二极管ZDg1的阳极，以接收电压检测信号；晶体管Mg1的第一端和第二端至少其中之一耦接驱动电路的控制器533。在一些实施例中，使能电路852还包含有电阻Rg4，其中电阻Rg4可以是串接在晶体管Mg1的第一端和控制器533之间，或是串接在晶体管Mg1的第二端和控制器533之间。在本实施例的图式中仅是绘示电阻Rg4串接在晶体管Mg1的第一端和控制器533之间，但本揭露不以此为限。使能电路852和控制器533之间的具体连接配置范例可以参考下述图15F至15H实施例。The enable circuit 852 includes a transistor Mg1 having a first terminal, a second terminal and a control terminal. The control terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the first terminal of the resistor Rg3 and the anode of the Zener diode ZDg1 to receive the voltage detection signal; at least one of the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the controller 533 of the driving circuit. In some embodiments, the enabling circuit 852 further includes a resistor Rg4, wherein the resistor Rg4 can be connected in series between the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533, or between the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533 in series between the device 533. In the drawings of this embodiment, it is only shown that the resistor Rg4 is connected in series between the first end of the transistor Mg1 and the controller 533 , but the present disclosure is not limited to this. The specific connection configuration example between the enabling circuit 852 and the controller 533 may refer to the following embodiments in FIGS. 15F to 15H .
延时电路853包含电容Cg1和Cg2，电容Cg1的第一端耦接电阻Rg1的第二端、电阻Rg2的第一端和齐纳二极管ZDg1的阴极，并且电容Cg1的第二端耦接第二滤波输出端522；电容Cg2的第一端耦接电阻Rg3的第一端以及齐纳二极管ZDg1的阳极，并且电容Cg2的第二端耦接第二滤波输出端522。在本实施例中，电压检测信号的瞬时变化会受到电容Cg1和Cg2的抑制。The delay circuit 853 includes capacitors Cg1 and Cg2. The first end of the capacitor Cg1 is coupled to the second end of the resistor Rg1, the first end of the resistor Rg2 and the cathode of the Zener diode ZDg1, and the second end of the capacitor Cg1 is coupled to the second end of the resistor Rg1. The filter output terminal 522 ; the first terminal of the capacitor Cg2 is coupled to the first terminal of the resistor Rg3 and the anode of the Zener diode ZDg1 , and the second terminal of the capacitor Cg2 is coupled to the second filter output terminal 522 . In this embodiment, the instantaneous change of the voltage detection signal is suppressed by the capacitors Cg1 and Cg2.
图15F至图15H是绘示使能电路852和控制器533之间多种不同电路连接方式实施例的局部电路架构示意图。在这些实施例中，控制器533例如具有电源引脚P_VCC、驱动引脚P_G、补偿引脚P_COMP及电流取样引脚P_CS，其中控制器533是在电源引脚P_VCC接收到符合启动需求的驱动电压VCC(例如5V)时启动，并通过驱动引脚P_G的信号来控制驱动电路的输出电流大小。控制器533还会根据电流取样引脚P_CS上的电平(代表驱动电流大小)和补偿引脚P_COMP上的电平(代表输入电压大小)调整输出的点亮控制信号的脉宽，进而使驱动电路的输出电流/输出功率可以大致维持在一定值上。FIGS. 15F to 15H are partial circuit architecture diagrams illustrating various embodiments of different circuit connections between the enabling circuit 852 and the controller 533 . In these embodiments, the controller 533 has, for example, a power supply pin P_VCC, a driving pin P_G, a compensation pin P_COMP, and a current sampling pin P_CS, wherein the controller 533 receives a driving voltage at the power supply pin P_VCC that meets the startup requirements VCC (for example, 5V) is activated, and the output current of the driving circuit is controlled by the signal of the driving pin P_G. The controller 533 also adjusts the pulse width of the output lighting control signal according to the level on the current sampling pin P_CS (representing the magnitude of the driving current) and the level on the compensation pin P_COMP (representing the magnitude of the input voltage). The output current/output power of the circuit can be roughly maintained at a certain value.
从另一角度来说，在控制器533的配置中，可以使控制器533响应其上的电平而启动或停止工作的引脚即是所述电源引脚P_VCC(或可称为第一引脚)；可以使控制器533输出的点亮控制信号的占空比随着其上的电压降低而降低(至少在一定的电压区间内具有此关系)的引脚即是所述补偿引脚P_COMP(或可称为第二引脚)；以及可以使控制器533输出的点亮控制信号的占空比随着其上的电压升高而降低(至少在一定的电压区间内具有此关系)的引脚即是所述电流取样引脚P_CS(或可称为第三引脚)。另外，在一些实施例中，所述驱动引脚P_G可以是电性连接至晶体管/功率开关535的栅极，并且提供点亮控制信号的引脚(图式中以此类型为例，但不仅限于此)；在另一些实施例中，晶体管/功率开关535关会与控制器533集成在一起，此时控制器的驱动引脚P_G可以是对应至集成于控制器内部的晶体管/功率开关535的漏极，以上类型的驱动引脚可以统称为第四引脚。From another perspective, in the configuration of the controller 533, the pin that enables the controller 533 to start or stop working in response to the level on it is the power supply pin P_VCC (or the first pin). pin); the pin that can make the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 decrease as the voltage on it decreases (at least in a certain voltage range with this relationship) is the compensation pin P_COMP (or can be referred to as the second pin); and the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 can be reduced as the voltage on it decreases (at least in a certain voltage interval with this relationship) The pin is the current sampling pin P_CS (or can be referred to as the third pin). In addition, in some embodiments, the driving pin P_G may be a pin that is electrically connected to the gate of the transistor/power switch 535 and provides a lighting control signal (this type is taken as an example in the drawings, but not only In other embodiments, the transistor/power switch 535 will be integrated with the controller 533, and the drive pin P_G of the controller may correspond to the transistor/power switch 535 integrated inside the controller. The drain, the above types of drive pins can be collectively referred to as the fourth pin.
在这些实施例中，控制器533的驱动引脚P_G是以耦接至晶体管535的栅极的配置为例，并且晶体管535的第一端会耦接至转换电路，晶体管535的第二端通过取样电阻Rcs耦接至 接地端GND。In these embodiments, the drive pin P_G of the controller 533 is configured to be coupled to the gate of the transistor 535 as an example, and the first end of the transistor 535 is coupled to the conversion circuit, and the second end of the transistor 535 is passed through The sampling resistor Rcs is coupled to the ground terminal GND.
请参见图15F，在本实施例中，使能电路的晶体管Mg1的第一端是耦接至控制器533的电源引脚P_VCC，并且晶体管Mg2的第二端是耦接至接地端GND。当使能电路基于电压检测信号而启用过压保护时，晶体管Mg1会响应于电压检测信号而被导通，使得电源引脚P_VCC的电压从驱动电压VCC被下拉至接地电平/低电平，进而令控制器533停止运作。相反地，当使能电路基于电压检测信号而未启用过压保护时，晶体管Mg1会响应于电压检测信号而被截止，使得电源引脚P_VCC上的电压维持在驱动电压VCC，并使控制器533可以基于驱动电压VCC而被启动并输出点亮控制信号给开关电路535。Referring to FIG. 15F , in this embodiment, the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit is coupled to the power supply pin P_VCC of the controller 533 , and the second terminal of the transistor Mg2 is coupled to the ground terminal GND. When the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 is turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage of the power supply pin P_VCC is pulled down from the driving voltage VCC to the ground level/low level, Then, the controller 533 is stopped. Conversely, when the enabling circuit does not enable the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 is turned off in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage on the power supply pin P_VCC is maintained at the driving voltage VCC, and the controller 533 It may be activated based on the driving voltage VCC and output a lighting control signal to the switch circuit 535 .
请参见图15G，在本实施例中，使能电路的晶体管Mg1的第一端经由电阻Rg4耦接至控制器533的补偿引脚P_COMP，并且晶体管Mg1的第二端耦接至接地端GND。当使能电路基于电压检测信号而启用过压保护时，晶体管Mg1会响应于电压检测信号而被导通，使得补偿引脚P_COMP被下拉至特定电平(视电阻Rg4的电阻值设定而定)或接地电平/低电平(在没有电阻Rg4的情况下)，进而令控制器533输出的点亮控制信号的占空比随着补偿引脚P_COMP上的电压下降而降低，以使输出电流/输出功率降低。相反地，当使能电路基于电压检测信号而未启用过压保护时，晶体管Mg1会响应于电压检测信号而被截止，使得补偿引脚P_COMP上的电压不受使能电路影响，此时控制器533会依照既定的控制机制来调变点亮控制信号的占空比。Referring to FIG. 15G , in this embodiment, the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit is coupled to the compensation pin P_COMP of the controller 533 through the resistor Rg4 , and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the ground terminal GND. When the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 will be turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the compensation pin P_COMP is pulled down to a specific level (depending on the setting of the resistance value of the resistor Rg4) ) or ground level/low level (in the absence of the resistor Rg4), so that the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 decreases with the voltage drop on the compensation pin P_COMP, so that the output Current/output power reduction. Conversely, when the enable circuit does not enable overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 will be turned off in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the voltage on the compensation pin P_COMP is not affected by the enable circuit, at this time the controller The 533 modulates the duty cycle of the lighting control signal according to a predetermined control mechanism.
请参见图15H，在本实施例中，使能电路的晶体管Mg1的第一端经由电阻Rg4接收驱动电压VCC，并且晶体管Mg1的第二端耦接至控制器533的电流取样引脚P_CS并同时耦接取样电阻Rcs的第一端。当使能电路基于电压检测信号而启用过压保护时，晶体管Mg1会响应于电压检测信号而被导通，使得驱动电压VCC的分压会被叠加至电流取样引脚P_CS上，使得电流取样引脚P_CS上的电压被提升至特定电平(视电阻Rg4和电阻Rcs的电阻值设定而定)，进而令控制器533输出的点亮控制信号的占空比随着电流取样引脚P_CS上的电压上升而降低，以使输出电流/输出功率降低。相反地，当使能电路基于电压检测信号而未启用过压保护时，晶体管Mg1会响应于电压检测信号而被截止，电流取样引脚P_CS上的电压不受使能电路影响，此时控制器533会依照既定的控制机制来调变点亮控制信号的占空比。Referring to FIG. 15H, in this embodiment, the first terminal of the transistor Mg1 of the enabling circuit receives the driving voltage VCC through the resistor Rg4, and the second terminal of the transistor Mg1 is coupled to the current sampling pin P_CS of the controller 533 and simultaneously is coupled to the first end of the sampling resistor Rcs. When the enabling circuit enables the overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 will be turned on in response to the voltage detection signal, so that the divided voltage of the driving voltage VCC will be superimposed on the current sampling pin P_CS, so that the current sampling leads The voltage on the pin P_CS is raised to a specific level (depending on the resistance value setting of the resistor Rg4 and the resistor Rcs), so that the duty cycle of the lighting control signal output by the controller 533 follows the current sampling pin P_CS. The voltage rises and falls, so that the output current/output power is reduced. On the contrary, when the enable circuit does not enable overvoltage protection based on the voltage detection signal, the transistor Mg1 will be turned off in response to the voltage detection signal, and the voltage on the current sampling pin P_CS will not be affected by the enable circuit. At this time, the controller The 533 modulates the duty cycle of the lighting control signal according to a predetermined control mechanism.
请参见图16A，图16A是本申请第六实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。相较于图9A所示实施例，本实施例的电源模块5包含第一整流电路510、滤波电路520及驱动电路530，且更增加辅助供电模块560，其中所述电源模块5也可以包含LED模块50的部份组件。辅助供电模块560耦接于第一滤波输出端521与第二滤波输出端522之间。辅助供电模块560检测第一滤波输出端521与第二滤波输出端522上的滤波后信号，并根据检测结果决定是否提供辅助电力到第一滤波输出端521与第二滤波输出端522。当滤波后信号停止提供或交流准位不足时，即当LED模块50的驱动电压低于一辅助电压时，辅助供电模块560提供辅助电力， 使LED模块50可以持续发光。辅助电压根据辅助供电模块560提供的辅助电源电压而决定。Please refer to FIG. 16A . FIG. 16A is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application. Compared with the embodiment shown in FIG. 9A , the power supply module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 and a driving circuit 530 , and an auxiliary power supply module 560 is added, wherein the power supply module 5 may also include LEDs Parts of module 50. The auxiliary power supply module 560 is coupled between the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 . The auxiliary power supply module 560 detects the filtered signals on the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 , and determines whether to provide auxiliary power to the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 according to the detection results. When the filtered signal stops being supplied or the AC level is insufficient, that is, when the driving voltage of the LED module 50 is lower than an auxiliary voltage, the auxiliary power supply module 560 provides auxiliary power so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light. The auxiliary voltage is determined according to the auxiliary power supply voltage provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 .
请参见图16B，图16B是本申请第七实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。相较于图9A所示实施例，本实施例的电源模块5包含第一整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及辅助供电模块560。辅助供电模块560耦接第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532之间。辅助供电模块560检测第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532的驱动信号，并根据检测结果决定是否提供辅助电力到第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532。当驱动信号停止提供或交流准位不足时，辅助供电模块560提供辅助电力，使LED模块50可以持续发光。Please refer to FIG. 16B . FIG. 16B is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application. Compared with the embodiment shown in FIG. 9A , the power module 5 of this embodiment includes a first rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an auxiliary power supply module 560 . The auxiliary power supply module 560 is coupled between the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 . The auxiliary power supply module 560 detects the driving signals of the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 , and determines whether to provide auxiliary power to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 according to the detection results. When the driving signal stops being provided or the AC level is insufficient, the auxiliary power supply module 560 provides auxiliary power, so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light.
在另一范例实施例中，LED模块50可以仅接收辅助供电模块560所提供的辅助电源作为工作电源，而外部驱动信号则是用以作为辅助供电模块560充电之用。由于本实施例是仅采用辅助供电模块560所提供的辅助电力来点亮LED模块50，亦即不论外部驱动信号为市电所提供或是由镇流器所提供，皆是先对辅助供电模块560的储能单元进行充电，再统一由储能单元对后端供电。藉此，应用本实施例的电源模块架构的LED直管灯可以兼容市电所提供的外部驱动信号。In another exemplary embodiment, the LED module 50 may only receive the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 as the working power supply, and the external driving signal is used for charging the auxiliary power supply module 560 . Because this embodiment only uses the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 560 to light the LED module 50, that is, whether the external driving signal is provided by the commercial power or provided by the ballast, the auxiliary power supply module is firstly supplied to the auxiliary power supply module. The energy storage unit of 560 is charged, and then the back end is powered by the energy storage unit. Thereby, the LED straight tube lamp applying the power module architecture of this embodiment can be compatible with the external driving signal provided by the commercial power.
从结构的角度来看，由于上述的辅助供电模块560是连接在滤波电路520的输出端(第一滤波输出端521及第二滤波输出端522)或驱动电路530的输出端(第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532)之间，因此在一范例实施例中，其电路可以放置在灯管中(例如是邻近于LED模块50的位置)，藉以避免过长的走线造成电源传输损耗。在另一范例实施例中，辅助供电模块560的电路也可以是放置在灯头中，使得辅助供电模块560在充放电时所产生的热能较不易影响LED模块的运作与发光效能。From a structural point of view, since the above-mentioned auxiliary power supply module 560 is connected to the output end of the filter circuit 520 (the first filter output end 521 and the second filter output end 522 ) or the output end of the drive circuit 530 (the first drive output end between the terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532), so in an exemplary embodiment, its circuit can be placed in the lamp tube (for example, adjacent to the LED module 50), so as to avoid the power supply caused by the long trace. transmission loss. In another exemplary embodiment, the circuit of the auxiliary power supply module 560 can also be placed in the lamp head, so that the heat energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 560 during charging and discharging is less likely to affect the operation and luminous efficacy of the LED module.
请参见图16C，图16C是本申请一实施例的辅助供电模块的电路架构示意图。本实施例的辅助供电模块660可应用于上述辅助供电模块560的配置中。辅助供电模块660包含储能单元663以及电压检测电路664。辅助供电模块660具有辅助电源正端661及辅助电源负端662以分别耦接第一滤波输出端521与第二滤波输出端522，或分别耦接第一驱动输出端531及第二驱动输出端532。电压检测电路664检测辅助电源正端661及辅助电源负端662上信号的准位，以决定是否将储能单元663的电力透过辅助电源正端661及辅助电源负端662向外释放。Please refer to FIG. 16C , which is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an auxiliary power supply module according to an embodiment of the present application. The auxiliary power supply module 660 in this embodiment can be applied to the configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 560 described above. The auxiliary power supply module 660 includes an energy storage unit 663 and a voltage detection circuit 664 . The auxiliary power supply module 660 has an auxiliary power supply positive terminal 661 and an auxiliary power supply negative terminal 662 to be respectively coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and the second filtering output terminal 522, or respectively coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532. The voltage detection circuit 664 detects the level of the signals on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply to determine whether to discharge the power of the energy storage unit 663 through the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply.
在本实施例中，储能单元663为电池或超级电容。电压检测电路664更于辅助电源正端661及辅助电源负端662的信号的准位高于储能单元663的电压时，以辅助电源正端661及辅助电源负端662上的信号对储能单元663充电。当辅助电源正端661及辅助电源负端662的信号准位低于储能单元663的电压时，储能单元663经辅助电源正端661及辅助电源负端662对外部放电。In this embodiment, the energy storage unit 663 is a battery or a super capacitor. The voltage detection circuit 664 uses the signals on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply to store energy when the level of the signal on the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply is higher than the voltage of the energy storage unit 663 . Unit 663 is charged. When the signal level of the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 is lower than the voltage of the energy storage unit 663 , the energy storage unit 663 discharges externally through the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 .
电压检测电路664包含二极管665、双载子接面晶体管666及电阻667。二极管665的阳 极耦接储能单元663的正极，阴极耦接辅助电源正端661。储能单元663的负极耦接辅助电源负端662。双载子接面晶体管666的集极耦接辅助电源正端661，射极耦接储能单元663的正极。电阻667一端耦接辅助电源正端661，另一端耦接双载子接面晶体管666的基极。电阻667于双载子接面晶体管666的集极高于射极一个导通电压时，使双载子接面晶体管666导通。当驱动LED直管灯的电源正常时，滤波后信号经第一滤波输出端521与第二滤波输出端522及导通的双载子接面晶体管666对储能单元663充电，或驱动信号经第一驱动输出端531与第二驱动输出端532及导通的双载子接面晶体管666对储能单元663充电，直至双载子接面晶体管666的集极-射击的差等于或小于导通电压为止。当滤波后信号或驱动信号停止提供或准位突然下降时，储能单元663通过二极管665提供电力至LED模块50以维持发光。The voltage detection circuit 664 includes a diode 665 , a bipolar junction transistor 666 and a resistor 667 . The anode of the diode 665 is coupled to the anode of the energy storage unit 663, and the cathode is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply. The negative terminal of the energy storage unit 663 is coupled to the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply. The collector of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply, and the emitter is coupled to the positive terminal of the energy storage unit 663 . One end of the resistor 667 is coupled to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply, and the other end is coupled to the base of the bipolar junction transistor 666 . The resistor 667 turns on the bipolar junction transistor 666 when the collector of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is higher than the emitter by a turn-on voltage. When the power supply for driving the LED straight tube lamp is normal, the filtered signal will charge the energy storage unit 663 through the first filter output terminal 521 and the second filter output terminal 522 and the conductive bipolar junction transistor 666, or the driving signal will be charged through the The first driving output terminal 531 and the second driving output terminal 532 and the turned-on bipolar junction transistor 666 charge the energy storage unit 663 until the collector-shooting difference of the bipolar junction transistor 666 is equal to or less than the conduction. until the voltage is turned on. When the filtered signal or the driving signal stops being provided or the level suddenly drops, the energy storage unit 663 provides power to the LED module 50 through the diode 665 to maintain light emission.
值得注意的是，储能单元663充电时所储存的最高电压将至少低于施加于辅助电源正端661与辅助电源负端662的电压一个双载子接面晶体管666的导通电压。储能单元663放电时由辅助电源正端661与辅助电源负端662输出的电压低于储能单元663的电压一个二极管665的阈值电压。因此，当辅助供电模块开始供电时，所提供的电压将较低(约等于二极管665的阈值电压与双载子接面晶体管666的导通电压的总和)。在图14B所示的实施例中，辅助供电模块供电时电压降低会使LED模块50的亮度明显下降。如此，当辅助供电模块应用于紧急照明系统或常亮照明系统时，用户可以知道主照明电源，例如：市电，异常，而可以进行必要的防范措施。It is worth noting that the highest voltage stored by the energy storage unit 663 during charging will be at least lower than the voltage applied to the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply by a turn-on voltage of the bipolar junction transistor 666 . When the energy storage unit 663 is discharged, the voltage output by the positive terminal 661 of the auxiliary power supply and the negative terminal 662 of the auxiliary power supply is lower than the voltage of the energy storage unit 663 by a threshold voltage of the diode 665 . Therefore, when the auxiliary power module starts to supply power, the supplied voltage will be low (approximately equal to the sum of the threshold voltage of the diode 665 and the turn-on voltage of the bipolar junction transistor 666). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14B , when the auxiliary power supply module supplies power, the lowering of the voltage will significantly reduce the brightness of the LED module 50 . In this way, when the auxiliary power supply module is applied to the emergency lighting system or the always-on lighting system, the user can know that the main lighting power supply, such as the mains, is abnormal, and can take necessary preventive measures.
图16A至图16C实施例的配置除了可应用在单一灯管的应急电源供应之外，其可以应用在多灯管的灯具架构之下。以具有4根平行排列的LED直管灯的灯具为例，在一范例实施例中，所述4根LED直管灯可以是其中一个包含有辅助供电模块。当外部驱动信号异常时，包含有辅助供电模块的LED直管灯会持续被点亮，而其他LED直管灯会熄灭。考虑到光照的均匀性，设置有辅助供电模块的LED直管灯可以是配置在灯具的中间位置。In addition to being applicable to the emergency power supply of a single lamp, the configuration of the embodiment of FIGS. 16A to 16C can be applied to a multi-lamp lamp structure. Taking a lamp with four LED straight tube lamps arranged in parallel as an example, in an exemplary embodiment, one of the four LED straight tube lamps may include an auxiliary power supply module. When the external driving signal is abnormal, the LED straight tube light containing the auxiliary power supply module will continue to be lit, while other LED straight tube lights will be turned off. Considering the uniformity of illumination, the LED straight tube lamp provided with the auxiliary power supply module can be arranged in the middle position of the lamp.
在另一范例实施例中，所述4根LED直管灯可以是其中多个包含有辅助供电模块。当外部驱动信号异常时，包含有辅助供电模块的LED直管灯可以全部同时被辅助电力点亮。如此一来，即使在应急的情况下，灯具整体仍可提供一定的亮度。考虑到光照的均匀性，若是以设置2根LED直管灯包含有辅助供电模块为例，此两根LED直管灯可以是与未设置有辅助供电模块的LED直管灯交错排列配置。In another exemplary embodiment, a plurality of the four LED straight tube lamps may include auxiliary power supply modules. When the external driving signal is abnormal, the LED straight tube lamps including the auxiliary power supply module can all be lit by the auxiliary power at the same time. In this way, even in an emergency situation, the whole lamp can still provide a certain brightness. Considering the uniformity of illumination, if two LED straight tube lamps are provided with an auxiliary power supply module as an example, the two LED straight tube lamps can be arranged in a staggered arrangement with the LED straight tube lamps without the auxiliary power supply module.
在又一范例实施例中，所述4根LED直管灯可以是其中多个包含有辅助供电模块。当外部驱动信号异常时，其中部分LED直管灯会先被辅助电力点亮，并且经过一段时间后(例如是)，另一部分LED直管灯再被辅助电力点亮。如此一来，本实施例可透过与其他灯管协调提供辅助电力顺序的方式，使得LED直管灯在应急状态下的照明时间得以被延长。In yet another exemplary embodiment, a plurality of the four LED straight tube lamps may include auxiliary power supply modules. When the external driving signal is abnormal, some of the LED straight tube lamps will be lit by the auxiliary power first, and after a period of time (for example, yes), the other part of the LED straight tube lamps will be lit by the auxiliary power. In this way, the present embodiment can extend the lighting time of the LED straight tube lamp in an emergency state by coordinating with other lamps to provide the auxiliary power sequence.
其中，所述与其他灯管协调提供辅助电力顺序的实施例可以透过设定不同灯管中的辅助 供电模块的启动时间，或是透过在各灯管内设置控制器的方式来沟通辅助供电模块之间的运作状态，本申请不对此加以限制。Wherein, in the embodiment of coordinating the sequence of providing auxiliary power with other lamps, the auxiliary power supply modules in different lamps can be set to start up time, or the auxiliary power can be communicated by setting a controller in each lamp. The operation state between the power supply modules is not limited in this application.
请参见图16D，图16D是本申请第八实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的电源模块5包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及辅助供电模块760。相较于图16B所示实施例，本实施例的辅助供电模块760是连接在第一接脚501与第二接脚502之间，藉以接收外部驱动信号，并且基于外部驱动信号来进行充放电的动作。Please refer to FIG. 16D . FIG. 16D is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power supply module according to the eighth embodiment of the present application. The power module 5 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an auxiliary power supply module 760 . Compared with the embodiment shown in FIG. 16B , the auxiliary power supply module 760 of this embodiment is connected between the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 to receive an external driving signal and perform charging and discharging based on the external driving signal Actions.
具体而言，在一实施例中，辅助供电模块760的运作可类似于离线式不断电系统(Off-line UPS)。在供电正常时，外部电网/外部驱动信号会直接供电至整流电路510并且同时为辅助供电模块760充电；一旦市电供电品质不稳或断电，辅助供电模块760会切断外部电网与整流电路510之间的回路，并且改为由辅助供电模块760供电至整流电路510，直至电网供电恢复正常。换言之，本实施例的辅助供电模块760可例如是以备援式的方式运作，仅在电网断电时才会介入供电。于此，辅助供电模块760所供应的电源可为交流电或直流电。Specifically, in one embodiment, the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 760 may be similar to an Off-line UPS. When the power supply is normal, the external power grid/external drive signal will directly supply power to the rectifier circuit 510 and charge the auxiliary power supply module 760 at the same time; once the power supply quality of the mains power supply is unstable or power outage, the auxiliary power supply module 760 will cut off the external power grid and the rectifier circuit 510 and the auxiliary power supply module 760 supplies power to the rectifier circuit 510 until the power supply of the grid returns to normal. In other words, the auxiliary power supply module 760 of this embodiment may operate in a redundant manner, for example, and will only intervene in power supply when the power grid is powered off. Here, the power supplied by the auxiliary power supply module 760 may be alternating current or direct current.
在一范例实施例中，辅助供电模块760例如包含储能单元以及电压检测电路，电压检测电路会检测外部驱动信号，并根据检测结果决定是否令储能单元提供辅助电力到整流电路510的输入端。当外部驱动信号停止提供或交流准位不足时，辅助供电模块760的储能单元提供辅助电力，使LED模块50可以基于辅助储能单元所提供的辅助电力而持续发光。在实际应用中，所述用以提供辅助电力的储能单元可以利用电池或超级电容等储能组件来实施，但本申请不以此为限。In an exemplary embodiment, the auxiliary power supply module 760 includes, for example, an energy storage unit and a voltage detection circuit. The voltage detection circuit detects an external driving signal and determines whether to enable the energy storage unit to provide auxiliary power to the input end of the rectifier circuit 510 according to the detection result. . When the external driving signal is stopped or the AC level is insufficient, the energy storage unit of the auxiliary power supply module 760 provides auxiliary power, so that the LED module 50 can continue to emit light based on the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary energy storage unit. In practical applications, the energy storage unit for providing auxiliary power may be implemented by using energy storage components such as batteries or super capacitors, but the present application is not limited thereto.
在另一范例实施例中，如图16E所示，图16E是本申请第一实施例的辅助供电模块的电路方块示意图。辅助供电模块760例如包含充电单元761与辅助供电单元762，充电单元761的输入端连接至外部电网508，并且充电单元761的输出端连接至辅助供电单元762的输入端。辅助供电单元762的输出端连接至外部电网508与整流电路510之间的供电回路。系统中更包括开关单元763，分别连接至外部电网508、辅助供电单元762的输出端以及整流电路510的输入端，其中开关单元763会根据外部电网508的供电状态而选择性的导通外部电网508与整流电路510之间的回路，或是辅助供电模块760与整流电路510之间的回路。具体而言，当外部电网508供电正常时，外部电网508所供应的电力会作为外部驱动信号Sed通过开关单元763提供至整流电路510的输入端。此时，充电单元761会基于外部电网508所供应的电力对辅助供电单元762充电，并且辅助供电单元762会响应于在供电回路上正常传输的外部驱动信号Sed而不对后端的整流电路510放电。当外部电网508供电发生异常或断电时，辅助供电单元762开始通过开关单元763放电以提供辅助电力作为外部驱动信号Sed给整流电路510。In another exemplary embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16E , FIG. 16E is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The auxiliary power supply module 760 includes, for example, a charging unit 761 and an auxiliary power supply unit 762 . The output of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 is connected to the power supply circuit between the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 . The system further includes a switch unit 763, which is respectively connected to the external power grid 508, the output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 and the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510, wherein the switch unit 763 selectively turns on the external power grid according to the power supply status of the external power grid 508. The loop between 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 , or the loop between the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the rectifier circuit 510 . Specifically, when the power supply of the external power grid 508 is normal, the power supplied by the external power grid 508 will be provided to the input terminal of the rectification circuit 510 through the switch unit 763 as the external driving signal Sed. At this time, the charging unit 761 will charge the auxiliary power supply unit 762 based on the power supplied by the external power grid 508, and the auxiliary power supply unit 762 will not discharge the back end rectifier circuit 510 in response to the external driving signal Sed normally transmitted on the power supply circuit. When the power supply of the external power grid 508 is abnormal or powered off, the auxiliary power supply unit 762 starts to discharge through the switch unit 763 to provide auxiliary power as the external drive signal Sed to the rectifier circuit 510 .
请参照图16F，图16F是本申请第九实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的 电源模块5包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及辅助供电模块860。相较于图16D所示实施例，本实施例的辅助供电模块860的输入端Pi1与Pi2会接收外部驱动信号，并且基于外部驱动信号来进行充放电的动作，再将所产生的辅助电源从输出端Po1与Po2提供给后端的整流电路510。从LED直管灯结构的角度来看，LED直管灯的第一接脚(如501)与第二接脚(如502)可以是辅助供电模块860的输入端Pi1与Pi2或是输出端Po1与Po2。若第一接脚501与第二接脚502为辅助供电模块860的输入端Pi1与Pi2，即表示辅助供电模块860设置在LED直管灯的内部；若第一接脚501与第二接脚502为辅助供电模块860的输出端Po1与Po2，即表示辅助供电模块860设置在LED直管灯的外部。后续实施例会对辅助供电模块的具体结构配置做进一步说明。Please refer to FIG. 16F . FIG. 16F is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a ninth embodiment of the present application. The power module 5 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an auxiliary power supply module 860. Compared with the embodiment shown in FIG. 16D , the input terminals Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860 in this embodiment receive external driving signals, and perform charging and discharging actions based on the external driving signals, and then the generated auxiliary power is The output terminals Po1 and Po2 are provided to the rectifier circuit 510 at the back end. From the perspective of the structure of the LED straight tube lamp, the first pin (eg 501 ) and the second pin (eg 502 ) of the LED straight tube lamp can be the input terminals Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860 or the output terminal Po1 with Po2. If the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are the input ends Pi1 and Pi2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860, it means that the auxiliary power supply module 860 is arranged inside the LED straight tube lamp; if the first pin 501 and the second pin are 502 is the output terminals Po1 and Po2 of the auxiliary power supply module 860, which means that the auxiliary power supply module 860 is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp. Subsequent embodiments will further describe the specific structural configuration of the auxiliary power supply module.
在一实施例中，辅助供电模块860的运作类似于在线式不断电系统(On-line UPS)，外部电网/外部驱动信号不会直接供电给整流电路510，而是会透过辅助供电模块860进行供电。换言之，在本实施例中，外部电网会与LED直管灯会相互隔离，并且辅助供电模块860在LED直管灯启动/用电的过程中是全程介入的，进而使得提供给整流电路510的电源不受到外部电网供电不稳定的影响。In one embodiment, the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 860 is similar to an On-line UPS, and the external power grid/external drive signal will not directly supply power to the rectifier circuit 510, but will pass through the auxiliary power supply module 860. Power on. In other words, in this embodiment, the external power grid and the LED straight tube light are isolated from each other, and the auxiliary power supply module 860 is involved in the whole process of starting/using the LED straight tube light, thereby enabling the power supply provided to the rectifier circuit 510 Not affected by the instability of external grid power supply.
图16G是本申请第二实施例的辅助供电模块的电路方块示意图，其绘示在线式操作的辅助供电模块860的范例配置。如图16G所示，辅助供电模块860包括充电单元861以及辅助供电单元862。充电单元861的输入端连接至外部电网508，并且充电单元861的输出端连接至辅助供电单元862的第一输入端。辅助供电单元862的第二输入端连接至外部电网508，并且其输出端连接至整流电路510。具体而言，当外部电网508供电正常时，辅助供电单元862会基于外部电网508所提供的电力进行电源转换，并且据以产生外部驱动信号Sed给后端的整流电路510；在此期间内，充电单元861同时会对辅助供电单元862中的储能单元进行充电。当外部电网508供电发生异常或断电时，辅助供电单元862会基于本身的储能单元所提供的电力进行电源转换，并且据以产生外部驱动信号Sed给后端的整流电路510。在此附带一提的是，本文所述的电源转换动作可以是整流、滤波、升压及降压等电路运作的其中之一或其合理组合，本申请不以此为限。FIG. 16G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application, which illustrates an example configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 860 in an online operation. As shown in FIG. 16G , the auxiliary power supply module 860 includes a charging unit 861 and an auxiliary power supply unit 862 . The input terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the external power grid 508 , and the output terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the first input terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 . The second input of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 is connected to the external grid 508 and its output is connected to the rectifier circuit 510 . Specifically, when the external power grid 508 provides normal power, the auxiliary power supply unit 862 performs power conversion based on the power provided by the external power grid 508, and generates an external drive signal Sed to the rectifier circuit 510 at the back end accordingly; during this period, the charging The unit 861 simultaneously charges the energy storage unit in the auxiliary power supply unit 862 . When the power supply of the external power grid 508 is abnormal or powered off, the auxiliary power supply unit 862 performs power conversion based on the power provided by its own energy storage unit, and generates an external drive signal Sed to the back end rectifier circuit 510 accordingly. It should be mentioned here that the power conversion action described herein may be one of circuit operations such as rectification, filtering, boosting, and bucking, or a reasonable combination thereof, which is not limited in the present application.
在另一实施例中，辅助供电模块860的运作类似于在线互动式不断电系统(Line-Interactive UPS)，其基本运作类似于离线式不断电系统，但差异在于于在线互动式的运作底下，辅助供电模块860会随时监控外部电网的供电情况，并且其本身具备升压和减压补偿电路，以在外部电网供电情况不理想时，即时校正，进而减少切换利用电池进行供电的频率。In another embodiment, the operation of the auxiliary power supply module 860 is similar to the Line-Interactive UPS, and its basic operation is similar to the offline UPS, but the difference lies in the line-interactive operation. The auxiliary power supply module 860 monitors the power supply of the external power grid at any time, and has a boost and voltage reduction compensation circuit to correct the power supply in real time when the external power grid is unsatisfactory, thereby reducing the frequency of switching to use the battery for power supply.
图16H是本申请第三实施例的辅助供电模块的电路方块示意图，其绘示在线互动式操作的辅助供电模块860的范例配置。如图16H所示，辅助供电模块860例如包含充电单元861、辅助供电单元862以及开关单元863。充电单元861的输入端连接至外部电网508，并且充电 单元861的输出端连接至辅助供电单元862的输入端。开关单元863分别连接至外部电网508、辅助供电单元862的输出端以及整流电路510的输入端，其中开关单元863会根据外部电网508的供电状态而选择性的导通外部电网508与整流电路510之间的回路，或是辅助供电单元862与整流电路510之间的回路。具体而言，当外部电网508供电正常时，开关单元863会导通外部电网508与整流电路510之间的回路，并且断开辅助供电单元862与整流电路510之间的回路，使得外部电网508所供应的电力作为外部驱动信号Sed通过开关单元863提供至整流电路510的输入端。此时，充电单元861会基于外部电网508所供应的电力对辅助供电单元862充电。当外部电网508供电发生异常或断电时，开关单元863会切换为导通辅助供电单元862与整流电路510之间的回路，使得辅助供电单元862开始放电以提供辅助电力作为外部驱动信号Sed给整流电路510。FIG. 16H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the third embodiment of the present application, which illustrates an example configuration of the auxiliary power supply module 860 for online interactive operation. As shown in FIG. 16H , the auxiliary power supply module 860 includes, for example, a charging unit 861 , an auxiliary power supply unit 862 and a switch unit 863 . The input terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the external power grid 508, and the output terminal of the charging unit 861 is connected to the input terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862. The switch unit 863 is respectively connected to the external power grid 508 , the output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510 , wherein the switch unit 863 selectively conducts the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510 according to the power supply state of the external power grid 508 The loop between them, or the loop between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510 . Specifically, when the power supply of the external power grid 508 is normal, the switch unit 863 will turn on the loop between the external power grid 508 and the rectifier circuit 510, and disconnect the loop between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510, so that the external power grid 508 The supplied power is provided to the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510 through the switch unit 863 as the external drive signal Sed. At this time, the charging unit 861 charges the auxiliary power supply unit 862 based on the power supplied by the external power grid 508 . When the power supply of the external power grid 508 is abnormal or powered off, the switch unit 863 will switch to conduct the circuit between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifier circuit 510, so that the auxiliary power supply unit 862 starts to discharge to provide auxiliary power as the external drive signal Sed to the Rectifier circuit 510 .
在上述实施例中，所述辅助供电单元762/862所提供的辅助电力可为交流电或直流电。当提供的电力为交流电时，辅助供电单元762/862例如包括一储能单元与一直流转交流转换器(DC-AC converter)；当提供的电力为直流电时，辅助供电单元762/862例如包括一储能单元与一直流转直流转换器(DC-DC converter)，或仅包括储能单元，本申请不以此为限。所述储能单元可例如为若干储能电池组合的电池模块。所述直流转直流转换器可例如为升压型、降压型或降升压型直流转直流转换电路。其中，辅助供电模块760/860更包括电压检测电路(未绘示)。电压检测电路可用来检测外部电网508的工作状态，并且根据检测结果发出信号来控制开关单元763/863或辅助供电单元762/862，藉以决定LED直管灯工作在普通照明模式(即，通过外部电网508供电)或应急模式(即，通过辅助供电模块760/860供电)。其中，所述开关单元763/863可以利用三端开关或互补切换的两开关来实现。若采用互补切换的两开关实施，则所述两开关可分别串接在外部电网508的供电回路上以及辅助供电模块760/860的供电回路上；并且控制方式为其中之一开关导通时，其中另一开关截止。In the above embodiment, the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 may be alternating current or direct current. When the supplied power is AC power, the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 includes, for example, an energy storage unit and a DC-AC converter; when the supplied power is DC power, the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862 includes, for example, a The energy storage unit and the direct current to direct current converter (DC-DC converter), or only the energy storage unit, is not limited in this application. The energy storage unit may be, for example, a battery module in which several energy storage batteries are combined. The DC-to-DC converter may be, for example, a boost, buck, or buck-boost DC-to-DC converter circuit. The auxiliary power supply module 760/860 further includes a voltage detection circuit (not shown). The voltage detection circuit can be used to detect the working state of the external power grid 508, and send a signal according to the detection result to control the switch unit 763/863 or the auxiliary power supply unit 762/862, so as to determine that the LED straight tube lamp works in the normal lighting mode (that is, through the external Grid 508 power supply) or emergency mode (ie, power supply through auxiliary power supply modules 760/860). The switch units 763/863 can be implemented by using a three-terminal switch or a complementary switching two switches. If implemented with two switches of complementary switching, the two switches can be connected in series to the power supply loop of the external power grid 508 and the power supply loop of the auxiliary power supply modules 760/860 respectively; and the control method is that when one of the switches is turned on, The other switch is turned off.
在一范例实施例中，所述开关单元763/863可采用继电器来实施。该继电器类似于2种模式的选择开关，若工作于普通照明模式(即市电作为外部驱动信号)，通电后，该继电器通电吸合，这时LED直管灯的电源模块不与辅助供电模块760/860电性连接；若市电异常，该继电器的电磁吸力消失，恢复至初始的位置这时LED直管灯的电源模块通过继电器与辅助供电模块电性连接760/860，使辅助供电模块工作。In an exemplary embodiment, the switch unit 763/863 may be implemented by a relay. The relay is similar to the selection switch of 2 modes. If it works in the general lighting mode (that is, the mains is used as the external driving signal), after the power is turned on, the relay is energized and closed. At this time, the power module of the LED straight tube lamp is not connected to the auxiliary power supply module. 760/860 is electrically connected; if the mains is abnormal, the electromagnetic suction of the relay disappears and returns to the original position. At this time, the power module of the LED straight tube lamp is electrically connected to the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 through the relay, so that the auxiliary power supply module Work.
从整体照明系统的角度来看，应用在普通照明场合时，辅助供电模块760/860不工作，由市电给提供电力；并由市电给辅助供电模块中的电池模块充电。应用在应急场合时，电池模块通过升压型直流转直流转换电路将电池模块的电压升压至LED模块50工作时所需电压，LED模块50发光。通常升压后电压为升压前电池模块电压的4-10倍(较佳的选用4～6倍)；LED模块50工作时所需电压介于40-80V(较佳的介于55-75V,本案中选用60V)。From the perspective of the overall lighting system, when used in general lighting applications, the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 does not work, and the mains power supply provides power; and the mains power supplies the battery module in the auxiliary power supply module to charge. When applied in emergency situations, the battery module boosts the voltage of the battery module to the voltage required when the LED module 50 operates through a boost-type DC-DC conversion circuit, and the LED module 50 emits light. Usually, the voltage after boosting is 4-10 times the voltage of the battery module before boosting (preferably 4-6 times); the voltage required for the LED module 50 to work is between 40-80V (preferably between 55-75V) , 60V is selected in this case).
在本实施例中，选用单颗呈圆柱形的电池；该电池采用金属壳封装，可降低电池内电解 液泄漏的风险。在本实施例中，电池采用模块化的设计，采用2颗电池单元串连接然后封装构成一个电池模块，其中多个所述电池模块可顺次的电性连接(可为串连或并连)并设置在灯具内，这样便于后期的对其维护；若有部分电池模块损坏，可及时替换损坏的电池模块，而无需替换所有电池模块。电池模块可设置成圆柱体状，其内径稍大于电池单元的外径，这样电池单元顺次放入电池模块，在电池模块的两端形成正极端及负极端。在一实施例中，多个串连的电池模块的电压低于36V。在其他的实施例中，电池模块可设置成长方体状，长方体的宽度略大于电池的外径，这样电池牢固的夹在电池模块内，该模块上设有采用卡扣式可插拔结构，或其它能容易插拔拼装的结构。In this embodiment, a single cylindrical battery is selected; the battery is packaged with a metal shell, which can reduce the risk of electrolyte leakage in the battery. In this embodiment, the battery adopts a modular design, and two battery cells are connected in series and then packaged to form a battery module, wherein a plurality of the battery modules can be electrically connected in sequence (can be connected in series or in parallel). And set in the lamp, which is convenient for its maintenance in the later stage; if some battery modules are damaged, the damaged battery modules can be replaced in time without replacing all the battery modules. The battery module can be arranged in a cylindrical shape, the inner diameter of which is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the battery cells, so that the battery cells are placed in the battery module in sequence, and positive and negative terminals are formed at both ends of the battery module. In one embodiment, the voltage of a plurality of battery modules connected in series is lower than 36V. In other embodiments, the battery module can be set in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the width of the rectangular parallelepiped is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the battery, so that the battery is firmly clamped in the battery module, the module is provided with a snap-type pluggable structure, or Other structures that can be easily plugged and assembled.
在本实施例中，所述充电单元761/861可例如为管理电池模块的BMS模块(电池管理系统)，主要就是为了智能化管理及维护各个电池模块，防止电池出现过充电和过放电，延长电池的使用寿命，监控电池的状态。In this embodiment, the charging unit 761/861 can be, for example, a BMS module (battery management system) that manages battery modules, mainly to intelligently manage and maintain each battery module, prevent overcharging and overdischarging of the battery, and prolong the Battery life, monitor battery status.
该BMS模块预设可外接的接口，定期检测时通过连接该接口读取电池模块内的电池的信息。若检测出电池模块有异常时替换相应的电池模块。The BMS module is preset with an external interface, and the information of the battery in the battery module is read by connecting to the interface during regular detection. If it is detected that the battery module is abnormal, replace the corresponding battery module.
在其他的实施例中，电池模块内的电池数量可多颗，如3颗，4颗，30颗等，这时电池模块内的电池间可采样串联接，串并联的混连接，具体视应用的场合；若采用锂电池时，单颗锂电池的电压3.7V左右，电池数量可适当减少以使得电池系统的电压低于36V。In other embodiments, the number of batteries in the battery module can be multiple, such as 3, 4, 30, etc. In this case, the batteries in the battery module can be sampled in series connection, or mixed in series and parallel connection, depending on the application. If the lithium battery is used, the voltage of a single lithium battery is about 3.7V, and the number of batteries can be appropriately reduced to make the voltage of the battery system lower than 36V.
本实施例中的继电器，选用电磁式继电器，其主要由铁芯、线圈、衔铁、触点簧片等组成的。其工作原理：只要在线圈两端加上一定的电压，线圈中就会流过一定的电流，从而产生电磁效应，衔铁就会在电磁力吸引的作用下克服返回弹簧的拉力吸向铁芯，从而带动衔铁的动触点与静触点(常开触点)吸合。当线圈断电后，电磁的吸力也随之消失，衔铁就会在弹簧的反作用力恢复至初始的位置，使动触点与原来的静触点(常闭触点)吸合。这样吸合、释放，从而达到了在电路中的导通、切断的目的。对于继电器的“常开、常闭”触点，可以这样来区分：继电器线圈未通电时处于断开状态的静触点，称为“常开触点”；处于接通状态的静触点称为“常闭触点”。The relay in this embodiment is an electromagnetic relay, which is mainly composed of an iron core, a coil, an armature, a contact reed, and the like. Its working principle: as long as a certain voltage is applied to both ends of the coil, a certain current will flow in the coil, thereby generating an electromagnetic effect, and the armature will overcome the pulling force of the return spring and attract to the iron core under the action of electromagnetic attraction. Thereby, the movable contact of the armature is driven to engage with the static contact (normally open contact). When the coil is powered off, the electromagnetic suction also disappears, and the armature will return to the original position under the reaction force of the spring, so that the moving contact and the original static contact (normally closed contact) are attracted. In this way, the suction and release are achieved, so as to achieve the purpose of conducting and cutting off in the circuit. For the "normally open and normally closed" contacts of the relay, it can be distinguished as follows: the static contacts that are in the open state when the relay coil is not energized are called "normally open contacts"; the static contacts that are in the connected state are called "normally open contacts". It is a "normally closed contact".
在一范例实施例中，LED模块被外部驱动信号点亮的亮度与被辅助电力点亮的亮度不同。藉此，使用者可在观察到灯管亮度改变时，发现可能有外部电源供电异常的问题发生，从而尽速排除问题。换言之，本实施例的辅助供电模块760/860可藉由在外部驱动信号发生异常时，提供功率与外部驱动信号不同的辅助电力给LED模块使用，从而令LED模块具有不同的亮度，以作为外部驱动信号是否正常供给的指示。举例来说，在本实施例中，当LED模块是根据外部驱动信号点亮时，其亮度可例如为1600-2000流明；当LED模块是根据辅助供电模块760/860所提供的辅助电力点亮时，其亮度可例如为200-250流明。从辅助供电模块760/860的角度来看，为了让LED模块在点亮时具有200-250流明的亮度，辅助供电模块760/860的 输出功率可以例如为1瓦至5瓦，但本申请不以此为限。此外，辅助供电模块760/860中的储能组件的电容量可例如为1.5瓦小时至7.5瓦小时以上，藉以使LED模块可基于辅助电力而在亮度200-250流明下持续点亮超过90分钟，但本申请同样不以此为限。In an exemplary embodiment, the brightness of the LED module illuminated by the external driving signal is different from the brightness illuminated by the auxiliary power. In this way, when the user observes the change of the brightness of the lamp tube, it is possible to find out that there may be a problem that the external power supply is abnormal, so as to eliminate the problem as soon as possible. In other words, the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 of this embodiment can provide auxiliary power with different power from the external driving signal to the LED module when the external driving signal is abnormal, so that the LED module has different brightness and can be used as an external power supply. Indication of whether the drive signal is normally supplied. For example, in this embodiment, when the LED module is lit according to an external driving signal, its brightness can be, for example, 1600-2000 lumens; when the LED module is lit according to the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 , its brightness can be, for example, 200-250 lumens. From the perspective of the auxiliary power supply module 760/860, in order for the LED module to have a brightness of 200-250 lumens when it is lit, the output power of the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 can be, for example, 1 watt to 5 watts, but this application does not This is the limit. In addition, the electric capacity of the energy storage components in the auxiliary power supply modules 760/860 can be, for example, 1.5 watt hours to more than 7.5 watt hours, so that the LED modules can be continuously lit for more than 90 minutes at a brightness of 200-250 lumens based on the auxiliary power. , but this application is also not limited to this.
从结构的角度来看，如图16I所示，图16I是本申请第一实施例的辅助供电模块的配置示意图。在本实施例中，所述的辅助供电模块760/860(为使说明简要，图式上仅标示760，底下也以辅助供电模块760进行叙述)除了可如前述实施例配置在灯管1中之外，其还可以配置在灯头3中。于此配置底下，辅助供电模块760可以从灯头3内部连接至对应的第一接脚501与第二接脚502，藉以接收提供至第一接脚501与第二接脚502上的外部驱动信号。相较于将辅助供电模块760置于灯管1中的配置而言，由于本实施例的辅助供电模块760是配置在灯管1两侧的灯头3内，因此会距离灯管1内的LED模块较远，使得辅助供电模块760在充放电时所产生的热能较不易影响LED模块的运作与发光效能。除此之外，辅助供电模块760与LED直管灯的电源模块可以配置在同一侧灯头中，或分别置于两侧灯头中。其中，若将辅助供电模块760与电源模块置于不同灯头中可以使整体电路布局有更大的空间。From a structural point of view, as shown in FIG. 16I , FIG. 16I is a schematic configuration diagram of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 (for the sake of brevity, only 760 is indicated in the drawing, and the auxiliary power supply module 760 is also described below) can be configured in the lamp tube 1 as in the previous embodiment. Besides, it can also be arranged in the base 3 . Under this configuration, the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be connected to the corresponding first pin 501 and the second pin 502 from the lamp head 3 , so as to receive the external driving signal provided to the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 . Compared with the configuration in which the auxiliary power supply module 760 is placed in the lamp tube 1 , since the auxiliary power supply module 760 in this embodiment is disposed in the lamp caps 3 on both sides of the lamp tube 1 , it will be farther away from the LEDs in the lamp tube 1 . The module is far away, so that the heat energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 760 during charging and discharging is less likely to affect the operation and luminous efficacy of the LED module. In addition, the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the power supply module of the LED straight tube lamp can be arranged in the same side lamp holder, or respectively placed in the two side lamp holders. Wherein, if the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the power supply module are placed in different lamp heads, the overall circuit layout can have more space.
在另一实施例中，所述辅助供电模块760亦可设置在与LED直管灯相对应的灯座中，如图16J所示，图16J是本申请第二实施例的辅助供电模块的配置示意图。灯座1_LH包括基座101_LH以及连接插座102_LH，其中基座101_LH内装配有电源线路，并且适于锁合/贴合至墙面或天花板等固定物件上。连接插座102_LH上具有与LED直管灯上的接脚(如第一接脚501与第二接脚502)相对应的插槽，其中插槽会与对应的电源线路相互电性连接。在本实施例中，连接插座102_LH可以是与基座101_LH一体成形，或是可拆卸地装设至基座101_LH上，本申请不以此为限。In another embodiment, the auxiliary power supply module 760 can also be disposed in the lamp socket corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp, as shown in FIG. 16J , which is the configuration of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application Schematic. The lamp socket 1_LH includes a base 101_LH and a connection socket 102_LH, wherein the base 101_LH is equipped with a power circuit and is suitable for locking/fitting to a fixed object such as a wall or a ceiling. The connection socket 102_LH has slots corresponding to the pins (eg, the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 ) on the LED straight tube lamp, wherein the slots are electrically connected to the corresponding power lines. In this embodiment, the connection socket 102_LH may be integrally formed with the base 101_LH, or may be detachably mounted on the base 101_LH, which is not limited in the present application.
当LED直管灯装上灯座1_LH时，两端灯头3上的接脚会分别插设至对应的连接插座102_LH的插槽内，藉以与对应的电源线路电性连接，以令外部驱动信号可被提供至对应的接脚上。在本实施例中，辅助供电模块760是设置在连接插座102_LH中，并且连接电源线路以接收外部驱动信号。以左侧灯头3的配置为例，当第一接脚501与第二接脚502插设至左侧连接插座102_LH的插槽时，辅助供电模块760会通过插槽电性连接第一接脚501与第二接脚502，进而实现如图16D的连接配置。When the LED straight tube lamp is installed on the lamp socket 1_LH, the pins on the lamp caps 3 at both ends will be inserted into the corresponding sockets of the connection socket 102_LH respectively, so as to be electrically connected with the corresponding power supply circuit, so that the external driving signal can be provided to the corresponding pins. In this embodiment, the auxiliary power supply module 760 is disposed in the connection socket 102_LH, and is connected to a power line to receive an external driving signal. Taking the configuration of the left lamp head 3 as an example, when the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are inserted into the slot of the left connecting socket 102_LH, the auxiliary power supply module 760 will be electrically connected to the first pin through the slot. 501 and the second pin 502, thereby realizing the connection configuration as shown in FIG. 16D.
相较于将辅助供电模块760置于灯头3中的实施例而言，由于连接插座102_LH可设计为可拆卸的配置，因此在一范例实施例中，连接插座102_LH与辅助供电模块760可以被整合为一个模块化的配置，以便在辅助供电模块760发生故障或寿命用尽时，透过更换模块化的连接插座102_LH即可换上新的辅助供电模块760来继续使用，而不需要替换整个LED直管灯。换言之，本实施例的配置除了具有可以降低辅助供电模块760所产生的热能对LED模块影响的优点之外，更可以透过模块化的设计而使辅助供电模块760的更换更为简便，而不需因辅助供电模块760发生问题即更换整支LED直管灯，使LED直管灯的耐用性提高。除此之外， 在一范例实施例中，辅助供电模块760也可以设置在灯座1_LH的基座101_LH中、或者设置在灯座1_LH的外部，本申请不以此为限。Compared with the embodiment in which the auxiliary power supply module 760 is placed in the lamp head 3, since the connection socket 102_LH can be designed to be detachable, in an exemplary embodiment, the connection socket 102_LH and the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be integrated It is a modular configuration so that when the auxiliary power supply module 760 fails or expires, a new auxiliary power supply module 760 can be replaced by replacing the modular connection socket 102_LH to continue its use without replacing the entire LED Straight tube light. In other words, the configuration of this embodiment not only has the advantage of reducing the influence of the thermal energy generated by the auxiliary power supply module 760 on the LED module, but also makes the replacement of the auxiliary power supply module 760 easier through the modular design, without the need for The entire LED straight tube lamp needs to be replaced due to a problem with the auxiliary power supply module 760, so as to improve the durability of the LED straight tube lamp. Besides, in an exemplary embodiment, the auxiliary power supply module 760 may also be disposed in the base 101_LH of the lamp socket 1_LH, or disposed outside the lamp socket 1_LH, which is not limited in the present application.
总的来说，辅助供电模块760可分为(1)整合在LED直管灯内部，以及(2)独立于LED直管灯外部等两种配置方式。在辅助供电模块760独立于LED直管灯外部的配置范例中，若为离线式的辅助电源供电方式，则辅助供电模块760与外部电网的电源可以经由不同的接脚给到LED直管灯，或是以至少共享一根接脚的方式给到LED直管灯。另一方面，若为在线式或在线互动式的辅助电源供电方式，则外部电网的电力信号不会直接给到LED直管灯的接脚上，而是会先给到辅助供电模块760，再由辅助供电模块760会通过LED直管灯的接脚将信号给到LED直管灯内部的电源模块。底下就独立于LED直管灯外部的辅助供电模块(简称独立辅助供电模块)与LED直管灯的整体配置做进一步说明。In general, the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be divided into two configuration modes: (1) integrated inside the LED straight tube light, and (2) independent of the outside of the LED straight tube light. In the configuration example in which the auxiliary power supply module 760 is independent from the outside of the LED straight tube light, if it is an offline auxiliary power supply mode, the power supply of the auxiliary power supply module 760 and the external power grid can be supplied to the LED straight tube light through different pins. Or give it to the LED straight tube light by sharing at least one pin. On the other hand, if it is an online or online interactive auxiliary power supply mode, the power signal from the external power grid will not be directly supplied to the pins of the LED straight tube light, but will be supplied to the auxiliary power supply module 760 first, and then The auxiliary power supply module 760 sends a signal to the power module inside the LED straight tube light through the pins of the LED straight tube light. The following is a further description of the auxiliary power supply module (referred to as the independent auxiliary power supply module) that is independent from the outside of the LED straight tube light and the overall configuration of the LED straight tube light.
请参见图16K，图16K是本申请第六实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。LED直管灯照明系统包含LED直管灯600以及辅助供电模块960。本实施例的LED直管灯600包含整流电路510与540、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及LED模块(未绘示)。整流电路510与540可以分别是图11A所绘示的全波整流电路610或是图11B所绘示的半波整流电路710，其中整流电路510的两输入端分别连接第一接脚501与第二接脚502，并且整流电路540的两输入端分别连接第三接脚503与第四接脚504。Please refer to FIG. 16K. FIG. 16K is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the sixth embodiment of the present application. The LED straight tube light lighting system includes the LED straight tube light 600 and an auxiliary power supply module 960 . The LED straight tube lamp 600 of this embodiment includes rectifier circuits 510 and 540 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an LED module (not shown). The rectifier circuits 510 and 540 may be the full-wave rectifier circuit 610 shown in FIG. 11A or the half-wave rectifier circuit 710 shown in FIG. 11B , wherein the two input ends of the rectifier circuit 510 are respectively connected to the first pin 501 and the first pin 501 and the first pin 501 . There are two pins 502 , and two input ends of the rectifier circuit 540 are respectively connected to the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 .
在本实施例中，LED直管灯600是以双端进电的配置作为范例，外部电网508是连接至LED直管灯600两侧灯头上的接脚501与503，并且辅助供电模块960是连接至LED直管灯600两侧灯头上的接脚502与504。亦即，外部电网508与辅助供电模块960是通过不同的接脚供电给LED直管灯600使用。于此附带一提的是，本实施例虽绘示为双端进电的配置为例，但本申请不以此为限。在另一实施例中，外部电网508也可以通过同一侧灯头上的第一接脚501与第二接脚502供电(即，单端进电的配置)。此时，辅助供电模块960可通过另一侧灯头上的第三接脚503与第四接脚504供电。换言之，无论在单端进电或双端进电的配置底下，透过选择对应的整流电路配置，即可利用LED直管灯600中原先未被使用的接脚(如502与504)作为接收辅助电源的接口，进而在LED直管灯600中实现应急照明功能的整合。In this embodiment, the LED straight tube lamp 600 is configured with double-ended power supply as an example, the external power grid 508 is connected to the pins 501 and 503 on the lamp caps on both sides of the LED straight tube lamp 600, and the auxiliary power supply module 960 is Connect to the pins 502 and 504 on the lamp caps on both sides of the LED straight tube lamp 600 . That is, the external power grid 508 and the auxiliary power supply module 960 supply power to the LED straight tube lamp 600 through different pins. Incidentally, although this embodiment is shown as an example of the configuration of double-ended power feeding, the present application is not limited to this. In another embodiment, the external power grid 508 can also supply power through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 on the same side of the lamp holder (ie, the configuration of single-ended power feeding). At this time, the auxiliary power supply module 960 can supply power through the third pin 503 and the fourth pin 504 on the other side of the lamp holder. In other words, no matter under the configuration of single-ended power supply or double-ended power supply, by selecting the corresponding rectifier circuit configuration, the unused pins (such as 502 and 504) of the LED straight tube lamp 600 can be used as receivers. The interface of the auxiliary power supply, and then realize the integration of the emergency lighting function in the LED straight tube light 600 .
请参见图16L，图16L是本申请第七实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。LED直管灯照明系统包含LED直管灯700以及辅助供电模块1060。本实施例的LED直管灯700包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及LED模块(未绘示)。整流电路510可例如是如图11D至图11F其中之一所示的具有三个桥臂的整流电路910，其中整流电路510具有三个输入信号接收端P1、P2及P3。输入信号接收端P1连接至第一接脚501，输入信号接收端P2连接至第二接脚502，并且适于通过第二接脚502连接辅助供电模块1060，并且输入信号接收端P3适于通过第三接脚503连接至辅助供电模块1060。Please refer to FIG. 16L. FIG. 16L is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the seventh embodiment of the present application. The LED straight tube light lighting system includes the LED straight tube light 700 and the auxiliary power supply module 1060 . The LED straight tube lamp 700 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 and an LED module (not shown). The rectifier circuit 510 can be, for example, a rectifier circuit 910 with three bridge arms as shown in one of FIGS. 11D to 11F , wherein the rectifier circuit 510 has three input signal receiving terminals P1 , P2 and P3 . The input signal receiving end P1 is connected to the first pin 501, the input signal receiving end P2 is connected to the second pin 502, and is suitable for connecting the auxiliary power supply module 1060 through the second pin 502, and the input signal receiving end P3 is suitable for passing through The third pin 503 is connected to the auxiliary power supply module 1060 .
在本实施例中，LED直管灯700同样是以双端进电的配置作为范例，外部电网508是连接至LED直管灯700两侧灯头上的接脚501与503。与前述实施例不同的是，本实施例的辅助供电模块1060除了会连接至第二接脚502外，还会与外部电网508共享第三接脚503。在此配置底下，外部电网508所提供的电源是通过第一接脚501与第三接脚503给到整流电路510的信号接收端P1与P3，并且辅助供电模块1060所提供的电源是通过第二接脚502与第三接脚503给到整流电路510的信号接收端P2与P3。更具体的说，若外部电网508耦接到第一接脚501与第三接脚503的线路分别为火线(L)与中性线(N)时，则辅助供电模块1060是与外部电网508共享中性线(N)，而火线则为各自独立。换句话说，信号接收端P3为外部电网508与辅助供电模块1060的共享端。In this embodiment, the LED straight tube lamp 700 is also configured with double-ended power supply as an example. Different from the previous embodiment, the auxiliary power supply module 1060 of this embodiment not only connects to the second pin 502 but also shares the third pin 503 with the external power grid 508 . Under this configuration, the power provided by the external power grid 508 is supplied to the signal receiving terminals P1 and P3 of the rectifier circuit 510 through the first pin 501 and the third pin 503, and the power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 is provided by the first pin 501 and the third pin 503. The second pin 502 and the third pin 503 are supplied to the signal receiving ends P2 and P3 of the rectifier circuit 510 . More specifically, if the lines of the external power grid 508 coupled to the first pin 501 and the third pin 503 are the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N), respectively, the auxiliary power supply module 1060 is connected to the external power grid 508 . Neutral (N) is shared, while live is separate. In other words, the signal receiving end P3 is the shared end of the external power grid 508 and the auxiliary power supply module 1060 .
就运作上来说，当外部电网508可正常供电时，整流电路510可透过信号接收端P1与P3所对应的桥臂进行全波整流，藉以供电给LED模块使用。在外部电网508供电异常时，整流电路510可透过信号接收端P2与P3接收辅助供电模块1060所提供的辅助电源，藉以供电给LED模块使用。其中，整流电路510的二极管单向导通特性会将外部驱动信号与辅助电源的输入隔离，使得两者不会互相影响，且同样可达到在外部电网508发生异常时提供辅助电源的效果。在实际应用中，整流电路510可以选用快速恢复二极管来实施，藉以因应应急电源输出电流的高频特性。In terms of operation, when the external power grid 508 can supply power normally, the rectifier circuit 510 can perform full-wave rectification through the bridge arms corresponding to the signal receiving terminals P1 and P3, so as to supply power to the LED module. When the power supply of the external power grid 508 is abnormal, the rectifier circuit 510 can receive the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 through the signal receiving terminals P2 and P3, so as to supply power to the LED module. The diode unidirectional conduction characteristic of the rectifier circuit 510 isolates the external drive signal from the input of the auxiliary power supply, so that the two will not affect each other, and can also achieve the effect of providing auxiliary power when the external power grid 508 is abnormal. In practical applications, the rectifier circuit 510 can be implemented with a fast recovery diode, so as to respond to the high frequency characteristics of the output current of the emergency power supply.
除此之外，由于本实施例透过共享第三接脚503的方式来接收辅助供电模块1060所提供的辅助电源，因此LED直管灯700还会有一根未被使用的第四接脚(未绘示)可以作为其他控制功能的信号输入接口。所述其他控制功能可以例如是调光功能、通信功能、感测功能等，本申请不以此为限。底下列举LED直管灯700进一步整合调光控制功能的实施范例来进行说明。In addition, since this embodiment receives the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply module 1060 by sharing the third pin 503, the LED straight tube lamp 700 also has an unused fourth pin ( (not shown) can be used as a signal input interface for other control functions. The other control functions may be, for example, a dimming function, a communication function, a sensing function, etc., and the present application is not limited thereto. The following is an example in which the LED straight tube lamp 700 further integrates the dimming control function for illustration.
请参见图16M，图16M是本申请第八实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。本实施例的LED直管灯800包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及LED模块50。本实施例的LED直管灯照明系统配置大致上与前述图16L实施例相同，两者差异在于本实施例的LED直管灯照明系统更包含耦接LED直管灯800的第四接脚504的调光控制电路570，其中调光控制电路570会通过第四接脚504耦接驱动电路530，藉以调控驱动电路530提供给LED模块50的驱动电流，使得LED模块50的亮度及/或色温可随之变化。Please refer to FIG. 16M. FIG. 16M is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the eighth embodiment of the present application. The LED straight tube lamp 800 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an LED module 50 . The configuration of the LED straight tube light lighting system of this embodiment is substantially the same as that of the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 16L , the difference between the two is that the LED straight tube light lighting system of this embodiment further includes a fourth pin 504 coupled to the LED straight tube light 800 . The dimming control circuit 570 shown in the figure, wherein the dimming control circuit 570 is coupled to the driving circuit 530 through the fourth pin 504, so as to regulate the driving current provided by the driving circuit 530 to the LED module 50, so that the brightness and/or color temperature of the LED module 50 can be changed accordingly.
举例来说，调光控制电路570可以例如是由可变阻抗组件与信号转换电路所组成的电路模块，使用者可以通过调控可变阻抗组件的阻抗，使得调光控制电路570产生具有相应准位的调光信号，所述调光信号在经信号转换电路转换为符合驱动电路530格式的信号型态后，被传递给驱动电路530，使得驱动电路530可基于此调光信号来调整输出给LED模块50的驱动电流大小。其中，若欲调整LED模块50的亮度，可以通过调整驱动信号的频率或参考准位来实现；若欲调整LED模块50的色温，则可通过调整LED模块50中的红色LED单元的亮度 来实现，但本申请不以此为限。For example, the dimming control circuit 570 can be, for example, a circuit module composed of a variable impedance component and a signal conversion circuit. The user can adjust the impedance of the variable impedance component to make the dimming control circuit 570 generate a corresponding level. After the dimming signal is converted into a signal type conforming to the format of the driving circuit 530 by the signal conversion circuit, the dimming signal is transmitted to the driving circuit 530, so that the driving circuit 530 can adjust the output to the LED based on the dimming signal. The size of the drive current of the module 50 . Wherein, if the brightness of the LED module 50 is to be adjusted, it can be realized by adjusting the frequency or reference level of the driving signal; if the color temperature of the LED module 50 is to be adjusted, the brightness of the red LED unit in the LED module 50 can be adjusted. , but this application is not limited to this.
另外应注意的是，所述的辅助供电模块960、1060在硬件配置上也可以参照图16I与16J的配置，并且可获得相同的有益效果。In addition, it should be noted that the hardware configuration of the auxiliary power supply modules 960 and 1060 can also refer to the configurations of FIGS. 16I and 16J, and the same beneficial effects can be obtained.
图16D至图16M实施例的配置除了可应用在单一灯管的应急电源供应之外，其同样可以应用在多灯管并联的架构之下来提供应急的辅助电力。具体而言，在多个LED直管灯并联的架构下，各LED直管灯的对应接脚会相互并接，藉以接收相同的外部驱动信号。举例来说，各LED直管灯的第一接脚501会相互并接，并且各LED直管灯的第二接脚会相互并接，以此类推。在此配置底下，辅助供电模块760/860可以等效为连接至并联的每一LED直管灯的接脚上。因此，只要辅助供电模块760/860的输出功率足够点亮所有并联的LED直管灯，即可在外部电源发生异常时(即，外部驱动信号无法正常供应)，提供辅助电力来点亮所有并联的LED直管灯作为应急照明。在实际应用中，若是以4支LED直管灯并联的架构为例，辅助供电模块760可设计为具有电容量为1.5瓦小时至7.5瓦小时与输出功率为1瓦至5瓦的储能单元。在此规格底下，当辅助供电模块760提供辅助电力来点亮LED模块时，灯具整体至少可具有200-250流明的亮度，并且可持续点亮90分钟。In addition to being applicable to the emergency power supply of a single lamp, the configurations of the embodiments of FIGS. 16D to 16M can also be applied to provide emergency auxiliary power under the structure of multiple lamps in parallel. Specifically, in a structure in which a plurality of LED straight tube lamps are connected in parallel, the corresponding pins of the LED straight tube lamps are connected in parallel with each other, so as to receive the same external driving signal. For example, the first pins 501 of each LED straight tube light are connected in parallel with each other, and the second pins of each LED straight tube light are connected in parallel with each other, and so on. Under this configuration, the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 can be equivalently connected to the pin of each parallel LED straight tube lamp. Therefore, as long as the output power of the auxiliary power supply module 760/860 is sufficient to light up all the parallel LED straight tube lamps, it can provide auxiliary power to light up all the parallel LED lights when the external power supply is abnormal (ie, the external driving signal cannot be supplied normally). The LED straight tube light is used as emergency lighting. In practical applications, if taking the structure of four LED straight tube lamps in parallel as an example, the auxiliary power supply module 760 can be designed as an energy storage unit with a capacity of 1.5Wh to 7.5Wh and an output power of 1W to 5W . Under this specification, when the auxiliary power supply module 760 provides auxiliary power to light the LED module, the whole lamp can have a brightness of at least 200-250 lumens, and can be continuously lit for 90 minutes.
在多灯管的灯具架构之下，类似于图16A至图16C实施例所述，本实施例可以在灯具的其中一根灯管中设置辅助供电模块，或是在灯具的多根灯管中设置辅助供电模块，其中针对光均匀性考虑的灯管配置方式同样适用于本实施例中。本实施例与前述图16A至图16C实施例应用在多灯管的灯具架构下的主要差异在于即使本实施例只有单一灯管设置有辅助供电模块，其仍可透过辅助供电模块对其他灯管供电。Under the multi-tube lamp structure, similar to the embodiments in FIGS. 16A to 16C , in this embodiment, an auxiliary power supply module may be provided in one of the lamps of the lamp, or in multiple lamps of the lamp. An auxiliary power supply module is provided, wherein the configuration of the lamp tube considering the light uniformity is also applicable to this embodiment. The main difference between this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiments in FIGS. 16A to 16C applied to a multi-lamp lamp structure is that even if only a single lamp is provided with an auxiliary power supply module in this embodiment, it can still supply other lamps through the auxiliary power supply module. Tube power supply.
在此应注意的是，虽然此处的说明是以4支LED直管灯并联架构为例来说明，但本领域技术人员在参酌上述的说明后，应可了解如何在2支、3支、或大于4支的LED直管灯并联架构下，选用合适的储能单元来实施，故只要是辅助供电模块760可同时供电给多支并联的LED直管灯的其中之一或多个，以令对应的LED直管灯可反应于辅助电力而具有特定亮度的实施态样，皆属于本实施例所描述的范围。It should be noted here that although the description here takes the parallel structure of 4 LED straight tube lamps as an example, those skilled in the art should be able to understand how to connect 2 LEDs, 3 LEDs, Or in the parallel structure of more than 4 LED straight tube lamps, a suitable energy storage unit is selected for implementation, so as long as the auxiliary power supply module 760 can supply power to one or more of multiple parallel LED straight tube lamps at the same time, The implementations in which the corresponding LED straight tube lamp can have a specific brightness in response to the auxiliary power all fall within the scope described in this embodiment.
在另一范例实施例中，图16D至16M的辅助供电模块560、660、760、960、1060可进一步依据一点灯信号来决定是否提供辅助电力给LED直管灯使用。具体而言，所述点灯信号可以是反应灯开关切换状态的一指示信号。举例来说，所述点灯信号的准位会根据灯开关的切换而被调整为第一准位(例如为高逻辑电平)或与第一准位不同的第二准位(例如为低逻辑电平)。当使用者将灯开关切换至点亮的位置时，所述点灯信号会被调整至第一准位；当用户将灯开关切换至关闭的位置时，所述点灯信号会被调整至第二准位。换言之，当点灯信号为第一准位时，即指示灯开关被切换至点亮的位置；当点灯信号为第二准位时，即指示灯开关被切换至关闭的位置。其中，点灯信号的产生可以藉由一检测灯开关切换状态的电路来实现。In another exemplary embodiment, the auxiliary power supply modules 560 , 660 , 760 , 960 , and 1060 of FIGS. 16D to 16M can further determine whether to provide auxiliary power for the LED straight tube light according to the one-light signal. Specifically, the lighting signal may be an indication signal reflecting the switching state of the light switch. For example, the level of the lighting signal will be adjusted to a first level (eg, a high logic level) or a second level (eg, a low logic level) different from the first level according to the switching of the light switch level). When the user switches the light switch to the on position, the lighting signal will be adjusted to the first level; when the user switches the light switch to the off position, the lighting signal will be adjusted to the second level bit. In other words, when the lighting signal is at the first level, the indicator switch is switched to the ON position; when the lighting signal is at the second level, the indicator switch is switched to the OFF position. Wherein, the generation of the lighting signal can be realized by a circuit for detecting the switching state of the light switch.
在又一范例实施例中，辅助供电模块560、660、760、860、960、1060可更包括一点灯判断电路，其用以接收点灯信号，并且根据点灯信号的准位与电压检测电路的检测结果来决定是否令储能单元供电给后端使用。具体而言，基于点灯信号的准位与电压检测电路的检测结果可能有下列三种状态：(1)点灯信号为第一准位且外部驱动信号正常提供；(2)点灯信号为第一准位且外部驱动信号停止提供或交流准位不足；以及(3)点灯信号为第二准位且外部驱动信号停止提供。其中，状态(1)为使用者开启灯开关且外部电源供电正常的情况、状态(2)为使用者开启灯开关但外部供电发生异常、状态(3)为使用者关闭灯开关使得外部电源被停止提供。In yet another exemplary embodiment, the auxiliary power supply modules 560 , 660 , 760 , 860 , 960 , 1060 may further include a lighting judging circuit, which is used for receiving the lighting signal, and according to the level of the lighting signal and the detection of the voltage detection circuit The result is to decide whether to make the energy storage unit supply power to the back end. Specifically, the detection result based on the level of the lighting signal and the voltage detection circuit may have the following three states: (1) the lighting signal is at the first level and the external drive signal is normally provided; (2) the lighting signal is at the first level and (3) the lighting signal is at the second level and the supply of the external drive signal is stopped. Among them, state (1) is when the user turns on the light switch and the external power supply is normal, state (2) is when the user turns on the light switch but the external power supply is abnormal, and state (3) is when the user turns off the light switch so that the external power supply is turned off. stop offering.
在本范例实施例中，状态(1)与状态(3)皆属于正常的状态，即使用者开灯时外部电源正常提供以及使用者关灯时外部电源停止提供。因此，在状态(1)与状态(3)之下，辅助供电模块不会对后端提供辅助电力。更具体的说，点灯判断电路会根据状态(1)与状态(3)的判断结果，令储能单元不对后端供电。其中，在状态(1)下是由外部驱动信号直接输入至整流电路510，并且外部驱动信号对储能单元充电；在状态(3)下是外部驱动信号停止提供，因此不对储能单元充电。In this exemplary embodiment, both the state (1) and the state (3) are normal states, that is, the external power supply is normally provided when the user turns on the light and the external power supply is stopped when the user turns off the light. Therefore, in states (1) and (3), the auxiliary power supply module does not provide auxiliary power to the rear end. More specifically, the lighting judgment circuit will prevent the energy storage unit from supplying power to the back end according to the judgment results of the state (1) and the state (3). Wherein, in state (1), the external drive signal is directly input to the rectifier circuit 510, and the external drive signal charges the energy storage unit; in state (3), the external drive signal stops providing, so the energy storage unit is not charged.
在状态(2)下，其表示使用者开灯时外部电源并未正常供电至LED直管灯，故此时点灯判断电路会根据状态(2)的判断结果，令储能单元对后端供电，使得LED模块50基于储能单元所提供的辅助电力发光。In state (2), it means that the external power supply does not normally supply power to the LED straight tube light when the user turns on the light, so at this time, the lighting judgment circuit will make the energy storage unit supply power to the back end according to the judgment result of state (2). The LED module 50 is made to emit light based on the auxiliary power provided by the energy storage unit.
基此，在所述点灯判断电路的应用底下，LED模块50可以有三段不同的亮度变化。第一段是外部电源正常供电时，LED模块50具有第一亮度(例如1600-2200流明)，第二段是外部电源未正常供电而改以辅助电力供电时，LED模块50具有第二亮度(例如200-250流明)，第三段是使用者自行关闭电源，使得外部电源未被提供至LED直管灯，此时LED模块50具有第三亮度(不点亮LED模块)。Based on this, under the application of the lighting judgment circuit, the LED module 50 can have three different brightness changes. The first segment is when the external power supply is normally powered, and the LED module 50 has the first brightness (eg, 1600-2200 lumens), and the second segment is when the external power supply is not normally powered and the auxiliary power is used instead, the LED module 50 has the second brightness ( For example, 200-250 lumens), the third stage is that the user turns off the power by himself, so that the external power is not provided to the LED straight tube light, at this time, the LED module 50 has the third brightness (the LED module is not lit).
更具体的说，搭配图16C实施例来看，所述点灯判断电路可例如为串接在辅助电源正端661与辅助电源负端662之间的开关电路(未绘示)，所述开关电路的控制端接收点灯信号。其中，当点灯信号为第一准位时，所述开关电路会反应于点灯信号而导通，进而在外部驱动信号正常供应时，经辅助电源正端661与辅助电源负端662对储能单元663充电(状态1)；或者在外部驱动信号停止提供或交流准位不足时，令储能单元663经辅助电源正端661与辅助电源负端662提供辅助电力给后端的LED模块50使用(状态2)。另一方面，当点灯信号为第二准位时，所述开关电路会反应于点灯信号而截止，此时即便外部驱动信号停止提供或交流准位不足，储能单元663也不会对后端提供辅助电力。More specifically, referring to the embodiment of FIG. 16C , the lighting judgment circuit can be, for example, a switch circuit (not shown) connected in series between the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 . The control terminal receives the lighting signal. Wherein, when the lighting signal is at the first level, the switch circuit will be turned on in response to the lighting signal, and then when the external driving signal is normally supplied, the auxiliary power supply positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power supply negative terminal 662 are connected to the energy storage unit. 663 is charged (state 1); or when the external drive signal stops being provided or the AC level is insufficient, the energy storage unit 663 can provide auxiliary power to the rear LED module 50 via the auxiliary power positive terminal 661 and the auxiliary power negative terminal 662 for use (state 2). On the other hand, when the lighting signal is at the second level, the switch circuit will be turned off in response to the lighting signal. At this time, even if the external driving signal stops being supplied or the AC level is insufficient, the energy storage unit 663 will not affect the rear end. Provide auxiliary power.
在上述辅助供电模块的应用中，若将辅助供电单元(如762与862)的电路设计成开环控制，即辅助供电单元的输出电压无反馈信号，若负载开路时，会导致该辅助供电模块的输出 电压一直上升，进而烧毁。为了解决所述问题，本揭露提出多个带有开路保护的辅助供电模块的电路实施例，如图16N与图16O所示。In the application of the above auxiliary power supply module, if the circuit of the auxiliary power supply unit (such as 762 and 862) is designed to be open-loop control, that is, the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply unit has no feedback signal. If the load is open, it will cause the auxiliary power supply module. The output voltage keeps rising and burns out. In order to solve the problem, the present disclosure proposes a plurality of circuit embodiments of auxiliary power supply modules with open-circuit protection, as shown in FIG. 16N and FIG. 16O .
图16N是本申请第一实施例的辅助供电模块的电路架构示意图。请参照图16N，在本实施例中，辅助供电模块1160包括充电单元1161和辅助供电单元1162，其中辅助供电单元1162包括提供电压Vcc的储能单元1163、变压器、采样模块1164以及芯片控制模块1165。在辅助供电模块1160中，搭配图16E来看，变压器包含有原边绕组组件L1，副边绕组组件L2。副边绕组组件L2一端电性连接开关单元763进而电性连接LED直管灯500的一端(整流电路510的输入端)，副边绕组组件L2的另一端电性连接LED直管灯500的另一端。采样模块1164包含有绕组L3，绕组L3与副边绕组组件L2缠绕在副边侧；通过绕组L3采样副边绕组组件L2的电压，若采样的电压超过设定的阈值时，反馈至芯片控制模块，通过芯片控制模块调整与原边绕组组件L1电连接的切换开关M1的开关频率。进而控制副边侧输出的电压，从而实现开路保护的目的。FIG. 16N is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the first embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 16N , in this embodiment, the auxiliary power supply module 1160 includes a charging unit 1161 and an auxiliary power supply unit 1162 , wherein the auxiliary power supply unit 1162 includes an energy storage unit 1163 for supplying a voltage Vcc, a transformer, a sampling module 1164 and a chip control module 1165 . In the auxiliary power supply module 1160, seen in conjunction with FIG. 16E, the transformer includes a primary winding component L1 and a secondary winding component L2. One end of the secondary winding assembly L2 is electrically connected to the switch unit 763 and then electrically connected to one end of the LED straight tube lamp 500 (the input end of the rectifier circuit 510 ), and the other end of the secondary winding assembly L2 is electrically connected to the other end of the LED straight tube lamp 500 . one end. The sampling module 1164 includes a winding L3, and the winding L3 and the secondary winding assembly L2 are wound on the secondary side; the voltage of the secondary winding assembly L2 is sampled through the winding L3, and if the sampled voltage exceeds the set threshold, it is fed back to the chip control module , the switching frequency of the switch M1 electrically connected to the primary winding assembly L1 is adjusted by the chip control module. Then, the output voltage of the secondary side is controlled, so as to achieve the purpose of open circuit protection.
具体而言，所述变压器具有原边侧单元、副边侧单元，该原边侧单元包含有储能单元1163、原边绕组组件L1及切换开关M1。储能单元1163的正极电性连接原边绕组组件L1的同名端(即，打点端)，并且储能单元1163的负极电性连接至接地端。原边绕组组件L1的异名端电性连接至切换开关M1(以MOS为例)的漏极。切换开关M1的栅极电性连接至芯片控制模块1165，并且切换开关M1的源极连接至接地端。副边侧单元包含有，副边绕组组件L2、二极管D1以及电容C1。副边绕组组件L2的异名端电性连接二极管D1的阳极，副边绕组组件L2的同名端电性连接电容C1的一端。二极管D1的阴极电性连接电容C1的另一端。电容C1的两端构成辅助电源输出端V1，V2(相当于图16K中的辅助供电模块960的两端或图16L、16M中的辅助供电模块1060的两端)。Specifically, the transformer has a primary side unit and a secondary side unit, and the primary side unit includes an energy storage unit 1163 , a primary winding component L1 and a switch M1 . The positive pole of the energy storage unit 1163 is electrically connected to the same-named terminal (ie, the dot terminal) of the primary winding assembly L1, and the negative pole of the energy storage unit 1163 is electrically connected to the ground terminal. The opposite end of the primary winding element L1 is electrically connected to the drain of the switch M1 (take MOS as an example). The gate of the switch M1 is electrically connected to the chip control module 1165 , and the source of the switch M1 is connected to the ground terminal. The secondary side unit includes a secondary winding component L2, a diode D1 and a capacitor C1. The opposite end of the secondary winding component L2 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D1, and the identical end of the secondary winding component L2 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C1. The cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1. Both ends of the capacitor C1 constitute auxiliary power output terminals V1 and V2 (equivalent to both ends of the auxiliary power supply module 960 in FIG. 16K or both ends of the auxiliary power supply module 1060 in FIGS. 16L and 16M).
采样模块1164包含有第三绕组组件L3、二极管D2，电容C2及电阻R1。第三绕组组件L3的异名端电性连接二极管D2的阳极，第三绕组组件L3的同名端电性连接电容C2与电阻R1的一端。二极管D2的阴极电性连接电容C2与电阻R1的另一端(即A端)。电容C2与电阻R1通过A端电性连接芯片控制模块1165。The sampling module 1164 includes a third winding element L3, a diode D2, a capacitor C2 and a resistor R1. The opposite end of the third winding element L3 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D2, and the identical end of the third winding element L3 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2 and the resistor R1. The cathode of the diode D2 is electrically connected to the other end (ie, the A end) of the capacitor C2 and the resistor R1. The capacitor C2 and the resistor R1 are electrically connected to the chip control module 1165 through the A terminal.
芯片控制模块1165包含有芯片1166、二极管D3、电容C3-C5以及电阻R2-R4。芯片1166的接地端(GT)接地；芯片1166的输出端(OUT)电性连接切换开关M1的栅极；芯片1166的触发端(TRIG)电性连接电阻R2的一端(B端)，芯片1166的放电端(DIS)电性连接电阻R2的另一端；芯片1166的复位端(RST)与控制定电压端(CV)端分别电性连接电容C3与C4后接地；芯片1166的放电端(DIS)经由电阻R2电性连接电容C5后接地。芯片1166的供电端(VC端)接收电压Vcc并电性连接电阻R3的一端；电阻R3的另一端电性连接B端。二极管D3的阳极电性连接A端，二极管D3的阴极电性连接电阻R4的一端，电阻R4的另一端电性连接B端。The chip control module 1165 includes a chip 1166, a diode D3, capacitors C3-C5 and resistors R2-R4. The ground terminal (GT) of the chip 1166 is grounded; the output terminal (OUT) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the gate of the switch M1; the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to one end (B terminal) of the resistor R2, and the chip 1166 The discharge terminal (DIS) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor R2; the reset terminal (RST) and the control constant voltage terminal (CV) terminal of the chip 1166 are respectively electrically connected to the capacitors C3 and C4 and then grounded; the discharge terminal (DIS) of the chip 1166 ) is electrically connected to the capacitor C5 through the resistor R2 and then grounded. The power supply terminal (VC terminal) of the chip 1166 receives the voltage Vcc and is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R3; the other end of the resistor R3 is electrically connected to the B terminal. The anode of the diode D3 is electrically connected to the A terminal, the cathode of the diode D3 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R4, and the other end of the resistor R4 is electrically connected to the B terminal.
接下来描述，上述实施例的动作；若辅助供电模块1160工作在正常状态，这时辅助供电模块1160的输出端V1与V2间的输出电压较低，通常低于某值(如低于100V，本实施中，V1，V2间电压60V-80V)。这时采样模块1164中的A点的采样对地电压低，电阻R4上流过微小的电流(可忽略)。若辅助供电模块1160异常时，这时辅助供电模块1160的节点V1与V2之间的电压较高(如超过300V)，这时采样模块1164中的A点的采样电压高，电阻R4上流过较大的电流；由于流过该较大的电流使得电容C5的放电时间变长，但电容C5的充电时间未变；相当于调整开关的占空比；进而使切换开关M1的截止时间延长。对变压器的输出侧而言，输出能量变小，输出电压不再升高，从而达到了开路保护的目的。Next, the operation of the above-mentioned embodiment will be described; if the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is working in a normal state, the output voltage between the output terminals V1 and V2 of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is relatively low, usually lower than a certain value (such as lower than 100V, In this implementation, the voltage between V1 and V2 is 60V-80V). At this time, the sampling-to-ground voltage of point A in the sampling module 1164 is low, and a small current (negligible) flows through the resistor R4. If the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is abnormal, the voltage between the nodes V1 and V2 of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is relatively high (for example, more than 300V), and the sampling voltage of the point A in the sampling module 1164 is high, and a relatively high voltage flows through the resistor R4. Due to the large current flowing, the discharge time of the capacitor C5 becomes longer, but the charging time of the capacitor C5 does not change; it is equivalent to adjusting the duty cycle of the switch; thus prolonging the cut-off time of the switch M1. For the output side of the transformer, the output energy becomes smaller and the output voltage no longer rises, thus achieving the purpose of open-circuit protection.
上述方案中，芯片1166的触发端(TRIG)电性连接电阻R2支路进而电性连接放电端DIS端，B端的电压处于1/3Vcc-2/3Vcc之间时触发DIS端。若辅助供电模块1160工作在正常状态(即输出的电压未超过设定的阈值)，A端的电压能小于1/3Vcc；若辅助供电模块1160异常时，A点的电压能达到甚至超过1/2Vcc。In the above solution, the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1166 is electrically connected to the resistor R2 branch and then electrically connected to the discharge terminal DIS terminal. When the voltage of the B terminal is between 1/3Vcc-2/3Vcc, the DIS terminal is triggered. If the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is working in a normal state (that is, the output voltage does not exceed the set threshold), the voltage of the A terminal can be less than 1/3Vcc; if the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is abnormal, the voltage of the A point can reach or even exceed 1/2Vcc .
上述方案中，在辅助供电模块1160处于正常状态时，芯片1166的DIS端触发时(按照其预定的逻辑)正常放电；其波形如图16P所示，其中图16P为辅助供电模块1160处于正常状态时芯片1166中的放电端DIS充放电及输出端OUT的时序图。在芯片1166的放电端DIS被触发时(即，电容C5处于放电阶段)，芯片的输出端OUT会输出低电平的信号，以及在芯片1166的放电端DIS未被触发时(即，电容C5处于充电阶段)，芯片1166的输出端OUT会输出高电平。藉此，芯片1166即可通过输出端OUT所输出的信号的高/低电平而控制切换开关M1的导通/截止。In the above scheme, when the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in a normal state, the DIS terminal of the chip 1166 is triggered (according to its predetermined logic) to discharge normally; its waveform is shown in Figure 16P, wherein Figure 16P shows that the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in a normal state The timing diagram of the charging and discharging of the discharge terminal DIS and the output terminal OUT in the chip 1166 is shown. When the discharge terminal DIS of the chip 1166 is triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is in the discharge stage), the output terminal OUT of the chip will output a low-level signal, and when the discharge terminal DIS of the chip 1166 is not triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is in the discharge stage) In the charging stage), the output terminal OUT of the chip 1166 will output a high level. In this way, the chip 1166 can control the on/off of the switch M1 through the high/low level of the signal output by the output terminal OUT.
在辅助供电模块1160处于异常时其波形如图16Q所示，其中图16Q为辅助供电模块1160处于异常状态时芯片1166中的放电端DIS充放电及输出端的时序图。从时序可看出无论辅助供电模块1160是否处于正常状态，电容C5充电所需的时间一致；在处于异常时，由于有电流经B端流入放电端DIS，这样相当于延长了电容C5的放电时间，因此使得输出能量变小，并且令输出电压不再升高，从而达到了开路保护的目的。When the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in an abnormal state, the waveform is shown in FIG. 16Q , wherein FIG. 16Q is a timing diagram of the discharge terminal DIS in the chip 1166 charging and discharging and the output terminal when the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in an abnormal state. It can be seen from the timing sequence that no matter whether the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is in a normal state, the time required to charge the capacitor C5 is the same; when it is in an abnormal state, since there is current flowing into the discharge terminal DIS through the B terminal, this is equivalent to prolonging the discharge time of the capacitor C5 , so that the output energy becomes smaller, and the output voltage is no longer increased, so as to achieve the purpose of open circuit protection.
上述方案中，芯片控制模块1166可选用具有时间调整功能的芯片(如555定时芯片)；进而控制切换开关M1的截止时间。上述方案只需要简单的电阻、电容、即可实现延时作用。无需复杂的控制算法。上述方案中电压Vcc的电压范围介于4.5V-16V。In the above solution, the chip control module 1166 can select a chip with a time adjustment function (eg, a 555 timing chip); and then controls the cut-off time of the switch M1. The above scheme only needs simple resistors and capacitors to realize the delay effect. No complicated control algorithms are required. The voltage range of the voltage Vcc in the above scheme is between 4.5V-16V.
通过上述的方案使得辅助供电模块1160的开路电压限定在一定的值以下(如300V以下，具体的值可通行选取合适的参数决定)。Through the above solution, the open circuit voltage of the auxiliary power supply module 1160 is limited to be below a certain value (eg, below 300V, the specific value can be determined by selecting appropriate parameters).
需要说明的是上述方案中，电路拓扑中显示的电子元器件，如电阻、电容、二极管、切换开关等为该组件的等效图，在实际使用中可由多个按照一定的规则连接而成。It should be noted that in the above scheme, the electronic components shown in the circuit topology, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, switches, etc., are equivalent diagrams of the components, and in actual use, multiple electronic components can be connected according to certain rules.
图16O是本申请第二实施例的辅助供电模块的电路架构示意图。请参照图16O，辅助供 电模块1260包括充电单元1261和辅助供电单元1262，其中辅助供电单元1262包括提供电压Vcc的储能单元1263、变压器、采样模块1264以及芯片控制模块1265。图16O实施例与图16N所示的实施例区别在于，本实施例的采样模块1264是采用光耦传感器来实施。FIG. 16O is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the auxiliary power supply module according to the second embodiment of the present application. 16O, the auxiliary power supply module 1260 includes a charging unit 1261 and an auxiliary power supply unit 1262, wherein the auxiliary power supply unit 1262 includes an energy storage unit 1263 that provides a voltage Vcc, a transformer, a sampling module 1264, and a chip control module 1265. The difference between the embodiment in FIG. 16O and the embodiment shown in FIG. 16N is that the sampling module 1264 in this embodiment is implemented by using an optocoupler sensor.
变压器包含有原边绕组组件L1及副边绕组组件L2。原边绕组组件L1与切换开关M1的配置与前述实施例相同。副边绕组组件L2的同名端电性连接二极管D1的阳极，并且副边绕组组件L2的异名端电性连接电容C1的一端。二极管D1的阴极电性连接电容C1的另一端。电容C1的两端即为辅助电源输出端V1与V2。The transformer includes a primary winding component L1 and a secondary winding component L2. The configuration of the primary winding assembly L1 and the switch M1 is the same as that of the previous embodiment. The same-named end of the secondary winding element L2 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode D1, and the different-named end of the secondary winding element L2 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C1. The cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1. The two ends of the capacitor C1 are the auxiliary power output terminals V1 and V2.
采样模块1264包含有光电耦合器PD，光电耦合器PD中的光电二极管的阳极侧电性连接二极管D1的阴极及电容C1的一端，光电二极管的阴极侧电性连接电阻R4的一侧，电阻R4的另一侧电性连接钳压组件Rcv的一端，钳压组件Rcv的另一端电性连接电容C1的另一端。光电耦合器PD中的三极管的集极、射极分别电性连接电阻R3的两端。The sampling module 1264 includes an optocoupler PD, the anode side of the photodiode in the optocoupler PD is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode D1 and one end of the capacitor C1, the cathode side of the photodiode is electrically connected to one side of the resistor R4, and the resistor R4 The other side of the clamp is electrically connected to one end of the clamping component Rcv, and the other end of the clamping component Rcv is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C1. The collector and the emitter of the triode in the optocoupler PD are electrically connected to both ends of the resistor R3, respectively.
芯片控制模块1265包含有芯片1266、电容C3-C5以及电阻R2和R3。芯片1266的供电端(VC端)电性连接电压Vcc及光电耦合器PD中的三极管的集极；芯片1266的放电端(DIS端)电性连接电阻R2的一端，电阻R2的另一端电性连接光电耦合器PD中的三极管的射极；芯片1266的取样端(THRS端)电性连接光电耦合器PD中的三极管的射极及经电容C5电性接地；芯片1266的接地端(GT端)电性接地；芯片1266的复位端(RST)经电容C3电性接地；芯片1266的定电压端(CV端)经电容C4电性接地；芯片1266的触发端(TRIG)电性连接取样端(THRS端)；芯片1266的输出端(OUT)电性连接切换开关M1的栅极。The chip control module 1265 includes a chip 1266, capacitors C3-C5, and resistors R2 and R3. The power supply terminal (VC terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to the voltage Vcc and the collector of the triode in the optocoupler PD; the discharge terminal (DIS terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the other end of the resistor R2 is electrically connected Connect the emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD; the sampling terminal (THRS terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to the emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD and is electrically grounded through the capacitor C5; the ground terminal (GT terminal) of the chip 1266 ) is electrically grounded; the reset terminal (RST) of the chip 1266 is electrically grounded through the capacitor C3; the constant voltage terminal (CV terminal) of the chip 1266 is electrically grounded through the capacitor C4; the trigger terminal (TRIG) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to the sampling terminal (THRS terminal); the output terminal (OUT) of the chip 1266 is electrically connected to the gate of the switch M1.
接下来描述，上述实施例的动作，在正常工作时，辅助电源输出端(V1，V2)输出的电压低于钳压组件Rcv的钳位电压，流过电阻R4的电流I1很小，可忽略；流经光电耦合器PD中的三极管集电极与发射极的电流I2很小。Next, the operation of the above-mentioned embodiment will be described. During normal operation, the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply output terminals (V1, V2) is lower than the clamping voltage of the clamping voltage component Rcv, and the current I1 flowing through the resistor R4 is very small and can be ignored. ; The current I2 flowing through the collector and emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD is very small.
若负载开路，辅助电源输出端(V1，V2)输出的电压上升，超过钳压组件Rcv的阈值时，钳压组件Rcv导通，这样流过限流电阻R4的电流I1增加，使得光电耦合器PD二极管发光，流经光电耦合器PD中的三极管集电极与发射极的电流I2成比例的增加，电流I2补偿了电容C5通过电阻R2的放电电流，使得电容C5的放电时间加长，这样相应的加长了开关的关断时间(即开关占空比变小)，输出能量变小，副边侧输出能量相应的变小，输出电压不再升高，从而实现开路保护。If the load is open-circuited, the output voltage of the auxiliary power supply output terminals (V1, V2) rises, and when the threshold value of the clamping component Rcv is exceeded, the clamping component Rcv is turned on, so that the current I1 flowing through the current limiting resistor R4 increases, making the optocoupler The PD diode emits light, and the current I2 flowing through the collector and emitter of the transistor in the optocoupler PD increases proportionally. The current I2 compensates the discharge current of the capacitor C5 through the resistor R2, so that the discharge time of the capacitor C5 is prolonged, so that the corresponding The turn-off time of the switch is lengthened (that is, the duty cycle of the switch is reduced), the output energy is reduced, the output energy of the secondary side is correspondingly reduced, and the output voltage is no longer increased, thereby realizing open-circuit protection.
上述方案中，钳压组件Rcv为压敏电阻、TVS(Transient Voltage Suppressor二极管，又称为瞬态抑制二极管)、稳压二极管。钳压组件Rcv的触发阈值选取100V-400V,较佳的选取150V-350V。本实施例中选取300V。In the above scheme, the clamping voltage component Rcv is a varistor, a TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor diode, also known as a transient suppression diode), and a Zener diode. The triggering threshold of the clamping voltage component Rcv is 100V-400V, preferably 150V-350V. In this embodiment, 300V is selected.
上述方案中，电阻R4主要其限流作用，其阻值选取20K欧姆-1M欧姆，较佳的选取20K欧姆-500KM欧姆，本实施例中选取50K欧姆。上述方案中，电阻R3主要其限流作用，其阻 值选取1K欧姆-100K欧姆，较佳的选取5K欧姆-50KM欧姆，本实施例中选取6K欧姆。上述方案中，电容C5，其容值选取1nF-1000nF，较佳的选取1nF-100nF，本实施例中选取2.2nF。上述方案中，电容C4，其容值选取1nF-1pF，较佳的选取5nF-50nF，本实施例中选取10nF。上述方案中，电容C1，其容值选取1uF-100uF，较佳的选取1uF-10uF，本实施例中选取4.7uF。In the above scheme, the resistor R4 is mainly used for its current limiting function, and its resistance value is 20K ohm-1M ohm, preferably 20K ohm-500KM ohm, and 50K ohm in this embodiment. In the above-mentioned scheme, resistance R3 is mainly its current limiting effect, and its resistance value selects 1K ohm-100K ohm, preferably 5K ohm-50KM ohm, and in the present embodiment, selects 6K ohm. In the above scheme, the capacitance value of the capacitor C5 is 1nF-1000nF, preferably 1nF-100nF, and 2.2nF in this embodiment. In the above scheme, the capacitance value of the capacitor C4 is 1nF-1pF, preferably 5nF-50nF, and 10nF in this embodiment. In the above solution, the capacitance value of the capacitor C1 is 1uF-100uF, preferably 1uF-10uF, and 4.7uF in this embodiment.
图16N与图16O方案中，辅助供电模块1160/1260中包含的储能单元1263可是电池或超级电容。在上述方案中，辅助供电模块1160/1260的直流电源可通过BMS(电池管理系统)进行管理，在普通照明模式下进行充电。或直接省略BMS，在普通照明模式对直流电源进行充电。通过选取合适的元器件参数，是以较小的电流进行充电(不超过300mA的电流)。In the solutions of FIGS. 16N and 16O, the energy storage unit 1263 included in the auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 may be a battery or a super capacitor. In the above solution, the DC power supply of the auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 can be managed by a BMS (battery management system), and it can be charged in the general lighting mode. Or simply omit the BMS and charge the DC power supply in normal lighting mode. By selecting appropriate component parameters, charging is performed with a small current (current not exceeding 300mA).
采用图16N或16O实施例的辅助供电模块1160/1260，其电路拓扑简单，且无需专用集成芯片。使用较少的组件实现开路保护。提高镇流器的信赖性。另外该方案的应急镇流器，其电路拓扑为输出隔离型。降低漏电流的隐患。Using the auxiliary power supply module 1160/1260 of the embodiment of FIG. 16N or 16O, its circuit topology is simple, and no dedicated integrated chip is required. Open circuit protection is achieved with fewer components. Improve the reliability of the ballast. In addition, the emergency ballast of this scheme has an output isolation type circuit topology. Reduce the hidden danger of leakage current.
总的来说，上述图16N与图16O方案的原理在于，利用检测模块，采样输出端的电压(电流)信息，若检测的信息超过设定的阈值时，通过延长控制芯片放电端的放电时间，延长开关的关断时间，来调整开关的占空比(对控制芯片而言，其放电端(DIS)及/或取样端(THRS)的工作电压介于1/3Vcc-2/3Vcc，工作电容C5的充电时间未变，放电时间变长)，对变压器的输出侧而言，输出能量变小，输出电压不在升高，从而达到了开路保护的目的。In general, the principle of the solutions shown in Figure 16N and Figure 16O is that the detection module is used to sample the voltage (current) information of the output terminal. If the detected information exceeds the set threshold, the discharge time of the discharge terminal of the control chip is extended to prolong the The turn-off time of the switch is used to adjust the duty cycle of the switch (for the control chip, the working voltage of the discharge terminal (DIS) and/or the sampling terminal (THRS) is between 1/3Vcc-2/3Vcc, and the working capacitor C5 For the output side of the transformer, the output energy becomes smaller and the output voltage does not increase, thus achieving the purpose of open circuit protection.
图16P与图16Q绘示芯片的输出端OUT在初始输出高电平的情况下，输出端OUT与放电端DIS触发的时序图。其中，图16P是本申请一实施例的辅助供电模块处于正常状态时的信号时序图；图16Q是本申请一实施例的辅助供电模块处于异常状态时的信号时序图(如：负载开路)。芯片1266的输出端OUT初始输出高电平，这时未触发放电端DIS(即，电容C5充电)；当放电端DIS被触发时(即，电容C5放电)，输出端OUT始输出低电平。芯片1266通过输出端OUT的信号控制切换开关M1的导通/截止。FIG. 16P and FIG. 16Q are timing diagrams of triggering of the output terminal OUT and the discharge terminal DIS when the output terminal OUT of the chip initially outputs a high level. 16P is a signal timing diagram of the auxiliary power supply module of an embodiment of the present application when it is in a normal state; FIG. 16Q is a signal timing diagram of the auxiliary power supply module of an embodiment of the present application when it is in an abnormal state (eg, open load). The output terminal OUT of the chip 1266 initially outputs a high level. At this time, the discharge terminal DIS is not triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is charged); when the discharge terminal DIS is triggered (ie, the capacitor C5 is discharged), the output terminal OUT starts to output a low level. . The chip 1266 controls the on/off of the switch M1 through the signal of the output terminal OUT.
为了使上述任一示例中所提及的电源装置能够有效降低浪涌信号对负载电路的危害，在所述电源装置和负载电路所在的供电回路上，还设有浪涌防护电路。所述浪涌防护电路通过滤除高频信号、泄放过剩能量、或暂存过剩能量并缓慢释放中的至少一种方式等，对叠加在外部驱动信号中的浪涌信号进行浪涌防护处理。以下以LED直管灯照明系统的电路结构为例，来举例浪涌防护电路在其中的示例电路结构。In order to enable the power supply device mentioned in any of the above examples to effectively reduce the damage of the surge signal to the load circuit, a surge protection circuit is further provided on the power supply circuit where the power supply device and the load circuit are located. The surge protection circuit performs surge protection processing on the surge signal superimposed on the external drive signal by filtering out high-frequency signals, discharging excess energy, or temporarily storing excess energy and releasing it slowly. . The following takes the circuit structure of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system as an example to illustrate an example circuit structure in which the surge protection circuit is included.
请参阅图49A，图49A是本申请第九实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。本实施例的LED照明系统包括LED直管灯1700和浪涌防护电路520′。所述LED直管灯1700例如为先前实施例所述的LED直管灯500、600、700或800，所述LED直管灯1700包括电源模块5和LED模块50，其中电源模块5可例如采用LED直管灯500、600、700或800所对应的电源模块的电路架构，也可省略LED直管灯500、600、700或800所对应的电源模块中的 部分电路单元，如省略滤波电路，本实施例以及下述实施例也主要为了说明浪涌防护电路520′所配置的位置，并非对电源模块5的电路结构做限制。本实施例的浪涌防护电路520′设置在LED直管灯1700外部，位于电力输入源的供电线路上，例如设置在灯座中，浪涌防护电路520′用以接收外部驱动信号。在此，所述外部驱动信号可以是图8A至图8E中由外部电网508所提供的交流电源信号，也可为镇流器所提供的电信号，甚至也可以为直流信号。当外部驱动信号上有浪涌产生时，浪涌防护电路520′减小浪涌对LED直管灯1700的影响。需要说明的是，所述浪涌防护电路520′不仅限于图49A所示的应用于LED直管灯照明系统中，在其他实施例中，所述浪涌防护电路520′后级所耦接的LED直管灯1700也可替换为其他负载电路，其他负载电路也为使用外部驱动信号进行工作的电子设备即可，可例如是电视机、智能终端、电动玩具等电器设备。后续也同样以LED直管灯为例对浪涌防护电路的配置结构及工作原理进行说明，并不应理解为对于浪涌防护电路应用场合的限定。Please refer to FIG. 49A . FIG. 49A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the ninth embodiment of the present application. The LED lighting system of this embodiment includes an LED straight tube lamp 1700 and a surge protection circuit 520'. The LED straight tube light 1700 is, for example, the LED straight tube light 500, 600, 700 or 800 described in the previous embodiments, and the LED straight tube light 1700 includes a power module 5 and an LED module 50, wherein the power module 5 can be, for example, using The circuit structure of the power module corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp 500, 600, 700 or 800 can also be omitted. This embodiment and the following embodiments are also mainly used to illustrate the location of the surge protection circuit 520 ′, and not to limit the circuit structure of the power module 5 . The surge protection circuit 520' of this embodiment is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp 1700, on the power supply line of the power input source, for example, in the lamp socket, and the surge protection circuit 520' is used to receive external driving signals. Here, the external driving signal may be the AC power signal provided by the external power grid 508 in FIG. 8A to FIG. 8E , the electric signal provided by the ballast, or even the DC signal. When a surge occurs on the external driving signal, the surge protection circuit 520 ′ reduces the influence of the surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700 . It should be noted that the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is not limited to the application in the LED straight tube lamp lighting system shown in FIG. 49A . In other embodiments, the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is coupled to the rear stage. The LED straight tube light 1700 can also be replaced with other load circuits, and other load circuits can also be electronic devices that use external drive signals to work, such as televisions, smart terminals, electric toys and other electrical devices. In the following, the configuration structure and working principle of the surge protection circuit will also be described by taking the LED straight tube lamp as an example, which should not be construed as a limitation on the application of the surge protection circuit.
请参阅49B，图49B是本申请第十实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。本实施例主要揭露浪涌防护电路在LED照明系统中的配置方式，在图49A所揭露的LED直管灯照明系统的基础上，浪涌防护电路520′的输入端耦接电力输入源的电力输入端A1，输出端用于耦接LED直管灯1700对应接入电力输入端A1的接脚，用以处理电力输入端A1输出的外部驱动信号。LED直管灯1700分别电性连接至浪涌防护电路520′输出端和电力输入端A2。浪涌一般为突变的电压信号，当经电力输入端A1输入的电力中含有浪涌时，浪涌防护电路520′检测到浪涌信号，导通浪涌泄放回路，以泄放浪涌能量，减小浪涌对LED直管灯1700的影响。当电力输入源为外部电网508是市电时，电力输入端A1，A2可分别为市电的火线(L)和中性线(N)；当电力输入源为镇流器时，电力输入端A1，A2可为镇流器的两输出端，后续所提及的电力输入端A1，A2均以此理解，不再赘述。Please refer to 49B, FIG. 49B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the tenth embodiment of the present application. This embodiment mainly discloses the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the LED lighting system. On the basis of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system disclosed in FIG. 49A , the input end of the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is coupled to the power of the power input source The input terminal A1 and the output terminal are used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input terminal A1 for processing the external driving signal output by the power input terminal A1. The LED straight tube lamp 1700 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the surge protection circuit 520' and the power input terminal A2, respectively. The surge is generally a sudden voltage signal. When the power input through the power input terminal A1 contains a surge, the surge protection circuit 520' detects the surge signal and turns on the surge discharge circuit to discharge the surge energy. , reduce the impact of surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700. When the power input source is the external power grid 508 is the commercial power, the power input terminals A1 and A2 can be the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N) of the commercial power, respectively; when the power input source is a ballast, the power input terminals A1 and A2 can be the two output ends of the ballast, and the power input ends A1 and A2 mentioned later are all understood in this way, and will not be repeated here.
如图49B所示的实施例中，浪涌防护电路520′串联于供电回路，当有浪涌经过浪涌防护电路520′时，会在浪涌防护电路520′两侧形成电位差，此电位差促使浪涌防护电路520′启动浪涌防护功能。但浪涌防护电路520′的连接方式并不以此为限，在其他一些实施例中，浪涌防护电路520′并联于供电回路中，即浪涌防护电路520′输入端电性连接至电力输入端A1，输出端电性连接至电力输入端A2，浪涌会在电力输入端A1和A2之间形成突变电位差，此电位差促使浪涌防护电路520′导通能量泄放回路，以泄放浪涌能量，减小浪涌对后级电路的影响。需要说明的是，前述各实施例所述供电回路是指电力输入源向负载(例如LED模块50)传输电流的路径，以负载为LED模块为例，其包括由电力输入源至电源模块5之间的用来传输电流的路径以及LED直管灯中的电源模块5向LED模块50传输电流的路径，后续提及的供电回路也以此理解，不再赘述。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 49B, the surge protection circuit 520' is connected in series with the power supply circuit. When a surge passes through the surge protection circuit 520', a potential difference will be formed on both sides of the surge protection circuit 520'. This potential The difference causes the surge protection circuit 520' to activate the surge protection function. However, the connection method of the surge protection circuit 520' is not limited thereto. In other embodiments, the surge protection circuit 520' is connected in parallel with the power supply circuit, that is, the input end of the surge protection circuit 520' is electrically connected to the power The input terminal A1 and the output terminal are electrically connected to the power input terminal A2. The surge will form a sudden potential difference between the power input terminals A1 and A2. This potential difference causes the surge protection circuit 520' to conduct the energy discharge circuit to Discharge surge energy and reduce the impact of surge on subsequent circuits. It should be noted that the power supply circuit in the foregoing embodiments refers to the path through which the power input source transmits current to the load (eg, the LED module 50 ). The path for transmitting current between the two and the path for transmitting current from the power supply module 5 in the LED straight tube lamp to the LED module 50 is also understood as the power supply circuit mentioned later, and will not be repeated.
请参阅49C，图49C是本申请第十一实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。本实施例主要揭露浪涌防护电路在LED照明系统中的配置方式，与图49B所示的实施例不同 的是，本实施例中，浪涌防护电路包含第一浪涌防护电路520a′和第二浪涌防护电路520b′。第一浪涌防护电路520a′的输入端耦接于电力输入端A1，输出端用于耦接LED直管灯1700对应接入电力输入端A1的接脚，第二浪涌防护电路520b′的输入端耦接于电力输出端A2，输出端用于耦接LED直管灯1700对应接入电力输入端A2的接脚。电力输入端A1和A2输出的外部驱动信号都会经过浪涌防护电路处理而减小浪涌对LED直管灯1700的影响。Please refer to 49C, FIG. 49C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application. This embodiment mainly discloses the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the LED lighting system. Different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 49B , in this embodiment, the surge protection circuit includes a first surge protection circuit 520a ′ and a second surge protection circuit 520a ′. Two surge protection circuits 520b'. The input end of the first surge protection circuit 520a' is coupled to the power input end A1, the output end is used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input end A1, and the second surge protection circuit 520b' The input end is coupled to the power output end A2, and the output end is used for coupling to the pin of the LED straight tube lamp 1700 corresponding to the power input end A2. The external driving signals output by the power input terminals A1 and A2 are processed by the surge protection circuit to reduce the influence of the surge on the LED straight tube lamp 1700 .
上述各示例可方便地与尚未集成有浪涌防护电路的电源模块配合，通过将浪涌防护电路外接在电源模块与电力输入源之间，例如设置在LED直管灯的灯座中，以有效提高对负载电路的浪涌防护功能。在一些应用中，所述浪涌防护电路也可作为电源模块中的一部分以实现浪涌防护功能，以下以图50A至50E所示的电源模块为例，对浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式进行说明。The above examples can be easily matched with a power supply module that has not yet integrated a surge protection circuit. By externally connecting the surge protection circuit between the power supply module and the power input source, for example, it is set in the lamp holder of the LED straight tube lamp to effectively Improve the surge protection function of the load circuit. In some applications, the surge protection circuit can also be used as a part of the power module to realize the surge protection function. The following takes the power modules shown in FIGS. The configuration method is explained.
请参阅图50A，图50A是本申请第一实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图。在本实施例中，LED直管灯1800例如是直接接收电力输入源所提供的外部驱动信号，外部驱动信号通过电力输入端A1与A2给到LED直管灯1800对应的接脚上。本实施例中浪涌防护电路520′设置在LED直管灯1800内以作为LED直管灯1800的电源模块5中的一部分，换言之，LED直管灯1800中的电源模块5相较于前述实施例中的LED直管灯500、600、700、800、或1700的电源模块，更增加了浪涌防护电路520′，当LED直管灯1800所接收的信号中含有浪涌时，浪涌防护电路520′吸收其中的浪涌从而减小对后级电路的影响。需要说明的是，在浪涌防护电路配置于电源模块中的各实施例中，电源模块5除了可以采用LED直管灯500、600、700或800所对应的电源模块的电路架构，也可省略LED直管灯500、600、700或800所对应的电源模块中的部分电路单元，如省略滤波电路，以下各实施例主要为了说明浪涌防护电路520′所配置的位置，并非对电源模块5的电路结构做限制，故而图50A至图50E所示例中用虚线示意电源模块5中还可能出现的电路单元或部件。Please refer to FIG. 50A . FIG. 50A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the LED straight tube light 1800, for example, directly receives an external driving signal provided by a power input source, and the external driving signal is supplied to the corresponding pins of the LED straight tube light 1800 through the power input terminals A1 and A2. In this embodiment, the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is disposed in the LED straight tube lamp 1800 as a part of the power module 5 of the LED straight tube lamp 1800 . The power supply module of the LED straight tube light 500, 600, 700, 800, or 1700 in the example has a surge protection circuit 520' added. When the signal received by the LED straight tube light 1800 contains surge, the surge protection The circuit 520' absorbs the surge therein so as to reduce the influence on the subsequent circuit. It should be noted that, in each embodiment in which the surge protection circuit is configured in the power supply module, the power supply module 5 can not only adopt the circuit structure of the power supply module corresponding to the LED straight tube lamp 500, 600, 700 or 800, but also can be omitted. For some circuit units in the power module corresponding to the LED straight tube lamps 500, 600, 700 or 800, if the filter circuit is omitted, the following embodiments are mainly to illustrate the location of the surge protection circuit 520', not for the power module 5 Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E , dashed lines are used to indicate circuit units or components that may also appear in the power supply module 5 .
请参阅图50B，图50B是本申请第二实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图，本实施例主要揭露浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式。在本实施例中，电源模块5除了包含整流电路510之外，还包括浪涌防护电路520′。在本实施例中，浪涌防护电路520′串联连接于整流电路510的第一整流输出端511所接入的供电线路，用以接收整流后信号。当经整流电路510第一整流输出端511输出的整流后信号中含有浪涌时，浪涌防护电路520′对浪涌信号进行浪涌防护处理，减小浪涌对后级电路的影响。Please refer to FIG. 50B . FIG. 50B is a circuit block diagram illustrating the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application. This embodiment mainly discloses the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module. In this embodiment, the power module 5 includes a surge protection circuit 520 ′ in addition to the rectification circuit 510 . In this embodiment, the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is connected in series to the power supply line connected to the first rectification output end 511 of the rectification circuit 510 to receive the rectified signal. When the rectified signal output by the first rectification output terminal 511 of the rectification circuit 510 contains a surge, the surge protection circuit 520' performs surge protection processing on the surge signal to reduce the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit.
请参阅50C，图50C是本申请第三实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图。与图50B所示的实施例不同的是，本实施例中，浪涌防护电路包含第一浪涌防护电路520a′和第二浪涌防护电路520b′。第一浪涌防护电路520a′串联连接在整流电路510的第一整流输出端511，第二浪涌防护电路522′串联连接在整流电路510的第二整流输出端512。也即，整流电路510的第一整流输出端511与第二整流输出端512同时接有浪涌 防护电路，当整流电路510的第一整流输出端511或第二整流输出端512输出的整流后信号中含有浪涌时，浪涌防护电路都对其进行处理而减小浪涌对后级电路的影响。Please refer to 50C, FIG. 50C is a circuit block diagram illustrating the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the third embodiment of the present application. Different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 50B, in this embodiment, the surge protection circuit includes a first surge protection circuit 520a' and a second surge protection circuit 520b'. The first surge protection circuit 520 a ′ is connected in series to the first rectifier output end 511 of the rectifier circuit 510 , and the second surge protection circuit 522 ′ is connected in series to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 . That is, the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 are simultaneously connected with a surge protection circuit. When there is a surge in the signal, the surge protection circuit will process it to reduce the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit.
请参阅图50D，50D是本申请第四实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图。与图50B所示的实施例不同的是，本实施例中，浪涌防护电路520′串联连接于第一接脚501和整流电路510之间，用以接收外部驱动信号，所述整流电路510藉由第一整流输出端511和第二整流输出端512与其后级电路相连。所述外部驱动信号通过电力输入端A1经第一接脚501输出至浪涌防护电路520′。当经电力输入端A1输入的外部驱动信号中有浪涌时，浪涌防护电路520′可以吸收此信号中的浪涌能量后将其输出给整流电路510进行后续处理，从而减小浪涌对LED直管灯的影响。Please refer to FIG. 50D , 50D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. Different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 50B , in this embodiment, the surge protection circuit 520 ′ is connected in series between the first pin 501 and the rectifier circuit 510 to receive an external driving signal, and the rectifier circuit 510 The first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 are connected to the subsequent circuit. The external driving signal is output to the surge protection circuit 520 ′ through the power input terminal A1 through the first pin 501 . When there is a surge in the external drive signal input through the power input terminal A1, the surge protection circuit 520' can absorb the surge energy in the signal and output it to the rectifier circuit 510 for subsequent processing, thereby reducing the impact of the surge on the The effect of LED straight tube lights.
请参阅50E，图50E是本申请第五实施例的浪涌防护电路在电源模块中的配置方式电路方块示意图。与图50C所示的实施例不同的是，本实施例中，第一浪涌防护电路520a′串联连接于第一接脚501和整流电路510之间，第二浪涌防护电路520b′串联连接于第二接脚502和整流电路510之间，整流电路藉由第一整流输出端511和第二整流输出端512与其后级电路相连。也即，浪涌防护电路同时接收经电力输入端A1和电力输入端A2输入的外部驱动信号，当经电力输入端A1输入的外部驱动信号中有浪涌时，第一浪涌防护电路520a′对其进行处理而减小浪涌对后级电路的影响；当经电力输入端A2输入的外部驱动信号中有浪涌时，第二浪涌防护电路520b′对其进行处理而减小浪涌对后级电路的影响。第一和第二浪涌防护电路(520a′，520b′)将处理后的外部驱动信号输出给整流电路510进行后续处理，从而减小浪涌对LED直管灯的影响。Please refer to 50E. FIG. 50E is a circuit block diagram illustrating a configuration of the surge protection circuit in the power module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application. Different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 50C, in this embodiment, the first surge protection circuit 520a' is connected in series between the first pin 501 and the rectifier circuit 510, and the second surge protection circuit 520b' is connected in series Between the second pin 502 and the rectifier circuit 510 , the rectifier circuit is connected to its subsequent circuit via the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 . That is, the surge protection circuit simultaneously receives the external driving signal input through the power input terminal A1 and the power input terminal A2. When there is a surge in the external driving signal input through the power input terminal A1, the first surge protection circuit 520a' Process it to reduce the impact of surge on the subsequent circuit; when there is a surge in the external driving signal input through the power input terminal A2, the second surge protection circuit 520b' processes it to reduce the surge Impact on the post-stage circuit. The first and second surge protection circuits (520a', 520b') output the processed external driving signals to the rectifier circuit 510 for subsequent processing, thereby reducing the impact of surges on the LED straight tube lamp.
其中，上述图50B至图50E仅为对浪涌防护电路在电源模块中配置方式的举例，实际应用中，如图50B至50E所示的电源模块5可直接向负载输出供电，或者所述电源模块5还包括其他电路以实现向负载稳定供电。以用于LED直管灯的电源模块为例，所述第一整流输出端512或浪涌防护电路520′的输出端(即不直接与整流电路510相连的一端)与电源模块5中的其他电路连接，以向后续的LED模块提供稳定供电，其他电路举例包括如图12B、图12C、或图12H所描述的滤波电路，如图13A至图13E所描述的驱动电路等。在其他电路包括有滤波电路的实施例中，所述浪涌防护电路还可耦接在滤波电路后端，或者浪涌防护电路与滤波电路进行整合作为整体单元以使得电路结构更为简约和紧凑。另外，根据应用于不同的负载所使用的电源模块的不同，所述电源模块中的滤波电路和所述驱动电路也可替换为其他负载的供电所需的电路/元件部分，以及负载LED模块被替换为其他负载。以负载为荧光灯为例，图50B至50E中的负载LED模块50被替换为荧光灯模块与所述电源模块5连接。50B to 50E above are only examples of how the surge protection circuit is configured in the power supply module. In practical applications, the power supply module 5 shown in FIGS. 50B to 50E can directly supply power to the load output, or the power supply The module 5 also includes other circuits to achieve stable power supply to the load. Taking a power supply module for LED straight tube lamps as an example, the first rectifier output end 512 or the output end of the surge protection circuit 520 ′ (ie the end not directly connected to the rectifier circuit 510 ) is connected to other power supply modules 5 . The circuit is connected to provide stable power supply to subsequent LED modules. Examples of other circuits include filter circuits as described in FIG. 12B , FIG. 12C , or FIG. 12H , and drive circuits as described in FIGS. 13A to 13E . In other embodiments where the circuit includes a filter circuit, the surge protection circuit can also be coupled to the back end of the filter circuit, or the surge protection circuit and the filter circuit are integrated as an integral unit to make the circuit structure simpler and more compact . In addition, according to the different power modules used for different loads, the filter circuit and the drive circuit in the power module can also be replaced with the circuits/components required for the power supply of other loads, and the load LED module is Replace with other loads. Taking a fluorescent lamp as the load as an example, the load LED module 50 in FIGS. 50B to 50E is replaced with a fluorescent lamp module and connected to the power module 5 .
请参阅图51，图51是本申请第一实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路方块示意图，浪涌防护电路620′具有输入端623′和输出端624′，所述浪涌防护电路620′包含电感性电路621′和能量泄放电路622′。所述电感性电路621′藉由浪涌防护电路620′的输入端623′以及 输出端624′耦接在供电回路中(如图49A至图49C或图50A至图50E中的位置)，用于接收并暂时存储供电回路中的浪涌能量。所述能量泄放电路622′以与电感性电路621′并联的方式连接于所述浪涌防护电路620′的输入端623′和输出端624′，用于泄放供电回路中的浪涌能量以避免浪涌能量对后级电路的影响。在电力输入源输出的外部驱动信号中含有浪涌能量时，浪涌能量会随外部驱动信号进入供电回路，电感性电路621′接收并存储所述浪涌能量时两端形成电位差(也可称之为电压差)，该电位差会使得能量泄放电路622′导通而形成能量泄放路径，以使得浪涌能量通过能量泄放路径降低浪涌信号对后续电路的电流/电压冲击。其中，所述能量泄放电路622′导通而形成能量泄放路径是指使能量泄放电路622′所在线路泄放由浪涌信号所携带的能量。与之相对的，能量泄放电路622′截止而不形成能量泄放路径是指使能量泄放电路622′所在线路由于断路、或高阻态而阻碍电流经过。Please refer to FIG. 51 . FIG. 51 is a schematic block diagram of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application. The surge protection circuit 620 ′ has an input end 623 ′ and an output end 624 ′. The surge protection circuit 620 ′ includes Inductive circuit 621' and energy discharge circuit 622'. The inductive circuit 621 ′ is coupled in the power supply loop through the input end 623 ′ and the output end 624 ′ of the surge protection circuit 620 ′ (as shown in FIG. 49A to FIG. 49C or FIG. 50A to FIG. 50E ). It is used to receive and temporarily store the surge energy in the power supply circuit. The energy discharge circuit 622' is connected to the input terminal 623' and the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit 620' in parallel with the inductive circuit 621', for discharging the surge energy in the power supply circuit In order to avoid the impact of surge energy on the subsequent circuit. When the external drive signal output by the power input source contains surge energy, the surge energy will enter the power supply loop along with the external drive signal, and the inductive circuit 621' receives and stores the surge energy to form a potential difference (or This potential difference will make the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ conduct to form an energy discharge path, so that the surge energy can reduce the current/voltage impact of the surge signal on the subsequent circuit through the energy discharge path. Wherein, the conduction of the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ to form an energy discharge path means that the line where the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is located discharges the energy carried by the surge signal. On the other hand, turning off the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ without forming an energy discharge path means that the circuit where the energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is located prevents the current from passing due to an open circuit or a high impedance state.
其中，利用电感性电路621′具有抑制电流变化的电感特性，暂时存储是指电感性电路621′在有浪涌能量流经期间执行励磁操作以存储能量的过程，而在浪涌信号离开电感性电路621′期间会退磁释放该部分存储的能量。其中，所述能量泄放电路622′通过为浪涌能量提供释放路径，从而使得浪涌能量被吸收掉，以避免被输出至后级电路。Among them, the use of the inductive circuit 621 ′ has the inductive characteristic of suppressing current changes, and the temporary storage refers to the process that the inductive circuit 621 ′ performs an excitation operation to store energy during the period when the surge energy flows, and when the surge signal leaves the inductive This portion of the stored energy is released during demagnetization of circuit 621'. Wherein, the energy discharge circuit 622' provides a release path for the surge energy, so that the surge energy is absorbed, so as to avoid being output to the subsequent circuit.
能量泄放电路622′并联于电感性电路621′，在携带有浪涌信号的外部驱动信号进入电感性电路621′，电感性电路621′在存储能量期间，浪涌保护电路620′的输入端623′和输出端624′之间产生顺向电位差，以及在电感性电路621′释放能量期间，浪涌保护电路620′的输入端623′和输出端624′之间产生逆向电位差。其中，若在所述顺向电位差和所述逆向电位差作用下，所述能量泄放电路622′均能导通，则在顺向电位差阶段，能量泄放电路622′即能泄放部分浪涌能量，在逆向电位差阶段，能量泄放电路还会进一步泄放被电感性电路621′暂时存储的浪涌能量部分。若在所述逆向的电位差作用下，所述能量泄放电路622′导通，则所述能量泄放电路622′将电感性电路621′所暂时存储的浪涌能量全部泄放，以避免浪涌能量对后续电路的影响。The energy discharge circuit 622 ′ is connected in parallel with the inductive circuit 621 ′. When the external driving signal carrying the surge signal enters the inductive circuit 621 ′, the inductive circuit 621 ′ stores the energy at the input end of the surge protection circuit 620 ′. A forward potential difference is created between 623' and output 624', and a reverse potential difference is created between input 623' and output 624' of surge protection circuit 620' during the discharge of energy from inductive circuit 621'. Wherein, if both the energy discharge circuit 622' can be turned on under the action of the forward potential difference and the reverse potential difference, then in the forward potential difference stage, the energy discharge circuit 622' can discharge For part of the surge energy, in the reverse potential difference stage, the energy discharge circuit will further discharge the part of the surge energy temporarily stored by the inductive circuit 621'. If the energy discharge circuit 622' is turned on under the action of the reverse potential difference, the energy discharge circuit 622' discharges all the surge energy temporarily stored in the inductive circuit 621' to avoid The effect of surge energy on subsequent circuits.
结合图52，图52是本申请一实施例中的电感性电路的电位差示意图，如图所示，在浪涌能量流经电感性电路621′时会经历两个阶段，其中，图中Vab表示浪涌防护电路的输入端623′和输出端624′之间的电位差。在第一阶段ST1(亦称之为顺向电位差阶段)，浪涌能量由浪涌防护电路621′的输入端623′流入进入电感性电路621′，输入端623′的电位会被瞬间拉高，而造成输入端623′的电位高于其输出端624′的电位，此时，电感性电路621′两端所形成电位差称为顺向电位差。在第二阶段ST1(亦称之为逆向电位差阶段)，浪涌能量经电感性电路621′离开，而使得输出端624′电位高于输入端623′的电位，此时，电感性电路621′两端所形成电位差称为逆向电位差。也即是说，图51中的能量泄放电路622′可以被配置为在第一阶段ST1或者第二阶段ST2导通以形成能量泄放路径，来泄放浪涌能量。当能量泄放电路622′两端的电位差大于设定电压阈值时，能量泄放电路112由高阻态转换 为低阻态，导通能量泄放回路以泄放浪涌能量，从而减小浪涌对后级电路的影响。在本实施例中，所述设定电压阈值可由能量泄放电路本身的电路/元件特性参数决定。Referring to FIG. 52 , FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram of the potential difference of the inductive circuit in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in the figure, when the surge energy flows through the inductive circuit 621 ′, it will go through two stages. In the figure, Vab Represents the potential difference between the input terminal 623' and the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit. In the first stage ST1 (also called the forward potential difference stage), the surge energy flows from the input terminal 623' of the surge protection circuit 621' into the inductive circuit 621', and the potential of the input terminal 623' is instantly pulled The potential of the input terminal 623' is higher than the potential of the output terminal 624'. At this time, the potential difference formed between the two ends of the inductive circuit 621' is called the forward potential difference. In the second stage ST1 (also called the reverse potential difference stage), the surge energy leaves through the inductive circuit 621 ′, so that the potential of the output terminal 624 ′ is higher than the potential of the input terminal 623 ′. At this time, the inductive circuit 621 The potential difference formed at both ends is called the reverse potential difference. That is to say, the energy discharge circuit 622' in FIG. 51 may be configured to be turned on in the first stage ST1 or the second stage ST2 to form an energy discharge path to discharge the surge energy. When the potential difference between the two ends of the energy discharge circuit 622' is greater than the set voltage threshold, the energy discharge circuit 112 is converted from a high resistance state to a low resistance state, and the energy discharge circuit is turned on to discharge the surge energy, thereby reducing the surge energy. The impact of surge on the post-stage circuit. In this embodiment, the set voltage threshold can be determined by circuit/element characteristic parameters of the energy discharge circuit itself.
在此，所述电感性电路621′包括具有抑制电流变化的电感。所述电感性电路621′举例包括差模电感。所述能量泄放电路622′包含压控组件(未予图示)，其响应于浪涌防护电路两端的电位差而导通或截止。其中，所述压控组件DBs1具有在浪涌防护电路两端的电压差达到一电压阈值的情况下导通，而在未达到所述电压阈值的情况下截止的特性，其举例包括如放电管、压敏电阻、或瞬态抑制二极管(TVS)等中的任意一种所示例的具有上述特性的电子元件，或者包括如比较器和开关等电路结构所示例的控制电路结构。Here, the inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance that suppresses current variation. The inductive circuit 621' includes, for example, a differential mode inductor. The energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component (not shown) that is turned on or off in response to a potential difference across the surge protection circuit. Wherein, the voltage control component DBs1 has the characteristic of being turned on when the voltage difference between the two ends of the surge protection circuit reaches a voltage threshold, and turned off when the voltage threshold is not reached, examples of which include discharge tubes, An electronic component having the above characteristics exemplified by any one of a varistor, a transient suppression diode (TVS), etc., or a control circuit structure exemplified by a circuit structure such as a comparator and a switch.
在一些示例中，为了降低浪涌信号在使浪涌防护电路两端产生顺向电位差时，电源模块所输出的供电信号中包含较高的能量，所述浪涌防护电路还包括限流组件(未予图示)，其与所述压控组件串联连接，用于控制所述浪涌能量的传递方向。换言之，所述限流组件用于限制能量泄放电路622′在顺向电位差(或逆向电位差)期间导通，而在逆向电位差(或顺向电位差)期间截止。所述限流组件举例包括二极管。例如，能量泄放电路622′包括串接的压敏电阻和二极管(均未予图示)，其中二极管的阳极连接浪涌防护电路620′的输出端624′，以及阴极连接压敏电阻，如此形成在逆向电位差期间能量泄放电路622′所在线路导通的情况。In some examples, in order to reduce the forward potential difference between the two ends of the surge protection circuit caused by the surge signal, the power supply signal output by the power module contains higher energy, and the surge protection circuit further includes a current limiting component (not shown), which is connected in series with the voltage control assembly for controlling the transmission direction of the surge energy. In other words, the current limiting component is used to limit the energy discharge circuit 622' to be turned on during the forward potential difference (or reverse potential difference), and turned off during the reverse potential difference (or forward potential difference). Examples of the current limiting components include diodes. For example, the energy discharge circuit 622' includes a varistor and a diode (neither shown) connected in series, wherein the anode of the diode is connected to the output terminal 624' of the surge protection circuit 620', and the cathode is connected to the varistor, and so on The situation where the line where the energy discharge circuit 622' is located is turned on during the reverse potential difference is formed.
由于电感性电路621′的抑制电流变化的特性，所述浪涌防护电路还兼具有滤波功能。为了提供更紧凑的电路结构，本申请中的浪涌防护电路还集成有滤波电路；或者，根据电源模块所在电路结构对所输出的供电信号的信号稳定性要求，所述浪涌防护电路也可以与滤波电路分立设置。例如，在LED照明系统中，为减少纹波信号对灯闪烁的干扰，在LED模块侧配置用于去除纹波信号的滤波电路等。Due to the characteristic of the inductive circuit 621 ′ that suppresses current variation, the surge protection circuit also has a filtering function. In order to provide a more compact circuit structure, the surge protection circuit in this application is further integrated with a filter circuit; or, according to the signal stability requirements of the output power supply signal of the circuit structure where the power module is located, the surge protection circuit can also be Set up separately from the filter circuit. For example, in an LED lighting system, in order to reduce the interference of the ripple signal on the flicker of the lamp, a filter circuit for removing the ripple signal is arranged on the LED module side.
以下结合图53A至图53I，以在电源模块中浪涌防护电路之外不设置滤波电路为例，对浪涌防护电路的电路架构和工作原理进行说明。在53A至图53I中，外部驱动信号经第一接脚501和第二接脚502进入整流电路510，由整流电路510对外部驱动信号进行整流处理以输出整流后信号。若外部驱动信号中不含有浪涌能量，则整流后信号直接经浪涌防护电路中的部分电路单元或部分电路元器件进行滤波处理，输出给后级驱动电路530，由驱动电路530将滤波后信号转换为驱动信号以驱动LED模块50正常工作。若外部驱动信号中含有浪涌能量，则整流后信号中也包含浪涌能量，输出给浪涌防护电路，由浪涌防护电路对其中的浪涌能量进行吸收泄放后，予以输出给驱动电路530，由驱动电路530将滤波后信号转换为驱动信号以驱动LED模块50正常工作。但需先叙明的是，实际应用中，也可根据需求在图53A至图53I所示的电源模块中额外增加其他电路部件，例如图12B、图12C、图12F至图12H所示的滤波电路，或者与12B、图12C、图12F至图12H所示的滤波电路共用部分元器件。另外，根据应用于不同的负载所使用的电源模块的不同，53A至图53I中的驱动电路也可替换为其他 负载的供电所需的电路/元件部分，或者被省略，或者在驱动电路前级或后级增加其他适用于负载的电路部件。53A to 53I, the circuit structure and working principle of the surge protection circuit will be described by taking as an example that the filter circuit is not provided outside the surge protection circuit in the power module. In 53A to 53I, the external drive signal enters the rectifier circuit 510 through the first pin 501 and the second pin 502, and the rectifier circuit 510 rectifies the external drive signal to output a rectified signal. If the external driving signal does not contain surge energy, the rectified signal is directly filtered by some circuit units or some circuit components in the surge protection circuit, and then output to the rear-stage driving circuit 530, where the filtered signal is filtered by the driving circuit 530. The signal is converted into a driving signal to drive the LED module 50 to work normally. If the external drive signal contains surge energy, the rectified signal also contains surge energy, which is output to the surge protection circuit. After the surge protection circuit absorbs and discharges the surge energy, it is output to the drive circuit. 530 , the filtered signal is converted into a driving signal by the driving circuit 530 to drive the LED module 50 to work normally. However, it should be noted that, in practical applications, other circuit components can also be added to the power modules shown in FIGS. 53A to 53I as required, such as the filter shown in FIGS. 12B , 12C, and 12F to 12H. circuit, or share some components with the filter circuits shown in 12B, 12C, 12F to 12H. In addition, according to the different power supply modules used for different loads, the driving circuits in 53A to 53I can also be replaced with the circuits/components required for the power supply of other loads, or omitted, or in the previous stage of the driving circuit. Or add other circuit components suitable for the load in the latter stage.
请参阅图53A，图53A是本申请第一实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图，浪涌防护电路620′被配置为含有电感性电路621′和能量泄放电路622′。电感性电路621′包含电感L1。电感L1的第一端连接在整流电路510的第一整流输出端511，第二端与驱动电路530之间，整流电路510第二整流输出端512电性连接至驱动电路530。第一接脚501和第二接脚502分别用于对应耦接电力输入端A1和A2以使得整流电路510获取外部驱动信号。当浪涌经过电感L1时，会在电感了L1两端形成电位差。能量泄放电路622′包含压控组件DBs1，压控组件DBs1并联在电感性电路621′的a端和b端上，用于响应于电感L1两端的电压差而导通或截止，具体地，在所述电感L1两端的电位差大于能量泄放电路622′的阈值电压时导通，在此，所述能量泄放电路622′的阈值电压即可视为压控组件DBs1的阈值电压(此阈值电压由压控组件BD1的组件参数决定)时导通，从而形成能量泄放路径。以压控组件DBs1为放电管为例，当电感L1两端的电位差大于放电管的阈值电压(例如可选取阈值电压在50V至200V之间的放电管)时，放电管导通，浪涌便可通过放电管进行泄放，从而减小浪涌对后级电路的影响。本实施例中整流电路510作为可选配置且整流电路510可与浪涌防护电路620′的位置互换，如浪涌防护电路620′串接在第一接脚501上，而不影响浪涌防护电路620′的电路特性。Please refer to FIG. 53A . FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application. The surge protection circuit 620 ′ is configured to include an inductive circuit 621 ′ and an energy discharge circuit 622 ′. The inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1. The first end of the inductor L1 is connected to the first rectification output end 511 of the rectifier circuit 510 , and the second end is connected to the driving circuit 530 . The first pin 501 and the second pin 502 are respectively used for correspondingly coupled to the power input terminals A1 and A2 so that the rectifier circuit 510 can obtain an external driving signal. When the surge passes through the inductor L1, a potential difference is formed across the inductor L1. The energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component DBs1, and the voltage control component DBs1 is connected in parallel to the a terminal and the b terminal of the inductive circuit 621', for turning on or off in response to the voltage difference between the two ends of the inductance L1, specifically, When the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1 is greater than the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622', it is turned on. Here, the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622' can be regarded as the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1 (this The threshold voltage is determined by the component parameters of the voltage control component BD1), and it is turned on, thereby forming an energy discharge path. Taking the voltage control component DBs1 as the discharge tube as an example, when the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1 is greater than the threshold voltage of the discharge tube (for example, a discharge tube with a threshold voltage between 50V and 200V can be selected), the discharge tube is turned on, and the surge occurs. It can be discharged through the discharge tube, thereby reducing the impact of surge on the subsequent circuit. In this embodiment, the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration, and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged. For example, the surge protection circuit 620' is connected to the first pin 501 in series without affecting the surge. Circuit characteristics of the guard circuit 620'.
请参阅图53B，图53B是本申请第二实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图，浪涌防护电路620′被配置为含有电感性电路621′和能量泄放电路622′。与图53A所示的实施例不同的是，本实施例中能量泄放电路更含有限流组件D1，阻流组件D1和压控组件DBS1串联，用于控制所述浪涌能量泄放时的电流方向，以使压控组件DBS1仅能在特定状态下导通。Please refer to FIG. 53B . FIG. 53B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. The surge protection circuit 620 ′ is configured to include an inductive circuit 621 ′ and an energy discharge circuit 622 ′. Different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 53A, the energy discharge circuit in this embodiment further includes a current limiting component D1, and the blocking component D1 and the voltage control component DBS1 are connected in series to control the surge energy when discharging. current direction, so that the voltage control component DBS1 can only be turned on in a specific state.
具体而言，在仅设有压控组件DBS1的配置下(如图53A)，不论是电感L1的第一端(即与第一整流输出端511相连的一端)的电压大于第二端(即与驱动电路530相连的一端)的电压超过压控组件DBS1的阈值电压(即为顺向电位差)，或是电感L1的第二端的电压大于第一端的电压超过压控组件DBS1的阈值电压(即为逆向电位差)，都会使压控组件DBS1进入导通状态。在图53B同时设置有压控组件DBS1和阻流组件D1的配置下，当有浪涌发生，电感L1上形成为顺向电位差，限流组件D1会处于断开的状态，使得压控组件DBS1和限流组件D1相连的一端处于浮接状态(或视为与电感L1的第二端电性分离)，因此压控组件DBS1无法响应顺向电位差而导通，能量泄放路径无法形成。当电感L1上形成为逆向电位差且逆向电位差的电压值超过图53B所示的能量泄放电路622′的阈值电压时(在此，能量泄放电路622′的阈值电压为压控组件DBS1和阻流组件D1的阈值电压之和)，限流组件D1会处于导通的状态，使得压控组件DBS1和限流组件D1相连的一端等效为与电感L1的第二端电性连接，进而令压控组件DBS1响应逆向电位差而导通，形成能量泄放路径以泄放/消耗浪涌能量。Specifically, in the configuration where only the voltage control component DBS1 is provided (as shown in FIG. 53A ), the voltage of the first end of the inductor L1 (that is, the end connected to the first rectifier output end 511 ) is greater than that of the second end (that is, the first end 511 ). The voltage at one end connected to the driving circuit 530) exceeds the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBS1 (ie, the forward potential difference), or the voltage at the second end of the inductor L1 is greater than the voltage at the first end and exceeds the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBS1 (that is, the reverse potential difference), the voltage control component DBS1 will enter the conducting state. In the configuration shown in Figure 53B where the voltage control component DBS1 and the current blocking component D1 are provided at the same time, when a surge occurs, a forward potential difference is formed on the inductor L1, and the current limiting component D1 will be in a disconnected state, making the voltage control component The end of DBS1 connected to the current limiting component D1 is in a floating state (or considered to be electrically separated from the second end of the inductor L1), so the voltage control component DBS1 cannot be turned on in response to the forward potential difference, and the energy discharge path cannot be formed . When the reverse potential difference is formed on the inductor L1 and the voltage value of the reverse potential difference exceeds the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622' shown in FIG. 53B (here, the threshold voltage of the energy discharge circuit 622' is the voltage control component DBS1 and the sum of the threshold voltage of the blocking component D1), the current limiting component D1 will be in a conducting state, so that one end connected to the voltage control component DBS1 and the current limiting component D1 is equivalent to being electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1, Then, the voltage control component DBS1 is turned on in response to the reverse potential difference, forming an energy discharge path to discharge/consume the surge energy.
在一些实施例中，限流组件D1可以使用二极管来实施(以下以二极管D1来描述)。二极管D1的阳极电性连接电感L1的第二端，并且二极管D1的阴极电性连接压控组件DBS1。在此配置底下，当电位差为顺向电位差时，二极管D1处于逆偏状态(reverse bias)，因此二极管D1会维持截止以令压控组件DBS1的一端浮接；当电位差为逆向电位差时，二极管D1能够处于顺偏状态(forward bias)，因此二极管D1会导通以令压控组件DBS1的一端电性连接至电感L1的第二端。需注意的是，实际应用中，也可将二极管D1的阴极电性连接电感L1的第一端，并且二极管D1的阳极电性连接压控组件DBS1，并不改变其工作原理。In some embodiments, the current limiting component D1 may be implemented using a diode (described below as diode D1 ). The anode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1 , and the cathode of the diode D1 is electrically connected to the voltage control element DBS1 . Under this configuration, when the potential difference is the forward potential difference, the diode D1 is in a reverse bias state (reverse bias), so the diode D1 will remain off to make one end of the voltage control component DBS1 float; when the potential difference is the reverse potential difference When , the diode D1 can be in a forward bias state, so the diode D1 is turned on so that one end of the voltage control element DBS1 is electrically connected to the second end of the inductor L1 . It should be noted that, in practical applications, the cathode of the diode D1 can also be electrically connected to the first end of the inductor L1, and the anode of the diode D1 can be electrically connected to the voltage control component DBS1, which does not change its working principle.
上述在能量泄放电路中增设限流组件的好处在于，无论在顺向电位差阶段ST1，浪涌防护电路对浪涌的处理结果如何，亦可以通过逆向电位差阶段ST2对浪涌做有效的处理。可例如是，在顺向电位差阶段ST1未有效消除的浪涌在逆向电位差阶段ST2被吸收，这样便可有效提高浪涌防护电路的可靠性。例如，电路中存在连续的浪涌，如果能量泄放电路被配置为在顺向电位差阶段ST1导通能量泄放回路，后续浪涌亦可以通过能量泄放回路导通到后级，对后级造成影响。而增设限流组件，使得连续的浪涌在电感L1上形成的逆向电位差均可导通形成能量泄放路径，通过能量泄放路径泄放浪涌能量，从而提高浪涌防护电路的可靠性。The advantage of adding a current-limiting component to the energy discharge circuit above is that no matter how the surge protection circuit handles the surge in the forward potential difference stage ST1, it can also effectively deal with the surge through the reverse potential difference stage ST2. deal with. For example, the surge that is not effectively eliminated in the forward potential difference stage ST1 is absorbed in the reverse potential difference stage ST2, so that the reliability of the surge protection circuit can be effectively improved. For example, there is a continuous surge in the circuit. If the energy discharge circuit is configured to conduct the energy discharge circuit in the forward potential difference stage ST1, the subsequent surge can also be conducted to the subsequent stage through the energy discharge circuit. level affects. By adding a current limiting component, the reverse potential difference formed by the continuous surge on the inductor L1 can be turned on to form an energy discharge path, and the surge energy can be discharged through the energy discharge path, thereby improving the reliability of the surge protection circuit. .
请参阅图53C，图53C是本申请第三实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图，本实施例与图53A所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是本实施例中，浪涌防护电路同时配置在整流电路510第一整流输出端511与第二整流输出端512。电感性电路621′包含电感L1a、电感L1b。能量泄放电路622′包含压控组件DBs1a和DBs1b。电感L1a的第一端耦接第一整流输出端511，第二端耦接驱动电路530，电感L1b的第一端耦接第二整流输出端512，第二端耦接驱动电路530。压控组件DBs1a与所述电感L1a并联连接，压控组件DBs1b与电感L1b并联连接。当有浪涌流经电感L1a和电感L1b时，两个电感的两端都会形成电位差，当电感L1a两端的电位差大于压控组件DBs1a的阈值电压时，压控组件DBs1a导通，当电感L1b两端的电位差大于压控组件DBs1b的阈值电压时，压控组件DBs1b导通，浪涌便可通过压控组件DBs1a和压控组件DBs1b进行泄放，从减小浪涌对后级电路的影响。其中，所述电感L1a和电感L1b可采用差模电感，所述压控组件DBs1a和DBs1b分别可采用放电管、压敏电阻、或瞬态抑制二极管(TVS)等中的任意一种来实现。本实施例中整流电路510作为可选配置且整流电路510可与浪涌防护电路620′的位置互换，如浪涌防护电路620′串接在第一接脚501和第二接脚502上，而不影响浪涌防护电路620′的电路特性。Please refer to FIG. 53C . FIG. 53C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53A . The circuit is configured at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 of the rectification circuit 510 at the same time. The inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1a and an inductance L1b. The energy discharge circuit 622' includes voltage control components DBs1a and DBs1b. The first end of the inductor L1a is coupled to the first rectification output end 511 , the second end is coupled to the driving circuit 530 , the first end of the inductor L1b is coupled to the second rectified output end 512 , and the second end is coupled to the driving circuit 530 . The voltage control component DBs1a is connected in parallel with the inductor L1a, and the voltage control component DBs1b is connected in parallel with the inductor L1b. When a surge flows through the inductor L1a and the inductor L1b, a potential difference will be formed at both ends of the two inductors. When the potential difference between the two ends of the inductor L1a is greater than the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1a, the voltage control component DBs1a is turned on. When the potential difference between the two ends of L1b is greater than the threshold voltage of the voltage control component DBs1b, the voltage control component DBs1b is turned on, and the surge can be discharged through the voltage control component DBs1a and the voltage control component DBs1b, thereby reducing the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit. influences. Wherein, the inductor L1a and the inductor L1b can be differential mode inductors, and the voltage control components DBs1a and DBs1b can be implemented by any one of a discharge tube, a varistor, or a transient suppression diode (TVS), respectively. In this embodiment, the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged, for example, the surge protection circuit 620' is connected in series on the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge protection circuit 620'.
请参阅图53D，图53D是本申请第四实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图，本实施例与图53B所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是本实施例中，浪涌防护电路同时配置在整流电路510的第一整流输出端511与第二整流输出端512。电感性电路621′包含电感L1a、电感L1b。能量泄放电路622′包含压控组件DBs1a、压控组件DBs1b、限流组件D1a、限流组件D1b。电感L1a的第一端耦接第一整流输出端511，第二端耦接驱动电路530，电感L1b的第 一端耦接第二整流输出端512，第二端耦接驱动电路530。压控组件DBs1a与限流组件D1a串联后并联在所述电感L1a两端，压控组件DBs1b与限流组件D1b串联后并联在电感L1b的两端。本实施中浪涌防护电路的工作原理与53B相同，与之不同的，本实施例中浪涌防护电路分别配置于整流电路510的第一整流输出端511与第二整流输出端512。当整流电路510的第一整流输出端511或第二整流输出端512含有浪涌时，浪涌防护电路均可对其做出反应，吸收浪涌能量，从而提高浪涌防护电路的可靠性。本实施例中整流电路510作为可选配置且整流电路510可与浪涌防护电路620′的位置互换，如浪涌防护电路620′串接在第一接脚501和第二接脚502上，而不影响浪涌防护电路620′的电路特性。Please refer to FIG. 53D . FIG. 53D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53B . The difference is that in this embodiment, the surge protection The circuit is configured at the first rectification output end 511 and the second rectification output end 512 of the rectification circuit 510 at the same time. The inductive circuit 621' includes an inductance L1a and an inductance L1b. The energy discharge circuit 622' includes a voltage control component DBs1a, a voltage control component DBs1b, a current limiting component D1a, and a current limiting component D1b. The first end of the inductor L1a is coupled to the first rectifier output end 511, the second end is coupled to the drive circuit 530, the first end of the inductor L1b is coupled to the second rectifier output end 512, and the second end is coupled to the drive circuit 530. The voltage control component DBs1a and the current limiting component D1a are connected in series with the two ends of the inductor L1a in parallel, and the voltage control component DBs1b and the current limiting component D1b are connected in series with the two ends of the inductor L1b in parallel. The working principle of the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is the same as that of 53B, but the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is respectively disposed at the first rectifier output end 511 and the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 . When the first rectifier output end 511 or the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 contains a surge, the surge protection circuit can respond to it and absorb the surge energy, thereby improving the reliability of the surge protection circuit. In this embodiment, the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 620' can be interchanged, for example, the surge protection circuit 620' is connected in series on the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 , without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge protection circuit 620'.
请参阅图53E，图53E是本申请第五实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图，与图51所示的浪涌防护电路类似，与之不同的是本实施中浪涌防护电路720′更包含滤波电路723′。其中，由于浪涌防护电路中的电感性电路在供电回路中兼具有滤波的功能，故而，在一些实施例中，为了简化电路结构，所述滤波电路723′即为所述电感性电路。Please refer to FIG. 53E. FIG. 53E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the fifth embodiment of the present application. It further includes a filter circuit 723'. Wherein, since the inductive circuit in the surge protection circuit also has the function of filtering in the power supply circuit, in some embodiments, in order to simplify the circuit structure, the filtering circuit 723 ′ is the inductive circuit.
请参阅图53F，图53F是本申请第六实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图，与图53A所示实施例类似，与之不同的是本实施例中浪涌防护电路720′除了包括电感性电路721′、能量泄放电路722′，更包含滤波电路723′，所述电感性电路721′和能量泄放电路722′的构成以及连接方式与图53A相同，在此不再赘述。所述滤波电路723′包括电容C1和电容C2，所述电容C1的一端电性连接电感性电路721′的一端，另一端电性连接至整流电路510的第二整流输出端512,电容C2一端电性连接至电感性电路721′的另一端，另一端电性连接至整流电路510的第二整流输出端512。其中，由于所述电感性电路721′中的电感L1在供电回路中也兼具滤波功能，故而，在一些实施例中，所述电感L1也可划归于所述滤波电路723′，其与电容C1与电容C2共同构成π型滤波电路对所接收的信号进行滤波。当有浪涌流经电感L1时，会在电感L1两端形成电位差，此电位差会使能量泄放电路722′导通而泄放掉浪涌能量，从而减小浪涌对后级电路的影响。本实施例中，整流电路510作为可选配置，且整流电路510与浪涌防护电路720′的位置可互换而不影响浪涌电路的电路特性，例如，浪涌防护电路720′耦接于第一接脚501和第二接脚502。Please refer to FIG. 53F . FIG. 53F is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a surge protection circuit according to a sixth embodiment of the present application. It is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53A , except that the surge protection circuit 720 ′ in this embodiment includes The inductive circuit 721 ′ and the energy discharge circuit 722 ′ further include a filter circuit 723 ′. The structures and connection methods of the inductive circuit 721 ′ and the energy discharge circuit 722 ′ are the same as those in FIG. 53A , and are not repeated here. The filter circuit 723' includes a capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2, one end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the inductive circuit 721', the other end is electrically connected to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510, and one end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected. It is electrically connected to the other end of the inductive circuit 721 ′, and the other end is electrically connected to the second rectifier output end 512 of the rectifier circuit 510 . Wherein, since the inductance L1 in the inductive circuit 721 ′ also has a filtering function in the power supply loop, in some embodiments, the inductance L1 can also be assigned to the filtering circuit 723 ′, which is the same as the filter circuit 723 ′. The capacitor C1 and the capacitor C2 together form a π-type filter circuit to filter the received signal. When a surge flows through the inductor L1, a potential difference will be formed between the two ends of the inductor L1. This potential difference will make the energy discharge circuit 722' conduct to discharge the surge energy, thereby reducing the impact of the surge on the subsequent circuit. Impact. In this embodiment, the rectifier circuit 510 is an optional configuration, and the positions of the rectifier circuit 510 and the surge protection circuit 720' can be interchanged without affecting the circuit characteristics of the surge circuit. For example, the surge protection circuit 720' is coupled to The first pin 501 and the second pin 502 .
请参阅图53G，图53G是本申请第七实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图，与图53F所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是，本实施例中能量泄放电路722′更包括限流组件D1，浪涌防护电路的工作方式与其前述图53B所示的实施例相同，仅在其基础上增加了滤波功能，此处不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 53G. FIG. 53G is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the seventh embodiment of the present application. The current limiting component D1 is further included. The working mode of the surge protection circuit is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53B , only the filtering function is added on the basis thereof, which will not be repeated here.
请参阅图53H，图53H是本申请第八实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图，与图53C所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是本实施例中浪涌防护电路720′除了包括电感性电路721′、能量泄放电路722′，更包含滤波电路723′，所述电感性电路721′和能量泄放电路722′的构成以及连接方式与图53C相同，在此不再赘述。所述滤波电路723′包括电容C1和电容 C2，所述电容C1的一端电性连接电感L1a的一端，另一端电性连接至电感L1b的一端,电容C2一端电性连接至电感L1a的另一端，另一端电性连接至电感L1b的另一端。其中，由于所述电感性电路721′中的电感L1a和电感L1b在供电回路中也兼具滤波功能，故而，在其他一些实施例中，所述电感L1a和电感L1b也可划归于所述滤波电路723′，其与电容C1与电容C2共同构成滤波电路对所接收的信号进行滤波。在本实施例中，浪涌防护电路的工作方式与其前述图53C所示的实施例相同，仅在其基础上增加了滤波功能，此处不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 53H. FIG. 53H is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the surge protection circuit according to the eighth embodiment of the present application, which is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53C, except that the surge protection circuit 720' in this embodiment is It includes an inductive circuit 721', an energy discharge circuit 722', and a filter circuit 723'. The structures and connection methods of the inductive circuit 721' and the energy discharge circuit 722' are the same as those in FIG. 53C, and will not be repeated here. . The filter circuit 723' includes a capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2. One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the inductor L1a, the other end is electrically connected to one end of the inductor L1b, and one end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the other end of the inductor L1a. , and the other end is electrically connected to the other end of the inductor L1b. Wherein, since the inductance L1a and the inductance L1b in the inductive circuit 721' also have filtering functions in the power supply loop, in some other embodiments, the inductance L1a and the inductance L1b can also be classified as the The filter circuit 723', together with the capacitor C1 and the capacitor C2, constitutes a filter circuit to filter the received signal. In this embodiment, the operation mode of the surge protection circuit is the same as that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53C , and only the filtering function is added on the basis thereof, which will not be repeated here.
请参阅图53I，图53I是本申请第九实施例的浪涌防护电路的电路架构示意图。与图53H所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是本实施例中，能量泄放电路722′更包括限流组件D1a和限流组件D1b。限流组件D1a与压控组件DBs1a串联后并联于电感L1a的两端，限流组件D1b与压控组件DBs1b串联后并联于电感L1b的两端。本实施例中浪涌防护电路的工作方式与图53G所示的实施例类似，在此不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 53I. FIG. 53I is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a surge protection circuit according to a ninth embodiment of the present application. Similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53H, the difference is that in this embodiment, the energy discharge circuit 722' further includes a current limiting component D1a and a current limiting component D1b. The current limiting component D1a is connected in series with the voltage control component DBs1a and connected in parallel to both ends of the inductor L1a, and the current limiting component D1b is connected in series with the voltage control component DBs1b and connected in parallel with both ends of the inductor L1b. The working manner of the surge protection circuit in this embodiment is similar to that of the embodiment shown in FIG. 53G , and details are not repeated here.
图17A是本申请第十二实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。请参见图17A，相较先前实施例所述的LED直管灯500、600、700、800、1700、或1800，本实施例的LED直管灯900的电源模块5除了包含整流电路(如510)、滤波电路(如520)、驱动电路(如530)之外，更增加了触电检测模块2000，其中，触电检测模块2000包含检测控制电路2100(或称检测控制器)以及限流电路2200。需要说明的是，根据LED直管灯1700或1800采用的浪涌防护电路的电路架构形式的不同，本实施例中的电源模块5在增加检测模块2000之外，也可是包括整流电路(如510)、浪涌防护电路(如620′)、驱动电路(如530)，在此，对电源模块5所包含的其他电路单元或部分并不做限制。17A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 17A , compared with the LED straight tube lamp 500 , 600 , 700 , 800 , 1700 , or 1800 described in the previous embodiment, the power module 5 of the LED straight tube lamp 900 of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit (eg 510 ), filter circuit (such as 520), and drive circuit (such as 530), an electric shock detection module 2000 is added, wherein the electric shock detection module 2000 includes a detection control circuit 2100 (or a detection controller) and a current limiting circuit 2200. It should be noted that, according to the different circuit structure forms of the surge protection circuit adopted by the LED straight tube lamp 1700 or 1800, the power module 5 in this embodiment may include a rectifier circuit (eg, 510) in addition to the detection module 2000. ), a surge protection circuit (eg, 620 ′), and a driving circuit (eg, 530 ). Here, other circuit units or parts included in the power module 5 are not limited.
在本实施例中，检测控制电路2100是用以进行LED直管灯900的安装状态检测/阻抗检测，藉以根据检测结果产生相应的控制信号的电路配置，其中所述检测结果会指示LED直管灯900是否正确安装至灯座上，或可说是指示是否有异常的外部阻抗接入(例如人体阻抗)。限流电路2200是用以响应所述控制信号所指示的检测结果而决定是否限制电流在LED直管灯900上流通，其中在限流电路2200接收到指示LED直管灯900为正确安装/无异常阻抗接入的控制信号时，限流电路2200会使电源模块5可正常供电给LED模块50使用(即，控制LED直管灯900的电源回路的电流正常流通)，并且在限流电路2200接收到指示LED直管灯900为不正确安装/有异常的外部阻抗接入的控制信号时，限流电路2200会将LED直管灯上限流至小于触电安全值以下，所述触电安全值例如为5MIU(有效值)或7.07MIU(峰值)。In the present embodiment, the detection control circuit 2100 is a circuit configuration for performing the installation state detection/impedance detection of the LED straight tube lamp 900, so as to generate a corresponding control signal according to the detection result, wherein the detection result will indicate the LED straight tube light. Whether the lamp 900 is properly installed on the lamp socket, or it can be said to indicate whether there is abnormal external impedance access (eg, human body impedance). The current limiting circuit 2200 is used to determine whether to limit the current to flow on the LED straight tube light 900 in response to the detection result indicated by the control signal, wherein the current limiting circuit 2200 receives an indication that the LED straight tube light 900 is correctly installed/no When the abnormal impedance is connected to the control signal, the current limiting circuit 2200 enables the power supply module 5 to supply power to the LED module 50 normally (that is, the current of the power supply circuit that controls the LED straight tube lamp 900 flows normally), and the current limiting circuit 2200 When receiving a control signal indicating that the LED straight tube light 900 is improperly installed/connected with an abnormal external impedance, the current limiting circuit 2200 will limit the current limit of the LED straight tube light to less than an electric shock safety value, such as an electric shock safety value. It is 5MIU (rms) or 7.07MIU (peak).
所述电源回路是指电源模块5向LED模块50传输电流的路径。所述安装状态检测/阻抗检测例如是检测控制电路2100通过检测LED直管灯900的电气特性(例如电压、电流)，以获取LED直管灯900的安装状态信息/等效阻抗信息的电路操作。更进一步的说，在一些实施例中，检测控制电路2100还可以通过控制电源回路的电流连续性或是建立额外检测路径等方式来进行电气特性检测，进而避免检测时的触电风险。底下会以图18至图45F说明检测控制 电路进行电气特性检测的具体电路实施例。The power loop refers to the path through which the power module 5 transmits current to the LED module 50 . The installation state detection/impedance detection is, for example, the circuit operation in which the detection control circuit 2100 obtains the installation state information/equivalent impedance information of the LED straight tube lamp 900 by detecting the electrical characteristics (such as voltage, current) of the LED straight tube lamp 900 . Furthermore, in some embodiments, the detection control circuit 2100 may also perform electrical characteristic detection by controlling the current continuity of the power loop or establishing an additional detection path, thereby avoiding the risk of electric shock during detection. Specific circuit embodiments of the detection control circuit for electrical characteristic detection will be described below with reference to Figures 18 to 45F.
图17B是本申请第十三实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。请参见图17B，相较于图17A实施例，本实施例的触电检测模块2000设置在LED直管灯1000外部，并且位在外部电网508的供电路径上，例如是设置在灯座中。其中，当LED直管灯1000的接脚电性连接至外部电网508时，触电检测模块2000会经由对应的接脚串接至LED直管灯1000的电源回路，使得触电检测模块2000可以藉由上述图17A实施例所述的安装检测/阻抗检测方式来判断LED直管灯1000是否正确安装至灯座上及/或使用者是否有触电风险。在本实施例中，触电检测模块2000的配置与前述图17A实施例相同，于此不再重复赘述。FIG. 17B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 17B , compared with the embodiment of FIG. 17A , the electric shock detection module 2000 of this embodiment is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp 1000 and located on the power supply path of the external power grid 508 , for example, in the lamp socket. Wherein, when the pins of the LED straight tube light 1000 are electrically connected to the external power grid 508, the electric shock detection module 2000 will be connected in series to the power circuit of the LED straight tube light 1000 through the corresponding pins, so that the electric shock detection module 2000 can use The installation detection/impedance detection method described in the above embodiment of FIG. 17A is used to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp 1000 is correctly installed on the lamp socket and/or whether the user is at risk of electric shock. In this embodiment, the configuration of the electric shock detection module 2000 is the same as that in the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 17A , and details are not repeated here.
在另一实施例中，图17A与17B实施例的架构可以整合在一起。举例来说，可在LED直管灯照明系统设置多个触电检测模块2000，其中至少有一个触电检测模块2000设置在LED直管灯内部，并且至少有另一个安装检测模块设置在LED直管灯外部(例如灯座中)，通过灯头上的接脚电性连接LED直管灯的电源回路，进而令防触电保护的效果得以进一步提升。In another embodiment, the architecture of the embodiments of Figures 17A and 17B can be integrated. For example, a plurality of electric shock detection modules 2000 may be installed in the LED straight tube light lighting system, wherein at least one electric shock detection module 2000 is disposed inside the LED straight tube light, and at least another installation detection module is disposed in the LED straight tube light Externally (for example, in the lamp socket), the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is electrically connected through the pins on the lamp head, so that the effect of electric shock protection can be further improved.
图17C是本申请第十四实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。请参见图17C，相较于图17A和图17B实施例，本实施例的LED直管灯1600例如是外置电源型(Type-C)LED直管灯，其电源模块5设置在LED直管灯1600外部。触电检测模块2000设置在LED直管灯1600内部，并且包含有检测控制电路2100和限流电路2200。在本实施例中，限流电路2200可以是设置在供电路径上，并且受控于检测控制电路2100，其中触电检测模块2000的具体运作机制可以参照其他对应实施例所述，于此不再重复赘述。值得一提的是，在本实施例的应用中，由于触电检测模块2000的作用，即使外置型的电源模块5选用非隔离式的电源转换电路来实施，也不会有触电风险。相较于搭配传统LED直管灯的外置电源而言，由于不会再受限于仅能选用隔离式电源转换电路来搭配设计，因此外置电源的设计选择可更加多样化。FIG. 17C is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lamp lighting system according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 17C , compared with the embodiments of FIGS. 17A and 17B , the LED straight tube lamp 1600 of the present embodiment is, for example, an external power supply type (Type-C) LED straight tube lamp, and the power supply module 5 is disposed in the LED straight tube. Lamp 1600 exterior. The electric shock detection module 2000 is arranged inside the LED straight tube lamp 1600 and includes a detection control circuit 2100 and a current limiting circuit 2200 . In this embodiment, the current limiting circuit 2200 may be disposed on the power supply path and controlled by the detection control circuit 2100. The specific operation mechanism of the electric shock detection module 2000 can be referred to as described in other corresponding embodiments, which will not be repeated here. Repeat. It is worth mentioning that, in the application of this embodiment, due to the function of the electric shock detection module 2000 , even if the external power module 5 is implemented with a non-isolated power conversion circuit, there is no risk of electric shock. Compared with the external power supply with the traditional LED straight tube lamp, the design options of the external power supply can be more diversified because it is no longer limited to the isolated power conversion circuit for matching design.
应注意的是，于此所述的触电检测模块2000是应用在LED直管灯的电源模块中的一种电路配置，其可以利用分立电路或集成电路来实现，本揭露不以此为限。此外，触电检测模块2000的命名仅是为了表彰其主要作用，但并非用以限定其范围。换言之，只要是任一种电路配置，其可执行本揭露所主张的电路操作，或是具有本揭露所主张的电子组件配置及连接关系，即属于是本揭露的触电检测模块2000所主张的范围。在本揭露中，触电检测模块2000根据描述方式不同，也可以被命名为检测电路、安装检测模块/电路、防触电模块/电路、防触电检测模块/电路、阻抗检测模块/电路、或直接表述为一种电路配置，本揭露不以此为限。此外，在图17A和17B中，仅是以示意的方式绘示LED直管灯900/1000和外部电网508之间的连接关系，并非限定外部驱动信号是从单端输入LED直管灯900/1000，合先叙明。It should be noted that the electric shock detection module 2000 described herein is a circuit configuration applied in a power supply module of an LED straight tube lamp, which can be implemented by discrete circuits or integrated circuits, and the present disclosure is not limited thereto. In addition, the name of the electric shock detection module 2000 is only to recognize its main function, but not to limit its scope. In other words, any circuit configuration that can perform the circuit operations claimed in the present disclosure, or has the configuration and connection relationship of electronic components claimed in the present disclosure, belongs to the scope claimed by the electric shock detection module 2000 of the present disclosure . In the present disclosure, the electric shock detection module 2000 can also be named as a detection circuit, an installation detection module/circuit, an electric shock prevention module/circuit, an electric shock prevention detection module/circuit, an impedance detection module/circuit, or a direct expression It is a circuit configuration, and the present disclosure is not limited thereto. In addition, in FIGS. 17A and 17B , the connection relationship between the LED straight tube lamp 900/1000 and the external power grid 508 is only schematically depicted, and it is not limited that the external driving signal is input to the LED straight tube lamp 900/1000 from a single end. 1000, together with the first description.
底下先就图17A实施例架构下(即，触电检测模块2000设置于LED直管灯900内部)的多个不同电路配置进行说明。Below, a number of different circuit configurations under the structure of the embodiment of FIG. 17A (that is, the electric shock detection module 2000 is disposed inside the LED straight tube lamp 900 ) will be described.
图17D为本申请第十五实施例的LED直管灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。本实施例中的电路配置与图17A所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是本实施例中LED直管灯900更包含阻抗调整模块9100。当外部电网508的供电路径上的电路阻抗Rh较大时，安装检测模块2000将判定LED灯管非正常安装，限流电路2200会将LED直管灯上限流至小于触电安全值以下，所述触电安全值例如为5MIU(有效值)或7.07MIU(峰值)，灯管无法正常点亮。FIG. 17D is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED straight tube lighting system according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application. The circuit configuration in this embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 17A , and the difference is that the LED straight tube lamp 900 in this embodiment further includes an impedance adjustment module 9100 . When the circuit impedance Rh on the power supply path of the external power grid 508 is large, the installation detection module 2000 will determine that the LED tube is installed abnormally, and the current limiting circuit 2200 will limit the current limit of the LED straight tube lamp to less than the electric shock safety value. The electric shock safety value is, for example, 5MIU (effective value) or 7.07MIU (peak value), and the lamp cannot be lit normally.
阻抗调整模块9100电性连接至电源模块5的输入端和外部电网508的供电输入端，用以改变供电回路的阻抗特性使LED直管灯在线路阻抗Rh较大时仍可以正常点亮。为了使单个LED直管灯仍具有触电防护功能，设置阻抗调整模块9100的阻抗高于临界保护点。当只有单个LED直管灯接入供电回路时，安装检测模块2000仍可以正常工作，检测供电回路中的阻抗而决定是否正常点亮LED直管灯。当检测到供电回路的阻抗大于设定阈值时，安装检测模块2000判定灯管非正常安装，灯管无法正常点亮。所述供电回路为外部电网508向LED直管灯900供电的回路。The impedance adjustment module 9100 is electrically connected to the input end of the power supply module 5 and the power supply input end of the external power grid 508 to change the impedance characteristic of the power supply loop so that the LED straight tube lamp can still be lit normally when the line impedance Rh is large. In order to make a single LED straight tube light still have the electric shock protection function, the impedance of the impedance adjustment module 9100 is set to be higher than the critical protection point. When only a single LED straight tube light is connected to the power supply circuit, the installation detection module 2000 can still work normally, and detects the impedance in the power supply loop to determine whether to light the LED straight tube light normally. When it is detected that the impedance of the power supply circuit is greater than the set threshold, the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp tube is abnormally installed and the lamp tube cannot be lit normally. The power supply circuit is a circuit through which the external power grid 508 supplies power to the LED straight tube lamp 900 .
当有2个LED直管灯接入供电回路时，参考图17E，两个LED直管灯并联接入外部电网508，电阻Rh为线路阻抗。LED直管灯900-1中的阻抗调整模块9100电性连接至供电输入端L和N，LED直管灯900-2中的阻抗调整模块9100电性连接至供电输入端L和N。此时，两个阻抗调整模块并联，其并联后的阻抗低于临界保护点，且并联后的阻抗叠加线路阻抗Rh后的供电回路的阻抗小于设定阈值，安装检测模块2000判定灯管正常安装，LED直管灯900-1正常点亮；同样的，LED灯900-2正常点亮。When two LED straight tube lamps are connected to the power supply circuit, referring to FIG. 17E , the two LED straight tube lamps are connected to the external power grid 508 in parallel, and the resistance Rh is the line impedance. The impedance adjustment module 9100 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-1 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N, and the impedance adjustment module 9100 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-2 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N. At this time, the two impedance adjustment modules are connected in parallel, the impedance after parallel connection is lower than the critical protection point, and the impedance of the power supply circuit after the parallel impedance superimposed on the line impedance Rh is less than the set threshold, the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp is installed normally , the LED straight tube light 900-1 lights up normally; similarly, the LED light 900-2 lights up normally.
可以理解为，当有两只LED直管灯并联接入电路中时，LED直管灯中包含的阻抗调整模块同样并联接入供电回路，经阻抗调整模块的影响，安装检测模块判定LED灯正常安装，而不受线路阻抗Rh的影响。It can be understood that when two LED straight tube lamps are connected in parallel to the circuit, the impedance adjustment module included in the LED straight tube lamp is also connected in parallel to the power supply circuit. After the influence of the impedance adjustment module, the installation detection module determines that the LED lamp is normal. installed without being affected by the line impedance Rh.
LED直管灯900-1中的安装检测模块2000判定线路中的阻抗，从而使LED灯900-1不受线路阻抗Rh的影响而正常点亮。The installation detection module 2000 in the LED straight tube light 900-1 determines the impedance in the line, so that the LED light 900-1 is normally lit without being affected by the line impedance Rh.
本实施例中，以两只LED直管灯为例，即当一个供电回路中同时接入两只LED直管灯时，两只LED直管灯中的阻抗调整模块9100并联后的阻抗小于临界保护点，LED直管灯正常点亮。在其他实施例中，可设置临界点亮的灯管为n，即当接入供电回路的灯管小于n时，n个LED直管灯中阻抗调整模块9100并联后的阻抗大于临界保护点，LED直管灯无法正常点亮；当接入供电回路的灯管大于等于n时，n个LED直管灯中的阻抗调整模块9100并联后的阻抗小于临界保护点，LED直管灯可正常点亮。In this embodiment, taking two LED straight tube lamps as an example, that is, when two LED straight tube lamps are connected to a power supply circuit at the same time, the impedance of the impedance adjustment modules 9100 in the two LED straight tube lamps in parallel is less than the critical value Protection point, the LED straight tube light is normally lit. In other embodiments, the critically lit lamps can be set to n, that is, when the lamps connected to the power supply circuit are less than n, the impedance of the n LED straight tube lamps after the impedance adjustment modules 9100 are connected in parallel is greater than the critical protection point, The LED straight tube lamp cannot be lit normally; when the lamps connected to the power supply circuit are greater than or equal to n, the impedance of the impedance adjustment modules 9100 in n LED straight tube lamps connected in parallel is less than the critical protection point, and the LED straight tube lamp can be lit normally. Bright.
参考图17F为本发明第一实施例的阻抗调整模块的电路结构示意图。阻抗调整模块9100包含电容C9。电容C9电性连接至供电输入端L和N，即电容C9的一个引脚电性连接至供电输入端L，其另一个引脚电性连接至供电输入端N。Rh为线路阻抗，且Rh大于设定阈值。此 设定阈值是安装检测模块判定灯管是否正常安装的临界值当供电回路的阻抗大于设定阈值时，安装检测模块判定灯管非正常安装，当供电回路的阻小于设定阈值时，安装检测模块判定灯管正常安装，LED直管灯正常点亮。17F is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the impedance adjustment module according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The impedance adjustment module 9100 includes a capacitor C9. The capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N, that is, one pin of the capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminal L, and the other pin of the capacitor C9 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminal N. Rh is the line impedance, and Rh is greater than the set threshold. This set threshold is the critical value for the installation detection module to determine whether the lamp is installed normally. When the impedance of the power supply circuit is greater than the set threshold, the installation detection module determines that the lamp is installed abnormally. When the resistance of the power supply circuit is less than the set threshold, the installation The detection module determines that the lamp is installed normally, and the LED straight lamp is normally lit.
当只有一个LED直管灯接入供电回路时，供电输入端只有一个电容C9接入，C9的阻抗大于临界保护点，当系统上电时，外部驱动信号首先给电容C9充电，LED直管灯进入触电检测阶段，安装检测模块2000通过检测电路中的电信号以确定是否有异常阻抗接入电路/灯管是否正常安装，此电信号可以是漏电检测阶段供电回路中的电压，电流等信号。触电检测阶段，电容C9放电给后级电路，安装检测模块2000检测到的供电回路中的检测电流相较于没有电容C9的电路更大，但是，触电检测电流仍小于设定安全阈值，安装检测模块判定灯管非正常安装，灯管无法正常点亮。When only one LED straight tube light is connected to the power supply circuit, only one capacitor C9 is connected to the power supply input end, and the impedance of C9 is greater than the critical protection point. When the system is powered on, the external drive signal first charges the capacitor C9, and the LED straight tube light Entering the electric shock detection stage, the installation detection module 2000 determines whether there is an abnormal impedance access circuit/whether the lamp is installed normally by detecting the electrical signal in the circuit. In the electric shock detection stage, the capacitor C9 is discharged to the subsequent circuit, and the detection current in the power supply circuit detected by the installation detection module 2000 is larger than that of the circuit without the capacitor C9, but the electric shock detection current is still less than the set safety threshold. The module determines that the lamp is installed abnormally and the lamp cannot be lit normally.
当有两支LED直管灯以并联的方式接入供电回路中时，如图17F所示，供电输入端同时接入电容C9和C10，这里设定电容C9和电容C10的规格相同，电容C9和C10并联后可等效为C11，等效电容C11电性连接至供电输入端L和N。系统上电后，外部驱动信号首先给等效电容C11充电，等效电容C11同时放电给灯管，因等效电容C11的容值为电容C9的两倍，安装检测模块2000在触电检测阶段检测到的供电回路中的检测电流相较于只有一个灯管接入回路时更大，此时触电检测电流大于设定安全阈值，安装检测模块判定灯管正常安装，LED直管灯900-1可正常点亮，同样的LED直管灯900-2也可正常点亮。When two LED straight tube lamps are connected to the power supply circuit in parallel, as shown in Figure 17F, the power supply input terminal is connected to capacitors C9 and C10 at the same time. Here, the specifications of capacitor C9 and capacitor C10 are set to be the same, and capacitor C9 After being connected in parallel with C10, it can be equivalent to C11, and the equivalent capacitor C11 is electrically connected to the power supply input terminals L and N. After the system is powered on, the external drive signal first charges the equivalent capacitor C11, and the equivalent capacitor C11 discharges to the lamp at the same time. Since the capacitance value of the equivalent capacitor C11 is twice that of the capacitor C9, the installation detection module 2000 detects the electric shock during the electric shock detection stage. The detection current in the incoming power supply circuit is larger than that when only one lamp is connected to the circuit. At this time, the electric shock detection current is greater than the set safety threshold. The installation detection module determines that the lamp is installed normally, and the LED straight lamp 900-1 can be installed. Normally lit, the same LED straight tube light 900-2 can also be lit normally.
本实施例中，只有两只LED灯管并入供电回路中，当供电回路中并入更多的LED灯管时，并入到供电输入端L和N的电容会随着灯管的增加而增加，其等效电容的容值同样的会增加。若并入供电回路的灯管数量为n(n≥2)，则等效电容的容值为nC9。当n为2时，供电系统中接入两支灯管，等效电容的容值为2C9，大于临界电容值，阻抗调整模块“屏蔽”安装检测模块，可以理解为阻抗调整模块通过改变安装检测阶段的安装检测电流使安装检测模块判断灯管正常安装而使灯管正常点亮。当n>2时，接入供电回路的等效容值nC9大于临界电容值，阻抗调整模块“屏蔽”安装检测模块而使灯管正常点亮。In this embodiment, only two LED lamps are incorporated into the power supply loop. When more LED lamps are incorporated into the power supply loop, the capacitances incorporated into the power supply input terminals L and N will increase with the increase of the lamps. Increase, the capacitance value of its equivalent capacitance will also increase. If the number of lamps incorporated into the power supply loop is n (n≥2), the capacitance value of the equivalent capacitor is nC9. When n is 2, two lamps are connected to the power supply system, the capacitance value of the equivalent capacitance is 2C9, which is greater than the critical capacitance value, and the impedance adjustment module "shields" the installation detection module. It can be understood that the impedance adjustment module detects by changing the installation. The installation detection current of the stage enables the installation detection module to judge that the lamp is normally installed and light the lamp normally. When n>2, the equivalent capacitance value nC9 connected to the power supply loop is greater than the critical capacitance value, and the impedance adjustment module "shields" the installation of the detection module to make the lamp light normally.
在其他实施例中，可以改变阻抗调整模块中电容C9的电容值，而改变临界点亮的灯管数量。例如可设置接入供电回路的灯管数量大于等于3时，LED灯管正常点亮，本发明不以此为限。In other embodiments, the capacitance value of the capacitor C9 in the impedance adjustment module can be changed to change the number of lamps that are critically lit. For example, it can be set that when the number of lamps connected to the power supply circuit is greater than or equal to 3, the LED lamps are normally lit, and the present invention is not limited to this.
当供电回路中的线路阻抗Rh小于设定阈值时，安装检测模块2000判定灯管正常安装，LED直管灯正常点亮。此时LED灯照明系统中即使只接入一只灯管，仍可以正常点亮。When the line impedance Rh in the power supply loop is less than the set threshold, the installation detection module 2000 determines that the lamp is normally installed and the LED straight lamp is normally lit. At this time, even if only one lamp is connected to the LED lighting system, it can still be lit normally.
需要说明的是，即使LED直管灯中设置了阻抗调整模块，亦不影响灯管的安全性能，即安装人员进行在线安装时亦没有触电风险。以下结合图17G进行说明。本照明系统中，LED直管灯900-1和900-2已经接入供电回路且正常点亮。当在安装LED直管灯900-3时，安装 人员不小心触碰到了灯管的安装针脚，其人体接入LED直管灯900-3的供电回路中，外部驱动信号首先通过线路阻抗Rh和人体阻抗Rm对阻抗调整模块中的电容进行充电，LED直管灯900-3中的安装检测模块2000进行触电检测，因电容C12的容值低于临界电容值，安装检测模块检测到的供电回路中的检测电流小于设定安全阈值，安装检测模块判定LED直管灯900-3非正常安装，LED直管灯900-3无法正常点亮，流经人体的电流小于临界安全电流(5MIU),安装检测人员无触电风险。It should be noted that even if the impedance adjustment module is installed in the LED straight tube lamp, it does not affect the safety performance of the lamp tube, that is, there is no risk of electric shock when the installer performs online installation. The following description will be made with reference to FIG. 17G . In this lighting system, the LED straight tube lamps 900-1 and 900-2 have been connected to the power supply circuit and are normally lit. When installing the LED straight tube light 900-3, the installer accidentally touches the mounting pins of the light tube, and the human body is connected to the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube light 900-3. The external drive signal first passes through the line impedance Rh and The human body impedance Rm charges the capacitor in the impedance adjustment module, and the installation detection module 2000 in the LED straight tube lamp 900-3 performs electric shock detection. Since the capacitance value of the capacitor C12 is lower than the critical capacitance value, the power supply circuit detected by the installation detection module The detection current is less than the set safety threshold, the installation detection module determines that the LED straight tube light 900-3 is installed abnormally, the LED straight tube light 900-3 cannot be lit normally, and the current flowing through the human body is less than the critical safety current (5MIU), There is no risk of electric shock for installation and inspection personnel.
请参见图18，图18是本申请第十实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。在本实施例中，LED直管灯1100例如是直接接收外部电网508所提供的外部驱动信号，其中所述外部驱动信号通过火线(L)与中性线(N)给到LED直管灯1100的两端接脚501、502上。在实际应用中，LED直管灯1100可更包括接脚503、504。在LED直管灯1100包含有4根接脚501-504的结构底下，依设计需求同侧灯头上的两接脚(如501与503，或502与504)可以电性连接在一起或是相互电性独立，本申请不以此为限。触电检测模块3000设置于灯管内并包括检测控制电路3100以及限流电路3200，所述触电检测模块3000亦可称为安装检测模块3000(底下以安装检测模块进行描述3000)。限流电路3200经第一安装检测端TE1耦接整流电路510，以及经第二安装检测端TE2耦接滤波电路520，亦即串接在LED直管灯1100的电源回路上。检测控制电路3100会在检测模式下检测流经第一安装检测端TE1及第二安装检测端TE2的信号(即，流经电源回路的信号)，并根据检测结果决定是否禁止外部驱动信号(即，外部电网508所提供的信号)流过LED直管灯1100。当LED直管灯1100尚未正确安装于灯座时，检测控制电路3100会检测到较小的电流信号而判断信号流过过高的阻抗，此时限流电路3200会将第一安装检测端TE1和第二安装检测端TE2之间的电流路径截止使LED直管灯1100停止操作(即，使LED直管灯1100不被点亮)。若否，检测控制电路3100判断LED直管灯正确安装于灯座上，限流电路3200会维持第一安装检测端TE1和第二安装检测端TE2之间导通使LED直管灯1100正常操作(即，使LED直管灯1100可被正常点亮)。换言之，当流经所述第一安装检测端TE1以及所述第二安装检测端TE2的电流高于或等于安装设定电流(或一电流值)时，安装检测模块3000判断LED直管灯1100正确安装于灯座上而使限流电路3200导通，使LED直管灯1100操作于一导通状态；当流经所述第一安装检测端TE1以及所述第二安装检测端TE2的一电流低于所述安装设定电流(或电流值)时，安装检测模块3000判断LED直管灯1100未正确安装于灯座上而使限流电路3200截止，使LED直管灯1100进入一不导通状态或是令LED直管灯1100的电源回路上的电流有效值被限缩至小于5mA(基于验证标准则为5MIU)。换句话说，安装检测模块3000基于检测到的阻抗判断导通或截止，使LED直管灯1100操作于导通或进入不导通/限制电流状态。藉此，可以避免使用者在LED直管灯1100尚未正确安装于灯座时因误触LED直管灯1100导电部分而触电的问题。Please refer to FIG. 18 . FIG. 18 is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power supply module according to a tenth embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the LED straight tube light 1100 directly receives, for example, an external driving signal provided by the external power grid 508 , wherein the external driving signal is supplied to the LED straight tube light 1100 through the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N). on both ends of the pins 501 and 502. In practical applications, the LED straight tube lamp 1100 may further include pins 503 and 504 . Under the structure of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 including four pins 501-504, the two pins ( eg 501 and 503, or 502 and 504) on the same side of the lamp head can be electrically connected together or with each other according to design requirements Electrically independent, this application is not limited to this. The electric shock detection module 3000 is disposed in the lamp tube and includes a detection control circuit 3100 and a current limiting circuit 3200. The electric shock detection module 3000 can also be referred to as an installation detection module 3000 (the installation detection module is described below for 3000). The current limiting circuit 3200 is coupled to the rectifier circuit 510 via the first installation detection terminal TE1 , and is coupled to the filter circuit 520 via the second installation detection terminal TE2 , that is, connected in series to the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 . The detection control circuit 3100 will detect the signal flowing through the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 in the detection mode (ie, the signal flowing through the power circuit), and determine whether to disable the external driving signal (ie, the signal flowing through the power circuit) according to the detection result. , the signal provided by the external power grid 508 ) flows through the LED straight tube light 1100 . When the LED straight tube lamp 1100 has not been properly installed in the lamp socket, the detection control circuit 3100 will detect a small current signal and determine that the signal flows through an excessively high impedance. At this time, the current limiting circuit 3200 will connect the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the The current path between the second mounting detection terminals TE2 is cut off to stop the operation of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 (ie, the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not lit). If not, the detection control circuit 3100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket, and the current limiting circuit 3200 will maintain the conduction between the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 operates normally (That is, the LED straight tube lamp 1100 can be normally lit). In other words, when the current flowing through the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 is higher than or equal to the installation setting current (or a current value), the installation detection module 3000 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 Correctly installed on the lamp socket to make the current limiting circuit 3200 conduct, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 operates in a conducting state; When the current is lower than the installation setting current (or current value), the installation detection module 3000 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not correctly installed on the lamp socket, so that the current limiting circuit 3200 is turned off, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 enters a non-stop state. The ON state or the RMS current on the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is limited to less than 5mA (5MIU based on the verification standard). In other words, the installation detection module 3000 determines whether it is turned on or off based on the detected impedance, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is operated to be turned on or into a non-conduction/limited current state. In this way, the user can avoid the problem of electric shock due to mistakenly touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube lamp 1100 when the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is not properly installed on the lamp socket.
更具体的说，因为当人体接触灯管时，人体的阻抗会导致电源回路上的等效阻抗改变，安装检测模块3000可藉由检测电源回路上的电压/电流变化来判断用户是否接触灯管，即可 实现上述的防触电功能。换言之，在本申请实施例中，安装检测模块3000可以透过检测电信号(包括电压或电流)来判断灯管是否被正确安装以及使用者是否在灯管未正确安装的情况下误触灯管的导电部分。更进一步的说，相较于一般的LED电源模块，在一些实施例中，配置有安装检测模块3000的电源模块本身就会有防止电击的效果，因此无须如一般电源电路设计般，在整流电路510的输入端(即，火线与中性线之间)设置安规电容(即，X电容)。从等效电路的角度来看，即表示在配置有安装检测模块3000的电源模块中，其整流电路510的输入端之间的等效电容值可例如小于47nF。在本实施中，所述电源回路是指在LED直管灯1100中的电流路径，也就是从接收第一极性/相电源(例如L线)的接脚经过电源线路与电路组件到达LED模块，再经由LED模块至接收第二极性/相电源(例如N线)的接脚所形成的路径。搭配双端进电的灯管结构来看，所述电源回路是形成在灯管相对两侧的灯头上的接脚501和502之间，而非在同侧灯头的两接脚501和503(或502和504)之间。More specifically, because when the human body touches the lamp, the impedance of the human body will cause the equivalent impedance on the power circuit to change. The installation detection module 3000 can determine whether the user touches the lamp by detecting the voltage/current change on the power circuit. , the above-mentioned anti-electric shock function can be realized. In other words, in the embodiment of the present application, the installation detection module 3000 can determine whether the lamp is installed correctly and whether the user touches the lamp by mistake by detecting electrical signals (including voltage or current) the conductive part. Furthermore, compared with the general LED power module, in some embodiments, the power module equipped with the installation detection module 3000 itself has the effect of preventing electric shock, so it is not necessary to design the rectifier circuit as in the general power circuit design. The input terminal of 510 (ie, between the live wire and the neutral wire) is provided with a safety capacitor (ie, the X capacitor). From the point of view of the equivalent circuit, it means that in the power module equipped with the installation detection module 3000, the equivalent capacitance value between the input terminals of the rectifier circuit 510 may be, for example, less than 47nF. In this embodiment, the power loop refers to the current path in the LED straight tube lamp 1100 , that is, from the pin receiving the first polarity/phase power (eg L line), through the power line and circuit components to the LED module , and then go through the LED module to the path formed by the pin that receives the second polarity/phase power supply (eg, N line). In view of the lamp tube structure with double-ended power feeding, the power circuit is formed between the pins 501 and 502 on the lamp caps on opposite sides of the lamp tube, not between the two pins 501 and 503 of the lamp cap on the same side ( or between 502 and 504).
应说明的是，限流电路3200设置在整流电路510与滤波电路520之间仅是本申请的一实施范例。在其他实施例中，限流电路3200仅需设置在可以控制电源回路导通与截止的位置即可实现安装检测模块3000的防触电效果。举例来说，限流电路3200可设置在滤波电路520与驱动电路530之间，或设置在驱动电路530与LED模块(50)之间，本申请不以此为限。It should be noted that the arrangement of the current limiting circuit 3200 between the rectifier circuit 510 and the filter circuit 520 is only an example of the present application. In other embodiments, the current limiting circuit 3200 only needs to be set at a position where the power loop can be controlled to be turned on and off to achieve the effect of preventing electric shock by installing the detection module 3000 . For example, the current limiting circuit 3200 may be disposed between the filter circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530, or between the driving circuit 530 and the LED module (50), but the present application is not limited thereto.
从电路操作的角度来看，检测控制电路3100在检测模式下判断LED直管灯1100是否正确安装至灯座上/是否有异常的阻抗接入的步骤如图48A所示，图48A是本申请第一实施例的触电检测方法的步骤流程图，所述触电检测方法包括：使检测路径导通一段期间后关断(步骤S101)；在检测路径导通的期间取样检测路径上的电信号(步骤S102)；判断取样到的电信号是否符合预设信号特征(步骤S103)；当步骤S103判定为是时，控制限流电路3200操作在第一组态(步骤S104)；以及当步骤S103判定为否时，控制限流电路3200操作在第二组态(步骤S105)，并且接着回到步骤S101。From the perspective of circuit operation, the steps of the detection control circuit 3100 in the detection mode to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp 1100 is correctly installed on the lamp socket/whether there is abnormal impedance access is shown in FIG. A flow chart of the steps of the electric shock detection method according to the first embodiment, the electric shock detection method includes: turning the detection path on for a period of time and then turning it off (step S101 ); sampling the electrical signal on the detection path ( Step S102); determine whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics (step S103); when step S103 is determined to be yes, control the current limiting circuit 3200 to operate in the first configuration (step S104); and when step S103 determines If not, control the current limiting circuit 3200 to operate in the second configuration (step S105), and then return to step S101.
在本实施例中，所述检测路径可以是电源回路或连接在整流电路510的输出侧的独立电流路径，其具体配置可以参考下述图19A至26B实施例的说明。另外，检测控制电路3100导通检测路径的期间长度、间隔、触发时间等设置，同样可参考下述实施例的说明。In this embodiment, the detection path may be a power supply loop or an independent current path connected to the output side of the rectifier circuit 510 , and the specific configuration can refer to the description of the embodiments in FIGS. 19A to 26B below. In addition, the setting of the period length, interval, and trigger time of the detection control circuit 3100 conducting the detection path can also refer to the description of the following embodiments.
在步骤S101中，使检测路径导通一段期间可以通过脉冲式的开关控制手段来实现。In step S101 , conducting the detection path for a period of time may be implemented by a pulsed switch control means.
在步骤S102中，取样的电信号可以是电压信号、电流信号、频率信号或相位信号等可以表现检测路径的阻抗变化的信号。In step S102, the sampled electrical signal may be a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, or a phase signal, or a signal that can represent the impedance change of the detection path.
在步骤S103中，判断取样到的电信号是否符合预设信号特征的动作可例如是比较取样的电信号与一预设信号的相对关系。在本实施例中，检测控制器7100判定电信号符合预设信号特征可以是对应至判定LED直管灯为正确安装/无异常阻抗接入的状态，并且检测控制器7100判定电信号不符合预设信号特征可以是对应至判定LED直管灯为不正确安装/有异常阻抗接 入的状态。In step S103, the action of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the predetermined signal characteristic may be, for example, comparing the relative relationship between the sampled electrical signal and a predetermined signal. In this embodiment, the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics, which may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed/connected with no abnormal impedance, and the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal does not conform to the preset signal characteristics. It is assumed that the signal characteristics may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed/connected with abnormal impedance.
在步骤S104与S105中，所述第一组态及第二组态为两相异的电路组态，并且可视限流电路3200的配置位置及类型而定。举例来说，在限流电路3200为独立于驱动电路并串接在电源回路上的开关电路/限流电路的实施例下，所述第一组态可以是导通组态(不限流组态)，并且所述第二组态可以是截止组态(限流组态)。In steps S104 and S105 , the first configuration and the second configuration are two different circuit configurations, and may depend on the configuration position and type of the current limiting circuit 3200 . For example, in the embodiment in which the current limiting circuit 3200 is a switch circuit/current limiting circuit which is independent of the driving circuit and is connected to the power loop in series, the first configuration may be a conduction configuration (no current limiting group). state), and the second configuration may be a cut-off configuration (current limiting configuration).
上述各步骤的详细操作及电路范例可参考安装检测模块的各个实施例。For detailed operations and circuit examples of the above steps, reference may be made to the various embodiments of the installation detection module.
请参见图19A，图19A是本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块3000a包含检测脉冲(pulse)发生模块3110、检测结果锁存电路3120、检测判定电路3130以及限流电路3200a。所述检测脉冲发生模块3110、检测结果锁存电路3120及检测判定电路3130构成检测控制电路3100。检测判定电路3130(经开关耦接端3201以及限流电路3200a)耦接第一安装检测端TE1以及耦接第二安装检测端TE2，以检测第一安装检测端TE1以及第二安装检测端TE2之间的信号。检测判定电路3130同时经检测结果端3131耦接检测结果锁存电路3120，以将检测结果信号经检测结果端3131传送至检测结果锁存电路3120。检测脉冲发生模块3110通过脉冲信号输出端3111耦接检测结果锁存电路3120，并产生脉冲信号以通知检测结果锁存电路3120锁存检测结果的时机点。检测结果锁存电路3120根据检测结果信号(或检测结果信号及脉冲信号)锁存检测结果，经检测结果锁存端3121耦接限流电路3200a，以将检测结果传送或反映至限流电路3200a。限流电路3200a根据检测结果，决定使第一安装检测端TE1以及第二安装检测端TE2之间导通或截止。在本实施例中，所述限流电路3200a也可以是开关电路3200a(底下以开关电路3200a描述)。Please refer to FIG. 19A . FIG. 19A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 3000a includes a detection pulse generation module 3110, a detection result latch circuit 3120, a detection determination circuit 3130, and a current limiting circuit 3200a. The detection pulse generating module 3110 , the detection result latch circuit 3120 and the detection determination circuit 3130 constitute the detection control circuit 3100 . The detection and determination circuit 3130 (via the switch coupling terminal 3201 and the current limiting circuit 3200a) is coupled to the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 to detect the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 between the signals. The detection determination circuit 3130 is also coupled to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the detection result terminal 3131 , so as to transmit the detection result signal to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the detection result terminal 3131 . The detection pulse generating module 3110 is coupled to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the pulse signal output terminal 3111 , and generates a pulse signal to notify the detection result latch circuit 3120 of the timing of latching the detection result. The detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result according to the detection result signal (or the detection result signal and the pulse signal), and is coupled to the current limiting circuit 3200a through the detection result latch terminal 3121 to transmit or reflect the detection result to the current limiting circuit 3200a . The current limiting circuit 3200a determines to turn on or off the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2 according to the detection result. In this embodiment, the current limiting circuit 3200a may also be a switch circuit 3200a (the switch circuit 3200a is described below).
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块3000a更包含镇流检测模块3150。所述镇流检测模块3150是用于判断外部驱动信号是否为镇流器所提供的交流信号，使得检测结果锁存电路3120可根据判断结果而调整对开关电路3200a的控制方式，藉以在镇流旁路型LED直管灯错误安装于具有镇流器的灯座时，使LED直管灯发出提示(例如闪烁)以提醒使用者误用的情形，避免镇流器输出的交流信号损坏镇流旁路型的LED直管灯。In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000a further includes a ballast detection module 3150 . The ballast detection module 3150 is used to determine whether the external driving signal is an AC signal provided by the ballast, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 can adjust the control method of the switch circuit 3200a according to the determination result, so as to ensure the performance of the ballast. When the bypass type LED straight tube lamp is wrongly installed in the lamp holder with the ballast, the LED straight tube lamp will emit a prompt (such as flashing) to remind the user of misuse, so as to avoid the AC signal output by the ballast from damaging the ballast Bypass type LED straight tube light.
在此，所述镇流检测模块3150亦可称为误用警示模块。上述描述换言之为，所述镇流检测模块3150用于检测所述电源回路的信号是否为镇流器特征信号，当检测到所述电源回路的信号为镇流器特征信号时输出第一检测信号。其中，所述镇流器特征信号用于描述镇流器(特别是电子镇流器)所输出的交流信号的高频、高压等特性。换言之，由于镇流器(特别是电子镇流器)输出的交流信号会具有高频、高压等特性，而交流电网所提供的交流信号一般则是相对低频(50Hz至60Hz)、低压(一般低于305V)的信号，因此通过检测母线电压的频率、振幅或相位等电信号特性即可识别出外部驱动信号的来源。比如，镇流器特征信号藉由其电压信号的电位(或电位区间)表示镇流器所输出的交流信号的高频值(或区间)。比如，镇流 器特征信号藉由其电压信号的电位(或电位区间)表示镇流器所输出的交流信号谷值相位等。所述镇流检测模块3150是通过其端子检测所述电源回路中信号的频率、相位、以及振幅中的至少一种而判断该信号是否为镇流器特征信号。其中，所述第一检测信号(或称为第一指示信号)用于指示外部驱动信号由镇流器所提供。Here, the ballast detection module 3150 may also be referred to as a misuse warning module. In other words, the above description is that the ballast detection module 3150 is used to detect whether the signal of the power circuit is the characteristic signal of the ballast, and outputs the first detection signal when it is detected that the signal of the power circuit is the characteristic signal of the ballast . Wherein, the ballast characteristic signal is used to describe the high frequency, high voltage and other characteristics of the AC signal output by the ballast (especially the electronic ballast). In other words, since the AC signal output by the ballast (especially the electronic ballast) will have the characteristics of high frequency and high voltage, and the AC signal provided by the AC grid is generally relatively low frequency (50Hz to 60Hz), low voltage (generally low Therefore, the source of the external drive signal can be identified by detecting the electrical signal characteristics such as the frequency, amplitude or phase of the bus voltage. For example, the characteristic signal of the ballast represents the high frequency value (or interval) of the AC signal output by the ballast by the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal. For example, the characteristic signal of the ballast represents the valley phase of the AC signal output by the ballast by the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal. The ballast detection module 3150 detects at least one of the frequency, phase, and amplitude of the signal in the power circuit through its terminal to determine whether the signal is a ballast characteristic signal. Wherein, the first detection signal (or referred to as the first indication signal) is used to indicate that the external driving signal is provided by the ballast.
为了能够有效地保留电源回路中的信号的高频、高压等特征信息，所述镇流检测模块3150的端子接入所述LED直管灯的电源回路中的整流电路的输出端或输入端。In order to effectively retain the high frequency, high voltage and other characteristic information of the signal in the power loop, the terminal of the ballast detection module 3150 is connected to the output or input of the rectifier circuit in the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp.
在图19A所示的示例中，镇流检测模块3150通过路径3151连接检测结果锁存电路3120，其中镇流检测模块315会检测电源模块中的母线电压，并且根据检测到的母线电压的信号特征来判断LED直管灯当前所接收到的外部驱动信号为镇流器所输出的交流信号或是由电网直接提供的交流信号In the example shown in FIG. 19A , the ballast detection module 3150 is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the path 3151, wherein the ballast detection module 315 detects the bus voltage in the power module, and according to the detected signal characteristics of the bus voltage To judge whether the external driving signal currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is the AC signal output by the ballast or the AC signal directly provided by the power grid
举例来说，在一些实施例中，镇流检测模块3150可以取样整流输出端511/512上的信号并且判断取样到的信号的频率(即，母线电压的频率)。当镇流检测模块3150检测到的信号频率大于一设定值时，即表示当前输入的外部驱动信号为高频的交流信号，亦即所述外部驱动信号可能是由镇流器所提供，因此镇流检测模块3150会发出第一指示信号(指示外部驱动信号由镇流器所提供)给检测结果锁存电路3120，使检测结果锁存电路3120依据第一指示信号控制开关电路3200a的切换状态，以影响电源回路上的电流连续性。另一方面，当镇流检测模块3150检测到的信号频率小于或等于所述设定值时，即表示当前输入的外部驱动信号为低频的交流信号，亦即所述外部驱动信号可能是由交流电网所提供，因此镇流检测模块3150会发出第二指示信号(指示外部驱动信号由交流电网所提供)给检测结果锁存电路3120，使检测结果锁存电路3120依据第二指示信号控制开关电路3200a维持在导通状态，藉以令驱动信号可以被稳定的提供给后端的LED模块，使LED模块可以具有一致/均匀的发光亮度。For example, in some embodiments, the ballast detection module 3150 may sample the signal on the rectified output 511/512 and determine the frequency of the sampled signal (ie, the frequency of the bus voltage). When the frequency of the signal detected by the ballast detection module 3150 is greater than a set value, it means that the currently input external driving signal is a high-frequency AC signal, that is, the external driving signal may be provided by the ballast, so The ballast detection module 3150 sends a first indication signal (indicating that the external driving signal is provided by the ballast) to the detection result latch circuit 3120, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switching state of the switch circuit 3200a according to the first indication signal , to affect the current continuity on the power loop. On the other hand, when the frequency of the signal detected by the ballast detection module 3150 is less than or equal to the set value, it means that the currently input external driving signal is a low-frequency AC signal, that is, the external driving signal may be an AC signal. provided by the power grid, so the ballast detection module 3150 will send a second indication signal (indicating that the external drive signal is provided by the AC power grid) to the detection result latch circuit 3120, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit according to the second indication signal The 3200a is maintained in an on state, so that the driving signal can be stably supplied to the rear LED modules, so that the LED modules can have consistent/uniform luminous brightness.
藉由上述各示例可知，上述安装检测装置中还包括安装提示模块。其中，镇流器检测模块3150电性连接的安装提示模块(未绘示于图中)，所述安装提示模块用于根据所述第一检测信号发出所述LED直管灯的误用提示。As can be seen from the above examples, the above installation detection device further includes an installation prompt module. Wherein, the ballast detection module 3150 is electrically connected to an installation prompt module (not shown in the figure), and the installation prompt module is used to issue a misuse prompt of the LED straight tube lamp according to the first detection signal.
在一些实施例中，在镇流检测模块3150检测到外部驱动信号是由镇流器所提供时，安装提示模块根据第一检测信号调整电源回路上的电流连续性变化，使得后端的LED模块会响应于电源回路上的电流连续性变化而产生特定的发光模式(light pattern)，进而可提示使用者当前可能有错误安装的情形发生。例如，所述电源回路上的电流连续性变化为调整电源回路中电流断-续变化，使得后端的LED模块会产生特定的亮-灭的发光模式(light pattern)。又如，所述电源回路上的电流连续性变化为调整电源回路中电流强-弱变化，使得后端的LED模块会产生特定的明-暗的发光模式(light pattern)。In some embodiments, when the ballast detection module 3150 detects that the external driving signal is provided by the ballast, the installation prompt module adjusts the current continuity change on the power circuit according to the first detection signal, so that the rear LED module will A specific light pattern (light pattern) is generated in response to the continuous change of the current on the power circuit, which may prompt the user that there may be a wrong installation at present. For example, the continuous change of the current on the power loop is to adjust the intermittent-on-off change of the current in the power loop, so that the LED module at the back end will generate a specific light pattern of on-off. For another example, the continuous change of the current on the power loop is to adjust the strong-to-weak change of the current in the power loop, so that the LED module at the back end can generate a specific light-dark light pattern.
所述安装提示模块还电性连接于所述检测判定电路3130，用于根据所述脉冲信号和检测 结果信号的提示逻辑控制所述电源回路断开。The installation prompting module is also electrically connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130, and is used for controlling the disconnection of the power circuit according to the prompting logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal.
在一些实施例中，所述安装提示模块包括：控制电路和图19A中所示示例中的开关电路3200a，所述控制电路与所述检测脉冲发生模块3110、检测判定电路3130、镇流检测模块3150、以及开关电路3200a电性连接，用于当依据所述脉冲信号和所述检测结果信号确定未将所述LED直管灯正确的安装在灯座时，控制所述开关电路3200a截止；或者当接收到所述第一检测信号时，控制所述开关电路3200a导通或截止以影响所述电源回路上的电流连续性，使得后端的LED模块产生上述特定的发光模式。In some embodiments, the installation prompting module includes: a control circuit and the switch circuit 3200a in the example shown in FIG. 19A , the control circuit is connected with the detection pulse generation module 3110 , the detection determination circuit 3130 , and the ballast detection module 3150 and the switch circuit 3200a are electrically connected to control the switch circuit 3200a to be turned off when it is determined according to the pulse signal and the detection result signal that the LED straight tube lamp is not correctly installed in the lamp socket; or When the first detection signal is received, the switch circuit 3200a is controlled to be turned on or off to affect the current continuity on the power loop, so that the LED module at the rear end generates the above-mentioned specific lighting pattern.
在一些实施例中，所述安装提示模块中的控制电路与所述检测结果锁存电路3120电性连接，用于接收检测结果锁存电路3120基于第一指示信号所产生的周期性控制信号，所述控制电路周期性控制开关电路3200a导通和断开，以使LED模块所产生的特定的发光模式例如为定频率或不定频率的闪烁。In some embodiments, the control circuit in the installation prompting module is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 for receiving the periodic control signal generated by the detection result latch circuit 3120 based on the first indication signal, The control circuit periodically controls the switching circuit 3200a to be turned on and off, so that the specific lighting pattern generated by the LED module is, for example, flickering at a constant frequency or an indefinite frequency.
在实际电路中，控制电路和检测结果锁存电路3120包含共享的电路结构，如逻辑电路等。上述示例亦即，检测结果锁存电路3120可以在接收到第一指示信号时周期性的导通和关断开关电路3200a，以使驱动电流的大小受到开关电路3200a切换的影响，进而令LED模块的发光亮度随之改变，形成闪烁的发光模式。使用者可以在观察到LED直管灯闪烁时，得知可能已误将镇流旁路型直管灯安装在带有镇流器的灯座中，因此可以立即将其拆除，避免危险发生。下述中以检测结果锁存电路3120包含与控制电路共享的电路结构为示例。In an actual circuit, the control circuit and the detection result latch circuit 3120 include shared circuit structures, such as logic circuits and the like. In the above example, the detection result latch circuit 3120 can periodically turn on and turn off the switch circuit 3200a when receiving the first indication signal, so that the magnitude of the driving current is affected by the switching of the switch circuit 3200a, thereby making the LED module The brightness of the light changes accordingly, forming a flickering light pattern. When the user observes the flickering of the LED straight tube lamp, he knows that the ballast bypass type straight tube lamp may have been installed in the lamp holder with the ballast by mistake, so he can remove it immediately to avoid danger. In the following, it is taken as an example that the detection result latch circuit 3120 includes a circuit configuration shared with the control circuit.
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块3000a更包含提示电路3160。例如，所述安装提示模块包括：提示电路3160。所述提示电路3160会受控于检测结果锁存电路3120而在LED直管灯发生误用情形时发出声响、亮光等误用警示，以提醒使用者发生错误安装的情形。更具体的说，提示电路3160经由路径3161电性连接检测结果锁存电路3120，以接收检测结果锁存电路3120所发出的信号。当检测结果锁存电路3120接收到第一指示信号时，检测结果锁存电路3160会发出信号以致能提示电路3160，使得提示电路3160发出误用警示。在一些实施例中，所述提示电路3160可以利用蜂鸣器来实现，藉以在LED直管灯错误安装至带有镇流器的灯座时，发出蜂鸣声以提醒使用者当前发生误用情形。但并不以此为限，在另一些实施例中，所述提示电路684还可例如包括提示灯，藉以在LED直管灯错误安装至带有镇流器的灯座时，发出不同颜色或不同强度的光照以提醒使用者当前的安装状态。在其它一些实施例中，所述提示电路684可同时包括蜂鸣器和提示灯，藉以在LED直管灯错误安装至带有镇流器的灯座时，同时借助蜂鸣声和提示灯的光照提醒使用者当前发生误用情形。In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000a further includes a prompt circuit 3160 . For example, the installation prompting module includes: prompting circuit 3160 . The prompting circuit 3160 is controlled by the detection result latching circuit 3120 to issue misuse warnings such as sound and light when the LED straight tube lamp is misused, so as to remind the user of wrong installation. More specifically, the prompt circuit 3160 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 via the path 3161 to receive the signal sent by the detection result latch circuit 3120 . When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the first indication signal, the detection result latch circuit 3160 sends a signal to enable the prompt circuit 3160, so that the prompt circuit 3160 issues a misuse warning. In some embodiments, the prompt circuit 3160 can be implemented with a buzzer, so that when the LED straight tube lamp is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket with a ballast, a buzzer sound is emitted to remind the user that the current misuse occurs situation. But it is not limited to this. In other embodiments, the prompt circuit 684 may further include a prompt light, so as to emit different colors or colors when the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket with the ballast. Different intensities of light to remind users of the current installation status. In some other embodiments, the prompt circuit 684 may include a buzzer and a prompt light at the same time, so that when the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed in a lamp socket with a ballast, the buzzer sound and prompt light can be used at the same time. Lights alert the user to a current misuse situation.
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块3000a会在发出误用警示之后，控制开关电路3200a断开以将电源回路维持在截止状态，藉以避免使用者未即时拆除LED直管灯所可能造成的危险。In some embodiments, after the installation detection module 3000a issues a misuse warning, the control switch circuit 3200a is turned off to maintain the power circuit in a cut-off state, so as to avoid the possible danger caused by the user not removing the LED straight tube light immediately.
在另一些实施例中，所述安装提示模块还电性连接于所述检测判定电路3130，用于根据 所述脉冲信号和检测结果信号的提示逻辑控制所述电源回路断开；或根据所述第一检测信号发出所述LED直管灯的误用提示；或者根据所述脉冲信号和检测结果信号的提示逻辑控制所述电源回路断开的同时又根据所述第一检测信号发出所述LED直管灯的误用提示。In other embodiments, the installation prompting module is also electrically connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130 for controlling the power circuit to be disconnected according to the prompting logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal; The first detection signal sends out a misuse prompt of the LED straight tube lamp; or the power loop is controlled to be disconnected according to the prompt logic of the pulse signal and the detection result signal, and the LED is sent out according to the first detection signal at the same time. Misuse tips for straight tube lamps.
在此，所述安装提示模块根据预设时序执行漏电检测及提示、和镇流器误用检测及提示，并根据检测情况给出相应提示。其中，所述时序可用于表示漏电检测和镇流器误用检测的时序，或者表示漏电提示和镇流器误用提示的时序。在一些具体示例中，所述安装提示模块藉由所配置的开关电路和控制电路指示漏电和镇流器误用，则所述安装检测装置依先后次序执行漏电检测及提示和镇流器误用检测及提示，对应的，安装提示模块中的控制电路依所接收到的检测结果信号和第一检测信号的次序控制开关电路执行相应的提示操作。在又一些具体示例中，所述安装提示模块分别藉由所配置的提示电路指示镇流器误用，以及藉由开关电路和控制电路指示漏电，则所述安装检测装置可依先后次序或同时执行漏电检测及提示和镇流器误用检测及提示，对应的，安装提示模块依先后次序或同时给出相应提示。Here, the installation prompting module performs leakage detection and prompting, and ballast misuse detection and prompting according to a preset time sequence, and gives corresponding prompts according to the detection situation. Wherein, the timing sequence can be used to represent the timing sequence of leakage detection and ballast misuse detection, or the timing sequence of leakage current prompt and ballast misuse prompt. In some specific examples, the installation prompting module indicates leakage and misuse of the ballast through the configured switch circuit and control circuit, and the installation detection device performs the leakage detection and prompting and the misuse of the ballast in sequence. For detection and prompting, correspondingly, the control circuit in the installation prompting module controls the switch circuit to perform the corresponding prompting operation according to the sequence of the received test result signal and the first test signal. In some other specific examples, the installation prompting module indicates misuse of the ballast through the configured prompting circuit, and indicates leakage through the switch circuit and the control circuit, respectively, then the installation detection device can be arranged in sequence or at the same time. Perform leakage detection and prompting and ballast misuse detection and prompting. Correspondingly, the installation prompting module will give corresponding prompts in sequence or at the same time.
需要说明的是，根据实际电路设计需要可省略、共享、或基于时序的复用电路结构。例如，安装检测装置包含独立的漏电检测及提示功能的电路结构，和独立的镇流器检测及提示功能的电路结构，上述安装检测装置中可省略其中兼顾保存暂存检测结果信号和第一检测信号的检测结果锁存电路及其外围电路结构等。It should be noted that, according to actual circuit design requirements, the multiplexing circuit structure may be omitted, shared, or based on timing. For example, the installation detection device includes an independent circuit structure for leakage detection and prompting functions, and an independent circuit structure for ballast detection and prompting functions. The above-mentioned installation detection device can be omitted in which both the temporary storage of the detection result signal and the first detection can be omitted. Signal detection result latch circuit and its peripheral circuit structure, etc.
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块3000a更包含一应急控制模块3140。所述应急控制模块3140是用于判断外部驱动信号是否为辅助供电模块所提供的直流信号，使得检测结果锁存电路3120可根据判断结果而调整对开关电路3200a的控制方式，藉以在LED直管灯应用于具有辅助供电模块的环境时，避免因辅助电源的输入而造成安装检测模块误动作的情况，本实施例中有关于与前述实施例相同的部分于此不再重复赘述。In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000a further includes an emergency control module 3140 . The emergency control module 3140 is used to determine whether the external drive signal is a DC signal provided by the auxiliary power supply module, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 can adjust the control mode of the switch circuit 3200a according to the determination result, so as to directly control the LED. When the lamp is used in an environment with an auxiliary power supply module, the malfunction of the installation detection module due to the input of the auxiliary power supply can be avoided. The parts of this embodiment that are the same as those of the previous embodiment will not be repeated here.
具体而言，应急控制模块3140通过路径3141连接检测结果锁存电路3120，其中应急控制模块3140会检测电源模块中的母线电压，并且据以判断LED直管灯当前所接收到的外部驱动信号是否为直流信号。若应急控制模块3140判定外部驱动信号为直流信号，则应急控制模块3140会输出指示应急状态的第一状态信号给检测结果锁存电路3120；反之，若应急控制模块3140判定外部驱动信号为非直流信号，则应急控制模块3140会输出指示非应急状态的第二状态信号给检测结果锁存电路3120。当检测结果锁存电路3120接收到第一状态信号时，无论检测脉冲发生模块3110及检测判定电路3130的输出为何，检测结果锁存电路3120皆会将限流电路3200a维持在导通的状态(此状态可视为应急模式)。当检测结果锁存电路3120接收到第二状态信号时，检测结果锁存电路3120会依照原有的机制工作，即基于脉冲信号与检测结果信号来控制限流电路3200a的导通或关断。在本文所述的母线电压可以是桥前的输入电压/信号(即，外部驱动信号)或是桥后的整流后电压/信号，本揭露不以此为限。Specifically, the emergency control module 3140 is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the path 3141, wherein the emergency control module 3140 detects the bus voltage in the power module, and determines whether the external driving signal currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is is a DC signal. If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the external driving signal is a DC signal, the emergency control module 3140 will output the first state signal indicating the emergency state to the detection result latch circuit 3120; otherwise, if the emergency control module 3140 determines that the external driving signal is a non-DC signal signal, the emergency control module 3140 will output a second state signal indicating the non-emergency state to the detection result latch circuit 3120 . When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the first state signal, no matter what the outputs of the detection pulse generation module 3110 and the detection determination circuit 3130 are, the detection result latch circuit 3120 will keep the current limiting circuit 3200a in a conducting state ( This state can be considered emergency mode). When the detection result latch circuit 3120 receives the second state signal, the detection result latch circuit 3120 operates according to the original mechanism, ie, controls the current limiting circuit 3200a to be turned on or off based on the pulse signal and the detection result signal. The bus voltage described herein may be the input voltage/signal before the bridge (ie, the external driving signal) or the rectified voltage/signal after the bridge, which is not limited in the present disclosure.
底下搭配图48B以进一步说明带有应急控制模块3140的安装检测模块的具体工作机制。图48B是本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图。请同时参照图19A和图48B，在LED直管灯的电源模块接收到外部驱动信号时，应急控制模块3140会先检测母线电压(步骤S201)，并且判断母线电压在第一期间内是否持续高于第一电平(步骤S202)，其中所述第一期间可例如是75ms，并且所述第一电平可以是100V-140V之间的任一电平，例如110V或120V。换句话说，在步骤S202的一实施例中，应急控制模块3140会判断母线电压是否持续高于110V或120V超过75ms。Figure 48B is attached below to further illustrate the specific working mechanism of the installation detection module with the emergency control module 3140 . FIG. 48B is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 19A and FIG. 48B at the same time, when the power module of the LED straight tube light receives the external driving signal, the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the bus voltage (step S201 ), and determine whether the bus voltage is continuously high during the first period at the first level (step S202 ), wherein the first period may be, for example, 75ms, and the first level may be any level between 100V-140V, such as 110V or 120V. In other words, in an embodiment of step S202, the emergency control module 3140 determines whether the bus voltage is continuously higher than 110V or 120V for more than 75ms.
若应急控制模块3140在步骤S202中判定为是，则代表当前所接收的外部驱动信号为直流信号。此时安装检测模块3000a进入应急模式，并且使检测结果锁存电路3120控制开关电路3200a操作在第一组态(步骤S203)，其中所述第一组态可例如为导通组态。相反的，若应急控制模块3140在步骤S202中判定为否，则代表当前所接收的外部驱动信号为交流信号。此时安装检测模块3000a进入检测模式，使检测结果锁存电路3120通过输出脉冲信号给开关电路3200a来判断LED直管灯的安装状态。安装检测模块3000a在检测模式下的具体运作可参照相关实施例的说明。If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S202, it means that the currently received external driving signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and makes the detection result latch circuit 3120 control the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S203), wherein the first configuration may be, for example, a conduction configuration. On the contrary, if the emergency control module 3140 determines NO in step S202, it means that the currently received external driving signal is an AC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode, so that the detection result latch circuit 3120 determines the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp by outputting a pulse signal to the switch circuit 3200a. For the specific operation of the installation detection module 3000a in the detection mode, reference may be made to the description of the relevant embodiments.
另一方面，在应急模式下，应急控制模块3140除了会使开关电路3200a维持在第一组态之外，其会进一步的判断母线电压是否上升至大于第二电平(步骤S204)。若应急控制模块3140判定母线电压未上升至大于第二电平，代表目前仍处于应急模式下，因此会使得开关电路3200a持续维持在第一组态。若应急控制模块3140判定母线电压从第一电平上升至大于第二电平，代表电源模块目前接收到的外部驱动信号已经从直流信号切换为交流信号，亦即外部电网已恢复供电，此时应急控制模块3140会使安装检测模块3000a进入检测模式。在一些实施例中，所述第二电平可为大于第一电平但小于277V的任一电平，例如第一电平为110V时，第二电平为120V。换句话说，在步骤S204的一实施例中，应急控制模块3140会判断母线电压是否出现大于120V的上升沿，并且在判定为是时，进入检测模式。于实际应用中，上述实施例中的LED直管灯插入灯座时，安装检测装置用于获取LED直管灯的电源回路的信号，在检测到所述信号为镇流器特征信号时发出LED直管灯误用提示，和/或在检测到所述信号有人体接触时断开所述电源回路。其中，安装检测装置既可以单独用来进行镇流器检测或漏电检测，也可以兼顾进行镇流器检测和漏电检测。在一示例中，所述安装检测装置用于兼顾进行镇流器检测和漏电检测，所述镇流器检测的电路构造和检测方法如上述实施例所述，所述漏电检测的电路构造和检测方法并不限于上述实施例，任何能够检测到所述信号是否有人体接触的(即是否有漏电)漏电检测方法均属于本申请所涵盖的范围。On the other hand, in the emergency mode, in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 3200a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 further determines whether the bus voltage rises above the second level (step S204). If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the bus voltage does not rise to a level greater than the second level, it means that it is still in the emergency mode, so the switch circuit 3200a will continue to maintain the first configuration. If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the bus voltage rises from the first level to greater than the second level, it means that the external drive signal currently received by the power module has been switched from a DC signal to an AC signal, that is, the external power grid has resumed power supply. The emergency control module 3140 will cause the installation detection module 3000a to enter the detection mode. In some embodiments, the second level may be any level greater than the first level but less than 277V, for example, when the first level is 110V, the second level is 120V. In other words, in an embodiment of step S204, the emergency control module 3140 determines whether the bus voltage has a rising edge greater than 120V, and when the determination is yes, it enters the detection mode. In practical applications, when the LED straight tube lamp in the above embodiment is inserted into the lamp socket, a detection device is installed to obtain the signal of the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp, and the LED is emitted when it is detected that the signal is the characteristic signal of the ballast. Indicates the misuse of the straight tube light, and/or disconnects the power circuit when human contact with the signal is detected. Wherein, the installation detection device can be used for ballast detection or leakage detection alone, or can be used for both ballast detection and leakage detection. In an example, the installation detection device is used to perform both ballast detection and leakage detection. The circuit structure and detection method of the ballast detection are as described in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the circuit structure and detection of the leakage detection are as follows: The method is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and any leakage detection method capable of detecting whether the signal is in contact with a human body (ie, whether there is leakage) falls within the scope of this application.
在一范例实施例中，安装检测模块3000a中的检测脉冲发生模块3110、检测判定电路3130、检测结果锁存电路3120以及开关电路3200a可分别以图19B至图19E的电路架构来实现(但不仅限于此)，其中图19B至图19E是本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。 底下分就各模块/单元进行说明。In an exemplary embodiment, the detection pulse generation module 3110 , the detection determination circuit 3130 , the detection result latch circuit 3120 and the switch circuit 3200 a in the installation detection module 3000 a can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 19B to 19E respectively (but not only limited to this), wherein FIG. 19B to FIG. 19E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
请参见图19B，图19B是根据本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图。检测脉冲发生模块3110包含电容C11(或称第一电容器)、C12(或称第二电容器)及C13(或称第三电容器)、电阻R11(或称第一电阻器)、R12(或称第二电阻器)及R13(或称第三电阻器)、缓冲器(buffer)BF1(或称第一缓冲器)及BF2(或称第二缓冲器)、反向器INV、二极管D11(或称为第一二极管)以及或门(OR gate)OG1(或称为第一或门)。在使用或操作中，电容C11及电阻R11串联于一驱动电压(例如称为，且经常被订为一高准位)及参考电位(在此以地的电位为其实施例)之间，其连接点耦接缓冲器BF1的输入端。电阻R12耦接于一驱动电压(可称为VCC)及反向器INV的输入端。电阻R13耦接于缓冲器BF2的输入端及一参考电位(在此以地的电位为其实施例)之间。二极管的正端接地，负端也耦接缓冲器BF2的输入端。电容C12的一端及C13的一端共同耦接缓冲器BF1的输出端，电容C12的另一端接反向器INV的输入端，而电容C13的另一端则耦接缓冲器BF2的输入端。反向器INV的输出端及缓冲器BF2的输出端耦接或门OG1的输入端。须注意的是，在本案此说明书中，电位之“高电平”与“低电平”都是相对于在电路中另一电位或某参考电位而言的，且又可分别作为“逻辑高电平”与“逻辑低电平”。Please refer to FIG. 19B . FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The detection pulse generation module 3110 includes capacitors C11 (or the first capacitor), C12 (or the second capacitor) and C13 (or the third capacitor), resistors R11 (or the first resistor), R12 (or the third capacitor) Two resistors) and R13 (or third resistor), buffer (buffer) BF1 (or first buffer) and BF2 (or second buffer), inverter INV, diode D11 (or called first buffer) is the first diode) and the OR gate (OR gate) OG1 (or the first OR gate). In use or operation, the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11 are connected in series between a driving voltage (for example, called, and often set as a high level) and a reference potential (here, the ground potential is used as an example), which The connection point is coupled to the input end of the buffer BF1. The resistor R12 is coupled to a driving voltage (which may be referred to as VCC) and the input terminal of the inverter INV. The resistor R13 is coupled between the input end of the buffer BF2 and a reference potential (here, the ground potential is used as an example). The positive terminal of the diode is grounded, and the negative terminal is also coupled to the input terminal of the buffer BF2. One end of the capacitor C12 and one end of the capacitor C13 are commonly coupled to the output end of the buffer BF1, the other end of the capacitor C12 is connected to the input end of the inverter INV, and the other end of the capacitor C13 is coupled to the input end of the buffer BF2. The output terminal of the inverter INV and the output terminal of the buffer BF2 are coupled to the input terminal of the OR gate OG1. It should be noted that in this specification of this case, the "high level" and "low level" of the potential are both relative to another potential or a reference potential in the circuit, and can be regarded as "logic high level" respectively. level" and "logic low level".
底下搭配图45A所绘示的信号时序来一并说明，其中图45A是本申请第一实施例的电源模块的信号时序示意图。当LED直管灯的一端灯头插入灯座而另一端灯头电性接触人体或LED直管灯的双端灯头均插入灯座时(时间点ts)，LED直管灯通电。此时，安装检测模块进入检测模式DTM。电容C11与电阻R11的连接点准位一开始为高(等于驱动电压VCC)，于后随时间逐渐下降，最后降至零。缓冲器BF1的输入端耦接电容C11与电阻R11的连接点，因此一开始即输出高准位信号，并于电容C11与电阻R11的连接点准位降至低逻辑判断准位时，转成低准位信号。也就是，缓冲器BF1产生一输入脉冲信号，之后持续维持低准位(停止输出所述输入脉冲信号)。所述输入脉冲信号之脉冲宽度等于一(最初的设定)时间周期，而所述时间周期由电容C11的容值以及电阻R11的阻值来决定。The following description is combined with the signal timing shown in FIG. 45A , wherein FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the power module according to the first embodiment of the present application. When one end of the lamp cap of the LED straight tube lamp is inserted into the lamp socket and the other end of the lamp cap is in electrical contact with the human body or both ends of the lamp cap of the LED straight tube lamp are inserted into the lamp holder (time point ts), the LED straight tube lamp is energized. At this time, the installation detection module enters the detection mode DTM. The level of the connection point between the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11 is initially high (equal to the driving voltage VCC), then gradually decreases with time, and finally drops to zero. The input end of the buffer BF1 is coupled to the connection point between the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11, so it outputs a high level signal at the beginning, and when the level of the connection point between the capacitor C11 and the resistor R11 drops to the low logic judgment level, it turns into low level signal. That is, the buffer BF1 generates an input pulse signal, and then keeps the low level (stops outputting the input pulse signal). The pulse width of the input pulse signal is equal to a (initially set) time period, and the time period is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C11 and the resistance of the resistor R11.
接着说明缓冲器BF1产生脉冲信号的设定时间周期的操作。由于电容C12与电阻R12的一端均等于驱动电压VCC，因此电容C12与电阻R12的连接端也为高准位。另外，电阻R13的一端接地，电容C13的一端接收缓冲器BF1的脉冲信号。所以电容C13与电阻R13的连接端在一开始高准位，而后随时间逐渐降至零(同时间电容储存了等于或接近驱动电压VCC的电压)。因此，反向器INV输出低准位信号，而缓冲器BF2则输出高准位信号，而使或门OG1于脉冲信号输出端3111输出高准位信号(第一脉冲信号DP1)。此时，检测结果锁存电路3120根据检测结果信号及脉冲信号第一次锁存检测结果。当电容C13与电阻R13的连接端的准位降至低逻辑判断准位时，缓冲器BF2转为输出低准位信号，而使或门OG1于脉冲信号输出端3111输出低准位信号(停止输出第一脉冲信号DP1)。或门OG1所输出的脉冲信号的脉宽由电 容C13的容值以及电阻R13的阻值来决定。Next, the operation of the buffer BF1 for generating the set time period of the pulse signal will be described. Since both ends of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 are equal to the driving voltage VCC, the connection end of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 is also at a high level. In addition, one end of the resistor R13 is grounded, and one end of the capacitor C13 receives the pulse signal of the buffer BF1. Therefore, the connection terminal of the capacitor C13 and the resistor R13 is at a high level at the beginning, and then gradually drops to zero with time (at the same time, the capacitor stores a voltage equal to or close to the driving voltage VCC). Therefore, the inverter INV outputs a low-level signal, and the buffer BF2 outputs a high-level signal, so that the OR gate OG1 outputs a high-level signal (the first pulse signal DP1 ) at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 . At this time, the detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result for the first time according to the detection result signal and the pulse signal. When the level of the connection terminal of the capacitor C13 and the resistor R13 drops to the low logic judgment level, the buffer BF2 turns to output a low level signal, so that the OR gate OG1 outputs a low level signal at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 (stop outputting the first pulse signal DP1). The pulse width of the pulse signal output by the OR gate OG1 is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C13 and the resistance of the resistor R13.
接着，由于电容C13储存有接近驱动电压VCC的电压，因此于缓冲器BF1的输出由高准位转为低准位的瞬间，电容C13与电阻R13的连接端的准位会低于零，并经由二极管D11对电容快速充电而使连接端的准位拉回零。因此，缓冲器BF2仍维持输出低准位信号。Then, since the capacitor C13 stores a voltage close to the driving voltage VCC, when the output of the buffer BF1 changes from a high level to a low level, the level of the connection terminal of the capacitor C13 and the resistor R13 will be lower than zero, and the Diode D11 quickly charges the capacitor and pulls the level of the connection back to zero. Therefore, the buffer BF2 still keeps outputting the low-level signal.
另一方面，于缓冲器BF1的输出由高准位转为低准位的瞬间，电容C12的一端的准位由驱动电压VCC瞬间降低零，使电容C12与电阻R12的连接端为低准位。反向器INV的输出信号转为高准位，而使或门输出高准位(第二脉冲信号DP2)。此时，检测结果锁存电路3120根据检测结果信号及脉冲信号第二次锁存检测结果。接着，电阻R12对电容C12充电，使电容C12与电阻R12的连接端的准位随时间逐渐上升而至等于驱动电压VCC。当容C12与电阻R12的连接端的准位上升至高逻辑判断准位时，反向器INV再度输出低准位，而使或门OG1停止输出第二脉冲信号DP2。第二脉冲信号的脉宽由电容C12的容值与电阻R12的阻值所决定。On the other hand, at the moment when the output of the buffer BF1 changes from a high level to a low level, the level of one end of the capacitor C12 is instantly reduced to zero by the driving voltage VCC, so that the connection terminal of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 is at a low level . The output signal of the inverter INV changes to a high level, so that the OR gate outputs a high level (the second pulse signal DP2). At this time, the detection result latch circuit 3120 latches the detection result for the second time according to the detection result signal and the pulse signal. Next, the resistor R12 charges the capacitor C12, so that the level of the connection terminal between the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 gradually increases with time to be equal to the driving voltage VCC. When the level of the connection terminal of the capacitor C12 and the resistor R12 rises to the high logic level, the inverter INV outputs the low level again, and the OR gate OG1 stops outputting the second pulse signal DP2. The pulse width of the second pulse signal is determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C12 and the resistance of the resistor R12.
如上所述，检测脉冲发生模块3110于检测模式会产生两个高准位的脉冲信号-第一脉冲信号DP1及第二脉冲信号DP2，由脉冲信号输出端3111输出，而且第一脉冲信号及第二脉冲信号之间间隔一设定时间间隔TIV，在采用如图所示的模拟电路实现检测脉冲发生模块的实施例中，所述设定时间间隔TIV主要由电容C11的容值以及电阻R11的阻值来决定。在其他采用数字电路实现的检测脉冲发生模块的实施例中，所述设定时间间隔TIV的调整可以通过设定数字电路的频率/周期或其他可调参数来实现。As described above, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates two high-level pulse signals in the detection mode - the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2, which are output from the pulse signal output terminal 3111, and the first pulse signal and the second pulse signal DP2. There is a set time interval TIV between the two pulse signals. In the embodiment in which the analog circuit as shown in the figure is used to realize the detection pulse generating module, the set time interval TIV is mainly determined by the capacitance of the capacitor C11 and the resistance of the resistor R11. resistance value to decide. In other embodiments of the detection pulse generation module implemented by a digital circuit, the adjustment of the set time interval TIV may be implemented by setting the frequency/period or other adjustable parameters of the digital circuit.
而于检测模式DTM后进入工作模式DRM，检测脉冲发生模块3110不再产生脉冲信号DP1/DP2，而维持脉冲信号输出端3111为低准位。请参见图19C，图19C是根据本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的检测判定电路的电路架构示意图。检测判定电路3130包含比较器CP11(或称第一比较器)以及电阻R14(或称第四电阻器)。比较器CP11的反相端接收参考准位信号Vref，非反相端经电阻R14接地并同时耦接开关耦接端3201。请同时参见图18，由第一安装检测端TE1流入限流电路3200a的信号会经由开关耦接端3201输出而流过电阻R14。当流经电阻R14的电流过大(即，高于或等于安装设定电流，例如：电流值2A)而使电阻R14上的准位高于参考准位信号Vref的准位时(可对应于所述两灯头正确插入所述灯座)，比较器CP11产生高准位的检测结果信号并由检测结果端3131输出。例如，当LED直管灯正确安装于灯座时，比较器CP11会于检测结果端3131输出高准位的检测结果信号Sdr。当流经电阻R14的电流不足使使电阻R14上的准位高于参考准位信号Vref的准位时(可对应于只有其中之一灯头正确插入所述灯座)，比较器CP11产生低准位的检测结果信号Sdr并由检测结果端3131输出。例如，当LED直管灯未正确安装于灯座时，或者一端安装于灯座而另一端经人体接地时，电流将过小而使比较器CP11于检测结果端3131输出低准位的检测结果信号Sdr。After the detection mode DTM enters the working mode DRM, the detection pulse generating module 3110 no longer generates the pulse signals DP1/DP2, and the pulse signal output terminal 3111 is maintained at a low level. Please refer to FIG. 19C . FIG. 19C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The detection and determination circuit 3130 includes a comparator CP11 (or a first comparator) and a resistor R14 (or a fourth resistor). The inverting terminal of the comparator CP11 receives the reference level signal Vref, and the non-inverting terminal is grounded through the resistor R14 and coupled to the switch coupling terminal 3201 at the same time. Please also refer to FIG. 18 , the signal flowing into the current limiting circuit 3200 a from the first installation detection terminal TE1 will be output through the switch coupling terminal 3201 and flow through the resistor R14 . When the current flowing through the resistor R14 is too large (that is, higher than or equal to the installation setting current, for example, the current value is 2A) and the level on the resistor R14 is higher than the level of the reference level signal Vref (corresponding to The two lamp caps are correctly inserted into the lamp socket), the comparator CP11 generates a high-level detection result signal and outputs it from the detection result terminal 3131 . For example, when the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, the comparator CP11 will output a high-level detection result signal Sdr at the detection result terminal 3131 . When the current flowing through the resistor R14 is insufficient to make the level on the resistor R14 higher than the level of the reference level signal Vref (which may correspond to only one of the lamp caps being correctly inserted into the lamp socket), the comparator CP11 generates a low level The bit detection result signal Sdr is output from the detection result terminal 3131 . For example, when the LED straight tube lamp is not correctly installed in the lamp socket, or when one end is installed in the lamp socket and the other end is grounded by the human body, the current will be too small and the comparator CP11 will output a low-level detection result at the detection result terminal 3131 Signal Sdr.
请参见图19D，图19D是根据本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的检测结果锁存电路的 电路架构示意图Please refer to FIG. 19D. FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection result latch circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application.
。检测结果锁存电路3120包含D型触发器(D Flip-flop)DFF(或称第一D型触发器)、电阻R15(或称第五电阻器)以及或门OG2(或称第二或门)。D型触发器DFF的时脉输入端(CLK)耦接检测结果端3131，输入端D耦接驱动电压VCC。当检测结果端3131输出低准位的检测结果信号Sdr时，D型触发器DFF于输出端Q输出低准位信号；当检测结果端3131输出高准位的检测结果信号时，D型触发器DFF于输出端Q输出高准位信号。电阻R15耦接于D型触发器DFF的输出端Q及参考电位(例如地的电位)之间。当或门OG2接收脉冲信号输出端3111输出的第一脉冲信号DP1或第二脉冲信号DP2，或D型触发器DFF于输出端Q输出的高准位信号时，于检测结果锁存端3121输出高准位的检测结果锁存信号。由于检测脉冲发生模块3110仅于检测模式DTM输出第一脉冲信号DP1或第二脉冲信号DP2时，主导或门OG2输出高准位检测结果锁存信号，而其余时间(包含检测模式DTM之后的工作模式DRM)由D型触发器DFF主导检测结果锁存信号为高准位或低准位。因此，当检测结果端3131未出现过高准位的检测结果信号Sdr时，D型触发器DFF于输出端Q维持低准位信号，而使检测结果锁存端3121于工作模式DRM也维持低准位的检测结果锁存信号。反之，当检测结果端3131一旦出现过高准位的检测结果信号Sdr时，D型触发器DFF会锁存而于输出端Q维持高准位信号。如此，检测结果锁存端3121进入工作模式DRM时也维持高准位的检测结果锁存信号。. The detection result latch circuit 3120 includes a D Flip-flop DFF (or a first D-type flip-flop), a resistor R15 (or a fifth resistor) and an OR gate OG2 (or a second OR gate) ). The clock input terminal (CLK) of the D-type flip-flop DFF is coupled to the detection result terminal 3131, and the input terminal D is coupled to the driving voltage VCC. When the detection result terminal 3131 outputs a low-level detection result signal Sdr, the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a low-level signal at the output terminal Q; when the detection result terminal 3131 outputs a high-level detection result signal, the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a high-level detection result signal. The DFF outputs a high-level signal at the output terminal Q. The resistor R15 is coupled between the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF and a reference potential (eg, ground potential). When the OR gate OG2 receives the first pulse signal DP1 or the second pulse signal DP2 output by the pulse signal output terminal 3111, or the high level signal output by the D-type flip-flop DFF at the output terminal Q, it is output at the detection result latch terminal 3121 High level detection result latch signal. Since the detection pulse generation module 3110 only outputs the first pulse signal DP1 or the second pulse signal DP2 in the detection mode DTM, the dominant OR gate OG2 outputs a high-level detection result latch signal, and the rest of the time (including the work after the detection mode DTM) Mode DRM) is dominated by D-type flip-flop DFF. The detection result latch signal is high level or low level. Therefore, when the high-level detection result signal Sdr does not appear at the detection result terminal 3131, the D-type flip-flop DFF maintains a low-level signal at the output terminal Q, so that the detection result latch terminal 3121 also maintains a low level in the working mode DRM The level detection result latch signal. On the contrary, when the detection result signal Sdr of a high level occurs at the detection result terminal 3131, the D-type flip-flop DFF will be latched and the output terminal Q maintains the high level signal. In this way, the detection result latch terminal 3121 also maintains a high-level detection result latch signal when it enters the working mode DRM.
请参见图19E，图19E是根据本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的开关电路的电路架构示意图。开关电路3200a可包含一晶体管(transistor)，例如一双载子接面晶体管M11(或称第一晶体管)作为一功率晶体管(power transistor)。功率晶体管能处理高电流及功率，特别的被用于开关电路中。双载子接面晶体管M11的集极耦接第一安装检测端TE1，基极耦接检测结果锁存端3121，而射极开关耦接端3201。当检测脉冲发生模块3110产生第一脉冲信号DP1或第二脉冲信号DP2时，双载子接面晶体管M11将短暂导通，使检测判定电路3130进行检测，以决定检测结果锁存信号为高准位或低准位。当检测结果锁存电路3120于检测结果锁存端3121输出高准位的检测结果锁存信号时，表示LED直管灯已被正确安装在灯座上，因此双载子接面晶体管M11将导通而使第一安装检测端TE1以及第二安装检测端TE2之间导通(即，导通电源回路)。此时电源模块中的驱动电路(未绘示)会基于电源回路上的电压而被启动并开始运作，进而产生点亮控制信号Slc来切换功率开关(未绘示)，使得驱动电流可被产生并点亮LED模块。相反地，当检测结果锁存电路3120于检测结果锁存端3121输出低准位的检测结果锁存信号时，双载子接面晶体管M11将截止而使第一安装检测端TE1以及第二安装检测端TE2之间截止。此时电源模块中的驱动电路不会被启动，因此点亮控制信号Slc不会被产生。Please refer to FIG. 19E . FIG. 19E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the switch circuit of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The switch circuit 3200a may include a transistor, such as a bipolar junction transistor M11 (or a first transistor) as a power transistor. Power transistors can handle high currents and powers and are especially used in switching circuits. The collector of the bipolar junction transistor M11 is coupled to the first mounting detection terminal TE1 , the base is coupled to the detection result latch terminal 3121 , and the emitter switch is coupled to the terminal 3201 . When the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates the first pulse signal DP1 or the second pulse signal DP2, the bipolar junction transistor M11 will be turned on for a short period of time, so that the detection determination circuit 3130 performs detection to determine the detection result latch signal is high level bit or low level. When the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a high-level detection result latch signal at the detection result latch terminal 3121, it indicates that the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket, so the dual junction transistor M11 will conduct Therefore, conduction between the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 is made (ie, the power circuit is turned on). At this time, the driving circuit (not shown) in the power module is activated and starts to operate based on the voltage on the power circuit, and then generates the lighting control signal Slc to switch the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current can be generated And light up the LED module. Conversely, when the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a low-level detection result latch signal at the detection result latch terminal 3121, the bipolar junction transistor M11 will be turned off, causing the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting terminal TE1 to be turned off. The detection terminal TE2 is cut off. At this time, the driving circuit in the power module will not be activated, so the lighting control signal Slc will not be generated.
请参见图19F，图19F是另一实施例的开关电路的电路架构示意图。相较于图19E，本实施例的开关电路3200a中的晶体管是绘示为金氧半场效晶体管(MOSFET)M12为例，并且开 关电路3200a更包含脉冲重置辅助电路320。在本实施例中，脉冲重置辅助电路320电性连接晶体管M12的控制端以及检测结果锁存电路3120的检测结果锁存端3121，并且用以检测模式下，协助提供至晶体管M12的控制端上的信号S M12进行重置，以使信号S M12的下降沿匹配检测结果锁存端3121在检测模式下的信号(对应脉冲信号输出端3111上的脉冲信号)。换言之，脉冲重置辅助电路320可以在检测阶段提高信号S M12的放电速率，使得信号S M12可以在脉冲信号回到低电平时，更快的被下拉至低电平，进而减少脉冲信号与控制信号之间的相位差，并且避免晶体管M12误动作。 Please refer to FIG. 19F , which is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit according to another embodiment. Compared to FIG. 19E , the transistors in the switch circuit 3200 a of the present embodiment are shown as a metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor (MOSFET) M12 as an example, and the switch circuit 3200 a further includes a pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 . In this embodiment, the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 is electrically connected to the control terminal of the transistor M12 and the detection result latch terminal 3121 of the detection result latch circuit 3120, and is used to assist the control terminal of the transistor M12 in the detection mode. The signal S M12 on the signal S M12 is reset, so that the falling edge of the signal S M12 matches the signal of the detection result latch terminal 3121 in the detection mode (corresponding to the pulse signal on the pulse signal output terminal 3111 ). In other words, the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 can increase the discharge rate of the signal S M12 in the detection stage, so that the signal S M12 can be pulled down to the low level faster when the pulse signal returns to the low level, thereby reducing the pulse signal and control phase difference between the signals, and avoid malfunction of the transistor M12.
具体而言，当LED直管灯工作在检测模式时，检测结果锁存电路3120会通过检测结果锁存端3121输出脉冲信号以控制晶体管M12周期性的间歇导通。在不考虑信号上升/下降速度的情况下(即，假设信号上升沿和下降沿的斜率趋近于无穷大)，信号S M12也会是一个脉冲信号，并且会与检测结果锁存端3121上的信号同步(即，信号上升沿和下降沿的发生时间大致相同)。然而，在实际应用中，信号S M12的充放电速度会很大程度的受到电路设计和晶体管M12的电路参数选择的影响。举例来说，如果晶体管M12选择的尺寸比较大时，晶体管M12的控制端和第二端之间的寄生电容也会比较大，使得充放电时间被延长。换言之，在考虑信号上升/下降速度的情况下，信号S M12和检测结果锁存端3121上的信号可能会有不同步的问题。本实施例的脉冲重置辅助电路320会在检测结果锁存电路3120输出低电平的信号并且信号S M12仍维持在高电平时使能，进而导通一个额外的放电路径来加快放电速度，进而解决上述信号不同步的问题。 Specifically, when the LED straight tube lamp operates in the detection mode, the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a pulse signal through the detection result latch terminal 3121 to control the transistor M12 to be intermittently turned on periodically. Without considering the signal rising/falling speed (that is, assuming that the slopes of the rising and falling edges of the signal are close to infinity), the signal S M12 will also be a pulse signal, and will be the same as the detection result latch on the terminal 3121. The signals are synchronized (ie, the rising and falling edges of the signal occur at approximately the same time). However, in practical applications, the charging and discharging speed of the signal S M12 will be greatly affected by the circuit design and the selection of circuit parameters of the transistor M12 . For example, if the selected size of the transistor M12 is relatively large, the parasitic capacitance between the control terminal and the second terminal of the transistor M12 will also be relatively large, so that the charging and discharging time is prolonged. In other words, considering the rising/falling speed of the signal, the signal S M12 and the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 may be out of sync. The pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 of this embodiment is enabled when the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs a low level signal and the signal S M12 remains at a high level, thereby conducting an additional discharge path to speed up the discharge speed. This further solves the above-mentioned problem of signal asynchrony.
在一些实施例中，脉冲重置辅助电路320可以利用如图19F所绘示的电路架构来实现，其中脉冲重置辅助电路320例如包括晶体管M13(绘示为PNP晶体管为例，但不以此为限)、以及电阻R16和R17。晶体管M13的控制端经由电阻R16电性连接检测结果锁存端3121，晶体管M13的第一端电性连接晶体管M12的控制端，以及晶体管M13的第二端经由电阻R17电性连接接地端GND。在一些实施例中，脉冲重置辅助电路320可更包括二极管D12以及电阻R18和R19。二极管D12的阳极电性连接检测结果锁存端3121。电阻R18的一端电性连接二极管D12的阴极，并且电阻R18的另一端电性连接晶体管M12的控制端和晶体管M13的第一端。电阻R19电性连接在晶体管M12的控制端和接地端GND之间。In some embodiments, the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 can be implemented by using the circuit structure shown in FIG. 19F , wherein the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 includes, for example, a transistor M13 (shown as a PNP transistor as an example, but not in this way). limited), and resistors R16 and R17. The control terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the detection result latch terminal 3121 via the resistor R16, the first terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the control terminal of the transistor M12, and the second terminal of the transistor M13 is electrically connected to the ground terminal GND via the resistor R17. In some embodiments, the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 may further include a diode D12 and resistors R18 and R19. The anode of the diode D12 is electrically connected to the detection result latch terminal 3121 . One end of the resistor R18 is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode D12, and the other end of the resistor R18 is electrically connected to the control end of the transistor M12 and the first end of the transistor M13. The resistor R19 is electrically connected between the control terminal of the transistor M12 and the ground terminal GND.
当LED直管灯工作在工作模式时，检测结果锁存电路3120会通过检测结果锁存端3121输出高电平的信号，使得晶体管M12的控制端上的信号S M12也为高电平，进而导通晶体管M12。此时，脉冲重置辅助电路320中的晶体管M13会响应于检测结果锁存端3121的高电平信号而维持在截止状态，因此信号S M12的电平不会受到脉冲重置辅助电路320的影响。此状态下的脉冲重置辅助电路320可视为是处于禁能状态。 When the LED straight tube lamp works in the working mode, the detection result latch circuit 3120 will output a high level signal through the detection result latch terminal 3121, so that the signal S M12 on the control terminal of the transistor M12 is also at a high level, and then The transistor M12 is turned on. At this time, the transistor M13 in the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 will remain in an off state in response to the high level signal of the detection result latch terminal 3121 , so the level of the signal S M12 will not be affected by the pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 . influences. The pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 in this state can be regarded as being in a disabled state.
当LED直管灯工作在检测模式时，若检测结果锁存端3121上的信号和信号SM12大致同步/不存在有相位差，无论是在信号SM12的高电平或低电平期间，晶体管M13的第一端和控 制端之间始终处于逆偏压状态，使得晶体管M13维持截止。若检测结果锁存端3121上的信号和信号S M12不同步/存在相位差，特别是信号SM12的相位落后于检测结果锁存端3121上的信号时，此时信号S M12为高电平并且检测结果锁存端3121上的信号为低电平，使得晶体管M13的第一端和控制端之间处于顺偏压状态。此状态下的脉冲重置辅助电路320可视为是处于使能状态。此时晶体管M13被导通，信号S M12可以通过晶体管M13和电阻R17到接地端GND的放电路径被泄放，使得信号S M12从高电平到低电平的下降速度进一步提高。 When the LED straight tube lamp works in the detection mode, if the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 is roughly synchronized with the signal SM12/there is no phase difference, no matter it is during the high level or the low level of the signal SM12, the transistor M13 The first terminal of M13 and the control terminal are always in a reverse bias state, so that the transistor M13 is kept off. If the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 and the signal S M12 are not synchronized/there is a phase difference, especially when the phase of the signal SM12 lags behind the signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121, the signal S M12 is at a high level at this time and The signal on the detection result latch terminal 3121 is at a low level, so that the first terminal and the control terminal of the transistor M13 are in a forward bias state. The pulse reset auxiliary circuit 320 in this state can be regarded as being in an enabled state. At this time, the transistor M13 is turned on, and the signal S M12 can be discharged through the discharge path from the transistor M13 and the resistor R17 to the ground terminal GND, so that the falling speed of the signal S M12 from high level to low level is further increased.
在一些实施例中，由于外部驱动信号Sed为交流信号，为了避免检测判定电路3130检测时，外部驱动信号的准位刚好在零点附近而造成检测错误。因此，检测脉冲发生模块3110产生第一脉冲信号DP1及第二脉冲信号DP2以使检测判定电路3130检测两次，以避免单次检测时外部驱动信号的准位刚好在零点附近的问题。较佳为，第一脉冲信号DP1及第二脉冲信号DP2的产生时间差并非为所述外部驱动信号Sed的周期T一半的整数倍数，即并非对应所述外部驱动信号Sed的180度相位差的整数倍数。如此，第一脉冲信号DP1及第二脉冲信号DP2其中之一产生时，若不幸外部驱动信号Sed在零点附近，另一产生时即可避免外部驱动信号Sed也在零点附近。In some embodiments, since the external driving signal Sed is an AC signal, in order to avoid the detection error caused by the level of the external driving signal being just near the zero point when the detection determination circuit 3130 detects. Therefore, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 so that the detection determination circuit 3130 detects twice, so as to avoid the problem that the level of the external driving signal is just near the zero point during single detection. Preferably, the generation time difference of the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 is not an integer multiple of half of the period T of the external driving signal Sed, that is, not an integer corresponding to the 180-degree phase difference of the external driving signal Sed. multiple. In this way, when one of the first pulse signal DP1 and the second pulse signal DP2 is generated, if the external driving signal Sed is unfortunately near the zero point, it can be avoided that the external driving signal Sed is also near the zero point when the other is generated.
上述第一脉冲信号及第二脉冲信号的产生时间差，即设定时间间隔TIV可以以公式表示如下：The generation time difference between the first pulse signal and the second pulse signal, that is, the set time interval TIV can be expressed by the formula as follows:
TIV＝(X+Y)(T/2)；TIV=(X+Y)(T/2);
其中，T为外部驱动信号的周期，X为大于等于零的整数，0<Y<1。Among them, T is the period of the external drive signal, X is an integer greater than or equal to zero, 0<Y<1.
Y较佳的范围为在0.05-0.95之间，更佳为0.15-0.85之间。The preferred range of Y is between 0.05-0.95, more preferably between 0.15-0.85.
所属领域的普通技术人员根据上述实施例的说明可以了解，所述产生两个脉冲信号来进行安装检测的架构仅是检测脉冲发生模块的一实施范例。在实际的应用中，检测脉冲发生模块可被配置为产生一个或两个以上的脉冲信号来进行安装检测，本申请不以此为限。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand from the description of the above embodiments that the structure of generating two pulse signals for installation detection is only an example of the implementation of the detection pulse generation module. In practical applications, the detection pulse generation module may be configured to generate one or more than two pulse signals for installation detection, which is not limited in the present application.
再者，为了避免安装检测模块进入检测模式DTM时，驱动电压VCC的准位太低会造成安装检测模块的电路逻辑判断错误开始上升。在第一脉冲信号DP1的产生可以设定在驱动电压VCC到达或高于一预定准位时产生，使驱动电压VCC达到足够的准位后检测判定电路3130才进行，以避免准位不足所造成安装检测模块的电路逻辑判断错误。Furthermore, in order to avoid that when the installation detection module enters the detection mode DTM, if the level of the driving voltage VCC is too low, the circuit logic judgment error of the installation detection module will start to rise. The generation of the first pulse signal DP1 can be set to be generated when the driving voltage VCC reaches or is higher than a predetermined level, so that the detection and determination circuit 3130 can only perform the detection and determination circuit 3130 after the driving voltage VCC reaches a sufficient level, so as to avoid the problem of insufficient level. The circuit logic judgment of the installation detection module is wrong.
根据上述说明可知，当LED直管灯的一端灯头插入灯座而另一端灯头为浮接或电性接触人体时，因阻抗大而使检测判定电路输出低准位的检测结果信号Sdr。检测结果锁存电路根据检测脉冲发生模块的脉冲信号DP1/DP2对低准位的检测结果信号Sdr进行锁存成低准位的检测结果锁存信号，而于工作模式DRM时也维持检测结果。如此，可使开关电路维持截止而避免持续通电。如此也可避免人体触电的可能，从而能够满足安规的要求。而当LED直管灯 的两端灯头正确插入灯座时(时间点td)，因LED直管灯本身电路的阻抗小而使检测判定电路输出高准位的检测结果信号Sdr。检测结果锁存电路根据检测脉冲发生模块的脉冲信号DP1/DP2对高准位的检测结果信号Sdr进行锁存成高准位的检测结果锁存信号，而于工作模式DRM时也维持检测结果。如此，可使开关电路维持导通而持续通电，使LED直管灯于工作模式DRM时正常操作。According to the above description, when one end of the LED straight tube lamp is inserted into the lamp socket and the other end of the lamp is floating or in electrical contact with the human body, the detection and determination circuit outputs a low-level detection result signal Sdr due to the large impedance. The detection result latch circuit latches the low-level detection result signal Sdr into a low-level detection result latch signal according to the pulse signals DP1/DP2 of the detection pulse generating module, and also maintains the detection result in the working mode DRM. In this way, the switch circuit can be kept off to avoid continuous energization. In this way, the possibility of electric shock to the human body can also be avoided, so that the requirements of safety regulations can be met. When the lamp caps at both ends of the LED straight tube lamp are correctly inserted into the lamp socket (time point td), the detection and determination circuit outputs a high-level detection result signal Sdr because the impedance of the LED straight tube lamp itself is small. The detection result latch circuit latches the high-level detection result signal Sdr into a high-level detection result latch signal according to the pulse signals DP1/DP2 of the detection pulse generating module, and also maintains the detection result in the working mode DRM. In this way, the switch circuit can be kept on and continuously energized, so that the LED straight tube lamp operates normally in the working mode DRM.
换句话说，在一些实施例中，当所述LED直管灯的一端所述灯头插入所述灯座而另一端所述灯头为浮接或电性接触人体时，所述检测判定电路输入低准位的所述检测结果信号Sdr到所述检测结果锁存电路，然后所述检测脉冲发生模块输出一低准位信号到所述检测结果锁存电路，使所述检测结果锁存电路输出低准位的一检测结果锁存信号以使所述开关电路截止，其中所述开关电路的截止使所述第一安装检测端以及第二安装检测端之间截止，亦即使所述LED直管灯进入一不导通状态。In other words, in some embodiments, when the lamp cap at one end of the LED straight tube lamp is inserted into the lamp socket and the lamp cap at the other end is floating or in electrical contact with the human body, the input of the detection and determination circuit is low. The detection result signal Sdr of the level is sent to the detection result latch circuit, and then the detection pulse generating module outputs a low level signal to the detection result latch circuit, so that the detection result latch circuit outputs a low level A detection result of the level latches the signal to turn off the switch circuit, wherein the turn-off of the switch circuit cuts off the connection between the first installation detection terminal and the second installation detection terminal, that is, the LED straight tube lamp into a non-conducting state.
而在一些实施例中，当所述LED直管灯的所述两灯头正确插入所述灯座时，所述检测判定电路输入高准位的所述检测结果信号到所述检测结果锁存电路，使所述检测结果锁存电路输出高准位的一检测结果锁存信号以使所述开关电路导通，其中所述开关电路的导通使所述第一安装检测端以及第二安装检测端之间导通，亦即使所述LED直管灯操作于一导通状态。In some embodiments, when the two lamp caps of the LED straight tube lamp are correctly inserted into the lamp socket, the detection and determination circuit inputs the detection result signal of a high level to the detection result latch circuit , making the detection result latch circuit output a high-level detection result latch signal to turn on the switch circuit, wherein the conduction of the switch circuit enables the first installation detection terminal and the second installation detection terminal Conduction between the terminals means that the LED straight tube lamp operates in a conducting state.
依据上述，就使用者安装的过程而言，在本实施例所述的LED直管灯被安装通电后(无论是正确安装的通电或是不正确安装的通电)，由于LED直管灯内部的安装检测模块都会先进行脉冲产生动作以检测LED直管灯的安装状态，并且在确认LED直管灯已被正确安装后才会导通电源回路以给出足以点亮LED模块的驱动电流，因此至少在第一次脉冲被产生之前，LED直管灯都不会被点亮(即，电源回路不会被导通，或是电源回路上的电流被限制在小于5mA/MIU)。在实际应用中，LED直管灯被安装通电后至第一次脉冲产生所需的时间大致上会大于或等于100毫秒(ms)。换言之，本实施例的LED直管灯在安装通电后至少会在100ms内不会被点亮。此外，在一实施例中，由于安装检测模块会在LED直管灯被正确安装之前持续发出脉冲来检测安装状态，因此若LED直管灯在一个脉冲产生后未被点亮(即，未被判定正确安装)，则LED直管灯至少会间隔前述的设定时间间隔TIV才会有可能被点亮(即，下一个脉冲产生后)。换言之，若本实施例的LED直管灯在安装通电后的100ms未被点亮，则在100ms+TIV的期间内也不会被点亮。应注意的是，在此所述的“LED直管灯通电”是指外部电源(如市电)被施加在直管灯上，并且LED直管灯的电源回路电性连接至大地电平(ground level)，进而在电源回路上产生电压差。其中，LED直管灯正确安装的通电即是指外部电源施加在LED直管灯上，并且LED直管灯是透过灯具的接地线路电性连接至大地电平；而LED直管灯不正确安装即是指外部电源施加在LED直管灯上，但是LED直管灯并非仅透过灯具的接地线路电性连接至大地电平，而是透过人体或其他阻抗物体连接至大地电平，亦即在未正确安装状态下，会有非预期的阻抗物体串联在电流路径上。According to the above, as far as the user's installation process is concerned, after the LED straight tube lamp described in this embodiment is installed and energized (whether it is correctly installed or incorrectly installed), due to the internal The installation detection module will first perform pulse generation action to detect the installation status of the LED straight tube light, and after confirming that the LED straight tube light has been installed correctly, the power circuit will be turned on to give enough driving current to light the LED module. Therefore, At least until the first pulse is generated, the LED straight tube lamp will not be lit (ie, the power loop will not be turned on, or the current on the power loop will be limited to less than 5mA/MIU). In practical applications, the time required for the first pulse to be generated after the LED straight tube light is installed and powered on is approximately greater than or equal to 100 milliseconds (ms). In other words, the LED straight tube lamp of this embodiment will not be lit for at least 100ms after being installed and powered on. In addition, in one embodiment, since the installation detection module will continue to send out pulses to detect the installation state before the LED straight tube light is correctly installed, if the LED straight tube light is not lit after a pulse is generated (that is, it is not If it is determined to be installed correctly), the LED straight tube light will be lit at least after the aforementioned set time interval TIV (that is, after the next pulse is generated). In other words, if the LED straight tube lamp of the present embodiment is not lit 100ms after installation and electrification, it will not be lit during the period of 100ms+TIV. It should be noted that the "LED straight tube light is powered on" mentioned here means that an external power supply (such as commercial power) is applied to the straight tube light, and the power loop of the LED straight tube light is electrically connected to the ground level ( ground level), which in turn creates a voltage difference across the power loop. Among them, the energization of the correct installation of the LED straight tube light means that the external power supply is applied to the LED straight tube light, and the LED straight tube light is electrically connected to the ground level through the grounding circuit of the lamp; and the LED straight tube light is incorrect. Installation means that the external power is applied to the LED straight tube light, but the LED straight tube light is not only electrically connected to the ground level through the grounding line of the lamp, but is connected to the ground level through the human body or other impedance objects. That is, in the incorrect installation state, there will be unexpected impedance objects in series on the current path.
值得注意的是，检测脉冲发生模块产生的脉冲信号DP1/DP2的脉宽在1us至1ms之间，其作用仅在LED直管灯通电瞬间时，利用这个脉冲信号使开关电路导通短暂的时间。这样可以产生一个脉冲电流，流过检测判定电路进行检测判断。因产生的是短时间的脉冲而长时间导通非，并不会引发触电危险。再者，检测结果锁存电路于工作模式DRM时也维持检测结果，不再因电路状态改变而改变先前锁存的检测结果，而避免检测结果变化而造成的问题。而安装检测模块(即开关电路、检测脉冲发生模块、检测结果锁存电路以及检测判定电路)可以集成到芯片中，这样可以嵌入到电路中，可以节省安装检测模块的电路成本和体积。在一实施例中，所述脉冲信号DP1/DP2的脉宽可进一步的在10us至1ms之间；在另一实施例中，所述脉冲信号DP1/DP2的脉宽可进一步的在15us至30us之间；在另一实施例中，脉冲信号DP1/DP2的脉宽可进一步的在200us至400us之间；在另一实施例中，所述脉冲信号DP1/DP2的脉宽可为20us、35us或45us的正负15％内；在另一实施例中，所述脉冲信号DP1/DP2的脉宽可为300us的正负15％内。It is worth noting that the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 generated by the detection pulse generation module is between 1us and 1ms, and its function is only when the LED straight tube lamp is energized. This pulse signal is used to make the switch circuit conduct for a short time. . In this way, a pulse current can be generated, which flows through the detection and judgment circuit for detection and judgment. The long-term conduction is not caused by the short-time pulse, and there is no danger of electric shock. Furthermore, the detection result latch circuit also maintains the detection result in the operating mode DRM, and no longer changes the previously latched detection result due to the change of the circuit state, thereby avoiding the problem caused by the change of the detection result. The installation detection module (ie the switch circuit, the detection pulse generation module, the detection result latch circuit and the detection determination circuit) can be integrated into the chip, which can be embedded in the circuit, which can save the circuit cost and volume of the installation detection module. In one embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 10us and 1ms; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 15us and 30us in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be further between 200us and 400us; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be 20us, 35us or within plus or minus 15% of 45us; in another embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP1/DP2 may be within plus or minus 15% of 300us.
在一实施例的定义中，所述的脉冲/脉冲信号是指在连续的信号时间过程中短暂出现的剧烈电压或电流的信号变化，亦即信号在短时间内突变，并且随后又迅速返回其初始值。因此，所述脉冲信号可能是从低准位变换为高准位一段期间后再回到低准位的电压或电流信号，或者是从高准位变换为低准位的电压或电流信号，本申请不以此为限。于此所述的“短暂出现的信号变化”所对应到的期间是指不足以使整体LED直管灯运作状态改变并且不会致使人体发生触电危害的期间长度。例如：在利用脉冲信号DP1/DP2导通开关电路3200/3200a时，开关电路3200/3200a的导通期间会足够短以致于使LED模块不会被点亮，并且使电源回路上的有效电流不会大于限流设定值(5MIU)。于此所述的“剧烈信号变化”是指所述信号变化足以使接收该脉冲信号的电子组件反应于该脉冲信号而发生操作状态的改变。例如：开关电路3200/3200a接收到脉冲信号DP1/DP2时，限流电路3200/3200a会反应于脉冲信号DP1/DP2的准位切换而导通或截止。In the definition of an embodiment, the pulse/pulse signal refers to a severe voltage or current signal change that occurs briefly in the continuous signal time process, that is, the signal suddenly changes in a short period of time, and then quickly returns to its original state. initial value. Therefore, the pulse signal may be a voltage or current signal that changes from a low level to a high level for a period of time and then returns to a low level, or a voltage or current signal that changes from a high level to a low level. The application is not limited to this. The period corresponding to the "short-term signal change" mentioned herein refers to a period that is not enough to change the operating state of the overall LED straight tube light and does not cause electric shock hazards to the human body. For example, when the switch circuits 3200/3200a are turned on by the pulse signals DP1/DP2, the turn-on period of the switch circuits 3200/3200a will be short enough so that the LED modules will not be lit, and the effective current in the power loop will not be turned on. will be greater than the current limit setting value (5MIU). The "severe signal change" as used herein means that the signal change is sufficient to cause the electronic component receiving the pulse signal to change its operating state in response to the pulse signal. For example, when the switch circuits 3200/3200a receive the pulse signals DP1/DP2, the current limiting circuits 3200/3200a will be turned on or off in response to the level switching of the pulse signals DP1/DP2.
另外附带一提的是，虽然上述的检测脉冲发生模块3110是以产生两个脉冲信号DP1与DP2作为范例来进行说明，但本申请的检测脉冲发生模块3110不仅限于此。所述检测脉冲发生模块3110可以是用以产生单一脉冲的电路或是可独立产生多个脉冲的电路。Incidentally, although the above-mentioned detection pulse generation module 3110 is described by generating two pulse signals DP1 and DP2 as an example, the detection pulse generation module 3110 of the present application is not limited to this. The detection pulse generating module 3110 may be a circuit for generating a single pulse or a circuit for generating multiple pulses independently.
在检测脉冲发生模块3110产生单一脉冲的实施方式下，可以利用RC电路搭配主动组件/有源组件的简单电路配置来实现单一脉冲输出。举例来说，在一范例实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110a可以仅包括电容C11、电阻R11以及缓冲器BF1。在此配置底下，检测脉冲发生模块3110a仅会产生单一脉冲信号DP1。In the embodiment in which the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates a single pulse, a simple circuit configuration of an RC circuit and an active component/active component can be used to realize a single pulse output. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, the detection pulse generating module 3110a may only include a capacitor C11, a resistor R11 and a buffer BF1. Under this configuration, the detection pulse generating module 3110a only generates a single pulse signal DP1.
在检测脉冲发生模块3110产生多个脉冲的实施方式下，检测脉冲发生模块3110a可以更包括一复位电路(未绘示)，所述复位电路可以在第一脉冲信号及/或第二脉冲信号产生之后，重置电路的工作状态，使得检测脉冲发生模块3110a在一段时间后可以再次产生第一脉冲信 号及/或第二脉冲信号。亦即，透过复位电路的作用，可以使检测脉冲发生模块3110a依据固定或随机的设定时间间隔TIV产生多个脉冲信号。所述依据固定的设定时间间隔TIV产生多个脉冲信号也可例如是固定每间隔20毫秒至2秒产生一个脉冲信号(即20ms≤TIV≤2s)，在一些实施例中，所述设定时间间隔TIV可为500ms到2s之间；在一些实施例中，所述设定时间间隔TIV可为75ms的正负15％内；在一些实施例中，所述设定时间间隔TIV可为45ms的正负15％内；在一些实施例中，所述设定时间间隔TIV可为30ms的正负15％内。所述依据随机的设定时间间隔TIV产生多个脉冲信号可例如是每个相邻脉冲信号之间的设定时间间隔TIV系选自于0.5秒至2秒的区间内的一乱数设定值。In the embodiment in which the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates multiple pulses, the detection pulse generating module 3110a may further include a reset circuit (not shown), and the reset circuit may generate the first pulse signal and/or the second pulse signal Afterwards, the working state of the circuit is reset, so that the detection pulse generating module 3110a can generate the first pulse signal and/or the second pulse signal again after a period of time. That is, through the function of the reset circuit, the detection pulse generating module 3110a can generate a plurality of pulse signals according to a fixed or random set time interval TIV. The generating a plurality of pulse signals according to a fixed set time interval TIV may also be, for example, generating a pulse signal at a fixed interval of 20 milliseconds to 2 seconds (ie, 20ms≤TIV≤2s). In some embodiments, the setting The time interval TIV may be between 500ms and 2s; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be within plus or minus 15% of 75ms; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be 45ms Within plus or minus 15% of ; in some embodiments, the set time interval TIV may be within plus or minus 15% of 30 ms. The generation of the plurality of pulse signals according to the random set time interval TIV may be, for example, that the set time interval TIV between each adjacent pulse signal is selected from a random set value in the interval of 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds. .
更具体的说，检测脉冲发生模块3110发出脉冲信号以进行安装检测的时点及频率可以考虑检测模式下检测电流对人体的影响而做相应的设定。一般而言，只要通过人体的电流大小及持续时间符合规范，即便有电流通过接触者也不会有被电击的感受，且不会造成人身安全的危害。其中，电流大小与持续时间对人体的危害大致上呈负相关，亦即在通过电流不危害人体安全的前提下，通过电流越大则通电持续时间需越短；反之，若通过电流较小，则可持续通电较长时间也不会造成人体危害。换言之，实际上人体是否会受到触电危害是看每单位时间施加在人体上的电流量(或称电功率)，而并非单看流通人体的电流量。More specifically, the timing and frequency at which the detection pulse generating module 3110 sends out a pulse signal for installation detection can be set accordingly considering the influence of the detection current on the human body in the detection mode. Generally speaking, as long as the magnitude and duration of the current passing through the human body meet the specifications, even if there is current passing through the contact person, they will not feel electric shock, and will not cause personal safety hazards. Among them, the harm of the current size and the duration to the human body is roughly negatively correlated, that is, on the premise that the passing current does not endanger the safety of the human body, the greater the passing current, the shorter the duration of the power-on; on the contrary, if the passing current is small, Then it can be powered on for a long time without causing harm to human body. In other words, whether the human body is actually subject to electric shock depends on the amount of current (or electric power) applied to the human body per unit time, rather than the amount of current flowing through the human body.
在一些实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110可以配置为仅在特定时间区间内发出脉冲信号来进行安装检测，并且在超出所述时间区间后即停止发出脉冲信号以避免检测电流造成人体危害。如图45D所示，图45D是本申请第一实施例的检测电流的波形示意图，其中图式的横轴为时间(标示为t)，纵轴为电流值(标示为I)。在检测模式内，检测脉冲模块3110会在检测时间区间内发出脉冲信号(脉冲信号的脉宽及设定时间间隔可参照其他相关实施例)，使得检测路径/电源回路被导通。由于检测路径/电源回路被导通，检测电流Iin(可通过量测电源模块的输入电流得到)会响应于脉冲信号的脉冲发生时点而产生相应的电流脉冲Idp，其中检测判定电路3130即是通过检测这些电流脉冲Idp的电流值来判断LED直管灯是否已被正确安装至灯座上。在检测时间区间Tw之后，检测脉冲发生模块3110停止发出脉冲信号，使得检测路径/电源回路被截止。从较大的时间维度来看，检测脉冲发生模块3110会在检测时间区间Tw内产生一个脉冲群DPg，并且藉由这个脉冲群DPg的检测来判定LED直管灯是否已被正确安装在灯座上。换言之，在本实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110仅会在检测时间区间Tw内发出脉冲信号，其中所述检测时间区间Tw可以设定为0.5秒至2秒并包含0.5秒至2秒之间的任一小数两位的数值点，例如0.51、0.52、0.53、…、0.6、0.61、0.62、…1.97、1.98、1.99、2，但本申请不以此为限。值得一提的是，透过适当的选取检测时间区间Tw可以达到使整个脉冲群DPg的检测动作不会产生足以危害人体的电功率，进而达到防触电的效果。In some embodiments, the detection pulse generation module 3110 can be configured to only send a pulse signal within a certain time interval for installation detection, and stop sending the pulse signal after the time interval exceeds the time interval to avoid the detection current causing human harm. As shown in FIG. 45D , FIG. 45D is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the first embodiment of the present application, wherein the horizontal axis of the graph is time (marked as t), and the vertical axis is the current value (marked as I). In the detection mode, the detection pulse module 3110 will send out a pulse signal within the detection time interval (the pulse width and the set time interval of the pulse signal can refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path/power circuit is turned on. Since the detection path/power loop is turned on, the detection current Iin (which can be obtained by measuring the input current of the power module) will generate a corresponding current pulse Idp in response to the timing of the pulse of the pulse signal, wherein the detection and determination circuit 3130 is By detecting the current value of these current pulses Idp, it can be judged whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket. After the detection time interval Tw, the detection pulse generating module 3110 stops sending pulse signals, so that the detection path/power circuit is cut off. From a larger time dimension, the detection pulse generation module 3110 will generate a pulse group DPg within the detection time interval Tw, and determine whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed in the lamp socket through the detection of the pulse group DPg superior. In other words, in this embodiment, the detection pulse generating module 3110 only sends a pulse signal within the detection time interval Tw, wherein the detection time interval Tw can be set to be between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds inclusive. Any numerical point with two decimal places, such as 0.51, 0.52, 0.53, ..., 0.6, 0.61, 0.62, ... 1.97, 1.98, 1.99, 2, but the present application is not limited to this. It is worth mentioning that, by properly selecting the detection time interval Tw, the detection action of the entire pulse group DPg will not generate electric power enough to harm the human body, thereby achieving the effect of preventing electric shock.
在电路设计上，令检测脉冲发生模块3110仅在检测时间区间Tw内发出检测信号可利用 多种不同的电路实施方式。举例来说，在一范例实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110可以使用脉冲产生电路(如图19B、20B)搭配计时电路(未绘示)来实现，所述计时电路可在计数一定期间后输出信号通知脉冲产生电路停止产生脉冲。在另一范例实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110可以使用脉冲产生电路(如图19B、20B)搭配信号屏蔽电路(未绘示)来实现，其中信号屏蔽电路可在预定时间后透过将脉冲产生电路的输出拉地等方式来屏蔽脉冲产生电路输出的脉冲信号。在此配置底下，信号屏蔽电路可以利用简单电路(例如RC电路)来实现，并且无须更动原先脉冲产生电路的设计。In circuit design, a variety of different circuit implementations can be used to make the detection pulse generating module 3110 send the detection signal only within the detection time interval Tw. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, the detection pulse generating module 3110 can be implemented by using a pulse generating circuit (as shown in FIGS. 19B and 20B ) and a timing circuit (not shown), and the timing circuit can output the output after counting a certain period of time. Signals the pulse generation circuit to stop generating pulses. In another exemplary embodiment, the detection pulse generating module 3110 can be implemented by using a pulse generating circuit (as shown in FIGS. 19B and 20B ) and a signal shielding circuit (not shown), wherein the signal shielding circuit The output of the generating circuit is pulled to ground to shield the pulse signal output by the pulse generating circuit. Under this configuration, the signal shielding circuit can be implemented with a simple circuit (eg, an RC circuit) without changing the design of the original pulse generating circuit.
在一些实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110可以配置为每次发出脉冲信号都至少间隔一大于等于特定安全值的设定时间间隔才会再发出下一个脉冲信号，藉以避免检测电流造成人体危害。如图45E所示，图45E是本申请第二实施例的检测电流的波形示意图。在检测模式内，检测脉冲发生模块3110会以大于特定安全值(例如1秒)的设定时间间隔TIV发出脉冲信号(脉冲信号的脉宽设定可参照其他相关实施例)，使得检测路径/电源回路被导通。由于检测路径/电源回路被导通，检测电流Iin(可通过量测电源模块的输入电流得到)会响应于脉冲信号的脉冲发生时点而产生相应的电流脉冲Idp，其中检测判定电路3130即是通过检测这些电流脉冲Idp的电流值来判断LED直管灯是否已被正确安装至灯座上。In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be configured to send the next pulse signal every time a pulse signal is sent out at least a set time interval greater than or equal to a certain safety value, so as to avoid the detection current from causing human harm. As shown in FIG. 45E , FIG. 45E is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the second embodiment of the present application. In the detection mode, the detection pulse generation module 3110 will send a pulse signal at a set time interval TIV greater than a certain safety value (for example, 1 second) (for the pulse width setting of the pulse signal, please refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path / The power circuit is turned on. Since the detection path/power loop is turned on, the detection current Iin (which can be obtained by measuring the input current of the power module) will generate a corresponding current pulse Idp in response to the timing of the pulse of the pulse signal, wherein the detection and determination circuit 3130 is By detecting the current value of these current pulses Idp, it can be judged whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket.
在一些实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110可以配置为每间隔一大于等于特定安全值的设定时间间隔发出一个脉冲群来进行安装检测，藉以避免检测电流造成人体危害。如图45F所示，图45F是本申请第三实施例的检测电流的波形示意图。在检测模式内，检测脉冲发生模块3110会先在第一个检测时间区间Tw内发出多个脉冲信号(脉冲信号的脉宽及设定时间间隔可参照其他相关实施例)，使得检测路径/电源回路被导通。此时检测电流Iin会响应于脉冲信号的脉冲发生时点而产生多个相应的电流脉冲Idp，在第一个检测时间区间Tw内的电流脉冲Idp构成第一脉冲群DPg1。在第一个检测时间区间Tw结束后，检测脉冲发生模块3110会暂停输出脉冲信号一段设定时间间隔TIVs(例如为大于等于1秒)，并且在进入下一个检测时间区间Tw后才再次发出脉冲信号。类似于第一个检测时间区间Tw的操作，第二个检测时间区间Tw及第三个检测时间区间Tw内的检测电流Iin会分别构成第二脉冲群DPg2及第三脉冲群DPg3，其中检测判定电路3130即是通过检测这些脉冲群DPg1、DPg2、DPg3的电流值来判断LED直管灯是否已被正确安装至灯座上。In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be configured to send out a pulse group at a set time interval that is greater than or equal to a specific safety value for installation detection, so as to prevent the detection current from causing human harm. As shown in FIG. 45F , FIG. 45F is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the detection current according to the third embodiment of the present application. In the detection mode, the detection pulse generation module 3110 will first send out a plurality of pulse signals in the first detection time interval Tw (the pulse width and the set time interval of the pulse signals can refer to other related embodiments), so that the detection path/power circuit is turned on. At this time, the detection current Iin will generate a plurality of corresponding current pulses Idp in response to the pulse generation point of the pulse signal, and the current pulses Idp in the first detection time interval Tw constitute the first pulse group DPg1. After the end of the first detection time interval Tw, the detection pulse generation module 3110 will suspend the output of the pulse signal for a set time interval TIVs (for example, greater than or equal to 1 second), and will not issue a pulse again after entering the next detection time interval Tw Signal. Similar to the operation in the first detection time interval Tw, the detection current Iin in the second detection time interval Tw and the third detection time interval Tw will constitute the second pulse group DPg2 and the third pulse group DPg3, respectively. The circuit 3130 determines whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket by detecting the current values of the pulse groups DPg1 , DPg2 and DPg3 .
于此需说明的是，在实际应用中，电流脉冲Idp的电流大小会与检测路径/电源回路上的阻抗相关。因此在设计检测脉冲发生模块3110时，可以根据检测路径/电源回路的选用与设置来对应设计输出脉冲信号的格式。It should be noted here that, in practical applications, the magnitude of the current of the current pulse Idp is related to the impedance on the detection path/power loop. Therefore, when designing the detection pulse generating module 3110, the format of the output pulse signal can be correspondingly designed according to the selection and setting of the detection path/power circuit.
请参考图19G，图19G为申请第一实施例的应急控制模块在电路中的电路方块示意图。应急控制模块3140电性连接至第一整流输出端511和第二整流输出端512，用以检测整流输出端的电压信号HV1，通过电压信号HV1即可判断出LED直管灯当前所接收到的外部驱动信 号是否为直流信号。二极管D51的阳极电性连接至第一整流输出端511，其阴极电性连接至滤波电路的输入端(即电容725和电感726的连接端)。应急控制模块3140通过路径3141电性连接至检测结果锁存电路3120。二极管D51的加入可以限制主电源回路上的电流方向，使应急控制模块3140检测到的电压信号HV1为整流后信号，而不受滤波电路中的电容的影响。在其他实施例中也可以省略二极管D51。本实施例中，第一整流输出端511为整流输出正端，第二整流输出端为整流输出负端。Please refer to FIG. 19G . FIG. 19G is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the first embodiment of the application. The emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 to detect the voltage signal HV1 of the rectifier output terminal. The voltage signal HV1 can be used to determine the external current received by the LED straight tube lamp. Whether the drive signal is a DC signal. The anode of the diode D51 is electrically connected to the first rectifier output terminal 511, and the cathode thereof is electrically connected to the input terminal of the filter circuit (ie, the connection terminal of the capacitor 725 and the inductor 726). The emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through a path 3141 . The addition of the diode D51 can limit the current direction on the main power circuit, so that the voltage signal HV1 detected by the emergency control module 3140 is a rectified signal, and is not affected by the capacitance in the filter circuit. In other embodiments, the diode D51 can also be omitted. In this embodiment, the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal, and the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
请参考图19H，图19H为本申请第二实施例的应急控制模块在电路中的电路方块示意图。本实施例与图19G所述的实施例类似，与之不同的是，应急控制模块3140检测的是整流电路510之前的电压信号,通过检测电压信号HV2同样可以判断出LED直管灯当前所接收到的外部驱动信号是否为直流信号。二极管D91的阳极电性连接至第一接脚501，二极管D92的阳极电性连接至第二接脚502，二极管D91的阴极和二极管D92的阴极电性连接并电性连接至应急控制模块3140。应急控制模块3140电性连接至第二整流输出端512，并通过通过路径3141连接检测结果锁存电路3120。本实施例中，第一整流输出端511为整流输出正端，第二整流输出端为整流输出负端。Please refer to FIG. 19H . FIG. 19H is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment described in FIG. 19G , but the difference is that the emergency control module 3140 detects the voltage signal before the rectifier circuit 510 . By detecting the voltage signal HV2 , it can also be determined that the LED straight tube lamp is currently receiving Whether the received external drive signal is a DC signal. The anode of the diode D91 is electrically connected to the first pin 501 , the anode of the diode D92 is electrically connected to the second pin 502 , and the cathode of the diode D91 and the cathode of the diode D92 are electrically connected to the emergency control module 3140 . The emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the second rectification output terminal 512 , and is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the passage 3141 . In this embodiment, the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal, and the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
请参考图19I,图19I为本申请第三实施例的应急控制模块在电路中的电路方块示意图。本实施例与图19H所述的实施例类似，与之不同的是，本实施中应急控制电路3140只通过二极管D92对整流桥510之前的电压信号进行检测。二极管D92的阳极电性连接至第二接脚502，其阴极电性连接至应急控制模块3140。应急控制模块3140电性连接至第二整流输出端512，并通过通过路径3141连接检测结果锁存电路3120。本实施例中，第一整流输出端511为整流输出正端，第二整流输出端为整流输出负端。Please refer to FIG. 19I. FIG. 19I is a schematic circuit block diagram of the emergency control module in the circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment described in FIG. 19H , and the difference is that in this embodiment, the emergency control circuit 3140 only detects the voltage signal before the rectifier bridge 510 through the diode D92 . The anode of the diode D92 is electrically connected to the second pin 502 , and the cathode thereof is electrically connected to the emergency control module 3140 . The emergency control module 3140 is electrically connected to the second rectification output terminal 512 , and is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3120 through the passage 3141 . In this embodiment, the first rectification output terminal 511 is the rectified output positive terminal, and the second rectified output terminal is the rectified output negative terminal.
下面结合图19G-19I以及图45H-45K对应急控制模块判断外部驱动信号是否为直流信号的原理进行说明。当外部驱动信号为市电交流电时，图45H为电压信号HV1的信号波形示意图，图45I为电压信号HV2的波形示意图，图45J为电压信号HV2的波形示意图；当外部驱动信号为直流电(可以为应急镇流器提供的直流电)时，图45K为电压信号HV1或HV2的波形示意图。当外部驱动信号为直流信号时，且第二接脚502连接的为直流信号的负极时，应急控制模块接收到电压信号HV3为0，即无法检测到任何的电压信号。The principle of the emergency control module judging whether the external drive signal is a DC signal will be described below with reference to FIGS. 19G-19I and FIGS. 45H-45K. When the external driving signal is AC AC, FIG. 45H is a schematic diagram of the signal waveform of the voltage signal HV1, FIG. 45I is a schematic waveform diagram of the voltage signal HV2, and FIG. 45J is a schematic waveform diagram of the voltage signal HV2; when the external driving signal is DC (can be When the direct current provided by the emergency ballast), Fig. 45K is a schematic diagram of the waveform of the voltage signal HV1 or HV2. When the external driving signal is a DC signal and the second pin 502 is connected to the negative pole of the DC signal, the emergency control module receives the voltage signal HV3 as 0, that is, cannot detect any voltage signal.
参考图19G、45H、45K及图48F,图48F是本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图。在LED直管灯的电源模块接收到外部驱动信号时，应急控制模块3140会先检测获取到的电压信号HV1(步骤S501),并在一定时间内判断电压信号HV1是否过零(步骤S502)。若应急控制模块3140在步骤S502中判断为是，则代表当前所接收的外部驱动信号为交流信号，此时安装检测模块3000a进入检测模式；若应急检测模块3140在步骤S502中的判断为否，则代表所接收机到的外部驱动信号为直流信号，此时，安装检测模块3000a进入应急模式，并使检测结果锁存电路3120控制开关电路3200a操作在第一组态(步骤S503)，其中所 述第一组态可例如为导通组态。19G, 45H, 45K and FIG. 48F, FIG. 48F is a flowchart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. When the power module of the LED straight tube lamp receives the external driving signal, the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the obtained voltage signal HV1 (step S501), and determine whether the voltage signal HV1 crosses zero within a certain period of time (step S502). If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S502, it means that the currently received external drive signal is an AC signal, and the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode; if the emergency detection module 3140 determines no in step S502, It means that the received external drive signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S503), in which all The first configuration can be, for example, a turn-on configuration.
在另一方面，在应急模式下，应急控制模块3140除了使开关电路320a维持在第一组态之外，其会进一步的检测电压信号HV1，判断电压信号HV1是否有过零，当检测到电压信号HV1过零时(步骤S504)，判定外部驱动信号从直流信号切换到交流信号，此时应急控制模块3140会使安装检测模块3000a进入到检测模式；当判断电压信号HV1无过零时，开关电路3200a继续维持在第一组态。On the other hand, in the emergency mode, in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 320a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 will further detect the voltage signal HV1 to determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has zero-crossing. When the signal HV1 crosses zero (step S504), it is determined that the external drive signal is switched from a DC signal to an AC signal. At this time, the emergency control module 3140 will make the installation detection module 3000a enter the detection mode; when it is determined that the voltage signal HV1 has no zero-crossing, the switch Circuit 3200a continues to remain in the first configuration.
在一些实施例中，可以省略步骤S504，只在LED灯管上电时进行应急控制模块的检测。In some embodiments, step S504 may be omitted, and the detection of the emergency control module is only performed when the LED lamp is powered on.
同样的，图19H和图19I所述的实施例同样可以使用检测过零信号的方式来判断外部驱动信号是否为直流信号，此处不再赘述。Similarly, the embodiments described in FIG. 19H and FIG. 19I can also use the method of detecting the zero-crossing signal to determine whether the external driving signal is a DC signal, which will not be repeated here.
参考图19G、45H、45K及图48G,图48G是本申请第五实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图。在LED直管灯的电源模块接收到外部驱动信号时，应急控制模块3140会先检测获取到的电压信号HV1(步骤S601),并在一定时间内判断电压信号HV1是否有上升沿/下降沿信号(步骤S602)。若应急控制模块3140在步骤S602中判断为是，则代表当前所接收的外部驱动信号为交流信号，此时安装检测模块3000a进入检测模式；若应急检测模块3140在步骤S502中的判断为否，则代表所接收到的外部驱动信号为直流信号，此时，安装检测模块3000a进入应急模式，并使检测结果锁存电路3120控制开关电路3200a操作在第一组态(步骤S603)，其中所述第一组态可例如为导通组态。19G , 45H, 45K and FIG. 48G , FIG. 48G is a flow chart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application. When the power module of the LED straight tube lamp receives the external driving signal, the emergency control module 3140 will first detect the obtained voltage signal HV1 (step S601), and determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal within a certain period of time (step S602). If the emergency control module 3140 determines yes in step S602, it means that the currently received external drive signal is an AC signal, and the installation detection module 3000a enters the detection mode; if the emergency detection module 3140 determines no in step S502, It means that the received external drive signal is a DC signal. At this time, the installation detection module 3000a enters the emergency mode, and the detection result latch circuit 3120 controls the switch circuit 3200a to operate in the first configuration (step S603), wherein the The first configuration may be, for example, a conductive configuration.
在另一方面，在应急模式下，应急控制模块3140除了使开关电路320a维持在第一组态之外，其会进一步的检测电压信号HV1，判断电压信号HV1是否有上升沿/下降沿信号，当检测到电压信号HV1有上升沿/下降沿信号时(步骤S604)，判定外部驱动信号从直流信号切换到交流信号，此时应急控制模块3140会使安装检测模块3000a进入到检测模式；当判断电压信号HV1无上升沿/下降沿信号时，开关电路3200a继续维持在第一组态。On the other hand, in the emergency mode, in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 320a in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 will further detect the voltage signal HV1 to determine whether the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal, When it is detected that the voltage signal HV1 has a rising edge/falling edge signal (step S604), it is determined that the external driving signal is switched from a DC signal to an AC signal, and the emergency control module 3140 will make the installation detection module 3000a enter the detection mode at this time; When the voltage signal HV1 has no rising edge/falling edge signal, the switch circuit 3200a continues to maintain the first configuration.
在一些实施例中，可以省略步骤S604，只在LED灯管上电时进行应急控制模块的检测。In some embodiments, step S604 may be omitted, and the detection of the emergency control module is only performed when the LED lamp is powered on.
同样的，图19H和图19I所述的实施例同样可以使用过检测电压信号上升沿/下降沿的方式来判断外部驱动信号是否为直流信号，此处不再赘述。Similarly, the embodiments described in FIG. 19H and FIG. 19I can also use the method of over-detecting the rising edge/falling edge of the voltage signal to determine whether the external driving signal is a DC signal, which will not be repeated here.
通过图19G-19I所述的实施例的电路结构，应急检测模块通过检测外部驱动信号是否为直流信号，使安装检测模块工作在不同的状态，一方面，当外部驱动信号为应急镇流器提供的直流信号时，这种直流信号为电池升压后得到的驱动信号，这种驱动信号的其中一输出端接触人体，也不会有触电风险。另外，这种直流信号的电压一般较市电低，若使用安装检测功能，安装检测模块存在误判的情况而使LED直管灯无法正常点亮。所以，当外部驱动信号为市电交流电时，安装检测模块正常工作，进行安装检测；当外部驱动信号为直流信号时， 安装检测模块3000a跳过检测阶段，直接使开关电路3200a处于导通状态。Through the circuit structure of the embodiment shown in Figs. 19G-19I, the emergency detection module makes the installation detection module work in different states by detecting whether the external driving signal is a DC signal. On the one hand, when the external driving signal provides the emergency ballast When the DC signal is a DC signal, the DC signal is a driving signal obtained after the battery is boosted, and one of the output ends of the driving signal contacts the human body, and there is no risk of electric shock. In addition, the voltage of such a DC signal is generally lower than that of the commercial power supply. If the installation detection function is used, the installation detection module may misjudge, and the LED straight tube lamp cannot be lit normally. Therefore, when the external driving signal is AC AC, the installation detection module works normally and performs installation detection; when the external driving signal is a DC signal, the installation detection module 3000a skips the detection stage and directly makes the switch circuit 3200a in an on state.
请参见图20A，图20A是本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块3000b包含一检测脉冲发生模块3210、一检测结果锁存电路3220、一检测判定电路3230以及一开关电路3200b。底下搭配图45B所绘示的信号时序来一并说明，其中图45B是本申请第二实施例的电源模块的信号时序示意图。其中，检测脉冲发生模块3210电性连接检测结果锁存电路3220，用以产生包含有至少一脉冲信号DP的控制信号Sc。检测结果锁存电路3220电性连接开关电路3200b，用以接收并输出检测脉冲发生模块3210所输出的控制信号Sc。开关电路3200b分别电性连接LED直管灯电源回路的一端与检测判定电路3230，用以接收检测结果锁存电路3220所输出的控制信号Sc并在脉冲信号DP期间导通，使得LED直管灯电源回路导通。检测判定电路3230分别电性连接开关电路3200b、LED直管灯电源回路的另一端以及检测结果锁存电路3220，用以在开关电路3200b与LED电源回路导通时，检测电源回路上的取样信号Ssp以判断LED直管灯与灯座的安装状态。换言之，本实施例的电源回路是用作为安装检测模块的检测路径(前述图19A实施例亦属类似配置)。其中，检测判定电路3230更将检测结果传送至检测结果锁存电路3220以实行进一步控制；另外，检测脉冲发生模块3210更电性连接检测结果锁存电路3220的输出，藉以控制截止脉冲信号DP的时间。其细部电路架构及整体电路运作的说明将先后描述于下。Please refer to FIG. 20A . FIG. 20A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 3000b includes a detection pulse generation module 3210, a detection result latch circuit 3220, a detection determination circuit 3230, and a switch circuit 3200b. The following description is combined with the signal timing shown in FIG. 45B , wherein FIG. 45B is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the power module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The detection pulse generating module 3210 is electrically connected to the detection result latch circuit 3220 for generating the control signal Sc including at least one pulse signal DP. The detection result latch circuit 3220 is electrically connected to the switch circuit 3200b for receiving and outputting the control signal Sc output by the detection pulse generating module 3210 . The switch circuit 3200b is respectively electrically connected to one end of the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp and the detection and determination circuit 3230 for receiving the control signal Sc output by the detection result latch circuit 3220 and conducts during the pulse signal DP, so that the LED straight tube lamp is turned on during the period of the pulse signal DP. The power circuit is turned on. The detection and determination circuit 3230 is electrically connected to the switch circuit 3200b, the other end of the LED straight tube lamp power circuit, and the detection result latch circuit 3220, respectively, for detecting the sampling signal on the power circuit when the switch circuit 3200b and the LED power circuit are turned on Ssp is used to judge the installation status of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder. In other words, the power circuit of this embodiment is used as a detection path for installing the detection module (the above-mentioned embodiment in FIG. 19A also has a similar configuration). The detection determination circuit 3230 further transmits the detection result to the detection result latch circuit 3220 for further control; in addition, the detection pulse generation module 3210 is further electrically connected to the output of the detection result latch circuit 3220 to control the output of the cut-off pulse signal DP. time. The detailed circuit structure and the description of the overall circuit operation will be successively described below.
在一些实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3210经由检测结果锁存电路3220产生一控制信号Sc，以使开关电路3200b在脉冲期间操作在导通状态。同时，LED直管灯位于安装检测端TE1与TE2之间的电源回路也会同时导通。检测判定电路3230检测在电源回路上的一取样信号，并且基于检测到的信号通知检测结果锁存电路3220锁存检测信号的时间点。举例来说，检测判定电路3230可例如是可产生用以控制闩锁电路的输出准位的电路，其中闩锁电路的输出准位会与LED直管灯的导通/截止状态相互对应。检测结果锁存电路3220依据取样信号Ssp(或取样信号Ssp与脉冲信号DP)储存检测结果，并且将检测结果传送或提供开关电路3200b。开关电路3200b接收到由检测结果锁存电路3220所传送的检测结果后，即会依据检测结果来控制安装检测端TE1与TE2之间的导通状态。In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3210 generates a control signal Sc via the detection result latch circuit 3220, so that the switch circuit 3200b operates in an on state during the pulse. At the same time, the power loop of the LED straight tube light between the installation detection ends TE1 and TE2 will also be turned on at the same time. The detection determination circuit 3230 detects a sampling signal on the power supply circuit, and informs the detection result latch circuit 3220 of a time point to latch the detection signal based on the detected signal. For example, the detection and determination circuit 3230 may be, for example, a circuit for controlling the output level of the latch circuit, wherein the output level of the latch circuit corresponds to the on/off state of the LED straight tube lamp. The detection result latch circuit 3220 stores the detection result according to the sampling signal Ssp (or the sampling signal Ssp and the pulse signal DP), and transmits or provides the detection result to the switch circuit 3200b. After receiving the detection result transmitted by the detection result latch circuit 3220, the switch circuit 3200b controls the conduction state between the mounting detection terminals TE1 and TE2 according to the detection result.
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块3000b更包含一应急控制模块3240。所述应急控制模块3240的配置和运作与前述实施例的应急控制模块3140近似，因此可参考上述说明，于此不再赘述。In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000b further includes an emergency control module 3240 . The configuration and operation of the emergency control module 3240 are similar to those of the emergency control module 3140 in the foregoing embodiment, so reference can be made to the above description, which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块3000b中的检测脉冲发生模块3210、检测判定电路3230、检测结果锁存电路3220以及开关电路3200b可分别以图20B至图20E的电路架构来实现(但不仅限于此)，其中图20B至图20E是本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。底下分就各模块/单元进行说明。In some embodiments, the detection pulse generation module 3210 , the detection determination circuit 3230 , the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the switch circuit 3200b in the installation detection module 3000b can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 20B to 20E respectively (but not limited to 20B to 20E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
请参见图20B，图20B是根据本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图。检测脉冲发生模块3210包含：一电阻R21(第六电阻)，一端连接一驱动电压；一电容C21(第四电容)，一端连接电阻R21的另一端，且电容C21的另一端接地；一施密特触发器STRG，具有一输入端与一输出端，该输入端连接电阻R21与电容C21的连接端，该输出端连接检测结果锁存电路3220；一电阻R22(第七电阻)，一端连接电阻R21与电容C21的连接端；一晶体管M21(第二晶体管)，具有一基极端、一集极端与一射极端，该集极端连接电阻R22的另一端，该射极端接地；以及一电阻R23(第八电阻)，一端连接晶体管M21的基极端，且电阻R23的另一端连接检测结果锁存电路3220与开关电路3200b。检测脉冲发生模块3210更包含一齐纳二极管ZD1，具有一阳极端与一阴极端，该阳极端连接电容C21的另一端接地，该阴极端连接电容C21与电阻R21连接的一端。本实施例与前述图19B实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的电路皆仅是范例，实际上检测脉冲发生电路的具体运作是基于图40实施例所配置的功能模块来执行，此部分会于图40的实施例再进一步详述。Please refer to FIG. 20B , FIG. 20B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to a second embodiment of the present application. The detection pulse generation module 3210 includes: a resistor R21 (sixth resistor), one end of which is connected to a driving voltage; a capacitor C21 (fourth capacitor), one end of which is connected to the other end of the resistor R21, and the other end of the capacitor C21 is grounded; The special trigger STRG has an input end and an output end, the input end is connected to the connection end of the resistor R21 and the capacitor C21, the output end is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3220; a resistor R22 (the seventh resistor), one end is connected to the resistor The connection terminal of R21 and the capacitor C21; a transistor M21 (the second transistor), which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal, the collector terminal is connected to the other end of the resistor R22, and the emitter terminal is grounded; and a resistor R23 ( The eighth resistor), one end is connected to the base terminal of the transistor M21, and the other end of the resistor R23 is connected to the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the switch circuit 3200b. The detection pulse generating module 3210 further includes a Zener diode ZD1 with an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C21 to ground, and the cathode terminal is connected to one terminal of the capacitor C21 and the resistor R21. The circuits of the detection pulse generation module in this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 19B are only examples. In fact, the specific operation of the detection pulse generation circuit is performed based on the functional modules configured in the embodiment in FIG. 40 . This part will be shown in FIG. 40 . The examples are described in further detail.
请参见图20C，图20C是根据本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的检测判定电路的电路架构示意图。检测判定电路3230包括：一电阻R24(第九电阻)，一端连接晶体管M22的射极端，且电阻R24的另一端连接LED电源回路的另一端(例如：第二安装检测端TE2)；一二极管D21(第二二极管)，具有一阳极端与一阴极端，该阳极端连接电阻R24的一端；一比较器CP21(第二比较器)，具有一第一输入端、一第二输入端与一输出端，该第一输入端连接一设定信号(例如：参考电压Vref，在本实施例为1.3V，然不限于此)，该第二输入端连接二极管D21的阴极端，且比较器CP21的输出端连接D型触发器DFF的频率输入端；一比较器CP22(第三比较器)，具有一第一输入端、一第二输入端与一输出端，该第一输入端连接二极管D21的阴极端，该第二输入端连接另一设定信号(例如：另一参考电压Vref，在本实施例为0.3V，然不限于此)，且比较器的输出端连接D型触发器DFF的频率输入端；一电阻R25(第十电阻)，一端连接该驱动电压；一电阻R26(第十一电阻)，一端连接电阻R25的另一端与比较器CP21的第二输入端，且电阻R26的另一端接地；以及一电容C22(第五电容)，与电阻R26并联。在某些实施例中，上述二极管D21、比较器CP22、电阻R25、电阻R26以及电容C22可以被省略，当二极管D21被省略时，比较器CP21的第二输入端就直接连接电阻R24的一端。在某些实施例中，基于功率因素考虑，电阻R24可以是两电阻并联，其等效电阻值包括0.1奥姆-5奥姆。Please refer to FIG. 20C. FIG. 20C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The detection and determination circuit 3230 includes: a resistor R24 (the ninth resistor), one end of which is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor M22, and the other end of the resistor R24 is connected to the other end of the LED power loop (for example: the second installation detection terminal TE2); a diode D21 (second diode), with an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to one end of the resistor R24; a comparator CP21 (second comparator), with a first input terminal, a second input terminal and An output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to a setting signal (for example: the reference voltage Vref, in this embodiment is 1.3V, but not limited to this), the second input terminal is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode D21, and the comparator The output terminal of CP21 is connected to the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF; a comparator CP22 (third comparator) has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, and the first input terminal is connected to a diode The cathode terminal of D21, the second input terminal is connected to another setting signal (for example: another reference voltage Vref, which is 0.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to this), and the output terminal of the comparator is connected to the D-type flip-flop The frequency input end of DFF; a resistor R25 (tenth resistor), one end is connected to the driving voltage; a resistor R26 (eleventh resistor), one end is connected to the other end of the resistor R25 and the second input end of the comparator CP21, and the resistor The other end of R26 is grounded; and a capacitor C22 (the fifth capacitor) is connected in parallel with the resistor R26. In some embodiments, the diode D21, the comparator CP22, the resistor R25, the resistor R26 and the capacitor C22 can be omitted. When the diode D21 is omitted, the second input end of the comparator CP21 is directly connected to one end of the resistor R24. In some embodiments, based on the consideration of power factor, the resistor R24 may be two resistors connected in parallel, and the equivalent resistance value thereof includes 0.1 ohm-5 ohm.
请参见图20D，图20D是根据本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的检测结果锁存电路的电路架构示意图。检测结果锁存电路3220包含：一D型触发器DFF(第二D型触发器)，具有一数据输入端、一频率输入端与一输出端，该数据输入端连接该驱动电压，该频率输入端连接检测判定电路3230；以及一或门OG(第三或门)，具有一第一输入端、一第二输入端与一输出端，该第一输入端连接施密特触发器STRG的输出端，该第二输入端连接D型触发器DFF的输出端，且或门OG的输出端连接电阻R23的另一端与开关电路3200b。Please refer to FIG. 20D . FIG. 20D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection result latch circuit of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The detection result latch circuit 3220 includes: a D-type flip-flop DFF (second D-type flip-flop), which has a data input end, a frequency input end and an output end, the data input end is connected to the driving voltage, the frequency input end The terminal is connected to the detection and determination circuit 3230; and an OR gate OG (third OR gate) has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to the output of the Schmitt trigger STRG terminal, the second input terminal is connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the other terminal of the resistor R23 and the switch circuit 3200b.
请参见图20E，图20E是根据本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的开关电路的电路架构示意图。开关电路3200b包括：一晶体管M22(第三晶体管)，具有一基极端、一集极端与一射极端，该基极端连接或门OG的输出端，该集极端连接LED电源回路的一端(例如：第一安装检测端TE1)，该射极端连接检测判定电路3230。其中，晶体管M22亦可置换成其他电子式开关的等效组件，例如：MOSFET等。Please refer to FIG. 20E. FIG. 20E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit for installing a detection module according to a second embodiment of the present application. The switch circuit 3200b includes: a transistor M22 (third transistor), which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal, the base terminal is connected to the output terminal of the OR gate OG, and the collector terminal is connected to one end of the LED power circuit (for example: The first installation detection terminal TE1), the emitter terminal is connected to the detection and determination circuit 3230. The transistor M22 can also be replaced with equivalent components of other electronic switches, such as MOSFETs.
值得注意的是，上述安装检测模块的部分电路可以积体化成一集成电路，进而节省安装检测模块的电路成本和体积。例如：整合检测脉冲发生模块3210的施密特触发器STRG、检测结果锁存电路3220以及检测判定电路3230的两比较器CP21、CP22于一集成电路，然本申请不限于此。It is worth noting that, the above-mentioned part of the circuit of the installation detection module can be integrated into an integrated circuit, thereby saving the circuit cost and volume of the installation detection module. For example, the Schmitt trigger STRG of the detection pulse generation module 3210, the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the two comparators CP21 and CP22 of the detection determination circuit 3230 are integrated into an integrated circuit, but the present application is not limited thereto.
底下将再就安装检测模块的整体电路运作加以说明。首先要说明的是，本申请利用电容电压不会发生突变的原理；LED直管灯电源回路中的电容在电源回路导通前，其两端电压为零且瞬态响应呈现短路状态；以及当电源回路在LED直管灯正确安装于灯座时，其瞬态响应限流电阻较小且响应峰值电流较大，当电源回路在LED直管灯未正确安装于灯座时，其瞬态响应限流电阻较大且响应峰值电流较小等原理加以实施，并且使LED直管灯的漏电流小于5MIU。以下将就LED直管灯在正常工作时(即LED直管灯两端灯头均正确安装于灯座内)与换灯测试时(即LED直管灯一端灯头安装于灯座内而另一端灯头接触人体)一实施例的电流量比较：The whole circuit operation of installing the detection module will be described below. First of all, it should be noted that this application utilizes the principle that the capacitor voltage will not undergo sudden change; the capacitor in the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp has zero voltage at both ends and the transient response is in a short-circuit state before the power supply circuit is turned on; and when When the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response current limiting resistance of the power circuit is small and the response peak current is large. When the power circuit is not correctly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response of the power circuit is The principle of large current limiting resistance and small response peak current is implemented, and the leakage current of the LED straight tube lamp is less than 5MIU. The following will test the LED straight tube lamp during normal operation (that is, both ends of the LED straight tube lamp are correctly installed in the lamp socket) and the lamp replacement test (that is, one end of the LED straight tube lamp is installed in the lamp socket and the other end of the lamp head is installed in the lamp socket. Contact the human body) the current amount comparison of an embodiment:
Figure PCTCN2022071054-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022071054-appb-000001
其中，在分母部分，Rfuse为LED直管灯的保险丝阻值(10奥姆)，而500奥姆为模拟人体的导电特性在瞬态响应的阻值；而在分子部分，取电压均方根值90V～305V的最大电压值(305*1.414)以及最小电压差值50V。从以上实施例可以得知，LED直管灯若两端灯头均正确安装于灯座内，其正常工作时的最小瞬态电流为5A；但当LED直管灯一端灯头安装于灯座 内而另一端灯头接触人体时，其最大瞬态电流却只有845mA。因此，本申请利用可通过瞬态响应流过LED电源回路中的电容(例如：滤波电路的滤波电容)的电流以检测LED直管灯与灯座的安装状态，亦即检测LED直管灯是否正确安装于灯座内，并且在LED直管灯尚未正确安装于灯座内时，更提供一保护机制以避免使用者因误触LED直管灯导电部分而触电的问题。上述的实施例仅用以说明本申请而并非用以限制本申请的实施。Among them, in the denominator part, Rfuse is the resistance value of the fuse of the LED straight tube lamp (10 ohms), and 500 ohms is the resistance value of the transient response to simulate the conductive characteristics of the human body; and in the numerator part, take the voltage root mean square The maximum voltage value (305*1.414) of 90V～305V and the minimum voltage difference of 50V. It can be known from the above examples that if both ends of the LED straight tube lamp are correctly installed in the lamp holder, the minimum transient current during normal operation is 5A; but when one end of the LED straight tube lamp is installed in the lamp holder, the When the other end of the lamp head contacts the human body, its maximum transient current is only 845mA. Therefore, the present application utilizes the current that can flow through the capacitor in the LED power supply loop (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response to detect the installation status of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder, that is, to detect whether the LED straight tube lamp is It is correctly installed in the lamp socket, and when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket, a protection mechanism is provided to avoid the problem of electric shock caused by the user accidentally touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube light. The above-mentioned embodiments are only used to illustrate the present application rather than to limit the implementation of the present application.
接着，请再次参见图20A，当LED直管灯换装于灯座时，检测脉冲发生模块3210在一段时间后(此段时间决定脉冲周期)，其输出从一第一低准位电压上升至一第一高准位电压，并经由一路径3211输出此第一高准位电压至检测结果锁存电路3220。检测结果锁存电路3220接收此第一高准位电压后，经由一路径3221同时输出一第二高准位电压至开关电路3200b与检测脉冲发生模块3210。当开关电路3200b接收此第二高准位电压后，开关电路3200b导通使得LED直管灯的一电源回路(至少包括第一安装检测端TE1、开关电路3200b、路径3201、检测判定电路3230与第二安装检测端TE2)导通；而在此同时，检测脉冲发生模块3210在接收由检测结果锁存电路3220所回传的第二高准位电压后的一段时间(此段时间决定脉冲宽度)，其输出从第一高准位电压降回第一低准位电压(第一次的第一低准位电压、第一高准位电压与第二次的第一低准位电压构成一第一脉冲信号DP1)。而检测判定电路3230在LED直管灯的电源回路导通时，检测其回路上的一第一取样信号SP1(例如：电压信号)，当此第一取样信号SP1大于及/或等于一设定信号(例如：一参考电压Vref)时，根据上述本申请的应用原理，表示LED直管灯正确安装于灯座内，因此检测判定电路3230经由一路径3231输出一第三高准位电压(第一高准位信号)至检测结果锁存电路3220。检测结果锁存电路3220接收此第三高准位电压进而输出并维持一第二高准位电压(第二高准位信号)至开关电路3200b，开关电路3200b接收此第二高准位电压进而维持导通以使LED直管灯的电源回路维持导通，其间检测脉冲发生模块3210不再产生脉冲输出。Next, please refer to FIG. 20A again, when the LED straight tube lamp is replaced in the lamp socket, after a period of time (this period determines the pulse period), the output of the detection pulse generation module 3210 rises from a first low-level voltage to A first high level voltage is output to the detection result latch circuit 3220 through a path 3211 . After receiving the first high-level voltage, the detection result latch circuit 3220 simultaneously outputs a second high-level voltage to the switch circuit 3200b and the detection pulse generating module 3210 through a path 3221 . After the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage, the switch circuit 3200b is turned on so that a power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200b, the path 3201, the detection and determination circuit 3230 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is turned on; at the same time, the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high-level voltage returned by the detection result latch circuit 3220 for a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse width ), its output drops from the first high-level voltage back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage, the first high-level voltage and the second low-level voltage form a the first pulse signal DP1). The detection and determination circuit 3230 detects a first sampling signal SP1 (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on. When the first sampling signal SP1 is greater than and/or equal to a set value When a signal (for example: a reference voltage Vref) is present, according to the application principle of the present application, it indicates that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third high-level voltage (the third high-level voltage) through a path 3231 A high level signal) is sent to the detection result latch circuit 3220. The detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third high-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second high-level voltage (second high-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage and then The power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is maintained to be turned on, during which the detection pulse generating module 3210 no longer generates pulse output.
当此第一取样信号SP1小于此设定信号时，根据上述本申请的应用原理，表示LED直管灯尚未正确安装于灯座内，因此检测判定电路3230输出一第三低准位电压(第一低准位信号)至检测结果锁存电路3220。检测结果锁存电路3220接收此第三低准位电压进而输出并维持第二低准位电压(第二低准位信号)至开关电路3200b，开关电路3200b接收此第二低准位电压进而维持截止以使LED直管灯的电源回路维持开路。在此情况下，避免使用者在LED直管灯尚未正确安装于灯座内时因误触LED直管灯导电部分而触电的问题。When the first sampling signal SP1 is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above-mentioned application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp has not been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third low-level voltage (No. A low level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220. The detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third low-level voltage and outputs and maintains the second low-level voltage (second low-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second low-level voltage and maintains Turn off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open. In this case, the problem of electric shock due to accidental contact of the conductive part of the LED straight tube light by the user when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket can be avoided.
当上述LED直管灯的电源回路维持开路一段时间后(即脉冲周期时间)，检测脉冲发生模块3210的输出再次从第一低准位电压上升至第一高准位电压，并经由路径3211输出至检测结果锁存电路3220。检测结果锁存电路3220接收此第一高准位电压后，经由路径3221同时输出一第二高准位电压至开关电路3200b与检测脉冲发生模块3210。当开关电路3200b接收此第二高准位电压后，开关电路3200b再次导通使得LED直管灯的电源回路(至少包括第一安 装检测端TE1、开关电路3200b、路径3201、检测判定电路3230与第二安装检测端TE2)也再次导通；在此同时，检测脉冲发生模块3210在接收由检测结果锁存电路3220所回传的第二高准位电压后的一段时间(此段时间决定脉冲宽度)，其输出从第一高准位电压降回一第一低准位电压(第三次的第一低准位电压、第二次的第一高准位电压与第四次的第一低准位电压构成一第二脉冲信号DP2)。而检测判定电路3230在LED直管灯的电源回路再次导通时，也再次检测其回路上的一第二取样信号SP2(例如：电压信号)，当此第二取样信号SP2大于及/或等于设定信号(例如：一参考电压Vref)时，根据上述本申请的应用原理，表示LED直管灯正确安装于灯座内，因此检测判定电路3230经由路径3231输出一第三高准位电压(第一高准位信号)至检测结果锁存电路3220。检测结果锁存电路3220接收此第三高准位电压进而输出并维持一第二高准位电压(第二高准位信号)至开关电路3200b，开关电路3200b接收此第二高准位电压进而维持导通以使LED直管灯的电源回路维持导通，其间检测脉冲发生模块3210不再产生脉波输出。When the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is kept open for a period of time (ie, the pulse cycle time), the output of the detection pulse generation module 3210 rises from the first low-level voltage to the first high-level voltage again, and is output through the path 3211 to the detection result latch circuit 3220. After receiving the first high-level voltage, the detection result latch circuit 3220 simultaneously outputs a second high-level voltage to the switch circuit 3200b and the detection pulse generating module 3210 through the path 3221 . After the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage, the switch circuit 3200b is turned on again so that the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200b, the path 3201, the detection and determination circuit 3230 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is also turned on again; at the same time, the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high-level voltage returned by the detection result latch circuit 3220 for a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse width), the output drops from the first high-level voltage back to a first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage for the third time, the first high-level voltage for the second time, and the first low-level voltage for the fourth time The low level voltage constitutes a second pulse signal DP2). When the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on again, the detection and determination circuit 3230 also detects a second sampling signal SP2 (eg, a voltage signal) on the circuit again. When the second sampling signal SP2 is greater than and/or equal to When a signal (eg, a reference voltage Vref) is set, according to the above application principle of the present application, it indicates that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp holder, so the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third high-level voltage ( the first high level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220. The detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third high-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second high-level voltage (second high-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second high-level voltage and then The power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is maintained to be turned on, during which the detection pulse generating module 3210 no longer generates pulse wave output.
当此第二取样信号SP2小于此设定信号时，根据上述本申请的应用原理，表示LED直管灯仍未正确安装于灯座内，因此检测判定电路3230输出一第三低准位电压(第一低准位信号)至检测结果锁存电路3220。检测结果锁存电路3220接收此第三低准位电压进而输出并维持一第二低准位电压(第二低准位信号)至开关电路3200b，开关电路3200b接收此第二低准位电压进而维持截止以使LED直管灯的电源回路维持开路。When the second sampling signal SP2 is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above-mentioned application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is not properly installed in the lamp socket, so the detection and determination circuit 3230 outputs a third low-level voltage ( the first low level signal) to the detection result latch circuit 3220. The detection result latch circuit 3220 receives the third low-level voltage and outputs and maintains a second low-level voltage (second low-level signal) to the switch circuit 3200b, and the switch circuit 3200b receives the second low-level voltage and then Keep it off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open.
在图45B的范例中，因为基于第一脉冲信号DP1所产生的第一取样信号SP1与基于第二脉冲信号DP2所产生的第二取样信号SP2皆小于参考电压Vref，因此在此段期间内开关电路3200b会被维持在截止状态，并且使驱动电路(未绘示)不会被启动。直到第三脉冲信号DP3产生后，由于检测判定电路3230会根据高于参考电压Vref的第三取样信号SP3产生LED直管灯已被正确安装的检测结果，使得开关电路3200b会被检测结果锁存电路3220所输出的高准位电压维持在导通状态以使电源回路维持导通。此时电源模块中的驱动电路会基于电源回路上的电压而被启动并开始运作，进而产生点亮控制信号Slc来切换功率开关(未绘示)，使得驱动电流可被产生并点亮LED模块。In the example of FIG. 45B , because the first sampling signal SP1 generated based on the first pulse signal DP1 and the second sampling signal SP2 generated based on the second pulse signal DP2 are both lower than the reference voltage Vref, the switch is switched during this period The circuit 3200b will be maintained in the off state, and the driving circuit (not shown) will not be activated. Until the third pulse signal DP3 is generated, since the detection and determination circuit 3230 will generate a detection result that the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed according to the third sampling signal SP3 higher than the reference voltage Vref, the switch circuit 3200b will be latched by the detection result The high-level voltage output by the circuit 3220 is maintained in a conducting state to keep the power loop conducting. At this time, the driving circuit in the power module will be activated and start to operate based on the voltage on the power loop, and then generate the lighting control signal Slc to switch the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current can be generated to light the LED module .
接着，请同时参见图20B至图20E，当LED直管灯换装于灯座时，一驱动电压经由电阻R21对电容C21进行充电，而当电容C21的电压上升到足以触发施密特触发器STRG时，施密特触发器STRG从初始的一第一低准位电压变成一第一高准位电压输出到或门OG的一输入端。或门OG在接收来自施密特触发器STRG所输出的第一高准位电压后，或门OG输出一第二高准位电压到晶体管M22的基极端以及电阻R23。当晶体管M22的基极端接收来自或门OG所输出的第二高准位电压后，晶体管M22的集极端与射极端导通，进而使得LED直管灯的电源回路(至少包括第一安装检测端TE1、晶体管M22、电阻R24与第二安装检测端TE2)导通；而在此同时，晶体管M21的基极端经由电阻R23接收或门OG所输出的第二高准位电压后，晶体管M21 的集极端与射极端导通接地，使得电容C21的电压经由电阻R22对地放电，当电容C21的电压不足以触发施密特触发器STRG时，施密特触发器STRG的输出从第一高准位电压降回第一低准位电压(第一次的第一低准位电压、第一高准位电压与第二次的第一低准位电压构成一第一脉冲信号)。而当LED直管灯的电源回路导通时，通过瞬态响应流过LED电源回路中的电容(例如：滤波电路的滤波电容)的电流流经晶体管M22与电阻R24，并在电阻R24上形成一电压信号，此电压信号经由比较器CP21与一参考电压(在本实施例为1.3V，然不限于此)进行比较，当此电压信号大于及/或等于此参考电压时，比较器CP21输出一第三高准位电压到D型触发器DFF的频率输入端CLK，同时由于D型触发器DFF的数据输入端D连接驱动电压，因此D型触发器DFF的输出端Q输出一高准位电压到或门OG的另一输入端，使得或门OG输出并维持第二高准位电压至晶体管M22的基极端，进而使得晶体管M22以及LED直管灯的电源回路维持导通。由于或门OG输出并维持第二高准位电压，因此晶体管M21亦维持导通接地，进而使得电容C21的电压无法上升到足以触发施密特触发器STRG。Next, please refer to FIGS. 20B to 20E at the same time, when the LED straight tube lamp is replaced in the lamp socket, a driving voltage charges the capacitor C21 through the resistor R21, and when the voltage of the capacitor C21 rises enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger During STRG, the Schmitt trigger STRG changes from an initial first low-level voltage to a first high-level voltage and outputs to an input terminal of the OR gate OG. After the OR gate OG receives the first high level voltage output from the Schmitt trigger STRG, the OR gate OG outputs a second high level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22 and the resistor R23. When the base terminal of the transistor M22 receives the second high-level voltage output from the OR gate OG, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M22 are conducted, thereby making the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp (including at least the first installation detection terminal). TE1, transistor M22, resistor R24 and the second installation detection terminal TE2) are turned on; at the same time, after the base terminal of transistor M21 receives the second high-level voltage output by OR gate OG via resistor R23, the set of transistor M21 is The terminal and the emitter terminal are connected to the ground, so that the voltage of the capacitor C21 is discharged to the ground through the resistor R22. When the voltage of the capacitor C21 is not enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger STRG, the output of the Schmitt trigger STRG starts from the first high level. The voltage drops back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage of the first time, the first high-level voltage of the second time, and the first low-level voltage of the second time constitute a first pulse signal). When the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on, the current flowing through the capacitor in the LED power circuit (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response flows through the transistor M22 and the resistor R24, and forms on the resistor R24. A voltage signal, the voltage signal is compared with a reference voltage (1.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to) through the comparator CP21, when the voltage signal is greater than and/or equal to the reference voltage, the comparator CP21 outputs A third high-level voltage is applied to the frequency input terminal CLK of the D-type flip-flop DFF. At the same time, since the data input terminal D of the D-type flip-flop DFF is connected to the driving voltage, the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a high-level voltage The voltage is applied to the other input terminal of the OR gate OG, so that the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22, thereby keeping the transistor M22 and the power loop of the LED straight tube light on. Since the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage, the transistor M21 also remains on and grounded, so that the voltage of the capacitor C21 cannot rise enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger STRG.
而当电阻R24上的电压信号小于参考电压时，比较器CP21输出一第三低准位电压到D型触发器DFF的频率输入端CLK，同时由于D型触发器DFF的初始输出值为零，因此D型触发器DFF的输出端Q输出一低准位电压到或门OG的另一输入端，并且由于或门OG的一端所连接的施密特触发器STRG亦恢复输出第一低准位电压，因此或门OG输出并维持第二低准位电压至晶体管M22的基极端，进而使得晶体管M22维持截止以及LED直管灯的电源回路维持开路。然而，由于或门OG输出并维持第二低准位电压，因此晶体管M21亦维持在截止状态，待驱动电压再经由电阻R21对电容C21进行充电以重复进行下一次(脉冲)检测。When the voltage signal on the resistor R24 is less than the reference voltage, the comparator CP21 outputs a third low-level voltage to the frequency input terminal CLK of the D-type flip-flop DFF, and since the initial output value of the D-type flip-flop DFF is zero, Therefore, the output terminal Q of the D-type flip-flop DFF outputs a low level voltage to the other input terminal of the OR gate OG, and the Schmitt trigger STRG connected to one end of the OR gate OG also restores to output the first low level voltage Therefore, the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second low-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M22, so that the transistor M22 is kept off and the power circuit of the LED straight tube light is kept open. However, since the OR gate OG outputs and maintains the second low level voltage, the transistor M21 is also kept in the off state, and the capacitor C21 is charged through the resistor R21 to repeat the next (pulse) detection after the driving voltage.
值得注意的是，脉冲周期是由电阻R21的电阻值与电容C21的电容值所决定，在某些实施例中，脉冲信号的设定时间间隔(TIV)为3ms-500ms，更进一步，脉冲信号的时间间隔为20ms-50ms；在某些实施例中，脉冲信号的设定时间间隔(TIV)为500ms-2000ms。脉冲宽度是由电阻R22的电阻值与电容C21的电容值所决定，在某些实施例中，脉冲信号的宽度包括1us-100us，更进一步，脉冲信号的宽度包括10us-20us。其中，本实施例有关于脉冲信号的产生机制及对应的检测电流状态可参照前述图45D至图45F的实施例说明，于此不再重复赘述。It is worth noting that the pulse period is determined by the resistance value of the resistor R21 and the capacitance value of the capacitor C21. In some embodiments, the set time interval (TIV) of the pulse signal is 3ms-500ms, and further, the pulse signal The time interval is 20ms-50ms; in some embodiments, the set time interval (TIV) of the pulse signal is 500ms-2000ms. The pulse width is determined by the resistance value of the resistor R22 and the capacitance value of the capacitor C21. In some embodiments, the width of the pulse signal includes 1us-100us, and further, the width of the pulse signal includes 10us-20us. The generation mechanism of the pulse signal and the corresponding detection current state in this embodiment may be described with reference to the foregoing embodiments in FIGS. 45D to 45F , which will not be repeated here.
齐纳二极管ZD1提供保护功能，但其可省略；电阻R24基于功率因素考虑，可以是两电阻并联，其等效电阻值包括0.1奥姆-5奥姆；电阻R25与R26提供分压确保输入电压高于比较器CP22的参考电压(在本实施例为0.3V，然不限于此)；电容C22提供稳压及滤波功能；二极管D21确保信号传送的单向性。另外，在此要强调的是，本申请所揭露的安装检测模块可适用于其他双端进电的LED照明设备，例如：具有双端电源供电架构的LED灯以及包含直接利用市电或利用镇流器所输出的信号作为外部驱动电压的LED灯等，本申请并不限制安装检测模块的应用范围。Zener diode ZD1 provides protection function, but it can be omitted; resistor R24 can be two resistors in parallel based on power factor considerations, and its equivalent resistance value includes 0.1 ohm-5 ohm; resistors R25 and R26 provide voltage divider to ensure the input voltage Higher than the reference voltage of the comparator CP22 (0.3V in this embodiment, but not limited to this); the capacitor C22 provides voltage stabilization and filtering functions; the diode D21 ensures the unidirectionality of signal transmission. In addition, it should be emphasized here that the installation detection module disclosed in the present application can be applied to other LED lighting equipment with dual-terminal power supply, such as: LED lamps with a dual-terminal power supply structure, and those including direct use of mains power or use of town power The signal output by the current transformer is used as an LED lamp of an external driving voltage, etc., and the application does not limit the application scope of the installation detection module.
请参见图21A，图21A是本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块3000c可包含一脉冲发生辅助电路3310、一集成控制模块3320、一开关电路3200b以及一检测判定辅助电路3330。本实施例的安装检测模块的整体运作与第二较佳实施例的安装检测模块的类似，因此可参考图45B所绘示的信号时序。其中，集成控制模块3320至少包括两输入端IN1、IN2以及输出端OT等三个脚位。脉冲发生辅助电路3310电性连接集成控制模块3320的输入端IN1与输出端OT，用以辅助集成控制模块3320产生一控制信号。检测判定辅助电路3330电性连接集成控制模块3320的输入端IN2与开关电路3200c，其可用以在开关电路3200c与LED电源回路导通时，回传关联于电源回路上的取样信号至集成控制模块3320的输入端IN2，使得集成控制模块3320可基于此取样信号来判断LED直管灯与灯座的安装状态。开关电路3200c分别电性连接LED直管灯电源回路的一端与检测判定辅助电路3330，用以接收集成控制模块3320所输出的控制信号，并在控制信号的使能期间(即，脉冲期间)内导通，使得LED直管灯电源回路导通。Please refer to FIG. 21A . FIG. 21A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 3000c may include a pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 , an integrated control module 3320 , a switch circuit 3200b and a detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 . The overall operation of the installation detection module of this embodiment is similar to that of the installation detection module of the second preferred embodiment, so reference may be made to the signal timing shown in FIG. 45B . Wherein, the integrated control module 3320 at least includes two input terminals IN1, IN2 and three pins such as an output terminal OT. The pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 is electrically connected to the input terminal IN1 and the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 for assisting the integrated control module 3320 to generate a control signal. The detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 is electrically connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 and the switch circuit 3200c, and can be used to return the sampling signal associated with the power circuit to the integrated control module when the switch circuit 3200c is connected to the LED power circuit The input terminal IN2 of the 3320 enables the integrated control module 3320 to determine the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder based on the sampling signal. The switch circuit 3200c is electrically connected to one end of the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330, respectively, for receiving the control signal output by the integrated control module 3320, and during the enabling period (ie, the pulse period) of the control signal Conduction, so that the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on.
更具体的说，集成控制模块3320可用以依据输入端IN1上所接收到的信号，在一段检测模式内藉输出端OT输出具有至少一脉冲的控制信号来短暂地导通开关电路3200c。在此段检测模式内，集成控制模块3320可根据输入端IN2上的信号检测LED直管灯是否被正确安装至灯座中并且将检测结果锁存，以作为在检测模式结束后是否导通开关电路3200c的依据(即，决定是否正常供电至LED模块)。第三较佳实施例的细部电路架构及整体电路运作的说明将先后描述于下。More specifically, the integrated control module 3320 can temporarily turn on the switch circuit 3200c by outputting a control signal with at least one pulse from the output terminal OT in a detection mode according to the signal received on the input terminal IN1. In this detection mode, the integrated control module 3320 can detect whether the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket according to the signal on the input terminal IN2 and latch the detection result as a switch whether to turn on after the detection mode ends. The basis of the circuit 3200c (ie, to determine whether to supply power to the LED module normally). The detailed circuit structure and the overall circuit operation of the third preferred embodiment will be described below.
在一范例实施例中，安装检测模块3000c中的集成控制模块3320、脉冲发生辅助电路3310、检测判定辅助电路3330以及开关电路3200c可分别以图21B至图21E的电路架构来实现(但不仅限于此)，其中图21B至图21E是本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。底下分就各模块/单元进行说明。In an exemplary embodiment, the integrated control module 3320, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330, and the switch circuit 3200c in the installation detection module 3000c can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 21B to 21E respectively (but not limited to) 21B to 21E are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
请参见图21B，图21B是根据本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的集成控制模块的内部电路方块示意图。集成控制模块3320包括脉冲产生单元3322、检测结果锁存单元3323以及检测单元3324。脉冲产生单元3322会从输入端IN1接收脉冲发生辅助电路3310所提供的信号，并且据以产生至少一脉冲信号，而产生的脉冲信号会被提供给检测结果锁存单元3323。在本实施例中，脉冲产生单元3322可例如以施密特触发器(未绘示，可参考图20B的施密特触发器STRG)来实施，其输入端耦接集成控制模块3320的输入端IN1，且其输出端耦接集成控制模块3320的输出端OT。但本申请的脉冲产生单元3322不仅限于使用施密特触发器的电路架构来实施。任何可以实现产生至少一脉冲信号功能的模拟/数字电路架构皆可应用于此。Please refer to FIG. 21B . FIG. 21B is a schematic block diagram of an internal circuit of an integrated control module for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application. The integrated control module 3320 includes a pulse generating unit 3322 , a detection result latching unit 3323 and a detection unit 3324 . The pulse generating unit 3322 receives the signal provided by the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 from the input terminal IN1, and generates at least one pulse signal accordingly, and the generated pulse signal is provided to the detection result latch unit 3323. In this embodiment, the pulse generating unit 3322 can be implemented by, for example, a Schmitt trigger (not shown, please refer to the Schmitt trigger STRG in FIG. 20B ), the input terminal of which is coupled to the input terminal of the integrated control module 3320 IN1, and its output terminal is coupled to the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 . However, the pulse generating unit 3322 of the present application is not limited to be implemented by using the circuit structure of the Schmitt trigger. Any analog/digital circuit structure that can realize the function of generating at least one pulse signal can be applied here.
检测结果锁存单元3323耦接脉冲产生单元3322与检测单元3324。在检测模式内，检测结果锁存单元3323会将脉冲产生单元3322所产生的脉冲信号作为控制信号提供至输出端OT。另一方面，检测结果锁存单元3323还会将检测单元3324所提供的检测结果信号锁存，并且 在检测模式后提供至输出端OT，藉以根据LED直管灯的安装状态是否正确来决定是否导通开关电路3200c。在本实施例中，检测结果锁存单元3323可例如以D型触发器搭配或门的电路架构(未绘示，可参考图20D的D型触发器DFF与或门OG)来实施。其中，D型触发器具有一数据输入端、一频率输入端与一输出端。该数据输入端连接驱动电压VCC，该频率输入端连接检测单元3324。或门具有一第一输入端、一第二输入端与一输出端，该第一输入端连接脉冲产生单元3322，该第二输入端连接D型触发器的输出端，且或门的输出端连接输出端OT。但本申请的检测结果锁存单元3323不仅限于使用D型触发器与或门的电路架构来实施。任何可以实现锁存并输出控制信号以控制开关电路3200c切换的功能的模拟/数字电路架构皆可应用于此。The detection result latch unit 3323 is coupled to the pulse generation unit 3322 and the detection unit 3324 . In the detection mode, the detection result latch unit 3323 provides the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation unit 3322 as a control signal to the output terminal OT. On the other hand, the detection result latching unit 3323 will also latch the detection result signal provided by the detection unit 3324, and provide it to the output terminal OT after the detection mode, so as to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp is installed correctly or not. The switch circuit 3200c is turned on. In this embodiment, the detection result latch unit 3323 may be implemented by, for example, a circuit structure of a D-type flip-flop with an OR gate (not shown, refer to the D-type flip-flop DFF and OR gate OG in FIG. 20D ). The D-type flip-flop has a data input end, a frequency input end and an output end. The data input terminal is connected to the driving voltage VCC, and the frequency input terminal is connected to the detection unit 3324 . The OR gate has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to the pulse generating unit 3322, the second input terminal is connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop, and the output terminal of the OR gate Connect the output terminal OT. However, the detection result latching unit 3323 of the present application is not limited to be implemented by using a circuit structure of a D-type flip-flop and an OR gate. Any analog/digital circuit architecture that can realize the function of latching and outputting a control signal to control the switching of the switch circuit 3200c can be applied here.
检测单元3324耦接检测结果锁存单元3323。检测单元3324会从输入端IN2接收检测判定辅助电路3330锁提供的信号，并且据以产生指示LED直管灯是否被正确安装的检测结果信号，而产生的检测结果信号会被提供给检测结果锁存单元3323。在本实施例中，检测单元3324可例如以比较器(未绘示，可参考图20C的比较器CP21)来实施。其中，比较器具有一第一输入端、一第二输入端与一输出端，该第一输入端连接一设定信号，该第二输入端连接输入端IN2，且比较器CP21的输出端连接检测结果锁存单元3323。但本申请的检测单元3324不仅限于使用比较器的电路架构来实施。任何可以实现根据输入端IN2上的信号判断LED直管灯是否被正确安装的模拟/数字电路架构皆可应用于此。The detection unit 3324 is coupled to the detection result latch unit 3323 . The detection unit 3324 will receive the signal provided by the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 lock from the input terminal IN2, and accordingly generate a detection result signal indicating whether the LED straight tube light is correctly installed, and the generated detection result signal will be provided to the detection result lock. Storage unit 3323. In this embodiment, the detection unit 3324 may be implemented by, for example, a comparator (not shown, please refer to the comparator CP21 in FIG. 20C ). The comparator has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, the first input terminal is connected to a setting signal, the second input terminal is connected to the input terminal IN2, and the output terminal of the comparator CP21 is connected to the detection terminal Result latch unit 3323. However, the detection unit 3324 of the present application is not limited to be implemented using the circuit structure of the comparator. Any analog/digital circuit structure that can realize whether the LED straight tube light is installed correctly according to the signal on the input terminal IN2 can be applied here.
请参见图21C，图21C是根据本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的脉冲发生辅助电路的电路架构示意图。脉冲发生辅助电路3310包含电阻R31、R32及R33、电容C31以及晶体管M31。电阻R31的一端连接一驱动电压(如VCC)。电容C31的一端电阻R31的另一端，且电容C31的另一端接地。电阻R32的一端连接电阻R31与电容C31的连接端。晶体管M31具有一基极端、一集极端与一射极端。该集极端连接电阻R32的另一端，并且该射极端接地。电阻R33的一端连接晶体管M31的基极端，且电阻R33的另一端经由路径3311连接至集成控制模块3310的输出端OT与开关电路3200c的控制端。脉冲发生辅助电路3310更包含一齐纳二极管ZD1，其具有一阳极端与一阴极端，该阳极端连接电容C31的另一端并且接地，该阴极端连接电容3323与电阻R31连接的一端。Please refer to FIG. 21C . FIG. 21C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a pulse generation auxiliary circuit for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application. The pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 includes resistors R31 , R32 and R33 , a capacitor C31 and a transistor M31 . One end of the resistor R31 is connected to a driving voltage (eg VCC). One end of the capacitor C31 is connected to the other end of the resistor R31, and the other end of the capacitor C31 is grounded. One end of the resistor R32 is connected to the connecting end of the resistor R31 and the capacitor C31. The transistor M31 has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal. The collector terminal is connected to the other terminal of the resistor R32, and the emitter terminal is grounded. One end of the resistor R33 is connected to the base end of the transistor M31 , and the other end of the resistor R33 is connected to the output end OT of the integrated control module 3310 and the control end of the switch circuit 3200c via the path 3311 . The pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 further includes a Zener diode ZD1, which has an anode terminal and a cathode terminal, the anode terminal is connected to the other terminal of the capacitor C31 and grounded, and the cathode terminal is connected to one terminal of the capacitor 3323 and the resistor R31.
请参见图21D，图21D是根据本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的检测判定辅助电路的电路架构示意图。检测判定辅助电路3330包含电阻R34、R35及R36、电容C32以及二极管D31。电阻R34的一端连接开关电路3200c的一端，且电阻R34的另一端连接LED电源回路的另一端(例如：第二安装检测端TE2)。电阻R35的一端连接该驱动电压(如VCC)。电阻R36的一端连接电阻R35的另一端，并经由路径3331连接至集成控制模块3320的输入端IN2，且电阻R36的另一端接地。电容C32与电阻R36并联。二极管D31具有一阳极端与一阴极端，该阳极端连接电阻R34的一端，且该阴极端连接电阻R35与R36的连接端。在某些实施例中， 上述电阻R35、电阻R36、电容C32以及二极管D31可以被省略，当二极管D31被省略时，电阻R34的一端直接经由路径3331连接至集成控制模块3320的输入端IN2。在某些实施例中，基于功率因素考虑，电阻R34可以是两电阻并联，其等效电阻值包括0.1奥姆～5奥姆。Please refer to FIG. 21D . FIG. 21D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination auxiliary circuit of the installation detection module according to the third embodiment of the present application. The detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 includes resistors R34, R35 and R36, a capacitor C32 and a diode D31. One end of the resistor R34 is connected to one end of the switch circuit 3200c, and the other end of the resistor R34 is connected to the other end of the LED power loop (eg, the second installation detection terminal TE2). One end of the resistor R35 is connected to the driving voltage (eg VCC). One end of the resistor R36 is connected to the other end of the resistor R35, and is connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3331, and the other end of the resistor R36 is grounded. Capacitor C32 is connected in parallel with resistor R36. The diode D31 has an anode end and a cathode end, the anode end is connected to one end of the resistor R34, and the cathode end is connected to the connection end of the resistors R35 and R36. In some embodiments, the above-mentioned resistor R35 , resistor R36 , capacitor C32 and diode D31 may be omitted. When the diode D31 is omitted, one end of the resistor R34 is directly connected to the input terminal IN2 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3331 . In some embodiments, considering the power factor, the resistor R34 may be two resistors connected in parallel, and the equivalent resistance value thereof includes 0.1 ohm to 5 ohm.
请参见图21E，图21E是根据本申请第三实施例的安装检测模块的开关电路的电路架构示意图。开关电路3200c包括晶体管M32，其具有一基极端、一集极端与一射极端。晶体管M32的基极端经由路径3321连接至集成控制模块3320的输出端OT，晶体管M32的集极端连接LED电源回路的一端(例如：第一安装检测端TE1)，并且晶体管M32的射极端连接检测判定辅助电路3330。其中，晶体管M32亦可置换成其他电子式开关的等效组件，例如：MOSFET等。Please refer to FIG. 21E. FIG. 21E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch circuit for installing a detection module according to a third embodiment of the present application. The switch circuit 3200c includes the transistor M32, which has a base terminal, a collector terminal and an emitter terminal. The base terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3321, the collector terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to one end of the LED power supply loop (for example: the first installation detection terminal TE1), and the emitter terminal of the transistor M32 is connected to the detection determination Auxiliary circuit 3330. The transistor M32 can also be replaced with equivalent components of other electronic switches, such as MOSFETs.
在此欲先说明的是，本实施例的安装检测模块所利用的安装检测原理是与前述第二较佳实施例相同，都是基于电容电压不会发生突变的原理，LED直管灯电源回路中的电容在电源回路导通前，其两端电压为零且瞬态响应呈现短路状态；以及当电源回路在LED直管灯正确安装于灯座时，其瞬态响应限流电阻较小且响应峰值电流较大，当电源回路在LED直管灯未正确安装于灯座时，其瞬态响应限流电阻较大且响应峰值电流较小等原理加以实施，并且使LED直管灯的漏电流小于5MIU。换言之，就是透过检测响应峰值电流的方式来判断LED直管灯是否正确地安装于灯座内。因此关于在正常工作及换灯测试下的瞬态电流部分可参照前述实施例的说明，于此不再重复赘述。底下将仅就安装检测模块的整体电路运作加以说明。It should be noted here that the installation detection principle used by the installation detection module of this embodiment is the same as that of the second preferred embodiment, which is based on the principle that the capacitor voltage will not change abruptly. The LED straight tube lamp power circuit Before the power loop is turned on, the voltage at both ends of the capacitor is zero and the transient response is in a short-circuit state; and when the power loop is correctly installed in the lamp socket of the LED straight tube lamp, its transient response current limiting resistance is small and The response peak current is large. When the power supply circuit is not properly installed in the lamp holder, the transient response current limiting resistance is large and the response peak current is small. The current is less than 5MIU. In other words, it is to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket by detecting the response peak current. Therefore, for the transient current part under normal operation and lamp replacement test, reference may be made to the descriptions of the foregoing embodiments, which will not be repeated here. Only the overall circuit operation of installing the detection module will be described below.
请再次参见图21A，当LED直管灯换装于灯座时，LED直管灯在有一端进电的情况下会使得驱动电压VCC被提供给安装检测模块3000c中的模块/电路。脉冲发生辅助电路3310会反应于驱动电压VCC而进行充电动作。在一段时间后(此段时间决定脉冲周期)，其输出电压(于此称第一输出电压)从一第一低准位电压上升至超过一顺向阈值电压(电压值可依据电路设计而定义)，并经由一路径3311输出至集成控制模块3320的输入端IN1。集成控制模块3320从输入端IN1接收第一输出电压后，经由一路径3321输出一使能的控制信号(例如为一高准位电压)至开关电路3200c与脉冲发生辅助电路3310。当开关电路3200c接收此使能的控制信号后，开关电路3200c导通使得LED直管灯的一电源回路(至少包括第一安装检测端TE1、开关电路3200c、路径3201、检测判定辅助电路3330与第二安装检测端TE2)导通；而在此同时，脉冲发生辅助电路3310会反应于使能的控制信号而导通放电路径以进行放电动作，并且在接收由集成控制模块3320所回传的使能的控制信号后的一段时间(此段时间决定脉冲宽度)，第一输出电压从超过顺向阈值电压的电压准位逐渐降回第一低准位电压。其中，在第一输出电压下降至低于一逆向阈值电压(电压值可依据电路设计而定义)时，集成控制模块3320会反应于第一输出电压而将使能的控制信号下拉至禁能准位(即，输出禁能的控制信号，其中禁能的控制信号例如为一低准位电压)，从而使得控制信号具有脉冲形式的信号波形(即，由控制信号中的第一次的低准位电压、高准位电压与第二次的低准位电压构成一第一脉冲信号)。 而检测判定辅助电路3330在LED直管灯的电源回路导通时，检测其回路上的一第一取样信号(例如：电压信号)，并且将第一取样信号经由输入端IN2提供给集成控制模块3320。当集成控制模块3320判定此第一取样信号大于或等于一设定信号(例如：一参考电压)时，根据上述本申请的应用原理，表示LED直管灯正确安装于灯座内，因此集成控制模块3320会输出并维持使能的控制信号至开关电路3200c，开关电路3200c接收此使能的控制信号进而维持导通以使LED直管灯的电源回路维持导通，其间集成控制模块3320不再产生脉冲输出。Referring to FIG. 21A again, when the LED straight tube lamp is replaced in the lamp socket, the driving voltage VCC will be provided to the module/circuit in the installation detection module 3000c under the condition that one end of the LED straight tube lamp is powered. The pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 performs a charging operation in response to the driving voltage VCC. After a period of time (this period of time determines the pulse period), the output voltage (herein referred to as the first output voltage) rises from a first low-level voltage to exceed a forward threshold voltage (the voltage value can be defined according to circuit design) ), and output to the input terminal IN1 of the integrated control module 3320 via a path 3311 . After receiving the first output voltage from the input terminal IN1, the integrated control module 3320 outputs an enabled control signal (eg, a high-level voltage) to the switch circuit 3200c and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 through a path 3321 . After the switch circuit 3200c receives the enable control signal, the switch circuit 3200c is turned on so that a power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200c, the path 3201, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 and the The second installation detection terminal TE2) is turned on; and at the same time, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 will turn on the discharge path in response to the enabled control signal to perform the discharge action, and receive the feedback returned by the integrated control module 3320. After a period of time after the enabled control signal (this period of time determines the pulse width), the first output voltage gradually drops back to the first low-level voltage from a voltage level exceeding the forward threshold voltage. Wherein, when the first output voltage drops below a reverse threshold voltage (the voltage value can be defined according to circuit design), the integrated control module 3320 will pull down the enabled control signal to the disable level in response to the first output voltage bit (ie, output a disabled control signal, wherein the disabled control signal is, for example, a low-level voltage), so that the control signal has a signal waveform in the form of a pulse (ie, by the first low-level voltage in the control signal) The bit voltage, the high-level voltage and the second low-level voltage constitute a first pulse signal). The detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 detects a first sampling signal (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on, and provides the first sampling signal to the integrated control module through the input terminal IN2 3320. When the integrated control module 3320 determines that the first sampling signal is greater than or equal to a setting signal (eg, a reference voltage), according to the application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control The module 3320 outputs and maintains the enabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the enabled control signal and maintains conduction to keep the power loop of the LED straight tube light on, during which the integrated control module 3320 is no longer Generate pulse output.
相反地，当集成控制电路3320判定此第一取样信号小于此设定信号时，根据上述本申请的应用原理，表示LED直管灯尚未正确安装于灯座内，因此集成控制电路会输出并维持禁能的控制信号至开关电路3200c，开关电路3200c接收此禁能的控制信号进而维持截止以使LED直管灯的电源回路维持开路。On the contrary, when the integrated control circuit 3320 determines that the first sampling signal is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp has not been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control circuit will output and maintain The disabled control signal is sent to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the disabled control signal and keeps it off to keep the power circuit of the LED straight tube light open.
由于脉冲发生辅助电路3310的放电路径被截止，使得脉冲发生辅助电路3310重新进行充电动作。因此，当上述LED直管灯的电源回路维持开路一段时间后(即脉冲周期时间)，脉冲发生辅助电路3310的第一输出电压再次从第一低准位电压上升至超过顺向阈值电压，并经由路径3311输出至集成控制模块3320的输入端IN1。集成控制模块3320从输入端IN1接收第一输出电压后，会再次将控制信号从禁能准位上拉至使能准位(即，输出使能的控制信号)，并且将使能的控制信号提供至开关电路3200c与脉冲发生辅助电路3310。当开关电路3200c接收此使能的控制信号后，开关电路3200c导通使得LED直管灯的电源回路(至少包括第一安装检测端TE1、开关电路3200c、路径3201、检测判定辅助电路3330与第二安装检测端TE2)也再次导通。在此同时，脉冲发生辅助电路3310会再次反应于使能的控制信号而导通放电路径并进行放电动作，并且在接收由集成控制模块3320所回传的使能的控制信号后的一段时间(此段时间决定脉冲宽度)，第一输出电压从超过顺向阈值电压的电压准位再次逐渐降回第一低准位电压。其中，在第一输出电压下降至低于逆向阈值电压时，集成控制模块3320会反应于第一输出电压而将使能的控制信号下拉至禁能准位，从而使得控制信号具有脉冲形式的信号波形(即，由控制信号中的第三次的低准位电压、第二次的高准位电压与第四次的低准位电压构成一第二脉冲信号)。而检测判定辅助电路3330在LED直管灯的电源回路再次导通时，也再次检测其回路上的一第二取样信号(例如：电压信号)，并且将第二取样信号经由输入端IN2提供给集成控制模块3320。当此第二取样信号大于及/或等于设定信号(例如：一参考电压)时，根据上述本申请的应用原理，表示LED直管灯正确安装于灯座内，因此集成控制模块3320会输出并维持使能的控制信号至开关电路3200c，开关电路3200c接收此使能的控制信号进而维持导通以使LED直管灯的电源回路维持导通，其间集成控制模块3320不再产生脉波输出。Since the discharge path of the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 is cut off, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 performs the charging operation again. Therefore, when the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp is kept open for a period of time (ie, the pulse cycle time), the first output voltage of the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 rises again from the first low-level voltage to exceed the forward threshold voltage, and It is output to the input terminal IN1 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3311 . After receiving the first output voltage from the input terminal IN1, the integrated control module 3320 will pull up the control signal from the disable level to the enable level again (ie, output the enabled control signal), and turn the enabled control signal Provided to the switch circuit 3200c and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310. After the switch circuit 3200c receives the enable control signal, the switch circuit 3200c is turned on so that the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp (at least including the first installation detection terminal TE1, the switch circuit 3200c, the path 3201, the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 and the The two installation detection terminals TE2) are also turned on again. At the same time, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 will turn on the discharge path again in response to the enabled control signal and perform the discharge operation, and after receiving the enabled control signal returned by the integrated control module 3320 for a period of time ( This period of time determines the pulse width), and the first output voltage gradually drops back to the first low-level voltage again from a voltage level exceeding the forward threshold voltage. Wherein, when the first output voltage drops below the reverse threshold voltage, the integrated control module 3320 will pull down the enabled control signal to the disabled level in response to the first output voltage, so that the control signal has a signal in the form of a pulse waveform (ie, a second pulse signal is formed by the third low level voltage, the second high level voltage and the fourth low level voltage in the control signal). The detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 also detects a second sampling signal (eg, a voltage signal) on the loop when the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on again, and provides the second sampling signal to the input terminal IN2 through the input terminal IN2. Integrated Control Module 3320. When the second sampling signal is greater than and/or equal to the setting signal (for example: a reference voltage), according to the above application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control module 3320 will output And maintain the enabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200c, the switch circuit 3200c receives the enabled control signal and maintains conduction to keep the power loop of the LED straight tube light on, during which the integrated control module 3320 no longer generates pulse output. .
当集成控制模块3320判定此第二取样信号小于此设定信号时，根据上述本申请的应用原理，表示LED直管灯仍未正确安装于灯座内，因此集成控制电路会输出并维持禁能的控制信 号至开关电路3200c，开关电路3200c接收此禁能的控制信号进而维持截止以使LED直管灯的电源回路维持开路。在此情况下，避免使用者在LED直管灯尚未正确安装于灯座内时因误触LED直管灯导电部分而触电的问题。When the integrated control module 3320 determines that the second sampling signal is smaller than the setting signal, according to the above application principle of the present application, it means that the LED straight tube lamp is not properly installed in the lamp socket, so the integrated control circuit will output and maintain the disabled The control signal is sent to the switch circuit 3200c, and the switch circuit 3200c receives the disabled control signal and keeps it off to keep the power loop of the LED straight tube light open. In this case, the problem of electric shock due to accidental contact of the conductive part of the LED straight tube light by the user when the LED straight tube light is not properly installed in the lamp socket can be avoided.
底下更具体说明本实施例的安装检测模块的内部电路/模块运作。请同时参见图21B至图21E，当LED直管灯换装于灯座时，一驱动电压VCC经由电阻R21对电容C21进行充电，而当电容C31的电压上升到足以触发脉冲产生单元3322时(即，超过顺向阈值电压)，脉冲产生单元3322的输出会从初始的一第一低准位电压变成一第一高准位电压输出到检测结果锁存单元3323。检测结果锁存单元3323在接收来自脉冲产生单元3322所输出的第一高准位电压后，检测结果锁存单元3323会经由输出端OT输出一第二高准位电压到晶体管M32的基极端以及电阻R33。当晶体管M32的基极端接收来自检测结果锁存单元3323所输出的第二高准位电压后，晶体管M32的集极端与射极端导通，进而使得LED直管灯的电源回路(至少包括第一安装检测端TE1、晶体管M32、电阻R34与第二安装检测端TE2)导通。The operation of the internal circuit/module of the installation detection module of this embodiment will be described in more detail below. 21B to 21E at the same time, when the LED straight tube lamp is replaced in the lamp socket, a driving voltage VCC charges the capacitor C21 through the resistor R21, and when the voltage of the capacitor C31 rises enough to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322 ( That is, when the forward threshold voltage is exceeded), the output of the pulse generating unit 3322 will change from an initial first low-level voltage to a first high-level voltage and output to the detection result latching unit 3323 . After the detection result latching unit 3323 receives the first high-level voltage output from the pulse generating unit 3322, the detection result latching unit 3323 outputs a second high-level voltage to the base terminal of the transistor M32 through the output terminal OT and Resistor R33. When the base terminal of the transistor M32 receives the second high-level voltage output from the detection result latch unit 3323, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M32 are turned on, thereby making the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp (including at least the first The mounting detection terminal TE1, the transistor M32, the resistor R34 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2) are connected.
而在此同时，晶体管M31的基极端经由电阻R33接收输出端OT上的第二高准位电压后，晶体管M31的集极端与射极端导通接地，使得电容C31的电压经由电阻R32对地放电，当电容C31的电压不足以触发脉冲产生单元3322时，脉冲产生单元3322的输出从第一高准位电压降回第一低准位电压(第一次的第一低准位电压、第一高准位电压与第二次的第一低准位电压构成一第一脉冲信号)。而当LED直管灯的电源回路导通时，通过瞬态响应流过LED电源回路中的电容(例如：滤波电路的滤波电容)的电流流经晶体管M32与电阻R34，并在电阻R34上形成一电压信号，此电压信号被提供至输入端IN2，使得检测单元3324可将此电压信号与一参考电压进行比较。At the same time, after the base terminal of the transistor M31 receives the second high-level voltage on the output terminal OT through the resistor R33, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor M31 are connected to ground, so that the voltage of the capacitor C31 is discharged to the ground through the resistor R32 , when the voltage of the capacitor C31 is not enough to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322, the output of the pulse generating unit 3322 drops from the first high-level voltage back to the first low-level voltage (the first low-level voltage of the first time, the first low-level voltage of the first The high-level voltage and the second first low-level voltage constitute a first pulse signal). When the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is turned on, the current flowing through the capacitor in the LED power circuit (for example, the filter capacitor of the filter circuit) through the transient response flows through the transistor M32 and the resistor R34, and forms on the resistor R34. A voltage signal is provided to the input terminal IN2 so that the detection unit 3324 can compare the voltage signal with a reference voltage.
当检测单元3324判定此电压信号大于或等于此参考电压时，检测单元3324输出一第三高准位电压到检测结果锁存单元3323。而当检测单元3324判定电阻R34上的电压信号小于参考电压时，检测单元3324输出一第三低准位电压到检测结果锁存单元3323。When the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, the detection unit 3324 outputs a third high-level voltage to the detection result latch unit 3323 . When the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is lower than the reference voltage, the detection unit 3324 outputs a third low-level voltage to the detection result latch unit 3323 .
其中，检测结果锁存单元3323会锁存检测单元3324所提供的第三高准位电压/第三低准位电压，再将锁存的信号与脉冲产生单元3322所提供的信号进行或逻辑运算，并且根据或逻辑运算的结果决定输出的控制信号为第二高准位电压或第二低准位电压。The detection result latching unit 3323 latches the third high-level voltage/third low-level voltage provided by the detection unit 3324, and then performs an OR logic operation on the latched signal and the signal provided by the pulse generating unit 3322 , and the output control signal is determined to be the second high-level voltage or the second low-level voltage according to the result of the OR logic operation.
更具体地说，当检测单元3324判断电阻R34上的电压信号大于或等于参考电压时，检测结果锁存单元3323会锁存检测单元3324所输出的第三高准位电压，藉以维持输出第二高准位电压至晶体管M32的基极端，进而使得晶体管M32以及LED直管灯的电源回路维持导通。由于检测结果锁存单元3323会输出并维持第二高准位电压，因此晶体管M31亦维持导通接地，进而使得电容C31的电压无法上升到足以触发脉冲产生单元3322。当检测单元3324判断电阻R34上的电压信号小于参考电压时，检测单元3324与脉冲产生单元3322所提供的皆是低 准位电压，因此经过或逻辑运算后，检测结果锁存单元3323会输出并维持第二低准位电压至晶体管M32的基极端，进而使得晶体管M32维持截止以及LED直管灯的电源回路维持开路。然而，由于输出端OT上的控制信号此时是维持在第二低准位电压，因此晶体管M31亦维持在截止状态，待驱动电压VCC再经由电阻R31对电容C31进行充电以重复进行下一次(脉冲)检测。More specifically, when the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, the detection result latch unit 3323 latches the third high-level voltage output by the detection unit 3324, so as to maintain the output of the second voltage. The high-level voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor M32, so that the transistor M32 and the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp are kept on. Since the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs and maintains the second high-level voltage, the transistor M31 is also kept on and grounded, so that the voltage of the capacitor C31 cannot rise enough to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322 . When the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is less than the reference voltage, the detection unit 3324 and the pulse generation unit 3322 both provide low-level voltages. Therefore, after the OR logic operation, the detection result latch unit 3323 will output and The second low level voltage is maintained to the base terminal of the transistor M32, so that the transistor M32 is kept off and the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp is kept open. However, since the control signal on the output terminal OT is maintained at the second low-level voltage at this time, the transistor M31 is also maintained in the off state, and the capacitor C31 is charged through the resistor R31 after the driving voltage VCC to repeat the next time ( pulse) detection.
于此附带一提的是，在本实施例所述的检测模式可以定义为驱动电压VCC已被提供至安装检测模块3000c，但检测单元3324尚未判定电阻R34上的电压信号大于或等于参考电压的期间。于检测模式内，由于检测结果锁存单元3323所输出的控制信号会反复地使晶体管M31导通与截止，使得放电路径周期性的被导通与截止。电容C31会反应于晶体管M31的导通/截止，而周期性的充电与放电。因此，检测结果锁存单元3323会在检测模式内输出具有周期性脉冲波形的控制信号。而当检测单元3324判定电阻R34上的电压信号大于或等于参考电压，或是驱动电压VCC被停止提供时，可视为检测模式结束(已判定正确安装，或是LED灯管已被拔除)。此时检测结果锁存单元3323会输出维持在第二高准位电压或第二低准位电压的控制信号。Incidentally, the detection mode described in this embodiment can be defined as the driving voltage VCC has been supplied to the installation detection module 3000c, but the detection unit 3324 has not yet determined that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage. period. In the detection mode, since the control signal output by the detection result latch unit 3323 will repeatedly turn on and off the transistor M31, the discharge path is periodically turned on and off. The capacitor C31 is periodically charged and discharged in response to the on/off of the transistor M31. Therefore, the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs a control signal with a periodic pulse waveform in the detection mode. When the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, or the driving voltage VCC is stopped, the detection mode can be regarded as ending (it has been determined that the installation is correct, or the LED tube has been removed). At this time, the detection result latch unit 3323 outputs a control signal maintained at the second high-level voltage or the second low-level voltage.
另一方面，比对图20A来看，本实施例的集成控制模块3320可以是将检测脉冲发生模块3210、检测结果锁存电路3220以及检测判定电路3230的部分电路组件集成化所构成，而未被集成化的电路组件则分别构成本实施例的脉冲发生辅助电路3310与检测判定辅助电路3330。换言之，集成控制模块3320中的脉冲产生单元3322搭配脉冲发生辅助电路3310的功能/电路架构可等同于第二较佳实施例的检测脉冲发生模块3210，集成控制模块3320中的检测结果锁存单元3323的功能/电路架构可等同于第二较佳实施例的检测结果锁存模块3220，以及集成控制模块3320中的检测单元3324搭配检测判定辅助电路3330的功能/电路架构可等同于检测判定电路3230。On the other hand, compared to FIG. 20A , the integrated control module 3320 of this embodiment may be formed by integrating some circuit components of the detection pulse generation module 3210 , the detection result latch circuit 3220 and the detection determination circuit 3230 , instead of The integrated circuit components constitute the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 in this embodiment, respectively. In other words, the function/circuit structure of the pulse generation unit 3322 in the integrated control module 3320 and the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 can be equivalent to the detection pulse generation module 3210 of the second preferred embodiment, and the detection result latching unit in the integrated control module 3320 The function/circuit structure of 3323 can be equivalent to the detection result latching module 3220 of the second preferred embodiment, and the function/circuit structure of the detection unit 3324 in the integrated control module 3320 and the detection and determination auxiliary circuit 3330 can be equivalent to the detection and determination circuit 3230.
请参见图22A，图22A是本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的安装检测模块可例如为包含有电源端VP1、第一切换端SP1以及第二切换端SP2的一三端开关器件3000d。其中，三端开关器件3000d的电源端VP1适于接收驱动电压VCC，第一切换端SP1适于连接第一安装检测端TE1与第二安装检测端TE2其中之一(于图式是绘示为连接第一安装检测端TE1，但不仅限于此)，并且第二切换端SP2适于连接第一安装检测端TE1与第二安装检测端TE2其中之另一(于图式是绘示为连接第二安装检测端TE2，但不仅限于此)。Please refer to FIG. 22A . FIG. 22A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module of this embodiment may be, for example, a three-terminal switch device 3000d including a power terminal VP1, a first switch terminal SP1 and a second switch terminal SP2. The power terminal VP1 of the three-terminal switching device 3000d is suitable for receiving the driving voltage VCC, and the first switching terminal SP1 is suitable for connecting one of the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 (shown as The first installation detection terminal TE1 is connected, but not limited to this), and the second switch terminal SP2 is suitable for connecting the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2. Two install the detection terminal TE2, but not limited to this).
三端开关器件3000d包含有信号处理单元3420、信号产生单元3410、信号采集单元3430以及开关单元3200d。另外，三端开关器件3000d可更包括内部电源检测单元3440。信号处理单元3420可根据信号产生单元3410与信号采集单元3430所提供的信号，而在检测模式输出具有脉冲波形的控制信号，并且在检测模式后输出维持在高电压准位或低电压准位的控制信号，以控制开关单元3200d的导通状态，藉以决定是否导通LED直管灯的电源回路。信号 产生单元3410可在接收到驱动电压VCC时，产生脉冲信号给信号处理单元3420。其中，信号产生单元3410所产生的脉冲信号可以是根据从外部接收的一参考信号所产生，或者由其本身独立产生，本申请不对此加以限制。于此所述的＂外部＂是相对于信号产生单元3410而言，亦即只要是非由信号产生单元3410所产生的参考信号，无论是三端开关器件3000d内其他电路所产生，或是由三端开关器件3000d的外部电路所产生，皆属于此处所述的从外部接收的参考信号。信号采集单元3430可用以取样LED直管灯的电源回路上的电信号，并且根据取样到的信号来检测LED直管灯的安装状态，再将指示检测结果的检测结果信号传给信号处理单元3420进行处理。The three-terminal switching device 3000d includes a signal processing unit 3420, a signal generating unit 3410, a signal collecting unit 3430, and a switching unit 3200d. In addition, the three-terminal switching device 3000d may further include an internal power detection unit 3440 . The signal processing unit 3420 can output a control signal with a pulse waveform in the detection mode according to the signals provided by the signal generation unit 3410 and the signal acquisition unit 3430, and output a control signal maintained at a high voltage level or a low voltage level after the detection mode. The control signal is used to control the conduction state of the switch unit 3200d, so as to determine whether to turn on the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp. The signal generating unit 3410 can generate a pulse signal to the signal processing unit 3420 when receiving the driving voltage VCC. Wherein, the pulse signal generated by the signal generating unit 3410 may be generated according to a reference signal received from the outside, or independently generated by itself, which is not limited in this application. The "external" mentioned here is relative to the signal generating unit 3410, that is, as long as the reference signal is not generated by the signal generating unit 3410, whether it is generated by other circuits in the three-terminal switching device 3000d, or generated by the three-terminal switching device 3000d. The reference signals generated by the external circuit of the end switch device 3000d belong to the reference signals received from the outside as described herein. The signal acquisition unit 3430 can be used to sample the electrical signal on the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp, and detect the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp according to the sampled signal, and then transmit the detection result signal indicating the detection result to the signal processing unit 3420 to be processed.
在一范例实施例中，所述三端开关器件3000d可利用集成电路来实现，亦即所述三端开关器件可以是一个三端的开关控制芯片，其可应用在任何类型的双端进电的LED直管灯中，藉以提供防触电保护的功能。另外应注意的是，所述三端开关器件3000d可不限制仅包含有三个脚位/连接端，而是在多个脚位中其中有三个脚位是以上述方式配置，皆属于本实施例所欲保护的范围。In an exemplary embodiment, the three-terminal switching device 3000d can be implemented by an integrated circuit, that is, the three-terminal switching device can be a three-terminal switching control chip, which can be applied to any type of double-terminal feeding. In the LED straight tube lamp, it can provide the function of preventing electric shock. In addition, it should be noted that the three-terminal switch device 3000d is not limited to include only three pins/connecting terminals, but three of the plurality of pins are configured in the above-mentioned manner, all of which belong to this embodiment. scope to be protected.
在一范例实施例中，信号处理单元3420、信号产生单元3410、信号采集单元3430、开关单元3200d以及内部电源检测单元3440可分别以图22B至图22F的电路架构来实现(但不仅限于此)，其中图22B至图22F是本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。底下分就各模块/单元进行说明。In an exemplary embodiment, the signal processing unit 3420 , the signal generation unit 3410 , the signal acquisition unit 3430 , the switch unit 3200d and the internal power detection unit 3440 can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 22B to 22F respectively (but not limited thereto) 22B to 22F are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
请参见图22B，图22B是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的信号处理单元的电路架构示意图。信号处理单元3420包括驱动器DRV、或门OG以及D型触发器DFF。驱动器DRV具有输入端与输出端，驱动器DRV的输出端用以经路径3421连接开关单元3200d，藉以将控制信号提供给开关单元3200d。或门OG具有第一输入端、第二输入端以及输出端。或门OG的第一输入端经路径3411连接信号产生单元3410，并且或门OG的输出端耦接驱动器DRV的输入端。D型触发器DFF具有数据输入端(D)、频率输入端(CK)与输出端(Q)。D型触发器DFF的数据输入端接收驱动电压VCC，D型触发器DFF的频率输入端经路径3431连接至信号采集单元3430，并且D型触发器的输出端耦接或门OG的第二输入端。Please refer to FIG. 22B. FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal processing unit in which a detection module is installed according to a fourth embodiment of the present application. The signal processing unit 3420 includes a driver DRV, an OR gate OG, and a D-type flip-flop DFF. The driver DRV has an input terminal and an output terminal, and the output terminal of the driver DRV is used to connect the switch unit 3200d via the path 3421, so as to provide a control signal to the switch unit 3200d. The OR gate OG has a first input terminal, a second input terminal, and an output terminal. The first input terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the signal generating unit 3410 via the path 3411, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is coupled to the input terminal of the driver DRV. The D-type flip-flop DFF has a data input terminal (D), a frequency input terminal (CK) and an output terminal (Q). The data input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF receives the driving voltage VCC, the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF is connected to the signal acquisition unit 3430 through the path 3431, and the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop is coupled to the second input of the OR gate OG end.
请参见图22C，图22C是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的信号产生单元的电路架构示意图。信号产生单元3410包括电阻R41与R42、电容C41、开关M41以及比较器CP41。电阻R41的一端接收驱动电压VCC，并且电阻R41、电阻R42以及电容C41串接于驱动电压VCC与接地端之间。开关M41与电容C41并联。比较器CP41具有第一输入端、第二输入端以及输出端。比较器CP41的第一输入端耦接电阻R41与R42的连接端，比较器CP41的第二输入端接收一参考电压Vref1，并且比较器CP41的输出端耦接开关M41的控制端。Please refer to FIG. 22C . FIG. 22C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal generating unit of an installation detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application. The signal generating unit 3410 includes resistors R41 and R42, a capacitor C41, a switch M41 and a comparator CP41. One end of the resistor R41 receives the driving voltage VCC, and the resistor R41 , the resistor R42 and the capacitor C41 are connected in series between the driving voltage VCC and the ground terminal. The switch M41 is connected in parallel with the capacitor C41. The comparator CP41 has a first input terminal, a second input terminal, and an output terminal. The first input terminal of the comparator CP41 is coupled to the connection terminals of the resistors R41 and R42, the second input terminal of the comparator CP41 receives a reference voltage Vref1, and the output terminal of the comparator CP41 is coupled to the control terminal of the switch M41.
请参见22D，图22D是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的信号采集单元的电路架 构示意图。信号采集单元3430包括或门OG以及比较器CP42与CP43。或门OG具有第一输入端、第二输入端以及输出端，或门OG的输出端经由路径3431连接至信号处理单元3420。比较器CP42的第一输入端经由路径2962连接至开关单元3200d的一端(即，LED直管灯的电源回路上)，比较器CP42的第二输入端接收一第一参考电压(如1.25V，但不限制于此)，并且比较器CP42的输出端耦接或门OG的第一输入端。比较器CP43的第一输入端接收一第二参考电压(如0.15V，但不限制于此)，比较器CP43的第二输入端耦接比较器CP42的第一输入端，并且比较器CP43的输出端耦接或门OG的第二输入端。Please refer to 22D. FIG. 22D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a signal acquisition unit installed with a detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application. The signal acquisition unit 3430 includes an OR gate OG and comparators CP42 and CP43. The OR gate OG has a first input terminal, a second input terminal and an output terminal, and the output terminal of the OR gate OG is connected to the signal processing unit 3420 via a path 3431 . The first input terminal of the comparator CP42 is connected to one end of the switch unit 3200d (ie, on the power supply loop of the LED straight tube lamp) via the path 2962, and the second input terminal of the comparator CP42 receives a first reference voltage (eg 1.25V, But not limited thereto), and the output terminal of the comparator CP42 is coupled to the first input terminal of the OR gate OG. The first input terminal of the comparator CP43 receives a second reference voltage (such as 0.15V, but not limited thereto), the second input terminal of the comparator CP43 is coupled to the first input terminal of the comparator CP42, and the The output terminal is coupled to the second input terminal of the OR gate OG.
请参见22E，图22E是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的开关单元的电路架构示意图。开关单元3200d包括晶体管M42，其具有闸极端、汲极端与源极端。晶体管M42的闸极端经由路径3421连接至信号处理单元3420，晶体管M42的汲极端经由路径3201连接至第一切换端SP1，并且晶体管M42的源极端经由路径3202连接至第二切换端SP2、比较器CP42的第一输入端以及比较器CP43的第二输入端。Please refer to 22E. FIG. 22E is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a switch unit installed with a detection module according to a fourth embodiment of the present application. The switch unit 3200d includes a transistor M42 having a gate terminal, a drain terminal and a source terminal. The gate terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the signal processing unit 3420 via the path 3421, the drain terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the first switching terminal SP1 via the path 3201, and the source terminal of the transistor M42 is connected to the second switching terminal SP2 and the comparator via the path 3202. The first input of CP42 and the second input of comparator CP43.
请参见22F，图22F是根据本申请第四实施例的安装检测模块的内部电源检测单元的电路方块示意图。内部电源检测单元3440包括箝位电路3442、参考电压产生电路3443、电压调整电路3444以及施密特触发器STRG。箝位电路3442与电压调整电路3444分别耦接电源端VP1，以接收驱动电压VCC，藉以分别对驱动电压VCC进行电压箝位与电压调整的动作。参考电压产生电路3443耦接电压调整电路，用以产生一参考电压给电压调整电路3444。施密特触发器STRG具有输入端与输出端，其输入端耦接箝位电路3442与电压调整电路3444，且其输出端输出驱动电压用以指示驱动电压VCC是否正常供应的一电源确认信号。其中，若驱动电压VCC处于正常供应的状态，施密特触发器STRG会输出使能的(例如高准位)电源确认信号，使得驱动电压VCC被提供至三端开关器件3000d内的各组件/电路。相反地，若驱动电压VCC处于异常的状态，施密特触发器STRG会输出禁能的(例如低准位)电源确认信号，藉以避免三端开关器件3000d内的各组件/电路因工作在异常的驱动电压VCC下而损毁。Please refer to 22F, FIG. 22F is a schematic circuit block diagram of the internal power detection unit of the installation detection module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. The internal power detection unit 3440 includes a clamping circuit 3442, a reference voltage generating circuit 3443, a voltage adjusting circuit 3444, and a Schmitt trigger STRG. The clamping circuit 3442 and the voltage adjusting circuit 3444 are respectively coupled to the power terminal VP1 to receive the driving voltage VCC, so as to perform voltage clamping and voltage adjustment on the driving voltage VCC, respectively. The reference voltage generating circuit 3443 is coupled to the voltage adjusting circuit for generating a reference voltage for the voltage adjusting circuit 3444 . The Schmitt trigger STRG has an input terminal and an output terminal. The input terminal is coupled to the clamping circuit 3442 and the voltage adjustment circuit 3444, and the output terminal outputs the driving voltage to indicate whether the driving voltage VCC is normally supplied. A power confirmation signal. Wherein, if the driving voltage VCC is in a normal supply state, the Schmitt trigger STRG will output an enabled (eg high level) power supply confirmation signal, so that the driving voltage VCC is supplied to the components/components in the three-terminal switching device 3000d. circuit. On the contrary, if the driving voltage VCC is in an abnormal state, the Schmitt trigger STRG will output a disabled (eg, low level) power confirmation signal, so as to prevent the components/circuits in the three-terminal switching device 3000d from working abnormally damaged under the driving voltage VCC.
请同时参照图22A至图22F，在本实施例具体电路运作中，当LED直管灯换装于灯座时，驱动电压VCC会经由电源端VP1被提供给三端开关器件3000d。此时，驱动电压VCC会经由电阻R41与R42对电容C41充电。而当电容电压上升至超过参考电压Vref1时，比较器CP41会切换为输出高准位电压给或门OG的第一输入端与开关M41的控制端。其中，开关M41会反应于此高准位电压而导通，使得电容C41开始对地放电。透过此充放电的过程，比较器CP41会输出具有脉冲形式的输出信号。22A to 22F at the same time, in the specific circuit operation of this embodiment, when the LED straight tube lamp is replaced in the lamp socket, the driving voltage VCC will be provided to the three-terminal switching device 3000d through the power terminal VP1. At this time, the driving voltage VCC will charge the capacitor C41 through the resistors R41 and R42. When the capacitor voltage rises to exceed the reference voltage Vref1, the comparator CP41 switches to output a high-level voltage to the first input terminal of the OR gate OG and the control terminal of the switch M41. The switch M41 is turned on in response to the high-level voltage, so that the capacitor C41 starts to discharge to the ground. Through this charging and discharging process, the comparator CP41 outputs an output signal in the form of a pulse.
另一方面，在比较器CP41输出高准位电压的期间，或门OG会对应的输出高准位电压来导通晶体M42，使得电流在LED直管灯的电源回路上流通。其中，当有电流在电源回路流通时，会在路径3202上建立对应电流大小的电压信号。比较器CP42会取样此电压信号并且与第一参考电压(如1.25V)进行比较。On the other hand, during the period when the comparator CP41 outputs a high-level voltage, the OR gate OG will output a corresponding high-level voltage to turn on the transistor M42, so that the current flows on the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp. Wherein, when a current flows in the power loop, a voltage signal corresponding to the magnitude of the current is established on the path 3202 . The comparator CP42 samples the voltage signal and compares it with a first reference voltage (eg, 1.25V).
当取样到的电压信号大于第一参考电压(如1.25V)时，比较器CP42会输出高准位电压。或门OG会反应于比较器CP42所输出的高准位电压而产生另一高准位电压至D型触发器DFF的频率输入端。D型触发器DFF会基于或门OG的输出而维持输出高准位电压。驱动器DRV会反应于输入端上的高准位电压而产生使能的控制信号来导通晶体管M42。此时，即使电容C41已经放电至电容电压低于参考电压Vref1，而使比较器CP41的输出下拉至低准位电压，由于D型触发器DFF会维持输出高准位电压，因此晶体管M42可被维持在导通的状态。When the sampled voltage signal is greater than the first reference voltage (eg, 1.25V), the comparator CP42 will output a high-level voltage. The OR gate OG will generate another high-level voltage to the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF in response to the high-level voltage output by the comparator CP42. The D-type flip-flop DFF maintains the output high level voltage based on the output of the OR gate OG. The driver DRV generates an enable control signal to turn on the transistor M42 in response to the high level voltage on the input terminal. At this time, even if the capacitor C41 has been discharged until the capacitor voltage is lower than the reference voltage Vref1, and the output of the comparator CP41 is pulled down to a low-level voltage, since the D-type flip-flop DFF will maintain the output high-level voltage, the transistor M42 can be remain on.
当取样到的电压信号小于第一参考电压(如1.25V)时，比较器CP42会输出低准位电压。或门OG会反应于比较器CP42所输出的低准位电压而产生另一低准位电压至D型触发器DFF的频率输入端。D型触发器DFF会基于或门OG的输出而维持输出低准位电压。此时，一旦电容C41放电至电容电压低于参考电压Vref1，而使比较器CP41的输出下拉至低准位电压(即，脉冲期间结束时)，由于或门OG的两输入端皆是维持在低准位电压，使得输出端也输出低准位电压，因此驱动器DRV会反应于接收到的低准位电压产生禁能的控制信号来截止晶体管M42，使得LED直管灯的电源回路被关断。When the sampled voltage signal is less than the first reference voltage (eg 1.25V), the comparator CP42 will output a low level voltage. The OR gate OG will generate another low-level voltage to the frequency input terminal of the D-type flip-flop DFF in response to the low-level voltage output by the comparator CP42. The D-type flip-flop DFF maintains the output low level voltage based on the output of the OR gate OG. At this time, once the capacitor C41 is discharged until the capacitor voltage is lower than the reference voltage Vref1, the output of the comparator CP41 is pulled down to a low level voltage (ie, when the pulse period ends), since the two input terminals of the OR gate OG are both maintained at The low-level voltage causes the output terminal to also output a low-level voltage, so the driver DRV will generate a disable control signal in response to the received low-level voltage to turn off the transistor M42, so that the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp is turned off. .
由上述说明可知，本实施例的信号处理单元3420的运作类似于前述第二较佳实施例的检测结果锁存电路3220，信号产生单元3410的运作类似于前述第二较佳实施例的检测脉冲发生模块3210，信号采集单元3430的运作类似于前述第二较佳实施例的检测判定电路3230，以及开关单元3200d的运作类似于前述第二较佳实施例的开关电路3200b。As can be seen from the above description, the operation of the signal processing unit 3420 of this embodiment is similar to the detection result latch circuit 3220 of the second preferred embodiment, and the operation of the signal generating unit 3410 is similar to the detection pulse of the second preferred embodiment. The operation of the generation module 3210, the signal acquisition unit 3430 is similar to the detection and determination circuit 3230 of the second preferred embodiment, and the operation of the switch unit 3200d is similar to the operation of the switch circuit 3200b of the second preferred embodiment.
请参见图23A，图23A是本申请第五实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块3000e包含检测脉冲发生模块3510、控制电路3520、检测判定电路3530、开关电路3200e以及检测路径电路3560。检测判定电路3530经路径3561耦接检测路径电路3560，以检测检测路径电路3560上的信号。检测判定电路3530同时经路径3531耦接控制电路3520，以将检测结果信号经路径3531传送至控制电路3520。检测脉冲发生模块3510通过路径3511耦接检测路径电路3560，并产生脉冲信号以通知检测路径电路3560导通检测路径或执行检测动作的时机点。控制电路3520根据检测结果信号锁存检测结果，经路径3521耦接开关电路3200e，以将检测结果传送或反映至开关电路3200e。开关电路3200e根据检测结果，决定使第一安装检测端TE1以及第二安装检测端TE2之间导通或截止。检测路径电路3560经由第一检测连接端DE1与第二检测连接端DE2耦接至电源模块的电源回路上。Please refer to FIG. 23A. FIG. 23A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fifth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 3000e includes a detection pulse generation module 3510, a control circuit 3520, a detection determination circuit 3530, a switch circuit 3200e, and a detection path circuit 3560. The detection determination circuit 3530 is coupled to the detection path circuit 3560 via the path 3561 to detect the signal on the detection path circuit 3560 . The detection and determination circuit 3530 is also coupled to the control circuit 3520 via the path 3531 to transmit the detection result signal to the control circuit 3520 via the path 3531 . The detection pulse generating module 3510 is coupled to the detection path circuit 3560 through the path 3511, and generates a pulse signal to notify the detection path circuit 3560 of the timing point of turning on the detection path or performing the detection operation. The control circuit 3520 latches the detection result according to the detection result signal, and is coupled to the switch circuit 3200e via the path 3521 to transmit or reflect the detection result to the switch circuit 3200e. The switch circuit 3200e determines to turn on or off the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2 according to the detection result. The detection path circuit 3560 is coupled to the power loop of the power module via the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2.
在本实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3510的配置可以参考图19B的检测脉冲发生模块3110或图20B的检测脉冲发生模块3210。请参照图19B，在应用检测脉冲发生模块3110的架构作为检测脉冲发生模块3510时，本实施例的路径3511可比对为脉冲信号输出端3111，亦即或门OG1可透过路径3511连接至检测路径电路3560。请参照图20B，在应用检测脉冲发生模块3210的架构作为检测脉冲发生模块3510时，本实施例的路径3511可比对为路径3311。此外，检测脉冲发生模块3510还会通过路径3521连接至控制电路3520的输出端，因此本实施例的 路径3521可比对为路径3321。In this embodiment, the configuration of the detection pulse generation module 3510 may refer to the detection pulse generation module 3110 of FIG. 19B or the detection pulse generation module 3210 of FIG. 20B . Referring to FIG. 19B , when the structure of the detection pulse generation module 3110 is used as the detection pulse generation module 3510 , the path 3511 in this embodiment can be compared to the pulse signal output terminal 3111 , that is, the OR gate OG1 can be connected to the detection pulse through the path 3511 Path circuit 3560. Referring to FIG. 20B , when the structure of the detection pulse generation module 3210 is applied as the detection pulse generation module 3510 , the path 3511 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3311 . In addition, the detection pulse generating module 3510 is also connected to the output end of the control circuit 3520 through the path 3521, so the path 3521 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3321.
控制电路3520可以利用控制芯片或任何具有信号运算处理能力的电路来实施。当控制电路3520依据检测结果信号判断用户未接触灯管时，控制电路3520会控制开关电路3200e的切换状态，以令外部电源可以在灯管正确安装在灯座上时，正常地被提供给后端的LED模块。此时，控制电路3520会截止检测路径。相反地，当控制电路3520依据检测结果信号判断用户接触灯管时，因为使用者会有触电的风险，因此控制电路3520会将开关电路3200e维持在截止的状态。The control circuit 3520 can be implemented by using a control chip or any circuit with signal operation processing capability. When the control circuit 3520 determines that the user has not touched the lamp according to the detection result signal, the control circuit 3520 controls the switching state of the switch circuit 3200e, so that the external power can be normally supplied to the rear when the lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket. end of the LED module. At this time, the control circuit 3520 turns off the detection path. On the contrary, when the control circuit 3520 determines that the user touches the lamp according to the detection result signal, the control circuit 3520 maintains the switch circuit 3200e in an off state because the user may be at risk of electric shock.
检测判定电路3530的配置可以参考图19C的检测判定电路3130或图20C的检测判定电路3230。请参照图19C，在应用检测判定电路3130的架构作为检测判定电路3530时，电阻R14可被省略。本实施例的路径3561可以比对为开关耦接端3201，亦即比较器CP11的正输入端会连接至检测路径电路3560。本实施例的路径3531可以比对为检测结果端3131，亦即比较器CP11的输出端会连接至控制电路3520。请参照图20C，在应用检测判定电路3230的架构作为检测判定电路3530时，电阻R24可被省略。本实施例的路径3561可以比对为路径3201，亦即二极管D21的阳极会连接至检测路径电路3560。本实施例的路径3531可以比对为路径3331，亦即比较器CP21与CP22的输出端会连接至控制电路3520。The configuration of the detection determination circuit 3530 may refer to the detection determination circuit 3130 of FIG. 19C or the detection determination circuit 3230 of FIG. 20C . Referring to FIG. 19C , when the structure of the detection and determination circuit 3130 is used as the detection and determination circuit 3530 , the resistor R14 can be omitted. The path 3561 in this embodiment can be compared to the switch coupling terminal 3201 , that is, the positive input terminal of the comparator CP11 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 . The path 3531 in this embodiment can be compared to the detection result terminal 3131 , that is, the output terminal of the comparator CP11 is connected to the control circuit 3520 . Referring to FIG. 20C , when the structure of the detection and determination circuit 3230 is used as the detection and determination circuit 3530 , the resistor R24 can be omitted. The path 3561 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3201 , that is, the anode of the diode D21 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 . The path 3531 in this embodiment can be compared to the path 3331 , that is, the outputs of the comparators CP21 and CP22 are connected to the control circuit 3520 .
开关电路3200e的配置可以参考图19E的开关电路3200a、图19F的开关电路3200a或图20E的开关电路3200b。由于两开关电路的架构类似，以图19E的开关电路3200a代表说明。请参照图19E，在应用开关电路3200a的架构作为开关电路3200e时，本实施例的路径3521可比对为路径检测结果锁存端3121，并且开关耦接端3201不会连接至检测判定电路3130，而是直接连接至第二安装检测端TE2。The configuration of the switch circuit 3200e may refer to the switch circuit 3200a of FIG. 19E , the switch circuit 3200a of FIG. 19F , or the switch circuit 3200b of FIG. 20E . Since the structures of the two switch circuits are similar, the switch circuit 3200a in FIG. 19E is used as a representative for illustration. Referring to FIG. 19E, when the structure of the switch circuit 3200a is used as the switch circuit 3200e, the path 3521 of this embodiment can be compared to the path detection result latch terminal 3121, and the switch coupling terminal 3201 is not connected to the detection and determination circuit 3130, Instead, it is directly connected to the second installation detection terminal TE2.
检测路径电路3560的配置可如图23B、图23C或图23D所示，图23B、图23C及图23D为根据本申请不同实施例的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图。The configuration of the detection path circuit 3560 may be as shown in FIG. 23B , FIG. 23C or FIG. 23D . FIGS. 23B , 23C and 23D are schematic diagrams of circuit structures of the detection path circuit according to different embodiments of the present application.
请先参照图23B，图23B是本申请第一实施例的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图。检测路径电路3560a包括晶体管M51以及电阻R51与R52。晶体管M51具有基极、集极与射极，射极经由路径3511连接检测脉冲发生模块3510。电阻R52的第一端连接晶体管M51的射极，并且其第二端作为第二检测连接端DE2连接至接地端GND，亦即电阻R52串接于晶体管M51的射极与接地端GND之间。电阻R51的第一端作为第一检测连接端DE1连接至第一安装侦测端2521上，并且在此第一安装侦测端TE1是以连接至第二整流输出端512为例，亦即电阻R51串接在晶体管M51的集极与第一整流输出端511之间。就检测路径的配置而言，本实施例的检测路径等效于配置在整流输出端与接地端GND之间。Please refer to FIG. 23B first. FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application. The detection path circuit 3560a includes a transistor M51 and resistors R51 and R52. The transistor M51 has a base, a collector and an emitter, and the emitter is connected to the detection pulse generating module 3510 via the path 3511 . The first end of the resistor R52 is connected to the emitter of the transistor M51, and the second end of the resistor R52 is connected to the ground terminal GND as the second detection connection terminal DE2, that is, the resistor R52 is connected in series between the emitter of the transistor M51 and the ground terminal GND. The first terminal of the resistor R51 is connected to the first installation detection terminal 2521 as the first detection connection terminal DE1, and the first installation detection terminal TE1 is connected to the second rectifier output terminal 512 as an example, that is, the resistance The R51 is connected in series between the collector of the transistor M51 and the first rectifier output terminal 511 . As far as the configuration of the detection path is concerned, the detection path of this embodiment is equivalent to the configuration between the rectification output terminal and the ground terminal GND.
在本实施例中，当晶体管M51接收到检测脉冲发生模块3510所提供的脉冲信号时(检测模式)，其会在脉冲期间内导通。在灯管至少一端安装至灯座的情况下，从第一安装检测端 TE1至接地端GND的一检测路径(经过电阻R51、晶体管M51及电阻R52)会反应于导通的晶体管M51而随之导通，并且在检测路径的节点X上建立一电压信号。在使用者没有接触灯管/灯管正确安装至灯座时，所述电压信号的准位是根据电阻R51与R52的分压而决定。在使用者接触灯管时，人体的等效电阻会等效为串接于第二检测连接端DE2与接地端GND之间，亦即与电阻R51、R52串联。此时所述电压信号的准位是根据电阻R51、R52及人体的等效电阻所决定。藉此，透过设置具有合适的电阻值的电阻R51与R52，即可使得节点X上的电压信号可以反应出用户是否触碰灯管的状态，使得检测判定电路3530可根据节点X上的电压信号产生对应的检测结果信号。另外，所述晶体管M51除了会在检测模式短暂导通之外，在控制电路3520判定灯管已被正确安装至灯座的情况下，晶体管M51会维持在截止的状态，使得电源模块可以正常的运作以对LED模块供电。In this embodiment, when the transistor M51 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3510 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period. When at least one end of the lamp tube is mounted on the lamp socket, a detection path from the first installation detection terminal TE1 to the ground terminal GND (via the resistor R51, the transistor M51 and the resistor R52) will respond to the turned-on transistor M51 and follow is turned on and a voltage signal is established on node X of the detection path. When the user does not touch the lamp tube/the lamp tube is correctly installed on the lamp socket, the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the voltage division of the resistors R51 and R52. When the user touches the lamp, the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalently connected in series between the second detection connection terminal DE2 and the ground terminal GND, that is, in series with the resistors R51 and R52. At this time, the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the resistors R51 and R52 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistors R51 and R52 with appropriate resistance values, the voltage signal on the node X can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit 3530 can be based on the voltage on the node X. The signal generates a corresponding detection result signal. In addition, in addition to the transistor M51 being temporarily turned on in the detection mode, when the control circuit 3520 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the transistor M51 will remain in the off state, so that the power module can operate normally. Operates to power the LED module.
请参照图23C，图23C是本申请第二实施例的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图。本实施例的检测路径电路3560b包括晶体管M52以及电阻R53与R54，其配置与运作大致上和前述实施例的检测路径电路3560a相同，其主要差异在于本实施例的检测路径电路3560b是设置在第一整流输出端511与第二整流输出端512之间。亦即，电阻R53的第一端(第一检测连接端DE1)会连接至第一整流输出端511，并且电阻R54的第二端(第二检测连接端DE2)会连接至第二整流输出端512。Please refer to FIG. 23C . FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. The detection path circuit 3560b of this embodiment includes a transistor M52 and resistors R53 and R54, and its configuration and operation are substantially the same as the detection path circuit 3560a of the previous embodiment. The main difference is that the detection path circuit 3560b of this embodiment is arranged in the first Between a rectifier output terminal 511 and a second rectifier output terminal 512 . That is, the first terminal of the resistor R53 (the first detection connection terminal DE1 ) is connected to the first rectification output terminal 511 , and the second terminal of the resistor R54 (the second detection connection terminal DE2 ) is connected to the second rectified output terminal 512.
在本实施例中，当晶体管M52接收到检测脉冲发生模块3510所提供的脉冲信号时(检测模式)，其会在脉冲期间内导通。在灯管至少一端安装至灯座的情况下，从第一整流输出端511至第二整流输出端512的一检测路径(经过电阻R53、晶体管M52及电阻R54)会反应于导通的晶体管M52而随之导通，并且在检测路径的节点X上建立一电压信号。在使用者没有接触灯管/灯管正确安装至灯座时，所述电压信号的准位是根据电阻R53与R54的分压而决定，此时第二检测连接端DE2与接地端GND等电平。在使用者接触灯管时，人体的等效电阻会等效为串接于电阻R54的第二端/第二检测连接端DE2与接地端GND之间，亦即与电阻R53、R54串联。此时所述电压信号的准位是根据电阻R51、R52及人体的等效电阻所决定。藉此，透过设置具有合适的电阻值的电阻R51与R52，即可使得节点X上的电压信号可以反应出用户是否触碰灯管的状态，使得检测判定电路可根据节点X上的电压信号产生对应的检测结果信号。另外，所述晶体管M52除了会在检测模式短暂导通之外，在控制电路3520判定灯管已被正确安装至灯座的情况下，晶体管M52会维持在截止的状态，使得电源模块可以正常的运作以对LED模块供电。In this embodiment, when the transistor M52 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3510 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period. When at least one end of the lamp tube is mounted on the lamp socket, a detection path from the first rectifier output terminal 511 to the second rectifier output terminal 512 (via the resistor R53 , the transistor M52 and the resistor R54 ) will respond to the turned-on transistor M52 It is then turned on, and a voltage signal is established on node X of the detection path. When the user does not touch the lamp tube / the lamp tube is correctly installed on the lamp socket, the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the voltage division of the resistors R53 and R54. At this time, the second detection connection terminal DE2 and the ground terminal GND are electrically connected. flat. When the user touches the lamp, the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalent to being connected in series between the second terminal/second detection connection terminal DE2 of the resistor R54 and the ground terminal GND, that is, in series with the resistors R53 and R54. At this time, the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the resistors R51 and R52 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistors R51 and R52 with appropriate resistance values, the voltage signal on the node X can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit can be based on the voltage signal on the node X. A corresponding detection result signal is generated. In addition, in addition to the transistor M52 being temporarily turned on in the detection mode, when the control circuit 3520 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the transistor M52 will remain in the off state, so that the power module can operate normally. Operates to power the LED module.
请参照图23D，图23D是本申请第三实施例的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图。本实施例的检测路径电路3560c的配置与运作大致上和前述实施例相同，其主要差异在于本实施例的检测路径电路3560c还包括有设置在电源回路上的限流组件D51。所述限流组件D51是以设置在第一整流输出端511与滤波电路520的输入端(即，电容725与电感726的连接端)的 二极管为例(下称，二极管D51)，在此滤波电路520是绘示以π型滤波电路为例，但本申请不以此为限。在本实施例中，二极管D51的加入可以限制主电源回路上的电流方向，藉以避免充电后的电容725在晶体管M51导通时逆向对检测路径放电，进而影响防触电检测的准确性。于此应注意的是，所述二极管D51的配置仅是限流组件的一实施例，在其他应用中，只要可以设置在电源回路上并且起到限制电流方向作用的电子组件皆可实施于此，本申请不以此为限。Please refer to FIG. 23D. FIG. 23D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit according to the third embodiment of the present application. The configuration and operation of the detection path circuit 3560c of this embodiment are substantially the same as those of the previous embodiments, the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3560c of this embodiment further includes a current limiting component D51 disposed on the power loop. The current limiting component D51 is an example of a diode (hereinafter referred to as diode D51 ) disposed at the first rectifier output end 511 and the input end of the filter circuit 520 (ie, the connection end of the capacitor 725 and the inductor 726 ). The circuit 520 is shown as an example of a π-type filter circuit, but the present application is not limited to this. In this embodiment, the addition of the diode D51 can limit the direction of the current on the main power circuit, so as to prevent the charged capacitor 725 from discharging the detection path in reverse when the transistor M51 is turned on, thereby affecting the accuracy of the anti-electric shock detection. It should be noted here that the configuration of the diode D51 is only an example of a current limiting component, and in other applications, as long as the electronic components that can be arranged on the power circuit and play a role in limiting the current direction can be implemented here , this application is not limited to this.
综上所述，本实施例可以透过导通检测路径并检测检测路径上的电压信号以判断用户是否有触电风险。此外，相较于前述实施例而言，本实施例的检测路径是额外建立，而非是利用电源回路作为检测路径(亦即，电源回路与检测路径至少有部分不重叠)。由于额外建立的检测路径上的电子组件少于电源回路上的电子组件，因此额外建立的检测路径上的电压信号可以较为精确的反应出使用者的触碰状态。To sum up, in this embodiment, whether the user is at risk of electric shock can be determined by conducting the detection path and detecting the voltage signal on the detection path. In addition, compared with the foregoing embodiments, the detection path of this embodiment is additionally established instead of using the power loop as the detection path (ie, the power loop and the detection path do not overlap at least in part). Since the electronic components on the additionally established detection path are less than those on the power circuit, the voltage signal on the additionally established detection path can more accurately reflect the user's touch state.
再者，类似于前述实施例所述，本实施例所述的电路/模块也可以部分或全部的集成为芯片的配置，如前述图21A至图22F所示，故于此不再赘述。Furthermore, similar to the foregoing embodiments, the circuits/modules described in this embodiment may also be partially or fully integrated into a chip configuration, as shown in the foregoing FIGS.
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块3000e可以在LED直管灯正常点亮的状态下进一步提供频闪抑制的功能。在此架构下，如图23A所示，安装检测模块3000e可更包括纹波检测电路3580。此外，在此架构下，开关电路3200e会设置为与LED模块串接(例如，安装检测端TE1/TE2其中之一会电性连接LED模块的阴极，并且其中另一会电性连接接地端)。In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000e can further provide the function of stroboscopic suppression when the LED straight tube lamp is normally lit. Under this structure, as shown in FIG. 23A , the installation detection module 3000e may further include a ripple detection circuit 3580 . In addition, in this structure, the switch circuit 3200e is configured to be connected in series with the LED module (for example, one of the installation detection terminals TE1/TE2 is electrically connected to the cathode of the LED module, and the other is electrically connected to the ground terminal). .
在带有频闪抑制功能的安装检测模块3000e中，检测脉冲发生模块3510、控制电路3520、检测判定电路3530、检测路径电路3560以及开关电路3200e在检测模式下的电路动作与前述相同，并且控制电路3520在检测模式下不会响应纹波检测电路3580所输出的信号而改变其运作状态/信号输出状态。In the installation detection module 3000e with the flicker suppression function, the circuit operations of the detection pulse generation module 3510, the control circuit 3520, the detection determination circuit 3530, the detection path circuit 3560 and the switch circuit 3200e in the detection mode are the same as those described above, and control The circuit 3520 does not change its operating state/signal output state in response to the signal output by the ripple detection circuit 3580 in the detection mode.
当LED直管灯进入工作模式后，纹波检测电路3580会检测安装检测端TE2上的电压并且产生相应的信号并传输给控制电路3520。控制电路3520会改为依据从纹波检测电路3580接收到的信号而将开关电路3200e控制在线性区内工作，使得开关电路3200e在两安装检测端TE1和TE2间的等效阻抗随着纹波检测电路3580所检测到的电压大小而变化，藉以实现维持亮度稳定并且抑制频闪的效果。When the LED straight tube lamp enters the working mode, the ripple detection circuit 3580 will detect the voltage on the installation detection terminal TE2 and generate a corresponding signal and transmit it to the control circuit 3520 . The control circuit 3520 will instead control the switch circuit 3200e to operate in the linear region according to the signal received from the ripple detection circuit 3580, so that the equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e between the two installation detection terminals TE1 and TE2 increases with the ripple. The magnitude of the voltage detected by the detection circuit 3580 changes, so as to achieve the effect of maintaining stable brightness and suppressing flicker.
底下以图23E实施例来进一步说明带有频闪抑制功能的安装检测模块的电路动作，图23E是本申请第一实施例的具有频闪抑制功能的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。请参照图23E，在此安装检测模块是仅绘示与频闪抑制功能有关的模块/电路进行说明，具体模块配置可搭配参照上述图23A-23D实施例。The circuit operation of the installation detection module with stroboscopic suppression function is further described below with reference to the embodiment of FIG. 23E . FIG. 23E is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module with stroboscopic suppression function according to the first embodiment of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 23E , where the detection module is installed here, only the modules/circuits related to the stroboscopic suppression function are shown for illustration, and the specific module configuration can refer to the above-mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 23A-23D .
在本实施例中，开关电路3200e包括晶体管M53，其中晶体管M53可例如是N型MOSFET，但本揭露不以此为限。晶体管M53的第一端(例如漏极)耦接LED模块50的阴极，并且晶体 管M53的第二端(例如源极)经由电阻R55耦接第二驱动输出端532。换言之，晶体管M53是串接在LED模块50的阴极和接地端之间。In this embodiment, the switch circuit 3200e includes a transistor M53, wherein the transistor M53 may be, for example, an N-type MOSFET, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. The first terminal (eg, the drain) of the transistor M53 is coupled to the cathode of the LED module 50, and the second terminal (eg, the source) of the transistor M53 is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 via the resistor R55. In other words, the transistor M53 is connected in series between the cathode of the LED module 50 and the ground terminal.
在LED直管灯进入工作模式后，纹波检测电路3580会检测晶体管M53的第二端上的电压，并且产生相应的纹波检测信号传输给控制电路3520。控制电路3520此时会输出相应的信号使开关电路3200e的等效阻抗变化与纹波检测电路3580检测到的电压大小呈正相关。举例来说，当纹波检测电路3580检测到的电压越大时，控制电路3520会输出相应的信号使开关电路3200e具有越高的等效阻抗；相反地，当纹波检测电路3580检测到的电压越小时，控制电路3520会输出相应的信号使开关电路3200e具有越低的等效阻抗。因此，原本因为电压波动所产生的纹波电流可以视为是被开关电路3200e的等效阻抗所吸收，使得通过LED模块50的电流可以实质上的维持在一个相对稳定的范围内，进而实现频闪抑制的效果。After the LED straight tube lamp enters the working mode, the ripple detection circuit 3580 detects the voltage on the second end of the transistor M53, and generates a corresponding ripple detection signal to transmit to the control circuit 3520. At this time, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal so that the equivalent impedance change of the switch circuit 3200e is positively correlated with the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 . For example, when the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 is larger, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal to make the switch circuit 3200e have a higher equivalent impedance; on the contrary, when the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 is higher When the voltage is smaller, the control circuit 3520 will output a corresponding signal so that the switch circuit 3200e has a lower equivalent impedance. Therefore, the ripple current originally generated by the voltage fluctuation can be regarded as absorbed by the equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200e, so that the current passing through the LED module 50 can be substantially maintained within a relatively stable range, thereby realizing the frequency Flash suppression effect.
总的来说，在前述未具有频闪抑制功能的安装检测模块实施例中，控制电路3520在工作模式下是输出一个信号使开关电路3200e可稳定的操作在饱和区，亦即在工作模式下开关电路3200e的等效阻抗实质上并不会因为漏源极电压变化而随之变化(忽略通道长度调变效应)。另一方面，在具有频闪抑制功能的安装检测模块实施例中，控制电路3520在工作模式下是将开关电路3200e控制在线性区操作而不是在饱和区，使得开关电路3200e的等效阻抗随着检测到的电压变化，进而降低频闪的现象。In general, in the aforementioned embodiment of the installation detection module without the stroboscopic suppression function, the control circuit 3520 outputs a signal in the working mode so that the switch circuit 3200e can stably operate in the saturation region, that is, in the working mode The equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e does not change substantially due to the change of the drain-source voltage (ignoring the effect of channel length modulation). On the other hand, in the embodiment of the installation detection module with the stroboscopic suppression function, the control circuit 3520 controls the switch circuit 3200e to operate in the linear region instead of in the saturation region in the working mode, so that the equivalent impedance of the switch circuit 3200e varies with The detected voltage change reduces the stroboscopic phenomenon.
请参见图24A，图24A是本申请第六实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块3000f包含检测脉冲发生模块3610、控制电路3620、检测判定电路3630、开关电路3200f以及检测路径电路3660。有关于检测脉冲发生模块3610、控制电路3620、检测判定电路3630及开关电路3200f的连接关系皆与上述图23A实施例相同，是通过相应的路径3611、3621、3631、3661相互连接，于此不再重复赘述。在本实施例中，与前述图23A实施例的主要差异在于检测路径电路3660的配置与操作。本实施例的检测路径电路3660的第一检测连接端DE1耦接滤波电路520的低电平端，并且第二检测连接端DE2耦接第二整流输出端512。换句话说，检测路径电路3660是连接在滤波电路520的低电平端与整流电路510的第二整流输出端512之间，亦即，滤波电路520的低电平端是经由检测路径电路3660连接至第二整流输出端512。Please refer to FIG. 24A . FIG. 24A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 3000f includes a detection pulse generation module 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f , and a detection path circuit 3660 . The connection relationship between the detection pulse generating module 3610, the control circuit 3620, the detection determination circuit 3630 and the switch circuit 3200f is the same as that in the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 23A, and they are connected to each other through the corresponding paths 3611, 3621, 3631, and 3661. Repeat again. In this embodiment, the main difference from the previous embodiment of FIG. 23A lies in the configuration and operation of the detection path circuit 3660 . The first detection connection terminal DE1 of the detection path circuit 3660 in this embodiment is coupled to the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 , and the second detection connection terminal DE2 is coupled to the second rectification output terminal 512 . In other words, the detection path circuit 3660 is connected between the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 and the second rectification output terminal 512 of the rectifier circuit 510, that is, the low-level terminal of the filter circuit 520 is connected to the filter circuit 520 via the detection path circuit 3660. The second rectification output terminal 512 .
检测路径电路3660的配置可如图24B或图24C所示，图24B与图24C为根据本申请不同实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。The configuration of the detection path circuit 3660 may be as shown in FIG. 24B or FIG. 24C . FIG. 24B and FIG. 24C are schematic diagrams of circuit structures of the installation detection module according to different embodiments of the present application.
请先参照图24B，图24B是本申请第五实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。在本实施例中，滤波电路520是以包含电容725、727及电感726的π型滤波架构为例(本申请不以此为限)，即电感726串接在第一整流输出端511及第一滤波输出端521之间，电容725、727的第一端对应连接电感726的两端，并且电容725、727的第二端连接在一起，其中电容 725、727的第二端即为低电平端。安装检测模块包括检测脉冲发生模块3610、控制电路3620、检测判定电路3630、开关电路3200f及检测路径电路3660。其中，检测路径电路3660包括晶体管M61及电阻R61。晶体管M61的栅极耦接检测脉冲发生模块3610，源极耦接电阻R61的第一端，并且漏极耦接电容725、727的第二端。电阻R61的第二端作为第二检测连接端3292与第二整流输出端512及第一安装检测端TE1连接。检测判定电路3630耦接电阻R61的第一端，藉以检测流经检测回路的电流大小。在本实施例中，所述检测回路可等效为由电容725及727、电感726、晶体管M61与电阻R61所组成。Please refer to FIG. 24B first. FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the fifth embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the filter circuit 520 is a π-type filter structure including capacitors 725, 727 and an inductor 726 as an example (this application is not limited to this), that is, the inductor 726 is connected in series with the first rectifier output end 511 and the first rectifier output end 511 and the first Between a filter output end 521 , the first ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are connected to the two ends of the inductor 726 correspondingly, and the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are connected together, wherein the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 are low power flat end. The installation detection module includes a detection pulse generation module 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f and a detection path circuit 3660 . The detection path circuit 3660 includes a transistor M61 and a resistor R61. The gate of the transistor M61 is coupled to the detection pulse generating module 3610 , the source is coupled to the first end of the resistor R61 , and the drain is coupled to the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 . The second end of the resistor R61 is connected to the second rectification output end 512 and the first installation detection end TE1 as the second detection connection end 3292 . The detection and determination circuit 3630 is coupled to the first end of the resistor R61 to detect the magnitude of the current flowing through the detection loop. In this embodiment, the detection loop can be equivalently composed of capacitors 725 and 727 , an inductor 726 , a transistor M61 and a resistor R61 .
在本实施例中，当晶体管M61接收到检测脉冲发生模块3610所提供的脉冲信号时(检测模式)，其会在脉冲期间内导通。在灯管至少一端安装至灯座的情况下，从第一整流输出端511经由检测路径至第二整流输出端512的电流路径会反应于导通的晶体管M61而随之导通，并且在电阻R61的第一端上建立一电压信号。在使用者没有接触灯管/灯管正确安装至灯座时，所述电压信号的电平是根据滤波电路520的等效阻抗与电阻R61的分压而决定。在使用者接触灯管时，人体的等效电阻会等效为串接于第二检测连接端与接地端之间。此时所述电压信号的电平是根据滤波电路520的等效阻抗、电阻R61及人体的等效电阻所决定。藉此，透过设置具有合适的电阻值的电阻R61，即可使得电阻R61的第一端上的电压信号可以反应出用户是否触碰灯管的状态，使得检测判定电路3630可根据电阻R61的第一端上的电压信号产生对应的检测结果信号，并且令控制电路3620可依据此检测结果信号来控制开关电路3200f的导通状态。另外，所述晶体管M61除了会在检测模式短暂导通知外，在控制电路3620判定灯管已被正确安装至灯座的情况下，开关电路3200f会切换至导通的状态，使得电源模块可以正常的运作以对LED模块供电。In this embodiment, when the transistor M61 receives the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3610 (detection mode), it will be turned on during the pulse period. When at least one end of the lamp tube is mounted on the lamp socket, the current path from the first rectifier output terminal 511 to the second rectifier output terminal 512 via the detection path will be turned on in response to the turned-on transistor M61, and the resistance A voltage signal is established on the first terminal of R61. When the user does not touch the lamp tube/the lamp tube is correctly installed on the lamp socket, the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the equivalent impedance of the filter circuit 520 and the voltage division of the resistor R61. When the user touches the lamp, the equivalent resistance of the human body is equivalent to being connected in series between the second detection connection terminal and the ground terminal. At this time, the level of the voltage signal is determined according to the equivalent impedance of the filter circuit 520 , the resistance R61 and the equivalent resistance of the human body. Therefore, by setting the resistor R61 with a suitable resistance value, the voltage signal on the first end of the resistor R61 can reflect whether the user touches the lamp, so that the detection and determination circuit 3630 can be based on the resistance of the resistor R61. The voltage signal on the first terminal generates a corresponding detection result signal, and the control circuit 3620 can control the conduction state of the switch circuit 3200f according to the detection result signal. In addition, the transistor M61 will not be turned on for a short time in the detection mode, and when the control circuit 3620 determines that the lamp tube has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the switch circuit 3200f will be switched to the on state, so that the power module can operate normally. operation to power the LED module.
请参照图24C，图24C是本申请第六实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。本实施例的安装检测模块包括检测脉冲发生电路3610、控制电路3620、检测判定电路3630、开关电路3200f及检测路径电路3660。本实施例的安装检测模块的配置与运作大致上和前述图24B实施例相同，其主要差异在于本实施例的检测路径电路3660是设置在电容725的第二端与第二整流输出端512之间，而电容727的第二端则是直接接在第二安装检测端TE2/第二滤波输出端522上。Please refer to FIG. 24C. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module according to a sixth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module of this embodiment includes a detection pulse generation circuit 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determination circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200f and a detection path circuit 3660 . The configuration and operation of the installed detection module of this embodiment are substantially the same as those of the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 24B , the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3660 of this embodiment is disposed between the second end of the capacitor 725 and the second rectifier output end 512 while the second end of the capacitor 727 is directly connected to the second installation detection end TE2 / the second filter output end 522 .
相较于图23A实施例而言，由于滤波电路520的被动组件成为检测路径的一部分，使得流经检测路径电路3660的电流规模(current size)远较流经检测路径电路3560来的小，因此检测路径电路3660中的晶体管M61/3395可以利用较小尺寸的组件来实施，可有效降低成本；此外电阻R61可以设计为一个相对小的电阻，在人体电阻等效连接至灯管时，检测路径上的等效阻抗变化会较为明显，进而使得检测结果较不易受到其他组件参数偏移的影响。再者，由于电流规模较小的缘故，控制电路3620及检测判定电路3630的信号传输设计可更容易的符合驱动控制器的信号格式要求，进而降低了安装检测模块与驱动电路的整合设计困难 度(此部分后续实施例会进一步说明)。Compared with the embodiment of FIG. 23A, since the passive components of the filter circuit 520 become part of the detection path, the current size of the current flowing through the detection path circuit 3660 is much smaller than that flowing through the detection path circuit 3560, so The transistor M61/3395 in the detection path circuit 3660 can be implemented with smaller size components, which can effectively reduce the cost; in addition, the resistor R61 can be designed as a relatively small resistor, when the human body resistance is equivalently connected to the lamp, the detection path The change of the equivalent impedance on the sensor will be more obvious, which will make the detection result less susceptible to the influence of the parameter offset of other components. Furthermore, due to the small current scale, the signal transmission design of the control circuit 3620 and the detection and determination circuit 3630 can more easily meet the signal format requirements of the driving controller, thereby reducing the difficulty of integrating the design of the installation detection module and the driving circuit. (This part will be further described in the subsequent embodiments).
请参照图25A，图25A是本申请第七实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的电源模块包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及安装检测模块3000g。安装检测模块3000g包含检测控制器3100g、开关电路3200g及偏压电路3300g，其中检测控制器3100g包含控制模块3710、启动电路3770及检测期间决定电路3780。整流电路510、滤波电路520及驱动电路530的配置及操作可参考相关实施例的说明，于此不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 25A . FIG. 25A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application. The power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an installation detection module 3000g. The installation detection module 3000g includes a detection controller 3100g, a switch circuit 3200g and a bias circuit 3300g, wherein the detection controller 3100g includes a control module 3710, a start-up circuit 3770 and a detection period determination circuit 3780. The configurations and operations of the rectifying circuit 510 , the filtering circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530 can be referred to the descriptions of the related embodiments, which are not repeated here.
在安装检测模块3000g中，开关电路3200g串接在电源模块的供电回路/电源回路上(图式是以连接在整流电路510与滤波电路520之间为例)，并且受控于控制模块3710而切换导通状态。控制模块3710会在检测模式发出控制信号短暂导通开关电路3200g，藉以在开关电路3200g导通的期间(即，供电回路/电源回路导通的期间)检测是否有额外阻抗连接至电源模块的检测路径上(代表有使用者触电风险产生)，并且根据检测结果来决定维持在检测模式以使开关电路3200g以不连续的形式短暂导通，或进入工作模式以使开关电路3200g响应于安装状态而维持在导通或截止的状态。所述“短暂导通”所代表的期间长度是指电源回路上的电流通过人体也不会对人体造成伤害的期间长度，例如小于1毫秒，但本申请不以此为限。一般而言，控制模块3710可透过发送具有脉冲形式的控制信号来实现使开关电路3200g短暂导通的动作。具体的短暂导通的期间长度设计可依据所设置的检测路径的阻抗大小而调整。控制模块3710及开关电路3200g的电路配置实施范例及相关控制动作可参照其他有关于安装检测模块的实施例。In the installation detection module 3000g, the switch circuit 3200g is serially connected to the power supply circuit/power supply circuit of the power supply module (the figure shows the connection between the rectifier circuit 510 and the filter circuit 520 as an example), and is controlled by the control module 3710. switch on state. The control module 3710 sends a control signal in the detection mode to briefly turn on the switch circuit 3200g, so as to detect whether there is an additional impedance connected to the power module during the period when the switch circuit 3200g is turned on (ie, the period when the power supply loop/power loop is turned on). On the path (representing a risk of electric shock to the user), and according to the detection result, it is decided to maintain the detection mode to make the switch circuit 3200g conduct temporarily in a discontinuous form, or enter the working mode to make the switch circuit 3200g respond to the installation state. remain on or off. The length of the period represented by the "short-term conduction" refers to the length of the period during which the current on the power circuit passes through the human body without causing harm to the human body, for example, less than 1 millisecond, but the present application is not limited to this. Generally speaking, the control module 3710 can temporarily turn on the switch circuit 3200g by sending a control signal in the form of a pulse. The specific design of the duration of the short turn-on period can be adjusted according to the impedance of the set detection path. For circuit configuration implementation examples of the control module 3710 and the switch circuit 3200g and related control actions, reference may be made to other embodiments related to the installation detection module.
偏压电路3300连接电源回路以基于整流后信号(即，母线电压)产生驱动电压VCC。驱动电压VCC会被提供给控制模块3710以使控制模块3710响应于驱动电压而启动并运作。The bias circuit 3300 is connected to the power loop to generate the driving voltage VCC based on the rectified signal (ie, the bus voltage). The driving voltage VCC is provided to the control module 3710 to enable the control module 3710 to start and operate in response to the driving voltage.
启动电路3770连接控制模块3710，并且用以依据检测期间决定电路3780的输出信号来决定是否影响控制模块3710的工作状态。举例来说，当检测期间决定电路3780输出使能信号时，启动电路3770会响应于所述使能信号而控制控制模块3710停止工作；当检测期间决定电路3780输出禁能信号时，启动电路3780会响应于所述禁能信号而控制控制模块3710维持在正常工作的状态(即，不影响控制模块3710的工作状态)。其中，启动电路3780可以藉由旁路驱动电压VCC或提供低电平的启动信号至控制模块3710的使能脚位的方式来实现控制控制模块3710停止工作的操作，本申请不以此为限。The start-up circuit 3770 is connected to the control module 3710 and is used for determining whether to affect the working state of the control module 3710 according to the output signal of the detection period determination circuit 3780 . For example, when the detection period determination circuit 3780 outputs an enable signal, the startup circuit 3770 controls the control module 3710 to stop working in response to the enable signal; when the detection period determination circuit 3780 outputs a disable signal, the startup circuit 3780 In response to the disable signal, the control module 3710 is controlled to maintain a normal working state (ie, the working state of the control module 3710 is not affected). The start-up circuit 3780 can control the control module 3710 to stop working by bypassing the driving voltage VCC or providing a low-level start signal to the enable pin of the control module 3710, which is not limited in this application. .
检测期间决定电路3780用以取样检测路径/电源回路上的电信号，藉以计数控制模块3710的工作时长，并且输出指示计数结果的信号给启动电路3770，使得启动电路3770基于指示计数结果的信号决定控制模块3710的工作状态。The detection period determination circuit 3780 is used for sampling the electrical signal on the detection path/power loop, thereby counting the working time of the control module 3710, and outputting a signal indicating the counting result to the start-up circuit 3770, so that the start-up circuit 3770 decides based on the signal indicating the counting result The working state of the control module 3710.
底下说明本实施例的安装检测电路3000g的运作。当整流电路510通过接脚501与502接收到外部电源时，偏压电路3300g会依据经整流后的母线电压产生驱动电压VCC。控制模 块3710会响应于驱动电压VCC而被启动，并且进入检测模式。在检测模式下，控制模块3710会周期性的发出具有脉冲波形的控制信号给开关电路3200g，使得开关电路3200g周期性的短暂导通后截止。在所述检测模式的操作下，电源回路上的电流波形会类似于图45D在检测时间区间Tw内的电流波形(即，多个具有间隔的电流脉冲Idp)。除此之外，检测期间决定电路3780会在接收到电源回路上的母线电压时开始计数控制模块3710在检测模式下的工作时长，并且输出指示计数结果的信号给启动电路3770。The operation of the mounting detection circuit 3000g of this embodiment will be described below. When the rectifier circuit 510 receives external power through the pins 501 and 502, the bias circuit 3300g generates the driving voltage VCC according to the rectified bus voltage. The control module 3710 is activated in response to the driving voltage VCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, the control module 3710 periodically sends a control signal with a pulse waveform to the switch circuit 3200g, so that the switch circuit 3200g is periodically turned on for a short time and then turned off. In the detection mode of operation, the current waveform on the power loop will be similar to the current waveform in the detection time interval Tw in FIG. 45D (ie, a plurality of current pulses Idp with intervals). Besides, the detection period determination circuit 3780 starts to count the working time of the control module 3710 in the detection mode when receiving the bus voltage on the power circuit, and outputs a signal indicating the counting result to the start circuit 3770 .
在控制模块3710的工作时长尚未达到设定时长的情况下，启动电路3770不会影响控制模块3710的工作状态。此时控制模块3710会根据本身的检测结果决定维持在检测模式或进入工作模式。若是控制模块3710判定进入工作模式，则控制模块3710会控制开关电路3200g维持在导通状态，并且屏蔽其他信号对其工作状态的影响。换言之，在工作模式下，无论启动电路3770输出何种信号都不会影响控制模块3710的工作状态。In the case that the working duration of the control module 3710 has not reached the set duration, the startup circuit 3770 will not affect the working state of the control module 3710 . At this time, the control module 3710 will decide to maintain the detection mode or enter the working mode according to its own detection result. If the control module 3710 determines to enter the working mode, the control module 3710 controls the switch circuit 3200g to maintain the on state, and shields the influence of other signals on its working state. In other words, in the working mode, no matter what kind of signal the startup circuit 3770 outputs, it will not affect the working state of the control module 3710 .
在控制模块3710的工作时长已达到设定时长，并且控制模块3710仍处于检测模式的情况下，启动电路3770会响应于检测期间决定电路3780的输出而控制控制模块3710停止工作。此时控制模块3710不再发出脉冲，并且将开关电路3200g维持在截止的状态直到控制模块3710复位。对比图45D来看，所述设定时长即为检测时间区间Tw。When the operating duration of the control module 3710 has reached the set duration and the control module 3710 is still in the detection mode, the start-up circuit 3770 will control the control module 3710 to stop working in response to the output of the detection period determination circuit 3780 . At this point, the control module 3710 no longer issues pulses and maintains the switch circuit 3200g in an off state until the control module 3710 is reset. Compared to FIG. 45D , the set duration is the detection time interval Tw.
根据上述的工作方式，安装检测模块3000g可以通过设定控制信号的脉冲间隔及复位周期来达到图45D至图45F的电流波形，进而确保检测模式下的电功率仍位在合理的安全范围之内，避免检测电流造成人体危害。According to the above working method, the installation detection module 3000g can achieve the current waveform shown in Figure 45D to Figure 45F by setting the pulse interval and reset period of the control signal, thereby ensuring that the electric power in the detection mode is still within a reasonable safety range, Avoid detection of current to cause human harm.
从电路动作的角度来看，启动电路3770及检测期间决定电路3780整体而言可以视为是一种延时控制电路，其作用在于当LED直管灯上电时，延迟一段设定时长后再导通一特定路径以对目标电路(例如：控制模块3710)实行控制。通过特定路径的设置选择，可以所述延时控制电路可以在LED直管灯中实现电源回路的延时导通或是安装检测模块的延时关断等电路动作。From the point of view of circuit operation, the start-up circuit 3770 and the detection period decision circuit 3780 can be regarded as a delay control circuit as a whole. A specific path is turned on to control the target circuit (eg, the control module 3710 ). Through the setting and selection of a specific path, the delay control circuit can realize circuit actions such as delayed turn-on of the power supply loop or delayed turn-off of the installed detection module in the LED straight tube lamp.
请参照图25B，图25B是本申请第七实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。本实施例的电源模块包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及安装检测模块3000h。安装检测模块3000h包含检测控制器3100h、开关电路3200h及偏压电路3300h，其中检测控制器3100h包含控制模块3810、启动电路3870及检测期间决定电路3880。整流电路510、滤波电路520及驱动电路530的配置及操作可参考相关实施例的说明；另外，控制模块3810及开关电路3200h的配置及操作可参考上述图25A实施例的说明，于此不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 25B . FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module according to a seventh embodiment of the present application. The power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an installation detection module 3000h. The installation detection module 3000h includes a detection controller 3100h, a switch circuit 3200h and a bias circuit 3300h, wherein the detection controller 3100h includes a control module 3810, a start-up circuit 3870 and a detection period determination circuit 3880. The configuration and operation of the rectifier circuit 510, the filter circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530 can refer to the description of the relevant embodiments; in addition, the configuration and operation of the control module 3810 and the switch circuit 3200h can refer to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 25A, which is not repeated here. Repeat.
在本实施例中，偏压电路3300h包括电阻R71、电容C71及齐纳二极管ZD1。电阻R71的第一端连接整流输出端(即，连接在母线上)。电容C71及齐纳二极管ZD1相互并联，并且第一端共同连接至电阻R71的第二端。控制模块3810的电源输入端连接在电阻R71、电容C71 及齐纳二极管ZD1的共节点(即，偏压电路3300h的偏压节点)上，以接收共节点上的驱动电压VCC。In this embodiment, the bias circuit 3300h includes a resistor R71, a capacitor C71 and a Zener diode ZD1. The first end of the resistor R71 is connected to the rectified output (ie, connected to the bus). The capacitor C71 and the Zener diode ZD1 are connected in parallel with each other, and the first terminal is connected to the second terminal of the resistor R71 in common. The power input terminal of the control module 3810 is connected to the common node of the resistor R71, the capacitor C71 and the Zener diode ZD1 (ie, the bias node of the bias circuit 3300h) to receive the driving voltage VCC on the common node.
启动电路3870包括齐纳二极管ZD2、晶体管M71及电容C72。齐纳二极管ZD2的阳极接在晶体管M71的控制端上。晶体管M71的第一端连接控制模块3810，并且晶体管M71的第二端连接接地端GND。电容C72连接在晶体管M71的第一端与第二端之间。The start-up circuit 3870 includes a Zener diode ZD2, a transistor M71 and a capacitor C72. The anode of the Zener diode ZD2 is connected to the control terminal of the transistor M71. The first terminal of the transistor M71 is connected to the control module 3810, and the second terminal of the transistor M71 is connected to the ground terminal GND. The capacitor C72 is connected between the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor M71.
检测期间决定电路3880包括电阻R72、二极管D71及电容C73。电阻R72的第一端连接偏压电路3300的偏压节点，并且电阻R72的第二端连接齐纳二极管ZD2的阴极。二极管D71的阳极连接电阻R72的第二端，并且二极管D71的阴极连接电阻R72的第一端。电容C73的第一端连接电阻R72的第二端及二极管D71的阳极，并且电容C73的第二端连接接地端GND。The detection period determination circuit 3880 includes a resistor R72, a diode D71 and a capacitor C73. The first end of the resistor R72 is connected to the bias node of the bias circuit 3300, and the second end of the resistor R72 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode ZD2. The anode of diode D71 is connected to the second terminal of resistor R72, and the cathode of diode D71 is connected to the first terminal of resistor R72. The first terminal of the capacitor C73 is connected to the second terminal of the resistor R72 and the anode of the diode D71, and the second terminal of the capacitor C73 is connected to the ground terminal GND.
底下说明本实施例的安装检测电路3000h的运作。当整流电路510通过接脚501与502接收到外部电源时，经整流后的母线电压会对电容C71充电，进而在偏压节点上建立驱动电压VCC。控制模块3810会响应于驱动电压VCCVCC而被启动，并且进入检测模式。在检测模式下，先以第一个信号周期来看，控制模块3810会发出具有脉冲波形的控制信号给开关电路3200h，使得开关电路3200h短暂导通后截止。The operation of the mounting detection circuit 3000h of this embodiment will be described below. When the rectifier circuit 510 receives external power through the pins 501 and 502, the rectified bus voltage will charge the capacitor C71, thereby establishing the driving voltage VCC on the bias node. The control module 3810 is activated in response to the driving voltage VCCVCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, from the first signal cycle, the control module 3810 sends a control signal with a pulse waveform to the switch circuit 3200h, so that the switch circuit 3200h turns on briefly and then turns off.
在开关电路3200h导通的期间，电容C73会响应于偏压节点上的驱动电压VCC而被充电，使得电容C73的跨压逐渐上升。在第一个信号周期中，电容C73的跨压的上升量还未达到晶体管M71的门限电平，因此晶体管M71会维持在截止的状态，使得启动信号Ven相应的维持在高电平。接着，在开关电路3200h截止的期间，电容C73会大致地保持电平，或是缓缓的放电，其中电容C73在开关截止期间放电所造成的电平变化会小于在开关导通期间充电所造成的电平变化。换言之，电容C73在开关截止期间的跨压会小于或等于开关导通期间的最高电平，并且最低不会低于其在充电起始点的起始电平，因此晶体管M71在第一个信号周期中会一直维持在截止的状态，使得启动信号Ven维持在高电平。控制模块3810响应于高电平的启动信号Ven而维持在启动状态。在启动状态下，控制模块3810会根据检测路径上的信号来判断LED直管灯是否正确安装(即，判断是否有额外的阻抗接入。此部分的安装检测机制与前述实施例相同，于此不再赘述。During the period when the switch circuit 3200h is turned on, the capacitor C73 is charged in response to the driving voltage VCC on the bias node, so that the voltage across the capacitor C73 gradually increases. In the first signal cycle, the rising amount of the voltage across the capacitor C73 has not yet reached the threshold level of the transistor M71, so the transistor M71 is kept in an off state, so that the enable signal Ven is kept at a high level accordingly. Then, during the off period of the switch circuit 3200h, the capacitor C73 will maintain the level approximately, or slowly discharge, wherein the level change caused by the discharge of the capacitor C73 during the off period of the switch will be smaller than that caused by the charging during the on period of the switch. level change. In other words, the voltage across the capacitor C73 during the switch-off period will be less than or equal to the highest level during the switch-on period, and the lowest level will not be lower than its initial level at the charging starting point, so the transistor M71 is in the first signal cycle. The medium will always remain in the off state, so that the enable signal Ven is maintained at a high level. The control module 3810 is maintained in the active state in response to the high-level enable signal Ven. In the startup state, the control module 3810 will determine whether the LED straight tube light is correctly installed (ie, whether there is additional impedance access) according to the signal on the detection path. The installation detection mechanism of this part is the same as the previous embodiment, and here No longer.
在控制模块3810判定LED直管灯尚未被正确安装至灯座上的情况下，控制模块3810会维持在检测模式并持续输出具有脉冲波形的控制信号来控制开关电路3200h。在后续的各信号周期中，启动电路3870及检测期间决定电路3880会以类似前述第一信号周期的工作方式持续运作，亦即电容C73会在各信号周期的导通期间被充电，使得电容C73的跨压响应于脉冲宽度及脉冲周期而步阶式的上升。当电容C73的跨压超过晶体管M71的门限电平时，晶体管M71会被导通使得启动信号Ven被下拉至接地电平/低电平。此时控制模块3810会响应于低电平的启动信号Ven而被关闭。在控制模块3810被关闭的情况下，无论是否有外部电源接 入，开关电路3200h都会被维持在截止状态。When the control module 3810 determines that the LED straight tube lamp has not been properly installed on the lamp socket, the control module 3810 maintains the detection mode and continuously outputs a control signal with a pulse waveform to control the switch circuit 3200h. In subsequent signal cycles, the start-up circuit 3870 and the detection period determination circuit 3880 will continue to operate in a manner similar to the first signal cycle, that is, the capacitor C73 will be charged during the on-time of each signal cycle, so that the capacitor C73 The voltage across the pulse rises in steps in response to the pulse width and pulse period. When the voltage across the capacitor C73 exceeds the threshold level of the transistor M71, the transistor M71 is turned on so that the enable signal Ven is pulled down to the ground level/low level. At this time, the control module 3810 will be turned off in response to the low-level enable signal Ven. When the control module 3810 is turned off, the switch circuit 3200h will be maintained in the off state regardless of whether an external power supply is connected or not.
在控制模块3810判定LED直管灯已被正确安装置灯座上的情况下，控制模块3810会进入工作模式，并且发出控制信号使开关电路3200h维持在导通的状态。在工作模式下，控制模块3810不会响应于启动信号Ven而改变输出的控制信号。换言之，即使启动信号Ven被下拉至低电平，控制模块3810也不会再次把开关电路3200h关断。When the control module 3810 determines that the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket, the control module 3810 will enter the working mode, and send a control signal to keep the switch circuit 3200h in an on state. In the working mode, the control module 3810 does not change the output control signal in response to the enable signal Ven. In other words, even if the enable signal Ven is pulled down to a low level, the control module 3810 will not turn off the switch circuit 3200h again.
从检测模式下的多个信号周期的维度来看，电源回路上量测到的电流波形会如图45D所示，其中电容C73从起始电平充电至晶体管M71的门限电平的期间即可对应至检测时间区间Tw。换言之，在检测模式下，控制模块3810会在电容C73充电至晶体管M71的门限电平之前持续发出脉冲，以间歇的在电源回路上导通电流，并且在电容C73的跨压超过门限电平后停止发出脉冲，藉以避免电源回路上的电功率升高至足以危害人体的程度。From the dimension of multiple signal periods in the detection mode, the current waveform measured on the power loop will be as shown in Figure 45D, where the period from the charging of the capacitor C73 to the threshold level of the transistor M71 is It can correspond to the detection time interval Tw. In other words, in the detection mode, the control module 3810 will continue to send pulses before the capacitor C73 is charged to the threshold level of the transistor M71 to intermittently conduct current on the power loop, and when the voltage across the capacitor C73 exceeds the threshold voltage After leveling, stop sending out pulses, so as to prevent the electric power on the power circuit from rising to a level sufficient to harm the human body.
从另一角度来看，本实施例的检测期间决定电路3880等同于会计数控制信号的脉冲导通期间，并且在脉冲导通期间达到设定值时发出信号来控制启动电路3870，进而令启动电路3870影响控制模块3910的运作以屏蔽脉冲输出。From another point of view, the detection period determination circuit 3880 of this embodiment is equivalent to counting the pulse conduction period of the control signal, and when the pulse conduction period reaches the set value, a signal is sent to control the start-up circuit 3870, thereby enabling the start-up Circuit 3870 affects the operation of control module 3910 to mask the pulse output.
在本实施例的电路架构下，检测时间区间Tw的长度(即，电容C73跨压达到晶体管M71的门限电压所需的时间)主要是通过调整电容C73的电容值大小来控制。电阻R72、二极管D71、齐纳二极管ZD2及电容C72等组件主要是辅助启动电路3870及检测期间决定电路3880的运作，以提供稳压、限压、限流或保护的功能。Under the circuit structure of this embodiment, the length of the detection time interval Tw (ie, the time required for the voltage across the capacitor C73 to reach the threshold voltage of the transistor M71 ) is mainly controlled by adjusting the capacitance value of the capacitor C73 . Components such as resistor R72, diode D71, Zener diode ZD2 and capacitor C72 are mainly used to assist the start-up circuit 3870 and the operation of the determination circuit 3880 during detection to provide functions of voltage regulation, voltage limiting, current limiting or protection.
请参照图25C，图25C是本申请第八实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。本实施例的电源模块包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及安装检测模块3000i。安装检测模块3000i包含检测控制器3100i、开关电路3200i及偏压电路3300i，其中检测控制器3100i包含控制模块3910、启动电路3970及检测期间决定电路3980。整流电路510、滤波电路520及驱动电路530的配置及操作可参考相关实施例的说明；另外，控制模块3910及开关电路3200i的配置及操作可参考上述图25A实施例的说明，于此不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 25C . FIG. 25C is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module according to an eighth embodiment of the present application. The power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510, a filter circuit 520, a drive circuit 530, and an installation detection module 3000i. The installation detection module 3000i includes a detection controller 3100i, a switch circuit 3200i and a bias circuit 3300i, wherein the detection controller 3100i includes a control module 3910, a start-up circuit 3970 and a detection period determination circuit 3980. The configuration and operation of the rectifier circuit 510, the filter circuit 520 and the driving circuit 530 can refer to the description of the relevant embodiments; in addition, the configuration and operation of the control module 3910 and the switch circuit 3200i can refer to the description of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 25A, which is not repeated here. Repeat.
偏压电路3300i包括电阻R81、电容C81及齐纳二极管ZD3。电阻R81的第一端连接整流输出端(即，连接在母线上)。电容C81及齐纳二极管ZD3相互并联，并且第一端共同连接至电阻R81的第二端。控制模块3910的电源输入端连接在电阻R81、电容C81及齐纳二极管ZD3的共节点(即，偏压电路3300的偏压节点)上，以接收共节点上的驱动电压VCC。The bias circuit 3300i includes a resistor R81, a capacitor C81 and a Zener diode ZD3. The first end of the resistor R81 is connected to the rectifier output (ie, connected to the bus). The capacitor C81 and the Zener diode ZD3 are connected in parallel with each other, and the first terminal is connected to the second terminal of the resistor R81 in common. The power input terminal of the control module 3910 is connected to the common node of the resistor R81 , the capacitor C81 and the Zener diode ZD3 (ie, the bias node of the bias circuit 3300 ) to receive the driving voltage VCC on the common node.
启动电路3970包括齐纳二极管ZD4、电阻R82、晶体管M81及电阻R83。齐纳二极管ZD2的阳极接在晶体管M81的控制端上。电阻R82的第一端连接齐纳二极管ZD4的阳极与晶体管M81的控制端，并且电阻R82的第二端连接接地端GND。晶体管M81的第一端通过电阻R83连接至偏压电路3300的偏压节点，并且晶体管M81的第二端连接接地端GND。The start-up circuit 3970 includes a Zener diode ZD4, a resistor R82, a transistor M81 and a resistor R83. The anode of the Zener diode ZD2 is connected to the control terminal of the transistor M81. The first terminal of the resistor R82 is connected to the anode of the Zener diode ZD4 and the control terminal of the transistor M81, and the second terminal of the resistor R82 is connected to the ground terminal GND. The first terminal of the transistor M81 is connected to the bias node of the bias circuit 3300 through the resistor R83, and the second terminal of the transistor M81 is connected to the ground terminal GND.
检测期间决定电路3980包括二极管D81、电阻R84和R85、电容C82及齐纳二极管3775。二极管D81的阳极接在开关电路3200i的一端上，此端可视为检测期间决定电路3980的检测节点。电阻R84的第一端连接二极管D81的阴极，并且电阻R84的第二端连接齐纳二极管ZD4的阴极。电阻R85的第一端连接电阻R84的第二端，并且电阻R85的第二端连接接地端GND。电容C82与齐纳二极管ZD5分别与电阻R85并联，其中齐纳二极管ZD5的阴极与阳极分别连接电阻R85的第一端与第二端。The detection period determination circuit 3980 includes a diode D81 , resistors R84 and R85 , a capacitor C82 and a Zener diode 3775 . The anode of the diode D81 is connected to one end of the switch circuit 3200i, which can be regarded as the detection node of the detection period decision circuit 3980. A first end of resistor R84 is connected to the cathode of diode D81, and a second end of resistor R84 is connected to the cathode of Zener diode ZD4. The first terminal of the resistor R85 is connected to the second terminal of the resistor R84, and the second terminal of the resistor R85 is connected to the ground terminal GND. The capacitor C82 and the Zener diode ZD5 are connected in parallel with the resistor R85 respectively, wherein the cathode and the anode of the Zener diode ZD5 are respectively connected to the first end and the second end of the resistor R85.
底下说明本实施例的安装检测电路3000i的运作。当整流电路510通过接脚501与502接收到外部电源时，经整流后的母线电压会对电容C81充电，进而在偏压节点上建立驱动电压VCC。控制模块3910会响应于驱动电压VCC而被启动，并且进入检测模式。在检测模式下，先以第一个信号周期来看，控制模块3910会发出具有脉冲波形的控制信号给开关电路3200i，使得开关电路3200i短暂导通后截止。The operation of the mounting detection circuit 3000i of this embodiment will be described below. When the rectifier circuit 510 receives external power through the pins 501 and 502, the rectified bus voltage will charge the capacitor C81, thereby establishing the driving voltage VCC on the bias node. The control module 3910 is activated in response to the driving voltage VCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, from the first signal cycle, the control module 3910 sends a control signal with a pulse waveform to the switch circuit 3200i, so that the switch circuit 3200i is turned on for a short time and then turned off.
在开关电路3200i导通的期间，二极管D81的阳极等效为接地，因此电容C82不会被充电。在第一个信号周期中，电容C82的跨压会在开关电路3200i的导通期间内维持在起始电平，晶体管M81会被维持在截止状态，因此不会影响控制模块3910的运作。接着，在开关电路3200i截止的期间，断开的电源回路会使检测节点上的电平响应于外部电源而上升，其中施加在电容C82上的电平等于电阻R84与R85的分压。因此，在开关电路3200i截止的期间，电容C82会响应于电阻R84与R85的分压而被充电，时得电容C82的跨压逐渐上升。在第一个信号周期中，电容C82的跨压的上升量还未达到晶体管M81的门限电平，因此晶体管M81会维持在截止的状态，使得驱动电压VCC维持不变。由于在第一个信号周期中，不论是开关电路3200i导通的期间或截止的期间，晶体管M81一直维持在截止的状态，使得驱动电压VCC不受到影响。因此控制模块3910响应于驱动电压VCC而维持在启动状态。在启动状态下，控制模块3910会根据检测路径上的信号来判断LED直管灯是否正确安装(即，判断是否有额外的阻抗接入。此部分的安装检测机制与前述实施例相同，于此不再赘述。During the period when the switch circuit 3200i is turned on, the anode of the diode D81 is equivalently grounded, so the capacitor C82 will not be charged. In the first signal cycle, the voltage across the capacitor C82 will be maintained at the initial level during the on-time of the switch circuit 3200i, and the transistor M81 will be maintained in the off state, so the operation of the control module 3910 will not be affected. Then, when the switch circuit 3200i is turned off, the disconnected power loop will cause the level on the detection node to rise in response to the external power supply, wherein the level applied to the capacitor C82 is equal to the voltage divided by the resistors R84 and R85. Therefore, when the switch circuit 3200i is turned off, the capacitor C82 is charged in response to the voltage divided by the resistors R84 and R85, and the voltage across the capacitor C82 gradually increases. In the first signal cycle, the rising amount of the voltage across the capacitor C82 has not yet reached the threshold level of the transistor M81, so the transistor M81 is kept in an off state, so that the driving voltage VCC remains unchanged. In the first signal period, no matter whether the switch circuit 3200i is on or off, the transistor M81 is always kept in the off state, so that the driving voltage VCC is not affected. Therefore, the control module 3910 is maintained in the activated state in response to the driving voltage VCC. In the start-up state, the control module 3910 will determine whether the LED straight tube light is installed correctly (that is, determine whether there is additional impedance access) according to the signal on the detection path. The installation detection mechanism of this part is the same as the previous embodiment, and here No longer.
在控制模块3910判定LED直管灯尚未被正确安装至灯座上的情况下，控制模块3910会维持在检测模式并持续输出具有脉冲波形的控制信号来控制开关电路3200i。在后续的各信号周期中，启动电路3970及检测期间决定电路3980会以类似前述第一信号周期的工作方式持续运作，亦即电容C82会在各信号周期的截止期间被充电，使得电容C82的跨压响应于脉冲宽度及脉冲周期而逐渐上升。当电容C82的跨压超过晶体管M81的门限电平时，晶体管M81会被导通使得偏压节点被短路至接地端GND，进而使驱动电压VCC被下拉至接地电平/低电平。此时控制模块3910会响应于低电平的驱动电压VCC而被关闭。在控制模块3910被关闭的情况下，无论是否有外部电源接入，开关电路3200i都会被维持在截止状态。When the control module 3910 determines that the LED straight tube lamp has not been properly installed on the lamp socket, the control module 3910 will maintain the detection mode and continuously output a control signal with a pulse waveform to control the switch circuit 3200i. In each subsequent signal period, the start-up circuit 3970 and the detection period determination circuit 3980 will continue to operate in a similar manner to the first signal period, that is, the capacitor C82 will be charged during the off period of each signal period, so that the capacitance of the capacitor C82 will be charged. The cross voltage gradually rises in response to the pulse width and pulse period. When the voltage across the capacitor C82 exceeds the threshold level of the transistor M81, the transistor M81 is turned on so that the bias node is shorted to the ground terminal GND, and the driving voltage VCC is pulled down to the ground level/low level. At this time, the control module 3910 will be turned off in response to the low-level driving voltage VCC. When the control module 3910 is turned off, the switch circuit 3200i will be maintained in the off state regardless of whether an external power source is connected or not.
在控制模块3910判定LED直管灯已被正确安装置灯座上的情况下，控制模块3910会进入工作模式，并且发出控制信号使开关电路3200i维持在导通的状态。在工作模式下，由于 开关电路3200i会持续导通，使得晶体管M81会被维持在截止状态，因此不会影响驱动电压VCC，可使控制模块3910正常工作。When the control module 3910 determines that the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket, the control module 3910 will enter the working mode, and send a control signal to keep the switch circuit 3200i in an on state. In the working mode, since the switch circuit 3200i will continue to be turned on, the transistor M81 will be kept in the off state, so the driving voltage VCC will not be affected, and the control module 3910 can work normally.
从检测模式下的多个信号周期的维度来看，电源回路上量测到的电流波形会如图45D所示，其中电容C82从起始电平充电至晶体管M81的门限电平的期间即可对应至检测时间区间Tw。换言之，在检测模式下，控制模块3910会在电容C82充电至晶体管M81的门限电平之前持续发出脉冲，以间歇的在电源回路上导通电流，并且在电容C82的跨压超过门限电平后停止发出脉冲，藉以避免电源回路上的电功率升高至足以危害人体的程度。From the dimension of multiple signal cycles in the detection mode, the current waveform measured on the power loop will be as shown in Figure 45D, where the period from the charging of the capacitor C82 to the threshold level of the transistor M81 from the initial level is It can correspond to the detection time interval Tw. In other words, in the detection mode, the control module 3910 will continue to send pulses before the capacitor C82 is charged to the threshold level of the transistor M81 to intermittently conduct current on the power loop, and when the voltage across the capacitor C82 exceeds the threshold voltage After leveling, stop sending out pulses, so as to prevent the electric power on the power circuit from rising to a level sufficient to harm the human body.
从另一角度来看，本实施例的检测期间决定电路3980等同于会计数控制信号的脉冲截止期间，并且在脉冲截止期间达到设定值时发出信号来控制启动电路3970，进而令启动电路3970影响控制模块3910的运作以屏蔽脉冲输出。From another point of view, the detection period determination circuit 3980 of this embodiment is equivalent to counting the pulse off period of the control signal, and when the pulse off period reaches the set value, a signal is sent to control the start-up circuit 3970, and then the start-up circuit 3970 Affects the operation of the control module 3910 to shield the pulse output.
在本实施例的电路架构下，检测时间区间Tw的长度(即，电容C82跨压达到晶体管M81的门限电压所需的时间)主要是通过调整电容C82的电容值大小及电阻R84、R85及R82的电阻值大小来控制。二极管D81、齐纳二极管ZD4与ZD5及电阻R83等组件是辅助启动电路3970及检测期间决定电路3980的运作，以提供稳压、限压、限流或保护的功能。Under the circuit structure of this embodiment, the length of the detection time interval Tw (ie, the time required for the voltage across the capacitor C82 to reach the threshold voltage of the transistor M81 ) is mainly determined by adjusting the capacitance value of the capacitor C82 and the resistors R84 , R85 and R82 The size of the resistance value is controlled. Components such as diode D81, Zener diodes ZD4 and ZD5, and resistor R83 assist the operation of the start-up circuit 3970 and the detection period determination circuit 3980 to provide functions of voltage regulation, voltage limiting, current limiting or protection.
请参照图25D，图25D是本申请第九实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。本实施例的电源模块包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530及安装检测模块3000j。安装检测模块3000j包含检测控制器3100j、开关电路3200j及偏压电路3300j，其中检测控制器3100j包含控制模块3910、启动电路3970及检测期间决定电路3980。在本实施例中，安装检测模块3000j的配置与运作大致与前述图25C实施例的安装检测模块3000i相同，两者间的主要差异在于本实施例的检测期间决定电路3980除了包括二极管D81、电阻R84与R85、电容C82及齐纳二极管ZD5之外，更包括电阻R86、R87和R88以及二极管D82。其中，电阻R86串接在二极管D81与电阻R84之间。电阻R87的第一端连接电阻R84的第一端，并且电阻R87的第二端连接齐纳二极管ZD4的阴极。电阻R88与电容C82相互并联。二极管D82的阳极连接电容C82的第一端及齐纳二极管ZD4的阴极，并且二极管D82的阴极连接电阻R84的第二端及电阻R85的第一端。Please refer to FIG. 25D . FIG. 25D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application. The power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and an installation detection module 3000j. The installation detection module 3000j includes a detection controller 3100j, a switch circuit 3200j and a bias circuit 3300j, wherein the detection controller 3100j includes a control module 3910, a start-up circuit 3970 and a detection period determination circuit 3980. In this embodiment, the configuration and operation of the installation detection module 3000j are substantially the same as the installation detection module 3000i of the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 25C . The main difference between the two is that the detection period determination circuit 3980 of this embodiment includes a diode D81 , a resistor In addition to R84 and R85, capacitor C82 and Zener diode ZD5, it also includes resistors R86, R87 and R88 and diode D82. The resistor R86 is connected in series between the diode D81 and the resistor R84. The first end of the resistor R87 is connected to the first end of the resistor R84, and the second end of the resistor R87 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode ZD4. Resistor R88 and capacitor C82 are connected in parallel with each other. The anode of diode D82 is connected to the first terminal of capacitor C82 and the cathode of Zener diode ZD4, and the cathode of diode D82 is connected to the second terminal of resistor R84 and the first terminal of resistor R85.
在本实施例的电路架构下，对电容C82充电的回路从电阻R84与R85改为电阻R87与R88，亦即电容C82是基于电阻R87及R88的分压进行充电。具体地说，检测节点上的电压会先基于电阻R86、R84及R85的分压在电阻R84的第一端上产生一阶分压，接着一阶分压会基于电阻R87与R88的分压而在电容C82的第一端上产生二阶分压。在此配置下，电容C82的充电速率可以透过调整电阻R84、R85、R86、R87及R88的电阻值来控制，而不仅限由调整电容值大小来控制。如此一来，电容C82的尺寸可以有效地被减小。另一方面，由于电阻R85不再需要作为充电回路上的组件，因此可以选用电阻值较小的组件，如此一来便可以加快电容C82 的放电速率，进而缩短检测期间决定电路3980的电路复位时间。Under the circuit structure of the present embodiment, the circuit for charging the capacitor C82 is changed from resistors R84 and R85 to resistors R87 and R88, that is, the capacitor C82 is charged based on the voltage divided by the resistors R87 and R88. Specifically, the voltage on the detection node will first generate a first-order voltage division on the first end of the resistor R84 based on the voltage division of the resistors R86, R84 and R85, and then the first-order voltage division will be based on the voltage division of the resistors R87 and R88. A second-order voltage divider is generated on the first end of capacitor C82. In this configuration, the charging rate of the capacitor C82 can be controlled by adjusting the resistance values of the resistors R84, R85, R86, R87 and R88, not only by adjusting the value of the capacitors. In this way, the size of the capacitor C82 can be effectively reduced. On the other hand, since the resistor R85 no longer needs to be used as a component on the charging circuit, a component with a smaller resistance value can be selected, which can speed up the discharge rate of the capacitor C82, thereby shortening the circuit reset time of the decision circuit 3980 during the detection period. .
请参照图26A，图26A是本申请第八实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。在本实施例中，安装检测模块3000k是被配置为持续检测电源回路上信号的架构，其中安装检测模块3000k包括控制电路3020、检测判定电路3030以及限流电路/开关电路3200k。控制电路3020是用以依据检测判定电路3030所产生的检测结果来控制限流电路3200k，藉以令限流电路3200k反应于控制电路3020的控制而决定是否执行限流操作。其中，控制电路3020会预设控制限流电路3180不执行限流操作，亦即电源回路上的电流预设不受到限流电路3200k的限制。因此，在预设状态下，只要有外部电源接入，经过整流滤波后的电源皆可经由电源回路提供至LED模块50。Please refer to FIG. 26A . FIG. 26A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to an eighth embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the installation detection module 3000k is a structure configured to continuously detect signals on the power circuit, wherein the installation detection module 3000k includes a control circuit 3020, a detection determination circuit 3030, and a current limiting circuit/switch circuit 3200k. The control circuit 3020 is used to control the current limiting circuit 3200k according to the detection result generated by the detection determination circuit 3030 , so that the current limiting circuit 3200k determines whether to perform the current limiting operation in response to the control of the control circuit 3020 . Wherein, the control circuit 3020 will preset the current limiting circuit 3180 not to perform the current limiting operation, that is, the current on the power loop is preset not to be limited by the current limiting circuit 3200k. Therefore, in the default state, as long as there is an external power supply connected, the rectified and filtered power can be supplied to the LED module 50 through the power loop.
更具体的说，检测判定电路3030会被外部电源启动/使能，并且开始持续地检测电源回路中特定节点上的信号，并且将检测结果信号传送给控制电路3020。控制电路3020会根据检测结果信号的电平、波形、频率及其他信号特性的其中一者或多者来判断是否有人员触碰情形发生。当控制电路3020依据检测结果信号判定有人员触碰情形发生时，即会控制限流电路3180执行限流操作，使得电源回路上的电流被限制至低于特定电流值以下，藉以避免触电情形发生。于此应注意的是，所述特定节点可以位在整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530或LED模块50的输入侧或输出侧，本申请不以此为限。More specifically, the detection and determination circuit 3030 is activated/enabled by the external power supply, and starts to continuously detect the signal on a specific node in the power supply loop, and transmits the detection result signal to the control circuit 3020 . The control circuit 3020 determines whether a human touch occurs according to one or more of the level, waveform, frequency and other signal characteristics of the detection result signal. When the control circuit 3020 determines that there is a human touch according to the detection result signal, it will control the current limiting circuit 3180 to perform a current limiting operation, so that the current on the power circuit is limited to be lower than a specific current value, so as to avoid the occurrence of electric shock . It should be noted here that the specific node may be located at the input side or the output side of the rectifier circuit 510 , the filter circuit 520 , the drive circuit 530 or the LED module 50 , which is not limited in the present application.
请参照图26B，图26B是本申请第九实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的安装检测模块3000L与前述实施例的安装检测模块3000k大致相同，两者主要差异在于安装检测模块3000L是被配置为持续对检测路径上信号进行检测的架构。安装检测模块3000L包括控制电路3020、检测判定电路3030、限流电路3200L及检测路径电路3060，其中有关于控制电路3020、检测判定电路3030以及限流电路3200L的运作可参照上述实施例的说明，于此不再重复赘述。Please refer to FIG. 26B . FIG. 26B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the installation detection module according to the ninth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 3000L of this embodiment is substantially the same as the installation detection module 3000k of the previous embodiment, and the main difference between the two is that the installation detection module 3000L is configured to continuously detect signals on the detection path. The installation detection module 3000L includes a control circuit 3020, a detection determination circuit 3030, a current limiting circuit 3200L, and a detection path circuit 3060. For the operations of the control circuit 3020, the detection determination circuit 3030, and the current limiting circuit 3200L, reference may be made to the descriptions of the above embodiments. It will not be repeated here.
于此应注意的是，所述检测路径电路3060可以设置在整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530或LED模块50的输入侧或输出侧，本申请不以此为限。其中，将检测路径电路3060设置在整流电路510的输入侧的实施例可参考图27-28B和图36-37C的实施例描述。除此之外，检测路径电路3060在实际应用中可以利用被动组件(如电阻、电容、电感等)或主动组件(如晶体管、硅控整流器)等任何可以因应人体触碰而反应出阻抗变化的电路配置来实施。It should be noted here that the detection path circuit 3060 may be disposed on the input side or the output side of the rectifier circuit 510 , the filter circuit 520 , the drive circuit 530 or the LED module 50 , which is not limited in the present application. The embodiment of disposing the detection path circuit 3060 on the input side of the rectifier circuit 510 can be described with reference to the embodiments of FIGS. 27-28B and 36-37C . In addition, the detection path circuit 3060 can use any passive components (such as resistors, capacitors, inductors, etc.) or active components (such as transistors, silicon-controlled rectifiers), etc., which can respond to changes in impedance in response to human touch in practical applications. circuit configuration to implement.
总的来说，上述图26A与图26B的电源模块属于持续检测设定下的应用与配置，其可单独作为安装检测的机制，或者可与脉冲检测设定搭配一起作为安装检测/触电保护的机制。举例来说，在一范例实施例中，灯管可以在未被点亮的状态下应用脉冲检测设定，并且在灯管被点亮之后改为应用持续检测设定。从电路运作的角度来看，所述脉冲检测设定与持续检测设定的切换可以是基于电源回路上的电流来决定，例如在电源回路上的电流小于特定值(如 5MIU)时，安装检测模块是选择启用脉冲检测设定，并且在电源回路上的电流大于特定值时，安装检测模块切换为启用持续检测设定。从灯管安装与运作的角度来看，安装检测模块是预设为启用脉冲检测设定，使得灯管每一次通电或接收到外部电源时，安装检测模块都先以脉冲检测设定来检测灯管是否正确安装并进行防触电保护，一旦判定灯管正确安装至灯座上并点亮后，安装检测模块即切换为以持续检测设定来检测灯管是否被误触导电部分而产生触电风险。另外，若灯管断电则安装检测模块会再次重置为脉冲检测设定。In general, the power modules shown in Figures 26A and 26B are applications and configurations under the continuous detection setting, which can be used alone as a mechanism for installation detection, or can be used together with the pulse detection setting as a mechanism for installation detection/electric shock protection. mechanism. For example, in an exemplary embodiment, the light tube may apply the pulse detection setting when it is not lit, and instead apply the continuous detection setting after the light tube is lit. From the point of view of circuit operation, the switching between the pulse detection setting and the continuous detection setting can be determined based on the current on the power loop. The module is selected to enable the pulse detection setting, and when the current on the power loop is greater than a certain value, the installation detection module switches to enable the continuous detection setting. From the perspective of lamp installation and operation, the installation detection module is preset to enable the pulse detection setting, so that every time the lamp is powered on or receives an external power supply, the installation detection module will first use the pulse detection setting to detect the lamp. Whether the tube is correctly installed and protected against electric shock, once it is determined that the lamp tube is correctly installed on the lamp holder and lit, the installation detection module will switch to the continuous detection setting to detect whether the lamp tube has been mistakenly touched the conductive part, resulting in the risk of electric shock . In addition, if the lamp is powered off, the installation detection module will reset to the pulse detection setting again.
搭配LED直管灯照明系统的硬件配置来看，不论安装检测模块是内置于LED直管灯内(如图17A所示)或外置在灯座上(如图17B所示)，设计者皆可依据需求选择性的将上述的脉冲检测设定与持续检测设定应用于LED直管灯照明系统中。换言之，无论是内置安装检测模块3000或外置安装检测模块3000的配置，安装检测模块皆可依照上述实施例的说明来进行安装检测与防触电保护的运作。In terms of the hardware configuration of the LED straight tube lighting system, no matter whether the installation detection module is built into the LED straight tube light (as shown in Figure 17A) or externally mounted on the lamp holder (as shown in Figure 17B), the designer The above-mentioned pulse detection setting and continuous detection setting can be selectively applied to the LED straight tube lighting system according to requirements. In other words, regardless of the configuration of the built-in installation detection module 3000 or the external installation detection module 3000, the installation detection module can perform installation detection and anti-shock protection operations according to the descriptions of the above embodiments.
内置安装检测模块与外置安装检测模块的差异在于外置安装检测模块的第一安装检测端与第二安装检测端是连接在外部电网/信号源与LED直管灯的接脚之间(亦即，串接在外部驱动信号的信号线上)，并且透过接脚电性连接到LED直管灯的电源回路上。另一方面，虽然在图式中并未直接绘示出，但本领域技术人员应可理解在本案的安装检测模块的实施例中，安装检测模块更包含用以产生驱动电压的偏压电路，其中所述驱动电压是提供给安装检测模块中的各电路运作所需的电源。The difference between the built-in installation detection module and the external installation detection module is that the first installation detection terminal and the second installation detection terminal of the external installation detection module are connected between the external power grid/signal source and the pins of the LED straight tube light (also That is, it is serially connected to the signal line of the external driving signal), and is electrically connected to the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp through the pins. On the other hand, although it is not directly shown in the drawings, those skilled in the art should understand that in the embodiment of the installation detection module of the present application, the installation detection module further includes a bias circuit for generating a driving voltage, The driving voltage is provided to the power required for the operation of each circuit in the installation detection module.
图19A、20A、21A、22A、23A、24A、28A、30A、34A和35A实施例教示安装检测模块包括例如检测脉冲发生模块3110、3210与3510、脉冲产生辅助电路3310以及信号产生单元3410等用以产生脉冲信号的脉冲产生机制，但本申请的脉冲产生手段不仅限于此。在一范例实施例中，安装检测模块可以利用电源模块既有的频率信号来取代前述实施例的脉冲产生机制的功能。举例来说，驱动电路(例如直流对直流转换器)为了要产生具有脉冲波形的点亮控制信号，其本身就会有一个参考频率。而所述脉冲产生机制的功能可以利用参考点亮控制信号的参考频率来实施，使得检测脉冲发生模块3110、3210与3510、脉冲产生辅助电路3310以及信号产生单元3410等硬件电路可以被省略。换言之，安装检测模块可以与电源模块中的其他部分共享电路架构，从而实现产生脉冲信号的功能。除此之外，本申请实施例的脉冲产生手段所产生的脉冲占空比可以是大于0(常闭)至小于等于1的区间中的任一数值，具体设置视实际安装检测机制而定。19A, 20A, 21A, 22A, 23A, 24A, 28A, 30A, 34A, and 35A embodiments teach that the installation detection module includes, for example, detection pulse generation modules 3110, 3210 and 3510, pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310, and signal generation unit 3410. A pulse generating mechanism for generating a pulse signal, but the pulse generating means of the present application is not limited to this. In an exemplary embodiment, the installation detection module may utilize the existing frequency signal of the power module to replace the function of the pulse generating mechanism of the foregoing embodiment. For example, a driving circuit (such as a DC-DC converter) has a reference frequency in order to generate a lighting control signal with a pulse waveform. The function of the pulse generation mechanism can be implemented by using the reference frequency of the reference lighting control signal, so that hardware circuits such as the detection pulse generation modules 3110, 3210 and 3510, the pulse generation auxiliary circuit 3310 and the signal generation unit 3410 can be omitted. In other words, the installation detection module can share the circuit structure with other parts in the power module, so as to realize the function of generating the pulse signal. In addition, the pulse duty ratio generated by the pulse generating means of the embodiment of the present application may be any value in the interval greater than 0 (normally closed) to less than or equal to 1, and the specific setting depends on the actual installation detection mechanism.
其中，若脉冲产生手段所产生的脉冲信号占空比设定为大于0且小于1时，安装检测模块是透过暂时导通电源回路/检测路径并在导通期间检测电源回路/检测路径上的信号的方式，以在不造成电击危险的前提下判断灯管是否正确安装，并且在判定灯管被正确安装至灯座上时(两端接脚皆正确与灯座插座连接)，将限流手段切换为关闭/禁能的状态(例如，使开关电路切换为导通)，使得LED模块可以正常被点亮。在此设置底下，所述限流手段会预设为启动 /使能的状态(例如，使开关电路预设为截止)，进而在确认无触电风险之前(即，灯管已正确安装)，令电源回路维持在被截止/限流的状态(即，此时LED模块无法被点亮)，并且在判定灯管正确安装之后才会将限流手段切换为关闭/禁能的状态。此类配置可称之为脉冲检测设定(占空比设定为大于0且小于1)。在所述脉冲检测设定下，安装检测动作是在外部电源接入后于每个脉冲的使能期间内进行(即，此时LED模块尚未被点亮)，此时具体的防触电手段是透过“当确定灯管正确安装时才不进行限流”来实现。Wherein, if the duty ratio of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generating means is set to be greater than 0 and less than 1, the installation detection module is to temporarily turn on the power loop/detection path and detect the power loop/detection path during the conduction period. In order to judge whether the lamp tube is installed correctly without causing the danger of electric shock, and when it is judged that the lamp tube is correctly installed on the lamp socket (the pins at both ends are correctly connected to the lamp socket socket), the limit The flow means is switched to an off/disabled state (eg, the switch circuit is switched on), so that the LED module can be normally lit. Under this setting, the current limiting means will be preset to enable/enable state (for example, the switch circuit is preset to be off), so that before confirming that there is no risk of electric shock (ie, the lamp has been installed correctly), the The power loop is maintained in a cut-off/current-limited state (ie, the LED module cannot be lit at this time), and the current-limiting means will be switched to a closed/disabled state only after it is determined that the lamp is properly installed. Such a configuration may be referred to as a pulse detection setting (the duty cycle is set to be greater than 0 and less than 1). Under the pulse detection setting, the installation detection action is performed within the enabling period of each pulse after the external power supply is connected (that is, the LED module has not been lit at this time). This is achieved by "do not limit current when it is certain that the lamp is installed correctly".
若脉冲产生手段所产生的脉冲信号占空比为1时，安装检测模块可实时地/持续地检测电源回路/检测路径上的信号，以作为判断等效阻抗的基础，并且在判定等效阻抗变化指示有人员触电风险时，将限流手段切换为开启/使能的状态(例如，使开关电路切换为截止)，进而令灯管断电。在此设置底下，所述限流手段会预设为关闭/禁能的状态(例如，使开关电路预设为导通)，进而在确认有触电风险之前，令电源回路是维持在被导通/未限流的状态(即，此时LED模块可被点亮)，并且在判定真的有触电风险可能存在时才会将限流手段切换为开启/使能的状态。此类配置可称之为持续检测设定(占空比设定为1)。在所述持续检测设定下，安装检测动作是在外部电源接入后，无论灯管是否点亮都会持续的进行，此时具体的防触电手段是透过“当确定有触电风险发生时立即进行限流”来实现。If the duty cycle of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generating means is 1, the installation detection module can detect the signal on the power circuit/detection path in real time/continuously, as the basis for judging the equivalent impedance, and when judging the equivalent impedance When the change indicates that there is a risk of electric shock to personnel, the current limiting means is switched to an on/enabled state (for example, the switch circuit is switched to off), and then the lamp is powered off. Under this setting, the current limiting means is preset to a closed/disabled state (for example, the switch circuit is preset to be turned on), so that the power circuit is maintained to be turned on before the risk of electric shock is confirmed / Unlimited state (ie, the LED module can be turned on at this time), and the current limiting means will be switched to the ON/enabled state only when it is determined that there is a real risk of electric shock. Such a configuration may be referred to as a continuous detection setting (duty cycle set to 1). Under the continuous detection setting, the installation detection operation will continue after the external power supply is connected, regardless of whether the lamp is lit or not. current limit" to achieve.
进一步的说，触电的风险是只要在灯管任一端接入外部电源时即有可能产生，如图23A所示，不论安装人员是进行灯管的安装或拆卸，只要是手接触到灯管的导电部分即会使安装人员暴露在触电的风险。为了避免此类风险，在本实施例中，无论灯管是否处于被点亮的状态，所述安装检测模块皆可在灯管有外部电源接入的情形下，依照所述脉冲检测设定或持续检测设定来对安装情形与触电情形进行全面的检测与保护，使得灯管的使用安全性可进一步提升。Further, the risk of electric shock is likely to occur as long as either end of the lamp is connected to an external power supply, as shown in Figure 23A, regardless of whether the installer is installing or disassembling the lamp, as long as the hand touches the lamp. Conductive parts expose installers to the risk of electric shock. In order to avoid such risks, in this embodiment, no matter whether the lamp is lit or not, the installation detection module can be set according to the pulse detection or according to the pulse detection when the lamp is connected to an external power supply. Continuous detection and setting are used to comprehensively detect and protect the installation situation and electric shock situation, so that the safety of the lamp can be further improved.
于此附带一提的是，在持续检测设定的应用下，所述脉冲产生手段也可视为一路径使能手段，其是用以预设提供一开启信号来导通电源回路/检测路径。在此应用底下，在一范例实施例中，前述实施例的检测脉冲发生模块3110、3210与3510、脉冲产生辅助电路3310以及信号产生单元3410的电路架构可对应的修改为提供固定电压的电路架构。此外，限流电路/开关电路3200、3200a-3200L切换逻辑可对应的修改为预设为导通，并且在判定有触电风险时截止(可通过调整检测结果锁存电路的逻辑门来实现)。在另一范例实施例中，透过调整检测判定电路与检测路径电路的设置，用以产生脉冲的电路架构可以被省略。举例来说，第一较佳实施例的安装检测模块3000a可以仅包含检测结果锁存电路3120、检测判定电路3130以及限流电路3200a，第二较佳实施例的安装检测模块可以仅包含检测结果锁存电路3220、检测判定电路3230以及开关电路3200b，其他较佳实施例的配置可以此类推。此外，在设置有额外检测路径的架构底下，若采用持续检测设定，则检测脉冲发生模块3510可以被省略，并且检测路径电路3560可以设置为维持在导通状态(例如省略晶体管M51)。It should be mentioned here that, in the application of continuous detection setting, the pulse generating means can also be regarded as a path enabling means, which is used to provide a predetermined turn-on signal to turn on the power loop/detection path. . Under this application, in an exemplary embodiment, the circuit structures of the detection pulse generating modules 3110 , 3210 and 3510 , the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 and the signal generating unit 3410 in the foregoing embodiments can be correspondingly modified to provide a fixed voltage circuit structure. . In addition, the switching logic of the current limiting circuit/ switching circuit 3200, 3200a-3200L can be correspondingly modified to be turned on by default, and turned off when it is determined that there is a risk of electric shock (this can be achieved by adjusting the logic gate of the detection result latch circuit). In another exemplary embodiment, by adjusting the settings of the detection determination circuit and the detection path circuit, the circuit structure for generating the pulse can be omitted. For example, the installation detection module 3000a of the first preferred embodiment may only include the detection result latch circuit 3120, the detection determination circuit 3130 and the current limiting circuit 3200a, and the installation detection module of the second preferred embodiment may only include the detection result The configurations of the latch circuit 3220, the detection and determination circuit 3230, and the switch circuit 3200b, and other preferred embodiments can be deduced by analogy. In addition, under the architecture provided with the additional detection path, if the continuous detection setting is adopted, the detection pulse generation module 3510 can be omitted, and the detection path circuit 3560 can be set to remain in an on state (eg, the transistor M51 is omitted).
请参见图27，图27是本申请第十一实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。在本实施例中，LED直管灯1200例如是直接接收外部电网508所提供的外部驱动信号，其中所述外部驱动信号通过火线(L)与中性线(N)给到LED直管灯1200的两端接脚501、502上。在实际应用中，LED直管灯1200可更包括接脚503、504。在LED直管灯1200包含有4根接脚501-504的结构底下，依设计需求同侧灯头上的两接脚(如501与503，或502与504)可以电性连接在一起或是相互电性独立，本申请不以此为限。触电检测模块4000设置于灯管内并包括检测控制电路4100以及限流电路4200，所述触电检测模块4000亦可称为安装检测模块4000(底下以安装检测模块进行描述3000)。限流电路4200经第一安装检测端TE1耦接整流电路510，以及经第二安装检测端TE2耦接滤波电路520，亦即串接在LED直管灯1200的电源回路上。检测控制电路4100会在检测模式下检测整流电路510输入端上的信号(即，外部电网508所提供的信号)，并根据检测结果决定是否禁止电流流过LED直管灯1200。当LED直管灯1200尚未正确安装于灯座时，检测控制电路4100会检测到较小的电流信号而判断信号流过过高的阻抗，此时限流电路4200会将第一安装检测端TE1和第二安装检测端TE2之间的电流路径截止使LED直管灯1200停止操作(即，使LED直管灯1200不被点亮)。若否，检测控制电路4100判断LED直管灯1200正确安装于灯座上，限流电路4200会维持第一安装检测端TE1和第二安装检测端TE2之间导通使LED直管灯1200正常操作(即，使LED直管灯1200可被正常点亮)。换言之，当检测控制电路4100从整流电路510的输入端取样并检测到的电流高于安装设定电流(或电流值)时，检测控制电路4100判断LED直管灯1200正确安装于灯座上而使限流电路4200导通，使LED直管灯1200操作于一导通状态；当检测控制电路4100从整流电路510的输入端取样并检测到的电流低于所述安装设定电流(或电流值)时，检测控制电路4100判断LED直管灯1200未正确安装于灯座上而使限流电路4200截止，使LED直管灯1200进入一不导通状态或是令LED直管灯1200的电源回路上的电流有效值被限缩至小于5mA(基于验证标准则为5MIU)。换句话说，安装检测模块4000基于检测到的阻抗判断导通或截止，使LED直管灯1200操作于导通或进入不导通/限制电流状态。藉此，可以避免使用者在LED直管灯1200尚未正确安装于灯座时因误触LED直管灯1200导电部分而触电的问题。Please refer to FIG. 27 . FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the LED straight tube light 1200, for example, directly receives an external driving signal provided by the external power grid 508, wherein the external driving signal is supplied to the LED straight tube light 1200 through the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N). on both ends of the pins 501 and 502. In practical applications, the LED straight tube lamp 1200 may further include pins 503 and 504 . Under the structure of the LED straight tube lamp 1200 including four pins 501-504, the two pins ( eg 501 and 503, or 502 and 504) on the same side of the lamp head can be electrically connected together or with each other according to design requirements. Electrically independent, this application is not limited to this. The electric shock detection module 4000 is disposed in the lamp tube and includes a detection control circuit 4100 and a current limiting circuit 4200. The electric shock detection module 4000 may also be referred to as an installation detection module 4000 (the installation detection module 3000 is described below). The current limiting circuit 4200 is coupled to the rectifier circuit 510 via the first installation detection terminal TE1 , and is coupled to the filter circuit 520 via the second installation detection terminal TE2 , that is, connected in series to the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp 1200 . The detection control circuit 4100 detects the signal on the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510 (ie, the signal provided by the external power grid 508 ) in the detection mode, and determines whether to prohibit the current flowing through the LED straight tube lamp 1200 according to the detection result. When the LED straight tube lamp 1200 has not been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the detection control circuit 4100 will detect a small current signal and determine that the signal flows through an excessively high impedance. At this time, the current limiting circuit 4200 will connect the first installation detection terminal TE1 and The current path between the second installation detection terminals TE2 is cut off, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1200 stops operating (ie, the LED straight tube lamp 1200 is not lit). If not, the detection control circuit 4100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1200 is correctly installed on the lamp socket, and the current limiting circuit 4200 will maintain the conduction between the first installation detection terminal TE1 and the second installation detection terminal TE2 to make the LED straight tube lamp 1200 normal operation (ie, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1200 can be normally lit). In other words, when the detection control circuit 4100 samples from the input end of the rectifier circuit 510 and detects that the current is higher than the installation setting current (or current value), the detection control circuit 4100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1200 is correctly installed on the lamp socket and The current limiting circuit 4200 is turned on, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1200 operates in a conducting state; when the detection control circuit 4100 samples from the input end of the rectifier circuit 510 and detects that the current is lower than the installation set current (or current value), the detection control circuit 4100 judges that the LED straight tube lamp 1200 is not correctly installed on the lamp socket, so that the current limiting circuit 4200 is turned off, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1200 enters a non-conducting state or makes the LED straight tube lamp 1200 The rms current on the power loop is limited to less than 5mA (5MIU based on validation criteria). In other words, the installation detection module 4000 determines whether to turn on or off based on the detected impedance, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1200 is operated to be turned on or into a non-conduction/limited current state. In this way, the problem of electric shock caused by the user accidentally touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube light 1200 when the LED straight tube light 1200 is not properly installed on the lamp socket can be avoided.
更具体的说，因为当人体接触灯管时，人体的阻抗会导致电源回路上的等效阻抗改变，安装检测模块4000可藉由检测电源回路上的电压/电流变化来判断用户是否接触灯管，即可实现上述的防触电功能。换言之，在本申请实施例中，安装检测模块4000可以透过检测电信号(包括电压或电流)来判断灯管是否被正确安装以及使用者是否在灯管未正确安装的情况下误触灯管的导电部分。相较于图18实施例而言，由于本实施例的检测控制电路4100是通过取样桥前信号进行检测，因此较不易受电源模块中的其他电路影响而发生误判的问题。More specifically, when the human body touches the lamp, the impedance of the human body will cause the equivalent impedance on the power circuit to change. The installation detection module 4000 can determine whether the user touches the lamp by detecting the voltage/current change on the power circuit. , the above-mentioned anti-electric shock function can be realized. In other words, in the embodiment of the present application, the installation detection module 4000 can determine whether the lamp is installed correctly and whether the user touches the lamp by mistake by detecting electrical signals (including voltage or current) the conductive part. Compared with the embodiment of FIG. 18 , since the detection control circuit 4100 of this embodiment performs detection by sampling the pre-bridge signal, it is less susceptible to the problem of misjudgment caused by the influence of other circuits in the power module.
从电路操作的角度来看，检测控制电路4100判断LED直管灯1200是否正确安装至灯座上/是否有异常的阻抗接入的步骤如图48A所示，包括：使检测路径导通一段期间后关断(步骤S101)；在检测路径导通的期间取样检测路径上的电信号(步骤S102)；判断取样到的电信 号是否符合预设信号特征(步骤S103)；当步骤S103判定为是时，控制限流电路4200操作在第一组态(步骤S104)；以及当步骤S103判定为否时，控制限流电路4200操作在第二组态(步骤S105)，并且接着回到步骤S101。From the perspective of circuit operation, the steps for the detection control circuit 4100 to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp 1200 is correctly installed on the lamp socket/whether there is abnormal impedance access is shown in FIG. 48A , including: making the detection path conductive for a period of time Then turn off (step S101 ); sample the electrical signal on the detection path during the conduction period of the detection path (step S102 ); determine whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics (step S103 ); when the step S103 is determined to be yes , the control current limiting circuit 4200 operates in the first configuration (step S104 ); and when the determination in step S103 is NO, the control current limiting circuit 4200 operates in the second configuration (step S105 ), and then returns to step S101 .
在本实施例中，所述检测路径可以连接在整流电路510的输入侧与接地端之间的电流路径，其具体配置可以参考图28A和28B实施例的说明。另外，检测控制电路4100导通检测路径的期间长度、间隔、触发时间等设置，可参考相关实施例的说明。In this embodiment, the detection path may be connected to the current path between the input side of the rectifier circuit 510 and the ground terminal, and the specific configuration thereof may refer to the description of the embodiments in FIGS. 28A and 28B . In addition, for settings such as the period length, interval, and trigger time of the detection control circuit 4100 conducting the detection path, reference may be made to the description of the related embodiments.
在步骤S101中，使检测路径导通一段期间可以通过脉冲式的开关控制手段来实现。In step S101 , conducting the detection path for a period of time may be implemented by a pulsed switch control means.
在步骤S102中，取样的电信号可以是电压信号、电流信号、频率信号或相位信号等可以表现检测路径的阻抗变化的信号。In step S102, the sampled electrical signal may be a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, or a phase signal, or a signal that can represent the impedance change of the detection path.
在步骤S103中，判断取样到的电信号是否符合预设信号特征的动作可例如是比较取样的电信号与一预设信号的相对关系。在本实施例中，检测控制器4100判定电信号符合预设信号特征可以是对应至判定LED直管灯为正确安装/无异常阻抗接入的状态，并且检测控制器7100判定电信号不符合预设信号特征可以是对应至判定LED直管灯为不正确安装/有异常阻抗接入的状态。In step S103, the action of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the predetermined signal characteristic may be, for example, comparing the relative relationship between the sampled electrical signal and a predetermined signal. In this embodiment, the detection controller 4100 determines that the electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics, which may correspond to determining that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed/connected without abnormal impedance, and the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal does not conform to the preset signal characteristics. It is assumed that the signal characteristics may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed/connected with abnormal impedance.
在步骤S104与S105中，所述第一组态及第二组态为两相异的电路组态，并且可视限流电路3200的配置位置及类型而定。举例来说，在限流电路4200为独立于驱动电路并串接在电源回路上的开关电路/限流电路的实施例下，所述第一组态可以是导通组态(不限流组态)，并且所述第二组态可以是截止组态(限流组态)。In steps S104 and S105 , the first configuration and the second configuration are two different circuit configurations, and may depend on the configuration position and type of the current limiting circuit 3200 . For example, in the embodiment in which the current limiting circuit 4200 is a switch circuit/current limiting circuit which is independent of the driving circuit and is connected to the power supply loop in series, the first configuration may be a conduction configuration (unlimited current set) state), and the second configuration may be a cut-off configuration (current limiting configuration).
上述各步骤的详细操作及电路范例可参考触电检测模块/安装检测模块的各个实施例。For detailed operations and circuit examples of the above steps, reference may be made to the various embodiments of the electric shock detection module/installation detection module.
请参见图28A，图28A是本申请第十实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块4000a包含检测脉冲发生模块4110、控制电路4120、检测判定电路4130、检测路径电路3560以及开关电路4200a。检测判定电路4130经路径4161耦接检测路径电路4160，以检测检测路径电路4160上的信号。检测判定电路4130同时经路径4131耦接控制电路4120，以将检测结果信号经路径4131传送至控制电路4120。检测脉冲发生模块4110通过路径4111耦接检测路径电路4160，并产生脉冲信号以通知检测路径电路4160导通检测路径或执行检测动作的时机点。控制电路4120根据检测结果信号锁存检测结果，经路径4121耦接开关电路4200a，以将检测结果传送或反映至开关电路4200a。开关电路4200a根据检测结果，决定使第一安装检测端TE1以及第二安装检测端TE2之间导通或截止。检测路径电路4160经由第一检测连接端DE1与第二检测连接端DE2耦接至电源模块的电源回路上。有关于检测脉冲发生模块4110、控制电路4120、检测判定电路4130以及开关电路4200a的说明可以参考图23A实施例，于此不再重复赘述。Please refer to FIG. 28A . FIG. 28A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the installation detection module according to the tenth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 4000a includes a detection pulse generation module 4110, a control circuit 4120, a detection determination circuit 4130, a detection path circuit 3560, and a switch circuit 4200a. The detection determination circuit 4130 is coupled to the detection path circuit 4160 via the path 4161 to detect the signal on the detection path circuit 4160 . The detection and determination circuit 4130 is also coupled to the control circuit 4120 via the path 4131 to transmit the detection result signal to the control circuit 4120 via the path 4131 . The detection pulse generating module 4110 is coupled to the detection path circuit 4160 through the path 4111, and generates a pulse signal to notify the detection path circuit 4160 of the timing point of turning on the detection path or performing the detection operation. The control circuit 4120 latches the detection result according to the detection result signal, and is coupled to the switch circuit 4200a via the path 4121 to transmit or reflect the detection result to the switch circuit 4200a. The switch circuit 4200a decides to turn on or off the first mounting detection terminal TE1 and the second mounting detection terminal TE2 according to the detection result. The detection path circuit 4160 is coupled to the power loop of the power module via the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2. The description about the detection pulse generating module 4110 , the control circuit 4120 , the detection determination circuit 4130 and the switch circuit 4200 a can refer to the embodiment of FIG. 23A , and details are not repeated here.
在本实施例中，检测路径电路4160具有第一检测连接端DE1、第二检测连接端DE2以及第三检测连接端DE3，其中第一检测连接端DE1和第二检测连接端DE2电性连接整流电路510的两输入端，藉以从第一接脚501和第二接脚502上接收/取样外部驱动信号。检测路径电路6160会对接收/取样到的外部驱动信号进行整流，并且受控于检测脉冲发生模块而决定是否使整流后的外部驱动信号在一检测路径上流通。换言之，检测路径电路6160会响应于检测脉冲发生模块6110的控制而决定是否导通所述检测路径。利用脉冲信号导通检测路径并且检测是否有异常的外部阻抗接入等细部电路动作可以参考图23B至23D的说明，于此不再重复赘述。In this embodiment, the detection path circuit 4160 has a first detection connection terminal DE1, a second detection connection terminal DE2 and a third detection connection terminal DE3, wherein the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2 are electrically connected to the rectifier The two input terminals of the circuit 510 are used for receiving/sampling external driving signals from the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 . The detection path circuit 6160 rectifies the received/sampled external driving signal, and is controlled by the detection pulse generating module to determine whether to allow the rectified external driving signal to flow on a detection path. In other words, the detection path circuit 6160 determines whether to turn on the detection path in response to the control of the detection pulse generating module 6110 . The detailed circuit operations such as using the pulse signal to turn on the detection path and detect whether there is abnormal external impedance access can refer to the descriptions of FIGS. 23B to 23D , which will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块4000a可更包含应急控制模块4140和镇流检测模块4400。本实施例的应急控制模块4140和镇流检测模块4400的运作可以参照前述图19A实施例的说明。本实施例与前述实施例的差异在于本实施例的应急控制模块4140和镇流检测模块4400是通过检测整流电路510的输入侧上的信号来进行判断和后续的运作。相同或近似的部分于此不再重复赘述。In some embodiments, the installation detection module 4000a may further include an emergency control module 4140 and a ballast detection module 4400 . The operations of the emergency control module 4140 and the ballast detection module 4400 in this embodiment may refer to the description of the foregoing embodiment in FIG. 19A . The difference between this embodiment and the previous embodiments is that the emergency control module 4140 and the ballast detection module 4400 of this embodiment perform judgment and subsequent operations by detecting the signal on the input side of the rectifier circuit 510 . The same or similar parts are not repeated here.
请参照图28B，图28B是本申请第十实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。本实施例的检测路径电路3560的配置与运作大致上和前述实施例相同，其主要差异在于本实施例的检测路径电路3560还包括限流组件3097与3098。所述限流组件3097是以设置在第一整流输入端(即)与电阻R51的第一端之间的二极管为例(下称，二极管3097)，并且所述限流组件3098是以设置在第二整流输入端502与电阻R51的第一端之间的二极管为例(下称，二极管3098)。其中，二极管3097的阳极耦接第一整流输入端(即，整流电路510与第一接脚501连接的一端)，并且二极管3097的阴极耦接电阻R51的第一端。二极管3098的阳极耦接第二整流输入端(即，整流电路510与第二接脚502连接的一端)，并且二极管3098的阴极耦接电阻R51的第二端。在本实施例中，由第一接脚501与第二接脚502所接收的外部驱动信号/交流信号会经由二极管3097与3098被提供至电阻R51的第一端。在外部驱动信号的正半波期间内，二极管3097受到顺向偏压而导通，并且二极管3098受到逆向偏压而截止，使得检测路径电路3560等效于在第一整流输入端与第二整流输出端512(在本实施例中同第二滤波输出端522)之间建立检测路径。在外部驱动信号的负半波期间，二极管3097受到逆向偏压而截止，并且二极管3098受到顺向偏压而导通，使得检测路径电路3560等效于在第二整流输入端与第二整流输出端512之间建立检测路径。Please refer to FIG. 28B . FIG. 28B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the tenth embodiment of the present application. The configuration and operation of the detection path circuit 3560 of this embodiment are substantially the same as those of the foregoing embodiments, and the main difference is that the detection path circuit 3560 of this embodiment further includes current limiting components 3097 and 3098 . The current limiting component 3097 is a diode arranged between the first rectifier input end (ie) and the first end of the resistor R51 as an example (hereinafter referred to as diode 3097 ), and the current limiting component 3098 is arranged at The diode between the second rectification input terminal 502 and the first terminal of the resistor R51 is taken as an example (hereinafter referred to as the diode 3098). The anode of the diode 3097 is coupled to the first rectifier input end (ie, the end of the rectifier circuit 510 connected to the first pin 501 ), and the cathode of the diode 3097 is coupled to the first end of the resistor R51 . The anode of the diode 3098 is coupled to the second rectifier input end (ie, the end of the rectifier circuit 510 connected to the second pin 502 ), and the cathode of the diode 3098 is coupled to the second end of the resistor R51 . In this embodiment, the external driving signal/AC signal received by the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 is provided to the first end of the resistor R51 via the diodes 3097 and 3098 . During the positive half-wave period of the external driving signal, the diode 3097 is forward-biased and turned on, and the diode 3098 is reverse-biased and turned off, so that the detection path circuit 3560 is equivalent to connecting the first rectifier input terminal with the second rectifier A detection path is established between the output terminal 512 (and the second filter output terminal 522 in this embodiment). During the negative half-wave of the external driving signal, the diode 3097 is reverse biased and turned off, and the diode 3098 is forward biased and turned on, so that the detection path circuit 3560 is equivalent to the second rectification input terminal and the second rectification output A detection path is established between the terminals 512 .
本实施例的二极管3097与3098起到了限制交流信号的电源方向的作用，使得电阻R51的第一端不论是在交流信号的正半波或负半波期间都是接收到正电平信号(相较于接地电平而言)，进而令节点X上的电压信号不会随着交流信号的相位变化所影响，导致检测结果错误。再者，相较于前述实施例而言，由本实施例的检测路径电路3560所建立起的检测路径并非直接连接至电源模块的电源回路上，而是透过二极管3097与3098在整流输入端与整流输出端 之间建立起独立的检测路径。由于检测路径电路3560并非直接连接于电源回路上，并且仅有在检测模式会导通，故而在LED直管灯正常安装并且电源模块正常运作的情形下，电源回路上用于驱动LED模块的电流不会流经检测路径电路3560。由于检测路径电路3560无须承受电源模块在正常运作下的大电流，使得检测路径电路3560上的组件规格选择较为有弹性，并且同时令检测路径电路3560所造成的功率损耗较低。再者，相较于直接将检测路径连接至电源回路的实施例而言(如图20B至图20D)，由于本实施例的检测路径电路3560并不会直接与电源回路中的滤波电路520连接，因此在电路设计上也不用顾虑滤波电容会逆向对检测路径充电的问题，在电路设计上更为简便。The diodes 3097 and 3098 in this embodiment play the role of limiting the power supply direction of the AC signal, so that the first end of the resistor R51 receives a positive level signal (phase-phase Compared with the ground level), the voltage signal on the node X will not be affected by the phase change of the AC signal, resulting in an erroneous detection result. Furthermore, compared with the previous embodiment, the detection path established by the detection path circuit 3560 of this embodiment is not directly connected to the power supply loop of the power module, but is connected to the rectifier input terminal through the diodes 3097 and 3098. An independent detection path is established between the rectified output terminals. Since the detection path circuit 3560 is not directly connected to the power loop, and is only turned on in the detection mode, when the LED straight tube lamp is installed normally and the power module is operating normally, the current on the power loop used to drive the LED module Does not flow through the detection path circuit 3560. Since the detection path circuit 3560 does not need to bear the large current of the power module under normal operation, the selection of component specifications on the detection path circuit 3560 is more flexible, and at the same time, the power loss caused by the detection path circuit 3560 is lower. Furthermore, compared to the embodiment in which the detection path is directly connected to the power circuit (as shown in FIG. 20B to FIG. 20D ), the detection path circuit 3560 of this embodiment is not directly connected to the filter circuit 520 in the power circuit. Therefore, in the circuit design, there is no need to worry about the problem that the filter capacitor will reversely charge the detection path, which is more convenient in the circuit design.
请参见图29，图29是本申请第十二实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。在本实施例中，LED直管灯1300例如是直接接收外部电网508所提供的外部驱动信号，其中所述外部驱动信号通过火线(L)与中性线(N)给到LED直管灯1200的两端接脚501、502上。在实际应用中，LED直管灯1300可更包括接脚503、504。在LED直管灯1300包含有4根接脚501-504的结构底下，依设计需求同侧灯头上的两接脚(如501与503，或502与504)可以电性连接在一起或是相互电性独立，本申请不以此为限。触电检测模块5000设置于灯管内并包括检测控制电路5100以及限流电路5200，所述触电检测模块5000亦可称为安装检测模块(底下以安装检测模块5000进行描述)。限流电路5200是与驱动电路530搭配设置，其可例如是驱动电路530本身，或为用以控制驱动电路禁/使能的偏压调整电路(后续实施例会进一步说明)。从另一角度来说，驱动电路530和触电检测模块5000整体也可以视为是一个带有触电检测/安装检测功能的驱动电路。检测控制电路5100通过第一检测连接端DE1和第二检测连接端DE2电性连接电源回路，藉以在检测模式下取样并检测电源回路上的信号，并根据检测结果控制限流电路5200，以决定是否禁止电流流过LED直管灯1300。当LED直管灯1300尚未正确安装于灯座时，检测控制电路5100会检测到较小的电流信号而判断信号流过过高的阻抗，此时限流电路5200会禁能驱动电路530，以使LED直管灯1300停止操作(即，使LED直管灯1300不被点亮)。若否，检测控制电路5100判断LED直管灯1300正确安装于灯座上，限流电路5200会使能驱动电路530，以使LED直管灯1300正常操作(即，使LED直管灯1300可被正常点亮)。换言之，当检测控制电路5100从电源回路取样并检测到的电流高于安装设定电流(或电流值)时，检测控制电路5100判断LED直管灯1300正确安装于灯座上而控制限流电路5200使能驱动电路530；当检测控制电路5100从电源回路取样并检测到的电流低于所述安装设定电流(或电流值)时，检测控制电路5100判断LED直管灯1300未正确安装于灯座上而控制限流电路5200禁能驱动电路530，使LED直管灯1300进入一不导通状态或是令LED直管灯1300的电源回路上的电流有效值被限缩至小于5mA(基于验证标准则为5MIU)。换句话说，安装检测模块5000基于检测到的阻抗判断导通或截止，使LED直管灯1300操作于正常驱动或禁止驱动状态。藉此，可以避免使用者在LED直管灯1300尚未正确安装于灯座时因误触LED直管灯1300导电部分而触电的问题。Please refer to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the LED straight tube light 1300 directly receives, for example, an external driving signal provided by the external power grid 508 , wherein the external driving signal is supplied to the LED straight tube light 1200 through the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N). on both ends of the pins 501 and 502. In practical applications, the LED straight tube lamp 1300 may further include pins 503 and 504 . Under the structure that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 includes four pins 501-504, the two pins ( eg 501 and 503, or 502 and 504) on the same side of the lamp head can be electrically connected together or with each other according to design requirements. Electrically independent, this application is not limited to this. The electric shock detection module 5000 is disposed in the lamp tube and includes a detection control circuit 5100 and a current limiting circuit 5200. The electric shock detection module 5000 may also be called an installation detection module (the installation detection module 5000 will be described below). The current limiting circuit 5200 is configured in conjunction with the driving circuit 530 , which may be, for example, the driving circuit 530 itself, or a bias voltage adjusting circuit for controlling the disable/enable of the driving circuit (further described in the following embodiments). From another perspective, the whole of the driving circuit 530 and the electric shock detection module 5000 can also be regarded as a driving circuit with electric shock detection/installation detection function. The detection control circuit 5100 is electrically connected to the power circuit through the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2, so as to sample and detect the signal on the power circuit in the detection mode, and control the current limiting circuit 5200 according to the detection result to determine Whether to prohibit the current flow through the LED straight tube lamp 1300. When the LED straight tube lamp 1300 has not been properly installed in the lamp socket, the detection control circuit 5100 will detect a small current signal and determine that the signal flows through an excessively high impedance. At this time, the current limiting circuit 5200 will disable the driving circuit 530, so that the The LED straight tube light 1300 stops operating (ie, the LED straight tube light 1300 is not lit). If not, the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is correctly installed on the lamp socket, and the current limiting circuit 5200 enables the driving circuit 530 to make the LED straight tube lamp 1300 operate normally (ie, to enable the LED straight tube lamp 1300 to operate normally). is normally lit). In other words, when the detection control circuit 5100 samples from the power supply circuit and detects that the current is higher than the installation setting current (or current value), the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is correctly installed on the lamp socket and controls the current limiting circuit 5200 enables the drive circuit 530; when the detection control circuit 5100 samples from the power supply circuit and detects that the current is lower than the installation set current (or current value), the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is not correctly installed in the On the lamp socket, the current limiting circuit 5200 is controlled to disable the driving circuit 530, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 enters a non-conducting state or the RMS current on the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is limited to less than 5mA ( 5MIU based on validation criteria). In other words, the installation detection module 5000 determines whether it is turned on or off based on the detected impedance, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is operated in a normal driving state or a driving prohibition state. In this way, it is possible to avoid the problem of electric shock caused by the user accidentally touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube light 1300 when the LED straight tube light 1300 is not properly installed on the lamp socket.
更具体的说，因为当人体接触灯管时，人体的阻抗会导致电源回路上的等效阻抗改变，安装检测模块5000可藉由检测电源回路上的电压/电流变化来判断用户是否接触灯管，即可实现上述的防触电功能。换言之，在本申请实施例中，安装检测模块5000可以透过检测电信号(包括电压或电流)来判断灯管是否被正确安装以及使用者是否在灯管未正确安装的情况下误触灯管的导电部分。相较于图18或27实施例而言，由于本实施例的限流电路5200是通过控制驱动电路530来实现限流/防触电的效果，因此无须在电源回路上串接额外的开关电路来做触电保护。由于串接在电源回路上的开关电用通常需要承受大电流，以致于所选用的晶体管尺寸受到严格的限制。因此省略串接在电源回路上的开关电路可以大幅地降低安装检测模块的整体成本。More specifically, when the human body touches the lamp, the impedance of the human body will cause the equivalent impedance on the power circuit to change. The installation detection module 5000 can determine whether the user touches the lamp by detecting the voltage/current change on the power circuit. , the above-mentioned anti-electric shock function can be realized. In other words, in the embodiment of the present application, the installation detection module 5000 can determine whether the lamp is installed correctly and whether the user touches the lamp by mistake by detecting electrical signals (including voltage or current) the conductive part. 18 or 27, since the current limiting circuit 5200 of the present embodiment achieves the effect of current limiting/anti-electric shock by controlling the driving circuit 530, there is no need to connect an additional switch circuit in series on the power circuit to Do electric shock protection. Since the switching power supply connected in series on the power loop usually needs to bear a large current, the size of the selected transistor is strictly limited. Therefore, omitting the switch circuit connected in series on the power circuit can greatly reduce the overall cost of installing the detection module.
从电路操作的角度来看，检测控制电路5100判断LED直管灯1300是否正确安装至灯座上/是否有异常的阻抗接入的步骤如图48A所示，包括：使检测路径导通一段期间后关断(步骤S101)；在检测路径导通的期间取样检测路径上的电信号(步骤S102)；判断取样到的电信号是否符合预设信号特征(步骤S103)；当步骤S103判定为是时，控制限流电路5200操作在第一组态(步骤S104)；以及当步骤S103判定为否时，控制限流电路5200操作在第二组态(步骤S105)，并且接着回到步骤S101。From the perspective of circuit operation, the steps of the detection control circuit 5100 to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is correctly installed on the lamp socket/whether there is abnormal impedance access is shown in FIG. 48A , including: making the detection path conductive for a period of time Then turn off (step S101 ); sample the electrical signal on the detection path during the conduction period of the detection path (step S102 ); determine whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics (step S103 ); when the step S103 is determined to be yes , the control current limiting circuit 5200 operates in the first configuration (step S104 ); and when the determination in step S103 is NO, the control current limiting circuit 5200 operates in the second configuration (step S105 ), and then returns to step S101 .
在本实施例中，所述检测路径可以是连接在整流电路510输出侧的电流路径，其具体配置可以参考下述图30A至33C实施例的说明。另外，检测控制电路4100导通检测路径的期间长度、间隔、触发时间等设置，可参考相关实施例的说明。In this embodiment, the detection path may be a current path connected to the output side of the rectifier circuit 510 , and reference may be made to the following descriptions of the embodiments in FIGS. 30A to 33C for the specific configuration. In addition, for settings such as the period length, interval, and trigger time of the detection control circuit 4100 conducting the detection path, reference may be made to the description of the related embodiments.
在步骤S101中，使检测路径导通一段期间可以通过脉冲式的开关控制手段来实现。In step S101 , conducting the detection path for a period of time may be implemented by a pulsed switch control means.
在步骤S102中，取样的电信号可以是电压信号、电流信号、频率信号或相位信号等可以表现检测路径的阻抗变化的信号。In step S102, the sampled electrical signal may be a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, or a phase signal, or a signal that can represent the impedance change of the detection path.
在步骤S103中，判断取样到的电信号是否符合预设信号特征的动作可例如是比较取样的电信号与一预设信号的相对关系。在本实施例中，检测控制器5100判定电信号符合预设信号特征可以是对应至判定LED直管灯为正确安装/无异常阻抗接入的状态，并且检测控制器7100判定电信号不符合预设信号特征可以是对应至判定LED直管灯为不正确安装/有异常阻抗接入的状态。In step S103, the action of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the predetermined signal characteristic may be, for example, comparing the relative relationship between the sampled electrical signal and a predetermined signal. In this embodiment, the detection controller 5100 determines that the electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics, which may correspond to determining that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed/connected with no abnormal impedance, and the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal does not conform to the preset signal characteristics. It is assumed that the signal characteristics may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed/connected with abnormal impedance.
在步骤S104与S105中，所述第一组态及第二组态为两相异的电路组态，并且可视限流电路3200的配置位置及类型而定。举例来说，在限流电路5200为与驱动控制器的电源端或启动端相连的偏压调整电路的实施例下，所述第一组态可以是截止组态(正常偏压组态)，并且所述第二组态可以是导通组态(调整偏压组态)。在限流电路5200为驱动电路中的功率开关的实施例下，所述第一组态可以是驱动控制组态(即，仅由驱动控制器来控制功率开关的切换，检测控制器7100不影响功率开关的控制)，并且所述第二组态可以是截止组态。In steps S104 and S105 , the first configuration and the second configuration are two different circuit configurations, and may depend on the configuration position and type of the current limiting circuit 3200 . For example, in the embodiment in which the current limiting circuit 5200 is a bias adjustment circuit connected to the power supply terminal or the start terminal of the drive controller, the first configuration may be a cut-off configuration (normal bias configuration), And the second configuration may be a turn-on configuration (adjusted bias configuration). In the embodiment in which the current limiting circuit 5200 is a power switch in the driving circuit, the first configuration may be a driving control configuration (that is, the switching of the power switch is only controlled by the driving controller, and the detection controller 7100 does not affect the switching of the power switch). control of the power switch), and the second configuration may be a cut-off configuration.
上述各步骤的详细操作及电路范例可参考触电检测模块/安装检测模块的各个实施例。For detailed operations and circuit examples of the above steps, reference may be made to the various embodiments of the electric shock detection module/installation detection module.
请再参照图29，在一些实施例中，LED直管灯5000可以更包括频闪抑制电路590。频闪抑制电路590会被设置为与LED模块耦接，并且会在LED直管灯5000处在工作模式下基于母线电压来调整提供给LED模块的电流，使得通过LED模块的电流更为均匀，并且较不会受到纹波电压的影响。Referring to FIG. 29 again, in some embodiments, the LED straight tube lamp 5000 may further include a stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 . The stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 will be configured to be coupled to the LED module, and will adjust the current provided to the LED module based on the bus voltage when the LED straight tube lamp 5000 is in the working mode, so that the current passing through the LED module is more uniform, And less affected by ripple voltage.
在本实施例中，限流电路5200可以是与频闪抑制电路590搭配设置，亦即限流电路5200可例如是频闪抑制电路590本身(部分或全部)，或为用以控制频闪抑制电路590禁/使能的偏压调整电路(后续实施例会进一步说明)。In this embodiment, the current-limiting circuit 5200 may be configured in conjunction with the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590, that is, the current-limiting circuit 5200 may be, for example, the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 itself (part or all), or for controlling the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590. The circuit 590 disables/enables a bias voltage adjustment circuit (further descriptions will be made in subsequent embodiments).
在一些实施例中，虽然图29是以同一个功能方块来表示驱动电路530和频闪抑制电路590，但本揭露不以此为限。在实际应用中，驱动电路530和频闪抑制电路590也可同时存在于电源模块中。In some embodiments, although FIG. 29 represents the driving circuit 530 and the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 in the same functional block, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. In practical applications, the driving circuit 530 and the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 may also exist in the power module at the same time.
具体而言，在检测模式下，检测控制电路5100通过第一检测连接端DE1和第二检测连接端DE2电性连接电源回路，藉以在检测模式下取样并检测电源回路上的信号，并根据检测结果控制限流电路5200，以决定是否禁止电流流过LED直管灯1300。当LED直管灯1300尚未正确安装于灯座时，检测控制电路5100会检测到较小的电流信号而判断信号流过过高的阻抗，此时限流电路5200会禁能频闪抑制电路590，以使LED直管灯1300停止操作(即，使LED直管灯1300不被点亮)。若否，检测控制电路5100判断LED直管灯1300正确安装于灯座上，LED直管灯进入工作模式。此时限流电路5200会使能频闪抑制电路590，以使LED直管灯1300正常操作(即，使LED直管灯1300可被正常点亮，并且频闪抑制电路590基于电压变化调整流过LED模块的电流)。换言之，当检测控制电路5100从电源回路取样并检测到的电流高于安装设定电流(或电流值)时，检测控制电路5100判断LED直管灯1300正确安装于灯座上而控制限流电路5200使能频闪抑制电路590，使频闪抑制电路590能响应于母线的纹波电压而对电流变化起到抑制作用，进而抑制LED直管灯频闪的问题；当检测控制电路5100从电源回路取样并检测到的电流低于所述安装设定电流(或电流值)时，检测控制电路5100判断LED直管灯1300未正确安装于灯座上而控制限流电路5200禁能频闪抑制电路590，使LED直管灯1300进入一不导通状态或是令LED直管灯1300的电源回路上的电流有效值被限缩至小于5mA(基于验证标准则为5MIU)。Specifically, in the detection mode, the detection control circuit 5100 is electrically connected to the power circuit through the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2, so as to sample and detect the signal on the power circuit in the detection mode, and according to the detection As a result, the current limiting circuit 5200 is controlled to determine whether to prohibit the current flowing through the LED straight tube lamp 1300 . When the LED straight tube lamp 1300 has not been properly installed in the lamp socket, the detection control circuit 5100 will detect a small current signal and determine that the signal flows through an excessively high impedance. At this time, the current limiting circuit 5200 will disable the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590. In order to stop the operation of the LED straight tube lamp 1300 (ie, the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is not lit). If not, the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED straight tube light 1300 is correctly installed on the lamp socket, and the LED straight tube light enters the working mode. At this time, the current limiting circuit 5200 will enable the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 can operate normally (ie, the LED straight tube lamp 1300 can be normally lit, and the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 can adjust the flow through the LED module current). In other words, when the detection control circuit 5100 samples from the power supply circuit and detects that the current is higher than the installation setting current (or current value), the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is correctly installed on the lamp socket and controls the current limiting circuit 5200 enables the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590, so that the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 can suppress the current change in response to the ripple voltage of the bus bar, thereby suppressing the stroboscopic problem of the LED straight tube lamp; When the current sampled and detected by the loop is lower than the installation set current (or current value), the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1300 is not correctly installed on the lamp holder and controls the current limiting circuit 5200 to disable stroboscopic suppression The circuit 590 makes the LED straight tube lamp 1300 enter a non-conducting state or limits the effective value of the current on the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp 1300 to less than 5mA (5MIU based on the verification standard).
请参见图30A，图30A是本申请第十一实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块包含检测脉冲发生模块5110、控制电路5120、检测判定电路5130以及检测路径电路5160。检测脉冲发生模块5110经由路径5111电性连接检测路径电路5160，用以产生包含有至少一脉冲的控制信号。检测路径电路5160经由第一检测连接端DE1与第二检测连接端DE2连接至电源模块的电源回路上，并且反应于控制信号而在脉冲期间导通检测路径。检测 判定电路5130经由路径5161连接所述检测路径电路5160，藉以根据检测路径上的信号特征来判断LED直管灯与灯座之间的安装状态，并且根据检测结果发出对应的检测结果信号，所述检测结果信号会经由路径5131提供给后端的控制电路5120。控制电路5120经由路径5121连接至驱动电路530，其中驱动电路530会参考控制电路5120所发出的安装状态信号来调整其运作状态。Please refer to FIG. 30A . FIG. 30A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module includes a detection pulse generation module 5110 , a control circuit 5120 , a detection determination circuit 5130 and a detection path circuit 5160 . The detection pulse generating module 5110 is electrically connected to the detection path circuit 5160 via the path 5111 for generating a control signal including at least one pulse. The detection path circuit 5160 is connected to the power circuit of the power module via the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2, and conducts the detection path during the pulse period in response to the control signal. The detection and determination circuit 5130 is connected to the detection path circuit 5160 via the path 5161, so as to determine the installation state between the LED straight tube lamp and the lamp holder according to the signal characteristics on the detection path, and send out the corresponding detection result signal according to the detection result, so The detection result signal will be provided to the back-end control circuit 5120 via the path 5131 . The control circuit 5120 is connected to the drive circuit 530 via the path 5121 , wherein the drive circuit 530 adjusts its operating state with reference to the installation state signal sent by the control circuit 5120 .
从安装检测模块5000a的整体运作来看，在LED直管灯通电时，检测脉冲发生模块5110会先反应于加入的外部电源而启动，藉以产生脉冲来短暂导通检测路径电路5160所构成的检测路径。在检测路径导通的期间，检测判定电路5130会取样检测路径上的信号并判断LED直管灯是否正确的被安装在灯座上或是否有人体接触LED直管灯导致漏电。检测判定电路5130会根据检测结果产生对应的检测结果信号传送给控制电路5120。当控制电路5120接收到指示灯管已正确安装的检测结果信号时，控制电路5120发出相应的安装状态信号以控制驱动电路530正常启动，并进行电源转换以提供后端LED模块电力。相反地，当控制电路5120接收到指示灯管未正确安装的检测结果信号时，控制电路5120发出相应的安装状态信号以控制驱动电路530不启动/停止工作，进而令在电源回路上流通的电流可被限制在安全值以下。From the perspective of the overall operation of the installation detection module 5000a, when the LED straight tube lamp is powered on, the detection pulse generation module 5110 will be activated first in response to the added external power supply, thereby generating pulses to briefly turn on the detection circuit formed by the detection path circuit 5160. path. During the conduction period of the detection path, the detection and determination circuit 5130 will sample the signal on the detection path and determine whether the LED straight tube light is correctly installed on the lamp socket or whether there is a human body contacting the LED straight tube light to cause leakage. The detection determination circuit 5130 generates a corresponding detection result signal according to the detection result and transmits it to the control circuit 5120 . When the control circuit 5120 receives the detection result signal indicating that the indicator tube has been installed correctly, the control circuit 5120 sends a corresponding installation status signal to control the drive circuit 530 to start normally, and performs power conversion to provide power for the rear LED module. On the contrary, when the control circuit 5120 receives the detection result signal that the indicator tube is not installed correctly, the control circuit 5120 sends a corresponding installation status signal to control the driving circuit 530 not to start/stop working, thereby making the current flowing in the power circuit. Can be limited below safe values.
具体而言，本实施例有关于检测脉冲发生模块5110、检测判定电路5130以及检测路径电路5160的配置与运作可以参照其他实施例的说明。本实施例与前述实施例的主要差异在于本实施例主要是控制电路5120来控制后端的驱动电路530的启动与否，藉以在判定有触电风险/未正确安装时，能够直接透过停止驱动电路530的运作，进而达到限制漏电流的效果。在此配置底下，驱动电路530或其内部的功率开关可以视为限流电路5200a(此时在一些实施例中控制电路5120可视为是驱动电路530的驱动控制器)，因此相较于图18至图28B实施例而言，原先设置在电源回路上的开关电路(如3200、3200a-L)可以被省略。由于原先设置在电源回路上的开关电路需承载大电流，故在晶体管规格的选择与设计上都有较为严格的考虑，因此本实施例的设计可以透过省略开关电路而显着的降低安装检测模块整体的设计成本。另一方面，在一些实施例中，由于控制电路5120也可以通过将符合驱动控制器的电压格式的安装状态信号给到驱动控制器的启动管脚的方式来实现驱动电路530的启动控制，因此并不需要针对驱动电路530的设计进行大幅更动，有利于商品化的设计。Specifically, regarding the configuration and operation of the detection pulse generation module 5110 , the detection determination circuit 5130 , and the detection path circuit 5160 in this embodiment, reference may be made to the descriptions of other embodiments. The main difference between this embodiment and the previous embodiment is that the control circuit 5120 in this embodiment mainly controls the activation of the driving circuit 530 at the back end, so that when it is determined that there is a risk of electric shock/incorrect installation, the driving circuit can be directly stopped by stopping the driving circuit. 530 operation, and then achieve the effect of limiting leakage current. Under this configuration, the driving circuit 530 or its internal power switch can be regarded as the current limiting circuit 5200a (at this time, the control circuit 5120 can be regarded as the driving controller of the driving circuit 530 in some embodiments). Therefore, compared with FIG. For the embodiments 18 to 28B, the switch circuits (eg, 3200, 3200a-L) originally provided on the power circuit can be omitted. Since the switch circuit originally arranged on the power circuit needs to carry a large current, the selection and design of transistor specifications are strictly considered. Therefore, the design of this embodiment can significantly reduce the installation detection by omitting the switch circuit. The overall design cost of the module. On the other hand, in some embodiments, since the control circuit 5120 can also implement the start-up control of the drive circuit 530 by sending the installation status signal conforming to the voltage format of the drive controller to the start-up pin of the drive controller, therefore There is no need to significantly change the design of the driving circuit 530, which is beneficial to commercialized design.
在一范例实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块5110、检测路径电路5160、检测判定电路5130以及控制电路5120可分别以图30B至图30G的电路架构来实现(但不仅限于此)，其中图30B至图30D及图30G是本申请第十一实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。底下分就各模块/单元进行说明。In an exemplary embodiment, the detection pulse generation module 5110, the detection path circuit 5160, the detection determination circuit 5130, and the control circuit 5120 can be implemented with the circuit structures shown in FIGS. 30B to 30G respectively (but not limited to this), wherein FIG. 30D and FIG. 30G are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
请参照图30B，图30B是根据本申请第十一实施例的安装检测模块的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图。检测脉冲发生模块5110包含电阻Ra1与Ra2、电容Ca1及脉冲发生电路5112。电阻Ra1的第一端经由第一整流输出端511连接至整流电路510。电阻Ra2的第一端 连接电阻Ra1的第二端，并且电阻Ra2的第二端经由第二整流输出端512连接至整流电路510。电容Ca1与电阻Ra2相互并联。脉冲发生电路5112的输入端连接电阻Ra2与Ca1的连接端，且其输出端连接检测路径电路5160以提供具脉冲DP的控制信号。Please refer to FIG. 30B . FIG. 30B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generation module installed with a detection module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application. The detection pulse generating module 5110 includes resistors Ra1 and Ra2 , a capacitor Ca1 and a pulse generating circuit 5112 . The first terminal of the resistor Ra1 is connected to the rectification circuit 510 via the first rectification output terminal 511 . The first end of the resistor Ra2 is connected to the second end of the resistor Ra1, and the second end of the resistor Ra2 is connected to the rectifier circuit 510 via the second rectifier output terminal 512. The capacitor Ca1 and the resistor Ra2 are connected in parallel with each other. The input terminal of the pulse generating circuit 5112 is connected to the connection terminals of the resistors Ra2 and Ca1, and the output terminal of the pulse generating circuit 5112 is connected to the detection path circuit 5160 to provide a control signal with a pulse DP.
在本实施例中，电阻Ra1与Ra2构成一个分压电阻串，用以取样母线电压，其中脉冲发生电路5112可以根据母线电压资讯决定脉冲发生的时间点，并且根据设定的脉冲宽度来输出脉冲DP。举例来说，脉冲发生电路5112可以在母线电压过电压零点后一段时间再发出脉冲，藉以避免在电压零点上进行防触电检测可能产生的误判问题。脉冲发生电路5112发出的脉冲波形及间距可以参照前述实施例的说明，于此不再赘述。In this embodiment, the resistors Ra1 and Ra2 form a voltage dividing resistor string for sampling the bus voltage, wherein the pulse generating circuit 5112 can determine the time point of the pulse generation according to the bus voltage information, and output the pulse according to the set pulse width DP. For example, the pulse generating circuit 5112 can send out the pulse for a period of time after the bus voltage exceeds the voltage zero point, so as to avoid the misjudgment problem that may be caused by the electric shock protection detection on the voltage zero point. For the pulse waveform and interval sent by the pulse generating circuit 5112, reference may be made to the description of the foregoing embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
请参照图30C，图30C是根据本申请第十一实施例的安装检测模块的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图。检测路径电路5160包含电阻Ra3、晶体管Ma1及二极管Da1。电阻Ra3的第一端连接第一整流输出端511。晶体管Ma1可为MOSFET或BJT，其第一端连接电阻Ra3的第二端，其第二端连接第二整流输出端512，且其控制端接收控制信号Sc。二极管Da1的阳极连接电阻Ra3的第一端及第一整流输出端511，并且二极管Da1的阴极连接后端的滤波电路530的输入端，以π型滤波器为例，则二极管Da1是连接在电容725与电感726的连接端。Please refer to FIG. 30C . FIG. 30C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit of the installation detection module according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application. The detection path circuit 5160 includes a resistor Ra3, a transistor Ma1, and a diode Da1. The first end of the resistor Ra3 is connected to the first rectifier output end 511 . The transistor Ma1 can be a MOSFET or a BJT, its first end is connected to the second end of the resistor Ra3 , its second end is connected to the second rectifier output end 512 , and its control end receives the control signal Sc. The anode of the diode Da1 is connected to the first end of the resistor Ra3 and the first rectifier output end 511, and the cathode of the diode Da1 is connected to the input end of the filter circuit 530 at the rear end. Taking the π-type filter as an example, the diode Da1 is connected to the capacitor 725. Connection to inductor 726.
在本实施例中，电阻Ra3与晶体管Ma1构成检测路径，其中所述检测路径会在晶体管Ma1被控制信号Sc导通时伴随导通。在检测路径导通的期间内，由于会有电流流经检测路径而造成检测电压Vdet变化，而检测电压Vdet的变化幅度是视检测路径的等效阻抗而决定。以图式上所示的检测电压Vdet取样位置为例(电阻Ra3的第一端)，在检测路径导通的期间，当没有人体阻抗连接时(正确安装)，检测电压Vdet会等同于整流输出端511上的母线电压；当有人体阻抗连接时(未正确安装)，人体阻抗可等效为串接在整流输出端511与接地端之间，因此检测电压Vdet会变成人体电阻与电阻Ra3的分压。藉此，检测电压Vdet即可指示出是否有人体电阻连接在LED直管灯上的状态。In the present embodiment, the resistor Ra3 and the transistor Ma1 form a detection path, wherein the detection path is accompanied by conduction when the transistor Ma1 is turned on by the control signal Sc. During the conduction period of the detection path, the detection voltage Vdet changes due to the current flowing through the detection path, and the variation range of the detection voltage Vdet is determined according to the equivalent impedance of the detection path. Taking the sampling position of the detection voltage Vdet shown in the diagram as an example (the first end of the resistor Ra3), during the conduction period of the detection path, when there is no human body impedance connection (correct installation), the detection voltage Vdet will be equal to the rectified output. The bus voltage on the terminal 511; when there is a human body impedance connected (not installed correctly), the human body impedance can be equivalently connected in series between the rectifier output terminal 511 and the ground terminal, so the detection voltage Vdet will become the human body resistance and resistance Ra3 partial pressure. In this way, the detection voltage Vdet can indicate whether there is a human body resistance connected to the LED straight tube light.
请参照图30D，图30D是根据本申请第十一实施例的安装检测模块的检测判定电路的电路架构示意图。检测判定电路5130包含取样电路5132和比较电路5133。在本实施例中，取样电路5132会根据设定的时间点取样检测电压Vdet，并且产生对应不同时间点下的检测电压Vdet的取样信号Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn。比较电路5133连接取样电路5132以接收取样信号Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn，其中比较电路5133可选取所述取样信号Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn中的部分或全部相互进行比较、将所述取样信号Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn与一预设信号进行比较或计算取样信号Ssp_t1_Ssp_tn之间的差值，再以所述差值与一预设信号进行比较，接着将比较结果Scp依序输出给判定电路。在一范例实施例中，比较电路5133可根据每两个相邻时间点的取样信号比较而输出一对应的比较结果，但本申请不以此为限。Please refer to FIG. 30D . FIG. 30D is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection and determination circuit of the installation detection module according to the eleventh embodiment of the present application. The detection and determination circuit 5130 includes a sampling circuit 5132 and a comparison circuit 5133 . In this embodiment, the sampling circuit 5132 samples the detection voltage Vdet according to the set time point, and generates sampling signals Ssp_t1 -Ssp_tn corresponding to the detection voltage Vdet at different time points. The comparison circuit 5133 is connected to the sampling circuit 5132 to receive the sampling signals Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn, wherein the comparison circuit 5133 can select some or all of the sampling signals Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn to compare with each other, and compare the sampling signals Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn with a predetermined signal Comparing or calculating the difference between the sampled signals Ssp_t1_Ssp_tn, then comparing the difference with a predetermined signal, and then sequentially outputting the comparison result Scp to the determination circuit. In an exemplary embodiment, the comparison circuit 5133 can output a corresponding comparison result according to the comparison of the sampled signals at every two adjacent time points, but the present application is not limited to this.
具体而言，在LED直管灯正确安装至灯座(或无异常外部阻抗接入)时，检测路径电路 5160的第一检测连接端DE1(同第一整流输出端511)和第二检测连接端DE2(同第二整流输出端512)可以等效为直接连接至外部电网，因此无论检测路径是否被导通，检测电压Vdet的电压波形皆会随外部驱动信号的相位改变，具有完整且连续的弦波形式。换言之，在LED正确连接至灯座的情况下，无论检测路径是否导通，取样电路5132会产生具有相同或近似电平的取样信号Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn。Specifically, when the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket (or no abnormal external impedance is connected), the first detection connection terminal DE1 (same as the first rectification output terminal 511 ) of the detection path circuit 5160 is connected to the second detection connection The terminal DE2 (same as the second rectifier output terminal 512 ) can be equivalently directly connected to the external power grid. Therefore, no matter whether the detection path is turned on or not, the voltage waveform of the detection voltage Vdet will change with the phase of the external driving signal, with complete and continuous sine wave form. In other words, when the LED is correctly connected to the lamp socket, the sampling circuit 5132 will generate the sampling signals Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn with the same or similar levels regardless of whether the detection path is turned on.
相反地，在LED直管灯未正确安装至灯座(或有异常外部阻抗接入)时，第一检测连接端DE1可被等效为通过外部阻抗(即，人体阻抗)电性连接至外部电网，因此在检测路径导通时，检测电压Vdet即会受到外部阻抗和检测路径上的阻抗的分压而降低，使得检测电压Vdet在检测路径导通的期间内的波形呈不连续(即电平有显着变化)。在检测路径未导通的情况下，由于电源模块中没有导通的电流路径，因此第一检测连接端(如DE1)上不会产生压降，故检测电压Vdet的电压波形仍会呈完整的弦波形式。藉此，安装检测模块可以通过识别所述电压波形的特征差异来判断是否有异常外部阻抗接入LED直管灯。底下以数种不同的判断机制作为范例来说明。On the contrary, when the LED straight tube lamp is not properly installed on the lamp socket (or has abnormal external impedance access), the first detection connection terminal DE1 can be equivalent to being electrically connected to the outside through the external impedance (ie, human body impedance). Therefore, when the detection path is turned on, the detection voltage Vdet will be reduced by the voltage division between the external impedance and the impedance on the detection path, so that the waveform of the detection voltage Vdet during the period when the detection path is turned on is discontinuous (that is, the electrical level has changed significantly). When the detection path is not turned on, since there is no conductive current path in the power module, there will be no voltage drop on the first detection connection terminal (eg DE1), so the voltage waveform of the detection voltage Vdet will still be complete Sine wave form. Thereby, the installation detection module can determine whether there is abnormal external impedance connected to the LED straight tube lamp by identifying the characteristic difference of the voltage waveform. Several different judgment mechanisms are used as examples to illustrate the following.
请同时参照图30D和图30E，图30E是本申请第一实施例的安装检测模块的信号波形示意图。在本实施例中，取样电路5132可以是在检测电压Vdet的每个周期内的特定时间点进行取样，使得检测电压Vdet在同一相位下的至少一个脉冲期间DPW内的信号电平(如取样信号Ssp_t1)及至少一个脉冲期间DPW外的信号电平(如取样信号Ssp_t2)被取样到。在LED直管灯未正确连接至灯座的情况下，取样电路5132在脉冲期间DPW内取样到的信号电平(如取样信号Ssp_t1)会低于在非脉冲期间DPW取样到的信号电平(如取样信号Ssp_t2)。因此，比较电路5133可通过选取所述取样信号Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn中的部分或全部相互进行比较、将所述取样信号Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn与一预设信号进行比较或是计算取样信号Ssp_t1_Ssp_tn之间的差值，再以所述差值与一预设信号进行比较，进而产生有效对应于安装状态的比较结果Scp。例如，比较电路5133可在比较信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2的电平相同或近似时，产生第一逻辑电平的比较结果Scp，并且在比较信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2的电平差异达到一设定值时，产生第二逻辑电平的比较结果Scp。其中，第一逻辑电平的比较结果Scp为符合正确安装条件的比较结果，第二逻辑电平的比较结果Scp为不符合正确安装条件的比较结果。Please refer to FIG. 30D and FIG. 30E at the same time. FIG. 30E is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the installation detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the sampling circuit 5132 may perform sampling at a specific time point in each cycle of the detection voltage Vdet, so that the detection voltage Vdet is in at least one pulse period under the same phase. Ssp_t1) and signal levels outside DPW (eg, sampling signal Ssp_t2) during at least one pulse period are sampled. In the case that the LED straight tube lamp is not properly connected to the lamp socket, the signal level (such as the sampling signal Ssp_t1) sampled by the sampling circuit 5132 during the pulse period DPW will be lower than the signal level (such as the sampling signal Ssp_t1) sampled by the DPW during the non-pulse period ( Such as sampling signal Ssp_t2). Therefore, the comparison circuit 5133 can select some or all of the sampling signals Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn to compare with each other, compare the sampling signals Ssp_t1-Ssp_tn with a predetermined signal, or calculate the difference between the sampling signals Ssp_t1_Ssp_tn , and then compare the difference with a preset signal, thereby generating a comparison result Scp that effectively corresponds to the installation state. For example, the comparison circuit 5133 can generate the comparison result Scp of the first logic level when the levels of the comparison signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 are the same or similar, and generate the comparison result Scp of the first logic level when the level difference between the comparison signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 reaches a set value The comparison result Scp of the second logic level. The comparison result Scp of the first logic level is the comparison result that meets the correct installation condition, and the comparison result Scp of the second logic level is the comparison result that does not meet the correct installation condition.
判定电路5134接收所述比较结果Scp，并且根据比较结果Scp发出对应的检测结果信号Sdr，在一些实施例中，判定电路5134可以设计为在判定比较结果Scp符合正确安装条件，并且此比较结果Scp连续出现超过一定次数时才发出对应正确安装的检测结果信号Sdr，藉以避免误判的情形发生，以进一步降低触电风险。The determination circuit 5134 receives the comparison result Scp, and sends out a corresponding detection result signal Sdr according to the comparison result Scp. In some embodiments, the determination circuit 5134 can be designed to determine that the comparison result Scp meets the correct installation condition, and the comparison result Scp The detection result signal Sdr corresponding to the correct installation is issued only when the occurrence exceeds a certain number of times in a row, so as to avoid misjudgment and further reduce the risk of electric shock.
请同时参照图30D和30F，图30F是本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的信号波形示意图。在本实施例中，检测电压Vdet在脉冲期间DPW内的电平会大致与脉冲期间DPW外的检测电压Vdet波形呈连续的变化(如虚线部分)。相反地，在LED直管灯未正确连接至灯座的情 况下，脉冲期间DPW内的检测电压Vdet波形会明显下降，并且与脉冲期间DPW外的检测电压Vdet波形呈不连续的变化(如实线部分)。因此，取样电路5132可以在邻近脉冲DP1发生的时间点(发生前或发生后)对检测电压Vdet进行至少一次取样并且在脉冲期间DPW内的时间点再进行至少一次取样，使得检测电压Vdet在同一周期下的至少一个在脉冲期间DPW外的信号电平(如取样信号Ssp_t1)及至少一个在脉冲期间DPW内的信号电平(如取样信号Ssp_t2)被取样到。Please refer to FIGS. 30D and 30F at the same time. FIG. 30F is a schematic diagram of signal waveforms of the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application. In the present embodiment, the level of the detection voltage Vdet in the pulse period DPW is approximately continuously changed with the waveform of the detection voltage Vdet outside the pulse period DPW (eg, the dotted line). On the contrary, when the LED straight tube lamp is not properly connected to the lamp socket, the waveform of the detection voltage Vdet in the DPW during the pulse period will drop significantly, and the waveform of the detection voltage Vdet outside the DPW during the pulse period will change discontinuously (such as the solid line). part). Therefore, the sampling circuit 5132 can sample the detection voltage Vdet at least once at a time point adjacent to the occurrence of the pulse DP1 (before or after the occurrence) and at least once again at a time point within the pulse period DPW, so that the detection voltage Vdet is at the same At least one signal level outside the pulse period DPW (eg, the sampling signal Ssp_t1 ) and at least one signal level within the pulse period DPW (eg, the sampling signal Ssp_t2 ) under the cycle are sampled.
以取样电路5132取样脉冲DP1发生前的信号电平做为取样信号为例，在LED直管灯正确连接至灯座的情况下，取样电路5132在进入脉冲期间DPW之前的时间点t1取样到的信号电平Vt1(对应取样信号Ssp_t1)会低于在脉冲期间DPW内的时间点t2取样到的信号电平Vt3(对应取样信号Ssp_t2)。相反地，在LED未正确连接至灯座的情况下，取样电路5132在进入脉冲期间DPW之前的时间点t1取样到的信号电平Vt1(对应取样信号Ssp_t1)会高于在脉冲期间DPW内的时间点t2取样到的信号电平Vt2(对应取样信号Ssp_t2)。Taking the signal level of the sampling circuit 5132 before the sampling pulse DP1 occurs as the sampling signal as an example, in the case that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly connected to the lamp socket, the sampling circuit 5132 samples at the time point t1 before entering the pulse period DPW. The signal level Vt1 (corresponding to the sampling signal Ssp_t1 ) is lower than the signal level Vt3 (corresponding to the sampling signal Ssp_t2 ) sampled at the time point t2 in the pulse period DPW. On the contrary, when the LED is not properly connected to the lamp socket, the signal level Vt1 (corresponding to the sampling signal Ssp_t1 ) sampled by the sampling circuit 5132 at the time point t1 before entering the pulse period DPW will be higher than that in the pulse period DPW. The signal level Vt2 (corresponding to the sampling signal Ssp_t2) sampled at the time point t2.
比较电路5133可通过将取样信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2互相比较、将取样信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2分别与一设定值进行比较或是将取样信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2的差值与一设定值进行比较的方式产生对应于安装状态的比较结果Scp。The comparison circuit 5133 can generate a correspondence by comparing the sampling signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 with each other, comparing the sampling signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 with a set value respectively, or comparing the difference between the sampling signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 with a set value The comparison result Scp in the installed state.
以取样信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2互相比较的运作方式为例。比较电路5133可以在取样信号Ssp_t2的信号电平(如Vt3)大于或等于取样信号Ssp_t1的信号电平(如Vt1)时，产生第一逻辑电平的比较结果Scp，并且在取样信号Ssp_t2的信号电平(如Vt2)小于比取样信号Ssp_t1的信号电平(如Vt1)时，产生第二逻辑电平的比较结果Scp。Take the operation of comparing the sampled signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 with each other as an example. The comparison circuit 5133 can generate the comparison result Scp of the first logic level when the signal level (eg Vt3 ) of the sampling signal Ssp_t2 is greater than or equal to the signal level (eg Vt1 ) of the sampling signal Ssp_t1 , and when the signal level of the sampling signal Ssp_t2 is When the level (eg Vt2 ) is lower than the signal level (eg Vt1 ) of the sampling signal Ssp_t1 , the comparison result Scp of the second logic level is generated.
以取样信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2分别与一设定值进行比较的运作方式为例，所述设定值可例如设计为介于信号电平Vt1和Vt3之间的值(但不仅限于此)。比较电路5133可以在取样信号Ssp_t2的信号电平(如Vt3)大于所述设定值且取样信号Ssp_t1的信号电平(如Vt1)小于所述设定值时，产生第一逻辑电平的比较结果Scp，并且在取样信号Ssp_t2的信号电平(如Vt2)和取样信号Ssp_t1的信号电平(如Vt1)皆小于设定值时，产生第二逻辑电平的比较结果Scp。Taking the operation manner of comparing the sampled signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 with a set value as an example, the set value can be designed as a value between the signal levels Vt1 and Vt3 (but not limited thereto). The comparison circuit 5133 can generate a first logic level comparison when the signal level of the sampling signal Ssp_t2 (eg Vt3 ) is greater than the set value and the signal level of the sampling signal Ssp_t1 (eg Vt1 ) is less than the set value The result Scp, and when the signal level (eg Vt2) of the sampling signal Ssp_t2 and the signal level (eg Vt1) of the sampling signal Ssp_t1 are both smaller than the set value, a comparison result Scp of the second logic level is generated.
以取样信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2的差值与一设定值进行比较的运作方式为例，所述设定值可例如设计为介于(Vt2-Vt1)和(Vt3-Vt1)之间的值。举例来说，若信号电平Vt1为20V，信号平Vt2为12V，以及信号电平为25V，则所述设定值可例如设计在-8V至5V之间。在一些实施例中，所述设定值可例如为0V。比较电路5133可以在取样信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2的信号电平差值(如Vt3-Vt1)大于或等于所述设定值时，产生第一逻辑电平的比较结果Scp，并且在取样信号Ssp_t1和Ssp_t2的信号电平差值(如Vt2-Vt1)小于所述设定值时，产生第二逻辑电平的比较结果Scp。于此所述的差值可基于电路设计的不同而采用不同的计算方式， 例如可是皆以后取样到的电平值减去先取样到的电平值，也可以采用以先取样到的电平值剪去后取样到的电平值，也可以采用绝对值的计算方式(即，以较高的电平值减去较低的电平值)的方式来计算，本申请不以此为限。Taking the operation of comparing the difference between the sampled signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 with a set value as an example, the set value can be designed as a value between (Vt2-Vt1) and (Vt3-Vt1), for example. For example, if the signal level Vt1 is 20V, the signal level Vt2 is 12V, and the signal level is 25V, the set value can be designed to be between -8V and 5V, for example. In some embodiments, the set value may be, for example, 0V. The comparison circuit 5133 can generate the comparison result Scp of the first logic level when the signal level difference (eg Vt3-Vt1) of the sampling signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 is greater than or equal to the set value, and the sampling signals Ssp_t1 and Ssp_t2 When the signal level difference (eg Vt2 - Vt1 ) is smaller than the set value, a comparison result Scp of the second logic level is generated. The difference value described here can be calculated in different ways based on different circuit designs. For example, the level value sampled later can be subtracted from the level value sampled first, or the level value sampled earlier can be used. The level value sampled after the value is clipped can also be calculated by the calculation method of the absolute value (that is, by subtracting the lower level value from the higher level value), and this application is not limited to this. .
在上述运作方式中，第一逻辑电平的比较结果Scp为符合正确安装条件的比较结果，第二逻辑电平的比较结果Scp为不符合正确安装条件的比较结果。In the above operation mode, the comparison result Scp of the first logic level is the comparison result that meets the correct installation condition, and the comparison result Scp of the second logic level is the comparison result that does not meet the correct installation condition.
另外值得注意的是，上述的检测电压Vdet取样及比较方式不仅适用在第十一实施例的安装检测模块中，也可以适用于其他安装检测模块的实施例中，特别是可适用于具有检测路径电路的实施例中。It is also worth noting that the above-mentioned sampling and comparison method of the detection voltage Vdet is not only applicable to the installation detection module of the eleventh embodiment, but also applicable to other embodiments of the installation detection module, especially applicable to the installation detection module having a detection path. circuit examples.
在一些实施例中，上述电路动作可以通过如图48E的步骤流程来实现，其包括：接收检测路径电路(如5160)上的检测电压(如Vdet)(步骤S401)；在所述检测路径电路受控于脉冲信号而导通的期间内(如DPW)取样所述检测电压，以产生第一取样信号(步骤S402)；在所述检测路径电路受控于脉冲信号而截止的期间内取样所述检测电压，以产生第二取样信号(步骤S403)；以及根据所述第一取样信号和所述第二取样信号的电平，判断LED直管灯是否符合正确安装条件(步骤S404)。In some embodiments, the above circuit actions can be implemented through the step flow shown in FIG. 48E , which includes: receiving a detection voltage (eg Vdet) on the detection path circuit (eg 5160 ) (step S401 ); The detection voltage is sampled during the period controlled by the pulse signal to be turned on (such as DPW) to generate a first sampling signal (step S402 ); the detection path circuit is sampled during the period when the detection path circuit is controlled by the pulse signal to be turned off. The detection voltage is generated to generate a second sampling signal (step S403 ); and according to the levels of the first sampling signal and the second sampling signal, it is determined whether the LED straight tube lamp meets the correct installation conditions (step S404 ).
以图30E所绘示的检测波形来看，步骤S402可以是在时间点t1取样检测电压Vdet以产生在脉冲期间DPW内的第一取样信号Ssp_t1，并且步骤S403可以是在时间点t2取样检测电压Vdet以产生在脉冲期间DPW外的第二取样信号Ssp_t2。在实际应用上，步骤S402和S403可以例如是以脉冲信号DP1/DP2触发取样电路5132进行第一次信号取样，再依照固定时间间隔进行后续二次取样的方式来实现，其中所述固定时间间隔可选取为交流电网的半周期及其整数倍的时间长度，例如10毫秒(50Hz的半周期)至16.67毫秒(60Hz的半周期)，但本申请不仅限于此。From the detection waveform shown in FIG. 30E , step S402 may sample the detection voltage Vdet at time point t1 to generate the first sampling signal Ssp_t1 during the pulse period DPW, and step S403 may be to sample the detection voltage at time point t2 Vdet to generate the second sampling signal Ssp_t2 outside the pulse period DPW. In practical applications, steps S402 and S403 can be implemented, for example, by triggering the sampling circuit 5132 by the pulse signal DP1/DP2 to perform the first signal sampling, and then performing subsequent secondary sampling according to a fixed time interval, wherein the fixed time interval The time length can be selected as the half cycle of the AC grid and its integer multiples, such as 10 ms (50 Hz half cycle) to 16.67 ms (60 Hz half cycle), but the present application is not limited thereto.
以图30F所绘示的检测波形来看，步骤S402可以是在时间点t2取样检测电压Vdet以产生在脉冲期间DPW内的第一取样信号Ssp_t2，并且步骤S403可以是在时间点t1取样检测电压Vdet以产生在脉冲期间DPW外的第二取样信号Ssp_t1。由此可知，根据不同的检测架构，所述步骤流程中的步骤S402和S403之间的发生时序可能会相反/互换。换言之，在一些实施例中，步骤S402会先于步骤S403执行，而在另一些实施例中，步骤S403可能会先于步骤S402执行。From the detection waveform shown in FIG. 30F , step S402 may sample the detection voltage Vdet at time point t2 to generate the first sampling signal Ssp_t2 during the pulse period DPW, and step S403 may be to sample the detection voltage at time point t1 Vdet to generate the second sampling signal Ssp_t1 outside the pulse period DPW. It can be seen that, according to different detection architectures, the occurrence sequences between steps S402 and S403 in the step flow may be reversed/interchanged. In other words, in some embodiments, step S402 may be performed prior to step S403, while in other embodiments, step S403 may be performed prior to step S402.
请参照图30G，图30G是根据本申请第十一实施例的安装检测模块的控制电路的电路架构示意图。控制电路5120的输入端接收检测结果信号Sdr，并且其输出端电性连接驱动电路630的控制器633，其中驱动电路630的配置可参考图13B实施例的说明，于此不再重复赘述。Please refer to FIG. 30G . FIG. 30G is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a control circuit of an installation detection module according to an eleventh embodiment of the present application. The input end of the control circuit 5120 receives the detection result signal Sdr, and the output end thereof is electrically connected to the controller 633 of the driving circuit 630. The configuration of the driving circuit 630 can refer to the description of the embodiment in FIG.
当控制电路5120接收到指示LED直管灯已正确安装(无人体电阻连接)的检测结果信号Sdr时，控制电路5120会发出相应的安装状态信号Sidm给驱动电路630的控制器633。此时 控制器633会响应于安装状态信号Sidm而启动，并且控制切换开关635运作，进而产生驱动信号来驱动LED模块。当控制电路5120接收到指示LED直管灯未正确安装时(有人体电阻连接)的检测结果信号Sdr时，控制电路5120会发出相应的安装状态信号Sidm给驱动电路630的控制器633。此时控制器633会响应于安装状态信号Sidm而不启动。When the control circuit 5120 receives the detection result signal Sdr indicating that the LED straight tube light has been correctly installed (no human body resistance connected), the control circuit 5120 will send a corresponding installation status signal Sidm to the controller 633 of the driving circuit 630 . At this time, the controller 633 is activated in response to the installation state signal Sidm, and controls the switch 635 to operate, thereby generating a driving signal to drive the LED module. When the control circuit 5120 receives the detection result signal Sdr indicating that the LED straight tube light is not installed correctly (connected with human body resistance), the control circuit 5120 will send the corresponding installation status signal Sidm to the controller 633 of the driving circuit 630 . At this time, the controller 633 will not be activated in response to the installation status signal Sidm.
在一些实施例中，控制器633和控制电路5120也可以作为一个整体集成在一起。此时控制器633和控制电路5120整体可以视为是驱动电路630的驱动控制器。In some embodiments, the controller 633 and the control circuit 5120 may also be integrated as a whole. At this time, the controller 633 and the control circuit 5120 can be regarded as a driving controller of the driving circuit 630 as a whole.
请参照图30H，图30H是本申请第十二实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。本实施例的安装检测模块5000c及与前述图30B-30G实施例大致相同，其包括检测脉冲发生模块5110、控制电路5120、检测判定电路5130及检测路径电路5160。本实施例的驱动电路1030是以图13B的电源转换电路架构作为范例，其包括控制器1033、二极管1034、晶体管1035、电感1036、电容1037及电阻1038。Please refer to FIG. 30H . FIG. 30H is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of an installation detection module according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 5000c of this embodiment is substantially the same as that of the aforementioned embodiments of FIGS. 30B-30G , and includes a detection pulse generation module 5110 , a control circuit 5120 , a detection determination circuit 5130 and a detection path circuit 5160 . The driving circuit 1030 of this embodiment is an example of the power conversion circuit structure shown in FIG. 13B , which includes a controller 1033 , a diode 1034 , a transistor 1035 , an inductor 1036 , a capacitor 1037 and a resistor 1038 .
相较于图30B-30G实施例而言，本实施例的检测路径电路5160是以类似图24B实施例的配置作为范例，其包括晶体管Ma1及电阻Ra1。晶体管Ma1的漏极耦接电容725、727的第二端，并且源极耦接至电阻Ra1的第一端。电阻Rb1的第二端耦接至第一接地端GND1。于此附带一提，所述第一接地端GND1和LED模块50的第二接地端GND2可为相同接地端或是两电性独立的接地端，本申请不以此为限。Compared with the embodiment of FIGS. 30B-30G, the detection path circuit 5160 of the present embodiment is similar to the configuration of the embodiment of FIG. 24B as an example, which includes a transistor Ma1 and a resistor Ra1. The drain of the transistor Ma1 is coupled to the second terminals of the capacitors 725 and 727, and the source is coupled to the first terminal of the resistor Ra1. The second terminal of the resistor Rb1 is coupled to the first ground terminal GND1. Incidentally, the first ground terminal GND1 and the second ground terminal GND2 of the LED module 50 may be the same ground terminal or two electrically independent ground terminals, and the present application is not limited thereto.
检测脉冲发生模块5210耦接晶体管Ma1的栅极，并且用以控制晶体管Ma1的导通状态。检测判定电路5130耦接电阻Rb1的第一端和控制电路5120，其中检测判定电路5130会取样电阻Ra1第一端上的电信号，并且将取样到的电信号与一参考信号进行比较，藉以产生指示灯管是否正确安装的检测结果信号；接着控制电路5120会根据检测结果信号产生安装状态信号并传输给控制器1033。在本实施例中，有关于检测脉冲发生模块5110、控制电路5120、检测判定电路5130及检测路径电路5160的工作细节及特性可以前述实施例的相关叙述，于此不再重复赘述。The detection pulse generating module 5210 is coupled to the gate of the transistor Ma1 and used to control the conduction state of the transistor Ma1. The detection and determination circuit 5130 is coupled to the first end of the resistor Rb1 and the control circuit 5120, wherein the detection and determination circuit 5130 samples the electrical signal on the first end of the resistor Ra1, and compares the sampled electrical signal with a reference signal to generate A detection result signal indicating whether the indicator tube is correctly installed; then the control circuit 5120 will generate an installation status signal according to the detection result signal and transmit it to the controller 1033 . In this embodiment, the working details and characteristics of the detection pulse generating module 5110 , the control circuit 5120 , the detection determination circuit 5130 and the detection path circuit 5160 can be referred to in the above-mentioned embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
在一些实施例中，安装检测模块5000a还可以选择性地包括调光电路5170以使LED直管灯带有调光功能。如图30A所示，调光电路5170通过路径5171电性连接至第一检测连接端DE1，并且通过路径5172电性连接至控制电路5170。调光电路5170可在工作模式下基于接收到的电信号产生相应的调光信号，并且通过路径5172将调光信号提供给控制电路5120。此时控制电路5120会基于接收到的调光信号调整对功率开关的控制，进而使LED模块的发光亮度产生与调光信号相应的调整。在图30A中是绘示调光电路5170直接连接至第一检测连接端DE1来接收电信号为例，但本申请不以此为限。In some embodiments, the installation detection module 5000a may also optionally include a dimming circuit 5170 to enable the LED straight tube light to have a dimming function. As shown in FIG. 30A , the dimming circuit 5170 is electrically connected to the first detection connection terminal DE1 through a path 5171 , and is electrically connected to the control circuit 5170 through a path 5172 . The dimming circuit 5170 can generate a corresponding dimming signal based on the received electrical signal in the working mode, and provide the dimming signal to the control circuit 5120 through the path 5172 . At this time, the control circuit 5120 will adjust the control of the power switch based on the received dimming signal, so as to adjust the luminous brightness of the LED module corresponding to the dimming signal. In FIG. 30A , it is shown that the dimming circuit 5170 is directly connected to the first detection connection terminal DE1 to receive the electrical signal as an example, but the present application is not limited to this.
具体而言，在LED直管灯正常点亮的工作过程中，调光电路5170可取样电源回路上的电信号并获取其中的调光信息，其中所述调光信息可以是通过特定方式或协定转换/调变为对应 的信号特征并加载于输入电源上的信息(即，以输入电源为载波)。调光电路5170获取调光信息的方式可以是通过将取样到的信号特征逆转换/解调变的方式来获取。在获取到调光信息后，调光电路5170可进一步的基于调光信息产生一个符合控制电路5120(此时控制电路5120可为驱动电路530的驱动控制器)的电压输入范围的调光信号，使得控制电路5120可以依据此调光信号进行调光控制。Specifically, during the normal lighting of the LED straight tube lamp, the dimming circuit 5170 can sample the electrical signal on the power circuit and obtain the dimming information therein, wherein the dimming information can be obtained by a specific method or agreement Information that is converted/modulated into the corresponding signal characteristics and loaded on the input power (ie, the input power is used as the carrier). The dimming circuit 5170 may acquire the dimming information by inversely converting/demodulating the sampled signal characteristics. After acquiring the dimming information, the dimming circuit 5170 can further generate a dimming signal that conforms to the voltage input range of the control circuit 5120 (in this case, the control circuit 5120 may be the driving controller of the driving circuit 530 ) based on the dimming information, The control circuit 5120 can perform dimming control according to the dimming signal.
在LED直管灯刚上电并且进行触电检测的过程中(即，检测模式)，由于LED直管灯尚未正常点亮，尚不需使用到调光的功能，因此在一些实施例中，调光电路5170在检测模式下可以维持在禁能的状态，并且在确认通过检测后才被使能(可以是由控制电路5120发出一使能信号的方式来使能)，藉以避免控制电路5120受到调光信号的影响造成电路的误动作。When the LED straight tube light is just powered on and performs electric shock detection (ie, the detection mode), since the LED straight tube light has not been lit normally, the dimming function does not need to be used. Therefore, in some embodiments, the dimming function is The optical circuit 5170 can be maintained in the disabled state in the detection mode, and can be enabled after it is confirmed to pass the detection (it can be enabled by sending an enable signal from the control circuit 5120), so as to prevent the control circuit 5120 from being affected. The influence of the dimming signal causes the malfunction of the circuit.
在一些实施例中，调光电路5170也可以电性连接至整流电路(如510)的输入端，以通过取样未经整流的外部驱动信号来获取调光信息。In some embodiments, the dimming circuit 5170 can also be electrically connected to the input terminal of the rectification circuit (eg, 510 ), so as to obtain dimming information by sampling the unrectified external driving signal.
在一些实施例中，调光电路5170也可以从独立的调光信号接口接收调光控制信号，并且基于接收到的调光控制信号产生相应的调光信号。In some embodiments, the dimming circuit 5170 may also receive a dimming control signal from an independent dimming signal interface, and generate a corresponding dimming signal based on the received dimming control signal.
在一些实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块5110、控制电路5120、检测判定电路5130以及调光电路5170也可以作为一个整体集成在一起，并且作为驱动电路530的驱动控制器以控制功率开关的运作，使得电源模块整合有恒流驱动、触电检测以及调光的功能。底下以图30I来更进一步说明整合有恒流驱动、触电检测以及调光功能的电源模块的整体电路架构及配置。请参见图30I，图30I是本申请第一实施例的具有恒流驱动、触电检测以及调光功能的电源模块的电路架构示意图。本实施例的电源模块包括整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路1530以及检测路径电路5160。整流电路510、滤波电路520以及驱动电路1530中的被动组件1534、1536、1537配置和运作可参考前述实施例的说明。本实施例和前述实施例的主要差异在于本实施例的驱动电路1530包含有整合恒流驱动、触电检测及调光功能的多功能驱动控制器533m。所述多功能驱动控制器533m可包括控制电路5120m以及功率开关1535，其中控制电路5120m在检测模式下会周期性的短暂导通检测路径电路5160以判断LED直管灯的安装状态；并且在判定LED直管灯已正确安装后，进入工作模式以发出点亮控制信号来控制功率开关1535的切换，使驱动电路1530可产生稳定的电流来驱动LED模块50。此外，在工作模式下，控制电路5120m可根据从检测路径电路5160所取样到的电信号获取调光信息，并且基于调光信息调整所产生的点亮控制信号，以令LED模块50的发光亮度有相应的调整。举例来说，控制电路5120m可以在获取指示亮度为50％的调光信息时，将功率开关1535的占空比调整为额定占空比(对应于亮度100％)的一半，使得驱动电路1530的输出电流有效值减小，进而令LED模块50的发光亮度调整为额定亮度的一半。In some embodiments, the detection pulse generation module 5110, the control circuit 5120, the detection determination circuit 5130, and the dimming circuit 5170 can also be integrated as a whole, and act as the driving controller of the driving circuit 530 to control the operation of the power switch, The power module integrates the functions of constant current drive, electric shock detection and dimming. Below, FIG. 30I is used to further illustrate the overall circuit structure and configuration of the power module integrated with the functions of constant current driving, electric shock detection and dimming. Please refer to FIG. 30I. FIG. 30I is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a power supply module with functions of constant current driving, electric shock detection and dimming according to the first embodiment of the present application. The power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 1530 and a detection path circuit 5160 . For the configuration and operation of the passive components 1534 , 1536 and 1537 in the rectifier circuit 510 , the filter circuit 520 and the drive circuit 1530 , reference may be made to the descriptions of the foregoing embodiments. The main difference between this embodiment and the previous embodiments is that the driving circuit 1530 of this embodiment includes a multi-function driving controller 533m that integrates functions of constant current driving, electric shock detection and dimming. The multi-function drive controller 533m may include a control circuit 5120m and a power switch 1535, wherein the control circuit 5120m will periodically and briefly conduct the detection path circuit 5160 in the detection mode to determine the installation state of the LED straight tube lamp; After the LED straight tube lamp has been installed correctly, it enters the working mode to send a lighting control signal to control the switching of the power switch 1535 , so that the driving circuit 1530 can generate a stable current to drive the LED module 50 . In addition, in the working mode, the control circuit 5120m can obtain the dimming information according to the electrical signal sampled from the detection path circuit 5160, and adjust the generated lighting control signal based on the dimming information, so as to make the luminous brightness of the LED module 50. There are corresponding adjustments. For example, the control circuit 5120m can adjust the duty cycle of the power switch 1535 to be half of the rated duty cycle (corresponding to 100% brightness) when acquiring the dimming information indicating that the brightness is 50%, so that the driving circuit 1530 can The effective value of the output current is reduced, so that the luminous brightness of the LED module 50 is adjusted to be half of the rated brightness.
在一些实施例中，若控制电路5120m从检测路径电路5160取样电信号的取样点直接连接 第一检测输入端DE1时，也可以视为控制电路5120m直接从第一检测输入端DE1或是从电源回路上取样电信号。In some embodiments, if the sampling point where the control circuit 5120m samples the electrical signal from the detection path circuit 5160 is directly connected to the first detection input terminal DE1, it can also be regarded as the control circuit 5120m directly from the first detection input terminal DE1 or from the power supply The electrical signal is sampled on the loop.
在一些实施例中，检测路径电路5160也可以和多功能驱动控制器533m整合或集成在一起，并且整体视为驱动电路1530的驱动控制器。In some embodiments, the detection path circuit 5160 can also be integrated or integrated with the multi-function drive controller 533m, and is regarded as a drive controller of the drive circuit 1530 as a whole.
请参见图31A，图31A是本申请第十二实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块5000A包含检测脉冲发生模块5110、检测判定电路5130、检测路径电路5160以及限流电路5200A。有关于检测脉冲发生模块5110、检测判定电路5130以及检测路径电路5160的说明请参照上述图30A-30E实施例的说明，于此不再重复赘述。Please refer to FIG. 31A . FIG. 31A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 5000A includes a detection pulse generation module 5110, a detection determination circuit 5130, a detection path circuit 5160, and a current limiting circuit 5200A. For the description of the detection pulse generating module 5110 , the detection determination circuit 5130 and the detection path circuit 5160 , please refer to the descriptions of the above-mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 30A-30E , which will not be repeated here.
本实施例和前述实施例的差异在于，本实施例的限流电路5200A是利用一偏压调整电路来实施(底下以偏压调整电路5200A描述)。检测判定电路5130的检测结果信号Sdr会给到偏压调整电路5200A，其中偏压调整电路5200A经由路径5201接至驱动电路530，并且用以影响/调整驱动电路530的偏压，藉以控制驱动电路530的运作状态。The difference between this embodiment and the previous embodiments is that the current limiting circuit 5200A of this embodiment is implemented by using a bias voltage adjustment circuit (the bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200A is described below). The detection result signal Sdr of the detection determination circuit 5130 will be sent to the bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200A, wherein the bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200A is connected to the driving circuit 530 via the path 5201, and is used to influence/adjust the bias voltage of the driving circuit 530, thereby controlling the driving circuit 530's operational status.
请参照图31B，图31B是根据本申请一实施例的偏压调整电路的电路架构示意图。偏压调整电路5200A包含晶体管Ma2，其第一端连接在电阻Rbias与电容Cbias的连接端以及控制器633的电源输入端，其第二端连接第二滤波输出端522，且其控制端接收比较结果信号Sdr。在本实施例中，电阻Rbias与电容Cbias为驱动电路630的外部偏压电路，其是用以提供控制器633工作所需的电源。Please refer to FIG. 31B , which is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application. The bias adjustment circuit 5200A includes a transistor Ma2, the first end of which is connected to the connection end of the resistor Rbias and the capacitor Cbias and the power input end of the controller 633, the second end of which is connected to the second filter output end 522, and the control end of which receives the comparison The resulting signal Sdr. In this embodiment, the resistor Rbias and the capacitor Cbias are the external bias circuits of the driving circuit 630 , which are used to provide the power required for the operation of the controller 633 .
当检测判定电路5130判定LED直管灯已正确安装时(无人体电阻连接)，检测判定电路5130会发出禁能的比较结果信号Sdr给晶体管Ma2。此时晶体管Ma2会反应于禁能的比较结果信号Sdr而截止，因此控制器633可以正常的取得工作电源并控制切换开关635运作，进而产生驱动信号来驱动LED模块。当检测判定电路5130判定LED直管灯未正确安装时(有人体电阻连接)，检测判定电路5130会发出使能的比较结果信号Sdr给晶体管Ma2。此时晶体管Ma2会反应于使能的比较结果信号Sdr而导通，因此控制器633的电源输入端会被短路到接地端，进而令控制器633无法被启动。值得一提的是，在晶体管Ma2导通的情形下，虽然可能会有一条额外的漏电路径通过晶体管Ma2被建立，但是由于控制器633所使用的输入电源一般相对较小(相较于灯管整体的电源来看)，因此即时有些微漏电流也不致于造成人体的损害，并且可同时符合安规的需求。When the detection and determination circuit 5130 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed (no human body resistance is connected), the detection and determination circuit 5130 will send a disabled comparison result signal Sdr to the transistor Ma2. At this time, the transistor Ma2 will be turned off in response to the disabled comparison result signal Sdr, so the controller 633 can normally obtain the operating power and control the switch 635 to operate, thereby generating a driving signal to drive the LED module. When the detection and determination circuit 5130 determines that the LED straight tube light is not properly installed (connected with a human body resistance), the detection and determination circuit 5130 sends an enabled comparison result signal Sdr to the transistor Ma2. At this time, the transistor Ma2 is turned on in response to the enabled comparison result signal Sdr, so the power input terminal of the controller 633 is short-circuited to the ground terminal, so that the controller 633 cannot be activated. It is worth mentioning that when the transistor Ma2 is turned on, although an additional leakage path may be established through the transistor Ma2, the input power used by the controller 633 is generally relatively small (compared to the lamp tube). From the perspective of the overall power supply), even a slight leakage current will not cause damage to the human body, and it can meet the requirements of safety regulations at the same time.
请参见图32A，图32A是本申请第十三实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块5000b包含检测脉冲发生模块5110、控制电路5120、检测判定电路5130以及检测路径电路5160。其中，有关于检测脉冲发生模块5110、检测判定电路5130以及检测路径电路5160的配置与运作请参照上述图30A-30F实施例的说明，于此不再重复赘述。Please refer to FIG. 32A . FIG. 32A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 5000b includes a detection pulse generation module 5110 , a control circuit 5120 , a detection determination circuit 5130 , and a detection path circuit 5160 . For the configuration and operation of the detection pulse generating module 5110 , the detection determination circuit 5130 and the detection path circuit 5160 , please refer to the descriptions of the above-mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 30A-30F , which will not be repeated here.
本实施例和前述实施例的差异在于，本实施例的限流电路5200b是搭配频闪抑制电路590 一起设置。检测判定电路5130的检测结果信号Sdr会给到控制电路5120，以通过控制电路5120进一步控制频闪抑制电路590的运作。控制电路5120经由路径5121接至频闪抑制电路590，并且在检测模式下控制频闪抑制电路590的运作状态。在进入工作模式后，频闪抑制电路590依照检测到的电压进行电流调整/补偿，以降低驱动电路所输出的驱动电流的振幅，使纹波/频闪得以被抑制。The difference between this embodiment and the previous embodiment is that the current limiting circuit 5200b of this embodiment is set together with the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 . The detection result signal Sdr of the detection determination circuit 5130 will be sent to the control circuit 5120 , so that the control circuit 5120 can further control the operation of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 . The control circuit 5120 is connected to the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 via the path 5121, and controls the operation state of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 in the detection mode. After entering the working mode, the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 performs current adjustment/compensation according to the detected voltage, so as to reduce the amplitude of the driving current output by the driving circuit, so that the ripple/strobe can be suppressed.
相较于图18或27实施例而言，由于本实施例的限流电路5200b是通过控制频闪抑制电路590来实现限流/防触电的效果，因此无须在电源回路上串接额外的开关电路来做触电保护，因此可以大幅地降低安装检测模块的整体成本。18 or 27, since the current limiting circuit 5200b of this embodiment realizes the current limiting/anti-shock effect by controlling the strobe suppression circuit 590, there is no need to connect an additional switch in series on the power circuit. The circuit is used for electric shock protection, so the overall cost of installing the detection module can be greatly reduced.
请参照图32B，图32B是根据本申请第十三实施例的安装检测模块的控制电路的电路架构示意图。本实施例的频闪抑制电路690包括电压产生电路691、运算放大器692、电阻693以及晶体管694。电压产生电路691耦接控制电路9120，用以产生一参考电压Vref。运算放大器692具有两输入端以及一输出端。所述运算放大器692两输入端其中之一(例如为正输入端)耦接电压产生电路691的输出端以接收参考电压Vref，所述运算放大器692两输入端其中之另一(例如为负输入端)耦接电阻693和晶体管694。电阻693具有第一端和第二端，其第一端耦接运算放大器692和晶体管694，并且其第二端耦接第二驱动输出端532(也可视为耦接接地端)。晶体管694具有第一端、第二端及控制端。晶体管694的第一端耦接LED模块50的阴极，晶体管694的第二端耦接运算放大器692和电阻693的第一端，以及晶体管694的控制端耦接运算放大器692的输出端。Please refer to FIG. 32B . FIG. 32B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a control circuit of an installation detection module according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present application. The stroboscopic suppression circuit 690 of this embodiment includes a voltage generating circuit 691 , an operational amplifier 692 , a resistor 693 and a transistor 694 . The voltage generating circuit 691 is coupled to the control circuit 9120 for generating a reference voltage Vref. The operational amplifier 692 has two input terminals and an output terminal. One of the two input terminals of the operational amplifier 692 (eg, the positive input terminal) is coupled to the output terminal of the voltage generating circuit 691 to receive the reference voltage Vref, and the other of the two input terminals of the operational amplifier 692 (eg, the negative input terminal) terminal) is coupled to the resistor 693 and the transistor 694. The resistor 693 has a first terminal and a second terminal, the first terminal is coupled to the operational amplifier 692 and the transistor 694, and the second terminal is coupled to the second driving output terminal 532 (which can also be regarded as being coupled to the ground terminal). The transistor 694 has a first terminal, a second terminal and a control terminal. The first terminal of the transistor 694 is coupled to the cathode of the LED module 50 , the second terminal of the transistor 694 is coupled to the operational amplifier 692 and the first terminal of the resistor 693 , and the control terminal of the transistor 694 is coupled to the output terminal of the operational amplifier 692 .
具体而言，当检测判定电路5130判定LED直管灯未正确安装时(即，LED直管灯仍处于检测模式)，控制电路5120基于指示未正确安装的比较结果信号Sdr发出相应的安装状态信号Sidm给电压产生电路691。此时电压产生电路691会反应于安装状态信号Sidm而将参考电压Vref调整至接地电平/低电平，进而令运算放大器692输出禁能的信号(也可视为运算放大器692不输出信号)而使晶体管694维持在截止的状态。当检测判定电路5130判定LED直管灯正确安装时(即，LED直管灯进入工作模式)，控制电路5120会基于指示正确安装的比较结果信号Sdr发出相应的安装状态信号Sidm给电压产生电路691。此时电压产生电路691会将参考电压Vref调整至一适当的稳定值，使得运算放大器692基于参考电压Vref和从电阻693检测到的电压产生一个控制信号来控制晶体管694工作在线性区。Specifically, when the detection determination circuit 5130 determines that the LED straight tube light is not correctly installed (ie, the LED straight tube light is still in the detection mode), the control circuit 5120 sends a corresponding installation status signal based on the comparison result signal Sdr indicating the incorrect installation Sidm supplies the voltage generating circuit 691 . At this time, the voltage generation circuit 691 will adjust the reference voltage Vref to the ground level/low level in response to the installation state signal Sidm, thereby enabling the operational amplifier 692 to output a disabled signal (it can also be regarded as the operational amplifier 692 not outputting a signal) Instead, the transistor 694 is maintained in an off state. When the detection and determination circuit 5130 determines that the LED straight tube light is correctly installed (ie, the LED straight tube light enters the working mode), the control circuit 5120 sends a corresponding installation status signal Sidm to the voltage generation circuit 691 based on the comparison result signal Sdr indicating correct installation . At this time, the voltage generating circuit 691 will adjust the reference voltage Vref to an appropriate stable value, so that the operational amplifier 692 generates a control signal based on the reference voltage Vref and the voltage detected from the resistor 693 to control the transistor 694 to operate in the linear region.
举例来说，在工作模式下，当母线上的电压升高时，运算放大器692的负输入端上的电压Vd也会随之上升，使得参考电压Vref和电压Vd之间的差值减小。此时运算放大器692会产生一个电平相对较低的控制信号来驱动晶体管694，使得晶体管694的第一端和第二端之间具有较高的等效阻抗；相反地，当母线上的电压降低时，电压Vd也会随之下降，使得参考电压Vref和电压Vd之间的差值增加。此时运算放大器692会产生一个电平相对较高的控制信号来驱动晶体管694，使得晶体管694的第一端和第二端之间具有较低的等效阻抗。因此， 在母线电压上升时，LED模块50会等效地被串接较高阻抗，并且在母线电压下降时，所述串接于LED模块50的阻抗会随之降低，使得无论母线电压如何波动，流经LED模块50的电流大小都可以大致的保持一致，进而避免频闪的现象发生。For example, in the working mode, when the voltage on the bus increases, the voltage Vd on the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier 692 also increases accordingly, so that the difference between the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd decreases. At this time, the operational amplifier 692 will generate a control signal with a relatively low level to drive the transistor 694, so that there is a high equivalent impedance between the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor 694; on the contrary, when the voltage on the bus When decreasing, the voltage Vd also decreases, so that the difference between the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd increases. At this time, the operational amplifier 692 will generate a control signal with a relatively high level to drive the transistor 694, so that there is a lower equivalent impedance between the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor 694. Therefore, when the bus voltage rises, the LED modules 50 are equivalently connected in series with a higher impedance, and when the bus voltage drops, the impedance connected to the LED modules 50 in series decreases accordingly, so that no matter how the bus voltage fluctuates , the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 can be kept roughly the same, thereby avoiding the occurrence of stroboscopic phenomenon.
请参见图33A，图33A是本申请第十二实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块5000B包含检测脉冲发生模块5110、检测判定电路5130、检测路径电路5160以及限流电路5200B。有关于检测脉冲发生模块5110、检测判定电路5130以及检测路径电路5160的说明请参照上述图30A-30E实施例的说明，于此不再重复赘述。Please refer to FIG. 33A . FIG. 33A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a twelfth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 5000B includes a detection pulse generation module 5110, a detection determination circuit 5130, a detection path circuit 5160, and a current limiting circuit 5200B. For the description of the detection pulse generating module 5110 , the detection determination circuit 5130 and the detection path circuit 5160 , please refer to the descriptions of the above-mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 30A-30E , which will not be repeated here.
本实施例和前述实施例的差异在于，本实施例的限流电路5200B是利用一偏压调整电路来实施(底下以偏压调整电路5200B描述)。检测判定电路5130的检测结果信号Sdr会给到偏压调整电路5200B，其中偏压调整电路5200B经由路径5121接至频闪抑制电路590，并且用以影响/调整频闪抑制电路590的偏压，藉以控制频闪抑制电路590的运作状态。The difference between this embodiment and the previous embodiments is that the current limiting circuit 5200B of this embodiment is implemented by using a bias voltage adjustment circuit (the bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200B is described below). The detection result signal Sdr of the detection and determination circuit 5130 will be sent to the bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200B, wherein the bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200B is connected to the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 via the path 5121, and is used to influence/adjust the bias voltage of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590, Thereby, the operation state of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 is controlled.
请参照图33B，图33B是根据本申请一实施例的偏压调整电路的电路架构示意图。偏压调整电路5200B包含晶体管Mb1，其第一端连接在电阻Rbias与电容Cbias的连接端以及频闪抑制电路690(或电压产生电路691)的电源输入端，其第二端连接第二驱动输出端532，且其控制端接收比较结果信号Sdr。在本实施例中，电阻Rbias与电容Cbias为频闪抑制电路690的外部偏压电路，其是用以提供频闪抑制电路690(或电压产生电路691)工作所需的电源。Please refer to FIG. 33B , which is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application. The bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200B includes a transistor Mb1, the first terminal of which is connected to the connection terminal of the resistor Rbias and the capacitor Cbias and the power input terminal of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 690 (or the voltage generating circuit 691), and the second terminal of which is connected to the second driving output terminal 532, and its control terminal receives the comparison result signal Sdr. In this embodiment, the resistor Rbias and the capacitor Cbias are the external bias circuits of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 690 , which are used to provide the power supply required for the operation of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 690 (or the voltage generating circuit 691 ).
具体而言，当检测判定电路5130判定LED直管灯未正确安装时(即，LED直管灯仍处于检测模式)，检测判定电路5130会发出使能的比较结果信号Sdr给晶体管Mb1。此时晶体管Mb1会反应于使能的比较结果信号Sdr而导通，因此频闪抑制电路690的电源输入端会被短路到接地端，进而令电压产生电路691无法被启动。在此状态下，参考电压Vref会维持在接地电平/低电平，使运算放大器692输出禁能的信号(或可视为不输出信号)并且令晶体管694维持在截止的状态。当检测判定电路5130判定LED直管灯正确安装时(即，LED直管灯进入工作模式)，检测判定电路5130会发出禁能的比较结果信号Sdr给晶体管Mb1。此时晶体管Mb1会反应于禁能的比较结果信号Sdr而截止，因此频闪抑制电路690/电压产生电路691可正常产生参考电压Vref，使得运算放大器692基于参考电压Vref和从电阻693检测到的电压Vd产生一个控制信号来控制晶体管694工作在线性区。Specifically, when the detection and determination circuit 5130 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is not installed correctly (ie, the LED straight tube lamp is still in the detection mode), the detection and determination circuit 5130 sends the enabled comparison result signal Sdr to the transistor Mb1. At this time, the transistor Mb1 is turned on in response to the enabled comparison result signal Sdr, so the power input terminal of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 690 is short-circuited to the ground terminal, so that the voltage generating circuit 691 cannot be activated. In this state, the reference voltage Vref is maintained at the ground level/low level, so that the operational amplifier 692 outputs a disabled signal (or can be regarded as not outputting a signal) and the transistor 694 is kept in an off state. When the detection and determination circuit 5130 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed (ie, the LED straight tube lamp enters the working mode), the detection and determination circuit 5130 sends a disabled comparison result signal Sdr to the transistor Mb1. At this time, the transistor Mb1 will be turned off in response to the disabled comparison result signal Sdr, so the stroboscopic suppression circuit 690/voltage generating circuit 691 can normally generate the reference voltage Vref, so that the operational amplifier 692 is based on the reference voltage Vref and the voltage detected from the resistor 693 Vd generates a control signal to control transistor 694 to operate in the linear region.
举例来说，在工作模式下，当母线上的电压升高时，运算放大器692的负输入端上的电压Vd也会随之上升，使得参考电压Vref和电压Vd之间的差值减小。此时运算放大器692会产生一个电平相对较低的控制信号来驱动晶体管694，使得晶体管694的第一端和第二端之间具有较高的等效阻抗；相反地，当母线上的电压降低时，电压Vd也会随之下降，使得参考电压Vref和电压Vd之间的差值增加。此时运算放大器692会产生一个电平相对较高的控制 信号来驱动晶体管694，使得晶体管694的第一端和第二端之间具有较低的等效阻抗。因此，在母线电压上升时，LED模块50会等效地被串接较高阻抗，并且在母线电压下降时，所述串接于LED模块50的阻抗会随之降低，使得无论母线电压如何波动，流经LED模块50的电流大小都可以大致的保持一致，进而避免频闪的现象发生。For example, in the working mode, when the voltage on the bus increases, the voltage Vd on the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier 692 also increases accordingly, so that the difference between the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd decreases. At this time, the operational amplifier 692 will generate a control signal with a relatively low level to drive the transistor 694, so that there is a high equivalent impedance between the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor 694; on the contrary, when the voltage on the bus When decreasing, the voltage Vd also decreases, so that the difference between the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd increases. At this time, the operational amplifier 692 will generate a control signal with a relatively high level to drive the transistor 694, so that there is a low equivalent impedance between the first terminal and the second terminal of the transistor 694. Therefore, when the bus voltage rises, the LED modules 50 are equivalently connected in series with a higher impedance, and when the bus voltage drops, the impedance connected to the LED modules 50 in series decreases accordingly, so that no matter how the bus voltage fluctuates , the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 can be kept roughly the same, thereby avoiding the occurrence of stroboscopic phenomenon.
请参照图33C，图33C是根据本申请一实施例的偏压调整电路的电路架构示意图。偏压调整电路5200B包含晶体管Mb2，其第一端连接运算放大器692的电源端(即，连接偏压电源Vdd的一端)，其第二端连接第二驱动输出端532，且其控制端接收比较结果信号Sdr。本实施例与前述图33B实施例大致相同，其主要差异在于，本实施例的偏压调整电路5200B是通过控制运算放大器692的电源端接地与否，进而实现频闪抑制电路690的禁/使能。Please refer to FIG. 33C , which is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a bias voltage adjustment circuit according to an embodiment of the present application. The bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200B includes a transistor Mb2, the first terminal of which is connected to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier 692 (ie, the terminal connected to the bias power supply Vdd), the second terminal of which is connected to the second driving output terminal 532, and the control terminal of which receives the comparison The resulting signal Sdr. This embodiment is substantially the same as the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 33B , the main difference is that the bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200B of this embodiment controls whether the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier 692 is grounded or not, thereby realizing the prohibition/enablement of the stroboscopic suppression circuit 690 can.
具体而言，当检测判定电路5130判定LED直管灯未正确安装时(即，LED直管灯仍处于检测模式)，检测判定电路5130会发出使能的比较结果信号Sdr给晶体管Mb2。此时晶体管Mb2会反应于使能的比较结果信号Sdr而导通，因此运算放大器692的电源端会被短路到接地端。在此状态下，无论电阻693上的电压Vd为何，运算放大器692皆会输出禁能的信号(或可视为不输出使能信号)而使晶体管694维持在截止的状态。当检测判定电路5130判定LED直管灯正确安装时(即，LED直管灯进入工作模式)，检测判定电路5130会发出禁能的比较结果信号Sdr给晶体管Mb2。此时晶体管Mb2会反应于禁能的比较结果信号Sdr而截止，因此运算放大器692可以正常的接收到偏压电源Vdd，使得运算放大器692基于参考电压Vref和从电阻693检测到的电压Vd产生一个控制信号来控制晶体管694工作在线性区。相关运作可参照上述图33A和33B实施例的说明，于此不再重复赘述。Specifically, when the detection and determination circuit 5130 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is not installed correctly (ie, the LED straight tube lamp is still in the detection mode), the detection and determination circuit 5130 sends the enabled comparison result signal Sdr to the transistor Mb2. At this time, the transistor Mb2 will be turned on in response to the enabled comparison result signal Sdr, so the power terminal of the operational amplifier 692 will be short-circuited to the ground terminal. In this state, no matter what the voltage Vd on the resistor 693 is, the operational amplifier 692 will output a disable signal (or can be regarded as not outputting an enable signal) to keep the transistor 694 in an off state. When the detection and determination circuit 5130 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is installed correctly (ie, the LED straight tube lamp enters the working mode), the detection and determination circuit 5130 sends a disabled comparison result signal Sdr to the transistor Mb2. At this time, the transistor Mb2 will be turned off in response to the disabled comparison result signal Sdr, so the operational amplifier 692 can normally receive the bias power supply Vdd, so that the operational amplifier 692 generates a control based on the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd detected from the resistor 693 signal to control transistor 694 to operate in the linear region. For related operations, reference may be made to the descriptions of the above-mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 33A and 33B , which will not be repeated here.
请参见图34A，图34A是本申请第十五实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的安装检测模块可视为包括检测电路5000b和驱动电路1030。整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路1030以及LED模块50之间的连接关系如前述图9A实施例所述，于此不再赘述。本实施例的检测电路5000b具有输入端与输出端，其输入端耦接在LED直管灯的电源回路上，且其输出端耦接驱动电路1030。Please refer to FIG. 34A. FIG. 34A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module of this embodiment can be regarded as including a detection circuit 5000b and a driving circuit 1030 . The connection relationship among the rectifier circuit 510 , the filter circuit 520 , the drive circuit 1030 and the LED module 50 is as described in the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 9A , and details are not repeated here. The detection circuit 5000b of this embodiment has an input terminal and an output terminal, the input terminal is coupled to the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp, and the output terminal is coupled to the driving circuit 1030 .
具体而言，在一些实施例中，LED直管灯通电后(无论是正确安装或是非正确安装)，驱动电路530会预设进入一安装检测模式。在安装检测模式下，驱动电路1130会提供具有窄脉冲(例如脉冲宽度小于1ms)的点亮控制信号来驱动功率开关(未绘示)，使得驱动电路1130在安装检测模式下所产生的驱动电流小于5MIU或5mA。另一方面，在安装检测模式下，检测电路5000b会检测电源回路上的电信号，并且依据检测到的结果产生一安装状态信号Sidm回传给驱动电路1130。其中，驱动电路1130会根据接收到的安装状态信号Sidm来决定是否进入正常驱动模式。若驱动电路1030判定维持在安装检测模式，则驱动电路1130会依据一设定频率输出具有窄脉冲的点亮控制信号来短暂导通功率开关，以使检测电路5000b可检测到电源回路上的电信号，并且同时令电源回路上的电流在整个安装检测模式下皆小于5MIU。反 之，若驱动电路1130判定进入正常驱动模式，则驱动电路1030会改为依据输入电压、输出电压及输出电流等资讯至少其一或组合来产生可调变脉宽的点亮控制信号。Specifically, in some embodiments, after the LED straight tube lamp is powered on (whether it is installed correctly or incorrectly), the driving circuit 530 will enter an installation detection mode by default. In the installation detection mode, the driving circuit 1130 provides a lighting control signal with narrow pulses (eg, pulse width less than 1 ms) to drive the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current generated by the driving circuit 1130 in the installation detection mode Less than 5MIU or 5mA. On the other hand, in the installation detection mode, the detection circuit 5000b detects the electrical signal on the power circuit, and generates an installation state signal Sidm according to the detection result and sends it back to the driving circuit 1130 . The driving circuit 1130 determines whether to enter the normal driving mode according to the received installation state signal Sidm. If the drive circuit 1030 determines to maintain the installation detection mode, the drive circuit 1130 outputs a lighting control signal with a narrow pulse according to a set frequency to briefly turn on the power switch, so that the detection circuit 5000b can detect the power on the power loop. signal, and at the same time make the current on the power circuit less than 5MIU in the whole installation detection mode. On the contrary, if the driving circuit 1130 determines to enter the normal driving mode, the driving circuit 1030 will instead generate a lighting control signal with adjustable pulse width according to at least one or a combination of information such as input voltage, output voltage and output current.
底下搭配图34B来说明所述第一范例实施例，图34B是本申请第一实施例的具有触电检测功能的驱动电路的电路架构示意图。本实施例的驱动电路1130包含控制器1133以及转换电路1134，其中控制器1133包含信号接收单元1137、锯齿波产生单元1138以及比较单元CUd，并且转换电路1134包含开关电路(也可称为功率开关)1135以及储能电路1136。信号接收单元1137的输入端接收反馈信号Vfb与安装状态信号Sidm，并且信号接收单元1137的输出端耦接比较单元CUd的第一输入端。锯齿波产生单元1038的输出端耦接比较单元CUd的第二输入端。比较单元CUd的输出端耦接至开关电路1035的控制端。开关电路1135与储能电路1036之间的相对配置与实际电路范例如前述图13A-13E所述，于此不再重复赘述。The first exemplary embodiment is described below with reference to FIG. 34B . FIG. 34B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to the first embodiment of the present application. The driving circuit 1130 of this embodiment includes a controller 1133 and a converting circuit 1134, wherein the controller 1133 includes a signal receiving unit 1137, a sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 and a comparing unit CUd, and the converting circuit 1134 includes a switching circuit (also referred to as a power switch) ) 1135 and tank circuit 1136. The input terminal of the signal receiving unit 1137 receives the feedback signal Vfb and the installation state signal Sidm, and the output terminal of the signal receiving unit 1137 is coupled to the first input terminal of the comparing unit CUd. The output terminal of the sawtooth wave generating unit 1038 is coupled to the second input terminal of the comparing unit CUd. The output terminal of the comparison unit CUd is coupled to the control terminal of the switch circuit 1035 . The relative configuration and actual circuit example between the switch circuit 1135 and the tank circuit 1036 are as described above in FIGS. 13A-13E , and details are not repeated here.
在控制器1133中，信号接收单元1137可例如是由误差放大器所组成的电路，其可用以接收关连于电源模块中的电压、电流资讯的反馈信号Vfb，以及由检测电路5000b所提供的安装状态信号Sidm。在实施例中，信号接收单元1137会根据安装状态信号Sidm而选择输出一预设电压Vp或反馈信号Vfb至比较单元CUd的第一输入端。锯齿波产生单元1038是用以产生一锯齿波信号Ssw至比较单元CUd的第二输入端，其中所述锯齿波信号Ssw在其每一周期的信号波形中，其上升沿与下降沿至少其一的斜率非为无穷大。此外，本实施例的锯齿波产生单元1138可以是不论驱动电路1030操作在何种模式下皆以一固定的工作频率来产生锯齿波信号Ssw，或是可在不同操作模式下依据不同的工作频率来产生锯齿波信号Ssw(亦即，锯齿波产生单元1138可依据安装状态信号Sidm改变其工作频率)，本申请不以此为限。比较单元CUd会比较第一输入端与第二输入端上的信号电平，并且在第一输入端上的信号电平大于第二输入端上的信号电平时，输出高电平的点亮控制信号Slc，以及在第一输入端上的信号电平不大于第二输入端上的信号电平时，输出低电平的点亮控制信号Slc。换言之，比较单元CUd会在锯齿波信号Ssw的信号电平大于预设电压Vp或反馈信号Vfb的信号电平的期间输出高电平，进而产生具有脉冲形式的点亮控制信号Slc。In the controller 1133, the signal receiving unit 1137 can be, for example, a circuit composed of an error amplifier, which can be used to receive the feedback signal Vfb related to the voltage and current information in the power module, and the installation status provided by the detection circuit 5000b Signal Sidm. In an embodiment, the signal receiving unit 1137 selects to output a preset voltage Vp or a feedback signal Vfb to the first input terminal of the comparison unit CUd according to the installation state signal Sidm. The sawtooth wave generating unit 1038 is used for generating a sawtooth wave signal Ssw to the second input end of the comparing unit CUd, wherein the sawtooth wave signal Ssw has at least one of a rising edge and a falling edge in the signal waveform of each cycle. The slope of is not infinite. In addition, the sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 of the present embodiment can generate the sawtooth wave signal Ssw with a fixed operating frequency no matter what mode the driving circuit 1030 operates in, or can generate the sawtooth wave signal Ssw in different operating modes according to different operating frequencies to generate the sawtooth wave signal Ssw (that is, the sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 can change its operating frequency according to the installation state signal Sidm), which is not limited in the present application. The comparison unit CUd compares the signal levels on the first input terminal and the second input terminal, and outputs a high-level lighting control when the signal level on the first input terminal is greater than the signal level on the second input terminal The signal Slc, and when the signal level on the first input terminal is not greater than the signal level on the second input terminal, a low-level lighting control signal Slc is output. In other words, the comparison unit CUd outputs a high level when the signal level of the sawtooth wave signal Ssw is greater than the predetermined voltage Vp or the signal level of the feedback signal Vfb, thereby generating the lighting control signal Slc in the form of pulses.
请一并参照图34B与图45C，图45C是本申请第三实施例的电源模块的信号时序示意图。当LED直管灯通电后(两端安装至灯座，或者一端安装至灯座另一端被使用者误触)，驱动电路1130会被启动，并且预设地进入安装检测模式DTM。底下以第一周期T1内的运作来进行说明，在安装检测模式下，信号接收单元1137会输出预设电压Vp至比较单元CUd的第一输入端，并且锯齿波产生单元1138也开始产生锯齿波信号Ssw至比较单元CUd的第二输入端。以锯齿波SW的信号电平变化来看，锯齿波SW的信号电平会自驱动电路1130被启动的时间点ts后从起始电平逐渐上升，并且在达到峰值电平后再逐渐下降至起始电平。在锯齿波SW的信号电平上升至预设电压Vp之前，比较单元CUd会输出低电平的点亮控制信号Slc；在锯齿波SW的信号电平上升至超过预设电压Vp之后至再次降回低于预设电压Vp之前的期间内，比 较单元CUd会将点亮控制信号Slc上拉至高电平；以及在锯齿波SW的信号电平再次降至低于预设电压Vp之后，比较单元CUd会再次将点亮控制信号Slc下拉至低电平。藉由所述的比较运作，比较单元CUd即可基于锯齿波SW1与预设电压Vp产生脉冲DP，其中所述脉冲DP的脉冲期间DPW即为锯齿波SW的信号电平高于预设电压Vp的期间。Please refer to FIG. 34B and FIG. 45C together. FIG. 45C is a schematic diagram of signal timing of the power module according to the third embodiment of the present application. When the LED straight tube lamp is powered on (both ends are attached to the lamp socket, or one end is attached to the lamp socket and the other end is accidentally touched by the user), the driving circuit 1130 will be activated and enter the installation detection mode DTM by default. The operation in the first period T1 is described below. In the installation detection mode, the signal receiving unit 1137 outputs the preset voltage Vp to the first input terminal of the comparing unit CUd, and the sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 also starts to generate the sawtooth wave. The signal Ssw is supplied to the second input terminal of the comparison unit CUd. Judging from the change of the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW, the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW will gradually increase from the starting level after the time point ts when the driving circuit 1130 is activated, and then gradually decrease to the peak level after reaching the peak level. start level. Before the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW rises to the preset voltage Vp, the comparison unit CUd will output a low-level lighting control signal Slc; after the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW rises to exceed the preset voltage Vp, it falls again During the period before returning to lower than the preset voltage Vp, the comparison unit CUd will pull up the lighting control signal Slc to a high level; and after the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW falls below the preset voltage Vp again, the comparison unit CUd will pull down the lighting control signal Slc to a low level again. Through the comparison operation, the comparison unit CUd can generate the pulse DP based on the sawtooth wave SW1 and the predetermined voltage Vp, wherein the pulse period DPW of the pulse DP is that the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW is higher than the predetermined voltage Vp period.
带有脉冲DP的点亮控制信号Slc会被传输到开关电路1135的控制端，使得开关电路1035会在脉冲期间DPW内导通，进而使储能单元1136储能，并且在电源回路上产生驱动电流。由于驱动电流的产生会导致电源回路的信号电平/波形/频率等信号特征发生改变，因此此时检测电路5000b会检测到取样信号Ssp发生电平变化SP。其中，检测电路5000b会进一步判断此电平变化SP是否有超过一参考电压Vref。在第一周期T1中，由于电平变化SP尚未超过参考电压Vref，因此检测电路5000b会输出相应的安装状态信号Sidm给信号接收单元1037，使得信号接收单元1137继续维持在安装检测模式DTM，并且持续输出预设电压Vp给比较单元CUd。在第二周期T2中，由于取样信号Ssp的电平变化与第一周期T1类似，因此整体的电路动作与第一周期T1内的运作相同，故不再重复赘述。The lighting control signal Slc with the pulse DP will be transmitted to the control terminal of the switch circuit 1135, so that the switch circuit 1035 will be turned on during the pulse period DPW, thereby making the energy storage unit 1136 store energy, and drive on the power loop. current. Since the generation of the driving current will cause the signal characteristics of the power circuit to change, such as the signal level/waveform/frequency, the detection circuit 5000b will detect the level change SP of the sampling signal Ssp at this time. The detection circuit 5000b further determines whether the level change SP exceeds a reference voltage Vref. In the first period T1, since the level change SP has not exceeded the reference voltage Vref, the detection circuit 5000b will output the corresponding installation state signal Sidm to the signal receiving unit 1037, so that the signal receiving unit 1137 continues to maintain the installation detection mode DTM, and The preset voltage Vp is continuously output to the comparison unit CUd. In the second period T2, since the level change of the sampling signal Ssp is similar to that in the first period T1, the overall circuit operation is the same as the operation in the first period T1, and thus will not be repeated.
换言之，在第一周期T1与第二周期T2中，LED直管灯会被判断为尚未正确安装。另外附带一提的是，在此状态下，虽然驱动电路1130会在电源回路上产生驱动电流，但是因为开关电路1035的导通时间相对短暂，因此驱动电流的电流值不会对人体造成危害(小于5mA/MIU，可低至0)。In other words, in the first period T1 and the second period T2, the LED straight tube light will be judged as not being installed correctly. In addition, it should be mentioned that in this state, although the driving circuit 1130 will generate a driving current on the power circuit, because the on-time of the switching circuit 1035 is relatively short, the current value of the driving current will not cause harm to the human body ( Less than 5mA/MIU, can be as low as 0).
在进入第三周期T3后，检测电路5000b判断取样信号Ssp的电平变化超过了参考电压Vref，因此发出了相应的安装状态信号Sidm给信号接收单元1137，藉以指示LED直管灯已被正确安装至灯座上。当信号接收单元1137接收到指示LED直管灯已被正确安装的安装状态信号Sidm后，驱动电路1130会在第三周期T3结束后从安装检测模式DTM进入正常驱动模式DRM。在正常驱动模式DRM下的第四周期T4中，信号接收单元1037会改为依据从外部接收的反馈信号Vfb来产生对应的信号给比较单元CUd，使得比较单元CUd可以依据输入电压、输出电压、驱动电流等资讯而动态地调整点亮控制信号Slc的脉冲宽度，进而使LED模块可以被点亮并维持在设定的亮度。在正常驱动模式DRM下，检测电路5000b可以停止运作，或是持续运作但信号接收单元1037忽略安装状态信号Sidm，本申请不以此为限。After entering the third period T3, the detection circuit 5000b determines that the level change of the sampling signal Ssp exceeds the reference voltage Vref, so it sends a corresponding installation status signal Sidm to the signal receiving unit 1137, thereby indicating that the LED straight tube lamp has been installed correctly to the lamp socket. After the signal receiving unit 1137 receives the installation state signal Sidm indicating that the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed, the driving circuit 1130 will enter the normal driving mode DRM from the installation detection mode DTM after the third period T3 ends. In the fourth period T4 under the normal driving mode DRM, the signal receiving unit 1037 will instead generate a corresponding signal to the comparison unit CUd according to the feedback signal Vfb received from the outside, so that the comparison unit CUd can be based on the input voltage, output voltage, The pulse width of the lighting control signal Slc is dynamically adjusted based on information such as the driving current, so that the LED module can be lit and maintained at the set brightness. In the normal driving mode DRM, the detection circuit 5000b may stop operating, or continue to operate but the signal receiving unit 1037 ignores the installation state signal Sidm, which is not limited in the present application.
请再参照图34A，在第二范例实施例中，LED直管灯通电后(无论是正确安装或是非正确安装)，检测电路5000b会反映于电流路径的形成而被启动，并且在一个短暂期间内检测电源回路的电信号，并且根据检测结果回传一个安装状态信号Sidm给驱动电路1130。其中，驱动电路1130会根据接收到的安装状态信号Sidm来决定是否启动以进行电源转换运作。在检测电路5000b输出指示灯管已正确安装的安装状态信号Sidm时，驱动电路1030反应于安装状态信号Sidm而启动，并且产生驱动信号来驱动功率开关，进而将接收到的电源转换为输出给LED模块的输出电源；在此情况下，检测电路5000b会在输出指示灯管已正确安装的安装 状态信号Sidm后，切换为不影响电源转换运作的操作模态。另一方面，在检测电路5000b输出指示灯管未正确安装的安装状态信号Sidm时，驱动电路1130会维持在关闭的状态，直到接收到指示灯管正确安装的安装状态信号Sidm；在此情况下，检测电路5000b会维持以原先的检测模式继续检测电源回路上的电信号，直到检测到灯管已正确安装。Referring to FIG. 34A again, in the second exemplary embodiment, after the LED straight tube lamp is powered on (whether it is installed correctly or incorrectly), the detection circuit 5000b will be activated in response to the formation of the current path, and in a short period of time The electric signal of the power supply circuit is internally detected, and an installation status signal Sidm is returned to the driving circuit 1130 according to the detection result. Wherein, the driving circuit 1130 determines whether to start up to perform the power conversion operation according to the received installation state signal Sidm. When the detection circuit 5000b outputs the installation status signal Sidm indicating that the indicator tube has been correctly installed, the driving circuit 1030 is activated in response to the installation status signal Sidm, and generates a driving signal to drive the power switch, thereby converting the received power to output to the LED The output power of the module; in this case, the detection circuit 5000b switches to the operation mode that does not affect the power conversion operation after outputting the installation status signal Sidm indicating that the indicator tube has been installed correctly. On the other hand, when the detection circuit 5000b outputs the installation status signal Sidm indicating that the indicator tube is not properly installed, the driving circuit 1130 will remain in a closed state until receiving the installation status signal Sidm that the indicator tube is properly installed; in this case , the detection circuit 5000b will continue to detect the electrical signal on the power circuit in the original detection mode until it is detected that the lamp has been installed correctly.
请参照图35A，图35A是本申请第十六实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的电源模块包括整流电路510、滤波电路520、安装检测模块5000d及驱动电路1230。整流电路510及滤波电路520的配置与先前实施例所述类似。安装检测模块5000d包含检测触发电路5310，并且检测触发电路5310是设置在电源回路上(在此是以设置在滤波电路520后级为例，但本申请不以此为限)，并且与驱动电路1230的电源端或电压检测端耦接。驱动电路1230的输出端耦接LED模块630。Please refer to FIG. 35A . FIG. 35A is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present application. The power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , an installation detection module 5000d and a drive circuit 1230 . The configurations of the rectifier circuit 510 and the filter circuit 520 are similar to those described in the previous embodiments. The installation detection module 5000d includes a detection trigger circuit 5310, and the detection trigger circuit 5310 is set on the power supply circuit (here, it is set at the rear stage of the filter circuit 520 as an example, but this application is not limited to this), and is connected with the drive circuit. The power terminal or the voltage detection terminal of 1230 is coupled. The output end of the driving circuit 1230 is coupled to the LED module 630 .
在本实施例中，检测触发电路5310会在外部电源施加到电源模块上时启动，以将提供给驱动电路1230的电源端或电压检测端的电信号调整为具有一第一波形特征的电信号。当驱动电路1230会在接收到具有第一波形特征的电信号时进入检测模式，藉以输出符合检测需求的窄脉冲来驱动功率开关，再藉由检测流经功率开关或LED模块50的电流大小来判断灯管是否已被正确安装至灯座上。若判定灯管已正确安装，则驱动电路1230会改采正常工作下的驱动方式来驱动功率开关，使得驱动电路1230可提供稳定的输出电源来点亮LED模块630；此时检测触发电路5310会关闭，使提供给驱动电路1230的电源不被影响，即此时提供至驱动电路的电源端或电压检测端的电信号不具有第一波形特征。若判定灯管未正确安装，则驱动电路1230会持续以窄脉冲来驱动功率开关，直到判断灯管已被正确安装。此部分的信号时序类似于图45C所示，可参照对应段落叙述。In this embodiment, the detection trigger circuit 5310 is activated when the external power is applied to the power module, so as to adjust the electrical signal provided to the power terminal or the voltage detection terminal of the driving circuit 1230 to an electrical signal having a first waveform characteristic. When the driving circuit 1230 receives the electrical signal with the first waveform characteristic, it will enter the detection mode, so as to output narrow pulses that meet the detection requirements to drive the power switch, and then detect the magnitude of the current flowing through the power switch or the LED module 50 to detect Determine whether the lamp tube has been correctly installed on the lamp socket. If it is determined that the lamp has been installed correctly, the driving circuit 1230 will change the driving mode under normal operation to drive the power switch, so that the driving circuit 1230 can provide a stable output power to light the LED module 630; at this time, the detection trigger circuit 5310 will When it is turned off, the power supply provided to the driving circuit 1230 is not affected, that is, the electrical signal provided to the power supply terminal or the voltage detection terminal of the driving circuit at this time does not have the first waveform characteristic. If it is determined that the lamp tube is not installed correctly, the driving circuit 1230 will continue to drive the power switch with narrow pulses until it is determined that the lamp tube has been installed correctly. The signal timing of this part is similar to that shown in FIG. 45C, and can be described with reference to the corresponding paragraph.
底下搭配图35B与图35C的具体电路模块来举例说明，图35B是本申请第二实施例的具有触电检测功能的驱动电路的电路架构示意图，图35C是本申请一实施例的集成控制器的电路方块示意图。在本实施例中，驱动电路1230包括集成控制器1233、电感1236、二极管1234、电感1237及电阻1238，其中集成控制器1233包括多个信号接收端，例如电源端P_VIN、电压检测端P_VSEN、电流检测端P_ISEN、驱动端P_DRN、补偿端P_COMP及参考接地端P_GND。电感1236的第一端与二极管1234的阳极共同连接至集成控制器1233的驱动端P_DRN。电阻1238连接至集成控制器1233的电流感测端I_SEN。检测触发电路5310于本实施例中可例如是一开关电路，其连接至集成控制器1233的电压检测端V_SEN。除此之外，为了因应集成控制器1233的操作需求，电源模块还包含有多个设置于集成控制器1233外部的辅助电路，例如连接在滤波电路520输出端的电阻Rb1及Rb2。在电源模块中可能还包括有其他未绘示出的外部辅助电路，但此部分不影响整体电路运作的说明。35B and FIG. 35C are used for illustration. FIG. 35B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the driving circuit with electric shock detection function according to the second embodiment of the present application, and FIG. 35C is a schematic diagram of the integrated controller of an embodiment of the present application Circuit block diagram. In this embodiment, the driving circuit 1230 includes an integrated controller 1233, an inductor 1236, a diode 1234, an inductor 1237 and a resistor 1238, wherein the integrated controller 1233 includes a plurality of signal receiving terminals, such as a power terminal P_VIN, a voltage detection terminal P_VSEN, a current The detection terminal P_ISEN, the driving terminal P_DRN, the compensation terminal P_COMP and the reference ground terminal P_GND. The first terminal of the inductor 1236 and the anode of the diode 1234 are connected to the driving terminal P_DRN of the integrated controller 1233 in common. The resistor 1238 is connected to the current sensing terminal I_SEN of the integrated controller 1233 . In this embodiment, the detection trigger circuit 5310 can be, for example, a switch circuit, which is connected to the voltage detection terminal V_SEN of the integrated controller 1233 . Besides, in order to meet the operation requirements of the integrated controller 1233 , the power module also includes a plurality of auxiliary circuits disposed outside the integrated controller 1233 , such as resistors Rb1 and Rb2 connected to the output end of the filter circuit 520 . The power module may also include other external auxiliary circuits not shown, but this part does not affect the description of the operation of the overall circuit.
集成控制器1233包含脉冲控制单元PCU、功率开关单元1235、电流控制单元CCU、增益放大单元Gm、偏压单元BU、检测触发单元DTU、切换单元SWU及比较单元CU1和CU2。脉冲 控制单元PCU用以产生脉冲信号以控制功率开关单元1235。功率开关单元1235通过驱动端P_DRN连接电感1236与二极管1234，并且反应于脉冲信号的控制而切换，使得电感1236可在正常工作模式下反复地充放能，以提供稳定的输出电流给LED模块50。电流控制单元CCU通过电压检测端P_VSEN接收电压检测信号VSEN并且通过电流检测端P_ISEN接收指示流经电阻1238的电流ISEN大小的电流检测信号(以ISEN表示)，其中电流控制单元CCU在正常工作模式下会根据电压检测信号VSEN与电流检测信号ISEN得知LED模块50的实时工作状态，并且根据工作状态产生一输出调整信号。所述输出调整信号经增益放大单元Gm处理后会被提供至脉冲控制单元PCU，藉以作为脉冲控制单元PCU产生脉冲信号的参考。偏压单元BU会从电源模块上接收经滤波电路520滤波后的信号，并且产生稳定的驱动电压VCC及参考电压V REF给集成控制器1233中的各单元使用。检测触发单元DTU通过电压检测端P_VSEN连接检测触发电路5310与电阻Rb1及Rb2，其用以检测从电压检测端P_VSEN接收到的电压检测信号VSEN的信号特征是否符合第一波形特征，并且根据检测结果输出一检测结果信号至脉冲控制单元PCU。切换单元SWU通过电流检测端P_ISEN连接至电阻1238的第一端，其会根据检测触发单元DTU的检测结果而选择性的将电流检测信号I SEN提供给比较单元CU1或CU2。比较单元CU1主要是作为过流保护之用，其会将接收到的电流检测信号ISEN与一过流参考信号V OCP进行比较，并且将比较的结果输出至脉冲控制单元PCU。比较单元CU2主要是作为防触电保护之用，其会将接收到的电流检测信号ISEN与一安装参考信号V IDM进行比较，并且将比较的结果输出至脉冲控制单元PCU。 The integrated controller 1233 includes a pulse control unit PCU, a power switch unit 1235, a current control unit CCU, a gain amplification unit Gm, a bias voltage unit BU, a detection trigger unit DTU, a switch unit SWU, and comparison units CU1 and CU2. The pulse control unit PCU is used to generate a pulse signal to control the power switch unit 1235 . The power switch unit 1235 is connected to the inductor 1236 and the diode 1234 through the driving terminal P_DRN, and is switched in response to the control of the pulse signal, so that the inductor 1236 can be repeatedly charged and discharged in the normal working mode to provide a stable output current to the LED module 50 . The current control unit CCU receives the voltage detection signal VSEN through the voltage detection terminal P_VSEN and the current detection signal (represented by ISEN) indicating the magnitude of the current ISEN flowing through the resistor 1238 through the current detection terminal P_ISEN, wherein the current control unit CCU is in the normal operation mode The real-time working state of the LED module 50 is known according to the voltage detection signal VSEN and the current detection signal ISEN, and an output adjustment signal is generated according to the working state. The output adjustment signal is processed by the gain amplifying unit Gm and then provided to the pulse control unit PCU, so as to be used as a reference for the pulse control unit PCU to generate the pulse signal. The bias unit BU receives the signal filtered by the filter circuit 520 from the power supply module, and generates a stable driving voltage VCC and a reference voltage V REF for use by each unit in the integrated controller 1233 . The detection trigger unit DTU is connected to the detection trigger circuit 5310 and the resistors Rb1 and Rb2 through the voltage detection terminal P_VSEN, which is used to detect whether the signal characteristic of the voltage detection signal VSEN received from the voltage detection terminal P_VSEN conforms to the first waveform characteristic, and according to the detection result A detection result signal is output to the pulse control unit PCU. The switch unit SWU is connected to the first end of the resistor 1238 through the current detection terminal P_ISEN , which selectively provides the current detection signal ISEN to the comparison unit CU1 or CU2 according to the detection result of the detection trigger unit DTU. The comparison unit CU1 is mainly used for overcurrent protection, it compares the received current detection signal ISEN with an overcurrent reference signal V OCP , and outputs the comparison result to the pulse control unit PCU. The comparison unit CU2 is mainly used for protection against electric shock, it compares the received current detection signal ISEN with an installation reference signal VIDM , and outputs the comparison result to the pulse control unit PCU.
具体而言，当LED直管灯通电时，检测触发电路5310会先被启动，并且藉由如开关切换之类的方式来影响/调整提供至电压检测端P_VSEN的电压检测信号VSEN，使得电压检测信号VSEN具有特定的第一波形特征。举例来说，以检测触发电路5310为开关为例，检测触发电路5310可以在启动时以一预设的时间间隔连续短暂切换导通状态数次，使得电压检测信号VSEN会有反应于开关切换的电压波形震荡。集成控制器1233在接收到电源时预设为不启动，即脉冲控制单元PCU不会立即输出脉冲信号来驱动功率开关单元1235以点亮LED模块50。而是检测触发单元DTU会先根据电压检测信号VSEN来判断其波形特征是否符合设定的第一波形特征，并且将判断结果传输至脉冲控制单元PCU。Specifically, when the LED straight tube lamp is powered on, the detection trigger circuit 5310 will be activated first, and the voltage detection signal VSEN provided to the voltage detection terminal P_VSEN is affected/adjusted by means such as switching, so that the voltage detection The signal VSEN has a specific first waveform characteristic. For example, taking the detection trigger circuit 5310 as a switch as an example, the detection trigger circuit 5310 can briefly switch the on-state several times at a preset time interval during startup, so that the voltage detection signal VSEN will respond to the switching of the switch. The voltage waveform oscillates. The integrated controller 1233 is preset to be disabled when receiving power, that is, the pulse control unit PCU will not immediately output a pulse signal to drive the power switch unit 1235 to light up the LED module 50 . Instead, the detection triggering unit DTU will first determine whether the waveform characteristic conforms to the set first waveform characteristic according to the voltage detection signal VSEN, and transmit the determination result to the pulse control unit PCU.
当脉冲控制单元PCU从检测触发单元DTU接收到指示电压检测信号VSEN符合第一波形特征的信号时，集成控制器1233进入安装检测模式。在安装检测模式下，脉冲控制单元PCU会输出窄脉冲来驱动功率开关单元1235，使得电源回路上的电流被限制在不会造成人体触电风险的电流值之下(如5MIU)，在检测模式下的具体脉冲信号设定可参照前述有关安装检测模块的实施例说明。另一方面，在安装检测模式下，切换单元SWU会切换为将电流感测信号ISEN传输至比较单元CU2的电路组态，使得比较单元CU2可以比较电流感测信号ISEN与安装参考信号V IDM。其中，由于在未正确安装的情况下，电阻1238的第二端会等效为经由人体电阻Rbody连接至接地端GND1，而在电阻串联的情况下，等效电阻值会增加，使得电流检测信号ISEN 脉冲控制单元PCU可根据比较单元CU2的比较结果得知LED直管灯是否已正确安装至灯座上。因此，若脉冲控制单元PCU根据比较单元CU2的比较结果判定LED直管灯尚未正确安装至灯座上，则集成控制器1233会维持在安装检测模式下运作，亦即脉冲控制单元PCU会继续输出窄脉冲来驱动功率开关单元1235，并且根据电流感测信号ISEN判断LED直管灯是否有被正确安装。若脉冲控制单元PCU根据比较单元CU2的比较结果判定LED直管灯已正确安装至灯座上，则集成控制器1233会进入正常工作模式。 When the pulse control unit PCU receives a signal from the detection trigger unit DTU indicating that the voltage detection signal VSEN conforms to the first waveform characteristic, the integrated controller 1233 enters the installation detection mode. In the installation detection mode, the pulse control unit PCU will output narrow pulses to drive the power switch unit 1235, so that the current on the power circuit is limited to a current value (such as 5MIU) that will not cause the risk of electric shock to the human body. In the detection mode For the specific pulse signal setting of , please refer to the above-mentioned description of the embodiment of the installation detection module. On the other hand, in the installation detection mode, the switching unit SWU switches to a circuit configuration for transmitting the current sensing signal ISEN to the comparison unit CU2, so that the comparison unit CU2 can compare the current sensing signal ISEN with the installation reference signal VIDM . Among them, in the case of incorrect installation, the second end of the resistor 1238 will be equivalently connected to the ground terminal GND1 through the body resistance Rbody, and in the case of the resistors connected in series, the equivalent resistance value will increase, so that the current detection signal The ISEN pulse control unit PCU can know whether the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket according to the comparison result of the comparison unit CU2. Therefore, if the pulse control unit PCU determines according to the comparison result of the comparison unit CU2 that the LED straight tube lamp has not been correctly installed on the lamp socket, the integrated controller 1233 will maintain the operation in the installation detection mode, that is, the pulse control unit PCU will continue to output The power switch unit 1235 is driven by a narrow pulse, and according to the current sensing signal ISEN, it is determined whether the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed. If the pulse control unit PCU determines that the LED straight tube lamp has been correctly installed on the lamp socket according to the comparison result of the comparison unit CU2, the integrated controller 1233 will enter the normal working mode.
在正常工作模式下，检测触发电路5310会停止作用，亦即检测触发电路5310不再影响/调整电压检测信号VSEN。此时电压检测信号VSEN仅由电阻Rb1与Rb2的分压决定。在集成控制器1233中，检测触发单元DTU可以是被禁能，或是脉冲控制单元PCU不再参考检测触发单元DTU输出的信号。脉冲控制单元PCU主要会根据电流控制单元CCU及增益放大单元Gm所输出的信号作为调整脉冲宽度的依据，使得脉冲控制单元PCU输出对应额定功率的脉冲信号来驱动功率开关单元1235，藉以提供稳定的电流给LED模块50。另一方面，切换单元SWU会切换为将电流感测信号ISEN传输至比较单元CU1的电路组态，使得比较单元CU1可以比较电流感测信号ISEN与过流保护信号V OCP，进而使脉冲控制单元PCU可在发生过流情形时调整输出的脉冲信号，避免电路损毁。在此应注意的是，所述过流保护的功能在集成控制器1233中是可选的。在其他实施例中，集成控制器1233可以不包含比较单元CU1，在此配置底下，切换单元SWU可以同时省略，使电流检测信号ISEN可直接被提供至比较单元CU2的输入端。 In the normal working mode, the detection trigger circuit 5310 stops functioning, that is, the detection trigger circuit 5310 no longer affects/adjusts the voltage detection signal VSEN. At this time, the voltage detection signal VSEN is determined only by the voltage division of the resistors Rb1 and Rb2. In the integrated controller 1233, the detection triggering unit DTU may be disabled, or the pulse control unit PCU no longer refers to the signal output by the detection triggering unit DTU. The pulse control unit PCU mainly uses the signals output by the current control unit CCU and the gain amplifying unit Gm as the basis for adjusting the pulse width, so that the pulse control unit PCU outputs a pulse signal corresponding to the rated power to drive the power switch unit 1235, so as to provide stable power. Current is supplied to the LED module 50 . On the other hand, the switching unit SWU will switch to the circuit configuration of transmitting the current sensing signal ISEN to the comparing unit CU1 , so that the comparing unit CU1 can compare the current sensing signal ISEN with the overcurrent protection signal V OCP , thereby enabling the pulse control unit The PCU can adjust the output pulse signal when an overcurrent condition occurs to avoid circuit damage. It should be noted here that the function of the overcurrent protection is optional in the integrated controller 1233 . In other embodiments, the integrated controller 1233 may not include the comparison unit CU1, and in this configuration, the switching unit SWU may be omitted at the same time, so that the current detection signal ISEN can be directly provided to the input terminal of the comparison unit CU2.
请参照图35D，图35D是本申请第三实施例的具有触电检测功能的驱动电路的电路架构示意图。本实施例的驱动电路1330与前述图35B实施例大致相同，其包含集成控制器1333、二极管1334、电感1336、电容1337及电阻1338，其差异仅在于本实施例的驱动电路1330增加了晶体管Mp及并联电阻阵列Rpa的配置，其中晶体管Mp的漏极连接电阻1338的第一端，栅极连接集成控制器1333的一检测控制端，并且源极连接连到并联电阻阵列Rpa的第一端。并联电阻阵列Rpa包括多个相互并联的电阻，其电阻值可对应电阻1238设置，其中并联电阻阵列Rpa的第二端连接接地端GND1。Please refer to FIG. 35D . FIG. 35D is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to a third embodiment of the present application. The driving circuit 1330 of this embodiment is substantially the same as the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 35B , which includes an integrated controller 1333 , a diode 1334 , an inductor 1336 , a capacitor 1337 and a resistor 1338 , and the only difference is that the driving circuit 1330 of this embodiment adds a transistor Mp And the configuration of the parallel resistor array Rpa, wherein the drain of the transistor Mp is connected to the first terminal of the resistor 1338, the gate is connected to a detection control terminal of the integrated controller 1333, and the source is connected to the first terminal of the parallel resistor array Rpa. The parallel resistor array Rpa includes a plurality of resistors in parallel with each other, the resistance values of which can be set corresponding to the resistor 1238 , wherein the second end of the parallel resistor array Rpa is connected to the ground terminal GND1 .
在本实施例中，集成控制器1333会根据当前的工作模式而经由检测控制端发出对应的信号至晶体管Mp的栅极，使得晶体管Mp在安装检测模式下反映于接收到的信号而导通，并且在正常工作模式下反映于接收到的信号而截止。在晶体管Mp导通的情况下，并联电阻阵列Rpa可等效为与电阻1338并联，使得等效电阻值降低，进而与人体电阻匹配。如此一来，当直管灯未正确安装而造成人体电阻连接到电源回路上时，经过等效电阻值的调整可使得检测电流信号ISEN对于人体电阻加入时的电流变化更加明显，进而提高安装检测的正确性。In this embodiment, the integrated controller 1333 sends a corresponding signal to the gate of the transistor Mp through the detection control terminal according to the current operating mode, so that the transistor Mp is turned on in response to the received signal in the installation detection mode, And in the normal working mode, it is reflected in the received signal and turned off. When the transistor Mp is turned on, the parallel resistor array Rpa can be equivalently connected to the resistor 1338 in parallel, so that the equivalent resistance value is reduced, and further matched with the human body resistance. In this way, when the straight tube lamp is not installed correctly and the human body resistance is connected to the power supply circuit, the adjustment of the equivalent resistance value can make the current change of the detection current signal ISEN more obvious when the human body resistance is added, thereby improving the installation detection efficiency. correctness.
请参见图36，图36是本申请第十三实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。在本实施例中，LED直管灯1400例如是直接接收外部电网508所提供的外部驱动信号，其中所述外部驱动信号通过火线(L)与中性线(N)给到LED直管灯1200的两端接脚501、502上。在实际应用 中，LED直管灯1400可更包括接脚503、504。在LED直管灯1400包含有4根接脚501-504的结构底下，依设计需求同侧灯头上的两接脚(如501与503，或502与504)可以电性连接在一起或是相互电性独立，本申请不以此为限。触电检测模块6000设置于灯管内并包括检测控制电路6100以及限流电路6200，所述触电检测模块6000亦可称为安装检测模块6000(底下以安装检测模块进行描述6000)。限流电路6200是与驱动电路530搭配设置，其可例如为用以控制驱动电路禁/使能的偏压调整电路，或是驱动电路本身的功率开关(可参考相关实施例的说明)。检测控制电路6100会在检测模式下检测整流电路510输入端上的信号(即，外部电网508所提供的信号)，并根据检测结果控制限流电路6200，以决定是否禁止电流流过LED直管灯1400。当LED直管灯1400尚未正确安装于灯座时，检测控制电路6100会检测到较小的电流信号而判断信号流过过高的阻抗，此时限流电路6200会禁能驱动电路，以使LED直管灯1400停止操作(即，使LED直管灯1400不被点亮)。若否，检测控制电路6100判断LED直管灯1400正确安装于灯座上，限流电路6200会使能驱动电路，以使LED直管灯1400正常操作(即，使LED直管灯1400可被正常点亮)。换言之，当检测控制电路6100从整流电路510的输入端取样并检测到的电流高于安装设定电流(或电流值)时，检测控制电路6100判断LED直管灯1400正确安装于灯座上而控制限流电路使能驱动电路；当检测控制电路6100从整流电路510的输入端取样并检测到的电流低于所述安装设定电流(或电流值)时，检测控制电路6100判断LED直管灯1400未正确安装于灯座上而控制限流电路禁能驱动电路，使LED直管灯1400进入一不导通状态或是令LED直管灯1400的电源回路上的电流有效值被限缩至小于5mA(基于验证标准则为5MIU)。换句话说，安装检测模块6000基于检测到的阻抗判断导通或截止，使LED直管灯1400操作于导通或进入不导通/限制电流状态。藉此，可以避免使用者在LED直管灯1400尚未正确安装于灯座时因误触LED直管灯1400导电部分而触电的问题。Please refer to FIG. 36 . FIG. 36 is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the LED straight tube lamp 1400, for example, directly receives an external driving signal provided by the external power grid 508, wherein the external driving signal is supplied to the LED straight tube lamp 1200 through the live wire (L) and the neutral wire (N). on both ends of the pins 501 and 502. In practical applications, the LED straight tube lamp 1400 may further include pins 503 and 504. Under the structure of the LED straight tube lamp 1400 including four pins 501-504, the two pins ( eg 501 and 503, or 502 and 504) on the same side of the lamp head can be electrically connected together or mutually according to design requirements Electrically independent, this application is not limited to this. The electric shock detection module 6000 is disposed in the lamp tube and includes a detection control circuit 6100 and a current limiting circuit 6200. The electric shock detection module 6000 can also be called an installation detection module 6000 (the installation detection module 6000 is described below). The current limiting circuit 6200 is configured in conjunction with the driving circuit 530 , which may be, for example, a bias adjustment circuit for controlling the disable/enable of the driving circuit, or a power switch of the driving circuit itself (refer to the description of the related embodiments). The detection control circuit 6100 detects the signal on the input terminal of the rectifier circuit 510 in the detection mode (ie, the signal provided by the external power grid 508 ), and controls the current limiting circuit 6200 according to the detection result to determine whether to prohibit the current from flowing through the LED straight tube Lamp 1400. When the LED straight tube lamp 1400 has not been properly installed in the lamp socket, the detection control circuit 6100 will detect a small current signal and determine that the signal flows through an excessively high impedance. At this time, the current limiting circuit 6200 will disable the driving circuit, so that the LED The straight tube light 1400 stops operating (ie, the LED straight tube light 1400 is not lit). If not, the detection control circuit 6100 determines that the LED straight tube light 1400 is correctly installed on the lamp socket, and the current limiting circuit 6200 enables the driving circuit to make the LED straight tube light 1400 operate normally (ie, the LED straight tube light 1400 can be normally lit). In other words, when the detection control circuit 6100 samples from the input end of the rectifier circuit 510 and detects that the current is higher than the installation setting current (or current value), the detection control circuit 6100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp 1400 is correctly installed on the lamp socket and Control the current limiting circuit to enable the drive circuit; when the detection control circuit 6100 samples from the input end of the rectifier circuit 510 and detects that the current is lower than the installation setting current (or current value), the detection control circuit 6100 determines that the LED is straight The lamp 1400 is not properly installed on the lamp socket and the current limiting circuit is controlled to disable the drive circuit, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1400 enters a non-conducting state or the RMS current on the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp 1400 is limited to less than 5mA (5MIU based on validation criteria). In other words, the installation detection module 6000 determines whether to turn on or off based on the detected impedance, so that the LED straight tube lamp 1400 is operated to be turned on or into a non-conduction/limited current state. In this way, it is possible to avoid the problem of electric shock caused by the user accidentally touching the conductive part of the LED straight tube light 1400 when the LED straight tube light 1400 is not properly installed on the lamp socket.
更具体的说，因为当人体接触灯管时，人体的阻抗会导致电源回路上的等效阻抗改变，安装检测模块6000可藉由检测电源回路上的电压/电流变化来判断用户是否接触灯管，即可实现上述的防触电功能。换言之，在本申请实施例中，安装检测模块6000可以透过检测电信号(包括电压或电流)来判断灯管是否被正确安装以及使用者是否在灯管未正确安装的情况下误触灯管的导电部分。相较于图18、图29实施例而言，由于本实施例的检测控制电路6100是通过取样桥前信号进行检测，因此较不易受电源模块中的其他电路影响而发生误判的问题，并且具有可省略串接在电源回路上的开关电路的有益效果。More specifically, when the human body touches the lamp, the impedance of the human body will cause the equivalent impedance on the power circuit to change. The installation detection module 6000 can determine whether the user touches the lamp by detecting the voltage/current change on the power circuit. , the above-mentioned anti-electric shock function can be realized. In other words, in this embodiment of the present application, the installation detection module 6000 can determine whether the lamp is installed correctly and whether the user touches the lamp by mistake by detecting electrical signals (including voltage or current) the conductive part. Compared with the embodiments shown in FIGS. 18 and 29 , since the detection control circuit 6100 of this embodiment performs detection by sampling the pre-bridge signal, it is less susceptible to the problem of misjudgment caused by the influence of other circuits in the power module, and It has the beneficial effect that the switch circuit connected in series on the power circuit can be omitted.
从电路操作的角度来看，检测控制电路6100判断LED直管灯1400是否正确安装至灯座上/是否有异常的阻抗接入的步骤如图48A所示，包括：使检测路径导通一段期间后关断(步骤S101)；在检测路径导通的期间取样检测路径上的电信号(步骤S102)；判断取样到的电信号是否符合预设信号特征(步骤S103)；当步骤S103判定为是时，控制限流电路5200操作在第一组态(步骤S104)；以及当步骤S103判定为否时，控制限流电路5200操作在第二组态(步 骤S105)，并且接着回到步骤S101。From the perspective of circuit operation, the steps for the detection control circuit 6100 to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp 1400 is correctly installed on the lamp socket/whether there is abnormal impedance access is shown in FIG. 48A , including: making the detection path conductive for a period of time Then turn off (step S101 ); sample the electrical signal on the detection path during the conduction period of the detection path (step S102 ); determine whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics (step S103 ); when the step S103 is determined to be yes , the control current limiting circuit 5200 operates in the first configuration (step S104 ); and when the determination in step S103 is NO, the control current limiting circuit 5200 operates in the second configuration (step S105 ), and then returns to step S101 .
在本实施例中，所述检测路径可以是连接在整流电路510输入侧与接地端之间的电流路径，其具体配置可以参考下述图37A至37C实施例的说明。另外，检测控制电路6100导通检测路径的期间长度、间隔、触发时间等设置，可参考相关实施例的说明。In this embodiment, the detection path may be a current path connected between the input side of the rectifier circuit 510 and the ground terminal, and the specific configuration of the detection path may refer to the description of the following embodiments in FIGS. 37A to 37C . In addition, for settings such as the period length, interval, and trigger time of the detection control circuit 6100 conducting the detection path, reference may be made to the description of the related embodiments.
在步骤S101中，使检测路径导通一段期间可以通过脉冲式的开关控制手段来实现。In step S101 , conducting the detection path for a period of time may be implemented by a pulsed switch control means.
在步骤S102中，取样的电信号可以是电压信号、电流信号、频率信号或相位信号等可以表现检测路径的阻抗变化的信号。In step S102, the sampled electrical signal may be a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, or a phase signal, or a signal that can represent the impedance change of the detection path.
在步骤S103中，判断取样到的电信号是否符合预设信号特征的动作可例如是比较取样的电信号与一预设信号的相对关系。在本实施例中，检测控制器5100判定电信号符合预设信号特征可以是对应至判定LED直管灯为正确安装/无异常阻抗接入的状态，并且检测控制器7100判定电信号不符合预设信号特征可以是对应至判定LED直管灯为不正确安装/有异常阻抗接入的状态。In step S103, the action of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to the predetermined signal characteristic may be, for example, comparing the relative relationship between the sampled electrical signal and a predetermined signal. In this embodiment, the detection controller 5100 determines that the electrical signal conforms to the preset signal characteristics, which may correspond to determining that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed/connected with no abnormal impedance, and the detection controller 7100 determines that the electrical signal does not conform to the preset signal characteristics. It is assumed that the signal characteristics may correspond to the state of determining that the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed/connected with abnormal impedance.
在步骤S104与S105中，所述第一组态及第二组态为两相异的电路组态，并且可视限流电路6200的配置位置及类型而定。举例来说，在限流电路6200为与驱动控制器的电源端或启动端相连的偏压调整电路的实施例下，所述第一组态可以是截止组态(正常偏压组态)，并且所述第二组态可以是导通组态(调整偏压组态)。在限流电路6200为驱动电路中的功率开关的实施例下，所述第一组态可以是驱动控制组态(即，仅由驱动控制器来控制功率开关的切换，检测控制电路6100不影响功率开关的控制)，并且所述第二组态可以是截止组态。In steps S104 and S105 , the first configuration and the second configuration are two different circuit configurations, and may depend on the configuration position and type of the current limiting circuit 6200 . For example, in the embodiment in which the current limiting circuit 6200 is a bias adjustment circuit connected to the power supply terminal or the start terminal of the drive controller, the first configuration may be a cut-off configuration (normal bias configuration), And the second configuration may be a turn-on configuration (adjusted bias configuration). In the embodiment in which the current limiting circuit 6200 is a power switch in the driving circuit, the first configuration may be a driving control configuration (that is, only the switching of the power switch is controlled by the driving controller, and the detection control circuit 6100 does not affect the switching of the power switch). control of the power switch), and the second configuration may be a cut-off configuration.
上述各步骤的详细操作及电路范例可参考触电检测模块/安装检测模块的各个实施例。For detailed operations and circuit examples of the above steps, reference may be made to the various embodiments of the electric shock detection module/installation detection module.
类似于前述图29实施例，本实施例的LED直管灯6000可以更包括频闪抑制电路590。包含有频闪抑制电路590的LED直管灯6000的配置与运作可以参照图29实施例的说明，于此不再重复赘述。Similar to the aforementioned embodiment in FIG. 29 , the LED straight tube lamp 6000 of this embodiment may further include a stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 . The configuration and operation of the LED straight tube lamp 6000 including the stroboscopic suppression circuit 590 can be referred to the description of the embodiment of FIG. 29 , which will not be repeated here.
请参见图37A，图37A是本申请第十七实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。安装检测模块6000a包含检测脉冲发生模块6110、控制电路6120、检测判定电路6130以及检测路径电路6160。检测判定电路6130经路径6161耦接检测路径电路6160，以检测检测路径电路6160上的信号。检测判定电路6130同时经路径6131耦接控制电路6120，以将检测结果信号经路径6131传送至控制电路6120。检测脉冲发生模块6110通过路径6111耦接检测路径电路6160，并产生脉冲信号以通知检测路径电路6160导通检测路径或执行检测动作的时机点。控制电路6120经路径6121耦接驱动电路1430，以根据检测结果信号控制驱动电路1430的运作。Please refer to FIG. 37A . FIG. 37A is a schematic circuit block diagram of the installation detection module according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present application. The installation detection module 6000 a includes a detection pulse generation module 6110 , a control circuit 6120 , a detection determination circuit 6130 , and a detection path circuit 6160 . The detection determination circuit 6130 is coupled to the detection path circuit 6160 via the path 6161 to detect the signal on the detection path circuit 6160 . The detection and determination circuit 6130 is also coupled to the control circuit 6120 via the path 6131 to transmit the detection result signal to the control circuit 6120 via the path 6131 . The detection pulse generating module 6110 is coupled to the detection path circuit 6160 through the path 6111, and generates a pulse signal to notify the detection path circuit 6160 of the timing point of turning on the detection path or performing the detection operation. The control circuit 6120 is coupled to the driving circuit 1430 via the path 6121 to control the operation of the driving circuit 1430 according to the detection result signal.
在本实施例中，检测路径电路6160具有第一检测连接端DE1、第二检测连接端DE2以及 第三检测连接端De3，其中第一检测连接端DE1和第二检测连接端DE2电性连接整流电路510的两输入端，藉以从第一接脚501和第二接脚502上接收/取样外部驱动信号。检测路径电路6160会对接收/取样到的外部驱动信号进行整流，并且受控于检测脉冲发生模块6110而决定是否使整流后的外部驱动信号在一检测路径上流通。换言之，检测路径电路6160会响应于检测脉冲发生模块6110的控制而决定是否导通所述检测路径。检测路径电路6160基于脉冲信号导通检测路径并且检测是否有异常的外部阻抗接入等电路动作可以参考图23B至23D的说明，于此不再重复赘述。另外有关于检测脉冲发生模块和检测判定电路可以参考本文其他有关于检测脉冲发生模块和检测判定电路实施例的说明，于此同样不再重复赘述。In this embodiment, the detection path circuit 6160 has a first detection connection terminal DE1, a second detection connection terminal DE2 and a third detection connection terminal De3, wherein the first detection connection terminal DE1 and the second detection connection terminal DE2 are electrically connected to the rectifier The two input terminals of the circuit 510 are used for receiving/sampling external driving signals from the first pin 501 and the second pin 502 . The detection path circuit 6160 rectifies the received/sampled external driving signal, and is controlled by the detection pulse generating module 6110 to determine whether to allow the rectified external driving signal to flow on a detection path. In other words, the detection path circuit 6160 determines whether to turn on the detection path in response to the control of the detection pulse generating module 6110 . The circuit operations such as the detection path circuit 6160 conducting the detection path based on the pulse signal and detecting whether there is abnormal external impedance access can be referred to the descriptions of FIGS. 23B to 23D , which will not be repeated here. In addition, regarding the detection pulse generation module and the detection determination circuit, reference may be made to other descriptions of the embodiments of the detection pulse generation module and the detection determination circuit in this document, which will not be repeated here.
从安装检测模块的整体运作来看，在LED直管灯通电时，检测脉冲发生模块6110会先反应于加入的外部电源而启动，藉以产生脉冲来短暂导通检测路径电路6160所构成的检测路径。在检测路径导通的期间，检测判定电路6130会取样检测路径上的信号并判断LED直管灯是否正确的被安装在灯座上或是否有人体接触LED直管灯导致漏电。检测判定电路7130会根据检测结果产生对应的检测结果信号传送给控制电路6120。From the overall operation of the installed detection module, when the LED straight tube lamp is powered on, the detection pulse generation module 6110 will be activated first in response to the added external power supply, thereby generating a pulse to briefly turn on the detection path formed by the detection path circuit 6160 . During the conduction period of the detection path, the detection and determination circuit 6130 will sample the signal on the detection path and determine whether the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket or whether there is a human body contacting the LED straight tube lamp to cause leakage. The detection determination circuit 7130 generates a corresponding detection result signal according to the detection result and transmits it to the control circuit 6120 .
在一些实施例中，所述控制电路6120可以是用以发出一控制信号给驱动电路1430中的驱动控制器的电路。在此实施例中，当控制电路6120接收到指示灯管已正确安装的检测结果信号时，控制电路6120会进一步的发出相应的控制信号给驱动电路1430，使得驱动电路1430响应于所述控制信号而正常的进行电源转换以提供后端LED模块电力。相反地，当控制电路6120接收到指示灯管未正确安装的检测结果信号时，控制电路6120会发出相应的控制信号给驱动电路1430，使得驱动电路1430响应于所述控制信号而停止进行电源转换，进而令在电源回路上流通的电流可被限制在安全值以下。In some embodiments, the control circuit 6120 may be a circuit for sending a control signal to the driving controller in the driving circuit 1430 . In this embodiment, when the control circuit 6120 receives the detection result signal that the indicator tube has been installed correctly, the control circuit 6120 will further send a corresponding control signal to the drive circuit 1430, so that the drive circuit 1430 responds to the control signal The normal power conversion is performed to provide power to the back-end LED module. On the contrary, when the control circuit 6120 receives the detection result signal that the indicator tube is not installed correctly, the control circuit 6120 will send a corresponding control signal to the driving circuit 1430, so that the driving circuit 1430 stops the power conversion in response to the control signal , so that the current flowing in the power circuit can be limited below a safe value.
在一些实施例中，所述控制电路6120可以是偏压调整电路(底下以偏压调整电路6120描述)，其可通过影响/调整驱动电路1430的偏压，藉以控制驱动电路1430的运作状态。在此实施例中，当偏压调整电路6120接收到指示灯管已正确安装的检测结果信号时，偏压调整电路6120不对驱动电路1430的偏压进行调整，使得驱动电路1430可正常的依据接收到的偏压电源而启动，并进行电源转换以提供后端LED模块电力。相反地，当偏压调整电路6120接收到指示灯管未正确安装的检测结果信号时，偏压调整电路6120会启动以调整提供给驱动电路1430的偏压电源，其中经调整后的偏压电源会不足以使驱动电路1430启动或正常地进行电源转换，进而令在电源回路上流通的电流可被限制在安全值以下。In some embodiments, the control circuit 6120 may be a bias voltage adjustment circuit (described below as the bias voltage adjustment circuit 6120 ), which can control the operation state of the driving circuit 1430 by affecting/adjusting the bias voltage of the driving circuit 1430 . In this embodiment, when the bias voltage adjustment circuit 6120 receives the detection result signal that the indicator tube has been installed correctly, the bias voltage adjustment circuit 6120 does not adjust the bias voltage of the driving circuit 1430, so that the driving circuit 1430 can normally rely on the received signal It starts up with the received bias power supply, and performs power conversion to provide power to the back-end LED module. On the contrary, when the bias voltage adjustment circuit 6120 receives the detection result signal that the indicator tube is not installed correctly, the bias voltage adjustment circuit 6120 is activated to adjust the bias power supply provided to the driving circuit 1430, wherein the adjusted bias power supply It may not be enough to enable the driving circuit 1430 to start up or perform power conversion normally, so that the current flowing in the power circuit can be limited below a safe value.
在所述控制电路6120的配置底下，原先设置在电源回路上的开关电路(如3200、3200a-L、4200、4200a)可以被省略。由于原先设置在电源回路上的开关电路需承载大电流，故在晶体管规格的选择与设计上都有较为严格的考虑，因此本实施例的设计可以透过省略开关电路而显着的降低安装检测模块整体的设计成本。另一方面，由于本实施例的控制电路6120是透过调整驱动电路1430的偏压状态来控制驱动电路1430的运作，并不需要针对驱动电路1430的 设计进行更动，因此更有利于商品化的设计。Under the configuration of the control circuit 6120, the switch circuits (eg, 3200, 3200a-L, 4200, 4200a) originally provided on the power circuit can be omitted. Since the switch circuit originally arranged on the power circuit needs to carry a large current, the selection and design of transistor specifications are strictly considered. Therefore, the design of this embodiment can significantly reduce the installation detection by omitting the switch circuit. The overall design cost of the module. On the other hand, since the control circuit 6120 of the present embodiment controls the operation of the driving circuit 1430 by adjusting the bias state of the driving circuit 1430 , and does not need to change the design of the driving circuit 1430 , it is more conducive to commercialization the design of.
在一范例实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块6110和检测路径电路6160可分别以图37B和图37C的电路架构来实现(但不仅限于此)，其他部分(检测判定电路6130和控制电路6120)的电路配置可参照相关实施例的叙述，其中图37B和图37C是本申请第十三实施例的安装检测模块的电路架构示意图。底下分就各模块/单元进行说明。In an exemplary embodiment, the detection pulse generating module 6110 and the detection path circuit 6160 can be implemented with the circuit structure of FIG. 37B and FIG. 37C respectively (but not limited to this), and the other parts (detection determination circuit 6130 and control circuit 6120 ) For the circuit configuration, reference may be made to the description of the related embodiments, wherein FIG. 37B and FIG. 37C are schematic diagrams of the circuit structure of the installation detection module according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present application. The following sections describe each module/unit.
请参照图37B，图37B是根据本申请第十五实施例的安装检测模块的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图。检测脉冲发生模块6110包含电阻Rd1与Rd2、电容Cd1及脉冲发生电路6112。本实施例的配置与前述实施例的检测脉冲发生模块5110大致相同，两者间的主要差异在于本实施例的电阻Rd1的第一端是通过二极管Dd1与Dd2连接至整流电路510的第一整流输入端(以第一接脚501表示)与第二整流输入端(以第二接脚502表示)。其中，二极管Dd1与Dd2的具配置与作用可参照前述图28B的实施例说明，于此不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 37B . FIG. 37B is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a detection pulse generating module installed with a detection module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application. The detection pulse generating module 6110 includes resistors Rd1 and Rd2 , a capacitor Cd1 and a pulse generating circuit 6112 . The configuration of this embodiment is substantially the same as that of the detection pulse generating module 5110 of the previous embodiment, the main difference between the two is that the first end of the resistor Rd1 in this embodiment is connected to the first rectifier of the rectifier circuit 510 through diodes Dd1 and Dd2 The input terminal (represented by the first pin 501 ) and the second rectifier input terminal (represented by the second pin 502 ). The configuration and function of the diodes Dd1 and Dd2 can be described with reference to the embodiment of FIG. 28B , which will not be repeated here.
请参照图37C，图37C是根据本申请第十五实施例的安装检测模块的检测路径电路的电路架构示意图。检测路径电路6160包含电阻Rd3、晶体管Md1、二极管Dd1及Dd2。本实施例的配置与前述实施例的检测路径电路5160大致相同，两者间的主要差异在于本实施例的检测路径电路6160设置了二极管Dd1与Dd2，其中电阻Rd3的第一端是通过二极管Dd1与Dd2连接至整流电路510的第一整流输入端(以第一接脚501表示)与第二整流输入端(以第二接脚502表示)，藉以在整流输入端与整流输出端之间建立独立于电源回路的检测路径。二极管Dd1与Dd2的具体配置与作用和前述图28B的实施例说明，于此不再赘述。Please refer to FIG. 37C . FIG. 37C is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection path circuit of the installation detection module according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present application. The detection path circuit 6160 includes a resistor Rd3, a transistor Md1, diodes Dd1 and Dd2. The configuration of this embodiment is substantially the same as that of the detection path circuit 5160 of the previous embodiment, and the main difference between the two is that the detection path circuit 6160 of this embodiment is provided with diodes Dd1 and Dd2, wherein the first end of the resistor Rd3 passes through the diode Dd1 and Dd2 are connected to the first rectifier input terminal (represented by the first pin 501 ) and the second rectifier input terminal (represented by the second pin 502 ) of the rectifier circuit 510 , so as to establish a relationship between the rectifier input terminal and the rectifier output terminal Detection path independent of power loop. The specific configuration and function of the diodes Dd1 and Dd2 and the description of the embodiment in FIG. 28B described above will not be repeated here.
总的来说，相较于前述包含有安装检测模块(2520)的电源模块而言，第九较佳实施例所述的电源模块是将安装检测与防触电的电路及功能整合至驱动电路中，使得驱动电路成为具有防触电及安装检测功能的驱动电路。更具体的说，所述第一范例实施例的电源模块仅需设置一用以检测电源回路的电信号的检测电路5000c即可搭配驱动电路1030的作用来实现LED直管灯的安装检测与防触电动作，亦即，透过调整驱动电路1030的控制方式，安装检测模块中的检测脉冲发生模块、检测结果锁存电路及开关电路皆可由既有的驱动电路1030的硬体架构来实现，不需增设额外的电路组件。在所述第一范例实施例中，由于电源模块中不需要有如前述安装检测模块包含检测脉冲发生模块、检测结果锁存电路、检测判定电路及开关电路等的复杂电路设计，因此可有效地降低整体电源模块的设计成本。除此之外，由于电路构件的减少，使得电源模块的布局得以有更大的空间，消耗功率亦较低，此有助于使输入电源更多的用于点亮LED模块中，进而提高光效，同时也让减少电源模块所造成的热。In general, compared with the aforementioned power module including the installation detection module (2520), the power module of the ninth preferred embodiment integrates the installation detection and electric shock prevention circuits and functions into the driving circuit , making the drive circuit a drive circuit with anti-shock and installation detection functions. More specifically, the power module of the first exemplary embodiment only needs to be provided with a detection circuit 5000c for detecting the electrical signal of the power circuit, which can be combined with the function of the driving circuit 1030 to realize the installation detection and prevention of the LED straight tube lamp. The electric shock action, that is, by adjusting the control method of the driving circuit 1030 , the detection pulse generating module, the detection result latch circuit and the switching circuit in the installation detection module can be realized by the existing hardware structure of the driving circuit 1030 , instead of Additional circuit components are required. In the first exemplary embodiment, since the power supply module does not need a complicated circuit design such as the aforementioned installation detection module including a detection pulse generation module, a detection result latch circuit, a detection determination circuit, and a switch circuit, it can effectively reduce the Design cost of the overall power module. In addition, due to the reduction of circuit components, the layout of the power module can have more space, and the power consumption is also lower, which helps to make more input power used to light the LED module, thereby improving the light It also reduces the heat generated by the power module.
所述第二范例实施例的检测电路5000c的配置与动作机制类似于安装检测模块中的检测脉冲发生模块、检测路径电路及检测判定电路，而原先安装检测模块中的检测结果锁存电路及开关电路部分则是利用驱动电路既有的控制器与功率开关来取代。在所述第二范例实施例 中，透过特定的检测路径电路(5260)配置，安装状态信号Sidm可以轻易地被设计为与控制器1133的信号格式兼容，进而在减少电路复杂度的基础底下，更大大降低了电路设计的难度。The configuration and action mechanism of the detection circuit 5000c of the second exemplary embodiment are similar to the detection pulse generation module, detection path circuit and detection determination circuit in the installation detection module, while the detection result latch circuit and switch in the original installation detection module The circuit part is replaced by the existing controller and power switch of the drive circuit. In the second exemplary embodiment, through the specific configuration of the detection path circuit (5260), the installation status signal Sidm can be easily designed to be compatible with the signal format of the controller 1133, thereby reducing circuit complexity on the basis of , which greatly reduces the difficulty of circuit design.
于此附带一提的是，虽然在第二范例实施例是以类似图24B的检测路径电路3660的配置来说明，但本申请不以此为限。在其他应用中，所述检测路径电路也可以利用前述其他实施例的配置来实现暂态电信号的取样/监测。It should be mentioned here that, although the second exemplary embodiment is described with a configuration similar to the detection path circuit 3660 in FIG. 24B , the present application is not limited to this. In other applications, the detection path circuit may also utilize the configurations of the other embodiments described above to implement the sampling/monitoring of transient electrical signals.
请参照图38，图38是本申请第十八实施例的安装检测模块的电路方块示意图。在安装检测模块7000中，关连于检测安装状态并且用以执行开关控制的电路可以统称或整合为检测控制器7100；用以响应于检测控制器7100的控制而影响电源回路上电流大小的电路可以统称或整合为限流电路7200。除此之外，虽然前述实施例并未具体指明，但本领域技术人员应可了解任何包含有源器件的电路皆需要对应的驱动电压VCC才能工作，因此在安装侦测模7000中会有部分组件/线路是作为产生驱动电压的用途。在本实施例中，用以产生驱动电压VCC的电路统称或整合为偏压电路7300(如图25A-25C的偏压电路)。Please refer to FIG. 38 . FIG. 38 is a schematic circuit block diagram of an installation detection module according to an eighteenth embodiment of the present application. In the installation detection module 7000, the circuits related to the detection of the installation state and used to perform switch control may be collectively referred to as or integrated into the detection controller 7100; the circuits used to affect the magnitude of the current on the power circuit in response to the control of the detection controller 7100 may be Collectively referred to or integrated as a current limiting circuit 7200 . In addition, although the foregoing embodiment does not specifically specify, those skilled in the art should understand that any circuit including active devices needs a corresponding driving voltage VCC to work, so there will be some parts in the installation detection module 7000 Components/lines are used to generate drive voltages. In this embodiment, the circuits for generating the driving voltage VCC are collectively referred to as or integrated into a bias circuit 7300 (such as the bias circuits in FIGS. 25A-25C ).
在本实施例的功能模块分配下，检测控制器7100与前述的检测控制电路2100近似，是用以进行安装状态检测/阻抗检测，藉以判断LED直管灯是否正确安装至灯座上，或可说是判断是否有异常的阻抗接入(例如人体阻抗)，其中检测控制器7100会根据判断的结果控制限流电路7200。在检测控制器7100判定LED直管灯未正确安装/有异常阻抗接入时，检测控制器7100会控制限流电路7200断开，藉以避免电源回路上的电流过大而造成触电危害。限流电路7200与前述的限流电路2200近似，是用以在判定LED直管灯为正确安装/无异常阻抗接入时控制电源回路的电流正常流通，并且在判定不正确安装/有异常阻抗接入时控制电源回路的电流小于触电安全值以下的电路。在电路配置上限流电路7200可以是独立于驱动电路并串接在电源回路上的开关电路(如图19A、图20A、图21A、图22A、图23A、图24A、图25A、图25B、图25C、图25D、图26A、图26B的限流电路/开关电路3200、3200a-L)、与驱动控制器的电源端或启动端相连的偏压调整电路(如图31A的偏压调整电路5200A)或是驱动电路本身(如图30A的驱动电路530)。偏压电路7300是用以提供检测控制器7100工作所需的驱动电压VCC，其具体实施例可参照图39A及36C，此部分容后在述。Under the function module assignment of this embodiment, the detection controller 7100 is similar to the aforementioned detection control circuit 2100, and is used for installation state detection/impedance detection, so as to determine whether the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed on the lamp socket, or it can be Said to be judging whether there is abnormal impedance access (such as human body impedance), wherein the detection controller 7100 will control the current limiting circuit 7200 according to the judgment result. When the detection controller 7100 determines that the LED straight tube lamp is not installed correctly or has abnormal impedance connected, the detection controller 7100 will control the current limiting circuit 7200 to disconnect, so as to avoid the electric shock hazard caused by the excessive current on the power circuit. The current-limiting circuit 7200 is similar to the aforementioned current-limiting circuit 2200, and is used to control the current of the power circuit to flow normally when it is determined that the LED straight tube lamp is correctly installed/no abnormal impedance is connected, and when it is determined that the LED straight tube light is installed correctly/has an abnormal impedance When connected, the current of the control power circuit is less than the electric shock safety value. In the circuit configuration, the current-limiting circuit 7200 can be a switch circuit that is independent of the drive circuit and connected to the power circuit in series (as shown in FIGS. 19A , 20A, 21A, 22A, 23A, 24A, 25A, 25B, 25C, FIG. 25D, FIG. 26A, FIG. 26B current limiting circuit/ switch circuit 3200, 3200a-L), and the bias voltage adjustment circuit connected to the power supply terminal or the start terminal of the drive controller (FIG. 31A The bias voltage adjustment circuit 5200A ) or the driving circuit itself (such as the driving circuit 530 in FIG. 30A ). The bias circuit 7300 is used to provide the driving voltage VCC required for the operation of the detection controller 7100, and the specific embodiments thereof can be referred to FIGS. 39A and 36C, which will be described later.
参照上述各个实施例可知，从功能的角度来看，检测控制器7100可以视为是本案的安装侦测模块中所使用的检测控制手段，并且限流电路7200可以视为是本案的安装侦测模块中所使用的限流手段，其中限流手段可对应至上述限流电路/开关电路可能的电路实施型态中的任一，并且检测控制手段可对应至安装侦测模块中除了开关手段之外的电路的部分或全部。Referring to the above embodiments, from a functional point of view, the detection controller 7100 can be regarded as the detection control means used in the installation detection module of this case, and the current limiting circuit 7200 can be regarded as the installation detection of this case. The current limiting means used in the module, wherein the current limiting means can correspond to any of the possible circuit implementation types of the above-mentioned current limiting circuit/switch circuit, and the detection control means can correspond to any other than the switching means in the installation detection module. part or all of the external circuit.
底下搭配图48C的步骤流程来进一步描述安装检测模块在进入工作模式(DRM)之后的操作。请同时参照图38和图48C，图48C是本申请第二实施例的安装检测模块的控制方法的步骤流程图。检测控制器7100在进入工作模式DRM后会持续检测母线电压(步骤S301)，并且 判断母线电压在第二期间内是否持续低于第三电平(步骤S302)，其中所述第二期间可例如是200ms-700ms，较佳为300ms或600ms，并且所述第三电平可例如是80V-120V，较佳为90V或115V。换句话说，在步骤S302的一实施例中，检测控制器7100会判断母线电压是否持续低于115V超过600ms。The operation of the installation detection module after entering the working mode (DRM) is further described below in conjunction with the step flow of FIG. 48C . Please refer to FIG. 38 and FIG. 48C at the same time. FIG. 48C is a flowchart of the steps of the control method for the installation detection module according to the second embodiment of the present application. The detection controller 7100 will continue to detect the bus voltage after entering the working mode DRM (step S301 ), and determine whether the bus voltage is continuously lower than the third level during the second period (step S302 ), wherein the second period may be, for example, is 200ms-700ms, preferably 300ms or 600ms, and the third level can be, for example, 80V-120V, preferably 90V or 115V. In other words, in an embodiment of step S302, the detection controller 7100 determines whether the bus voltage is continuously lower than 115V for more than 600ms.
若安装检测模块在步骤S302中判定为是，则代表外部驱动信号被停止提供，即LED直管灯掉电。此时检测控制器7100会重新控制限流电路7200切换至第二组态(步骤S303)，并且进行复位(步骤S304)。相反的，若检测控制器7100在步骤S302中判定为否，则可视为外部驱动信号被正常提供至LED直管灯。此时检测控制器7100会回到步骤S301以持续检测母线电压，并判断LED直管灯是否掉电。If the installation detection module determines yes in step S302, it means that the external drive signal is stopped to be provided, that is, the LED straight tube lamp is powered off. At this time, the detection controller 7100 will re-control the current limiting circuit 7200 to switch to the second configuration (step S303 ), and reset (step S304 ). On the contrary, if the detection controller 7100 determines NO in step S302, it can be considered that the external driving signal is normally provided to the LED straight tube lamp. At this time, the detection controller 7100 will return to step S301 to continuously detect the bus voltage and determine whether the LED straight tube lamp is powered off.
请参照图39A，图39A是本申请第一实施例的偏压电路的电路架构示意图。在交流电源输入的应用底下，偏压电路7300a包括整流电路7310、电阻Re1与Re2及电容Ce1。在本实施例中，整流电路7310是以全波整流桥为例，但本申请不以此为限。整流电路7310的输入端接收外部驱动信号Sed，并且对外部驱动信号Sed进行整流，以在输出端输出直流的整流后信号。电阻Re1与Re2串接在整流电路7310的输出端之间，并且电容Ce1与电阻Re2相互并联，其中整流后信号经过电阻Re1与Re2的分压及电容Ce1的稳压后，转换为驱动电压VCC从电容Ce1的两端(即，节点PN与接地端)输出。Please refer to FIG. 39A . FIG. 39A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the bias circuit according to the first embodiment of the present application. Under the application of AC power input, the bias circuit 7300a includes a rectifier circuit 7310, resistors Re1 and Re2, and capacitor Ce1. In this embodiment, the rectifier circuit 7310 is a full-wave rectifier bridge as an example, but the present application is not limited to this. The input terminal of the rectification circuit 7310 receives the external driving signal Sed, and rectifies the external driving signal Sed, so as to output a DC rectified signal at the output terminal. The resistors Re1 and Re2 are connected in series between the output terminals of the rectifier circuit 7310, and the capacitor Ce1 and the resistor Re2 are connected in parallel with each other, wherein the rectified signal is converted into the driving voltage VCC after the voltage division of the resistors Re1 and Re2 and the voltage regulation of the capacitor Ce1 It is output from both ends of the capacitor Ce1 (ie, the node PN and the ground).
在内置安装检测模块的实施例中，由于LED直管灯的电源模块中本身就包含有整流电路(如510)，因此整流电路7310可以利用电源模块既有的整流电路取代，并且电阻Re1与Re2及电容Ce1可直接连接在电源回路上，藉以利用电源回路上经整流后的母线电压(即，整流后电压)作为供电来源。在外置安装检测模块的实施例中，由于安装检测模块是直接以外部驱动信号Sed作为供电来源，因此整流电路7310会独立于电源模块设置，藉以将交流信号转换为可供安装检测模块的内部电路使用的直流驱动电压VCC。In the embodiment with the built-in installation detection module, since the power module of the LED straight tube lamp itself includes a rectifier circuit (such as 510), the rectifier circuit 7310 can be replaced by the existing rectifier circuit of the power module, and the resistors Re1 and Re2 And the capacitor Ce1 can be directly connected to the power loop, so as to use the rectified bus voltage (ie, the rectified voltage) on the power loop as a power supply source. In the embodiment of the external installation detection module, since the installation detection module directly uses the external drive signal Sed as the power supply source, the rectifier circuit 7310 is set independently of the power supply module, so as to convert the AC signal into an internal circuit for the installation detection module The DC drive voltage VCC used.
请参照图39B，图39B是本申请第二实施例的偏压电路的电路架构示意图。在本实施例中，偏压电路7300b包括整流电路7610、电阻Re3、齐纳二极管ZD1及电容Ce2。本实施例与前述图39A实施例大致相同，两者间的主要差异在本实施例是以齐纳二极管ZD1来取代图39A的电阻Re2，如此可使驱动电压VCC更稳定。Please refer to FIG. 39B . FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the bias circuit according to the second embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the bias circuit 7300b includes a rectifier circuit 7610, a resistor Re3, a Zener diode ZD1 and a capacitor Ce2. This embodiment is substantially the same as the aforementioned embodiment of FIG. 39A . The main difference between the two is that the resistor Re2 of FIG. 39A is replaced by a Zener diode ZD1 in this embodiment, so that the driving voltage VCC can be more stable.
请参照图40，图40是本申请一实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的检测脉冲发生模块7110包括脉冲启动电路7112及脉宽决定电路7113。脉冲启动电路7112用以接收外部驱动信号Sed，并且根据外部驱动信号Sed决定检测脉冲发生模块7110发出脉冲的时间点。脉宽决定电路7113耦接脉冲启动电路7112的输出端，用以设定脉冲宽度，并且在脉冲启动电路7112所指示的时间点发出符合设定脉冲宽度的脉冲信号DP。Please refer to FIG. 40 , which is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a detection pulse generating module according to an embodiment of the present application. The detection pulse generation module 7110 of this embodiment includes a pulse start circuit 7112 and a pulse width determination circuit 7113 . The pulse start circuit 7112 is used for receiving the external drive signal Sed, and determines the time point at which the pulse generating module 7110 sends the pulse according to the external drive signal Sed. The pulse width determination circuit 7113 is coupled to the output terminal of the pulse start circuit 7112 for setting the pulse width, and at the time point indicated by the pulse start circuit 7112, a pulse signal DP corresponding to the set pulse width is sent out.
在一些实施例中，所述检测脉冲发生模块7110还可进一步包括输出缓冲电路7114。所 述输出缓冲电路7114的输入端耦接脉宽决定电路7113的输出端，其是用以调整脉宽决定电路7113的输出信号波形(如电压、电流)，藉以输出可符合后端电路的运作需求的脉冲信号DP。In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 7110 may further include an output buffer circuit 7114 . The input terminal of the output buffer circuit 7114 is coupled to the output terminal of the pulse width determination circuit 7113, which is used to adjust the output signal waveform (such as voltage, current) of the pulse width determination circuit 7113, so that the output can conform to the operation of the back-end circuit The required pulse signal DP.
以图19B所绘示的检测脉冲发生模块3110为例，其发出脉冲的时间点是根据接收到驱动电压VCC的时间点为准，因此产生驱动电压VCC的偏压电路可以视为检测脉冲发生模块3110的脉冲启动电路。另一方面，检测脉冲发生模块3110所发出的脉冲信号的脉宽主要是由电容C11、C12及C13和电阻R11、R12及R13所组成的RC充放电路的充放电时间决定，因此电容C11、C12及C13和电阻R11、R12及R13可视为检测脉冲发生模块3110的脉宽决定电路。缓冲器BF1与BF2则为检测脉冲发生模块3110的输出缓冲电路。Taking the detection pulse generating module 3110 shown in FIG. 19B as an example, the time point of sending out the pulse is based on the time point when the driving voltage VCC is received, so the bias circuit that generates the driving voltage VCC can be regarded as the detection pulse generating module. 3110's pulse start circuit. On the other hand, the pulse width of the pulse signal sent by the detection pulse generation module 3110 is mainly determined by the charging and discharging time of the RC charging and discharging circuit composed of the capacitors C11, C12 and C13 and the resistors R11, R12 and R13. C12 and C13 and the resistors R11 , R12 and R13 can be regarded as the pulse width determination circuit of the detection pulse generating module 3110 . The buffers BF1 and BF2 are the output buffer circuits of the detection pulse generating module 3110 .
以图20B所绘示的检测脉冲发生模块3210为例，其发出脉冲的时间点与接收到驱动电压VCC的时间点以及电阻R21与电容C21所组成的RC电路的充放电时间有关，因此产生驱动电压VCC的偏压电路、电阻R21及电容C21可以视为检测脉冲发生模块3210的脉冲启动电路。另一方面，检测脉冲发生模块3210所发出的脉冲信号的脉宽主要是由施密特触发器STRG的顺向阈值电压与负向阈值电压以及晶体管M21的切换延迟时间所决定，因此施密特触发器STRG以及晶体管M21可视为检测脉冲发生模块3210的脉宽决定电路。Taking the detection pulse generation module 3210 shown in FIG. 20B as an example, the time point at which the pulse is sent is related to the time point at which the driving voltage VCC is received and the charging and discharging time of the RC circuit composed of the resistor R21 and the capacitor C21, so the driving The bias circuit of the voltage VCC, the resistor R21 and the capacitor C21 can be regarded as the pulse start circuit of the detection pulse generation module 3210 . On the other hand, the pulse width of the pulse signal sent by the detection pulse generation module 3210 is mainly determined by the forward and negative threshold voltages of the Schmitt trigger STRG and the switching delay time of the transistor M21, so the Schmitt trigger The flip-flop STRG and the transistor M21 can be regarded as a pulse width determination circuit of the detection pulse generation module 3210 .
在一些范例实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110、3210的脉冲启动电路可以透过增设比较器来实现脉冲启动时间点的控制，如图41A所示。图41A是本申请第一实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图。具体而言，检测脉冲发生模块7110a包括作为脉冲启动电路7112a的比较器(底下以比较器7112a称之)及脉宽决定电路7113a。比较器7112a的第一输入端接收外部驱动信号Sed，第二输入端接收参考电平Vps，并且输出端连接至电阻Rf1的一端(此端对应图20B的驱动电压VCC输入端)。在此，比较器3241接收外部驱动信号Sed并不仅限于通过将外部驱动信号Sed直接给到比较器3241的第一输入端的方式来实现。在一些实施例中，外部驱动信号Sed可以通过整流及/或分压等信号处理手段被转换为一关连于外部驱动信号的状态信号，而比较器3241在接收所述状态信号时，即可获知外部驱动信号的状态，等同于接收到外部驱动信号Sed或基于外部驱动信号Sed进行后续的信号比较操作。脉宽决定电路7113a包括电阻Rf1-Rf3、施密特触发器STRG、晶体管Mf1、电容Cf1及齐纳二极管ZD1，其中上述组件的配置类似于图20B的配置，故电路连接相关说明可参照上述实施例。在此配置底下，由电阻Rf1与电容Cf1组成的RC电路会在外部驱动信号Sed的电平超过参考电平Vps时才开始充电，进而控制脉冲信号DP的产生时间点。具体信号时序如图43A所示。In some exemplary embodiments, the pulse start circuits of the detection pulse generation modules 3110 and 3210 can implement the control of the pulse start time point by adding a comparator, as shown in FIG. 41A . FIG. 41A is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection pulse generation module according to the first embodiment of the present application. Specifically, the detection pulse generation module 7110a includes a comparator (referred to as a comparator 7112a below) as a pulse start circuit 7112a and a pulse width determination circuit 7113a. The first input terminal of the comparator 7112a receives the external driving signal Sed, the second input terminal receives the reference level Vps, and the output terminal is connected to one terminal of the resistor Rf1 (this terminal corresponds to the driving voltage VCC input terminal of FIG. 20B ). Here, the receiving of the external driving signal Sed by the comparator 3241 is not limited to being implemented by directly supplying the external driving signal Sed to the first input terminal of the comparator 3241 . In some embodiments, the external drive signal Sed can be converted into a state signal related to the external drive signal through signal processing means such as rectification and/or voltage division, and the comparator 3241 can know the state signal when receiving the state signal. The state of the external driving signal is equivalent to receiving the external driving signal Sed or performing a subsequent signal comparison operation based on the external driving signal Sed. The pulse width determination circuit 7113a includes resistors Rf1-Rf3, a Schmitt trigger STRG, a transistor Mf1, a capacitor Cf1 and a Zener diode ZD1. The configuration of the above components is similar to that of FIG. 20B, so the circuit connection description can refer to the above implementation example. Under this configuration, the RC circuit composed of the resistor Rf1 and the capacitor Cf1 will start charging when the level of the external drive signal Sed exceeds the reference level Vps, thereby controlling the generation time point of the pulse signal DP. The specific signal timing is shown in Figure 43A.
请一并参照图41A与图43A，图43A是本申请第一实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的信号时序示意图。在本实施例中，作为脉冲启动电路的比较器3241会在外部驱动信号Sed的电平高于参考电平Vps时输出高准位信号至电阻Rf1的一端，使得电容Cf1开始充电。此时电容Cf1上的电压Vcp会随时间逐渐上升。当电压Vcp达到施密特触发器STRG的顺向阈值电压Vsch1 时，施密特触发器STRG的输出端会输出高准位信号，进而导通晶体管Mf1。在晶体管Mf1导通后，电容Cf1会通过电阻Rf2与晶体管Mf1开始对地放电，使得电压Vcp随时间逐渐下降。当电压Vcp降至施密特触发器STRG的逆向阈值电压Vsch2时，施密特触发器STRG的输出端会从输出高准位信号切换为输出低准位信号，进而产生脉冲DP1，其中脉冲DP1的脉宽DPW即是由顺向阈值电压Vsch1、逆向阈值电压Vsch2及晶体管Mf1的切换延迟时间所决定。在经过设定时间间隔TIV后(即，外部驱动信号Sed的电平从降至低于参考电平Vps至再次上升至高于参考电平Vps的期间)，施密特触发器STRG会再次依据上述操作而产生脉冲波形DP2，其后的操作可以此类推。Please refer to FIG. 41A and FIG. 43A together. FIG. 43A is a schematic diagram of signal timing of the detection pulse generating module according to the first embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the comparator 3241 as the pulse start circuit outputs a high-level signal to one end of the resistor Rf1 when the level of the external driving signal Sed is higher than the reference level Vps, so that the capacitor Cf1 starts to charge. At this time, the voltage Vcp on the capacitor Cf1 will gradually increase with time. When the voltage Vcp reaches the forward threshold voltage Vsch1 of the Schmitt trigger STRG, the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger STRG will output a high-level signal, thereby turning on the transistor Mf1. After the transistor Mf1 is turned on, the capacitor Cf1 starts to discharge to the ground through the resistor Rf2 and the transistor Mf1, so that the voltage Vcp gradually decreases with time. When the voltage Vcp drops to the reverse threshold voltage Vsch2 of the Schmitt trigger STRG, the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger STRG will switch from outputting a high-level signal to outputting a low-level signal, thereby generating a pulse DP1, wherein the pulse DP1 The pulse width DPW is determined by the forward threshold voltage Vsch1 , the reverse threshold voltage Vsch2 and the switching delay time of the transistor Mf1 . After the set time interval TIV (that is, the period during which the level of the external driving signal Sed drops from lower than the reference level Vps to rises again to be higher than the reference level Vps), the Schmitt trigger STRG will again be based on the above The pulse waveform DP2 is generated by the operation, and the subsequent operations can be deduced by analogy.
在一些实施例中，脉冲启动电路7112可以在外部驱动信号Sed达到特定电平时来发出脉冲产生指示，藉以决定脉冲信号的产生时间点，如图41B所示。图41B是本申请第二实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的电路架构示意图。具体而言，检测脉冲发生模块7110b包括脉冲启动电路7112b及脉宽决定电路7113b。脉冲启动电路7112b包括比较器CPf1以及信号沿触发电路SETC。比较器CPf1的第一输入端接收外部驱动信号Sed，第二输入端接收参考电平Vps，并且输出端连接至信号沿处发电路SETC的输入端。信号沿触发电路SETC可例如是上升沿触发电路或下降沿触发电路，其可检测出比较器CPf1输出转态的时间点，并且据以发出脉冲产生指示给后端的脉宽决定电路7113b。脉宽决定电路7113b可以是任何能根据脉冲产生指示而在特定时间点产生设定具有设定脉宽的脉冲产生电路，例如是前述图19B、图20B的电路，或是555计时器等集成组件，本申请不以此为限。于此附带一提的是，虽然在图41B是绘示比较器CPf1的第一输入端直接接收外部驱动信号Sed，但本申请不以此为限。在一些实施例中，比较器CPf1的第一输入端也可以接收经信号处理后(例如整流、滤波、分压等)的外部驱动信号Sed作为参考。换句话说，脉冲启动电路7112b可以基于任何可指示外部驱动信号的电平或相位状态的关连信号作为脉冲产生时点的参考。In some embodiments, the pulse start circuit 7112 can issue a pulse generation instruction when the external drive signal Sed reaches a specific level, so as to determine the generation time point of the pulse signal, as shown in FIG. 41B . FIG. 41B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the detection pulse generation module according to the second embodiment of the present application. Specifically, the detection pulse generation module 7110b includes a pulse start circuit 7112b and a pulse width determination circuit 7113b. The pulse start circuit 7112b includes a comparator CPf1 and a signal edge trigger circuit SETC. The first input terminal of the comparator CPf1 receives the external driving signal Sed, the second input terminal receives the reference level Vps, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the signal edge transmitter circuit SETC. The signal edge trigger circuit SETC can be, for example, a rising edge trigger circuit or a falling edge trigger circuit, which can detect the time point when the output of the comparator CPf1 changes state, and send out a pulse generation instruction to the back-end pulse width determination circuit 7113b accordingly. The pulse width determination circuit 7113b can be any pulse generation circuit that can generate a set pulse width at a specific time point according to the pulse generation instruction, such as the circuit of the aforementioned FIG. 19B, FIG. 20B, or an integrated component such as a 555 timer. , this application is not limited to this. Incidentally, although FIG. 41B shows that the first input terminal of the comparator CPf1 directly receives the external driving signal Sed, the present application is not limited to this. In some embodiments, the first input terminal of the comparator CPf1 may also receive the external driving signal Sed after signal processing (eg, rectification, filtering, voltage division, etc.) as a reference. In other words, the pulse start circuit 7112b can be based on any related signal that can indicate the level or phase state of the external drive signal as a reference for the timing of the pulse generation.
检测脉冲发生模块7110的具体信号时序可如图43B或图43C所示。其中，图43B是本申请第二实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的信号时序示意图，其绘示上升沿触发的信号波形实施例；图43C是本申请第三实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的信号时序示意图，其绘示下降沿触发的信号波形实施例。请先一并参照图41B与图43B，在本实施例中，比较器CPf1会在外部驱动信号Sed的电平上升至超过参考电平Vps时输出高准位信号，并且在外部驱动信号Sed的电平高于参考电平Vps的期间维持高准位信号输出。当外部驱动信号Sed的电平从峰值逐渐降至低于参考电平Vps时，比较器CPf1会再次输出低准位信号。如此，比较器CPf1的输出端会产生具有脉冲波形的输出电压Vcp。信号沿触发电路SETC会反应于输出电压Vcp的上升沿而触发一使能信号输出，使得后端的脉宽决定电路7113b根据使能信号与设定的脉宽DPW，而在输出电压Vcp的上升沿附近产生脉冲信号DP。基于上述运作，检测脉冲发生模块3610可藉由调整参考电平Vps的设定来对应的改变脉冲信号DP的脉冲产生时间点，使得脉冲信号DP在外部驱动信号Sed达到特定电平或相位时才触发脉冲输出。如此一来，便可避免先前实 施例所述的脉冲信号DP在外部驱动信号Sed零点附近产生时可能带来的误判问题。The specific signal timing sequence of the detection pulse generating module 7110 may be shown in FIG. 43B or FIG. 43C . 43B is a schematic diagram of the signal timing of the detection pulse generation module according to the second embodiment of the present application, which shows an example of a signal waveform triggered by a rising edge; FIG. 43C is a signal timing diagram of the detection pulse generation module according to the third embodiment of the present application. A schematic diagram showing an example of a signal waveform triggered by a falling edge. Please refer to FIG. 41B and FIG. 43B together. In this embodiment, the comparator CPf1 outputs a high-level signal when the level of the external drive signal Sed rises to exceed the reference level Vps, and the comparator CPf1 outputs a high-level signal when the level of the external drive signal Sed rises to exceed the reference level Vps. The high-level signal output is maintained during the period when the level is higher than the reference level Vps. When the level of the external driving signal Sed gradually drops from the peak value to lower than the reference level Vps, the comparator CPf1 will output a low level signal again. In this way, the output terminal of the comparator CPf1 will generate an output voltage Vcp having a pulse waveform. The signal edge trigger circuit SETC will trigger an enable signal to output in response to the rising edge of the output voltage Vcp, so that the back-end pulse width determination circuit 7113b will respond to the rising edge of the output voltage Vcp according to the enable signal and the set pulse width DPW. A pulse signal DP is generated nearby. Based on the above operations, the detection pulse generation module 3610 can correspondingly change the pulse generation time point of the pulse signal DP by adjusting the setting of the reference level Vps, so that the pulse signal DP is generated only when the external drive signal Sed reaches a specific level or phase. Trigger pulse output. In this way, the problem of misjudgment that may be caused when the pulse signal DP described in the previous embodiment is generated near the zero point of the external driving signal Sed can be avoided.
在一些实施例中，所述参考电平Vps可以基于母线电压的大小而对应的调整，进而令检测脉冲发生模块可以响应不同的电网电压(例如120V和277V)而在不同的时点产生脉冲信号。藉此，无论接收到的外部驱动信号为哪种电网电压规格，皆可使检测路径上的信号电平被限制在相应的范围之内，进而提高安装检测/阻抗检测的准确性。举例来说，所述参考电平Vps可包含对应第一电网电压(例如120V)的第一参考电平和对应第二电网电压(例如277V)的第二参考电平。当检测脉冲发生模块7110接收到的外部驱动信号Sed为第一电网电压时，脉冲启动电路7112b会基于第一参考电平来决定产生脉冲信号的时点；当检测脉冲发生模块7110接收到的外部驱动信号为第二电网电压时，脉冲启动电路7112b会基于第二参考电平来决定产生脉冲信号的时点。In some embodiments, the reference level Vps can be adjusted correspondingly based on the magnitude of the bus voltage, so that the detection pulse generating module can generate pulse signals at different time points in response to different grid voltages (eg, 120V and 277V) . In this way, regardless of the grid voltage specification of the received external drive signal, the signal level on the detection path can be limited within a corresponding range, thereby improving the accuracy of installation detection/impedance detection. For example, the reference level Vps may include a first reference level corresponding to a first grid voltage (eg, 120V) and a second reference level corresponding to a second grid voltage (eg, 277V). When the external drive signal Sed received by the detection pulse generation module 7110 is the first grid voltage, the pulse start circuit 7112b determines the timing of generating the pulse signal based on the first reference level; when the detection pulse generation module 7110 receives the external drive signal Sed When the driving signal is the second grid voltage, the pulse start circuit 7112b determines the timing of generating the pulse signal based on the second reference level.
请再一并参照图41B与图43C，本实施例与前述图43B实施例所述的运作大致相同，两者间的主要差异在于本实施例的信号沿触发电路SETC是反应于输出电压Vcp的下降沿而触发使能信号输出，因此脉宽决定电路7113b会在输出电压Vcp的下降沿附近产生脉冲信号DP。在一些实施例中，所述参考电平Vps可包含对应第一电网电压(例如120V)的第一参考电平和对应第二电网电压(例如277V)的第二参考电平，其中所述第一参考电平例如为115V，并且所述第二参考电平例如为200V。换句话说，当检测脉冲发生模块7110接收到的外部驱动信号Sed为第一电网电压时，脉冲启动电路7112b会在外部驱动信号Sed的下降沿的115V时输出脉冲信号DP；当检测脉冲发生模块3610接收到的外部驱动信号Sed为第二电网电压时，脉冲启动电路7112b会在外部驱动信号Sed的下降沿的200V时输出脉冲信号DP。Please refer to FIG. 41B and FIG. 43C again. The operation of this embodiment is substantially the same as that of the previous embodiment of FIG. 43B . The main difference between the two is that the signal edge trigger circuit SETC of this embodiment responds to the output voltage Vcp. The output of the enable signal is triggered by the falling edge, so the pulse width determination circuit 7113b generates the pulse signal DP near the falling edge of the output voltage Vcp. In some embodiments, the reference level Vps may include a first reference level corresponding to a first grid voltage (eg, 120V) and a second reference level corresponding to a second grid voltage (eg, 277V), wherein the first The reference level is, for example, 115V, and the second reference level is, for example, 200V. In other words, when the external driving signal Sed received by the detection pulse generating module 7110 is the first grid voltage, the pulse starting circuit 7112b will output the pulse signal DP at 115V of the falling edge of the external driving signal Sed; When the external drive signal Sed received by 3610 is the second grid voltage, the pulse start circuit 7112b will output the pulse signal DP at 200V of the falling edge of the external drive signal Sed.
基于上述的教示，本领域技术人员应可了解，搭配信号沿触发的运作，还有许多可能的脉冲产生时间点的决定机制也可藉由所述的脉冲启动电路7112来实施。举例来说，脉冲启动电路7112可以设计为在检测到输出电压Vcp的上升沿/下降沿后开始计时，并且在达到预定时间后(可自行设定)再触发使能信号给后端的脉宽决定电路7113。又例如，脉冲启动电路7112可以在检测到输出电压Vcp的上升沿时，预先激活脉宽决定电路7113，并且在检测到输出电压Vcp的下降沿时再触发使能信号给脉宽决定电路7113来输出脉冲信号DP，使得脉宽决定电路7113可以快速反应，以在精确的时间点下产生脉冲信号DP。Based on the above teachings, those skilled in the art should understand that, with the operation of signal edge triggering, there are many possible decision mechanisms for pulse generation time points that can also be implemented by the pulse start circuit 7112 . For example, the pulse start circuit 7112 can be designed to start timing after detecting the rising edge/falling edge of the output voltage Vcp, and after reaching a predetermined time (which can be set by yourself), then trigger the enable signal to determine the pulse width of the back end Circuit 7113. For another example, the pulse start circuit 7112 can activate the pulse width determination circuit 7113 in advance when the rising edge of the output voltage Vcp is detected, and then trigger the enable signal to the pulse width determination circuit 7113 when the falling edge of the output voltage Vcp is detected. The pulse signal DP is output so that the pulse width determination circuit 7113 can respond quickly to generate the pulse signal DP at a precise time point.
请参照图43D，图43D是本申请第四实施例的检测脉冲发生模块的信号时序示意图。本实施例与前述图43B、图43C的运作大致相同，本实施例与前述实施例的主要差异在于本实施例是在检测到外部驱动信号Sed的电平超过参考电平Vps时开始计时一段延迟期间DLY，并且在延迟期间DLY后产生脉冲(DP1)。接着检测脉冲发生模块会依照设定时间间隔TIV再次产生脉冲(DP2)，后续操作可以此类推。Please refer to FIG. 43D . FIG. 43D is a schematic diagram of signal timing of the detection pulse generating module according to the fourth embodiment of the present application. 43B and 43C described above, the main difference between this embodiment and the previous embodiment is that this embodiment starts timing a delay when it is detected that the level of the external drive signal Sed exceeds the reference level Vps period DLY, and a pulse (DP1) is generated after the delay period DLY. Then the detection pulse generation module will generate a pulse (DP2) again according to the set time interval TIV, and the subsequent operations can be deduced by analogy.
请再次参照图38，在一些实施例中，安装检测模块7000还可包括镇流检测模块7400(如 图19A的镇流检测模块3400及图28A的镇流检测模块4400)。所述镇流检测模块3400可以判断外部驱动信号Sed的类型(例如是否为镇流器所提供的信号)，并且依据判断结果来调整对限流电路7200的控制方式。其中，镇流检测模块315可以通过检测外部驱动信号Sed或是电源模块中与外部驱动信号Sed相关连的母线电压的信号特征来判断LED直管灯当前所接收到的外部驱动信号Sed为镇流器所输出的交流信号或是由交流电网/市电直接提供的交流信号。所述信号特征外部驱动信号Sed的频率、振幅或相位等电信号特性。Referring again to FIG. 38 , in some embodiments, the installation detection module 7000 may further include a ballast detection module 7400 (eg, the ballast detection module 3400 of FIG. 19A and the ballast detection module 4400 of FIG. 28A ). The ballast detection module 3400 can determine the type of the external drive signal Sed (for example, whether it is a signal provided by a ballast), and adjust the control method of the current limiting circuit 7200 according to the determination result. The ballast detection module 315 can determine that the external driving signal Sed currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is ballast by detecting the external driving signal Sed or the signal characteristics of the bus voltage related to the external driving signal Sed in the power module. The AC signal output by the device or the AC signal directly provided by the AC grid/mains. The signal characteristics are electrical signal characteristics such as frequency, amplitude or phase of the external drive signal Sed.
在一些实施例中，所述对限流电路7200控制方式的调整可例如是(1)在判定外部驱动信号Sed为镇流器所提供时，通过间歇导通限流电路7200来使LED直管灯发出闪烁的误用提示，提醒使用者LED直管灯当前可能安装在错误的灯座上(如图19A实施例所描述)；或是(2)在判定外部驱动信号Sed为镇流器所提供时，屏蔽/旁路(bypass)用以检测安装状态的脉冲信号，并且使限流电路7200维持在导通状态，进而令LED直管灯可以响应于镇流器所提供的外部驱动信号Sed而点亮。In some embodiments, the adjustment of the control mode of the current limiting circuit 7200 may be, for example, (1) when it is determined that the external driving signal Sed is provided by the ballast, the current limiting circuit 7200 is intermittently turned on to make the LED straight The lamp flashes a misuse prompt to remind the user that the LED straight tube lamp may be currently installed on the wrong lamp socket (as described in the embodiment of Figure 19A); or (2) when it is determined that the external drive signal Sed is the ballast When provided, the pulse signal used to detect the installation state is shielded/bypassed, and the current limiting circuit 7200 is maintained in a conducting state, so that the LED straight tube lamp can respond to the external drive signal Sed provided by the ballast And light up.
在所述第(2)点的实施例中，LED直管灯可例如是兼容Type-A和Type-B的LED直管灯，并且镇流检测模块7400的具体电路架构可如图42所示。请参见图42，图42是本申请第一实施例的镇流检测模块的电路架构示意图。在本实施例中，镇流检测模块7400包括二极管Dh1和Dh2、电容Ch1、电阻Rh1以及稳压二极管ZDh1。二极管Dh1和Dh2组成一个半波整流电路，其中二极管Dh1的阳极和二极管Dh2的阴极接收外部驱动信号Sed。电容Ch1的一端电性连接二极管Dh1的阴极，并且电容Ch2的另一端电性连接二极管Dh2的阳极。电阻Rh1、稳压二极管ZDh1及电容Ch1三者相互并联，并且稳压二极管ZDh1电性连接至限流电路7200的控制端。在一些实施例中，镇流检测模块7400可更包括二极管Dh3，其中二极管Dh3的阳极电性连接稳压二极管ZDh1的阴极，并且二极管Dh3的阴极电性连接限流电路7200的控制端。In the embodiment of point (2), the LED straight tube lamp may be, for example, an LED straight tube lamp compatible with Type-A and Type-B, and the specific circuit structure of the ballast detection module 7400 may be as shown in FIG. 42 . . Please refer to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the ballast detection module according to the first embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the ballast detection module 7400 includes diodes Dh1 and Dh2, a capacitor Ch1, a resistor Rh1 and a Zener diode ZDh1. The diodes Dh1 and Dh2 form a half-wave rectifier circuit, wherein the anode of the diode Dh1 and the cathode of the diode Dh2 receive the external drive signal Sed. One end of the capacitor Ch1 is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode Dh1 , and the other end of the capacitor Ch2 is electrically connected to the anode of the diode Dh2 . The resistor Rh1 , the Zener diode ZDh1 and the capacitor Ch1 are connected in parallel with each other, and the Zener diode ZDh1 is electrically connected to the control terminal of the current limiting circuit 7200 . In some embodiments, the ballast detection module 7400 may further include a diode Dh3 , wherein the anode of the diode Dh3 is electrically connected to the cathode of the Zener diode ZDh1 , and the cathode of the diode Dh3 is electrically connected to the control terminal of the current limiting circuit 7200 .
为了更具体的说明本实施例的镇流检测模块7400的运作，底下搭配如图45G所示的节点Nh1和Nh2的信号波形来进行说明。请一并参见图42及图45G，若外部驱动信号Sed是由市电所供应，由于市电的电压振幅及频率都相对较低，外部驱动信号Sed经二极管Dh1和Dh2的半波整流以及电容Ch1的稳压后，会在节点Nh1上产生较小的电压。此电压不足以使稳压二极管ZDh1进入反向击穿状态，故镇流检测模块7400可等效为浮接的状态，并且不会影响节点Nh2的信号状态。因此，无论LED直管灯在正常工作状态(即，没有异常阻抗接入)或是换灯测试状态(即，接入(测试)人体阻抗)，限流电路7200主要还是受到检测控制器7100输出的信号所控制。In order to describe the operation of the ballast detection module 7400 in this embodiment in more detail, the following description is provided with the signal waveforms of the nodes Nh1 and Nh2 as shown in FIG. 45G . Please refer to FIG. 42 and FIG. 45G together. If the external driving signal Sed is supplied by the mains, since the voltage amplitude and frequency of the mains are relatively low, the external driving signal Sed is half-wave rectified by diodes Dh1 and Dh2 and capacitors After the regulation of Ch1, a smaller voltage will be generated on the node Nh1. This voltage is not enough to make the Zener diode ZDh1 enter the reverse breakdown state, so the ballast detection module 7400 can be equivalent to a floating state, and will not affect the signal state of the node Nh2. Therefore, no matter the LED straight tube lamp is in the normal working state (ie, there is no abnormal impedance connected) or the lamp replacement test state (ie, the human body impedance is connected (test)), the current limiting circuit 7200 is mainly output by the detection controller 7100 controlled by the signal.
另一方面，若外部驱动信号Sed是由电子镇流器所供应，由于电子镇流器所提供的电压振幅及频率相对较高，节点Nh1上的电压会大于稳压二极管ZDh1的击穿电压，使得稳压二极管ZDh1进入反向击穿状态并且令节点Nh2上的电压稳定在足以导通限流电路7200的高电平。 此时可视为检测控制器7100的输出信号被镇流检测模块7400屏蔽/旁路，并且限流电路7200的控制权受到镇流检测模块7400接管。因此，即使是LED直管灯在换灯测试状态，检测控制器7100输出的脉冲信号会被镇流检测模块7400输出的高电平所屏蔽，使得限流电路7200维持在导通状态，而不会间歇导通以进行安装检测。On the other hand, if the external driving signal Sed is supplied by an electronic ballast, since the voltage amplitude and frequency provided by the electronic ballast are relatively high, the voltage on the node Nh1 will be greater than the breakdown voltage of the Zener diode ZDh1, The Zener diode ZDh1 is brought into a reverse breakdown state and the voltage on the node Nh2 is stabilized at a high level sufficient to turn on the current limiting circuit 7200 . At this time, it can be considered that the output signal of the detection controller 7100 is shielded/bypassed by the ballast detection module 7400 , and the control right of the current limiting circuit 7200 is taken over by the ballast detection module 7400 . Therefore, even if the LED straight tube lamp is in the lamp replacement test state, the pulse signal output by the detection controller 7100 will be shielded by the high level output by the ballast detection module 7400, so that the current limiting circuit 7200 is maintained in the conducting state, instead of Conducts intermittently for installation detection.
请参见图44，图44是本申请第十四实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。相较于图17A实施例，本实施例的安装检测模块8000设置在LED直管灯1500外部，并且限流电路8200是位在外部电网508的供电路径上，例如是设置在灯座中。其中，当LED直管灯1500的接脚电性连接至外部电网508时，限流电路8200会经由对应的接脚501串接至LED直管灯500的电源回路，使得检测控制电路8100可以藉由上述图17A至图43D的实施例所述的安装检测方式来判断LED直管灯1500是否正确安装至灯座上及/或使用者是否有触电风险，并且在判定有触电风险/未正确安装时，使限流电路8200限制外部电网508对LED直管灯1500的供电。附带一提的是，在本案的描述中，虽然对于各模块/电路有功能性的命名，但本领域的技术人员应可了解，依据不同的电路设计，同一电路组件可视为有不同的功能，并且不同的模块/电路可能可以共享同一电路组件来实现其各别的电路功能。因此本案的功能性命名并非用以限定特定的电路组件仅能含括于特定的模块/电路中，于此合先叙明。Please refer to FIG. 44 , which is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of a power module according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present application. Compared with the embodiment of FIG. 17A , the installation detection module 8000 of this embodiment is disposed outside the LED straight tube lamp 1500 , and the current limiting circuit 8200 is located on the power supply path of the external power grid 508 , for example, in the lamp socket. Wherein, when the pins of the LED straight tube light 1500 are electrically connected to the external power grid 508, the current limiting circuit 8200 is connected in series to the power circuit of the LED straight tube light 500 through the corresponding pins 501, so that the detection control circuit 8100 can use the 17A to 43D, it is determined whether the LED straight tube lamp 1500 is correctly installed on the lamp socket and/or whether the user is at risk of electric shock, and when it is determined that there is a risk of electric shock/incorrect installation When , the current limiting circuit 8200 is made to limit the power supply of the external power grid 508 to the LED straight tube lamp 1500 . Incidentally, in the description of this case, although there are functional names for each module/circuit, those skilled in the art should understand that the same circuit component can be regarded as having different functions according to different circuit designs , and different modules/circuits may share the same circuit components to implement their respective circuit functions. Therefore, the functional designation in this case is not intended to limit that a specific circuit component can only be included in a specific module/circuit, which will be described here.
另外应注意的是，上述实施例所提及的限流电路4200、4200a皆是一种限流手段的实施方式，其作用在于被使能时(如开关电路被截止)将电源回路上的电流限制至小于特定值以下(例如5MIU)。本领域技术人员在参照上述实施例内容后，应可了解所述限流手段可以通过一般类似于开关电路的架构来实施。举例来说，所述开关电路可以利用电子式开关、电磁式开关、继电器、三端双向可控硅(TRIAC)、晶体闸流管(Thyristor)、可调阻抗组件(可变电阻、可变电容、可变电感等)来实施。换言之，本领域技术人员应可了解，在本案已具体公开有关于利用开关电路来实施限流的概念底下，本案所包含的范围同样及于上述开关电路各类实施例的均等范围。In addition, it should be noted that the current-limiting circuits 4200 and 4200a mentioned in the above-mentioned embodiments are all implementations of a current-limiting means, and their function is to reduce the current on the power supply loop when enabled (eg, the switch circuit is turned off). Limited to less than a certain value (eg 5MIU). Those skilled in the art should understand that the current limiting means can be implemented by a structure generally similar to a switch circuit after referring to the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, the switch circuit may utilize electronic switches, electromagnetic switches, relays, triacs (TRIACs), thyristors, adjustable impedance components (variable resistors, variable capacitors) , variable inductance, etc.) to implement. In other words, those skilled in the art should understand that under the concept of implementing current limiting by using a switch circuit that has been specifically disclosed in this case, the scope included in this case is also equivalent to the above-mentioned various embodiments of the switch circuit.
此外，综合上述较佳实施例来看，本领域技术人员应可参酌本文而了解到本案第二较佳实施例所揭示的安装检测模块不仅是可作为分布式的电路设计于LED直管灯中，也可以将部分电路组件整合至一集成电路中(如第三较佳实施例)，或是将全部电路组件整合至一集成电路中(如第四较佳实施例)，藉以节省安装检测模块的电路成本和体积。此外，透过模块化/集成化的设置安装检测模块，可使得安装检测模块可更易于搭配在不同类型的LED直管灯设计中，进而提高设计兼容性。另一方面，集成化的安装检测模块在LED直管灯的应用底下，因为灯管内部的电路面积显着缩小因此可使得LED直管灯的出光面积明显地提升，进而提高LED直管灯的照明特性表现。再者，由于集成化的设计可以使被集成的组件的工作电流减小(降低约50％)，并且使电路工作效率提高，因此节省的功率可被用来供应给LED模块发光使用，使得LED直管灯的发光效率可进一步提升。In addition, in view of the above preferred embodiments, those skilled in the art should be able to refer to this article to understand that the installation detection module disclosed in the second preferred embodiment of this case can not only be used as a distributed circuit design in the LED straight tube lamp , it is also possible to integrate some circuit components into an integrated circuit (such as the third preferred embodiment), or integrate all circuit components into an integrated circuit (such as the fourth preferred embodiment), so as to save the installation of detection modules circuit cost and volume. In addition, through the modular/integrated installation of the detection module, the installation and detection module can be more easily matched in the design of different types of LED straight tube lamps, thereby improving the design compatibility. On the other hand, the integrated installation detection module is used under the application of LED straight tube lamps, because the circuit area inside the lamp tube is significantly reduced, so the light emitting area of the LED straight tube lamp can be significantly increased, thereby improving the LED straight tube lamp. Lighting performance. Furthermore, since the integrated design can reduce the operating current of the integrated components (by about 50%), and improve the circuit operating efficiency, the saved power can be used to supply the LED module for lighting, so that the LED The luminous efficiency of the straight tube lamp can be further improved.
举例来说，上述实施例的安装检测模块也可以称做检测模块/电路、漏电检测模块/电路、漏电保护模块/电路或阻抗检测模块/电路等；所述检测结果锁存模块也可以称做检测结果储存模块/电路、控制模块/电路等；所述检测控制器可以是包含有检测脉冲发生模块、检测结果锁存模块及检测判定电路的电路，本申请不以此为限。除此之外，上述实施例的检测脉冲发生模块在一些实施例中也可称做检测触发电路。For example, the installation detection module of the above-mentioned embodiment may also be called a detection module/circuit, a leakage detection module/circuit, a leakage protection module/circuit or an impedance detection module/circuit, etc.; the detection result latching module may also be called as Detection result storage module/circuit, control module/circuit, etc. The detection controller may be a circuit including a detection pulse generation module, a detection result latch module and a detection determination circuit, which is not limited to this application. Besides, the detection pulse generating module of the above embodiments may also be called a detection trigger circuit in some embodiments.
综上所述，上述图17A至44C实施例教示了利用电子控制与检测的方式来实现防触电保护的概念。相较于利用机械结构作动来进行防触电的技术而言，由于电子式的控制与检测方法不会有机械疲劳的问题存在，因此利用电子信号进行灯管的防触电保护可以具有较佳的可靠度与使用寿命。To sum up, the above-mentioned embodiments of FIGS. 17A to 44C teach the concept of realizing the protection against electric shock by means of electronic control and detection. Compared with the technology of preventing electric shock by using mechanical structure actuation, since the electronic control and detection method does not have the problem of mechanical fatigue, the electric shock protection of the lamp using electronic signals can have better protection. reliability and longevity.
应注意的是，在脉冲检测的实施例中，所述安装检测模块在运作时不会实质改变LED直管灯本身有关于驱动及发光方面的特性及状态。所述驱动及发光方面的特性例如是电源相位、输出电流等影响LED直管灯在点亮状态下的发光亮度及输出功率的特性。换言之，所述安装检测模块的运作仅会关联于LED直管灯处于未被点亮状态下的漏电保护运作，与直流电源转换电路、功率因数校正电路及调光电路等调整LED直管灯点亮状态特性的电路皆有所差异。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the pulse detection, the installation detection module will not substantially change the characteristics and states of the LED straight tube lamp in terms of driving and lighting during operation. The driving and light-emitting characteristics are, for example, the characteristics of power supply phase, output current, etc. that affect the light-emitting brightness and output power of the LED straight tube lamp in the lighting state. In other words, the operation of the installation detection module is only related to the leakage protection operation when the LED straight tube lamp is not lit, and the DC power conversion circuit, the power factor correction circuit and the dimming circuit to adjust the LED straight tube lamp. Circuits with bright state characteristics are different.
请参见图46A，图46A是本申请第十五实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。相较于上述实施例的电源模块，本实施例的电源模块除了包含整流电路510、滤波电路520及驱动电路530外更包含误用警示模块580。误用警示模块580耦接整流电路510，其可检测母线电压并据以判断外部驱动信号是否为镇流器所提供的交流信号，并且根据判断结果控制LED直管灯的发光模式，藉以在镇流旁路型LED直管灯错误安装于具有镇流器的灯座时，使LED直管灯发出提示(例如闪烁)以提醒使用者误用的情形，避免镇流器输出的交流信号损坏镇流旁路型的LED直管灯。误用警示模块除可以控制LED直管灯的发光模式提示灯管误用，还可以单独的设置警示灯或者发出警示声以提示灯管误用，本申请不以此为限。Please refer to FIG. 46A . FIG. 46A is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power supply module according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present application. Compared with the power module of the above-mentioned embodiment, the power module of the present embodiment further includes a misuse warning module 580 in addition to the rectifier circuit 510 , the filter circuit 520 and the drive circuit 530 . The misuse warning module 580 is coupled to the rectifier circuit 510, which can detect the bus voltage and determine whether the external driving signal is an AC signal provided by the ballast, and control the lighting mode of the LED straight tube lamp according to the judgment result, so as to prevent the When the bypass type LED straight tube light is wrongly installed in the lamp holder with the ballast, the LED straight tube light will emit a prompt (such as flashing) to remind the user of misuse, so as to avoid the AC signal output by the ballast from damaging the ballast. Flow bypass type LED straight tube light. The misuse warning module can not only control the light-emitting mode of the LED straight tube lamp to prompt the misuse of the lamp tube, but also set a separate warning light or emit a warning sound to prompt the misuse of the lamp tube, which is not limited in this application.
本实施例的电源模块还可以应用到其他类型的LED灯上，可例如旁路型HID灯等。The power module of this embodiment can also be applied to other types of LED lamps, such as bypass type HID lamps and the like.
参考图46B所示，图46B是为本申请第一一实施例的误用警示模块的电路方块示意图。误用警示模块580包含误用检测电路583和提示电路584。误用检测电路583电性连接至LED灯的供电回路，用以检测LED灯的供电信号，并判断所述供电信号是否为市电交流信号，并生成一检测信号。提示电路584电性连接至所述误用检测电路583，用以接收所述检测信号并根据检测信号决定是否进行提示动作,所述提示包含灯光闪烁，指示灯提示，声音提示等。Referring to FIG. 46B , FIG. 46B is a schematic circuit block diagram of the misuse warning module according to the first embodiment of the present application. The misuse warning module 580 includes a misuse detection circuit 583 and a prompt circuit 584 . The misuse detection circuit 583 is electrically connected to the power supply circuit of the LED lamp, and is used to detect the power supply signal of the LED lamp, determine whether the power supply signal is a commercial AC signal, and generate a detection signal. The prompt circuit 584 is electrically connected to the misuse detection circuit 583 for receiving the detection signal and determining whether to perform a prompt action according to the detection signal.
误用警示模块的范例配置可如图46C所示，图46C是本申请一实施例的误用警示模块的电路方块示意图。同时参考图47B，图47B为申请一实施例的提示电路的电路架构示意图。在本实施例中，误用警示模块580包含误用检测电路583和提示电路584。提示电路584包含开关器件5841和控制电路5842，控制电路5842电性连接至所述误用检测电路583，所述 开关器5841第一接脚电性连接至第二整流输出端512，其第二接脚电性连接至电路节点582。误用检测电路583会检测母线电压，并且根据检测到的母线电压的信号特征来判断LED直管灯当前所接收到的外部驱动信号为镇流器所输出的交流信号或是由电网直接提供的交流信号。其中，由于镇流器(特别是电子镇流器)输出的交流信号会具有高频、高压等特性，而交流电网所提供的交流信号一般则是相对低频(50Hz至60Hz)、低压(一般低于305V)的信号，因此通过检测母线电压的频率、振幅或相位等电信号特性即可识别出外部驱动信号的来源。An example configuration of the misuse warning module is shown in FIG. 46C , which is a schematic block diagram of a circuit of the misuse warning module according to an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 47B at the same time, FIG. 47B is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the prompting circuit according to an embodiment of the application. In this embodiment, the misuse warning module 580 includes a misuse detection circuit 583 and a prompt circuit 584 . The prompt circuit 584 includes a switch device 5841 and a control circuit 5842. The control circuit 5842 is electrically connected to the misuse detection circuit 583. The first pin of the switch 5841 is electrically connected to the second rectifier output end 512, and its second The pin is electrically connected to circuit node 582 . The misuse detection circuit 583 will detect the bus voltage, and according to the signal characteristics of the detected bus voltage, it is determined that the external driving signal currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is the AC signal output by the ballast or directly provided by the power grid. AC signal. Among them, because the AC signal output by the ballast (especially the electronic ballast) will have the characteristics of high frequency and high voltage, and the AC signal provided by the AC power grid is generally relatively low frequency (50Hz to 60Hz), low voltage (generally low Therefore, the source of the external drive signal can be identified by detecting the electrical signal characteristics such as the frequency, amplitude or phase of the bus voltage.
在一些实施例中，当误用检测电路583检测到的信号特征符合电网的输出信号特征时，即表示当前输入的外部驱动信号可能是由交流电网所提供的交流信号，因此误用检测电路583会发出第一检测信号，所述控制电路5842接收第一检测信号并根据第一检测信号控制开关器件5841持续导通。In some embodiments, when the signal characteristics detected by the misuse detection circuit 583 are consistent with the output signal characteristics of the power grid, it means that the currently input external driving signal may be an AC signal provided by the AC power grid. Therefore, the misuse detection circuit 583 A first detection signal is sent out, and the control circuit 5842 receives the first detection signal and controls the switching device 5841 to be continuously turned on according to the first detection signal.
另一方面，当误用检测电路583检测到的信号特征不符合电网的输出信号特征时，即表示当前输入的外部驱动信号可能是由镇流器所提供的交流信号，因此误用检测电路583会发出第二检测信号给所述控制电路5842。所述控制电路5842根据所述第二检测信号控制开关器件5841切换状态，藉以影响电源回路上的电流连续性，并使后端的LED模块响应于电源回路上的电流连续性变化而产生特定的发光模式作为误用警示。On the other hand, when the signal characteristics detected by the misuse detection circuit 583 do not conform to the output signal characteristics of the power grid, it means that the currently input external drive signal may be an AC signal provided by the ballast, so the misuse detection circuit 583 A second detection signal will be sent to the control circuit 5842 . The control circuit 5842 controls the switching device 5841 to switch states according to the second detection signal, so as to affect the current continuity on the power circuit, and make the rear LED module generate specific light in response to the change of the current continuity on the power circuit mode as a misuse warning.
在其他实施例中，所述控制电路5842电性连接至驱动电路530，用以根据第一检测信号或第二检测信号使能或禁能驱动电路530来实现警示。可例如，当外部电力信号为市电交流电时，所述控制电路5842根据第一检测信号使能驱动电路530以正常点亮LED灯；当外部电力信号为镇流器提供的信号时，所述控制电路5842根据第二检测信号禁能驱动电路530或者间歇使能和禁能驱动电路530以使LED灯闪烁，警示用户LED灯误用。In other embodiments, the control circuit 5842 is electrically connected to the driving circuit 530 for enabling or disabling the driving circuit 530 according to the first detection signal or the second detection signal to realize the warning. For example, when the external power signal is the mains AC power, the control circuit 5842 enables the drive circuit 530 to light the LED light normally according to the first detection signal; when the external power signal is the signal provided by the ballast, the The control circuit 5842 disables the driving circuit 530 or intermittently enables and disables the driving circuit 530 according to the second detection signal, so as to make the LED lights flash to warn the user of misuse of the LED lights.
在图46C所示的示例中，其中，所述误用警示模块580藉由其端子接入所述LED直管灯的电源回路，用于获取所述电源回路中的信号，并在检测到所述信号为镇流器特征信号时输出第二检测信号。在此，所述第二检测信号为图46C所示的示例中的所述误用检测电路583发出的控制信号。In the example shown in FIG. 46C , the misuse warning module 580 is connected to the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube light through its terminals, and is used to obtain the signal in the power supply circuit, and when detecting all the When the signal is the characteristic signal of the ballast, the second detection signal is output. Here, the second detection signal is a control signal sent by the misuse detection circuit 583 in the example shown in FIG. 46C .
结合图46C所示示例，其中，镇流器特征信号用于描述镇流器(特别是电子镇流器)所输出的交流信号的高频、高压等特性。比如，镇流器特征信号用电压信号的电位(或电位区间)表示镇流器所输出的交流信号的高频值(或区间)。比如，镇流器特征信号用电压信号的电位(或电位区间)表示镇流器所输出的交流信号谷值相位。在实施例中，所述误用警示模块是通过其端子检测所述电源回路中信号的频率、相位、以及振幅中的至少一种而判断该信号是否为镇流器特征信号。With reference to the example shown in FIG. 46C, the ballast characteristic signal is used to describe the high frequency, high voltage and other characteristics of the AC signal output by the ballast (especially the electronic ballast). For example, the ballast characteristic signal uses the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal to represent the high frequency value (or interval) of the AC signal output by the ballast. For example, the ballast characteristic signal uses the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal to represent the valley phase of the AC signal output by the ballast. In an embodiment, the misuse warning module determines whether the signal is a ballast characteristic signal by detecting at least one of the frequency, phase and amplitude of the signal in the power circuit through its terminal.
为了能够有效地保留电源回路中的信号的高频、高压等特征信息，在一些实施例中，所述误用警示模块的端子接入所述LED直管灯的电源回路中的整流电路的输出端或输入端。In order to effectively retain the high frequency, high voltage and other characteristic information of the signal in the power loop, in some embodiments, the terminal of the misuse warning module is connected to the output of the rectifier circuit in the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp terminal or input terminal.
在一些实施例中，所述误用警示模块还包括其他未绘示出的检测结果锁存电路，所述检测结果锁存电路电性连接于所述误用检测电路以及提示电路之间，用于暂存所述误用检测电路输出的第一检测信号或第二检测信号，以及将所暂存的第一检测信号或第二检测信号输出至所述提示电路。所述检测结果锁存电路可以使用触发器与逻辑门电路架构来实施，但并不以此为限，任何可以实现锁存并输出第一检测信号或第二检测信号以传输给提示模块的功能的模拟/数字电路架构皆可应用于此。应注意的是，实际应用中，在不影响整体电路运作的前提下，可根据实际电路设计需要可省略、共享、或基于时序的复用该检测结果锁存电路。In some embodiments, the misuse warning module further includes other detection result latch circuits not shown, the detection result latch circuit is electrically connected between the misuse detection circuit and the prompt circuit, and uses The first detection signal or the second detection signal output by the misuse detection circuit is temporarily stored, and the temporarily stored first detection signal or the second detection signal is output to the prompt circuit. The detection result latch circuit can be implemented using flip-flop and logic gate circuit architecture, but not limited to this, any function that can latch and output the first detection signal or the second detection signal to transmit to the prompt module All analog/digital circuit architectures can be applied here. It should be noted that, in practical applications, the detection result latch circuit can be omitted, shared, or multiplexed based on timing according to actual circuit design requirements without affecting the overall circuit operation.
在一实施例中，所述安装检测装置包括误用警示模块，所述误用检测电路具有用以电性连接一LED直管灯的电源回路的端子，用于藉由所述端子获取所述电源回路中的信号，并在检测到所述信号为镇流器特征信号时输出第二检测信号，所述提示电路与所述误用检测电路电性连接，用于根据所接收的第二检测信号发出所述LED直管灯的误用提示。其中，所述提示电路包括控制电路和串接于所述电源回路的开关器件，所述控制电路电性连接所述误用检测电路，用于根据所接收的第二检测信号控制所述开关器件导通或截止，以使所述提示电路藉由影响所述电源回路的电流连续性令所述LED直管灯中的LED模块发出误用提示。在此，所述控制电路和提示电路可例如为LED直管灯的驱动电路的一部分。In one embodiment, the installation detection device includes a misuse warning module, and the misuse detection circuit has a terminal for electrically connecting a power circuit of an LED straight tube lamp, and is used to obtain the information through the terminal. the signal in the power circuit, and outputs a second detection signal when it is detected that the signal is the characteristic signal of the ballast, the prompt circuit is electrically connected to the misuse detection circuit, and is used for detecting according to the received second detection The signal signals the misuse of the LED straight tube light. Wherein, the prompt circuit includes a control circuit and a switch device connected in series with the power supply loop, and the control circuit is electrically connected to the misuse detection circuit for controlling the switch device according to the received second detection signal It is turned on or off, so that the prompt circuit can cause the LED module in the LED straight tube lamp to issue a misuse prompt by affecting the current continuity of the power circuit. Here, the control circuit and the prompting circuit can be, for example, part of the driving circuit of the LED straight tube lamp.
所述控制电路也可以利用控制芯片或任何具有信号运算处理能力的电路来实施。当控制电路根据第一检测信号判断当前输入的外部驱动信号是由交流电网所提供的交流信号时，控制电路会控制提示电路保持导通以使电源回路可以维持在导通的状态，以令外部电源正常地被提供给后端的LED模块。当控制电路根据第二检测信号判断当前输入的外部驱动信号是由镇流器所提供的交流信号时，控制电路会控制提示电路处于切换状态以影响电源回路上的电流连续性，使得后端的LED模块发出误用提示。例如，所述电源回路上的电流连续性变化为调整电源回路中电流断-续变化，使得后端的LED模块会产生特定的亮-灭的发光模式(light pattern)作为误用提示。又如，所述电源回路上的电流连续性变化为调整电源回路中电流强-弱变化，使得后端的LED模块会产生特定的明-暗的发光模式(light pattern)作为误用提示。The control circuit can also be implemented by using a control chip or any circuit with signal operation processing capability. When the control circuit judges according to the first detection signal that the currently input external drive signal is an AC signal provided by the AC power grid, the control circuit will control the prompt circuit to keep on so that the power loop can be kept on, so that the external Power is normally supplied to the rear LED modules. When the control circuit determines according to the second detection signal that the currently input external driving signal is an AC signal provided by the ballast, the control circuit will control the prompt circuit to be in a switching state to affect the current continuity on the power circuit, so that the LEDs at the rear end The module issues a misuse alert. For example, the continuous change of the current on the power circuit is to adjust the intermittent-on-continuous change of the current in the power circuit, so that the LED module at the back end will generate a specific light pattern of on-off as a misuse prompt. For another example, the continuous change of the current on the power loop is to adjust the strong-to-weak change of the current in the power loop, so that the rear LED module will generate a specific light-dark light pattern as a misuse prompt.
需要说明的是，在实际电路设计中，控制电路也可与误用检测电路共享电路器件。比如共享提示电路的驱动器件、逻辑器件等。此外，也可将误用警示模块中的全部电路组件整合至一个集成电路中，藉以节省误用警示模块的电路成本和体积以使得其更易于搭配在不同类型的LED直管灯设计中，进而提高设计兼容性。It should be noted that, in the actual circuit design, the control circuit may also share circuit components with the misuse detection circuit. For example, the driving device, logic device, etc. of the shared prompt circuit. In addition, all the circuit components in the misuse warning module can also be integrated into one integrated circuit, so as to save the circuit cost and volume of the misuse warning module, so that it can be more easily matched in the design of different types of LED straight tube lamps, and then Improve design compatibility.
需要说明的是，上述误用警示模块的第一实施例所提及的提示电路584是一种影响电源回路的电流连续性的实施方式。本领域技术人员在参照上述实施例内容后，应可了解所述影响电源回路的电流连续性可以通过一般类似于提示电路的架构来实施。举例来说，所述提示电路可以利用电子式开关、电磁式开关、继电器、三端双向可控硅(可控硅或TRIAC)、晶体 闸流管(Thyristor)、可调阻抗组件(可变电阻、可变电容、可变电感等)来实施。换言之，本领域技术人员应可了解，在本案已具体公开有关于利用提示电路来实施影响电源回路的电流连续性的概念底下，本案所包含的范围同样及于上述提示电路的实施例的均等范围。It should be noted that, the prompting circuit 584 mentioned in the first embodiment of the above-mentioned misuse warning module is an implementation manner that affects the current continuity of the power circuit. Those skilled in the art should understand that the influence of the current continuity of the power loop can be implemented by a structure generally similar to the prompt circuit after referring to the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, the prompt circuit may utilize electronic switches, electromagnetic switches, relays, triacs (thyristors or TRIACs), thyristors, adjustable impedance components (variable resistors) , variable capacitance, variable inductance, etc.) to implement. In other words, those skilled in the art should understand that under the concept of using the prompt circuit to implement the current continuity affecting the power supply circuit has been specifically disclosed in this case, the scope included in this case is also equal to the scope of the above-mentioned prompt circuit embodiments. .
在一些实施例中，误用检测电路583会在控制开关电路584发出误用警示后，使开关电路584维持在截止状态，藉以避免使用者未即时拆除LED直管灯所可能造成的危险。In some embodiments, the misuse detection circuit 583 keeps the switch circuit 584 in an off state after the control switch circuit 584 issues a misuse warning, so as to avoid possible dangers caused by the user not removing the LED straight tube light immediately.
参考图46G为本申请一实施例的误用检测电路的电路架构示意图。本实施例主要阐述误用检测电路583利用外部电力信号的频率判断外部电力信号类型的原理。本实施例中，误用检测电路583包含电容5831、5834、二极管5832、5833、电阻5835和稳压二极管5836。电容5831的一端电性连接至误用检测电路583的输入端，另一端电性连接至二极管5833的阳极和二极管5832的阴极。二极管5832的阳极电性连接至一公共节点GND。电容5834的一端电性连接至二极管5833的阴极，另一端电性连接至所述公共节点GND。电阻5835和电容5834并联连接，稳压二极管5836和电容5834并联连接。误用检测电路输出端583b电性连接至二极管5833的阴极。误用检测电路输入端583电性连接至LED灯的第一接脚501或第二接脚502，所述公共节点GND电性连接至第二整流输出端，误用检测电路输出端583b电性连接至提示电路584。Referring to FIG. 46G, it is a schematic diagram of a circuit structure of a misuse detection circuit according to an embodiment of the present application. This embodiment mainly describes the principle that the misuse detection circuit 583 uses the frequency of the external power signal to determine the type of the external power signal. In this embodiment, the misuse detection circuit 583 includes capacitors 5831 and 5834 , diodes 5832 and 5833 , a resistor 5835 and a Zener diode 5836 . One end of the capacitor 5831 is electrically connected to the input end of the misuse detection circuit 583 , and the other end is electrically connected to the anode of the diode 5833 and the cathode of the diode 5832 . The anode of the diode 5832 is electrically connected to a common node GND. One end of the capacitor 5834 is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode 5833, and the other end is electrically connected to the common node GND. The resistor 5835 and the capacitor 5834 are connected in parallel, and the Zener diode 5836 and the capacitor 5834 are connected in parallel. The misuse detection circuit output terminal 583b is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode 5833 . The input terminal 583 of the misuse detection circuit is electrically connected to the first pin 501 or the second pin 502 of the LED lamp, the common node GND is electrically connected to the second rectifier output terminal, and the misuse detection circuit output terminal 583b is electrically connected to Connect to prompt circuit 584.
下面阐述误用检测电路583判断外部电力信号类型的原理。当外部电力信号为市电交流电时，市电交流电的频率为50-60Hz属于低频信号，设置电容5831为高通滤波电容，低频的市电交流信号无法通过电容5831，误用检测电路输出端583b为低电平；当外部电力信号为电子镇流器提供的高频信号时(20LKHz-200KHz)，高频的电子镇流器信号可以通过电容5831，高频信号在稳压管5836上形成一稳定电压，此稳定电压视为高电平。于此，外部电力信号为市电交流电时，误用检测电路583输出低电平信号，此低电平信号为第一检测信号；外部电力信号为电子镇流器提供的信号时，误用检测电路583输出高电平信号，此高电平信号为第二检测信号。The principle of the misuse detection circuit 583 for judging the type of the external power signal is explained below. When the external power signal is mains alternating current, the frequency of mains alternating current is 50-60Hz, which is a low-frequency signal, and capacitor 5831 is set as a high-pass filter capacitor, and the low-frequency mains AC signal cannot pass through capacitor 5831. Low level; when the external power signal is the high-frequency signal provided by the electronic ballast (20LKHz-200KHz), the high-frequency electronic ballast signal can pass through the capacitor 5831, and the high-frequency signal forms a stable voltage on the voltage regulator tube 5836. voltage, this stable voltage is regarded as a high level. Here, when the external power signal is AC AC, the misuse detection circuit 583 outputs a low-level signal, which is the first detection signal; when the external power signal is the signal provided by the electronic ballast, the misuse detection circuit 583 outputs a low-level signal. The circuit 583 outputs a high-level signal, which is the second detection signal.
利用本实施例公开的技术方案可以判断外部电力信号是否为市电交流电，当外部电力信号为电子镇流器提供的信号时，发出警示信号以提示灯管误用，避免LED灯烧毁或引起火灾。Using the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, it can be determined whether the external power signal is the AC power of the mains. When the external power signal is the signal provided by the electronic ballast, a warning signal is issued to remind the lamp tube to be misused, so as to prevent the LED lamp from burning or causing a fire .
参考图46D，为本申请又一实施例的误用检测电路的电路方块示意图。本实施例中，误用检测电路使用图19A所述实施例中安装检测模块的电路架构，与之不同的是，本实施例中，限流电路3200电性连接至第一整流输出端511，检测判定电路3130电性连接至第二整流输出端512。Referring to FIG. 46D , it is a circuit block diagram of a misuse detection circuit according to still another embodiment of the present application. In this embodiment, the misuse detection circuit uses the circuit structure of the detection module installed in the embodiment shown in FIG. 19A . The difference is that in this embodiment, the current limiting circuit 3200 is electrically connected to the first rectifier output end 511 . The detection and determination circuit 3130 is electrically connected to the second rectifier output terminal 512 .
结合图18和图46D，当LED灯接驳市电交流电时，市电交流电通过第一接脚501、整流电路510、误用检测电路583及第二接脚502形成检测路径。本实施例中，检测脉冲发生模块3110用以产生脉冲信号并将此信号发送给检测结果锁存电路3120。检测结果锁存电路3120 同时接收检测脉冲发生模块3110产生的脉冲信号和检测结果判定电路3130产生的检测结果信号并输出锁存信号给限流电路3200。18 and 46D , when the LED lamp is connected to the AC AC, the AC AC forms a detection path through the first pin 501 , the rectifier circuit 510 , the misuse detection circuit 583 and the second pin 502 . In this embodiment, the detection pulse generating module 3110 is used to generate a pulse signal and send the signal to the detection result latch circuit 3120 . The detection result latch circuit 3120 simultaneously receives the pulse signal generated by the detection pulse generation module 3110 and the detection result signal generated by the detection result determination circuit 3130 and outputs the latch signal to the current limiting circuit 3200 .
下面阐述误用检测电路583的动作。当系统上电时，检测脉冲发生模块3110生成脉冲信号DP(参考图43A-43D)，检测结果锁存电路3120此时只接收到脉冲信号DP,并将脉冲信号DP直接传送给限流电路。当脉冲信号DP为高电平时，限流电路3200导通，第一整流输出端511和第二整流输出端512导通，外部电力信号通过误用检测电路583形成的检测路径；当脉冲信号DP为低电平时，限流电路3200断开，所述检测路径断开。通过脉冲信号DP控制限流电路3200的导通和截止在所述检测路径上形成路径检测信号，检测判定电路3130检测此路径检测信号并根据所述路径检测信号判断外部电力信号的类型，并输出第一检测信号或第二检测信号，所述第一检测信号和第二检测信号用以传送给检测结果锁存电路3120和提示电路584。The operation of the misuse detection circuit 583 will be described below. When the system is powered on, the detection pulse generation module 3110 generates a pulse signal DP (refer to FIGS. 43A-43D ), and the detection result latch circuit 3120 only receives the pulse signal DP at this time, and directly transmits the pulse signal DP to the current limiting circuit. When the pulse signal DP is at a high level, the current limiting circuit 3200 is turned on, the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the second rectifier output terminal 512 are turned on, and the external power signal passes through the detection path formed by the misuse detection circuit 583; when the pulse signal DP When the level is low, the current limiting circuit 3200 is disconnected, and the detection path is disconnected. The pulse signal DP controls the on and off of the current limiting circuit 3200 to form a path detection signal on the detection path. The detection determination circuit 3130 detects the path detection signal and determines the type of the external power signal according to the path detection signal, and outputs the output The first detection signal or the second detection signal is used to transmit the first detection signal and the second detection signal to the detection result latch circuit 3120 and the prompt circuit 584 .
当检测判定电路3130根据所述路径检测信号判定外部电力信号为市电交流电时，所述检测判定电路输出第一检测信号，所述第一检测信号用以指示检测结果锁存电路持续输出低电平，限流电路3200接收此低电平信号而截至，误用检测电路停止工作。所述第一检测信号指示提示电路584不动作，不发出提示，即所述LED灯正常安装，没有误用。当检测判定电路3130根据所述路径检测信号判定外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供的信号时，所述检测判定电路3130输出第二检测信号，所述第二检测信号指示检测结果锁存电路3120持续输出低电平，限流电路3200接收此低电平信号而截至，误用检测电路583停止工作。所述第二检测信号指示指示电路584动作，发出提示，以提示用户灯管非正常安装，出现误用。When the detection and determination circuit 3130 determines according to the path detection signal that the external power signal is AC power, the detection and determination circuit outputs a first detection signal, and the first detection signal is used to instruct the detection result latch circuit to continuously output low power level, the current limiting circuit 3200 receives the low level signal and turns off, and the misuse detection circuit stops working. The first detection signal indicates that the prompting circuit 584 does not act and does not issue a prompt, that is, the LED light is normally installed without misuse. When the detection and determination circuit 3130 determines that the external power signal is the signal provided by the inductive ballast according to the path detection signal, the detection and determination circuit 3130 outputs a second detection signal, and the second detection signal indicates the detection result latch circuit 3120 Continuously outputting a low level, the current limiting circuit 3200 receives the low level signal and stops, and the misuse detection circuit 583 stops working. The second detection signal instructs the indication circuit 584 to act, and sends out a prompt to remind the user that the lamp is installed abnormally and misused.
在一些实施例中，当判定外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供的信号时，第二检测信号指示检测结果锁存电路3120不执行锁存，即检测结果锁存电路3120输出脉冲信号DP给限流电路3200，误用检测电路583持续进行检测。In some embodiments, when it is determined that the external power signal is the signal provided by the inductive ballast, the second detection signal indicates that the detection result latch circuit 3120 does not perform latching, that is, the detection result latch circuit 3120 outputs the pulse signal DP to the limiter The flow circuit 3200 and the misuse detection circuit 583 continue to detect.
下面结合图43E-43G阐述检测判定电路3130判断外部电力信号类型的原理。图43E-图43G为本申请中路径检测信号DL在不同的外部电力信号下的波形示意图。The principle of the detection and determination circuit 3130 to determine the type of the external power signal is described below with reference to FIGS. 43E-43G. 43E-FIG. 43G are schematic diagrams of waveforms of the path detection signal DL under different external power signals in the present application.
参考图43E,当外部电力信号为市电交流电时，信号DP为检测脉冲发生模块3110生成的脉冲信号，对应的在检测路径上形成路径检测信号DL1。路径检测信号DL1和脉冲信号DP的对应关系如图43E所示，当脉冲信号DP为高电平时，路径检测信号DL1同样为高电平信号；当脉冲信号DP为低电平信号时，路径检测信号DL1同样为低电平信号。Referring to FIG. 43E, when the external power signal is a commercial AC power, the signal DP is a pulse signal generated by the detection pulse generation module 3110, and a path detection signal DL1 is correspondingly formed on the detection path. The corresponding relationship between the path detection signal DL1 and the pulse signal DP is shown in Figure 43E. When the pulse signal DP is at a high level, the path detection signal DL1 is also a high level signal; when the pulse signal DP is a low level signal, the path detection signal is at a low level. The signal DL1 is also a low level signal.
参考图43F和图46F，当LED灯中整流电路510之前未设置x电容时，且外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供时，其电路可等效为在LED灯的供电回路上接入一电感Lb,市电交流信号通过电感Lb向LED灯提供电力。当误用警示模块580中的限流电路3200导通时，市电交流信号通过电感Lb、整流电路510、误用警示模块形成的检测路径。因为电感Lb中的电流不能 突变，所以图43F中的路径检测信号DL2在脉冲信号变为高电平时逐渐增加。当脉冲信号DP变为低电平时，所述检测路径断开，路径检测信号变为零Referring to FIG. 43F and FIG. 46F , when the rectifier circuit 510 in the LED lamp is not provided with an x capacitor, and the external power signal is provided by an inductive ballast, the circuit can be equivalent to connecting an inductor to the power supply circuit of the LED lamp. Lb, the mains AC signal provides power to the LED lamp through the inductor Lb. When the current limiting circuit 3200 in the misuse warning module 580 is turned on, the mains AC signal passes through the detection path formed by the inductor Lb, the rectifier circuit 510 and the misuse warning module. Since the current in the inductance Lb cannot be abruptly changed, the path detection signal DL2 in Fig. 43F gradually increases when the pulse signal becomes a high level. When the pulse signal DP becomes a low level, the detection path is disconnected, and the path detection signal becomes zero
同时参考图43E和43F,当外部电力信号为市电交流电时和外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供的信号时，其路径检测信号DL1和DL2明显不同，检测判定电路3130利用路径检测信号DL1和DL2之间的差异来判断外部电力信号的类型。此差异可例如是路径检测信号DL1和DL2的峰值、平均值、波形等参数的差异，本发明不以此为限，只要能够区别DL1和DL2即可以实现外部电力信号类型的判断。43E and 43F at the same time, when the external power signal is the alternating current of the mains and when the external power signal is the signal provided by the inductive ballast, the path detection signals DL1 and DL2 are obviously different, and the detection and determination circuit 3130 uses the path detection signals DL1 and DL2. The difference between DL2 to judge the type of external power signal. The difference may be, for example, the difference in parameters such as the peak value, average value, and waveform of the path detection signals DL1 and DL2. The invention is not limited to this, as long as DL1 and DL2 can be distinguished, the external power signal type can be judged.
以路径检测信号DL1和DL2的幅值为例，设定一参考阈值Vref2，当路径检测信号DL的幅值大于此设定阈值Vref2时，判定外部电力信号为市电交流电，当路径检测信号的幅值小于此设定阈值Vref2时，判定外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供的信号。设定参考阈值Vref2的值小于路径检测信号DL1的最大值且大于路径检测信号DL2的最小值。Taking the amplitudes of the path detection signals DL1 and DL2 as an example, a reference threshold Vref2 is set. When the amplitude of the path detection signal DL is greater than the set threshold Vref2, it is determined that the external power signal is mains alternating current. When the amplitude is less than the set threshold Vref2, it is determined that the external power signal is the signal provided by the inductive ballast. The value of the reference threshold Vref2 is set to be smaller than the maximum value of the path detection signal DL1 and larger than the minimum value of the path detection signal DL2.
参考图43G和46F，当LED灯中的整流电路510之前设置了x电容，且外部电力信号由电感镇流器提供时，其电路可等效为在LED灯的供电回路上接入一电感Lb,且整流电路510输入端并联一电容X1，与图43F所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是，本实施例中增加了电容X1，其路径检测信号DL3的波形如图43G所示。当脉冲信号DP由低电平转变为高电平时，限流电路3200导通，电容X1通过检测路径进行放电，t5时间段内，路径检测信号DL3先上升，当电容X1的逐渐放电完成后，路径检测信号DL3逐渐下降，在t6时间段，其波形与图43F中对应时间段的波形相同。由于电感Lb上的电流不能突变，导致在t6时间段内，路径检测信号DL3逐渐增加。Referring to Figures 43G and 46F, when the rectifier circuit 510 in the LED lamp is provided with an x capacitor and the external power signal is provided by an inductive ballast, its circuit can be equivalent to connecting an inductance Lb to the power supply circuit of the LED lamp , and a capacitor X1 is connected in parallel at the input end of the rectifier circuit 510, which is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 43F. The difference is that a capacitor X1 is added in this embodiment, and the waveform of the path detection signal DL3 is shown in FIG. 43G. When the pulse signal DP changes from a low level to a high level, the current limiting circuit 3200 is turned on, and the capacitor X1 is discharged through the detection path. During the time period of t5, the path detection signal DL3 rises first. After the gradual discharge of the capacitor X1 is completed, The path detection signal DL3 gradually decreases, and in the time period t6, its waveform is the same as that of the corresponding time period in FIG. 43F. Since the current on the inductor Lb cannot be abruptly changed, the path detection signal DL3 gradually increases during the time period t6.
同时参考图43E和43G,当外部电力信号为市电交流电时和外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供的信号时，其路径检测信号DL1和DL3明显不同，检测判定电路3130利用路径检测信号DL1和DL3之间的差异来判断外部电力信号的类型。此差异可例如是路径检测信号DL1和DL3的峰值、平均值、波形等参数的差异，本发明不以此为限，只要能够区别DL1和DL3即可以实现外部电力信号类型的判断。Referring to FIGS. 43E and 43G at the same time, when the external power signal is the alternating current of the mains and when the external power signal is the signal provided by the inductive ballast, the path detection signals DL1 and DL3 are obviously different, and the detection and determination circuit 3130 uses the path detection signals DL1 and DL3. The difference between DL3 to judge the type of external power signal. The difference may be, for example, the difference in parameters such as the peak value, average value, and waveform of the path detection signals DL1 and DL3. The invention is not limited to this, as long as DL1 and DL3 can be distinguished, the external power signal type can be judged.
以路径检测信号DL1和DL3的幅值为例。设定一参考阈值Vref2，判定t6时间段内，路径检测信号DL1和DL3的幅值与参考阈值Vref2的大小关系。在t6时间段内，当路径检测信号DL的幅值大于此设定阈值Vref2时，判定外部电力信号为市电交流电，当路径检测信号的幅值小于此设定阈值Vref2时，判定外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供的信号。设定参考阈值Vref2的值小于t6时间段内路径检测信号DL1的最大值且大于t6时间段内路径检测信号DL3的最小值。Take the amplitudes of the path detection signals DL1 and DL3 as an example. A reference threshold Vref2 is set, and the relationship between the amplitudes of the path detection signals DL1 and DL3 and the reference threshold Vref2 is determined in the time period of t6. During the time period of t6, when the amplitude of the path detection signal DL is greater than the set threshold Vref2, it is determined that the external power signal is AC AC, and when the amplitude of the path detection signal is less than the set threshold Vref2, it is determined that the external power signal is Signal supplied to the magnetic ballast. The value of the reference threshold value Vref2 is set to be smaller than the maximum value of the path detection signal DL1 in the period t6 and larger than the minimum value of the path detection signal DL3 in the period t6.
参考图46E为本申请又一实施例的误用检测电路的电路方块示意图。本实施例中误用检测电路583的电路结构与图46D所述的实施例类似，与之不同的是，本实施例的误用检测电 路583去除了检测结果锁存电路3120。检测脉冲发生模块3110电性连接至限流电路3200和检测判定电路3130,限流电路3200电性连接至第一整流输出端511和检测判定电路3130，检测判定电路3130电性连接至第二整流输出端和提示电路584。Referring to FIG. 46E , it is a schematic circuit block diagram of a misuse detection circuit according to another embodiment of the present application. The circuit structure of the misuse detection circuit 583 in this embodiment is similar to that of the embodiment described in FIG. 46D , and the difference is that the misuse detection circuit 583 of this embodiment removes the detection result latch circuit 3120 . The detection pulse generation module 3110 is electrically connected to the current limiting circuit 3200 and the detection determination circuit 3130, the current limiting circuit 3200 is electrically connected to the first rectifier output terminal 511 and the detection determination circuit 3130, and the detection determination circuit 3130 is electrically connected to the second rectifier Output and prompt circuit 584.
下面阐述误用检测电路583的动作。当系统上电时，检测脉冲发生模块3110生成脉冲信号DP(参考图43A-43D)，限流电路3200接收所述脉冲信号DP，当脉冲信号DP为高电平时，限流电路3200导通，当脉冲信号DP为低电平时，限流电路3200断开。通过脉冲信号DP控制限流电路3200的导通和断开在检测路径上形成路径检测信号，检测判定电路3130检测此路径检测信号并以此判断外部电力信号的类型，并输出第一检测信号或第二检测信号给检测脉冲发生模块3110和提示电路584。The operation of the misuse detection circuit 583 will be described below. When the system is powered on, the detection pulse generation module 3110 generates a pulse signal DP (refer to FIGS. 43A-43D ), and the current limiting circuit 3200 receives the pulse signal DP. When the pulse signal DP is at a high level, the current limiting circuit 3200 is turned on, When the pulse signal DP is at a low level, the current limiting circuit 3200 is turned off. The pulse signal DP controls the conduction and disconnection of the current limiting circuit 3200 to form a path detection signal on the detection path. The detection determination circuit 3130 detects the path detection signal and determines the type of the external power signal based on this, and outputs the first detection signal or The second detection signal is sent to the detection pulse generating module 3110 and the prompt circuit 584 .
当判定外部电力信号为市电交流电时，所述检测判定电路3130输出第一检测信号，所述第一检测信号指示检测脉冲发生电路3110停止工作，即持续输出低电平信号，限流电路3200接收此低电平信号并保持断开。第一件检测信号指示提示电路584不工作，即不发出提示，说明LED灯正常安装。When it is determined that the external power signal is AC power, the detection and determination circuit 3130 outputs a first detection signal, and the first detection signal instructs the detection pulse generation circuit 3110 to stop working, that is, to continuously output a low-level signal, and the current limiting circuit 3200 Receive this low level signal and keep disconnected. The first detection signal indicates that the prompt circuit 584 does not work, that is, no prompt is issued, indicating that the LED light is normally installed.
当判定外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供的信号时，所述检测判定电路3130输出第二检测信号，所述第二检测信号指示脉冲发生电路3110停止工作，即持续输出低电平信号，限流电路3200接收机此低电平信号并保持断开。第二检测信号指示提示电路584工作，即发出相应的提示，以提示用户灯管误用。When it is determined that the external power signal is the signal provided by the inductive ballast, the detection and determination circuit 3130 outputs a second detection signal, and the second detection signal instructs the pulse generating circuit 3110 to stop working, that is, it continues to output a low-level signal, which is limited to Streaming circuit 3200 receives this low level signal and remains off. The second detection signal indicates that the prompt circuit 584 works, that is, a corresponding prompt is issued to prompt the user to misuse the lamp.
在其他实施例中，当判定外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供的信号时，可令检测脉冲发生模块3110持续工作，以持续进行检测，保证使用安全。In other embodiments, when it is determined that the external power signal is a signal provided by an inductive ballast, the detection pulse generating module 3110 can be continuously operated to continuously perform detection and ensure safe use.
利用上述实施例的技术方案，误用警示模块580可以判断外部电力信号是否为电感镇流器提供，当外部电力信号为电感镇流器提供时，误用警示模块580发出警示以提示用户LED灯误用，保证使用安全。Using the technical solutions of the above embodiments, the misuse warning module 580 can determine whether the external power signal is provided by the magnetic ballast, and when the external power signal is provided by the magnetic ballast, the misuse warning module 580 issues a warning to remind the user of the LED light Misuse, ensure safe use.
参考图46A-47B所述实施例，误用警示模块既可以单独的实现判断外部电力信号是否为市电交流信号或电子镇流器提供的信号，亦可以单独判断外部电力信号是否为市电交流信号或电感镇流器提供的信号。同样的，也可以结合上述两种技术方案判断外部电力信号是否为市电交流信号或电子镇流器提供的信号或者电感镇流器提供的信号。46A-47B, the misuse warning module can independently determine whether the external power signal is a mains AC signal or a signal provided by an electronic ballast, and can also independently determine whether the external power signal is a mains AC signal. signal or signal provided by an inductive ballast. Similarly, it is also possible to combine the above two technical solutions to determine whether the external power signal is a mains AC signal or a signal provided by an electronic ballast or a signal provided by an inductive ballast.
对于镇流器旁路型的LED灯，当接入镇流器供电时，可能会造成电路损毁，甚至火灾。误用警示模块可以判断外部电力信号是否为市电交流信号，当外部电力信号为镇流器提供的信号时，误用警示模块发出警示以提示误用，避免造成进一步的损害。For ballast bypass type LED lamps, when connected to the ballast for power supply, it may cause circuit damage or even fire. The misuse warning module can determine whether the external power signal is a mains AC signal. When the external power signal is the signal provided by the ballast, the misuse warning module will issue a warning to prompt misuse to avoid further damage.
请参见图47A，图47A是本申请第十六实施例的电源模块的电路方块示意图。本实施例的电源模块包含整流电路510、滤波电路520、驱动电路530以及误用警示模块680。误用警 示模块680可检测母线电压并据以判断外部驱动信号是否为镇流器所提供的交流信号，并且根据判断结果发出误用警示(例如声响)以提醒使用者误用的情形，避免镇流器输出的交流信号损坏镇流旁路型的LED直管灯。相较于上述第十五实施例，由于本实施例的误用警示模块680不是通过控制LED模块的发光模式作为误用警示，因此不需串接于电源回路中。Please refer to FIG. 47A , FIG. 47A is a schematic circuit block diagram of a power supply module according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present application. The power module of this embodiment includes a rectifier circuit 510 , a filter circuit 520 , a drive circuit 530 and a misuse warning module 680 . The misuse warning module 680 can detect the bus voltage and judge whether the external driving signal is the AC signal provided by the ballast, and issue a misuse warning (eg sound) according to the judgment result to remind the user of the misuse, and avoid the ballast. The AC signal output by the current transformer damages the ballast bypass type LED straight tube lamp. Compared with the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, since the misuse warning module 680 of the present embodiment does not act as a misuse warning by controlling the light-emitting mode of the LED module, it does not need to be connected in series in the power circuit.
在本实施例中，误用警示模块680包含误用检测电路683和提示电路684。误用检测电路583会检测母线电压，并且根据检测到的母线电压的信号特征来判断LED直管灯当前所接收到的外部驱动信号为镇流器所输出的交流信号或是由电网直接提供的交流信号。In this embodiment, the misuse warning module 680 includes a misuse detection circuit 683 and a prompt circuit 684 . The misuse detection circuit 583 will detect the bus voltage, and according to the signal characteristics of the detected bus voltage, it is determined that the external driving signal currently received by the LED straight tube lamp is the AC signal output by the ballast or directly provided by the power grid. AC signal.
在一些实施例中，当误用检测电路683检测到的信号特征符合电网的输出信号特征时，即表示当前输入的外部驱动信号可能是由交流电网所提供的交流信号，此时误用检测电路683会禁能提示电路684，使得提示电路684不发出误用警示。相反地，当误用检测电路683检测到的信号特征不符合电网的输出信号特征时，即表示当前输入的外部驱动信号可能是由镇流器所提供的交流信号，此时误用检测电路683会使能提示电路684，使得提示电路684发出误用警示。在一些实施例中，所述提示电路684可以利用蜂鸣器来实现，藉以在LED直管灯错误安装至带有镇流器的灯座时，发出蜂鸣声以提醒使用者当前发生误用情形。但并不以此为限，在另一些实施例中，所述提示电路684还可例如包括提示灯，藉以在LED直管灯安装至灯座时，发出不同颜色或不同强度的光照以提醒使用者当前的安装状态(外部驱动信号是否为镇流器提供)。在其它一些实施例中，所述提示电路684可同时包括蜂鸣器和提示灯，藉以在LED直管灯错误安装至带有镇流器的灯座时，同时借助蜂鸣声和提示灯的光照提醒使用者当前发生误用情形。In some embodiments, when the signal characteristics detected by the misuse detection circuit 683 are consistent with the output signal characteristics of the power grid, it means that the currently input external drive signal may be an AC signal provided by the AC power grid, and the misuse detection circuit 683 is used at this time. 683 disables the prompt circuit 684 so that the prompt circuit 684 does not issue a misuse warning. Conversely, when the signal characteristics detected by the misuse detection circuit 683 do not conform to the output signal characteristics of the power grid, it means that the currently input external drive signal may be an AC signal provided by the ballast, and at this time, the misuse detection circuit 683 Alerting circuit 684 is enabled, causing alerting circuit 684 to issue a misuse alert. In some embodiments, the prompt circuit 684 can be implemented with a buzzer, so that when the LED straight tube lamp is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket with a ballast, a buzzer sound is emitted to remind the user that the current misuse occurs situation. But it is not limited to this. In other embodiments, the prompt circuit 684 may also include a prompt light, so that when the LED straight tube light is installed on the lamp socket, light of different colors or different intensities is emitted to remind the use of The current installation status of the operator (whether the external drive signal is provided for the ballast). In some other embodiments, the prompt circuit 684 may include a buzzer and a prompt light at the same time, so that when the LED straight tube light is incorrectly installed in a lamp socket with a ballast, the buzzer sound and prompt light can be used at the same time. Lights alert the user to a current misuse situation.
在图47A所示的示例中，误用检测电路683配置在一误用警示模块中；所述提示电路684配置在一提示模块中。其中，所述误用警示模块藉由其端子接入所述LED直管灯的电源回路，用于获取所述电源回路中的信号，并在检测到所述信号为镇流器特征信号时输出第二检测信号。所述提示模块与误用警示模块电性连接用于根据所接收的第二检测信号发出所述LED直管灯的误用提示。在此，所述第二检测信号为图47A所示的示例中的所述误用检测电路683发出的禁能或致能。In the example shown in FIG. 47A , the misuse detection circuit 683 is configured in a misuse warning module; the prompt circuit 684 is configured in a prompt module. Wherein, the misuse warning module is connected to the power circuit of the LED straight tube lamp through its terminal, and is used to obtain the signal in the power circuit, and output the signal when it is detected that the signal is the characteristic signal of the ballast the second detection signal. The prompting module is electrically connected to the misuse warning module, and is used to issue a misuse prompting of the LED straight tube light according to the received second detection signal. Here, the second detection signal is the disable or enable issued by the misuse detection circuit 683 in the example shown in FIG. 47A .
结合图47A所示的示例，其中，镇流器特征信号用于描述镇流器(特别是电子镇流器)所输出的交流信号的高频、高压等特性。比如，镇流器特征信号用电压信号的电位(或电位区间)表示镇流器所输出的交流信号的高频值(或区间)。比如，镇流器特征信号用电压信号的电位(或电位区间)表示镇流器所输出的交流信号谷值相位。在实施例中，所述误用警示模块是通过其端子检测所述电源回路中信号的频率、相位、以及振幅中的至少一种而判断该信号是否为镇流器特征信号。With reference to the example shown in FIG. 47A, the ballast characteristic signal is used to describe the high frequency, high voltage and other characteristics of the AC signal output by the ballast (especially the electronic ballast). For example, the ballast characteristic signal uses the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal to represent the high frequency value (or interval) of the AC signal output by the ballast. For example, the ballast characteristic signal uses the potential (or potential interval) of the voltage signal to represent the valley phase of the AC signal output by the ballast. In an embodiment, the misuse warning module determines whether the signal is a ballast characteristic signal by detecting at least one of the frequency, phase and amplitude of the signal in the power circuit through its terminal.
为了能够有效地保留电源回路中的信号的高频、高压等特征信息，在一些实施例中，所 述误用警示模块的端子接入所述LED直管灯的电源回路中的整流电路的输出端或输入端。In order to effectively retain the high frequency, high voltage and other characteristic information of the signal in the power loop, in some embodiments, the terminal of the misuse warning module is connected to the output of the rectifier circuit in the power loop of the LED straight tube lamp terminal or input terminal.
在一些实施例中，所述误用警示模块还包括其他未绘示出的检测结果锁存电路，所述检测结果锁存电路电性连接于所述误用警示模块以及提示模块之间，用于暂存所述误用警示模块输出的第一检测信号或第二检测信号，以及将所暂存的第一检测信号或第二检测信号输出至所述提示模块。所述检测结果锁存单元可以使用触发器与逻辑门电路架构来实施，但并不以此为限，任何可以实现锁存并输出第一检测信号或第二检测信号以传输给提示模块的功能的模拟/数字电路架构皆可应用于此。应注意的是，实际应用中，在不影响整体电路运作的前提下，可根据实际电路设计需要可省略、共享、或基于时序的复用该检测结果锁存电路。请再参考图47B，本实施例中，提示电路584包含一开关器件5841串联于LED灯的供电回路，通过控制开关器件5841的导通和截止来影响所述电源回路的电流连续性以实现闪灯的效果以提示用户，灯管误用，达到提示效果。In some embodiments, the misuse warning module further includes other non-illustrated detection result latch circuits, the detection result latch circuit is electrically connected between the misuse warning module and the prompt module, and uses The first detection signal or the second detection signal output by the misuse warning module is temporarily stored, and the temporarily stored first detection signal or the second detection signal is output to the prompt module. The detection result latching unit can be implemented using a flip-flop and logic gate circuit architecture, but is not limited to this, any function that can latch and output the first detection signal or the second detection signal for transmission to the prompt module All analog/digital circuit architectures can be applied here. It should be noted that, in practical applications, the detection result latch circuit can be omitted, shared, or multiplexed based on timing according to actual circuit design requirements without affecting the overall circuit operation. Referring to FIG. 47B again, in this embodiment, the prompt circuit 584 includes a switching device 5841 connected in series with the power supply circuit of the LED lamp, and the current continuity of the power supply circuit is affected by controlling the on and off of the switching device 5841 to achieve flashing The effect of the lamp is to remind the user that the lamp tube is misused to achieve the prompt effect.
在其他实施例中，还可以通过其他方式来实现闪灯效果，可例如图30G所述实施例中，使提示电路的控制电路5842电性连接至驱动电路的控制器633，用以将第一检测信号或第二检测信号传送给控制器633，控制器633根据第一检测信号或第二检测信号使能或禁能驱动输出，以影响驱动输出信号的连续性，同样可以实现闪灯的效果，本发明不以此为限。In other embodiments, the flashing light effect can also be achieved in other ways. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 30G , the control circuit 5842 of the prompting circuit is electrically connected to the controller 633 of the driving circuit, so as to connect the first The detection signal or the second detection signal is transmitted to the controller 633, and the controller 633 enables or disables the driving output according to the first detection signal or the second detection signal, so as to affect the continuity of the driving output signal, and can also achieve the effect of flashing lights , the present invention is not limited to this.
在另一实施例中，所述开关器件5841电性连接至所述驱动电路530和LED模块50之间，用以改变LED模块50的电流连续性以实现闪灯效果。In another embodiment, the switching device 5841 is electrically connected between the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 to change the current continuity of the LED module 50 to achieve a flashing effect.
底下搭配图48D以进一步说明带有误用警示模块的LED直管灯的具体工作机制，图48D是本申请第一实施例的误用警示模块的控制方法的步骤流程图。请参照图48D，在LED直管灯的电源模块接收到外部驱动信号后，误用警示模块会检测LED直管灯电源回路上的信号(步骤S401)，并且判断检测到的信号特征是否符合第一信号特征(S402)。所述第一信号特征可例如为信号频率、振幅或相位等。在此第一信号特征是以符合交流电网的信号特征为例，但本揭露不以此为限。在其他实施例中，所述第一信号特征也可以设定为对应于镇流器输出的信号特征。FIG. 48D is attached below to further illustrate the specific working mechanism of the LED straight tube lamp with the misuse warning module. FIG. 48D is a flow chart of the steps of the control method of the misuse warning module according to the first embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 48D , after the power module of the LED straight tube light receives the external driving signal, the misuse warning module will detect the signal on the power supply circuit of the LED straight tube light (step S401 ), and determine whether the detected signal characteristics conform to the first A signal feature (S402). The first signal characteristic may be, for example, signal frequency, amplitude or phase, and the like. Here, the first signal characteristic is an example of a signal characteristic conforming to the AC power grid, but the present disclosure is not limited to this. In other embodiments, the first signal characteristic may also be set to correspond to the signal characteristic output by the ballast.
当误用警示模块判定检测到的信号特征符合第一信号特征时，表示此时外部驱动信号是由交流电网所提供，因此误用警示模块不会发出误用警示(步骤S403)，并且会根据误用检测在供电过程中设定的动作时序而使LED直管灯可被正常点亮(进入或维持在工作模式)或使安装检测模块进行安装状态检测(检测模式)。相反地，当误用警示模块判定检测到的信号特征不符合第一信号特征时，表示此时外部驱动信号是由镇流器所提供，因此误用警示模块会发出误用警示(步骤S404)。在一些实施例中，在误用警示发出后，误用警示模块会进一步令LED直管灯进入限制模式(步骤S405)。在限制模式下，误用警示模块可以是禁止LED直管灯点亮(即，禁止驱动电流流通或停止产生驱动电流)，或是使LED直管灯工作在限流状 态下(即，降低或限制驱动电流大小)，藉以避免LED直管灯损毁。换言之，所述限制模式是将LED直管灯的电源模块的输出功率限制在低于其额定功率以下，藉以确保LED直管灯工作安全的一种模式。When the misuse warning module determines that the detected signal characteristic conforms to the first signal characteristic, it means that the external drive signal is provided by the AC power grid at this time, so the misuse warning module will not issue a misuse warning (step S403 ), and will The misuse of the action sequence set in the power supply process enables the LED straight tube lamp to be normally lit (enter or maintain in the working mode) or the installation detection module to perform the installation state detection (detection mode). On the contrary, when the misuse warning module determines that the detected signal characteristic does not conform to the first signal characteristic, it means that the external driving signal is provided by the ballast at this time, so the misuse warning module will issue a misuse warning (step S404 ). . In some embodiments, after the misuse warning is issued, the misuse warning module further causes the LED straight tube light to enter the restricted mode (step S405 ). In the limited mode, the misuse warning module can prohibit the LED straight tube light from lighting (ie, prohibit the flow of driving current or stop generating the driving current), or make the LED straight tube light work in a current-limiting state (ie, reduce or Limit the drive current) to avoid damage to the LED straight tube lamp. In other words, the limiting mode is a mode for limiting the output power of the power module of the LED straight tube lamp to be lower than its rated power, so as to ensure the safe operation of the LED straight tube lamp.
在此附带一提的是，由于所述第一信号特征是可依据设计需求而选择是基于交流电网的信号特征或是镇流器的输出信号特征作为判断基础，因此上述判断步骤(步骤S402)的逻辑的置换属于均等的范围。举例来说，在步骤S402中，若选择以镇流器的输出信号特征作为第一信号特征，则判断逻辑会改为在判断为否时执行步骤S403，并且在判断为是时执行步骤S404和S405，本揭露不以此为限。It should be mentioned here that, because the first signal characteristic can be selected based on the signal characteristic of the AC power grid or the output signal characteristic of the ballast as the judgment basis according to the design requirements, the above judgment step (step S402) The logical permutation of is within the scope of equality. For example, in step S402, if the output signal characteristic of the ballast is selected as the first signal characteristic, the judgment logic will be changed to execute step S403 when the judgment is no, and execute steps S404 and S404 when the judgment is yes S405, the disclosure is not limited to this.
在误用警示模块搭配安装检测模块使用的一些实施例中(例如图19A所示的包含镇流检测模块3400的安装检测模块3000a)，所述误用检测的步骤可以是在检测模式下进行。举例来说，误用警示模块(或镇流检测模块)的误用检测动作可以和安装检测模块的安装检测动作为同时或依序进行，并且在误用警示模块判定有误用情形发生时，发出误用警示并使LED直管灯进入限制模式。在另一些实施例中，所述误用检测的步骤也可以是在工作模式下进行。举例来说，安装检测模块会在判定LED直管灯已经正确安装后令LED直管灯进入工作模式，使LED直管灯可以正常发光，在工作模式下，误用警示模块(或镇流检测模块)会进行误用检测，并且在判定有误用情形发生时，发出误用警示并使LED直管灯离开工作模式并进入限制模式。In some embodiments where the misuse warning module is used in conjunction with the installation detection module (eg, the installation detection module 3000a including the ballast detection module 3400 shown in FIG. 19A ), the misuse detection step may be performed in detection mode. For example, the misuse detection action of the misuse warning module (or the ballast detection module) can be performed simultaneously or sequentially with the installation detection action of the installation detection module, and when the misuse warning module determines that a misuse situation occurs, Issue a misuse alert and put the LED straight tube into restricted mode. In other embodiments, the step of misuse detection may also be performed in a working mode. For example, the installation detection module will make the LED straight tube light enter the working mode after it is judged that the LED straight tube light has been installed correctly, so that the LED straight tube light can emit light normally. module) will perform misuse detection, and when it is determined that there is a misuse situation, a misuse warning will be issued and the LED straight tube light will leave the working mode and enter the restriction mode.
另外附带一提的是，所述可选的应急控制模块(如3140、3240、4140)、镇流检测模块(如3400、4400)、提示电路(如3160)以及调光电路(如5170)虽然仅搭配部分实施例进行描述，但于本领域的技术人员在参照相关说明后，应可直接且无歧异了解所述可选的模块及/或电路应用在其他不同实施例的安装检测模块中的配置与运作，如应用在安装检测模块2000-8000的各个实施例中，特别是安装检测模块3000a-3000L、4000a、5000a及6000a。In addition, it should be mentioned that the optional emergency control module (such as 3140, 3240, 4140), ballast detection module (such as 3400, 4400), prompt circuit (such as 3160) and dimming circuit (such as 5170) although Only some of the embodiments are described, but those skilled in the art should be able to directly and unambiguously understand the application of the optional modules and/or circuits in the installation detection modules of other different embodiments after referring to the relevant descriptions. The configuration and operation are as applied in the various embodiments of the installation detection modules 2000-8000, particularly the installation detection modules 3000a-3000L, 4000a, 5000a and 6000a.
参考图54为本发明第一实施例的LED灯照明系统的电路结构示意图。LED灯照明系统10包含电源模块100和LED灯200。电源模块100电性连接至一外部电源用以接收外部电力信号，并将外部电力信号转换成适合驱动LED灯的驱动信号。LED灯200电性连接至电源模块，用以接收驱动信号而点亮。Referring to FIG. 54, it is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED lamp lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The LED lamp lighting system 10 includes a power module 100 and an LED lamp 200 . The power module 100 is electrically connected to an external power source for receiving an external power signal and converting the external power signal into a driving signal suitable for driving the LED lamp. The LED lamp 200 is electrically connected to the power module for receiving the driving signal to light up.
为了满足不同的照明需求，LED灯200被设计成不同的光通量。为了实现不同的光通量，LED灯200需要的电流参数也是不相同的，因此就需要电源模块100输出不同参数的驱动信号以驱动不同参数的LED灯，满足不同场景下的照明需求。In order to meet different lighting requirements, the LED lamps 200 are designed with different luminous fluxes. In order to achieve different luminous fluxes, the current parameters required by the LED lamps 200 are also different. Therefore, the power module 100 needs to output driving signals with different parameters to drive the LED lamps with different parameters to meet the lighting requirements in different scenarios.
参考图55A为本发明第一实施例的LED灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。本实施例中，电源模块100包含第一输入端P1、第二输入端P2、驱动电路110和负载识别电路120。第一输入端P1和第二输入端P2电性连接至一外部电源用以接收外部电力信号。驱动电路110电性连接至第一输入端P1和第二输入端P2，用以接收外部电力信号并对外部电力信号进行电源 转换以生成一驱动信号。负载识别电路120电性连接至驱动电路110和电源模块输出端，用以生成一检测信号。Referring to FIG. 55A, it is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED lamp lighting system according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, the power module 100 includes a first input terminal P1 , a second input terminal P2 , a driving circuit 110 and a load identification circuit 120 . The first input terminal P1 and the second input terminal P2 are electrically connected to an external power source for receiving external power signals. The driving circuit 110 is electrically connected to the first input terminal P1 and the second input terminal P2 for receiving an external power signal and performing power conversion on the external power signal to generate a driving signal. The load identification circuit 120 is electrically connected to the driving circuit 110 and the output end of the power module for generating a detection signal.
LED灯200包含LED模块和ID模块，LED模块电性连接至电源模块100的输出端，用以接收驱动信号而点亮。ID模块电性连接至电源模块的输出端和LED模块，用以接收检测信号并生成一反馈信号，反馈信号包含LED灯的ID信息。本实施例中，此ID信息包含LED灯所需要的驱动电流参数。电源模块100可根据此反馈信号调整驱动信号的电流参数，以正常点亮LED灯200，达到LED灯200设计的光通量。The LED lamp 200 includes an LED module and an ID module. The LED module is electrically connected to the output end of the power module 100 for receiving a driving signal and lighting. The ID module is electrically connected to the output end of the power module and the LED module for receiving the detection signal and generating a feedback signal, and the feedback signal includes the ID information of the LED light. In this embodiment, the ID information includes the driving current parameters required by the LED lamp. The power module 100 can adjust the current parameter of the driving signal according to the feedback signal, so as to light the LED lamp 200 normally and achieve the designed luminous flux of the LED lamp 200 .
为了方便描述，ID模块可被称为标签模块。For convenience of description, the ID module may be referred to as a tag module.
现结合图57A所示的流程图对本实施例中电源模块100识别LED灯200的原理进行说明。电源模块100接收到外部电力信号后，首先，负载识别电路生成一检测信号并发送给LED灯200，LED灯200接收标签模块220接收检测信号，并生成一反馈信号，此反馈信号包含LED灯的ID信息。本实施例中，此ID信息包含LED模块210所需要的驱动电流参数。负载识别电路120接收所述反馈信号，并根据反馈信号调整驱动电路110的输出参数，以输出匹配LED灯200的驱动信号，LED灯200接收驱动信号而点亮。The principle of identifying the LED lamp 200 by the power module 100 in this embodiment will now be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 57A . After the power module 100 receives the external power signal, first, the load identification circuit generates a detection signal and sends it to the LED light 200. The LED light 200 receives the detection signal received by the tag module 220 and generates a feedback signal, and the feedback signal includes the LED light. ID information. In this embodiment, the ID information includes the driving current parameters required by the LED module 210 . The load identification circuit 120 receives the feedback signal, and adjusts the output parameters of the driving circuit 110 according to the feedback signal to output a driving signal matching the LED lamp 200 , and the LED lamp 200 is lit upon receiving the driving signal.
通过本实施例的电路结构，电源模块100可根据LED灯200的ID信息自行调整驱动信号的电流参数，以正常点亮LED灯。本过程不需要人员干预，可自行完成匹配调整的动作。Through the circuit structure of this embodiment, the power module 100 can adjust the current parameter of the driving signal by itself according to the ID information of the LED lamp 200, so as to light the LED lamp normally. This process does not require human intervention, and the matching and adjustment actions can be completed by themselves.
本实施例中，检测信号可以为供电信号，LED模块接收到供电信号后，开始工作，生成一反馈信号，反馈信号包含LED灯的ID信息。此供电信号使LED灯中的标签模块正常开始工作。在其他实施例中，检测信号可以为数字信号或模拟信号，本发明不依此为限。In this embodiment, the detection signal may be a power supply signal. After receiving the power supply signal, the LED module starts to work and generates a feedback signal, and the feedback signal includes the ID information of the LED lamp. This power supply signal makes the label module in the LED light work normally. In other embodiments, the detection signal may be a digital signal or an analog signal, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
参考图55B为本发明第二实施例的LED灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。本实施例与图55A所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是，本实施例中，电源模块100和LED灯200之间电性连接使用3根连接线L1、L2和L3。连接线L1和L2用以电源模块100向LED灯200传输驱动信号；连接线L2和L3用以LED灯200向电源模块100传输反馈信号。Referring to FIG. 55B , it is a schematic block diagram of the circuit of the LED lamp lighting system according to the second embodiment of the present invention. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 55A . The difference is that, in this embodiment, three connecting lines L1 , L2 and L3 are used for electrical connection between the power module 100 and the LED lamp 200 . The connection lines L1 and L2 are used for the power module 100 to transmit the driving signal to the LED lamp 200 ; the connection lines L2 and L3 are used for the LED lamp 200 to transmit the feedback signal to the power module 100 .
下面结合图57B所示的流程图对本实施例中电源模块100识别LED灯200的原理进行说明。电源模块100接收到外部电力信号后，生成驱动信号通过连接线L1和L2发送给LED灯，标签模块220上电后生成反馈信号并通过连接线L2和L3发送给电源模块100，电源模块100的负载识别电路120接收到反馈信号，并根据反馈信号调节驱动电路110的输出的驱动信号的参数，LED模块210接收调整后的驱动信号而点亮。本实施例中，驱动信号进过连接线L1和L2传送给LED灯，反馈信号经过连接线L2和L3传送给电源模块110，这两个信号可同时传输，相互之间没有干扰，属于并行传输。此种传输方式可提高信号的稳定性，提高传输效率。The principle of identifying the LED lamp 200 by the power module 100 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 57B . After the power supply module 100 receives the external power signal, it generates a driving signal and sends it to the LED lights through the connecting lines L1 and L2. After the label module 220 is powered on, it generates a feedback signal and sends it to the power supply module 100 through the connecting lines L2 and L3. The load identification circuit 120 receives the feedback signal, and adjusts the parameters of the driving signal output by the driving circuit 110 according to the feedback signal, and the LED module 210 lights up after receiving the adjusted driving signal. In this embodiment, the driving signal is transmitted to the LED lights through the connecting lines L1 and L2, and the feedback signal is transmitted to the power module 110 through the connecting lines L2 and L3. These two signals can be transmitted simultaneously without interfering with each other, which belongs to parallel transmission. . This transmission method can improve the stability of the signal and improve the transmission efficiency.
参考图55C为本发明第三实施例的LED灯照明系统的电路方块示意图。本实施例的电路 结构与图55B所示的实施例类似，与之不同的是，电源模块100和LED灯200之间电性连接使用4根连接线L1、L2、L3和L4。连接线L1和L2用以电源模块100向LED灯200传输驱动信号；连接线L3和L4用以LED灯200向电源模块100传输反馈信号。Referring to FIG. 55C, it is a schematic circuit block diagram of the LED lamp lighting system according to the third embodiment of the present invention. The circuit structure of this embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 55B , and the difference is that the electrical connection between the power module 100 and the LED lamp 200 uses four connecting lines L1, L2, L3 and L4. The connection lines L1 and L2 are used for the power module 100 to transmit the driving signal to the LED lamp 200 ; the connection lines L3 and L4 are used for the LED lamp 200 to transmit the feedback signal to the power module 100 .
本实施例中，标签模块可以使用独立的被动器件来实现，可例如是电阻、电容等器件。下面以电阻为例对本实施例的工作原理进行说明。结合图57A所示的流程图，本实施例中，标签模块包含一电阻R1，电阻R1的两端分别电性连接至连接线L3和L4。首先，电源模块100接收外部电力信号，负载识别电路通过连接线L3和L4发送检测信号给标签模块，电阻R1接收到检测信号，并根据此检测信号生成反馈信号，负载识别电路根据反馈信号调整驱动信号。本实施例中，检测信号为一恒定电流，当此电流流经电阻R1时，会在电阻R1上形成电压U1，电压U1即为反馈信号，负载识别电路120通过检测此电压即可得到LED灯的ID信息。不同的电阻R1的对应不同的电压U1，同时对应不同的驱动信号。通过在不同型号的LED灯中设置不同大小的电阻R1，即可得到与之对应的驱动信号。电阻R1与驱动信号对应关系由负载识别电路120内部器件的参数设定。In this embodiment, the tag module may be implemented using an independent passive device, which may be, for example, a resistor, a capacitor, or other devices. The working principle of this embodiment will be described below by taking a resistor as an example. With reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 57A , in this embodiment, the tag module includes a resistor R1 , and two ends of the resistor R1 are electrically connected to the connecting lines L3 and L4 respectively. First, the power module 100 receives an external power signal, the load identification circuit sends a detection signal to the label module through the connecting lines L3 and L4, the resistor R1 receives the detection signal, and generates a feedback signal according to the detection signal, and the load identification circuit adjusts the drive according to the feedback signal. Signal. In this embodiment, the detection signal is a constant current. When the current flows through the resistor R1, a voltage U1 will be formed on the resistor R1. The voltage U1 is the feedback signal. The load identification circuit 120 can obtain the LED light by detecting this voltage. ID information. Different resistors R1 correspond to different voltages U1 and at the same time correspond to different driving signals. By setting resistors R1 of different sizes in different types of LED lamps, the corresponding driving signals can be obtained. The corresponding relationship between the resistance R1 and the driving signal is set by the parameters of the internal device of the load identification circuit 120 .
参考图56为本发明第一实施例的LED灯200的电路结构示意图。本实施例中，LED灯200包含LED模块210、标签模块和4个接脚201、202、203和204。LED模块210电性连接至接脚201和202，用以接收驱动信号而点亮。标签模块220包含一电容221，电容221的两端分别电性连接至接脚203和203，用以接收检测信号。检测信号通过检测电容221的充电时间判断电容221的大小，电容221的大小对应于不同的驱动信号。通过在不同系型号的LED灯中设置不同大小的电容221，即可得到与之对应的驱动信号。电容221与驱动信号的对应关系由负载识别电路120的内部器件的参数设定。56 is a schematic diagram of the circuit structure of the LED lamp 200 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, the LED lamp 200 includes an LED module 210 , a label module and four pins 201 , 202 , 203 and 204 . The LED module 210 is electrically connected to the pins 201 and 202 for receiving the driving signal to light up. The tag module 220 includes a capacitor 221. Two ends of the capacitor 221 are electrically connected to the pins 203 and 203, respectively, for receiving the detection signal. The detection signal determines the size of the capacitor 221 by detecting the charging time of the capacitor 221, and the size of the capacitor 221 corresponds to different driving signals. By setting the capacitors 221 of different sizes in the LED lamps of different series, the corresponding driving signals can be obtained. The corresponding relationship between the capacitor 221 and the driving signal is set by the parameters of the internal device of the load identification circuit 120 .
在一些实施例中，电源模块100更包含整流电路和滤波电路用以对接收到的外部电力信号进行整流和滤波，驱动电路用以接收整流滤波后的信号并进行电源转换。本实施例中，整流电路、滤波电路和驱动电路均可以使用本行业习知的现有技术实现，本申请不以此为限。In some embodiments, the power supply module 100 further includes a rectification circuit and a filter circuit for rectifying and filtering the received external power signal, and a driving circuit for receiving the rectified and filtered signal and performing power conversion. In this embodiment, the rectifying circuit, the filtering circuit and the driving circuit can all be implemented by using the prior art known in the industry, and the present application is not limited to this.
在电源模块设计中，所述的外部驱动信号可以是低频交流信号(例如：市电所提供)或直流信号(例如：电池所提供或外置驱动电源)，且可以双端电源的驱动架构来输入LED直管灯。在双端电源的一些驱动架构实施例中，可以支持仅使用其中一端以做为单端电源的方式来接收外部驱动信号。In the design of the power supply module, the external driving signal can be a low-frequency AC signal (for example, provided by the mains) or a DC signal (for example, provided by a battery or an external driving power supply), and can be driven by a dual-terminal power supply structure. Enter LED straight tube lights. In some driving architecture embodiments of a double-ended power supply, only one end of the power supply can be used as a single-ended power supply to receive external driving signals.
在直流信号作为外部驱动信号时，LED直管灯的电源模块可以省略整流电路。When the DC signal is used as the external driving signal, the power module of the LED straight tube lamp can omit the rectifier circuit.
在电源模块的整流电路设计中，双整流电路中的第一整流单元与第二整流单元分别与配置在LED直管灯的两端灯头的接脚耦接。双整流单元适用于双端电源的驱动架构。而且配置有至少一整流单元时，可以适用于低频交流信号、高频交流信号、或直流信号的驱动环境。In the design of the rectifier circuit of the power module, the first rectifier unit and the second rectifier unit in the double rectifier circuit are respectively coupled to the pins arranged on the lamp caps at both ends of the LED straight tube lamp. The dual rectifier unit is suitable for the drive architecture of the dual-terminal power supply. Moreover, when at least one rectifier unit is configured, it can be applied to the driving environment of low-frequency AC signal, high-frequency AC signal, or DC signal.
双整流单元可以是双半波整流电路、双全波整流电路或半波整流电路及全波整流电路各 一之组合。The double rectifier unit may be a double half-wave rectifier circuit, a double full-wave rectifier circuit, or a combination of each of the half-wave rectifier circuit and the full-wave rectifier circuit.
在LED直管灯的接脚设计中，可以是双端各单接脚(共两个接脚)、双端各双接脚(共四个接脚)的架构。在双端各单接脚的架构下，可适用于单一整流电路的整流电路设计。在双端各双接脚的架构下，可适用于双整流电路的整流电路设计，且使用双端各任一接脚或任一单端的双接脚来接收外部驱动信号。In the pin design of the LED straight tube lamp, it can be a structure of single pin at both ends (two pins in total) and double pins at both ends (four pins in total). Under the structure of each single pin at both ends, it can be applied to the rectifier circuit design of a single rectifier circuit. Under the structure of double-ended and double-pins, it can be applied to the rectifier circuit design of double-rectification circuits, and use either one of the double-ended pins or any single-ended double-pin to receive external driving signals.
在电源模块的滤波电路设计中，可以具有单一电容或π型滤波电路，以滤除整流后信号中的高频成分，而提供低纹波的直流信号为滤波后信号。滤波电路也可以包含LC滤波电路，以对特定频率呈现高阻抗，以符合对特定频率的电流大小规范。再者，滤波电路更可包含耦接于接脚及整流电路之间的滤波单元，以降低LED灯的电路所造成的电磁干扰。在直流信号做为外部驱动信号时，LED直管灯的电源模块可以省略滤波电路。In the filter circuit design of the power module, a single capacitor or a π-type filter circuit can be used to filter out the high frequency components in the rectified signal, and the DC signal with low ripple is the filtered signal. The filter circuit may also include an LC filter circuit to present a high impedance for a specific frequency to meet current magnitude specifications for a specific frequency. Furthermore, the filter circuit may further include a filter unit coupled between the pins and the rectifier circuit, so as to reduce the electromagnetic interference caused by the circuit of the LED lamp. When the DC signal is used as the external driving signal, the power supply module of the LED straight tube lamp can omit the filter circuit.
另外，可以额外增加保护电路来保护LED模块。保护电路可以检测LED模块的电流或/及电压来对应启动对应的过流或过压保护。In addition, an additional protection circuit can be added to protect the LED module. The protection circuit can detect the current or/and voltage of the LED module to correspondingly activate the corresponding overcurrent or overvoltage protection.
在电源模块的辅助供电模块设计中，储能单元可以是电池或超级电容，与LED模块并联。辅助供电模块适用于包含驱动电路的电源模块设计中。In the design of the auxiliary power supply module of the power module, the energy storage unit can be a battery or a super capacitor, which is connected in parallel with the LED module. Auxiliary power supply modules are suitable for power module designs that include drive circuits.
在电源模块的LED模块设计中，LED模块可以包含彼此并联的多串LED组件(即，单一LED芯片，或多个不同颜色LED芯片组成的LED组)串，各LED组件串中的LED组件可以彼此连接而形成网状连接。In the LED module design of the power module, the LED module may include multiple strings of LED components (ie, a single LED chip, or an LED group composed of multiple LED chips of different colors) connected in parallel with each other, and the LED components in each LED component string may be connected to each other to form a mesh connection.
也就是说，可以将上述特征作任意的排列组合，并用于LED直管灯的改进。That is to say, the above features can be arranged and combined arbitrarily, and used for the improvement of LED straight tube lamps.

Claims (18)

  1. 一种误用警示模块，其特征在于，包含A misuse warning module, characterized in that it includes
    检测电路，电性连接至LED灯的供电回路，用以检测外部电力信号的类型和所述供电回路的电流水平以生成检测信号；以及a detection circuit, electrically connected to the power supply loop of the LED lamp, for detecting the type of the external power signal and the current level of the power supply loop to generate the detection signal; and
    提示电路，用以接收所述检测信号，在LED灯非正常安装时发出提示。The prompting circuit is used to receive the detection signal and issue a prompt when the LED lamp is installed abnormally.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述检测电路包含The misuse warning module of claim 1, wherein the detection circuit comprises:
    第一检测电路，电性连接至LED灯的供电回路，用以检测所述供电回路的电流水平，在所述电流大于设定阈值时输出第一检测信号，以及在所述电流小于等于设定阈值时输出第二检测信号。A first detection circuit, electrically connected to the power supply loop of the LED lamp, used to detect the current level of the power supply loop, output a first detection signal when the current is greater than a set threshold, and output a first detection signal when the current is less than or equal to a set value The second detection signal is output when the threshold value is reached.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述检测电路更包含The misuse warning module of claim 2, wherein the detection circuit further comprises:
    第二检测电路，电性连接至外部电源的输入端，用以在外部电力信号为直流信号时输出第三检测信号。The second detection circuit is electrically connected to the input end of the external power source, and is used for outputting the third detection signal when the external power signal is a DC signal.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述检测电路更包含The misuse warning module of claim 3, wherein the detection circuit further comprises:
    第三检测电路，电性连接至外部电源的输入端，用以在外部电力信号由电子镇流器提供时输出第四检测信号，其中所述第三检测电路通过检测外部电力信号的频率、相位、以及幅值中的至少一种判断外部电力信号是否由电子镇流器提供。The third detection circuit is electrically connected to the input end of the external power source, and is used for outputting a fourth detection signal when the external power signal is provided by the electronic ballast, wherein the third detection circuit detects the frequency and phase of the external power signal by detecting , and at least one of the amplitude to determine whether the external power signal is provided by the electronic ballast.
  5. 如权利要求4所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述第一检测电路包含The misuse warning module of claim 4, wherein the first detection circuit comprises:
    检测脉冲发生模块，用以生成一脉冲信号；A detection pulse generating module is used to generate a pulse signal;
    开关电路，耦接于所述供电回路，用以根据所述脉冲信号导通或截止；以及a switch circuit, coupled to the power supply loop, for turning on or off according to the pulse signal; and
    检测判定电路，用以检测所述开关电路导通时供电回路的电流水平，当所述电流大于设定阈值时，输出所述第一检测信号以及在所述电流小于等于设定阈值时输出所述第二检测信号。A detection and determination circuit is used to detect the current level of the power supply circuit when the switch circuit is turned on, when the current is greater than a set threshold, output the first detection signal and output the first detection signal when the current is less than or equal to the set threshold the second detection signal.
  6. 如权利要求5所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述开关电路用以根据所述第一检测信号和/或第三检测信号导通。The misuse warning module according to claim 5, wherein the switch circuit is configured to be turned on according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal.
  7. 如权利要求5所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述提示电路用以根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号指示所述开关电路间歇导通，以令LED灯闪烁。The misuse warning module according to claim 5, wherein the prompt circuit is used to instruct the switch circuit to be intermittently turned on according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal, so as to make the LED light flash. .
  8. 如权利要求5所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述开关电路用以根据所述第二检测电路和/或第四检测信号断开，所述提示电路用以根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号发出提示。The misuse warning module according to claim 5, wherein the switch circuit is configured to be disconnected according to the second detection circuit and/or the fourth detection signal, and the prompt circuit is configured to be disconnected according to the second detection circuit The detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal issue a prompt.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的LED灯，其特征在于，所述提示电路包含以下至少一种：蜂鸣器，提 示灯，所述蜂鸣器或提示灯用以根据所述第二检测信号发出提示。The LED lamp of claim 8, wherein the prompt circuit comprises at least one of the following: a buzzer, a prompt light, and the buzzer or the prompt light is used to issue a prompt according to the second detection signal .
  10. 如权利要求5所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述误用警示模块更包含限流电路，串联于所述供电回路，用以根据所述第一检测信号和/或第三检测信号导通所述供电回路，以及根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号间歇导通所述供电回路以令LED灯闪烁。The misuse warning module as claimed in claim 5, wherein the misuse warning module further comprises a current limiting circuit, connected in series with the power supply circuit, for detecting according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal. The signal turns on the power supply loop, and intermittently turns on the power supply loop according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal to make the LED light flash.
  11. 如权利要求5所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述误用警示模块更包含限流电路，串联于所述供电回路，用以根据所述第一检测信号和/或第三检测信号导通所述供电回路，以及根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号断开所述供电回路，所述提示电路用以根据所述第二检测信号和/或第四检测信号发出提示。The misuse warning module as claimed in claim 5, wherein the misuse warning module further comprises a current limiting circuit, connected in series with the power supply circuit, for detecting according to the first detection signal and/or the third detection signal. The signal turns on the power supply circuit, and disconnects the power supply circuit according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal, and the prompt circuit is used for according to the second detection signal and/or the fourth detection signal Issue a prompt.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的误用警示模块，其特征在于，所述提示电路包含以下至少一种：蜂鸣器，提示灯，所述蜂鸣器或提示灯用以根据所述第二检测信号发出提示。The misuse warning module according to claim 11, wherein the prompt circuit comprises at least one of the following: a buzzer, a prompt light, and the buzzer or the prompt light is used according to the second detection signal Issue a prompt.
  13. 一种LED灯，其特征在于，包含An LED lamp, characterized in that it includes
    至少两个接脚，第一接脚和第二接脚，用以接收外部驱动信号；at least two pins, a first pin and a second pin, for receiving external driving signals;
    电源模块，电性连接至所述第一接脚和所述第二接脚，用以对所述外部驱动信号进行电源转换，以生成驱动信号；a power module, electrically connected to the first pin and the second pin, for performing power conversion on the external driving signal to generate a driving signal;
    LED模块，用以接收所述驱动信号而点亮；The LED module is used for receiving the driving signal to light up;
    安装检测模块，用以检测供电回路中的电流，并根据所述供电回路的电流水平决定是否限制所述供电回路的电流；以及A detection module is installed to detect the current in the power supply loop, and decide whether to limit the current of the power supply loop according to the current level of the power supply loop; and
    阻抗调整模块，电性连接至所述第一接脚和所述第二接脚，用以调节供电回路的阻抗，以影响所述安装检测模块的判断，其中，当在供电回路中串联第一电阻时，所述安装检测模块限制供电回路的电流，所述LED灯无法正常点亮；当至少两个或多个所述LED灯并联时，所述安装检测模块不限制供电回路的电流，多个所述LED灯正常点亮。The impedance adjustment module is electrically connected to the first pin and the second pin, and is used to adjust the impedance of the power supply loop to affect the judgment of the installation detection module, wherein when the first pin is connected in series in the power supply loop When the resistance is used, the installation detection module limits the current of the power supply circuit, and the LED lights cannot be lit normally; when at least two or more of the LED lights are connected in parallel, the installation detection module does not limit the current of the power supply circuit, and more Each of the LED lights lights up normally.
    其中，所述供电回路为外部电力信号向LED灯供电的路径，所述第一电阻与所述多个灯管分别串联。Wherein, the power supply circuit is a path through which an external power signal supplies power to the LED lamp, and the first resistor is connected in series with the plurality of lamp tubes, respectively.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的LED灯，其特征在于，所述第一电阻的阻值为100-500欧姆。The LED lamp of claim 13, wherein the resistance value of the first resistor is 100-500 ohms.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的LED灯照明系统，其特征在于，所述阻抗调整模块包含第一电容，所述第一电容的第一引脚电性连接至所述第一接脚，其第二引脚电性连接至所述第二接脚。The LED lamp lighting system according to claim 13, wherein the impedance adjustment module comprises a first capacitor, a first pin of the first capacitor is electrically connected to the first pin, and a second pin of the first capacitor is electrically connected to the first pin. The pin is electrically connected to the second pin.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的LED灯照明系统，其特征在于，所述第一电容的容值为30-50nF。The LED lamp lighting system according to claim 15, wherein the capacitance value of the first capacitor is 30-50nF.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的LED灯照明系统，其特征在于，所述第一电容的容值为47nF。The LED lamp lighting system according to claim 16, wherein the capacitance value of the first capacitor is 47nF.
  18. 根据权利要求14所述的LED灯照明系统电源装置，其特征在于，所述安装检测模块包含：The LED lamp lighting system power supply device according to claim 14, wherein the installation detection module comprises:
    检测脉冲发生模块，用以生成一脉冲信号；A detection pulse generating module is used to generate a pulse signal;
    开关电路，耦接于所述供电回路，用以根据所述脉冲信号导通或截止；以及a switch circuit, coupled to the power supply loop, for turning on or off according to the pulse signal; and
    检测判定电路，用以检测所述开关电路导通时供电回路的电流水平，当所述电流大于设定阈值时，输出第一检测信号，其中，所述开关电路根据所述第一检测信号导通。A detection and determination circuit is used to detect the current level of the power supply circuit when the switch circuit is turned on, and when the current is greater than a set threshold, a first detection signal is output, wherein the switch circuit conducts a signal according to the first detection signal Pass.
PCT/CN2022/071054 2015-03-10 2022-01-10 Led lamp and misuse warning module WO2022148463A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/219,737 US20240093841A1 (en) 2015-03-10 2023-07-10 LED lamp and misuse warning module thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110032557 2021-01-11
CN202110032557.3 2021-01-11
CN202110048805.3 2021-01-14
CN202110049979 2021-01-14
CN202110048805 2021-01-14
CN202110049979.1 2021-01-14
CN202110708563.6 2021-06-25
CN202110708563 2021-06-25

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/075,549 Continuation-In-Part US11754232B2 (en) 2015-03-10 2022-12-06 LED lamp and power source module thereof related applications

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/219,737 Continuation-In-Part US20240093841A1 (en) 2015-03-10 2023-07-10 LED lamp and misuse warning module thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022148463A1 true WO2022148463A1 (en) 2022-07-14

Family

ID=82357959

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/071054 WO2022148463A1 (en) 2015-03-10 2022-01-10 Led lamp and misuse warning module

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN218570514U (en)
WO (1) WO2022148463A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115840159A (en) * 2022-09-19 2023-03-24 大庆恒驰电气有限公司 Intelligent robot

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1942707A1 (en) * 2007-01-04 2008-07-09 Applied Materials, Inc. Lamp failure detector
CN101272652A (en) * 2007-03-19 2008-09-24 上海市闵行中学 Road lamp inspection device and method
CN204028258U (en) * 2014-08-28 2014-12-17 北京铨富光电科技有限公司 A kind of LED light source load detecting circuit of electric ballast
CN108802603A (en) * 2018-07-01 2018-11-13 刘贻有 With the tester of multigroup LED indication electric ballast test electric current
CN211955768U (en) * 2018-08-30 2020-11-17 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 Installation detection device and LED straight lamp
CN212163776U (en) * 2018-04-12 2020-12-15 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 Detection module, power module and LED straight lamp

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1942707A1 (en) * 2007-01-04 2008-07-09 Applied Materials, Inc. Lamp failure detector
CN101272652A (en) * 2007-03-19 2008-09-24 上海市闵行中学 Road lamp inspection device and method
CN204028258U (en) * 2014-08-28 2014-12-17 北京铨富光电科技有限公司 A kind of LED light source load detecting circuit of electric ballast
CN212163776U (en) * 2018-04-12 2020-12-15 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 Detection module, power module and LED straight lamp
CN108802603A (en) * 2018-07-01 2018-11-13 刘贻有 With the tester of multigroup LED indication electric ballast test electric current
CN211955768U (en) * 2018-08-30 2020-11-17 嘉兴山蒲照明电器有限公司 Installation detection device and LED straight lamp

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115840159A (en) * 2022-09-19 2023-03-24 大庆恒驰电气有限公司 Intelligent robot

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN218570514U (en) 2023-03-03
CN220711687U (en) 2024-04-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN111801989B (en) LED straight tube lamp and LED lighting system
US10605415B2 (en) LED tube lamp
US10571081B2 (en) LED tube lamp and driving method therefor
CN112628620B (en) Installation detection device, power module device and LED lamp applying same
JP4370901B2 (en) LED lighting device
US11543086B2 (en) LED tube lamp
WO2021043269A1 (en) Surge protection circuit, power supply device using same, and led illumination device
CN212163776U (en) Detection module, power module and LED straight lamp
CN210444530U (en) Installation detection module, power module and LED straight lamp applying modules
JP2009134945A (en) Led lighting device, and led illumination fixture
CN211955768U (en) Installation detection device and LED straight lamp
JP5140203B2 (en) LED lighting device
WO2020088521A1 (en) Led straight lamp and power supply module thereof
WO2022148463A1 (en) Led lamp and misuse warning module
CN211959612U (en) LED straight lamp, power module thereof and LED lighting system
CN209856808U (en) LED straight lamp
CN210298147U (en) LED straight lamp and lamp holder, lamp, power supply circuit and detection circuit thereof
CN211481558U (en) LED straight lamp, power module, filter circuit of power module and installation detection module
CN210112321U (en) LED straight lamp lighting system
WO2022161187A1 (en) Led lamp
US20240093841A1 (en) LED lamp and misuse warning module thereof
JP5193379B2 (en) LED lighting device and LED lighting apparatus
US20240019088A1 (en) Led lamp and power source module thereof
JP5193378B2 (en) LED lighting device and LED lighting apparatus
JP5140202B2 (en) LED lighting device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22736624

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22736624

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1